1992-1999 3000GT Service Volume 1

d
BackupServiceManual General
3OOOGl-
GROUP INDEX
.........................
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1992-l996 Volume 1
FOREWORD
This Service Manual has been prepared with the latest service information available at the time of publication. It is subdivided into various group categories and each section contains diagnosis, disassembly, repair, and installation procedures along with complete specifications and tightening references. Use of this manual will aid in properly performing any servicing necessary to maintain or restore the high levels of performance and reliability designed into these outstanding vehicles.
Intake and Exhaust
............ ...
Engine and Emission Control
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transaxle .............. ...........
Automatic Transaxle
Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel and Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Plant Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Suspension .............. ................ ................
LJ
A . I 4iB
WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH
Nat,Onal inmtute for
Service Brakes Parking Brakes
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior and Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . Heater, Air Conditioning and Ventilation .. :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alphabetical Index . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOTE: Electrial system information is contained in Volume 2 Electrical of this paired Service Manual. For overhaul procedures of engines or transmissions, refer to the separately issued Engine Service Manual or Manual/Automatic Transmission Service Manual.
AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE
MITSUBISHI
MOTOR SALES OF AMERICA Inc
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation reserves the right to make changes in design or to make additions to or improvements in its products without imposing any obligations upon itself to install them on its products previously manufactured.
0 1995 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation
Reprintdin USA
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES

WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injury or death to service personnel (from inadvertent firing of the air bag) or to the driver (from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) If it is possible that the SRS components are subjected to heat over 93C (200F) in baking or in drying after painting, remove the SRS components (air bag module, SRS diagnosis unit, front impact sensors) beforehand. (3) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component mustbe performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (4) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE Section titles with asterisks (*) in the table of contents in each group indicate operations requiring warnings.
,I
TSB Revision
GENERAL
CONTENTS
GENERAL DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS . . . 26 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Manual Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of the Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . Maintenance, Repair and Servicing Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tool Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 4 6 2 2 2 2 Fuel Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System (Tank, Pipe Line, Connections and Fuel Tank Filler Tube Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transmission Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Axle Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 45 46 48 52 46 53 46 51
MASTER TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 PRECAUTIONS BEFORE SERVICE . . . . . . . . 18 RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICANT CAPACITIES TABLE . . . . . . . . . . 38 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE . . . . . .41 SPECIAL HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS FOR AWD MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 TIGHTENING TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a .. 28 TOWING AND HOISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chassis Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Model Stamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Identification Code Chart Plate . . . . . . . . Vehicle Identification Number List . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Identification Number Location . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Information Code Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Safety Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 14 15 11 12 11 13 14
HOW TO USE TROUBLESHOOTING/ INSPECTION SERVICE POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . 36 MAIN SEALANT AND ADHESIVE TABLE .. .61 MAINTENANCE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Air Cleaner Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ball Joint and Steering Linkage Seals . . . . . . . . Brake Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disc Brake Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Belt (For Generator, Water Pump, Power Steering Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Shaft Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporative Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . / 45 49 52 52 52 47 52 51 47 48 46 60
00-2
GENERAL - How to Use This Manual
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

MAINTENANCE, REPAIR AND SERVICING EXPLANATIONS
This manual provides explanations, etc. concerning procedures for the inspection, maintenance, repair and servicing of the subject model. Unless otherwise specified, each service procedure covers all models. Procedures covering specific models are identified by the model codes, or similar designation (engine type, transaxle type, etc.). A description of these designations is covered in this manual under VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION. SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES Service Adjustment Procedures are procedures for performing inspections and adjustments of particularly important locations with regard to the construction and for maintenance and servicing, but other inspections (for looseness, play, cracking, damage, etc.) must also be performed. SERVICE PROCEDURES The service steps are arranged in numerical order and attention must be paid in performing vehicle service are described in detail in SERVICE POINTS. or the value to which the part or assembly is corrected and adjusted. It is given by tolerance. LIMIT Shows the standard for judging the quality of a part or assembly on inspection and means the maximum or minimum value within which the part or assembly must be kept functionally or in strength. It is a value established outside the range of standard value. REFERENCE VALUE Indicates the adjustment value prior to starting the work (presented in order to facilitate assembly and adjustment procedures, and so they can be completed in a shorter time). CAUTION Indicates the presentation of information particularly vital to the worker during the performance of maintenance and servicing procedures in order to avoid the possibility of injury to the worker; or damage to component parts, or a reduction of component or vehicle function or performance, etc. INDICATION OF TIGHTENING TORQUE The tightening torque shown in this manual is a basic value with a tolerance of +lO% except the following cases when the upper and lower limits of tightening torque are given. (1) The tolerance for the basic value is within +lO%. (2) Special bolts or the like are in use. (3) Special tightening methods are used.
LJ ~
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshootings are classified into master troubleshooting and group troubleshooting and located as follows: The master troubleshooting is prepared when the trouble symptom relates to two or more groups and given in MASTER TROUBLESHOOTING. The group troubleshooting guide is prepared for SPECIAL TOOL NOTE causes of problems related to that individual group only; a troubleshooting guide is prepared for each Only MMC special tool part numbers are called appropriate group. out in the repair sections of this manual. Please refer to the special tool cross reference chart, which DEFINITION OF TERMS is located in the service manual at the beginning of each group, for a cross reference from the MMC STANDARD VALUE special tool number to the special tool number that Indicates the value used as the standard for judging is available in your market. the quality of a part or assembly on inspection MODEL INDICATIONS The following abbreviations are used in this manual for classification of model types. Indicates the manual transaxle, or models equipped with the manual transaxle. M/TI Indicates the automatic transaxle, or models equipped with the automatic transaxle. A/T: Indicates the multiport fuel injection, or engines equipped with the multiport fuel injection. MFI: Turbo: Indicates an engine with turbocharger, or a model equipped with such an engine. Non-Turbo: Indicates an engine without turbocharger, or a model equipped with such an engine. FWD: Indicates the front wheel drive vehicles. AWD: Indicates the all wheel drive vehicles. ABS: Indicates the anti-lock braking system or models equipped with the anti-lock braking system. ECS: Indicates the electronic control suspension or models equipped with the electronic control suspension. 4WS: Indicates the 4-wheel steering system or models equipped with the 4-wheel steering system. ( TSB Revision
\ !ij ~
vi;
GENERAL - How to Use This Manual EXPLANATION OF CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS I b

The symbols used in circuit diagrams are used as described below.
00-3
NOTE For detailed information concerning the reading of circuit diagrams, refer to Volume 2 - Circuit Diagrams. The input/output (direction of current flow) relative to the electronic control unit is indicated by symbols. output input \ Input/output
Indicates a connector.
The broken( ----)line inc cates the same connector.
The connector symbol indicates the device side connector (for an intermediate connector, the male side connector) as seen from the terminal front (the connecI tors connection face).
The direction of current flow is indicated by the In this instance, the current flow is in both directions, up or down.
i. Ita.
Indicates the branch point of a harness of a different line diameter or line color. I
\ c
TSB Revision
GENERAL - How to Use This Manual EXPLANATION OF MANUAL CONTENTS

Indicates procedures to be performed before the work in that section is started, and procedures to be performed after the work in that section is finished. I
Component Diagram A diagram of the component parts is provided near the front of each section in order to give the reader a better understanding of the installed condition of component parts.
Indicates (by symbols) where lubrication is necessary.
Maintenance and Servicing Procedures The numbers provided within the diagram indicate the sequence for maintenance and servicing procedures. l Removal steps: The part designation number corresponds to the number in the illustration to indicate removal steps. l Disassembly steps: The part designation number corresponds to the number in the illustration to indicate disassembly steps.
l
Installation steps: Specified in case installation is impossible in reverse order of removal steps. Omitted if installation is possible in reverse order of removal steps. Reassembly steps: Specified in case reassembly is impossible in reverse order of disassembly steps. Omitted if reassembly is possible in reverse order of disassembly steps.
Classifications of Major Maintenance I Service Points When there are major points relative to maintenance and servicing procedures (such as essential maintenance and service points, maintenance and service standard values, information regarding the use of special tools, etc.), these are arranged together as major maintenance and service points and explained in detail. +A,: .A+: Indicates that there are essential points for removal or disassembly. Indicates that there are essential points for installation 8r reassembly.
. . _. __
Symbols for Lubrication, Sealants and Adhesives Information concerning the locations for lubrication and a: Grease (multipurpose grease unless there is a for application of sealants and adhesives is provided, by brand or type specified) using symbols, in the diagram of component parts or on the page following the component parts page, and ex~_ plained. .; 4 : Sealant or adhesive : * : : Brake fluid or automatic transmission fluid Engine oil, gear oil or air conditioning compressor oil Adhesive tape or butyl rubber tape
TSB Revision
STEERING - Power Steering Gear Box
37A-23 ll-
POWER STEERtNG GEAR BOX
Denotes
* ZL \. r, c ?t?/ /
tightening
Repair kit or set parts are shown. ~OJyL,A~ frequently used parts
~Rnnovalstspr l.&iiassemblyandgfWboXcwnsctingbog 2. s&mid v&e OLxIlieEmr <VeNc!es wiU~ EPS>
EenthenutbutdonatremoveK ,<l
FOG lJGl+l RELAY coNnNulTY CHECX
0-0 indicates that there is continuity between the terminals. 0-0 indicates terminals to which battery voltage is applied.
The title of the page (following the page on which the diagram of component parts is presented) indicating the locations of l$riition and sealing proce-
TSB Revision
-------_-
_j--
00-6
EXPLANATION OF THE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
diagram for checking (including the interface of the air conditioning control unit).
Indicates the connector number. - Numbers are used in the operation descriptions only as necessary, and these numbers correspond to the numbers used in harness
ti?emiSIM is mYwed f o r & myY in csder w eclmen ms amian ti?Mnsorplt10resi?asrre. ?#-wpphl @.$V) at the airsonddiormr ccmol unit is applied 10 each sewor. and the ntis (16). IX% 1171 and f51 am diitded by the reys- values of each sensor. and
11. The passerqet CMPanmenr~~ture smsw ityin SQnal rS held to 25-C v7-3. ..-. ,_. The olmfde.aw Ulnscu Input JiaMl is held to 15-c f5PFl. N O . 13. Tb ahthermo~ - imut WMI is hdd to SC l3SW.
a.. 5 IV
s I OUtSdbWsenrorpwrsusDfv RdrigQsm-rapanue SmsoOr . ,4.< k passewm --w* NRI saaar pa *- 25-c 177-n. i 4kn ^ At~wnes 1 SaM Pm temosmun 2% (77-I y$se~c++%i~nonnaOFF:BOD SmawPmtarmaM * 25% f77-F) 4ko
TzmiW w&age m-l.sv f 2.45-2 55v 0 1511 Iv-tsv

-1
Indicates the check to be made. t I8
15 16
7 p-t_
crt 6% _ _. smxmtampcrmrre2 5~7~ ~~ --. I whmarc.mdlt?amrroF :F 8161.
~a*C,
Indicates the termiIndicates the conditions underwhich the check should be
Indicates the specification to be used for judgement of the check results. If there is no particular mention of conditionsin theConditionscolumn, thecolumn Shows the specification under normal conditions.
1 TSB Revision
GENERAL - How to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Point
00-7
HOW TO USE TROUBLESHOOTING/INSPECTION SERVICE POINT

c
Troubleshooting of electronic control systems for which the scan tool can be used follows the basic outline described below. Furthermore, even in systems for which the scan tool cannot be used, part of these systems still follow this outline.
TROUBLESHOOTING CONTENTS
1. 2. STANDARD FLOW OF DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING The main procedures for diagnostic troubleshooting are shown. SYSTEM OPERATION AND SYMPTOM VERtFICATION TESTS If verification of the trouble symptoms is difficult, procedures for checking operation and verifying trouble symptoms are shown. DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION The following diagnostic functions are shown. 0 Method of reading diagnostic trouble codes 0 Method of erasing diagnostic trouble codes 0 Input inspection service points INSPECTION CHART FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES Indicates the inspection procedures corresponding to each diagnostic trouble code. (Refer to P.OO-9 - how to use the inspection procedures.) INSPECTION CHART FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS If there are trouble symptoms, even though the results of inspection using the scan tool show that all diagnostic trouble codes are normal, inspection procedures for each trouble symptom will be found by means of this chart. INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSTIC SYMPTOM Indicates the inspection procedures corresponding to each trouble symptoms classified in the Inspection Chart for Trouble Symptoms. (Refer to P.OO-9 - how to use the inspection procedures.) SERVICE DATA REFERENCE TABLE Inspection items and normal judgement values have been provided in this chart as reference information. . : . .L .., CHECK AT ECU TERMINALS , Y. 0. Terminal numbers for the ECU connectors, inspectl~n itemsandstandard values have been provided i i, ?i.> .$ in this chart as reference information. Terminal Voltage Checks 1. Connect a needle-nosed wire probe or paper clip to a voltmeter probe. 2. Insert the needle-nosed wire probe into each of the ECU connector terminals from the wire side, and measure the voltage while referring to the check chart. NOTE 1. Measure voltage with the ECU connectors connected. 2. You may find it convenient to pull out the ECU to make it easier to reach the connector terminals. 3. Checks dont have to be carried out in the order given in the chart. Caution Short-circuiting the positive (+) probe between a connector terminal and ground could damage the vehicle wiring, the sensor, the ECU, or all three. Use care to prevent this! 3. If voltage readings differ from Normal Condition values, check related sensors, actuators, and wiring, then replace or repair. 4. After repair or replacement, recheck with the voltmeter to confirm that the repair has corrected the problem. TSB Revision
3.
4. 5.
6.
00-8
GENERAL - How to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Point
Terminal Resistance and Continuity Checks 1. Turn off the ignition switch. 2. Disconnect the ECU connector. 3. Measure the resistance and check for continuity between the terminals of the ECU harness-side connector while referring to the check chart. NOTE Checks dont have to be carried out in the order given in the chart. Caution If resistance and continuity checks are performed on the wrong terminals, damage to the vehicle wiring, sensors, ECU, and/or ohmmeter may occur. Use care to prevent this! 4. If the ohmmeter shows any deviation from the Normal Condition value, check the corresponding sensor, actuator and related electrical wiring, then repair or replace. 5. After repair or replacement, recheck with the ohmmeter to confirm that the repair has corrected the problem. 10. INSPECTION PROCEDURES USING AN OSCILLOSCOPE When there are inspection procedures using an oscilloscope, these are listed here.
TSB Revision
GENERAL - How to Use Troubleshooting/inspection HOW TO USE THE INSPECTION PROCEDURES

\ c
Service Point
00-9
The causes of a high frequency of problems occurring in electronic circuitry are generally the connectors, components, the ECU and the harnesses between connectors, in that order. These inspection procedures follow this order, and they first try to discover a problem with a connector or a defective component.
a.
?d is
In the above cases, the ECS switch circuit is defective orthe indicator
circuit is defective.
Indicates inspection carried out using the scan tool. Indicates the operation and inspection procedures. Indicates the OK judgement conditions. I I /I 2. Thick box lines: Detailed inspection procedures (methods) such as component inspection and circuit inspection are listed on a separate page, and are given here for reference.
1.
Indicates voltage and resistance to be measured at a particular con- 1 nectar. (Refer to Connector Measurement Service Points.) The connector position can be located in the wiring diagram in Volume -2 manual by means of this symbol. Indicates ooeration and inspection procedures, inspection terminals
0
l
yisynecttne connector, ana measure at me namess 2 suxz. ~oftagq between terminal 6 - earth and terminal 8 -
Indicates the OK judgement conditions.
ground OI<: Approx. 5V
UK
Check trouble symptom. _ ) Replace the ECS-ECU.
Inspect the contact condition at each connector terminal. (Refer to Connector Inspection Service Points.) The connector position can be located in the wiring diagram in Vol\ ume-2 manual by means of this symbol. Caution \ After carrying out connector inspection, always be sure to reconnect the connector as it was before. I 5. Confirm that there are trouble symptoms. If trouble symptoms have disappeared, the connector may have been inserted incorrectly and the trouble symptom may have disappeared during inspection. If it seemsthat trouble symptoms still remain, proceed to the next stage of instructions. 1 6. If trouble symptoms still remain up to this stage, there is a possibility that there is an open or short circuit in the harness between the connectors, so check the harness. Alternatively, the cause may be a defective ECU, so try replacing the ECU and check if the trouble symptom disappears.
4.
HARNESS INSPECTION Check for an open or short circuit in the harness between the terminals which were defective according to the connector measurements. Carry out this inspection while referring to Volume 2 Electrical manual. Here, Check harness between power supply and terminal xx also includes checking for blown fuses. For inspection service points when there is a blown fuse, refer to Inspection Service Points for a Blown Fuse.
\ fL
MEASURES TO TAKE AFTER REeLACING THE ECU If the trouble symptoms have not disappeared even after replacing the ECU, repeat the inspection procedure from the beginning.
1 TSB Revision
00-10
GENERAL - How to Use Troubleshooting/inspection
Service Point
HOW TO COPE WITH INTERMITTENT MALFUNCTIONS

Most intermittent malfunctions occur under certain conditions. If those conditions can be identified, the cause will be easier to find. TO COPE WITH INTERMIITENT MALFUNCTION; 1. Ask the customer about the malfunction Ask what it feels like, what it sounds like, etc. Then ask about driving conditions, weather, frequency of occurrence, and so on. 2. Determine the conditions from the customers responses Typically, almost all intermittent malfunctions occur from conditions like vibration, temperature and/or moisture change, poor connections. From the customers replies, it should be reasoned which condition is influenced.
duplicate the customers complaint. Determine the most likely circuit(s) and perform the simulation tests on the connectors and parts of that circuit(s). Be sure to use the inspection procedures provided for diagnostic trouble codes and trouble symptoms. For temperature and/or moisture conditions related intermittent malfunctions, using common sense, try to change the conditions of the suspected circuit components, then use the simulation tests below. 4. Verify the intermittent malfunction is eliminated Repair the malfunctioning part and try to duplicate the condition(s) again to verify the intermittent malfunction has been eliminated.
3. Use simulation test In the cases of vibration or poor connections, use the simulation tests below to attempt to
SIMULATION TESTS For these simulation tests, shake, then gently bend, pull, and twist the wiring of each of these examples to duplicate the intermittent malfunction. l Shake the connector up-and-down, and right-and-left. l Shake the wiring harness up-and-down, and right-and-left. l Vibrate the part or sensor. NOTE In case of difficulty in finding the cause of the intermittent malfunction, the data recorder function in the scan tool (MUT-II) is effective.
00003705
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Vehicle Identification
00-l 1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LOCATION
The vehicle identification number (V.I.N.) is located on a plate attached to the left top side of the instrument panel.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION CODE CHART PLATE

All vehicle identification numbers contain 17 digits. The vehicle number is a code which tells country, make, vehicle type, etc. Contents Item J : Japan 1 Country -
<Up to 1993 models>
vo.
2 3 4
Make Vehicle
type
A: Mitsubishi 3: Passenger Car
Others
1234567891011 12 0020009 <From 1994 modek5 Line
X: (1992 models) ~ Driver Air Bag, Passenger B: (1993 models) Manual Seat Belt A: (From 1994 Driver and Passenger Air models) 1 Bag 1 D: 3000GTFWD 11992 models
1234567891011 12
Price class
0020009 t 00004107
7 8
Body Engine
Convertible models W: 3000GT AWD Convertible 4: High 5: Sports (1994 models only), Premium 6: Premium (1994 models only), Special 7: Ultimate 8: Sports (1995 and 1996 models) 4: 3-door Hatchback 5: 2-door Convertible up to 1993 B: 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) models <DOHC-MFI> C: 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) <DOHC-MFI-Turbo> From 1994 J: 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) models <DOHC-MFI> K: 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) <DOHC-MFI-Turbo>
9 10
Check digits* N: 1992 Year Model year P: 1993 Year
11 12
Plant Serial number
Y: Nagoya-l Plant 000001 to 999999
NOTE
*: Check digit means a single number or letter X used to verify the accuracy of transcription of vehicle identification number.
1 TSB Revision
00-12
cl 992 MODELS> cl 993 MODELS> VEHICLES FOR FEDERAL
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LIST
1 V.I.N. (except sequence number) 1 Brand JA3BM54JClPY (1993 model) JA3XD54BClNY (1992 model)
1Engine displacement
1 Models code
Mitsubishi 3000GT 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZltAMNXML2M Zll AMRXML2M <FWD> [DOHC-MFI1
JA3BN74KOPY (1993 model) JA3XE74CONY (1992 model)
Mitsubishi 3000GT 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) Z15AMNGFL2M <AWD> ZlGAMNGFL2M [DOHC-MFI-Turbo]
VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA

V.I.N. (except sequence number) JA3BM54JlIlPY (1993 model) JA3XD54BONY (1992 model) JA3BM64JClPY (1993 model) JA3XD64BElNY (1992 model) JA3BN74KOPY* (1993 model) JA3XE74CClNY (1992 model) Brand Engine displacement Models code
Mitsubishi 3000GT 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZllAMNXML7M ZllAMRXML7M cFWD> [DOHC-MFI] ZllAMNPML7M Zl lAMRPML7M Mitsubishi 3000GT 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) Z15AMNGFL7M <AWD> [DOHC-MFI-Turbo] ZlGAMNGFL7M
NOTE AWD marked with can also be sold in Federal States.

l
cl 994 MODELS> VEHICLES FOR FEDERAL

1 V.I.N. (except sequence number) 1 Brand 1::~~~~~~~:: 1 y;;t&shi 3 0 0 0 G T Engine displacement Models code I
3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZllAMNXML2M 1 ZllAMRXML2M [DOHC-MFI] ZllAMNPML2M Zl lAMRPML2M
JA3AN74KClRY
Mitsubishi ,300OGT <AWD> I
3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZlGAMJGFL2M [DOHC-MFI-Turbo]

V.I.N. (except sequence number) / Brand .I lVl;vl;shi 3 ~~~~~~~~~ 0 0 0 G T Engine displacement 1 Models code I
3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZltAMNXML7M j ZllAMRXML7M [DOHC-MFI] ZliAMNPML7M ZllAMRPML-IM
JA3AN74KORY
Mitsubishi 3000GT <AWD>
3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZlGAMJGFL7M [DOHC-MFI-Turbo]
) TSB Revision

cl 995 MODELS> cl996 MODELS> VEHICLES FOR FEDERAL
V.I.N. (except sequence number) JA3AM54JOSY JA3AM84JCISY JA3AN74KOSY AWD Brand Mitsubishi 3000GT FWD Engine displacement Models code
00-l
3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) f~:~~~~~~~~ [DOHC-MFI] ZllAMNXML2M Zl lAMRXML2M 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZlGAMJGFL2M [DOHC-MFI-Turbo]

I
V.I.N. (except sequence number) JA3AM54JOSY JA3AM84JOSY JA3AV65JOSY JA3AN74KOSY JA3AW75KOSY

c
Brand Mitsubishi 3000GT <FWD>
T
i
1 Engine displacement Hatchback 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) [DOHC-MFI]
T Models code
ZllAMNPML7M ZllAMRPML7M
Convertible Mitsubishi 3000GT <AWD> Convertible 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cuin.) [DOHC-MFI-Turbo]
VEHICLE INFORMATION CODE PLATE

Vehicle information code plate is riveted onto the bulkhead in the engine compartment. The place shows model code, engine model, transaxle model, and body color. code.
1 No. 1 Items 1 Contents I
/ i 1 MODEL
2 3 4 ENGINE EXT TRANSAXLE COLOR, INT OPT
/ ;;;EM
6672 CAGA F5M33 3307 I R25 87V 03V
;;;;;;;;en0d3eis
Engine model Exterior code F5M33: Transaxle model 3307: Rear differential reduction R25: Body color code 87V: Interior code 03V: Equipment code
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Vehicle Identification CHASSIS NUMBER

STAMPING LOCATION The chassis number is stamped on the top center of the firewall located in the engine compartment. CHASSIS NUMBER CODE CHART
Chassis number code Zl q A RYOOOOOl Contents Zl CIA: Indicates 3000GT-series. RYOOOOOl : Refer to 10th thru 17th digits of V.I.N. plate.
, a
VEHICLE SAFETY CERTIFICATION LABEL

1. The vehicle safety certification label is attached to the
2.
face of left door pillar. This label indicates the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (G.V.W.R.), and Gross Axle Weight Rating (G.A.W.R.), front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (V.I.N.).
ENGINE MODEL STAMPING

1. The engine model number is stamped at the front side on the top edge of the cylinder block as shown in the following:
Engine model 6672 Engine displacement 3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.)
2. The engine serial number is stamped near the engine model number.
1 Enaine serial number 1 AA0201 to YY9990 I
TSB Revision

Theft protection label
00-15
THEFT PROTECTION
In order to protect against theft, a Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is stamped in, or attached as a label to, the following major parts of the engine and transaxle, as well as main outer panels: Engine cylinder block, Transaxle housing, Fender, Door, Quarter panel, Hood, Liftgate, Bumpers In addition, a theft-protection label is attached to replacement parts for the body outer panel main components, and the same data are stamped into replacement parts for the engine and the transaxle. Cautions regarding panel repairs: 1. When repainting original parts, do so after first masking the theft-protection label, and, after painting, be sure to peel off the masking tape. 2. The theft-protection label for replacement parts is covered by masking tape, so such parts can be painted as is. The masking tape should be removed after painting is finished. 3. The theft-protection label should not be removed from original parts or replacement parts.
For original parts
00*61s
For replacement parts
OOK621 00002280
1 TSB Revision
00-16
LOCATIONS
Target area (A: for original equipment parts, B: for replacement parts) Engine Automatic transaxle
ZOOFOOS3
ZOOFOO16
Manual transaxle cF5M33>
Manual transaxle cW!SMGl> (Up to 1993 models) cWGMGl> (From 1994 models)
Fender
Door
231FOO70
Z31FWJ71
the illustration indicates left hand side, outer. Right hand side is symmetrically opposite.
The illustration indicates right hand side, outer. Left hand side is symmetrically opposite.
TSB Revision

Target area (A: for original equipment parts, B: for replacement parts) Quarter panel
The replacement part label is attached to the inner side of the part
00-17
Hood
shown in the illustration.
The illustration indicates left hand side, outer. Right hand side is symmetrically opposite. Liftgate Front bumper
231FOO74
3ear bumper
1 TSB Revision
00-l 8
GENERAL - Precautions before Service
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE SERVICE

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
1. Items to follow when servicing SRS (1) Be sure to be read GROUP 528 - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). For safe operations, please follow the directions and heed all warnings. (2) Always use the designated special tools and test equipment. (3) Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (4) Never attempt to disassemble or repair the SRS components (front impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, air bag module and clock spring). If faulty, replace it. (5) Warning labels must be heeded when servicing or handling SRS components. Warning labels are located in the following locations. . Hood 0. Sun visor l Glove box l SRS diagnosis unit l Steering wheel l Air bag module l Clock spring l Steering gear and linkage clamp (6) Store components removed from the SRS in a clean and dry place. The air bag module should be stored on a flat surface and placed so that the pad surface is facing upward. Do not place anything on top of it. (7) Be sure to deploy the air bag before disposing of the air bag module or disposing of a vehicle equipped with an air bag. (Refer to GROUP 52B - Air Bag Module Disposal Procedures.) (8) Whenever you finish servicing the SRS, check the SRS warning light operation to make sure that the system functions properly. 2. Observe the following when carrying out operations on places where SRS components are installed, including operations not directly related to the SRS air bag. (1) When removing or installing parts do not allow any impact or shock to the SRS components. (2) SRS components should not be subjected to heat over 93C (2OOF), so remove the SRS components before drying or baking the vehicle after painting. After re-installing them, check the SRS warning light operation to make sure that the system functions properly.
1 TSB Revision
GENERAL - Precautions before Service SERVICING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
00-I
1. Note the following before proceeding with work on the electrical system. Note that the following must never be done: Unauthorized modifications of any electrical device or wiring, because such modifications might lead to a vehicle malfunction, over-capacity or short-circuit that could result in a fire in the vehicle. 2. When servicing the electrical system, disconnect the negative cable terminal from the battery. Caution 1. Before connecting or disconnecting the negative cable, be sure to turn off the ignition switch and the lighting switch. (If this is not done, there is the possibility of semiconductor parts being damaged.) 2. After completion of the work steps [when the batterys negative (-) terminal is connected], warm up the engine and allow it to idle for approximately ten minutes under the conditions described below, in order to stabilize the engine control conditions, and then check to be sure that the idling is satisfactory. Engine coolant temperature: 80-95X (176-203OF) Lights, electric fans, accessories: OFF Transaxle: Neutral position (A/T models: N or P) Steering wheel: neutral (center) position
VEHICLE WASHING
If high-pressure car-washing equipment or steam car-washing equipment is used to wash the vehicle, be sure to maintain the spray nozzle at a distance of at least 300 mm (12 in.) from any plastic parts and all opening parts (doors, luggage compartment, etc.).
mm (in.)
ZS0005E
APPLYING RUST PREVENTIVES, UNDERCOAT, ETC.

Heated oxygen sensors have their functional efficiency decreased if they are smeared with oil or grease. When applying rust preventives, undercoat, etc., be sure to protect the heated oxygen sensor with a protective cover or the like.
/ i
TSB Revision
00-20
GENERAL - Precautions before Service SCAN TOOL (MUT) <Up to 1993 models>
(1) To operate the scan tool, refer to theMULTI-USE TESTER OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS. Caution Connection and disconnection of the scan tool should always be made with the ignition switch in the OFF position. (2) Always use a ROM pack that is appropriate for the vehicle.
ROM Pack 1 MB991423 1 MB991466 Applicable Model 1 1992 model 1 1992.1993 model 1
Scan tool (Multi-Use Tester <MUT>)
3OM pack
00002282
Scan tool cMUT-If>
SCAN TOOL (MUT-II) <From 1994 models> <All models>

To operate the scan tool, refer to the MUT-II OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS. Caution Connection and disconnection of the scan tool should always be made with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Z16XO606
ROM pack
ZI
6x0607
00002281
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Towing and Hoisting

Sling type
00-21
NO
TOWING AND HOISTING

WRECKER TOWING RECOMMENDATION
<FWD> FRONT TOWING PICKUP Caution This vehicle cannot be towed by a wrecker using slingtype equipment to prevent the bumper from deformation. If this vehicle is towed, use wheel lift or flat bed equipment. The vehicle may be towed on its rear wheels for extended distances provided the parking brake is released. It is recommended that vehicles be towed using the front pickup whenever possible.
Yheel lift type
:lat bed type
zooFoo17 44 type
NO
ieel lift type &&A
It bed type
REAR TOWING PICKUP Caution This vehicle cannot be towed by a wrecker using slingtype equipment to prevent the bumper from deformation. If this vehicle is towed, use wheel lift or flat bed equipment. Manual transaxle vehicles may be towed on the front wheels, provided the transaxle is in neutral and the drive-line has not been damaged. The steering wheel must be clamped in the straight-ahead position with a steering wheel clamping device designed for towing service use. Caution 1. Do not use steering column lock to secure front wheel position for towing. *2. Make sure the transaxle is in Neutral if vehicle will be with drive wheels on the ground. Automatic transaxle vehicle may be towed on the front wheels at speeds not to exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) for distances not to exceed 30 km (18 miles). Caution If these limits cannot be met, the front wheels must be placed on a tow dolly. NOTE *: <From 1994 models> TOWING WHEN KEYS ARE NOT AVAILABLE When a locked vehicle must be towed and keys are not available, the vehicle may be lifted and towed from the front, provided the parking brake is released. If not released, the rear wheels should be placed on a tow dolly.
1 TSB Revision
00-22
GENERAL - Towing and Hoisting SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following precautions should be taken when towing the vehicle. 1. DO NOT LIFT OR TOW THE VEHICLE BY ATTACHING TO OR WRAPPING AROUND THE BUMPER. 2. Any loose or protruding parts of damaged vehiclesuch as hoods, doors, fenders, trim, etc., should be secured or removed prior to moving the vehicle. 3. Operator should refrain from going under a vehicle while it is lifted by the towing equipment, unless the vehicle is adequately supported by safety stands. 4. Never allow passengers to ride in a towed vehicle. 5. State and local rules and regulations must be followed when towing a vehicle. , d
Sling type
<AWD>
Caution 1. If only the front wheels or only the rear wheels are lifted for towing, the bumper will be damaged. In addition, lifting of the rear wheels causes the oil to flow forward, and may result in heat damage to the rear bushing of the transfer, and so should never be done. 2. The vehicle must not be towed by placing only its front wheels or only the rear wheels on a rolling dolly, because to do so will result in deterioration of the viscous coupling and in the viscous coupling causing the vehicle to jump forward suddenly. 3. If this vehicle is towed, use flat bed equipment.
Ij
Wheel lift type
Flat bed type
I TSB ~~~
Revision

Frame contact support location
00-23
HOISTING
POST TYPE Special care should be taken when raising the vehicle on a frame contact type hoist. The hoist must be equipped with the proper adapters in order to support the vehicle at the proper locations.
Caution
cAWD>: 1,130 mm (44.0 in.) zooFoo3
When service procedures require removing rear suspension, fuel tank, spare tire and liftgate, place additional weight on rear end of vehicle or anchor vehicle to hoist to prevent tipping of center of gravity changes. FLOOR JACK The usual type of floor jack is used at the following locations. Front: Under the mid point of No. 1 crossmember NOTE On vehicles with active-aero system, the front jacking point can be accessed by removing the center cover panel from the under cover. Be sure to reinstall the center cover panel after jack-up operation. Rear: <FWD> Under the jack up bracket of crossmember cAWD> Under the rear differential Caution 1. When lifting the No. 1 crossmember, do not allow jack lifting plate to contact under cover. 2. In order to prevent scarring the crossmember, place a piece of cloth on the jacks contact surface (to prevent corrosion caused by damage to the coating). 3. A floor jack must never be used on any part of the underbody. 4. Do not attempt to raise one entire side of the vehicle by placing a jack midway between front and rear wheels. This practice may result in permanent damage to the body.
Front
<FWD>
Rear
<AWD>
TSB Revision
00-24
LIFTING, JACKING SUPPORT LOCATION
<MID>
<AWD>
ZOOFOO19 00002285
%?8 Floor jack locations
$ Approximate center of gravity
@ Frame contact hoist, twin post hoist or scissors jack (emergency) locati&s
EMERGENCY JACKING
Jack receptacles are located at the body sills to accept the scissors jack supplied with the vehicle for emergency road
service. Always block opposite wheels and jack on level surface.
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Special Handling Instructions for AWD Models
00-25
SPECIAL HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS FOR AWD MODELS

BRAKE TEST
In order to stabilize the viscous couplings dragging force, the brake test should always be conducted after the speedometer test. FRONT WHEEL MEASUREMENTS 1. Place the front wheels on the brake tester. 2. Perform the brake test. Caution The rear wheels should remain on the ground. 3. If the brake dragging force exceeds the specified value, jack up the vehicle and manually rotate each wheel to check the rotation condition of each wheel. NOTE If the brake dragging force exceeds the specified value, the cause may be the effect of the viscous couplings dragging force, so jack up the front wheels and check the rotation condition of the wheels in this state for no effect by the viscous couplings dragging force. REAR WHEEL MEASUREMENTS After placing the rear wheels on the brake tester, follow the same procedures as for the front wheel measurements.
OOPO036 00002266
WHEEL BALANCE
i
FRONT WHEEL MEASUREMENTS 1. Jack up the rear wheels, and place an axle stand at the designated part of the side sill. 2. Jack up the front wheels and set a pick-up stand and balancing machine in place. Caution 1. Set so that the front and rear of the vehicle are at the same height. 2. Release the parking brake. 3. Rotate each wheel manually and check to be sure that there is no dragging. 3. Use the engine to drive the tires, and then make the measurements. Caution 1. If an error is indicated in the state of engine drive, motor drive can be used concurrently. 2. Do not operate the clutch suddenly, or increase or reduce speed suddenly during the work. REAR WHEEL MEASUREMENTS 1. Jack up the front wheels, and place an axle stand at the designated part of the side sill. 2. Jack up the rear wheels, and then, after setting a pick-up stand and balancing machine in place, follow the same procedure as for front wheel measurements.
Balancing machine
OOA0046
w
e
Pick-up stand
TSB Revision
00-26
GENERAL - General Data and Specifications
GENERAL DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
ZOOFOO15
NOTE l 1: 1993 model 2: 1992
*3: 4:
<4ws> 1994 model
l 5: l 6:
1995 model <Hatchback> 1995 model <Convertible>
l 7: l 8:
1996 model <Hatchback> 1996 model <Convertible>
TSB Revision
GENERAL - General Data and Specifications

items 3000GT <DOHC> (Non-Turbo) Model No. Piston displacement cm3 (cu.in.) Transaxle Model No.-Type (Manual transaxle) 6G72-(DOHC) 2,972 (181.4) F5M335-speed manual 3000GT SL <DOHC> (Non-Turbo) 6G72-(DOHC) 2,972 (181.4) F5M335-speed manual
00-27
3000GT VR-4 <DOHC> (Turbo) 6G72-(DOHC) 2,972 (181.4) W5MGl 5-speed manual W6MGl *2 6-speed manual
Engine
Model No.-Type Automatic transaxle Fuel system Fuel supply system
F4A33-4-speed automatic Multiport fuel injection system cMFI system>
F4A33-4 - speed automatic Multiport fuel injection system <MFI system> Multiport fuel injection system <MFI system>
NOTE *l: Up to 1993 models 2: From 1994 models
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
TRANSAXLE SPECIFICATIONS I-
F5M33
W5MGl*
WGMGl*
F4A33
Gear ratio
Final reduction ratio

I I I I
Transfer
0.814
0.958
L; *l: Up to 1993 models
NOTE
*2: From 1994 models
-1 TSB Revision
00-28
GENERAL - Tightening Torque
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Each torque value in the table is a standard value for tightening under the following conditions. (1) Bolts, nuts and washers are all made of steel and plated with zinc. (2) The threads and bearing surface of bolts and nuts are all in dry condition. Standard bolt and nut tightening torque
Bolt nominal diameter (mm) Pitch (mm) Head mark 4 1 2.5 (1.8) 1.0 M8 1.25 / 4.9 (3.6) 12 (8.7)
The values in the table are not applicable: (1) If toothed washers are inserted. (2) If plastic parts are fastened. (3) If bolts are tightened to plastic or die-cast inset-ted nuts. (4) If self-tapping screws or self-locking nuts are used.
Torque Nm (ft.lbs.)
Head mark 7 1 4.9 (3.6) 8.8 (6.5) 22 (16) 9.8 (7.2) 25 (18) Head mark 8
I I
Ml2 Ml4 / 1.5 I 72 (53) I 137(101) 1 206 (152) / 167(123) 1 304 (224) 412 (304) / 559 (412) 1 735 (542) 1 157(116) 1 235(174) 1 343 (253) / 481 (354) 647 (477) 1 853 (629)
1 M20 1 M22
/ 1.5 / 1.5
/ 226 (166) 304 (224)

1
392 (289)
Flange bolt and nut tightening torque

Bolt nominal diameter (mm) Torque Nm (ft.lbs.) Pitch (mm) Head mark 4 1 1.0 1.25 1.25 1.5 1.25 1.75 1 4.9 (3.6) 13 (9.4) 26 (19) 24 (17) 46 (34 42 (31) Head mark 7 1 9.8 (7.2) 24 (17) 49 (36) 44 (33) 93 (69) 81 (60) Head mark 8 1 12 (8.7) 28 (20) 57 (42) 54 (40) 103 (76) 96 (71)
M6
M8
Ml0 Ml0 Ml2 Ml2
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Master Troubleshooting
00-29
MASTER TROUBLESHOOTING
ENGINE OVERHEATS
Symptom Engine overheats Probable cause Cooling system faulty Incorrect ignition timing Reference page 14-3 11-9
ENGINE WILL NOT CRANK OR CRANKS SLOWLY

Symptom Engine will not crank or cranks slowly Probable cause Starting system faulty Reference page 16-19
ENGINE WILL NOT START OR HARD TO START (CRANKS OK)

Symptom Engine will not start or hard to start (Cranks OK) Probable cause No fuel supply to injector Injection system problems Ignition system problems Vacuum leaks Evaporative emission purge control valve l hose l Vacuum hoses 0 Intake manifold 0 Intake manifold plenum l Throttle body l EGR valve Compression too low Reference page 13A-72,200 13A-52 16-31 17-42
11-14
TSB Revision
00-30
ROUGH IDLE OR ENGINE STALLS
rative emission purge control valve
ENGINE HESITATES OR POOR ACCELERATION
vaporative emission purge control valve

l
Vacuum hoses
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Master Troubleshooting ENGINE DIESELING

Symptom Probable cause Incorrect ignition timing Reference page 11-9
00-31
Engine dieseling (runs after ignition switch is turned off)
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

Symptom Excessive oil consumption 1 Probable cause Oil leak Positive crankcase ventilation line clogged Valve stem seal worn or damaged Valve stem worn Piston ring worn or damaged Reference page or remedy Repair as necessary 17-56 Repair as necessary Repair as necessary Repair as necessary
POOR FUEL MILEAGE

Symptom Poor fuel mileage Probable cause Fuel leak I Air cleaner clogged Ignition system problems Fuel injection system problems i Compression too low Tires improperly inflated Clutch slips Brakes drag Reference page or remedy Repair as necessary j 15-9 16-30 13A-52 11-14 31-3 21-3 35-6 I I
NOISE
Symptom Noise Probable cause Loose bolts and nuts Engine noise Reference page or remedy Retighten as necessary 11-6
TSB Revision
00-32
HARD STEERING
Symptom Hard steering
Probable cause Loose power steering oil pump belt Low fluid level Air in power steering system Low tire pressure Excessive turning resistance of lower arm ball joint Excessively tightened steering gear box rack support cover Improper front wheel alignment Excessive turning resistance of tie-rod ball joint Sticky flow control valve Bent rack in steering gear box
Reference page or remedy 37A-9 Replenish 37A-11 I 31-3 33A-10 37A-20 33A-6 37A-7 37A-30 37A-20
POOR RETURN OF STEERING WHEEL TO CENTER

Symptom Poor return of steering wheel to center Probable cause Improper front wheel alignment Improper tire pressure Excessive tightened rack support cover Damaged front wheel bearing Reference page 33A-6 31-3 37A-20 26-9
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Master Troubleshootina POOR RIDING

Symptom Poor riding Probable cause Improper tire pressure lmbalanced wheels Improper front or rear wheel alignment Malfunctioning shock absorber Broken or worn stabilizer Broken or worn coil spring Loose suspension securing bolt(s) Worn lower arm bushing Worn suspension arm bushing Retighten 33A-10 33A-10 33A-7, 12 34-13, 16, 36, 38 Reference page or remedy 31-3 Repair 33A-6,7 34-5, 13,25, 36
ABNORMAL TIRE WEAR

Symptom Abnormal tire wear Probable cause Improper front or rear wheel alignment Improper tire pressure lmbalanced wheels c Loose wheel bearings Malfunctioning shock absorber 34-6 33A-7 34-13, 36 Reference page 33A-6 34-5, 25 31-3
ROAD WANDER
Symptom Road wander Probable cause Improper front or rear wheel alignment Excessive play of steering wheel Poor turning resistance of lower arm ball joint Improper tire pressure Loose or worn lower arm bushing Loose or worn wheel bearings Loose rack support cover in steering gear box 37A-20 Reference page 33A-6 34-525 37A-6 33A-11 31-3 33A-10
TSB Revision
00-34
VEHICLE PULLS TO ONE SIDE

Symptom Vehicle pulls to one side Probable cause Improper front or rear wheel alignment lmbalanced or worn tires Uneven tire pressure Excessive turning resistance of lower arm ball joint Wheel bearing seizure Broken or worn coil spring Bent front or rear axle drive shaft Deformed lower arm 33A-11 Replace 33A-7 26-12 33A-10 Reference page or remedy 33A-6 34-525 31-3
STEERING WHEEL SHIMMY
lmbalanced wheels
Wear, play, or seizure of drive shaft ball joint
BOlTOMlNG
Symptom Bottoming Probable cause Overloaded vehicle Broken or weak coil spring Malfunctioning shock absorber Reference page or remedy Correct 33A-7 34-13, 36
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Master Troubleshootina WHEEL BEARING TROUBLESHOOTING

Trouble i Pitting Flaking Cracking Flat spotting Symptom Pitting occurs because of uneven rotation of race and bearing surfaces The surface peels because of uneven rotation of the race and bearing surfaces Chipping or cracking of cage or roller edges When large load is applied, race and roller contact surfaces compress, forming indentations Probable cause Excessive bearing preload Excessive load End of bearing life Improper bearing assembly
00-35
Impact when bearing was installed (such as being hit with a hammer) Excessive bearing preload Excessive load Vibration when bearings are not used, such as during shipment on freight cars, transport trucks, etc. Insufficient grease Excessive bearing preload Excessive load Faulty oil seal Excessive variation of loads on bearings Use of grease other than that specified lnsuff icient grease Use of grease otherthan that specified Faulty oil seal Presence of water or moisture Insufficient grease Foreign matter Rust or corrosion due to moisture Use of grease other than that specified Faulty oil seal Use of grease other than that specified Faulty oil seal Excessive bearing preload Excessive load
Nicks
Instead of rolling along race surface, rollers slide, thus damaging surface
Smearing
Damage or wear caused by minute particles adhering to surfaces results in rough movement and such high temperatures that parts of surface melt Appears on various areas of the bearing
Rust, corrosion
/ i
Wear
Wear of surface areas caused by friction
Discoloration
Grease discoloration results from grease deterioration which causes particles of pigment contained in grease to adhere to surfaces Heat discoloration will appear as a deep brown or purple
1 TSB Revision
00-36
GENERAL - Lubrication and Maintenance

Caution Test results submitted to EPA have shown that laboratory animals develop skin cancer after prolonged contact with used engine oil. Accordingly, the potential exists for humans to develop a number of skin disorders, including cancer, from such exposure to used engine oil. Care should be taken, therefore, when changing engine oil, to minimize the amount and length of exposure time to used engine oil on your skin. Protective clothing and gloves, that cannot be penetrated by oil, should be worn. The skin should be thoroughly washed with soap and water, or use waterless hand cleaner, to remove any used engine oil. Do not use gasoline, thinners, or solvents.
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and lubrication service recommendations have been compiled to provide maximum protection for the vehicle owners investment against all reasonable types of driving conditions. Since these conditions vary with the individual vehicle owners driving habits, the area in which the vehicle is operated and the type of driving to which the vehicle is subjected, it is necessary to prescribe lubrication and maintenance service on a time frequency as well as mileage interval basis. Oils, lubricants and greases are classified and graded according to standards recommended by the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), the American Petroleum Institute (API) and the National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI).
GEAR LUBRICANTS
The SAE grade number also indicates the viscosity of Multi-Purpose Gear Lubricants. The API classification system defines gear lubricants in terms of usage. Typically gear lubricants conforming to API GL-4 or GL-5 with a viscosity of SAE 75W-85W or 75W-90 are recommended for manual transaxle.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information for service maintenance is provided under SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE. Three schedules are provided; one for Required Maintenance, one for General Maintenance and one for Severe Usage Service. Item numbers in the SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE correspond to the item numbers in the MAINTENANCE SERVICE section.
LUBRICANTS - GREASES i
Semi-solid lubricants bear the NLGI designation and are further classified as grades 0, 1, 2, 3 etc. Whenever Chassis Lubricant is specified, MultiPurpose Grease, NLGI grade 2, should be used. d
SEVERE SERVICE
Vehicles operating under severe service conditions will require more frequent service. Component service information is included in appropriate units for vehicles operating under one or more of the following conditions: 1. Trailer towing or police, taxi, or commercial type operation 2. Operation of Vehicle (1) Short-trip operation at freezing temperature (engine not thoroughly warmed up) (2) More than 50% operation in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 32C (90F) (3) Extensive idling (4) Driving in sandy areas (5) Driving in salty areas (6) Driving in dusty conditions
FUEL USAGE STATEMENT

Your car must use unleaded gasoline only. This car has a fuel tank filler tube especially designed to accept only the smaller-diameter unleaded gasoline dispensing nozzle. Caution Using leaded gasoline in your car will damage the catalytic converters and the oxygen sensors. It is illegal, and will void warranty coverage of the catalytic converters and the oxygen sensors.. Your car is designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane rating of 91 or 95 RON (Research Octane Number). If premium unleaded gasoline is not available, unleaded gasoline having a octane rating of 87 or 91 RON (Research Octane Number) may be used. In this case, the performance and fuel consumption will suffer a little degradation.
ENGINE OIL
Either of the following engine oils should be used: (1) Engine oil displaying EOLCS certification mark (2) Engine oil conforming to the API classification SH ECII, SH/CD ECII, SG ECII or SGKD EC11 For further details, refer to LUBRICANTS SELECTION section.
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Lubrication and Maintenance MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials inL tended for gum and varnish removal may contain highly active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to gasket and diaphragm materials used in fuel system component parts. Gasolines Containing Alcohol Some gasolines sold at service stations contain alcohol, although they may not be so identified. Use of fuels containing alcohol is not recommended unless the nature of the blend can be determined as being satisfactory. Gasohol - A mixture of 10% ethanol (grain alcohol) and 90% unleaded gasoline may be used in your car. If driveability problems are experienced as a result of using gasohol, it is recommended that the car be operated on gasoline. Metanol - Do not use gasolines containing methanol (wood alcohol). Use of this type of alcohol can result in vehicle performance deterioration and damage critical parts in the fuel system components. Fuel system damage and performance problems, resulting from the use of gasolines containing methanol, may not be covered by the new car warranty. Gasolines containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) _ L/ Unleaded gasoline containing 15% or less MTBE may be used in your car. Fuel containing MTBE over 15% vol. may cause reduced engine performance and produce vapor lock or hard starting.
00-37
TSB Revision
00-38
GENERAL - CaDacities Table
necommenaea Lubrtcams ana LuDrlcant
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICANT CAPACITIES TABLE

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS
Differential (rear axle)
Hypoid Gear Oil API classification GL-5 or high Above -23C (-10F) SAESO, 85W-90,8OW From -34C (-30F) to -23C (-10F) SAE 8OW, 8OW-90
LUBRICANT CAPACITIES TABLE

Description Engine oil Crankcase Oil filter Oil cooler <Turbo> Total <Non-Turbo> Total <Turbo> Cooling system (including heater and coolant reserve system) Manual transaxle FWD AWD Transfer 5M1-f GM/-r Automatic transaxle Rear axle cAWD> Power steering 1.45 dm3 Fuel tank 75 dm3 1 TSB Revision 1.59 qts. 19.8 gals. Metric measure 4.0 dm3 0.3 dm3 0.3 dm3 4.3 dm3 4.6 dms 8 o dm3 2.3 dm3 2.4 dm3 0.27 dm3 0.30 dms 7.5 dm3 / 1.1 dm3 U.S. measure 4.2 qts. .32 qt. .32 qt. 4.5 qts. 4.9 qts. 8.5 qts. 2.4 qts. 2.5 qts. .29 qt. .32 qt. 7.9 qts. 1 1.16qts.
GENERAL - Capacities Table

EOLCS certification mark
necommenaea woncams ana wwcanx
00-39
LUBRICANTS SELECTION
ENGINE OIL Caution Never use nondetergent or straight mineral oil. Oil Identification Symbol Use only engine oils displaying the EOLCS certification mark on the container.
M03A015
If these oils are not available, an API classification SH ECII, SH/CD ECII, SG EC11 or SG/CD EC11 can be used.
M03A014
/ ,L
Oil Viscosity The SAE grade number indicates the viscosity of the oil. A proper SAE grade number should be selected according to ambient temperature. NOTE *: SAE 5W-30 may be used for operation in very cold weather areas where the lowest atmospheric temperature is below -10F (-23C).
Turbo
003BOO9
REAR AXLE
I
i
Lubricant Anticipated temperature range
API classification GL-5 or higher I
1 Below -34C (-30F) TSB Revision
1 SAE 75W
necommenaea LuDrlcants ana LuDricant
GENERAL - Capacities Table SELECTION OF COOLANT

COOLANT Relation between Antifreeze Concentration and Specific Gravity
Engine coolant temperature C (OF) and specific gravity Freezing temperature Safe operating temperature Engine coolant concentration (Specific volume) %
L/j
50 55 60 Example The safe operating temperature is -15C (5F) when the measured specific gravity is 1.058 at the coolant temperature of 20C (68F).
Caution 1. If the concentration of the coolant is below 30%, the anti-corrosion property will be adversely affected. In addition, if the concentration is above 60%, both the anti-freeze and engine cooling properties will decrease, affecting the engine adversely. For these reasons, be sure to maintain the concentration level within the. specified range. 2. Do not use a mixture of different brands of anti-freeze.
\-
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Scheduled Maintenance Table
00-41
~ ~
~
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE <Up to 1994 models>

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES FOR EMISSION CONTROL AND PROPER i \i VEHICLE PERFORMANCE
Inspection and services should be performed any time a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your emission warranty. No.
Emission control system maintenance Fuel system (tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank filler tube cap)* Fuel hoses Air cleaner element 4 Evaporative emission control system (except evaporative emission canister)* Sparks plugs Service to be performed Kilometers in thousands Mileage in thousands 24 15 48 30 72 45 96 60
X
120 144 168 75 90 105
Check for leaks Every 5 years or
Check condition Every 2 years or Replace at Check for leaks and clogging Every 5 years or Replace except platinum plugs platinum plugs only
I4 I4 I4
X X X X
X X X
Ignition cables* NOTE : Except for Federal /
Replace Every 5 years or
GENERAL MAINTENANCE SERVICE FOR PROPER VEHICLE PERFORMANCE

eneral maintenance
NOTE *: For California, this maintenance is recommended but not required.
1 TSB Revision

I\lo. General maintenance Service to be performed Kilometers in thousands Mileage in thousands 24 15 48 30 72 45 96 60 120 144 168 75 90 105
15 16 17
Brake hoses Ball joint and steering linkage seals Drive shaft boots
Check for deterioration or leaks Every year or Inspect for grease leaks and damage Every 2 years or Inspect for grease leaks and damage Every year or / Check oil level Inspect system Check and service as required Every 2 years or I x
X X X
x /xl
x Ix1
x Ix/
18 / Rear axle oil <AWD> 19 SRS airbag Exhaust system (connection portion of muffler, pip20 ings and converter heat shields)
At 10 years
NOTE SRS: Supplemental Restraint System
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The maintenance items should be performed according to the following table: 1Mileage intervals kilometers in thousands (Miles in thousands) (::) (ii) (i:) Air cleaner ele- Replace at ment Replace at Change Every 3 months or Replace Every 6 months or Inspect for wear More frequently / x x I x I x I x / x I x x x
X X X
Severe usage conditions A B C D E F G
VO. -
Maintenance Item
Service to be performed
96 120 144 168 (60) (75) (90) (105)

X
5 Spark plugs Engine oil 9
Every 4,800 km (3,000 Miles) Every 9,600 km (6,000 Miles) More frequently
x x
x x
x x
X
10 Engine oil filter t 14 t Disc brake pads
Severe usage conditions ADriving in dusty conditions BTrailer towing or police, taxi, or commercial type operation Extensive idling CDShort trip operation at freezing temperatures (engine not thoroughly warmed up)
EFG-
Driving in sandy areas Driving in salty areas More than 50% operation in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 32C (90F)
1 TSB Revision
GENERAL. - Scheduled Maintenance Table
00-43
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE <From 1995 models>

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES FOR EMISSION CONTROL AND PROPER i VEHICLE PERFORMANCE
Inspection and services should be performed any time a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your emission warranty. No. Emission control system maintenance
Fuel system (tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank filler tube cap)* Fuel hoses 3 4 Air cleaner element Service to be performed Kilometers in thousands Mileage in thousands 24 15 48 30 72 45 96 60
X I I X X I I X X X I I X X I
120 144 168 75 90. 105
Check for leaks Every 5 years or
t Check condition Every 2 years or L

Replace at
Evaporative emission con- t Check for leaks and clogging trol system (except evapo- Every 5 years or rative emission canister)* Sparks plugs Replace except platinum plugs platinum plugs only Ignition cables* Replace Every 5 years or X
X X X
NOTE *I: Except for Federal i
GENERAL MAINTENANCE SERVICE FOR PROPER VEHICLE PERFORMANCE

-
Service to be I10. 7 General maintenance Timing belt performed Replace at
Kilometers in thousands Mileage in thousands
24 15
48 30
72 45
96 60
120 144 168 75 90 105
At 160,000 km*2 (100,000 miles)

X
8 9
Drive belt (for Generator, Water pump, Power steering pump)
Check condition at
X X
Change Every year or Change Every 6 months or
Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) Every 8,000 km (5,000 miles)
I I
10
Replace Every year*3 or Replace Every year or Every 16,000 km (10,000 miles)
X X X
11 12
Manual transmission oil Automatic fluid transmission
Check oil level at Check fluid level Every year or Change fluid at
1x1 /XI Ix/
NisiE For California, this maintenance is recommended but not required. ii*? Not required if belt was previously changed. *3: If the mileage is less than 12,000 km (7,500 miles) each year, the oil filter should be replaced at every oil change.
*I -:
TSB Revision
15
Disc brake pads
Inspect for wear Every year or Check or for deterioration or leaks
x Every
x year
XX
16 Brake hoses 17 18 19 Ball joint and steering linkage seals Drive shaft boots Rear axle oil cAWD>
xxxxxxx
Inspect for grease leaks and damage Every 2 years or Inspect for grease leaks and damage Every year or inspect oil level Inspect system Check and service as required Every 2 years or x
X
x x
X
x x
X
x x
X
At 10 years
20 SRS airbag 21 Exhaust system (connection portion of muffler, piplngs and converter heat shields)
NOTE SRS: Supplemental Restraint System
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The maintenance items should be performed according to the following table:
No.
1
Maintenance Item
Service to be performed
Mileage intervals kilometers in thousands (Miles in thousands) (::) (ii) (i:) 96 120 144 168 (60) (75) (90) (105) x x x x x x x x x
Severe usage conditions A B c

I
\ d
3 Air cleaner element 5 Spark plugs 9 Engine oil 10 Engine oil filter
Replace at Replace at Change Every 3 months or Replace Every 6 months or Change at Change at inspect for wear Every6 months or
x x
x x
xx
Every 4,800 km (3,000 Miles) Every 9,600 km (6,000 Miles) Every 48,000 km (30,000 Miles)
11 Manual transmission oil

I
13 Transfer oil 15 Disc brake pads
Every 9,600 km (6,000 Miles)
Severe usage conditions ADriving in dusty conditions BTrailer towing or police, taxi, or commercial type operation cExtensive idling, driving in stop and go traffic DShort trip operation at freezing temperatures (engine not thoroughly warmed up)
EFGH-
Driving in sandy areas Driving in salty areas

More than 50% operation in heavy city traffic or at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 32C (90F) Driving on off -road
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Maintenance Service
00-45
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
1. FUEL SYSTEM (TANK, PIPE LINE, CONNECTIONS AND FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE CAP) (Check for leak)
Check for damage or leakage in the fuel lines and connections and looseness of the fuel tank filler tube cap.
2. FUEL HOSES (Check condition)

Inspect the surface of fuel hoses for heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber. 2. If the fabric casing of the rubber hose is exposed by cracks and abrasions in the fuel system, the hoses should be changed. 1.
3. AIR CLEANER ELEMENT (Replace)

The air cleaner element will become dirty and loaded with dust during use, and the filtering effect will be substantially reduced. Replace it with a new one. <Non-Turbo> (1) Disconnect the volume air-flow sensor connector. (2) Remove the air intake hose from the volume air-flow sensor. (3) Unclamp the air cleaner cover. (4) Remove the air cleaner cover and volume air-flow sensor. Cautidn Remove the air cleaner cover with care not to give shock to the volume air-flow sensor. (5) Take out the air cleaner element and install a new one. (6) Be sure to close the air cleaner cover completely when clamping it. <Turbo> (1) Remove the clutch booster vacuum pipe mounting bolt. (2) Disconnect the volume air-flow sensor connector. (3) Remove air intake hose A from the volume air-flow sensor. (4) Unclamp the air cleaner cover. (5) Remove the air cleaner cover and volume air-flow sensor. Caution Remove the air cleaner cover with care not to give shock to the volume air-flow sensor. (6) Take out the air cleaner element and install a new one. (7) Be sure to close the air cleaner cover completely when clamping it.
t.TSB Revision
00-46
GENERAL - Maintenance Service 4. EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (Check for leaks and clogging) - except evaporative emission canister
If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or damaged, a fuel vapor mixture escapes into the atmosphere causing excessive emissions. Disconnect the line at both ends, and blow it clean with compressed air. Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap from the fuel tank filler tube and check to see if there is evidence that the packing makes improper contact to the fuel tank filler tube. 2. The fuel tank pressure control valve installed on the vapor line should be checked for correct operation. 1.
5. SPARK PLUGS (Replace)

The spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine performance and emission-control. Therefore, they should be replaced periodically with new ones. Spark plug
NGK NIPPON DENS0 PFRGJ-11 PK20PRPll
Spark plug gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (.039-.043 in.) NOTE For the platinum plug, use care not to damage the platinum tip. Do not try to adjust the plug gap. Specified torque: 25 Nm (15 ft.lbs.)
+Jti!l
Correct \ ._ .-e
6. IGNITION CABLES (Replace)

The ignition cables should be replaced periodically with new ones. After replacing, make sure that the ignition cables and terminals are properly connected and full seated. NOTE When disconnecting an ignition cable, be sure to hold cable cap. If the cable is disconnected by pulling on the cable alone, an open circuit might result.
7. TIMING BELT (Replace)

Replace the belt with a new one periodically to assure proper engine performance. For removal and installation procedures, refer to GROUP 11 - Timing Belt.
[ TSB Revision

<Vehicle without air conditioning>
Generator I
00-47
8. DRIVE BELT (For Generator, Water Pump, Power Steering Pump) (Check condition)
Check the tension of the drive belt. Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts and cracks, and replace it if defective. (1) Measure the deflection with a force of 100 N (22 Ibs.) applied to belt mid-point between pulleys shown in the illustration. If the standard value is not obtained, make adjustment. (2) On vehicles without air conditioning, set a tension gauge at a position maked with arrow A in the illustration to measure the belt tension. Standard value: <Vehicle without air conditioning>
items Specification Tension N (Ibs.) Deflection mm (in.) <Reference value> For P/S pump Tension N (Ibs.) Deflection mm (in.) <Reference value> 350-600 (77- 132) 4.0-5.5 (.16-.22) 250-500 (55-l 10) 9.5-13.5 (.37-.53) For generator
Idler pulley
Tension pulley /
Tension A pulley
Crankshaft pulley
01 FOO07
<Vehicle with air conditioning>
Power steering Tenzion pulley pump pulley \ Air conditioning Crankshaft compressor pulley OlFOO84 pulley
00002532

1 Items 1 For generator and A/C compressor For P/S pump / Tension N (Ibs.) Deflection mm (in.) <Reference value> Tension N (Ibs.) Deflection mm (in.) <Reference value> Specification I 1 350-600 (77-132) 4.0-5.5 (.16-.22) 250-500 (55-110) 9.5-l 3.5 (.37-.53) I 1
9. ENGINE OIL (Change)

Always use the specified oil. (Refer to P.OO-38) Caution Never use nondetergent or straight mineral oil. (1) After warming up the engine, remove the oil filler cap. (2) Remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil. (3) Tighten the drain plug to 40 Nm (29 ftlbs.). (4) Pour new engine oil through the oil filler. Caution 1. Cover the generator with shop towel before filling engine oil to make sure that even if oil is spilt, it may not drop on the generator. 2. Use an oil mug or a funnel to fill oil. Engine oil total capacity: [including oil filter and oil cooler] <Non-Turbo> 4.3 dm3 (4.5 qts.) <Turbo> 4.6 dm3 (4.9 qts.) (5) Check to ensure that the engine oil level is within the level range indicated on the oil dip stick. TSB Revision
00-48
GENERAL - Maintenance Service 10. ENGINE OIL FILTER (Replace)

The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. ENGINE OIL FILTER SELECTION This vehicle is equipped with a full-flow, throw-away oil filter. The same type of replacement filter is recommended as a replacement filter for this vehicle. It is possible, particularly in cold weather, that this vehicle may develop high oil pressure for a short duration. You should be sure that any replacement filter used on this vehicle is a high-quality filter and is capable of withstanding a pressure of 256 psi (1,765 kPa) (manufacturers specifications) to avoid filter and engine damage. Genuine oil filters are high quality filters being capable of withstanding a pressure of 256 psi and are strongly recommended for use on this vehicle. Oil Filter Part No. MITSUBISHI Genuine Parts: MD136790 or equivalent. ,L/ I ~
Any replacement oil filter should be installed in accordance with the oil filter manufacturers installation instructions. (1) Remove the engine oil filter by using the oil filter wrench. (2) Clean the oil filter mounting surface of the oil filter bracket. (3) Coat engine oil to the O-ring of new oil filter. (4) Screw in the oil filter by hand, and after the O-ring contacts the flange surface, tighten it another 3/4 turns with a filter wrench, etc. NOTE The oil filter tightening torque is 14 Nm (11 ft.lbs.). (5) Start and run engine and check for engine oil leaks. (6) After stopping engine, check oil level and refill as necessary.
11. MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL (Check oil level)

Inspect each component for evidence of leakage, and check the oil level by removing the filler plug. If the oil is contaminated, it is necessary to replace it with new oil. (1) With the vehicle parked at a level place, remove the filler plug.
TSB Revision
00-49
PhiI
(2) Check that the transaxle oil level is at the lower portion of the filler plug hole. For AWD-vehicles, check that the transfer oil level is at the portion shown in the illustration. (3) Check to be sure that the transmission oil is not noticeably dirty, and that it has a suitable viscosity.
ZO9FO12
Transfer 4 9 9 2 model>
Transfer <From 1993 model>
12. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (Check fluid level)

Drive until the fluid temperature reaches the usual temperature [70-80C (160-18OF)]. 2. Place vehicle on level floor. 3. Move selector lever sequentially to every position to fill torque converter and hydraulic circuit with fluid, then place lever in N Neutral position. This operation is necessary to be sure that fluid level check is accurate. 4. Before removing dipstick, wipe all dirt from area around dipstick. Then take out the dipstick and check the condition of the fluid. The transaxle should be overhauled under the following conditions. l If there is a burning odor. l If the fluid color has become noticeably blacker. l If there is a noticeably great amount of metal particles in the fluid. 1.
id
TSB Revision
00-50

Check to see if fluid level is in HOT range on dipstick. If fluid level is low, add ATF until level reaches HOT range. Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows pump to take in air along with fluid. Air trapped in hydraulic circuit forms bubbles which make fluid spongy. Therefore, pressures will be erratic. Improper filling can also raise fluid level too high. When transaxle has too much fluid, gears churn up foam and cause same conditions which occur with low fluid level, resulting in accelerated deterioration of ATF transmission fluid. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating, fluid oxidation, which can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and servo operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from transaxle vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. 6. Be sure to examine fluid on dipstick closely. 5.
(Change fluid)
Drain the fluid and check whether there is any evidence of contamination. Replenish with new fluid after the cause of any contamination has been corrected. . (1) Remove drain plug at transaxle case bottom to let fluid drain. (2) Place a drain container with large opening under the transaxle oil pan. (3) Loosen oil pan bolts and tap pan at one corner to break it loose allowing fluid to drain, then remove oil pan. (4) Check the oil filter for clogging and damage and replace if necessary. (5) Clean drain plug and tighten drain plug with gasket. Drain pulg: 30-35 Nm (22-25 ft.lbs.) (6) Clean both gasket surfaces of transaxle case and oil pan. (7) Install oil pan with new gasket and tighten oil pan bolts. Oil pan bolt: lo-12 Nm (7.5-8.5 ft.lbs.)
(8) Pour 4.5 dm3 (4.8 qts.) of specified ATF into case through dipstick hole. rotal quantity of ATF required is approx. 7.5 dm3 (7.9 qts.). Actually however, approx. 4.5 dm3 (4.8 qts.) of fluid can be replaced because rest of fluid remains in torque converter.] Transmission fluid: DIAMOND ATF SP or equivalent (9) Start engine and allow to idle for at least two minutes. Then, with parking brake on, move selector lever momentarily to each position, ending in N Neutral position. TSB Revision
00-51
(lO)Add sufficient ATF to bring fluid level to lower mark. Recheck fluid level after transaxle is at normal operating temperature. Fluid level should be between upper and lower marks of HOT range. Insert dipstick fully to prevent dirt from entering transaxle.
13.TRANSFER OIL (Check oil level)

Inspect each components for evidence of leakage, and check the oil level by removing the filler plug. If the oil is contaminated, it is necessary to replace it with new oil.
14. ENGINE COOLANT (Change)

Check the cooling system parts, such as radiator, heater, and oil cooler hoses, thermostat and connections for leakage and damage. CHANGING COOLANT <Non-Turbo> 1. Remove the heat protectors (front and rear) from the exhaust manifold. 2. Loosen the radiator drain plug, remove two drain plugs from the engine block (one for each bank) and remove the radiator cap to discharge coolant. 3. Remove the reservoir tank and discharge coolant. 4. When coolant has been discharged, pour water through the filler port to flush coolant passage. 5. Coat the threads of the engine drain plugs with the specified sealant and tighten the plugs to specification. Specified sealant: 3M Nut Locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent Tightening torque: 40 Nm (29 ft.lbs.) 6. Fit the radiator drain plug securely. 7. Mount the reserve tank. 8. Slowly pour coolant into the radiator to the brim and also into the reserve tank up to the FULL line. 9. Install the radiator cap securely. 10. Start the engine and warm up until the thermostat opens. 11. Race the engine up to around 3,000 rpm several times, then stop the engine. 12. When the engine has cooled down, remove the radiator cap and add coolant up to the brim. Add coolant to the reserve tank up to the FULL line.
Rear bank 1 Y /- - + 0y.3
<Turbo> 1. Lift up the vehicle. 2. Loosen the radiator drain plug, remove the drain plug from the rear bank of the engine and remove the radiator cap to discharge coolant. 3. Follow the same steps 3 to 12 above.
1 TSB Revision
00-52
GENERAL - Maintenance Service 15.DlSC BRAKE PADS (Inspect for wear)

Check for fluid contamination and wear. Replace complete set of pads if defective. Caution The pads for the right and left wheels should be replaced at the same time. Never split or intermix brake pad sets. All four pads must be replaced as a complete set. Thickness of lining: Limit 2.0 mm (.08 in.)
14woo95
16. BRAKE HOSES (Check for deterioration or leaks)

Inspection of brake hoses and tubing should be included in all brake service operations. The hoses should be checked for: 1. Correct length, severe surface cracking, pulling, scuffing or worn spots. (If the fabric casing of the hoses is exposed by cracks or abrasion in the rubber hose cover, the hoses should be replaced. Eventual deterioration of the hose may occur with possible bursting failure.) 2. Faulty installation, casing twisting or interference with wheel, tire or chassis.
17.BALL JOINT AND STEERING LINKAGE SEALS (Inspect for grease leaks and damage)
1. These components, which are permanently lubricated at the factory, do not require periodic lubrication. Damaged seals and boots should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination of the grease. 2. Inspect the dust cover and boots for proper sealing, leakage and damage. Replace them if defective.
18.DRlVE SHAFT BOOTS (Inspect for grease leaks and damage)

1. These components, which are permanently lubricated at the factory, do not require periodic lubrication. Damaged boots should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination of the grease. 2. Inspect the boots for proper sealing, leakage and damage. Replace it if defective.
19. REAR AXLE OIL (LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL) (Check oil level) - AWD
Remove the filler plug and inspect the oil level at bottom of filler hole. If the oil level is slightly below the filler hole, it is in satisfactory condition.
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Maintenance Service 20. SRS MAINTENANCE (SRS component check: damage, function, connection to wiring harness, etc.)
The SRS must be inspected by an authorized dealer 10 years after the car manufacture date shown on the certification label located on left front door latch post.
Manufacture date Certification label \ - - ~..~ {MFD. BY MITsuslsHI MOTCSIS coi?PoFsAnoN LPR ,gs3
GW LSS GAWR L8S KG FR. %YR KG kF T,S ElCLE CONKWS T O I\LL APPLlCABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE S FETY BUMPER.PIND THEFY PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EEFECT C,, THE DATE OF MNUFACTURE SHOWN A8OE.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Y. I.N.PATERN-OlI,LSL-0, YEHICLE TYPE:PASSENGER CAR
~--___ ~900122
oOFOOI 00002289
Maintenance Items
SRS warnina liaht
Battery
219FOlO
1. SRS WARNING LIGHT CHECK When the ignition key is turned to ON or engine started, the SRS warning light will illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn off. This means that the system is functioning properly. 2. SRS COMPONENTS VISUAL CHECK (1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. . (2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) (3) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever (Type 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between
the lock lever and the lock spring.

TSB Revision

In case that there is a notch on the lock lever (Type
2)
Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. (4) Disconnect the red 14-pin connector from the SDU.
2-1 Front Impact Sensors (1) Remove right and left front splash shield extensions. Check sensors to ensure the arrow marks face the front of the vehicle. (2) Check front upper frame lower and sensor brackets for deformities or rust. Caution The SRS may not activate properly if a front impact sensor is not installed properly, which could result in serious injury or death to the vehicles driver and passenger. (3) Check wiring harness (for front impact sensor) for binds, connector for damage, and terminals for deformities. Replace sensor and/or wiring harness if it fails visual check. (Refer to GROUP 52B - Service Precautions and Front Impact Sensors.)
2-2 SRS Diagnosis Unit (SDU) (1) Check SDU case and brackets for dents, cracks, deformities or rust. Caution The SRS may not activate properly if SRS diagnosis unit is not installed properly, which could result in serious injury or death to the vehicles driver and passenger.
(2) Check connectors and lock lever for damage, and terminals for deformities or rust. Replace SDU if it fails visual check. [Refer to GROUP 528 - SRS Diagnosis Unit (SDU).]
TSB Revision

2-3 Air Bag Module, Steering Wheel and Clock Spring
00-55
<Up to 1993 models>

Ring gear Rotor Screw Caution label
<Drivers side>
To cruis cvitch mote control itch (radio) b
remote control switch To air bag module
<From 1994 models>
LJ
Ring gear Flat c
Rotor
Screw
SRS diagnosis unit Air bag module
<Drivers side>
Gv--$k&ibration Cable end support
t19F0-246 00002290
TSB Revision
00-56
<From 1994 models>
<Passengers side>
Air bag module
Glove b& assembly
Z19FO250
(1) Remove air bag module from steering wheel. (Refer to GROUP 52Ei3 - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring.) Caution When disconnecting the air bag module-clock spring connector, take care not to apply excessive force to it.
.cup to 1993 models>
Pad cover
(2) Check pad cover for dents, cracks or deformities.

Caution
The removed air bag module should be stored in a clean, dry place with the pad cover face up.
TSB Revision

:From 1994 models> :Drivers side>
00-57
-T, \_ . _. .\\ \ \i I3
Pad cover
Pad cover
:Passengers side>
Z19FO250 00002291
(3) Check hooks and connectors for damage, terminals deformities, and harness for binds. (4) Check air bag inflator case for dents, cracks or deformities. (5) Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Conli,
:From 1994 models> :Drivers side>
Inflator case
<Passengers side>
TSB Revision
00-58

(6) Remove the steering wheel by using special tool. Caution Do not hammer on the steering wheel. Doing so may damage the collapsible column mechanism. (7) Remove the steering column covers. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) (8) Remove the clock spring. (Refer to GROUP 52B - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring.)
:Up to 1993 models> To air bag module
(9) Check clock spring connectors and protective tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.
6 SRS diagnosis unit
Z19FO109
<From 1994 models> To aicbag module
To SRS diagnosis unit
(10)Visually check the clock spring case and the gears for damage. (11)Align the mating mark and NEUTRAL position indicator and, after turning the vehicles front wheels to straightahead position, install the clock spring to the column switch. Caution If the clock springs mating mark is not properly aligned, the steering wheel may not be completely rotational during a turn, or the flat cable within the clock spring may be severed, obstructing normal operation of the SRS and possibly leading to serious injury to the vehicles driver and passenger.
1 TSB Revision

<Up to 1993 models>
00-59
<UP to 1994 models>
(12)lnstall the steering wheel, steering column covers and the air bag module. (13)Check steering wheel for noise, binds or difficult operation. (14)Check steering wheel for excessive free play. REPLACE ANY VISUALLY INSPECTED PART IF IT FAILS THAT INSPECTION. (Refer to GROUP 52B - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring.) Caution The SRS may not activate properly if any of the above components is not installed properly, which could result in serious injury or death to the vehicles driver and passenger.
2-4 Front Wiring Harness and Body Wiring Harness
236FOO19
(1) Check connectors for poor connections. (2) Check harnesses for binds, connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. REPLACE ANY CONNECTORS OR HARNESS THAT FAIL THE VISUAL INSPECTION. (Refer to GROUP 52B - Service Precautions.) Caution The SRS may not activate properly if SRS harnesses or connectors are damaged or improperly connected, which could result in serious injury or death to the vehicles driver and passenger. TSB Revision
00-60
GENERAL - Maintenance Service 21. EXHAUST SYSTEM (CONNECTION PORTION OF MUFFLER, PIPINGS AND CONVERTER HEAT SHIELDS) (Check and service as required)
Check for holes and gas leaks due to damage, corrqsion, etc. 2. Check the joints and connections for looseness and gas leaks. 3. Check the hanger rubber and brackets for damage. 1.
TSB Revision
GENERAL - Main Sealant and Adhesive Table
00-6 1
MAIN SEALANT AND ADHESIVE TABLE
Li
SEALANTS FOR ENGINE ACCESSORIES

Application Sealing between rocker cover and camshaft bearing cap (4G6 DOHC and 6G7 engines only) Sealing between semi-circular packing and rocker cover and between semi-circular packing and cylinder head Oil pressure switch Engine coolant temperature switch, Engine coolant temperature sensor, Therm0 valve, Therm0 switch, Joints, Engine coolant temperature gauge unit (large size) Engine coolant temperature gauge unit (small size, MD091056 only) Oil pan (except 4G5,4G9 engine) 3M Nut Locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent Recommended brand 3M ATD Part No. 8660 or equivalent
3M ATD Part No. 8660 or equivalent MITSUBISHI GENUINE Part No. MD970389 or equivalent
Oil pan, Water pump, Thermostat case (4G9, 4G6, 6Al engine only)
SEALING BETWEEN GLASS AND WEATHERSTRIP

Application Sealing between tempered glass and weatherstrip Sealing between body flange and weatherstrip Sealing between laminated glass and weatherstrip Recommended brand 3M ATD Part No. 8513 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8509 or equivalent
ADHESION WITH RIBBON SEALER

Application Waterproof film for door, Fender panel, Splash shield, Mud guard, Rear combination lamp Recommended brand 3M ATD Part No. 8625 or equivalent
ADHESIVES FOR INTERIOR TRIM

Application Adhesion of polyvinylchloride sheet Adhesion of door weatherstrip to body Sealing between grommet or packing and metal seal Adhesion of headlining and other interior trim materials Adhesion of fuel tank to pad Recommended brand 3M Part No. EC-l 368 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8001 or 3M ATD Part No. 8011 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8513 or equivalent 3M Part No. EC-1368 or 3M ATD Part No. 8080 or equivalent
BODY SEALANT
Application Sealing of sheet metal, drip rail, floor, body side panel, trunk, front panel and the like joints i+- Sealing of tailgate hinges Recommended brand 3M ATD Part No. 8531 or 3M ATD Part No. 8646 or equivalent
1 TSB Revision
00-62
GENERAL - Main Sealant and Adhesive Table
CHASSIS SEALANT
ball joint and linkage ox packing and shims ousing rack support cover and top cover of knuckle arm flange
FAST BONDING ADHESIVE

Application Adhesion of all materials except polyethylene, polypropylene, fluorocarbon resin or other materials with highly absorbent surface Recommended brand 3M ATD Part No. 8155 or equivalent
ANAEROBIC FAST BONDING ADHESIVE

Application Fixing of bolts and screws Tightening of drive gear to differential case l l Bolts for coupling tilt steering upper column with lower column Fixing of bearing, fan, pulley and gear connections Sealing of small recess or flange surface Steering angle stopper bolt (jeep) 3M Nut locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent Recommended brand 3M Stud locking Part No. 4170 or equivalent
UNDERCOAT
Application Undercoat Recommended brand 3M ATD Part No. 8864 or equivalent
TSB Revision
ENGINE
CONTENTS
CAMSHAFT OIL SEALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . 25 CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . .26 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 ENGINE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ENGINE OIL COOLER . . . . . . . . . m . . . . . . . . . . . 36 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SPECIFICATIONS .......................... 2
General Specifications . . . . ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . ~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
TIMING BELT . . . . . . . . . ..*...........*.*... 31 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . m . . . . . . . . . 6
/ Li
OIL PAN AND OIL SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -23 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Basic Idle Speed Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refer to GROUP 13A Compression Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Curb idle Speed Check ...................... 11 Dashpot Check and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Belts Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 7
Idle Mixture Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Ignition Timing Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Lash Adjuster Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Lash Adjuster Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manifold Vacuum Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
,; id
11-2 SPECIFICATIONS
Items Type Number of cylinders Bore mm (in.) Stroke mm (in.) Piston displacement cc (cu.in.)
ENGINE - Specifications
Non-Turbo V-type, DOHC 6 91 .l (3.587) 76.0 (2.992) 2,972 (181.4)
Turbo V-type, DOHC 6 91 .l (3.587) 76.0 (2.992) 2,972 (181.4)
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
HC concentration ppm NOTE *I: 1992 models *2: From 1993 models
100 or less
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Specifications
Items Standard value For generator (Vehicle without air Inspection conditioning) New belt Used belt For generator and air conditioning compressor Inspection New belt Used belt For power steering pump Inspection New belt Used belt Drive belt deflection mm (in.) <Reference value> For generator (Vehicle without air Inspection conditioning) New belt Used belt For generator and air conditioning compressor Inspection New belt Used belt 350-600 (77-132) 650-850 (143-187) 450-600 (99-132) 350-600 (77-132) 650-850 (143-187) 450-600 (99-132) 250-500 (55-110) 500-700 (110-154) 350-400 (77-88) 4.0-5.5 (.16-.22) 3.5-4.0 (.14-.16) 4.0-5.0 (.l6-.20) 4.0-5.5 (.16-.22) 3.5-4.0 (.14-.16) 4.0-5.0 (.16-.20) 9.5-l 3.5 (.37-.53) 7.5-9.0 (.30-.35) 10.5-12.5 (.41-.49) 3.8-4.5 (.149-.177) Limit
11-3
Drive belt tension N (Ibs.)
/ L
Timing belt
For power steering pump
Inspection New belt Used belt
Amount of projection of auto tensioner rod mm (in.) (distance between the tensioner arm and auto tensioner body)
SEALANTS
I Items
Oil pan Rocker cover
Specified sealant MITSUBISHI GENUINE Part No. MD970389 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 8660 or equivalent
TSB Revision
I
ENGINE - Special Tools
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Tool number and name MB991341 Scan tool (Multi-use tester cMUT>) ROM pack (For the number, refer to GROUP 00 - Precautions before service.) MB991 502 Scan tool (MUT-II) Supersession MB991 341 Application Up to 1993 models Idle speed check
I ~
-
MB991502
All models Idle speed check
I
pack -
ROM
MD998051 Cylinder head bolt wrench
MD998051 -01
Loosening and tightening of cylinder head bolt
L/ I
MD998727 oil pan remover
service General tool We a scraper and exercise care)
Removal of the oil pan
MD998761 Camshaft oil seal installer
Installation of camshaft oil seal
MD998782 Valve lifter set
Removal of rash adjuster
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Special Tools

Tool Tool number and name MB990767 End yoke holder .; P MD998754 Crank pulley holder Supersession MB990767-01 Application
11-5
-l
Supporting the sprocket and shaft pulley when attaching or detaching them Supporting the crankshaft pulley when crankshaft bolt and pulley are removed or reinstalled.
I
1 fJ!s
Fl fB
MB990998* Crankshaft wrench
Used if the crankshaft needs to be rotated to attach the timing belt, etc. when the piston and connecting rod assembly is assembled. <SOHC> *.. Use only the large nut included in MB990998, together with the crankshaft pulley bolt. Adjustment of timing belt
M D998767 \ vI Q I Q MD99871 7 Tensioner pulley socket wrench
Installation of crankshaft front oil seal
I @fQ Crankshaft front oil seal installer
MD99871 8 Crankshaft rear oil seal installer
Installation of crankshaft rear oil seal
1 TSB Revision
11-6 TROUBLESHOOTING
ENGINE - Troubleshooting
Oil relief valve stuck (opened) Excessive bearing clearance Oil pressure too high Noisy valves Oil relief valve stuck (closed) Incorrect lash adjuster
Repair relief valve Replace bearings Repair relief valve Replace lash adjuster
Connecting rod noise/ main bearing noise
TSB Revision
ENGINE - On-vehicle Service
11-7
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
DRIVE BELTS TENSION ADJUSTMENT
(1) Check that the belts are not damaged and are properly fit into the pulley grooves. Caution 1. When installing the V-ribbed belt, check that the V-ribs are properly fit without misalignment. 2. If creaking or slippage is observed, check the belt for wear, damage, or breakage on the pulley contact surface, check the pulley for scoring, in addition to sag inspection. 3. Check that the V-ribbed belt is not resting on the tension pulley or idler pulley flange. (2) With belt tension gauge set to the belt midway between the pulleys as shown in the illustration, check the belt tension for standard value. Or apply a force of 98 N (22 Ibs.) to the belt to check the deflection for standard value. Standard value: <Vehicle without air conditioning> Items
<Vehicle without air conditioner> Ge;erator Idler pulley Tens$,on pulley
Check
value 350-600 (77-132) 4.0-5.5 (.16-.22)
Adjustment value - new belt
Adjust-
ment value - used belt
Tension For genera- N (lb.%) tor Deflection mm (in.) <Reference value> Tension power N (Ibs.) s t e e r - Deflection
For
450-600 650-850 (143-187) (99-132) 3.5-4.0 (.14-.16) 4.0-5.0 (.16-.20)
250-500 (55-110) 9.5-13.5 (.37-.53)
350-400 500-700 (110-154) ( 7 7 - 8 8 ) 7.5-9.0 (.30-.35) 10.5-12.5 (.41-.49)
Tension Pulley Crankshaft pulley

OlFOOO7
ing pump
mm (in)
<Reference value>
<Vehicle with air conditioner>

Adjust-
Items
Tension For genera- N (Ibs.) tar and
Check
value 350-600 (77-l 32)
ment value - new

belt
Adjustment value - used

belt
450-600 650-850 (143-187) (99-132)
Eior ;
Air conditioning compressor pulley Crankshaft pulley
OlFOO84 00002117
For power
Tension N (Ibs.)
250-500
500-700 7.5-9.0 (.30-.35)
350-400 10.5-12.5 (.41-.49)
(55-110)
9.5-13.5 (.37- .53)
(110-154) (77-88)
steering Deflection pump mm (in.) <Reference
value> [sion I
11-8
Generatorpullev

GENERATOR DRIVE BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT <Vehicle without air conditioning> (1) Remove front under cover panel <Vehicle with active aero> (Refer to GROUP 51 - Aero Parts.). (2) Remove under covers (front L.H., side L.H.). (3) Loosen tension pulley fixing nut. (4) Adjust belt deflection with adjusting bolt. (5) Tighten fixing bolt. (6) Run the engine one time or more. (7) Check the belt tension. Readjust, if necessary. (8) Install under covers. GENERATOR AND AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT DEFLECTION ADJUSTMENT <Vehicle with air conditioning> (1) Use straight handle box wrench to loosen tension pulley fixing nut. (2) Adjust belt deflection with adjusting bolt. (3) Use straight handle box wrench to tighten fixing nut. (4) Run the engine one time or more. (5) Check the belt deflection. Readjust, if necessary.
ey
Adju bolt
Li I
Fixing nut
201F0008
Generatormllev
POWER STEERING PUMP DRIVE BELT DEFLECTION ADJUSTMENT (1) Insert an extension bar (insertion depth 12.7 mm), etc. into the opening at the end of the tension pulley bracket. (2) Loosen the tension pulley fixing bolts in the order of B and A. (3) Move the extension bar installed to the tension pulley in the direction of arrow to adjust the belt tension. (4) Tighten the tension pulley fixing bolts in the order of A and B. Tightening torque: 42 Nm (30 ft.lbs.) (5) Give the crankshaft two turns in normal direction (clockwise) to run in the belt. (6) Check the belt deflection. Readjust, if necessary.
Crankshaft pulley
ZOlN0074 00002096
TSB Revision
ENGINE - On-vehicle Service IGNITION TIMING CHECK
11-9
4992 models> (1) The vehicle should be prepared as follows before the inspection and adjustment. l Engine coolant temperature: 80-95C (176-203F) l Lights, electric cooling fan and accessories: OFF l Transaxle: neutral (P for AIT)
(2) Insert a paper clip to the engine speed detection connector (blue), and connect a tachometer to the paper clip. NOTE Do not use the scan tool. If tested with the scan tool connected to the data link connector, the ignition timing will not be the basic timing but be ordinary timing. (3) Set the timing light. (4) Start the engine and run at idle. (5) Check curb idle speed. Curb idle speed: 700 f 100 rpm NOTE The engine speed indicated is a third of actual speed. In other words, the reading of the tachometer times 3 is actual speed. (6) Turn OFF the ignition switch. (7) Remove the water-proof female connector from the ignition timing adjustment connector (brown).
(8) Using a jumper wire, ground the ignition timing adjusting terminal. NOTE Grounding this terminal sets the engine to the basic ignition timing. (9) Start the engine and run at idle. (1O)Check basic ignition timing. \/4-l ii Basic ignition timing: 5 BTDC f 2 (1l)lf not within the standard value range, loosen the crank angle sensor mounting nut and adjust by turning the crank angle sensor. Turning it to the counterclockwise retards timing, and to the clockwise advances it. (12)After adjustment, tighten mounting nut taking care not to move the crank angle sensor. (13)Turn OFF the ignition switch. (14)Disconnect the jumper wire connected at step (8).
27F1109371
1 TSB Revision
II-IO

(15)Check to be sure that the idling ignition timing is the correct timing. Actual ignition timing: Approx. 15 BTDC NOTE (1) Ignition timing is variable within about +7, even-under normal operation. (2) And it is automatically further advanced by about 5 from 15 BTDC at higher altitudes.
IGNITION TIMING CHECK

<From 1993 models> (1) The vehicle should be prepared as follows before the inspection and adjustment. l Engine coolant temperature: 80-95C (176-203F) l Lights, electric cooling fan and accessories: OFF l Transaxle: neutral (P for A/T)
(2) Insert a paper clip to the engine speed detection connector
Engines speed detection # connec_ t tor (blue) 7
(blue), and connect a tachometer to the paper clip. NOTE Do not use the scan tool. If tested with the scan tool connected to the data link connector, the ignition timing will not be the basic timing but be ordinary timing.
(3) Set the timing light. (4) Start the engine and run at idle. (5) Check curb idle speed. Curb idle speed: 700 + 100 rpm NOTE The engine speed indicated is a third of actual speed. In other words, the reading of the tachometer times 3 is actual speed. (6) Turn OFF the ignition switch. (7) Disconnect the waterproof female connector from the ignition timing adjusting connector (brown). (8) Using a jumper wire, ground the ignition timing adjusting terminal. NOTE Grounding this terminal sets the engine to the basic ignition timing. (9) Start the engine and run at idle. (10)Check basic ignition timing. Basic ignition timing: PBTDC rt 3
TSB Revision
II-II
(1l)lf basic ignition timing is not within the standard range, check the crankshaft position sensor by reference to GROUP 13A - On-vehicle Inspection of MFI Components. (12)Disconnect the jumper wire connected at step (8). (13)Check to be sure that the idling ignition timing is the correct timing. Actual ignition timing: Approx. 15 BTDC NOTE (1) Ignition timing is variable within about *7, even under normal operating. (2) And it is automatically further advanced by about 5 from 15BTDC at higher altitudes.
CURB IDLE SPEED CHECK

(1) The vehicle should be prepared as follows before the inspection. l Engine coolant temperature: 80-95C (176-203F) l Lights, electric cooling fan and accessories: OFF l Transaxle: neutral (P for A/T)
(2) Connect a tachometer. (Refer to P.ll-9.) (3) Set a timing light. (4) Using a jumper wire, ground the ignition timing adjusting terminal. (5) Start the engine and let it idle. (6) Check the ignition timing is the standard value; if not, adjust. Standard value: 5 BTDC + 2 4992 models> 5 BTDC f 3 <from 1993 models> NOTE Check the ignition timing with the scan tool not connected to the data link connector. (7) Remove the jumper wire from the ignition timing adjusting terminal. (8) When using the scan tool, turn OFF the ignition switch and connect the tester to the data link connector. (9) Idle the engine for two minutes. (10)Check the idle speed. Curb idle speed: 700 f 100 rpm NOTE (1) The idling speed is automatically regulated by the idle-speed control system. (2) The engine speed indicated is a third of actual speed. In other words, the reading of the tachometer times 3 is actual speed. (1l)lf there is a deviation from the standard value, refer to GROUP 13A - Chart Classified by Problem Symptoms, and check the MFI components.
TSB Revision
II-12
ENGINE - On-vehicle Service IDLE MIXTURE CHECK

(1) Before inspection, set the vehicle in the following condition. l Engine coolant temperature: 80-95C (176-203F) l Lights, electric cooling fan and accessories: OFF l Transaxle: P range (2) Make sure that the basic ignition timing is of a standard value. Standard value: 5BTDC f 2 cl992 models> 5BTDC 4 3 <from 1993 models> (3) After turning the ignition switch OFF, set a tachometer or connect the scan tool to the data link connector. NOTE For tachometer setting procedure, refer to P.ll -9. (4) Start the engine and run at 2,500 rpm for approx. 2 minutes. (5) Set the CO tester and HC tester. (6) Check the CO concentration and HC concentration with the engine at idle. Standard value: CO concentration: 0.5 % or less HC concentration: 100 ppm or less (7) If the standard value is exceeded, check the following items. l Diagnostic output l Closed loop control (if closed loop control is performed normally, heated oxygen sensor output signals change within a O-400 mV range and a 600-l ,000 mV range.) l Fuel pressure 0 Injectors l Ignition coil, spark plug cables and spark plugs l Leaks in EGR svstem and EGR valve l Evaporative emission control system 0 Compression pressure NOTE If CO and HC concentrations exceed the respective standard values despite the fact that the results of the inspection made on all items are normal, replace the three-way catalyst.
1 TSB Revision
II-13
DASHPOT CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT <Turbo and From 1994 Non Turbo M/T model for California>
(1) Inspect the idle speed before inspection and adjustment of the dashpot. (2) Set the vehicle in the following conditions before dashpot inspection and adjustment. l Engine coolant temperature: 80-95C (176-203F) l Lights, electrical cooling fan and accessories: OFF l Transaxle: neutral (3) Set the tachometer or connect the scan tool to the data link connector (white). NOTE For the tachometer setting procedure, refer to P.ll-9. (4) Start the engine.
rom 1994 Non Turbo M/T model or California>
(5) Open the throttle valve until the dashpot rod makes a full stroke. (6) Close the throttle valve slowly to find a point where the throttle lever contacts the dashpot rod (a point where the dashpot starts to contract). Hold the throttle valve at this point. (7) Check the engine speed (at which the dashpot starts to operate). Standard value: 2,200 k 200 rpm
from 1994 Non Turbo for California>
(8) If the engine speed is not within the specified limit, loosen the lock nut on the rod and turn the rod to make adjustment for proper dashpot starting engine speed. (9) Release the throttle valve to make sure that the engine speed slowly drops to the idle speed.
TSB Revision
11-14
ENGINE - On-vehicle Service COMPRESSION PRESSURE CHECK

(1) Prior to inspection, check to ensure that the engine oil, starter motor and battery are in proper condition. Place the vehicle in the following conditions. l Engine coolant temperature: 80-95C (176-203F) l Lights, electric cooling fan and accessories: OFF l Transaxle: Neutral (P for A/T) (2) Remove the spark plug cables. (3) Remove all of the spark plugs. (4) Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor connector. NOTE By so doing the engine control module stops performing ignition and fuel injection. (5) Cover the spark plug mounting holes with a shop towel, crank the engine, and then check for foreign substances deposited on the shop towel. Caution 1. When you crank the engine, keep away from the spark plug mounting holes. 2. If a compression measurement is performed with water, oil, fuel, etc. in the cylinder due to the cracks in the cylinders, these substances heated to a very high temperature will blow off the spark plug mounting holes and could be dangerous.
(6) ~I;II a compression gauge in a spark plug mounting (7) Set the throttle valve in a fully opened position, and crank the engine to measure the compression pressure. Standard value: <Non-Turbo> 1,270 kPa (185 psi) [250-400 rpm] <Turbo> 1,080 kPa (156 psi) [250-400 rpm] Limit: <Non-Turbo> min. 959 kPa (139 psi) [250-400 rpm] <Turbo> min. 792 kPa (115 psi) [250-400 rpm] (8) Measure the compression pressure in each of the cylinders and check that the difference in compression pressure between the individual cylinders is less than the limit value. Limit: max. 98 kPa (14 psi) 1 TSB Revision
II-15
(9) If there is a cylinder in which the compression pressure or pressure difference is beyond the limit value, pour in a small amount of engine oil through the spark plug mounting hole, and repeat Steps (7) through (8). 1) If the small amount of oil poured in causes the compression pressure to rise, then it is likely that either the piston ring, cylinder wall surface or both are worn or damaged. 2) If the small amount of oil poured in does not cause the compression pressure to rise, then valve seizure, poor valve contact, or leakage from the gasket is suspected. (iO)Re-connect the crankshaft position sensor connector. (11) Re-mount the spark plugs and spark plug cables. (12)Erase the diagnostic trouble code using the scan tool or disconnect the negative (-) terminal of the battery, leave it disconnected for more than 10 seconds, and then re-connect it. NOTE This erases the trouble code due to the disconnection of the crankshaft position sensor connector.
MANIFOLD VACUUM CHECK

(1) The vehicle should be repaired as follows before the inspection. l Engine coolant temperature: 80-95C (176-203F) l Lights, electric cooling fan, and accessories: OFF l Transaxle: Neutral (P for A/T) (2) Connect a tachometer. (Refer to P.ll-9.) (3) 1) <Non-Turbo> Install a three-way joint to the vacuum hose connected between the air intake plenum and the fuel pressure regulator and connect a vacuum gauge to the joint. 2) <Turbo> Install a three-way joint to the vacuum hose connected between the air intake plenum and the fuel pressure solenoid valve and connect a vacuum gauge. (4) Start the engine and check that idle speed is within the standard value range. (5) Check the manifold vacuum. Limit: 450 mmHg (18 in.Hg)
LASH ADJUSTER CHECK

NOTE If the clanging noise due to the lash adjuster produced immediately after the engine has started or during operation persists, perform the following checks. (1) Check the engine oil, and add or replace if necessary. NOTE (1) If the engine oil level is low, the air drawn in from the oil strainer will be trapped in the oil passage. / TSB Revision
II-16

(2) If the engine oil level is higher than the specified level, agitation of the oil by the crankshaft could cause a large amount of air to enter the oil. (3) A deteriorated oil contains a large amount of air, because the air, once trapped, is not readily separated from the oil. If the air trapped due to these causes enters the high pressure chamber in the lash adjuster, the air in the high pressure chamber will be compressed while the valve is in the opened position. The lash adjuster will be drawn too far in, and will produce noise when the valve closes. This is the same phenomenon that occurs when the valve clearance is adjusted to an excessive dimension. In this case, the normal condition will be, restored if the air escapes from the lash adjuster. (2) Start the engine and slowly race* it several times (less than 10 times). If racing the engine causes the noise to die away, it means that the air has escaped from the high pressure chamber of the lash adjuster and that the lash adjuster has regained its normal functions. * Accelerate the engine from the idling speed to 3,000 rpm slowly (in 30 seconds) and then decelerate it to the idling speed slowly (in 30 seconds). NOTE (1) When the vehicle is parked on a slope for a long period, the oil in the lash adjuster will decrease. When the engine is started, the air might enter the high pressure chamber. (2) After a long period of parking during which the oil in the oil passage goes away, it will take some time before the oil is re-supplied to the lash adjuster. Therefore, the air could enter the high pressure chamber. (3) If any abnormal noise is not eliminated by racing, check the lash adjuster. 1) Stop the engine. 2) Set the engine so that cylinder No. 1 is positioned at the top dead center of the compression. 3) Press the rocker arm at the area indicated by the white arrow mark to check whether the rocker arm is lowered or not. 4) Slowly turn the crankshaft 360 degrees clockwise. 5) In the same procedure as Step (3), check the rocker arm at the area indicated by the black arrow mark. 6) Push down the rocker arm at a portion located right above the lash adjuster. If the rocker arm goes down readily, the lash adjuster is defective. Replace it with a new one in accordance with step (4). In addition, when replacing the lash adjuster, be sure to remove air positively from the lash adjuster before installation. Then perform inspection in accordance with steps (1) through (5) to make sure that there is no abnormality.
No.1
No.3
No.5
No.2
No.4
No.6 27EN0530
TSB Revision
11-17
NOTE (1) If the leak-down test is performed, the lash adjuster can be judged accurately to be defective or not. (2) For the leak-down test procedure or the procedure for removing air from the lash adjuster, refer to the Engine Service Manual. In addition, if the rocker arm is felt very stiff or cannot be pushed down when it is pushed, the lash adjuster is in the normal condition. Therefore, check for other cause of noise. (4) Lash Adjuster Replacement Procedure Caution In the cylinder from which the lash adjuster is removed, the piston interferes with the valve when the valve is pushed down. Therefore, turn the crankshaft to keep the piston position down. In addition, the rocker arm located at the valve lifted by the cam cannot be removed. Therefore, turn the crankshaft to keep the cam from lifting the valve before removal of the rocker arm. 1. Using the special tool, press the valve down and remove the roller rocker arm.
2. Pull out the lash adjuster from the cylinder head. 3. Install a new lash adjuster having air removed to the cylinder head. 4. With the valve pressed down by the special tool, install the roller rocker arm. NOTE When the roller rocker arm is installed, place the pivot side of the rocker arm on the lash adjuster. Then, push down the valve and place the slipper side of the rocker arm on the valve stem end. LASH ADJUSTER REPLACEMENT Refer to LASH ADJUSTER CHECK.
TSB Revision
II-18 ENGINE ASSEMBLY
ENGINE - Engine Assembly
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Pre-removal Operation High Pressure Fuel Hose Release of Residual Pressure(RefertoGROUP 13A-ServiceAdjustment Procedures.) l Cruise Control Pump and Link Assembly Removal (Refer to GROUP 13G - Cruise Control.) l Hood Removal (Refer to GROUP 42 - Hood.) l Air Hose and Air Pipe <Turbo> Removal (Refer to GROUP 15 - Charge Air Cooler.) l Front Exhaust Pipe Removal (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) l Transaxle Assembly Removal (M/TI Refer to GROUP 22 - Transaxle Assembly.) (AIT: Refer to GROUP 23 - Transaxle Assembly.) l Radiator Removal (Refer to GROUP 14 - Radiator.)
l
Post-installation Operation l Radiator installation (RefertoGROUP 14-Radiator.) 0 Cruise Control Pump and Link Assembly Installation (Refer to GROUP 13G - Cruise Control.) l Transaxle Assembly Installation (M/T Refer to GROUP 22 - Transaxle Assembly.) (A/TI Refer to GROUP 23 - Transaxle Assembly.) l Front Exhaust Pipe Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) l Air Hose and Air Pipe <Turbo> Installation (Refer to GROUP 14 - Charge Air Cooler.) l Hood Installation (Refer to GROUP 42 - Hood.) l Engine Oil Supplying (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Accelerator Cable Adjustment (Refer to GROUP 13F - Engine Control.)
IV I 5 Nm 4 ft.lbs.
LA5 Nm - 4 ft.lbs.
40-45Nm 29-33 ft.lt 13.
ZOlFOO43
Removal steps
1. Accelerator cable connection 2. Brake booster vacuum hose connection 3. Booster vacuum hose connection <Turbo> 4. Fuel return hose connection 5. Fuel high pressure hose connection 6. Ground cable connection ( 7. Solenoid valve assembly 8. Vapor hose connection 9. Heater hose connection 10. EGR temperature sensor connector <Vehicles for California> 11. Drive belt (Generator and air conditioning) (Refer to P-1 l-7.) 12. Drive belt (Power steering) (Refer to P.ll-7.) 13. Generator harness connection 14. Heated oxygen sensor connector <Tu rho> 15. Air conditioning compressor 16. Power steering oil pump 17. Oil pressure switch connector (Power steering) 18. Oil cooler pipes connection <Turbo>
:i:
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Engine Assembly
II-19
loo-120 Nm zo,Foo58 7 2 - 8 7 ft.lbs. \
36
36,
f-j /-
70 Nm 51 ft.lb;s.
51-58 ft.lbs.
Olt-,z3
\\g--4 i g-g p& . .
00002118
19. Idle air control motor connector 20. TPS connector 21. Oil pressure switch and oil pressure gauge unit connector 22. Fuel injector harness connector 23. Knock sensor connector 24. Crankshaft position sensor connector* 25. Crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor connector*2 26. Engine coolant temperature switch connector (Air conditioning)*2 27. Engine coolant temperature sensor connector 28. Engine coolant temperature gauge unit connector 29. Condenser connector 30. Ignition coil connector
31. Ignition power transistor connector 32. Fuel injector connector 33. Variable induction motor connector <Non-Turbo> 34. Iii&$, oxygen sensor connector (B, ,Bd 35. Engine mounting bracket 36. Rear roll stopper bracket and engine connection bolt 4C, ,A( 37. Front roll stopper bracket and engine connection bolt 38. Engine assembly
YOTE 1992 model 1: 1993 model 1994 model
TSB Revision
II-20
ENGINE - Engine Assembly REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

+A, AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR / POWER STEERING OIL PUMP DISCONNECTION Disconnect air conditioning compressor and power steering oil pump (with the hose). NOTE The removed air conditioning compressor and power steering oil pump should be fastened (by using rope, etc.) in a position that will not interfere with the removal/installation of the engine assembly. +B, ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET REMOVAL Before removing the engine mount bracket installation bolt, use a chain block or similar arrangement to suspend the engine assembly (to the extent that there is no looseness of the chain).
+C, ENGINE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL After checking that the cables, hoses, harness connectors, etc. are all removed, slowly raise the chain block to lift the engine assembly upward out of the engine compartment.
INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS

.A( ENGINE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION When mounting the engine, check to be sure that the cables, hoses, harness connectors, etc. are all in the correct position. .B( ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET INSTALLATION Attach the engine mounting bracket so that the arrow mark on the mounting stopper is in the direction as shown in the illustration.
L/J
Eng/ine mount bracket'4OlN0052
Engine mount bracket -
ZOlFOO72
1 TSB Revision
ENGINE - Camshaft Oil Seals
II-21
CAMSHAFT OIL SEALS f
ki

Pre-removal Operation l Timing Belt Removal (Refer to P.ll-31.) l Intake Manifold Removal (Refer to GROUP 15 - Intake Manifold.) l Camshaft Position Sensor Removal (Refer to GROUP 16 - Cam Position Sensor and Crankshaft Position Sensor.) Post-installation Operation Camshaft Position Sensor installation (Refer to GROUP 16 - Cam Position Sensor and Crankshaft Position Sensor.) l Intake Manifold Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Intake Manifold.) l Timing Belt Installation (Refer to P.li-31.) l Accelerator Cable Adjustment (Refer to GROUP 13F - Engine Control.)
l
3 Nm 2.2 ft.lbs. 3 Nm
20 i NO&l?
Rocker cover
90.Nm 65 ft.lbs.
Sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8660 or squivalent Removal steps 1. Center cover (front bank) 2. Spark plug cables connection 3. Breather hose connection 4. PCV hose connection .C+ 5. Rocker cover +A, bB+ 6. Camshaft sprocket +B, .A( 7. Camshaft oil seals
TSB Revision
11-22
ENGINE - Camshaft Oil Seals REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

+A, CAMSHAFT SPROCKET REMOVAL Using a wrench at the hexagonal part of the camshaft (to prevent the crankshaft from turning), loosen the camshaft sprocket bolt. Caution Do not hold the camshaft sprocket with a tool, or a damaged sprocket could result.
Oil seal
20 1 MOO3 1
+B,CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL REMOVAL (1) Cut out a portion in the camshaft oil seal lip. (2) Cover the tip of a screwdriver with a cloth and apply it to the cutout in the oil seal to pry off the oil seal. Caution Use care not to damage the camshaft and cylinder head.
Camshaft

,A( CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION (1) Apply a small amount of engine oil to the oil seal lip. (2) Using the special tool, insert the oil seal.
.B+ CAMSHAFT SPROCKET INSTALLATION Using a wrench at the hexagonal part of the camshaft (to prevent the crankshaft from turning), tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt. Caution Do not hold the camshaft sprocket with a tool, or a damaged sprocket could result. .C+ ROCKER COVER INSTALLATION Tighten the rocker cover bolts in the order shown in the illustration. NOTE (1) Only No. 5 bolt in the rear bank differs from other bolts in length. Rear bank No. 5 bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mm (.79 in.) Except rear bank No. 5 bolt . . . . . . . . 10 mm (.39 in.) (2) Bolts are color-coded for the front and rear banks as follows: Front bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black Rear bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green (3) When the rocker cover gasket has been replaced, tighten bolts in this order and then, retighten bolts 1 to 6 to 4 Nm (2.9 ftlbs.).
Rear bank 6 011 010 09
Front bank 6 ZOll

1059
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Oil Pan and Oil Screen
11-23
OIL PAN AND OIL SCREEN

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Engine Oil Draining and Supplying (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Front Air Dam Removal and Installation <Active Aero> (Refer to GROUP 51 - Aero Parts.) l Under Cover Removal and installation
l l
Front Exhaust Pipe Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) Transfer Assembly Removal and Installation cAWD> (Refer to GROUP 22 - Transfer Assembly.)
Sealant: MITSUBISHI GENUINE Part No. MD970389 or equivalent

19 Nm
1A. fi . Ihs . . . . w-.
\ -n;lhs : p-.) I I
9 Nm - 7 ft.lbs. 75 Nm 54 ft.lbs. 36 Nm 26 ft.lbs.
/ A fi Iha
6 Nm
9 Nm 7 ft.lbs.
43-51 ft.lbs.
201F0006
00002105
60-70 Nm 43-51 ft.ibs.
Removal steps 1. Left member 2. Starter 3. Transaxle stay (front) 4. Transaxle stay (rear) cFWD> TSB Revision
5. Bell housing cover 6. Oil return pipes connection <Turbo> 7. Oil pan
11-24
MD998727 .------y 1
ENGINE - Oil Pan and Oil Screen

MD998727 -..----
____ \ -I , _ _ .F&g+ _._.-2 / /-i: _I &A _-
REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

dA,OIL PAN REMOVAL After removing the bolts, use the special tool and a brass bar to remove the oil pan from the cylinder block. : d
zL0583 j 1 ri, o:o~~~:.z
i.Q
Caution Remove the oil pan gradually since the flange of the oil pan is easy to deform.
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
II-25
CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL

/ L, R~~~~~~~,~LLATlON ~
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Timing Belt Removal and Installation

l
Crankshaft Position Sensor Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 16 - Camshaft Position Sensor and Crankshaft Position Sensor.)
ZOlN004.7
i
Removal steps 1. Crankshaft sprocket 2. Crankshaft sensing blade 3. Crankshaft spacer
+A,
A+ g: %kshaft front oil seal

dAbCRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL REMOVAL
(1) Make a notch in the oil seal lip section with a knife, etc. (2) Cover the end of a (-) screwdriver with a rag and insert into the notched section of the oil seal, and lever out the oil seal to remove it.
Camshaft
Caution Be careful not to damage the crankshaft and the oil pump case.
Oil is./; ~~~~,~I~

i
ZOlNOOld
Eder .J G -+Ypy-- :~~s~, yp4 ,* 1 /Ah I
INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

.A+ CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION
(1) Apply a small amount of engine oil to the oil seal lip and then insert. (2) Tap the oil seal into the cylinder block.
11-26
ENGINE - Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Transaxle Assembly Removal and Installation (M/T Refer to GROUP 22 - Transaxle Assembly.) (A/T: Refer to GROUP 23 - Transaxle Assembly.) l Clutch Cover and Clutch Disc Removal and Installation
73-77 Nm 53-56 ft.lbs.
W-W
Removal steps 1. Flywheel
4Bb .A4 2. Crankshaft rear oil seal
REMOVAL SERVICE
POINTS
+A, FLYWHEEL REMOVAL Stop the crankshaft pulley from turning, and remove the flywheel.
Caution Use only the specified special tools, otherwise the crankshaft pulley damper could be damaged.
+B,CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL REMOVAL (1) Make a notch in the lip section of the oil seal with a knife, etc. (2) Cover the end of (-) screwdriver with a rag, and insert into the notched section of the oil seal, and lever out the oil seal to remove it.
Camshaft
Caution Be careful not to damage the crankshaft and the oil seal case. TSB Revision
ENGINE - Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal

Cylinder blbck side
11-27

.A( CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL INSTALLATION (1) Apply a small amount of engine oil to the oil seal lip and then insert. (2) Tap the oil seal into the cylinder block.
b?ft *
P I i//1 Oil s&l ZOlM0031
ZOl NO01 1 000021,03
,.;
1 TSB Revision
11-28
ENGINE - Cylinder Head Gasket
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

Pre-removal Operation l Engine Coolant Draining (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Air Intake Manifold Removal (Refer to GROUP 15 - Air Intake Manifold.) l Turbocharger Removal <Turbo> (Refer to GROUP 15 - Turbocharger.) l Exhaust Manifold Removal (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Manifold.) l Timing Belt Removal (Refer to P.ll-31.) Post-installation Operation l Timing Belt Installation (Refer to P.li-31.) l Exhaust Manifold Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Manifold.) l Turbocharger Installation <Turbo> (Refer to GROUP 15 - Turbocharger.) l Air Intake Manifold Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Air Intake Manifold.) l Engine Coolant Supplying (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Accelerator Cable Adjustment (Refer to GROUP 13F - Engine Control.) l Engine Adjustment (Refer to i?ll-7.) 10 Nm 7 fi.lbS.
I j L.J
10 Nm 7 ft.ltp.
3 Nm
87-94 ft.lbs. (Non-turbo) 14 , ~~5pp.g~; iO5-115 Nm Rocker cover
24Nm
17 ft.lbs.
4
in.)
(.4
in.)
7 0 1 AIUM 7
ZOlLO217
sealant: 3M ATD Part Jo. 8660 or equivalent
90 Nm 65 ft.lbs.
Removal steps 1. Pipe assembly 2.. Blow-by hose 3.Center covet (Front bank) 4. Spark plug cable bD+ 5. Rocker cover (+ .C( 6. Intake camshaft sprocket 7. Timing belt rear cover (Center) 8. Ignition coil TSB Revision
9. Heater hose connection 10. Water hoses connection <Turbo> 11. Radiator hose connection 12. Thermostat housing 13. Water inlet pipe connection (Front bank) +B, .B+ 14. Cylinder head assembly .A+ 15. Cylinder head gasket
ENGINE - Cylinder Head Gasket REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
II-29
(A, INTAKE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET REMOVAL

(1) Using a wrench, hold the camshaft at its hexagon and remove the camshaft sprocket bolt.
Caution Locking the camshaft sprocket with a tool damages the sprocket.
(2) Remove the camshaft sprockets.
dB, CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

Using the special tool, remove the cylinder head assembly. NOTE Use of commercially available cylinder head bolt wrench is recommended.

dentification nark
.A4 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET INSTALLATION

(1) Make sure that the gasket has the proper identification mark for the engine. (2) Lay the cylinder head gasket on the cylinder block with the identification mark at the front top.
ZOlNOO951
,B+ CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

(1) Use a scraper to clean the gasket surface of the cylinder head assembly.
Caution Take care that no foreign material gets into the cylinder, coolant passages or oil passages.
(2) Using the special tool and a torque wrench, tighten the bolts to the specified torque in the order shown in the illustration (in two or three cycles).
ZOlL1044
L01L0472
( -
g-=~~:~~
Caution Install the head bolt washers with shear droop upward as shown in the illustration.
(3) Back off the bolts once and tighten them to the specified torque as shown in step (2). <Turbo> NOTE Use of commercially available cylinder head bolt wrench is recommended.
08
0 7
04 03
01 05
02 06
Front bank
ZOL;Cw 00003242
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Cylinder Head Gasket

.C+ INTAKE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET INSTALLATION
Using a wrench, hold the camshaft at its hexagon and tighten the bolt to specification. Caution
Locking the camshaft sprocket with a tool damages the sprocket.
Rear bank
.D+ ROCKER COVER INSTALLATION

Tighten the rocker cover bolts in the order shown in the illustration. NOTE (I) Only No. 5 bolt in the rear bank differs from other bolts in length. Rear bank No. 5 bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mm (.79 in.) Except rear bank No. 5 bolt . . . . . . . . 10 mm (.39 in.) (2) Bolts are color-coded for the front and rear banks as follows: Front bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black Rear bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green (3) When the rocker cover gasket has been replaced, tighten bolts in this order, and then retighten bolts 1 to 6 to 4 Nm (2.9 ft.lbs.).
Front bank 6
,,&&-$* ,~ .;,.:i . I
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Timing Belt
TIMING BELT
REMOVAL AtiD INSTALLATION

Pre-removal Operation l Under Cover (Front L.H., Side L.H.) Removal l Front Under Cover Panel Removal <Vehicle with Active Aero> (Refer to GROUP 51 - Aero Parts.) l Cruise Control Pump and Link Assembly Removal <Vehicle with Cruise Control> (Refer to GROUP 13G - Cruise Control.) l Generator Assembly Removal (Refer to GROUP 16 - Generator.) l Raise and Suspend the Engine to the Extent Force is not Applied to the Engine Mount Post-installation Operation Generator Assembly installation (Refer to GROUP 16 - Generator.) l Under Cover (Front L.H., Side L.H.) Installation l Front Under Cover Panel Installation <Vehicle with Active Aero> l Cruise Control Link Assembly Installation <Vehicle with Cruise Control> (Refer to GROUP 13G - Cruise Control.) l Engine Adjustment (Refer to F!ll-7.)
l
lo-12 Nm 7-9 ft.lbs. i L-- *. > lo-12 Nm 7-9 ft.lbs. A
I7
ZOSFOOO3
loo-120 Nm 72-87 ft.lbs.
;f$ .$T.
l(U-13 1.111 Nm --IL
7:2-87 ft.ibs. \ .z,
@k \&p 1 24\ N
l- ey,>
m,nl, /%&+-Em IW . 6, ~~~~,

%ft.lbs.
/ 105-115 Nm 76-83fLlbs.
2.9 ft.lbs.
ZOlFOO7l 00003248
Removal steps
Air hose Air pipe Tensioner assembly Drive belt (power steering) (Refer to P.ll-8.) 4A, .F+ 5. Crankshaft pulley 6. Brake fluid level sensor 7. Timing belt upper cover 8. Engine mount bracket 9. Idler pulley (generator/airconditioning) 46, .E+ 10. Engine support bracket
1. 2. 3. 4.
11. Camshaft position sensor and crankshaft position sensor connector* .D+ 12. Timing belt lower cover .C+ l Tming belt tension adjustment 4C, ,B+ 13. Timing belt .A( 14. Auto tensioner
NOTE * From 1993 model I Up to 1993 model l 2 From 1994 model
TSB Revision
II-32
ENGINE - Timing Belt REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

+A, CRANKSHAFT PULLEY REMOVAL Using special tools, remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft. Caution Use only the specified special tools, or a damaged pulley damper could result.
(B, ENGINE SUPPORT BRACKET REMOVAL Remove the engine support bracket in the numbered sequence shown in the illustration. Spraying lubricant, slowly remove the bolt (reamer bolt) indicated by the arrow. Caution Keep in mind that the reamer bolt is sometimes heat seized on the engine support bracket.
(C, TIMING BELT REMOVAL (1) Align the timing marks.
(2) Make a mark on the back of the timing belt indicating the direction of rotation so it may be reassembled in the same direction if it is to be reused. (3) Loosen the center bolt on the tensioner pulley to remove the timing belt. Caution Water or oil on the belt shortens its life drastically, so the removed timing belt, sprocket, and tensioner must be free from oil and water. These parts should not be washed. Replace parts if seriously contaminated. If there is oil or water on each part check the front case oil seals, camshaft oil seal and water pump for leaks.

.A( AUTO TENSIONER INSTALLATION (1) If the auto tensioner rod is in its fully extended position, reset it as follows. 1) Keep the auto tensioner level and, in that position, clamp it in the vise with soft jaws. 2) Push in the rod little by little with the vise until the set hole (A) in the rod is aligned with that (B) in the cylinder.
ZOlLlO3
TSB Revision
ENGINE - Timing Belt
11-33
ZUlL104!
Caution Push in the rod slowly to prevent the push rod from being damaged. 3) Insert a wire [I.4 mm (.055 in.) in diameter] into the set holes. 4) Unclamp the auto tensioner from the vise. (2) Install the auto tensioner. SW Caution Leave the wire installed in the auto tensioner. .B( TIMING BELT INSTALLATION (1) Align the timing marks on the respective sprockets. In case of the camshaft sprockets in the front bank, proceed as follows: 1) Install the crankshaft pulley. Shift the timing mark on the crankshaft sprocket by three teeth to lower the piston in No. 1 cylinder slightly from the top dead center on compression stroke. Caution Turning the camshaft sprocket with the piston in No. 1 cylinder located at TDC on compression stroke may cause the valves to interfere with the piston. 2) Make sure that the timing marks on the camshaft sprockets for intake and exhaust valves are not within the range A in the illustration at left. If the timing mark is within range A, turn the camshaft sprocket to move the timing mark to the area closest to the range A. Caution In range A, the cam lobe on the camshaft lifts the valve through the rocker arm and the camshaft sprocket is apt to rotate by reaction force of the valve spring. Therefore, be careful not to have the finger pinched between the sprockets. 3) Turn the camshaft sprocket for either the intake or exhaust valve to locate the timing mark as shown in the illustration at left. Then turn the other crankshaft to locate the timing mark as shown in the illustration at left. Caution If the intake and exhaust valves of the same cylinder lift simultaneously, interference with each other may result. Therefore, turn the intake valve camshaft sprocket and the exhaust valve camshaft alternately. 4) Turn the camshaft sprocket clockwise to align the timing marks. If the camshaft sprocket has been turned excessively, turn it counterclockwise to align the timing marks.
20 1 N~U~I
Front bank l : Awrox. 35 ZO,NO,Og

Rocker cover side Exhaust valve
side
Front bank
1 TSB Revision
ENGINE -. Timing Belt 5) Align the timing mark of the crankshaft sprocket. NOTE Shift the timing mark of the crankshaft sprocket one tooth in counterclockwise direction to facilitate belt installation.
ZOlN0046
- Pin hole - -- Center bolt
(2) Using bulldog clips, install the timing belt in the following order with care not to allow the belt to slack. (1) Exhaust camshaft sprocket (front bank side) -+ (2) Intake camshaft sprocket (front bank side) + (3) Water pump pulley + (4) Intake camshaft sprocket (rear bank side) + (5) Exhaust camshaft sprocket + (6) Idler pulley + (7) Crankshaft sprocket + (8) Tensioner pulley NOTE Since the camshaft sprockets turn easily, secure them with box wrenches to install the timing belt. Caution 1. Be careful, the camshaft is turned by the reaction of valve spring. 2. If the timing belt is reused, install it so that the arrow marks made at removal are in the direction of rotation. (3) Turn the tensioner pulley so that its pin holes are located above the center bolt. Then, press the tensioner pulley against the timing belt and, at the same time, temporarily tighten the center bolt. (4) Check that the timing marks on all sprockets are aligned properly. (5) Remove the four clips. .C( TIMING BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT (1) Rotate the crankshaft l/4 turn counterclockwise, then rotate it clockwise until the timing marks are aligned. (2) Loosen the center bolt on the tensioner pulley. Using the special tool and torque wrench, apply tensioning torque to the timing belt and, at the same time, tighten the center bolt to specification. Specified torque: 10 Nm (7 ft.lbs.) [Timing belt tensioning torque] Caution When tightening the center bolt, make sure that the tensioner pulley is not rotated together. (3) Remove the set pin from the auto tensioner. At this time, make sure that the set pin can be easily removed. (4) Rotate the crankshaft two turns clockwise and leave it as is for five minutes or more. Then, check again that the set pin can be easily removed from, and installed to, the auto tensioner.
ZOlL0948
1 TSB Revision
ENGINE - Timina Belt
11-35
201L094
NOTE Even if the set pin cannot be easily inserted, the auto tensioner is normal if its rod protrusion is within specification. Standard value (A): 3.8-4.5 mm (.149-.177 in.) If the protrusion is out of specification, repeat steps (1) to (4). (5) Check again that timing marks on all sprockets are aligned properly. .Dl TIMING BELT LOWER COVER INSTALLATION Since the mounting bolts of timing cover are different in size depending on location, insert them with care.
cl
992 models
Thread diameter x length
Thread diameter x Lenclth mm (in.) Reamer bolt
*@aID--+&Jlox3oP(.39x 1.06)
-\12x71 -39 3 (.47x 2.50) Y0,Nm,2
FE4 ENGINE SUPPORT BRACKET INSTALLATION Since the mounting bolts of engine support bracket are different in size depending on location, insert them in numbered sequence. Caution When installing the reamer bolt, tighten it, slowly spraying lubricant on the reamer area.
.F+ CRANKSHAFT PULLEY INSTALLATION Using the special tool, attach the crankshaft pulley to the crankshaft. Caution Use only the specified special tools, otherwise a damaged pulley damper could result.
-
1 TSB Revision
11-36 ENGINE OIL COOLER
ENGINE - Engine Oil Cooler

l
Preremoval and Post-installation Operation Engine Oil Draining and Supplying (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) 30-35 N m
9 ft.lbs.
5
4W
ZOZFOOOl
Removal steps
1. Front splash shield extension 2. Engine oil feed hose 3. Engine oil return hose 4. Engine oil return tube 5. Engine oil cooler
REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

dAbENGINE OIL FEED HOSE / ENGINE OIL RETURN TUBE REMOVAL Caution Be sure to hold the weld nut of the oil cooler while loosening the eye bolt.
INSPECTION
l
o
l l
Check the engine oil cooler fins for bends, breaks or plugging. Check the engine oil cooler hoses for cracks, damage, clogging or deterioration. Check the gaskets for damage or deformation. Check the eye bolts for clogging or deformation.
TSB Revision
13-1
L.1
FUEL,
CONTENTS
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION (MFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A ELECTRONIC CONTROL TYPE CARBURETOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13B
CONVENTIONAL TYPE CARBURETOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13c VARIABLE VENTURI TYPE CARBURETOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13D
DIESEL FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13E
Li
FUEL SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.................*............ 13F CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refer to GROUP 17 TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . t3l-l
NOTE Shaded groups in the above list are not included in this manual.
13-2
13A-1
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION

CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System Diagram . . . . . . . .3 INJECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 KNOCK SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION OF MFI COMPONENTS <From 1994 models except Non Turbo up to 1995 models for Federal> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Exhaust Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning Switch and Compressor Clutch Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-lock Braking Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barometric Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boost Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed Throttle Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGR Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGR Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Load Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine and Transaxle Total Control Signal . . . . . . . . Enoine Control Module Power Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Control Module (ECM) Terminal Voltages Inspection . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid . . . . . . . Fan Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pressure Solenoid . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pressure Test.. . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._............ Fuel Pump Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Circuit Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heated Oxygen Sensor . . . . . , . . . _ . . . _ . . . . . Idle Air Control Motor (Stepper Motor Type) . . . . Ignition Coil and Ignition Power Transistor . . . . . Ignition Switch-ST.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . _ . . . . . . . Ignition Switch-ST and Park/Neutral Position Switch (PNP Switch) . . . . . _ . . _ . . . . . 289 188 274 236 277 217 273 225 223 193 188 227 269 246 238 278 199 280 219 268 240 270 279 200 279 211 211 247 263 264 229 230 Induction Control Valve Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Intake Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Knock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Manifold Differential Pressure (MDP) Sensor . . . . . . 244 Muffler Mode Changeover Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Power Steering Pressure Switch ................. 235 Power Supply (MFI relay) and Ignition Switch-IG . . 193 Release of Residual Pressure from High Pressure Fuel Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Throttle Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Turbocharger Waste Gate Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Variable Induction Control Motor (DC Motor) . . . . . . 276 Vehicle Speed Sensor (Electrical Speedometer Type) ................... 233 (Mechanical Speedometer Type) ................. 231 Volume Air Flow Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION OF MFI COMPONENTS <Up to 1995 Non Turbo models for Federal and up to 1993 models> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Active Exhaust Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Air Conditioning Switch and Compressor Clutch Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Anti-lock Braking Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Barometric Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Boost Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Camshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Closed Throttle Position Switch .................. 101 Components Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Component Location ............................. 60 Crankshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 EGR Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 EGR Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Electrical Load Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Engine and Transaxle Total Control Signal . . . . . . . . 177 Engine Control Module Power Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Engine Control Module (ECM) Terminal Voltages Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Fan Motor Relay (Radiator, Air Conditioning Condenser) . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE
LJ
13A-2
Lq
Fuel Pressure Solenoid., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Fuel Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Fuel Pump.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Fuel Pump Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Fuel Pump Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Fuel Pump Circuit Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Heated Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Idle Air Control Motor (Stepper Motor Type) . . . . . . 153 Ignition Coil and Ignition Power Transistor . . . . . . . 158 Ignition Switch-ST and Park/Neutral Position Switch (PNP Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Ignition Switch-ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Induction Control Valve Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . 133 Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Intake Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Knock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Muffler Mode Changeover Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Power Steering Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Power Supply (MFI relay) and Ignition Switch-IG . . . 65 Release of Residual Pressure from High Pressure Fuel Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Throttle Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Turbocharger Waste Gate Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Variable Induction Control Motor (DC Motor) . . . . . . 174 Vehicle Speed Sensor (Electrical Speedometer Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 (Mechanical Speedometer Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Volume Air Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Basic Idle Speed Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Closed Throttle Position Switch and Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Curb Idle Speed Check . . . . . . . . . . Refer to GROUP 11 Fixed SAS Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Throttle Body (Throttle Valve Area) Cleaning . . . . . . . 57 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 THROlTLE BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Check Chart Classified by Problem Symptoms . . . . . 52 Check Engine/Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 17 Explanation and Cautions about Harness Check . . . . 16 Explanation of Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . 15 On-board Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Problem Symptoms Table (For Your Information) . . . . 54 Read out of Diagnostic Trouble Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
I I ~ !
I I L/ ~
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - General Information
13A-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION (MFI) SYSTEM DIAGRAM ci <Federal Non Turbo - Up to 1995 models>
I I 1 I I I I
-I
TPS tr& posItIon Yh osed. Intake air temp. sensor
II
c From fuel tank ._... ._-. .-w EVAP canister Electric load switch
I 1~2~3~4k i 6 7 8 *
I!
module
27FU1323 NOTE 1: EVAP purge solenoid 2 : lniector 3: ldie air control motor 4: Variable induction control motor 5: AK compressor clutch relay 6: Fuel pump relay 7: Ignition coil 8: Check engine/malfunction indicator lamp 9: Engine/transaxle total control
iJ
TSB Revision

<California Non Turbo - Up to 1993 models>
, TPS (with closed throttle position switch) IACmotor / / ,Intake air temp. sensor
I;
Heated oxygen sensor c Knock sensor Enoine coolant temo. sensor ) ., Y Induction control valve position sensor m Throttle position sensor, Closed throttle position switch lntake air temp. sensor m Volume air flow sensor, Barometric pressure sensor
6 7 t
Z7FU1325
NOTE 1: EVAP purge solenoid 2: Injector 3: EGR solenoid 4: Idle air control motor 5: Variable induction control motor 6: AIC compressor clutch relay 7: Fuel pump relay 8: Ignition coil 9: Check engine/malfunction indicator lamp *lo: Engine/transaxle total control
TSB Revision

<California Non Turbo - 1994 and 1995 models>
13A-5
V.I.C. motor
I IAC motor
Intake air temp. sen~nr
Fuel tank *
Heated :2i P ::
nt I IKr. _ _.
Engme coolant temp. sense+ lnauctron control valve posrtron sensor * I nrottle positron sensor, Closed tnrottle poslkon swatch * Intake arr temp. sensor *
J
Z7FU1462
NOTE 1 :. f%/AP purge solenoid 2: Injector 3: EGR ~plnnni.4 .mIIIIY 4: Idle air control motor 5: Variable induction control motor 6: Heater control 7: A/c wpwwxenr ,.I, ldlll, r,,*,rk a..,u, p~.xe *8: Fuel pump relay 7 Ignition coil : Check engine/malfunction indicator lamp 11: tngme/trfLnsaxle total control
1 TSB Revision

<Non Turbo - From 1996 models>
I
/
I
1 1 IA? motor 1 Intake air temperature sensor /
- From fuel tank
module
Encine coolant temp. sensor . Induction control valve position sensor _ Throttle position sensor, Closed throttle cosition switch
NOTE l l : EVAP purge solenoid 2: Injector 3: EGR solenoid 4: Idle air control motor 5: Variable induction contorl motor 6: Heater control 7: A/C compressor clutch relay l 8: Fuel pump relay 9: Ignition coil, Ignition power transistor IO: Check engine/malfunction indicator lamp 11: Engine/transaxle total control
TSB Revision

<Turbo - 1992 models>
13A-7
II /
;\
-7
intake air
l!&i;gcontrol
NOTE 1: injector 2: EGR solenoid 3: IAC motor 4: Fuel pressure solenoid 5: Evaporative emission purge solenoid 6: Turbocharger waste gate solenoid 7: AC compressor clutch relay 8: Fuel pump relay 9: Ignition coil 10: Check engine/malfunction indicator lamp 11: Muffler mode control
1 TSB Revision
13A-8
<Turbo - From 1993 Up to 1995 models>
R%er@+
/I
/f/j
, !I[
IAC motet
Intake air temp. senso
Engine ContrOl nlcdb
27FU1463
NOTE 1: Injector 2: EGR solenoid 3: Evaporative emission purge solenoid 4: IAC motor 5: Fuel pressure solenoid 6: Turbocharger waste gate solenoid 7: AK compressor clutch relay 8: Fuel pump relay 9: Ignition coil 10: Check engine/malfunction indicator lamp 11: Muffler mode control
1 TSB Revision

<Turbo - From 1996 models>
13A-9
EGR
IAC motor-
ii
Intake air temperature senso \
, , 1 I
C&shaftposition
sensor
FlW NC switch _ P/S pressure switch c Vehicle speed sensqr _ T
mohle
lqnition coil. Iqnition cower transistor Check enaine~ Iam Enqineltransaxle total control
7FUl841
TSB Revision
13A-10
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
California <Non Turbo>
emperature sensor c emiconductor type
l l: 1992 models l 2: 1993 models

1:: : :E: : 1994 and 1995 models Except 1992 models From 1996 models Up to 1993 models
NOTE
*7: From 1994 models TSB Revision

terns Sensors 4ctuators Power steering pressure switch Multiport fuel injection (MFI) relay type Injector type and number Injector identification mark <Non Turbo> Injector identification mark <Turbo> Variable induction control motor <Non Turbo> Evaporative emission purge solenoid EGR solenoid <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> <Federal Non Turbo - From 1996 models> Fuel pressure solenoid <Turbo> Turbocharger waste gate solenoid <Turbo> Fuel pressure regulator Regulated pressure kPa (psi) <Non Turbo> Regulated pressure kPa (psi) <Turbo> Specifications Contact switch type Contact switch type Electromagnetic, 6 BDH21 O*? l 3 SDH210 BDL360 Direct current motor type ON/OFF type solenoid valve*4 Duty cycle type solenoid valve*5 Duty cycle type solenoid valve
13A-11
ON/OFF type solenoid valve Duty cycle type solenoid valve 335 (47.6) 300 (43.5)
NOTE *I: Up to 1993 models *2: From 1994 models <except 1996 and subsequent M/T models> 1:: 1996 and subsequent M/T models : Up to 1995 models *5: From 1996 models
-TSB Revision
13A-12
e speed when air conditi
gine coolant temperatu
;OTE : Up to 1992 models *2: From 1993 models
SEALANT
Items Engine coolant temperature sensor threaded portion Specified sealant 3M NUT Locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Special Tools
SPECIAL TOOLS
Reading diagnostic trouble code MFI system inspection
tester cMUT>
Test harness set
Basic idle speed adjustment
Inspection by oscilloscop
TSB Revision
13A-14
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Special Tools
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Troubleshooting
13A-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
,
L./
START
EXPLANATION OF TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Effective troubleshooting procedures for MFI system problems are given below. 1. Verification of trouble symptom l Reproduce trouble symptom and verify the characteristics of the trouble and the conditions (engine condition, driving conditions, etc.) under which it is produced. 2. Reading of diagnostic trouble code l Read diagnostic trouble code and if a malfunction code is output, locate and correct the trouble referring to the DIAGNOSIS CHART. 3. Estimation of the causes of trouble and setting of check items l Referring to the Check Chart, verify the check items and checking order for the trouble symptom. 4. Inspection of engine control module input/output signals l Using the scan tool or oscilloscope, check the engine control module input/output signals. l If the signals are normal, judge the sensor input/ actuator control as normal and proceed to check the input/output signals of the next check item. 5. Inspection of MFI system component harness l If the engine control module input/output signals are abnormal, check the MFI system component body harness and repair as necessary. l After repair, check the engine control module input/ output signals again. If they are normal, proceed to check the input/output signals of the next check item. 6. Inspection of individual MFI system components l If the body harness is normal but the engine control module input/output signals are abnormal, check individual MFI system components and repair or replace as necessary. l After repair or replacement, check the engine control module input/output signals again. If they are normal, proceed to check the input/output signals of the next check item. 7. Re-inspection and repair of trouble symptom l If the harness inspection and individual component inspection results are normal but the engine control module input/output signals are abnormal, re-examine the causes of trouble referring to the troubleshooting hints and the checks and repairs included in other groups. 8. Verification and prevention of reoccurrence after repair l Perform tests to see if the same problems occur again and make sure that the same problems will not be repeated. l Remove the true causes of the trouble to prevent its reoccurrence.
1 1. Verification of trouble symptom
3.
Estimation of the causes of trouble and setting of check items
4. Inspection of engine control module input/output signals
c 5. Inspection of MFI system component harness I
6.
Inspection of individual MFI system components
Re-inspection and repair of trouble
8. Verification and prevention of reoccurrence after repair

l
END
1 TSB Revision
13A-16
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Troubleshooting EXPLANATION AND CAUTIONS ABOUT HARNESS CHECK
l
The connector symbol shown is as viewed from the terminal end of the connector inside the vehicle. B+ used as the standard value in voltage check stands for system voltage.
26FU126
When checking a waterproof connector for circuit continuity, be sure to use the special tool, Test Harness. Never insert the test probe from the harness side as thiscauses loss of waterproof characteristics and corrosion may result. There are various test harnesses and the appropriate one for the connector being tested should be used.
If the appropriate test harness for the particular connector is not available, the use of the Test Harness Set (MB991348) which can be connected directly between the terminals is recommended. When checking the terminal voltage with the connector disconnected, do not insert the test probe if the check terminal is female. If the test probe is forced into the terminal, poor contact may be caused.
ZOlL1025 l
Jumper wire
When checking an open circuit of a wire with its ends physically separated, ground one end using a jumper wire and check the continuity between the other end and ground. Repair the wire if there is no continuity.
i =
26FU1217
When checking short-circuit to ground of a wire, open one end of the wire and check continuity between the other end and ground. If there is continuity, the wire is short-circuited to ground and requires repair. For checking continuity, use an analog ohmmeter (or circuit tester) as a rule.
1 TSB Revision

l
13A-17
If the sensor impressed voltage is abnormal, check the wire for an open circuit or short-circuit to ground and repair as necessary. If the wire is normal, replace the engine control module and check again. To check the voltage, use a digital voltmeter (or circuit tester) as a rule. [However, use an analog voltmeter for checking the power transistor drive voltage.]
r Check engine/malfunction indicator lamp
Z6FU1219
CHECK ENGINE/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

Among the on-board diagnostic items, a check engine/malfunction indicator lamp comes on to notify the driver of the emission control items when an irregurality is detected. However, when an irregular signal returns to normal and the engine control module judges that it has returned to normal, the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp goes out. Moreover, when the ignition switch is turned off, the lamp goes out. Even if the ignition switch is turned on again, the lamp does not come on until the irregularity is detected. Here, immediately after the ignition switch is turned on, the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp is lit for 5 seconds to indicate that the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp operates normally. ITEMS INDICATED BY .THE CHECK ENGINE/ MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP <Up to 1995 models>
Engine control module Heated oxygen sensor Volume air flow sensor Intake air temoerature sensor Throttle position sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Crankshaft position sensor Camshaft position sensor Barometric oressure sensor 1 Knock sensor Ignition timing adjustment signal Injector EGR system <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> Ignition coil, ignition power transistor unit
,?66FOOll
Caution
The check engine/malfunction indicator lamp comes on when the line of the ignition timing adjustment terminal is shorted to ground. Therefore, the lamp also comes on when the ignition timing adjustment terminal is grounded to adjust the ignition timing, but this does not show any abnormality. TSB Revision
13A-18
ITEMS INDICATED BY THE CHECK ENGINE/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP <From 1996 models>
2 sensor circuit malfunctio
dle control system ma
TSB Revision

NOTE 1. After the Engine Control Module (ECM) detects a malfunction, the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp illuminates when the engine is next turned on and the same malfunction is re-detected. However, for items marked with a I*, the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp illuminates on the first detection of the malfunction. 2. After the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp illuminates, it will be switched off under the following conditions.
l
13A-19
When the ECM monitored the powertrain malfunction three times* and detected no malfunction. *: In this case, one time indicates from engine start to stop. For misfiring or a fuel trim malfunction, when driving conditions (engine speed, engine coolant temperature, etc.) are similar to those when the malfunction was first recorded.
Caution If the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp illuminates because of a malfunction of the ECM, transmission between the scan tool and the ECM cannot occur. In this case, the diagnostic trouble code cannot be read.
CHECK ENGINE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION (1) Check that when the ignition switch is turned on, the lamp illuminates for about 5 seconds and then goes out. (2) If the lamp does not illuminate, check for open circuit in harness, blown fuse and blown bulb.
i
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC <Up to 1995 models>

The engine control module monitors the input/output signals (some signals at all times and the others under specified conditions) of the engine control module. When it is noticed that an irregularity has continued for a specified time or longer from when the irregular signal is initially monitored, passing a certain number, the engine control module judges that an irregularity has occurred, memorizes the diagnostic trouble code, and outputs the signal to the diagnostic output terminal. There are 23 diagnostic items, including the normal state, and the diagnostic results can be read out with a voltmeter or scan tool. Moreover, since memorization of the diagnostic trouble codes is backed up directly by the battery, the diagnostic results are memorized even if the ignition key is turned off. The diagnostic trouble codes will, however, be erased when the battery terminal or the engine control module connector is disconnected. The diagnostic trouble code can also be erased by turning on the ignition switch and sending the diagnostic trouble code erase signal from the scan tool to the engine control module.
TSB Revision
13A-20

Caution If the sensor connector is disconnected with the ignition switch turned on, the diagnostic trouble code is memorized. In this case, send the diagnostic trouble code erase signal from the scan tool to the engine control module or disconnect the battery terminal (-) for 10 seconds or more, and the diagnostic memory will be erased. The 23 diagnostic items are provided as follows, and if plural items are activated, they are all indicated sequentially from the smallest code number. Caution The diagnostic trouble code for the ignition timing adjustment signal is output when the line of the ignition timing adjustment terminal is shorted to ground. Therefore, the diagnostic trouble code is also output when the ignition timing adjustment terminal is grounded to adjust the ignition timing, but this does not show any abnormality.
DIAGNOSTIC CHART (FAULT TREE)

Code No. Output signal pattern Diagnostic item Engine control module
l l l
Check item (Remedy) Fuse Harness and connector Ground (Replace ECM if power + ground available)
Memory
otherthan 1994andlaterCalifomia
Harness and connector Heated oxygen sensor Fuel pressure 0 Injectors (Replace if defective ) Intake air leaks
l l l l
Retained
12
Volume air flow sensor
:_J-uuL Intake air temperature sensor

l l
Harness and connector Retained (If harness and connector are normal, replacevolumeairflow sensor assembly.)
Harness and connector Retained Intake air temperature sensor
l l l
Harness and connector Retained Throttle position sensor Closed throttle position switch
NOTE Do not replace the ECM until a thorough terminal check reveals there are no short/open circuit.
TSB Revision

Code No. 21 Output signal pattern Diagnostic item Enginecoolanttemperaturesensor
l l
13A-21
Memory
Check item (Remedy)
Harness and connector Retained Engine coolant temperature sensor
:=
Z12AO107
Crankshaft position sensor 22 :l-uLnnYl2AO107
Harness and connector Retained (If harness and connector are normal, replace crankshaft position sensor assembly.)
Camshaft position sensor
23 24
:m
x12.40107
Harness and connector Retained (If harness and connector are normal, replace camshaft position sensor.)
Vehicle speed sensor
l l
Harness and connector Vehicle speed sensor
Retained
25
H
L u I nmn
v12Ao107
Barometric pressure sensor
Retained Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace barometric pressure sensor assembly.)
Knock sensor 31 :nnrLnZ12Ao466
Retained Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace knocksensor.)
36
Ignition timing adjustment signal <DOHC>
Harness and connector
39
H L U1 y,2Ao,05
Heated oxygen sensor <Federal - Turbo> Right bank heated oxygen sensor (front) cl994 and later California model> Injector
l l l l l
Retained Harness and connector Heated oxygen sensor Fuel pressure Injectors (Replace if defective) Intake air leaks Retained
41
Harness and connector 0 Injector coil resistance

l
rm x1zA0105
43 l Harness and connector EGR <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> l EGR thermo-sensor l EGR valve l EGR solenoid l EGR valve control vacuum
Retained
F-
w12Ao105
NOTE Do not replace the ECM until a thorough terminal check reveals there are no short/open circuit.
TSB Revision
13A-22
Code No. 44

Output signal pattern Diagnostic item Check item (Remedy) Memory Retained
Ignition coil, ignition powertransis- l Harness and connector tor unit l Ignition coil (No. l-4 cylinder) l Ignition power transistor unit :v12Ao105
d ~ , ~ (
52
Ignition coil, Ignition power transistor unit (No. 2-5 cylinder) Y=

u12Ao105
l l l
Harness and connector Ignition coil Ignition power transistor unit
Retained
53
Ignition coil, Ignition power transistor unit (No. 3-6 cylinder) :T12A0105
l l l
Harness and connector Ignition coil Ignition power transistor unit
Retained
59 :m
s12Ao105
/ Left bank heated oxygen sensor 1 %%!omia model from 1994>
I Retained
I I
: $lts&$z!? SenSor l Injectors (Replace if defective) l Intake air leaks

l
61
Acablefromtransaxlecontrolmodule, for transmission of torque reduction signal CAKP :=

R12A0105
Harness and connector Retained (If harness and connector are normal, replace only transaxle control module.)
62
Induction control valve position sensor <Non Turbo> Y-
Q12A0105
Harness and connector Retained (If harness, connector and induction control valve are normal, replace air intake plenum assembly.)
l
69 ym
P12AOlOS
Right bank heated oxygen sensor $!$fornia model from 1994)
Retained
: ~~?$e%?ure SenSor l Injectors (Replace if defective) l Intake air leaks -
tinuous)
Normal state
ui240104
NOTE Do not reljlace the ECM until a thorough terminal check reveals there are no short/open circuit.
TSB Revision

DIAGNOSTIC DETECTION LOGIC
13A-23
Fault ID 11
Title Heated Oxygen Sensor (front) <Except 1994 and Later California model> / Left Bank Heated Oxygen Sensor (front) cl994 and Later California model> Effect Probable causes
Background The oxygen sensor converts the oxygen density in the exhaust gas to a voltage and outputs it. l The engine control module checks the change of an oxygen sensor output voltage (Lean/Rich) in the air/fuel ratio closed loop control.
Limp-in Air/fuel ratio closed loop control is not performed.
Range of Check l 3 minutes have passed after engine was started. l Engine coolant temperature is approx. 80C (176F) or more. l Intake air temperature is 20-50C (68-122F). l Engine speed is approx. 1,900-2,200 r/min. l Vehicle is moving at constant speed on a flat, level road surface. Set Conditions The oxygen sensor output voltage does not cross specified voltage for specified seconds.
Oxygen sensor deteriorated. Open or shorted oxygen sensor circuit, or loose connector. 0 Incorrect fuel pressure. l Injector failed. l Air intake. l Engine control module failed.
l l
Fault ID 12
Title Effect Volume Air Flow Sensor

Limp-in (a) Uses the throttle position sensor signal and engine signal speed (crankshaft position sensor signal) for basic injector drive time and basic ignition timing from the pre-set mapping. (b) Fixes the IAC motor in the appointed position so idle air control is not performed.
l l
Probable causes
Volume air flow sensor failed. Open or shorted volume air flow sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
Background While the engine is running, the volume air flow sensor outputs a pulse signal which corresponds to the volume of air flow. l The engine control module checks whether the frequency of this signal output by the volume air flow sensor while the engine is running is at or above the set value.
l
Range of Check Engine speed is 500 r/min or more. Set Conditions Sensor output frequency is 3 Hz or less for 4 seconds.
TSB Revision
13A-24
Fault ID 13
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Troubleshootina

Title Effect
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Intake air temperature sensor failed. 0 Open or shorted the intake air temperature sensor circuit, or loose connector. l Engine control module failed.
l
Probable causes
Background Limp-in 0 The intake air temperature sensor converts the intake air Controls as if the intake temperature to a voltage and outputs it. air temperature is 25C l The engine control module checks whether the voltage is within (77F). a specified range. Range of Check Ignition switch : ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts.
l
Set Conditions l Sensor output voltage is 4.6 V or more (corresponding to an intake air temperature of 45% (49F) or less) for 4 seconds. or l Sensor output voltage is 0.2 V or less (corresponding to an intake air temperature of 125C (257F) or more) for 4 seconds.
Probable causes
Range of Check Ignition switch : ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts.
l
Set Conditions l When the closed throttle position switch is ON, the sensor output voltage is 2 V or more for 4 seconds.
\
d i
TSB Revision

Fault ID Title Effect Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Limp-in Controls as if the engine coolant temperature is 80% (176F).
l l
Probable causes
Engine coolant temperature sensor failed. Open or shorted the engine coolant temperature sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
21
l
Background The engine coolant temperature sensor converts the engine coolant temperature to a voltage and outputs it. l The engine control module checks whether the voltage is within a specified range. In addition, it checks the engine coolant temperature (signal) does not drop while the engine is warming up. Range of Check, Set Conditions Range of check l Ignition switch : ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts. Set conditions l Sensor output voltage is 4.6 V or more (corresponding to an engine coolant temperature of 45% (-49F) or less for 4 seconds. or l Sensor output voltage is 0.1 V or less (correspondinf to an engine coolant temperature of 140C (284F) or more for 4 seconds. Range of check Ignition switch : ON l Engine spped is approx. 50 r/min or more. Set conditions l Ohe sensor output voltage increases from 1.6 V or less (corresponding to an engine coolant temperature of 40C (104F) or more) to 1.6 V or more (correponding to an engine coolant temperature of 40C (104F) or less). l After this, the sensor output voltage is 1.6 V or more for 5 minutes.
l
Li
Fault ID 22
l
Title Effect Crankshaft Position Sensor

No limp-in
l l
Probable causes
Crankshaft position sensor failed. Open or shorted crankshaft position sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
Background When the engine is running, the crankshaft position sensor outputs a pulse signal. l The engine control module checks whether the pulse signal is input while the engine is cranking. l The engine control module checks the pulse signal patterns of the crankshaft position sensor. Range of Check, Set Conditions Range of check l Ignition switch : ON l Engine is not cranking. Set conditions Regular signal patterns for cylinder discrimination from the crankshaft position sensor signal and the camshaft position sensor signal are not input 20 times in a 10 seconds period. Range of check Engine is cranking. Set conditions Sensor output voltage does not change for 4 seconds (no pulse signal input).
1TSB Revision
13A-26
Fault ID 23
l

Title Effect Camshaft Position Sensor
Limp-in (a) Injects fuel into all cylinders simultaneously. (After the ignition switch is turned to ON, the No.1 cylinder top dead center is not detected at all.) (b) Cuts off the fuel supply 4 seconds after a problem is detected. (After the ignition switch is turned to ON, the No.1 cylinder top dead center is not detected at all.)
l l
Probable causes
Camshaft position sensor failed. Open or shorted camshaft position sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
Background When the engine is running, the camshaft position sensor outputs a pulse signal. 0 The engine control module checks whether the pulse signal is input. 0 The engine control module checks the pulse signal patterns of the camshaft position sensor. Range of Check, Set Conditions Range of check l Ignition switch : ON 0 Engine speed is approx. 50 r/min or more. Set conditions Sensor output voltage does not change for 4 seconds (no pulse signal input). Range of check Ignition switch : ON l Engine is not cranking. Set conditions Regular signal patterns for cylinder discrimination from the crankshaft position sensor signal and the camshaft position sensor signal are not input 20 times in a 10 seconds period.
l
le speed sensor outputs a pulse signal while the vehicle ne control module checks whether the pulse signal Range of Check Ignition switch : ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts. l Closed throttle position switch : OFF l Engine speed is 3,000 r/min or more. l Driving under high engine load conditions.
l
ntrol module failed.
Set Conditions ut voltage does not change for 4 seconds (no pulse
TSB Revision

Fault ID 25
ii
l
13A-27
Title Effect Barometric Pressure Sensor

l l
Probable causes
Barometric pressure sensor failed. Open or shorted barometric pressure sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
Limp-in Background The barometric pressure sensor outputs a voltage which Controls as if the barometric pressure is 101 corresponds to the barometric pressure. kPa ( 7 6 0 mmHg)(sea l The engine control module checks whether this voltage is within level). a specified range. Range of Check l Ignition switch : ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts. l Battery voltage is 8 V or more. Set Conditions l Sensor output voltage is 4.5 V or more (corresponding to barometric pressure of 114 kPa (33.7 in. Hg) or more) for seconds. or l Sensor output voltage is 0.2 V or less (corresponding to barometric pressure of 5.33 kPa (1.57 in. Hg) or less) for seconds. a 4 a 4
Fault ID 31 Knock Sensor
Title Effect
l l l
Probable causes
Knock sensor failed. Open or shorted knock sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
i LJ
Limp-in Background The knock sensor converts the vibration of the cylinder block Switches the ignition into a voltage and outputs it. If there is a malfunction of the timing from ignition timing for high octane to knock sensor, the voltage output will not change. l The engine control module checks whether the voltage changes. ignition timing for Standard octane fuel. Range of Check l Ignition switch : ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON or immediately after the engine starts. l Engine speed is approx. 5,000 r/min or more. Set Conditions l The change in the knock sensor output voltage (knock sensor peak voltage at each l/3 revolution of the crankshaft) is less than 0.06 V for 200 times in succession.
Fault ID 36
Title Effect Ignition Timing Adjusting Signal

No limp-in
l
Probable causes
Ignition timing adjusting signal wire circuit is shorted to the ground. Engine control module failed.
Background l If there is a short circuit in the line between the engine control module and the ignition timing adjustment terminal, the line voltage will become low. l The engine control module checks whether this occurs. Range of Check Ignition switch : ON Set Conditions The ignition timing adjusting signal wire is shorted to the ground.
1 TSB Revision
13A-28
oxygen sensor
Probable causes
xygen sensor deteriorated. pen or shorted oxygen

l l
Incorrect fuel pressure. Injector failed. Engine control module failed.
Range of Check 3 minutes have passed after engine was started. l Engine coolant temperature is approx. 80% (176OF) or more. l Intake air temperature is 20-50C (68-122F). l Engine speed is approx. 1,900-2,200 r/min. l Vehicle is moving at constant speed on a flat, level road surface.
l
tput voltage does not cross specified voltage
Probable causes
I module failed. Range of Check 0 Engine speed is approx. 50-1,000 r/min. l The throttle position sensor output voltage is 1.15 V or less. l Actuator test by scan tool is not carried out. Set Conditions Surge voltage of injector coil is not detected for 4 seconds.
TSB Revision

Fault ID
43 daliforniaNon Turbo, Turbo>
13A-29
Title Effect EGR System

No limp-in EGR valve does not open. EGR control vacuum istoo low. l EGR solenoid failed. l EGR temperature sensor failed. 0 Open or shorted EGR temperature sensor circuit, or loose connector. l Engine control module failed.
l l
Probable causes
Backaround EGR temperature sensor converts the EGR gas temperature to a voltage and outputs it. l Engine control module checks whether an output voltage of the EGR temperature sensor is within a specified range.
l
Range of Check l Approx. 6 minutes or more have passed after engine was started. l Intake-air temperature is O-55% (32-131F). l Barometric pressure is 93.3 kPa (27.6 in.Hg) or more. l Engine speed is approx. 1,900-2,100 r/min. l Vehicle is moving at constant speed on a flat, level road surface. l The above conditions continue for a continuous period of 15 seconds. Set Conditions l Sensor output voltage is approx. 3.5 V (corresponding to an EGR temperature of 70C (158F)) or more. l When the range of check operation. given above which accompany starting of the engine are carried out two times in succession, a problem is detected after each operation.
Effect
Background l Ignition power transistor unit converts ON/OFF variation of the ignition coil to the pulse signal (Ignition signal) and outputs it. l The engine control module detects whether ignition occurs or not by checking this signal while the engine is running. Range of Check l Engine speed is approx. 50-4,000 r/min. l Engine is not cranking. Set Conditions The ignition signal from the same coil is not input for 4 seconds. However, this excludes cases where no ignition signal is input from any coils. Limp-in Cuts fuel of an ignition signal abnormal cylinder.
l l
Probable causes
Ignition coil failed Disconnection or short circuit of the primary ignition circuit, or imperfect contact of the connector. 0 Ignition power transistor unit failed. l Engine control module failed.
TSB Revision
Probable causes
nverts the oxygen density in the exhaust odule checks an output voltage of the the oxygen volume in the exhaust gas Range of Check Approx. 3 minutes or more have passed after engine was started. l Engine coolant temperature is approx. 80% (176F) or more. l Closed throttle position switch : OFF l The throttle position sensor output voltage is 4.1 V or more. 0 Open toop control in operation. l 20 seconds have passed after deceleration finished.
l
ntrol module failed.
Set Conditions heated oxygen sensor (rear) output voltage is 0.1 V or heated oxygen sensor (front) output voltage is 0.5 V or ve conditions continue for a continuous period of 5
Probable causes
e control module inputs a torque reduction request ) when the transaxle is shifted to the engine control shift completes within the usually specified hours, ntrol module checks whether the input hours of uction request signal (LOW) is within a specified Range of Check l 60 seconds or more have passed immediately after engine was started. l Engine speed is approx. 50 r/min or more. Set Conditions e control module failed.
TSB Revision

Fault ID Title Effect
Limp-in The induction control valve is driven under condition of the valve full opening.
13A-31
62 <Non Induction Control Valve Position Turbo> Sensor

Background l The induction control valve position sensor outputs a pulse signal according to a change of the valve opening. l The engine control module checks an actual valve position when the intake-air control valve drive motor was driven. Range of Check l 60 seconds or more have passed immediately after engine was started. l Engine speed is approx. 50 r/min or more. l Battery voltage is 10 V or more. Set Conditions l The intake-air control valve does not reach target position even after the intake-air control valve drive motor is operated several times. l When the range of check operations given above which accompany starting of the engine are carried out four times in succession, a problem is detected after each operation.
Probable causes
tnduction control valve position sensor failed. Open or shorted induction control valve position sensor circuit, or loose connector. Variable induction control motor failed. Open or shorted variable induction control motor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
l l
l l
Fault ID
69 cl994 and Right a t e r Califor- (rear) nia model>
Title Bank Heated Oxygen Sensor Effect Probable causes
Limp-in Background l The oxygen sensor converts the oxygen density in the exhaust The air/fuel ratio feedback control (closed gas to a voltage and outputs it. l The engine control module checks an output voltage of the loop control) is peroxygen sensor when the oxygen volume in the exhaust gas formed only by using a signal of the oxygen is little (Air/fuel ratio is rich.). sensor (front) which is Range of Check installed on the front l Approx. 8 minutes or more have passed after engine was started. side of the catalytic l Engine coolant temperature is approx. 80C (176F) or more. converter. l Closed throttle position switch : OFF l The throttle position sensor output voltage is 4.1 V or more. 0 Open loop control in operation. l 20 seconds have passed after deceleration finished. Set Conditions l The heated oxygen sensor (rear) output voltage is 0.1 V or less. l The heated oxygen sensor (front) output voltage is 0.5 V or more. l The above conditions continue for a continuous period of 5 seconds.
l l
Oxygen sensor deteriorated. Open or shorted oxygen sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine controt module failed.
TSB Revision
13A-32
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Troubleshooiing
LIST OF FAIL-SAFE/BACK-UP FUNCTIONS

When the failure of a major sensor is detected by the on-board diagnostics, the preset control logic provides controls to assure safe operation of the vehicle. Trouble item Volume air flow sensor Controls to be provided in the event of trouble (1) Based on throttle position sensor (TPS) signal and engine speed signal (crank angle sensor signal) basic driving time of injectors and basic ignition timing is read from the prese map. (2) Idle air control motor fixed at predetermined position, and no idling speed control achievec Controls provided on the assumption that intake air temperature is 25% (77F) No additional fuel injection provided on the basis of throttle position sensor signal at acceleration Controls provided on the assumption that engine coolant temperature is 80C (176F) (Even if the sensor signal returns to normal, this control mode is retained until the ignition switch is set to OFF.) (1) Fuel injected into the cylinders in the order l-2-3-4-5-6 with irregular timing (Provided that no No.1 cylinder top dead center position has been detected since the ignition switch was placed in the ON position) (2) Fuel cut 4 seconds after a failure was detected (Provided that no No.1 cylinder top dead center position has been detected since the ignition switch was placed in the ON position) Controls provided on the assumption that barometric pressure is 101 kPa (760 mmHg) (sea level) Ignition timing is changed from that for premium gasoline to that for regular gasoline. Fuel cut for cylinders whose ignition signal is abnormal
Intake air temperature sensor Throttle position sensor (TPS) Engine coolant temperature sensor Camshaft position sensor
Barometric pressure sensor Knock sensor Ignition coil and ignition power transistor unit Communication line with transmission control module c/VT> ieated oxygen sensor (front) <All models> Heated oxygen sensor (rear) cl994 and later California model>
No ignition timing retard control (overall engine-transmission control) achieved when transmission speeds are changed
No air-fuel ratio closed loop control achieved
Only signals of oxygen sensor (front) installed upstream of catalyst are used, and the air-fuel ratio feedback control (closed loop control) is not performed.
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Troubleshooting ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS <From 1996 models>

The engine control module monitors the input/output signals (some signals at all times and the others under specified conditions) of the engine control module. When a malfunction has continued for a specified time or longer since the irregular signal is initially monitored, the engine control module judges that a malfunction has occurred. After the ECM first detects a malfunction, a diagnostic trouble code is recorded when the engine is restarted and the same malfunction is re-detected. However, for items marked with a I*, a diagnostic trouble code is recorded on the first detection of the malfunction. There are 50 diagnostic items, and the diagnostic results can be read out with a scan tool. Moreover, since memorization of the diagnostic trouble codes is backed up directly by the battery, the diagnostic results are memorized even if the ignition key is turned off. The diagnostic trouble codes will, however, be erased when the battery terminal or the engine control module connector is disconnected. In addition, the diagnostic trouble code can also be erased by turning on the ignition switch to ON and sending the diagnostic trouble code erase signal from the scan tool to the engine control module.
Data
13A-33
Caution If the sensor connector is disconnected with the ignition switch turned on, the diagnostic trouble code is memorized. In this case, send the diagnostic trouble code erase signal to the engine control module in order to erase the diagnostic memory. The 50 diagnostic items are provided as follows, and if plural items are activated, they are all indicated sequentially from the smallest code number. Caution The diagnostic trouble code of the ignition timing adjustment signal is output whenever terminal for ignition timing adjustment is grounded. Therefore, it is not a malfunction that the code is output when adjusting ignition timing. The ECM records the diagnostic trouble code and the engine operating conditions at the time the malfunction was detected. These data are called freeze frame data. This data indicates the engine operating condition from when nothing at all is detected to the initial detection of malfunction. This data can be read by using the scan tool, and can then be used in simulation tests for troubleshooting. Data items are as follows.
Unit
Engine coolant temperature Engine speed Vehicle speed Long-term fuel compensation (Long-term fuel trim) Short-term fuel compensation (Short-term fuel trim) Fuel control condition
C r/min km/h % % 0 Open loop l Closed loop l Open loop - drive condition l Open loop - DTC set l Closed loop - 02 (rear) failed %
Calculation load value Diagnostic trouble code during data recording
/ i
TSB Revision
13A-34
OBD-II DRIVE CYCLE All kinds of diagnostic trouble code can be monitored by carrying out a short drive in accordance with the following drive cycle pattern. In other words, doing such a drive allows to regenerate any kind of trouble which involves illuminating the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp and to check if the repair procedure has eliminated the trouble (the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp is no more illumir$ed). NOTE 1. For checking the following three systems for illumination of the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp, perform the driving up to the point B twice successively. Before beginning with the first driving, turn off the ignition switch for more than 10 seconds. l EGR system l Fuel trim l Evaporative emission control system 2. In case of the systems other than those three mentioned above, performing a drive up to the point A twice successively will suffice for determining if the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp illuminates or not. Before beginning with the first driving, turn off the ignition switch for more than 10 seconds. 3. Perform test drives under the following conditions: (1) On vehicles with automatic transmission, set selector lever in D range, overdrive switch ON, Power/Economy changeover switch in P range. (2) Acceleration: Keep the throttle in l/4-3/4 opened conditions. (3) Deceleration: Lower the vehicle speed below 15 mph or the engine speed below 1,000 r/min (without operating brake and clutch). (4) During cruising: Keep the throttle opening constant. (5) During stopping: Keep the throttle fully closed, A/C OFF and transmission in neutral. (6) Coolant temperature at starting: 10% (50F) or more (7) Intake air temperature at starting: 40C (104OF) or more (8) Intake air temperature during driving: 50C (122F)or more Drive cycle pattern
0 E F G H I .J K L M N 0 P Q
H H 1 H H H H H
I;11 I , 111 1 , I, I I 1 1 HO! ; ;H@ I I I HO! ! I / H@ / I ( H;j; I !!I IIIH 11:I 4-A i-b3 HO HO H H H
I ! HQ H
6FU2465
Catalytic converter 02 sensor 02 sensor circuit (open/short) 02 sensor heater circuit (open/short) Misfire EGR system MDP sensor Fuel trim Evapo. emission control system
J: ECT sensor K: TP sensor, IAT sensor, BAR0 sensor L: idle control system M: CTP switch Injector circuit (open) N: 0: Solenoid valve circuit (open) TC waste gate, EGR, EVAP purge, Fuel pressure l P: CMP sensor, CKP sensor, VAF sensor Q: Excessive time to enter closed loop fuel control
TSB Revision

DIAGNOSTIC CHART (FAULT TREE)
13/J-35
DTC No. <General scan tool mode> PO1 00
DTC No. <Scan tool (MUT-II) mode> PO100
Diagnostic item Volume Air Flow Circuit Malfunction Barometric Pressure Circuit Malfunction Intake Air Temperature Circuit Malfunction Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Malfunction Throttle Position Circuit Malfunction Excessive Time to Enter Closed Loop Fuel Control 02 Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
Check item (Remedy)
Memory
Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace volume air flow sensor assembly.) Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace volume air flow sensor assembly.) Harness and connector Intake air temperature sensor Harness and connector Engine coolant temperature sensor Harness and connector Throttle position sensor Closed throttle position switch O2 sensor (front) 02 sensor harness and connector Injector Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace Right bank 02 sensor front.) Harness and connector Right bank 02 sensor (front) heater Harness and connector Right bank 02 sensor (rear) Harness and connector Right bank 02 sensor (rear) heater Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace Left bank 02 sensor front.) Harness and connector Left bank 02 sensor (front) heater Harness and connector Left bank 02 sensor (rear) Harness and connector Left bank 02 sensor (rear) heater Volume air flow sensor output frequency Injector Fuel pressure Intake air leaks Engine coolant temperature sensor Intake air temperature sensor Barometric pressure sensor O2 sensor Exhaust manifold cracked
Retained
PO1 05
PO1 05
Retained
PO110 PO115 PO120
PO110 PO115 PO120
l l l l l l l
Retained Retained Retained
PO125
l l l
Retained
PO1 30
Retained
PO135 PO136
O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
l l l l l l l
Retained Retained Retained Retained
PO141 PO150 -
O2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 2 Sensor 1) O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 2 Sensor 1)
PO155 PO156 PO161 PO170 -
l l l l l l l l l l l
O2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 2 Sensor 2) O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 2 Sensor 2) Fuel Trim Malfunction (Bank 1)
PO173
Fuel Trim Malfunction (Bank 2)
l l l l
TSB Revision
13A-36
Diagnostic item
Check item (Remedy)
Injector Circuit Malfunction -
position
sensor circuit and
Circuit Malfunction PO340 PO340 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow Malfunction
l
(If harness and connector are normal, replace Harness and connector (If harness and connector are normal, replace camshaft position sensor.) Harness and connector EGR valve EGR solenoid EGR valve control vacuum Manifold. differential pressure sensor Harness and connector EGR solenoid Exhaust manifold (Replace the catalytic converter if there is no cracks, etc.) Exhaust manifold (Replace the catalytic converter if there is no cracks, etc.) Harness and connector Evaporative emission purge solenoid Purge control valve Vacuum hoses routing Harness and connector Evaporative emission purge solenoid (No. 1) Retained
PO400
l l l l l
Retained
PO403 PO421
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Solenoid Malfunction Warm Up Catalyst Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) Warm Up Catalyst Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 2)
l l l
Retained Retained
PO431
Retained
PO440
Evaporative Emission Control -System Malfunction
l l l l
Retained
PO443
Evaporative Emission Control System Purge Control Valve Circuit Malfunction
l l
Retained
TSB Revision

DTC No. <General scan tool mode> PO500 PO505 PO510 PO705 DTC No. <Scan tool (MUT-II) mode> PO500 PO505 -
13A-37
Memory Retained Retained Retained Retained
Diagnostic item Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction Idle Control System Malfunction Closed Throttle Position Switch Malfunction Transmission Range Sensor Circuit Malfunction (RPNDL Input) Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction Turbocharger Waste Gate Actuator Malfunction
Check item (Remedy) Harness and connector Vehicle speed sensor Harness and connector Idle air control motor Harness and connector Closed throttle position switch Harness and connector Park/Neutral position switch Harness and connector Transaxle oil temperature sensor Harness and connector Turbocharger waste gate solenoid Turbocharger waste gate actuator Vacuum hoses routing Harness and connector Turbocharger waste gate solenoid Harness and connector Fuel pressure solenoid Harness and connector Harness and connector MDP sensor Harness and connector Pulse generator Harness and connector Converter clutch solenoid Shift control solenoid Pressure control solenoid
l l l l l l l l
PO710 P1103
l l l l l l
Retained Retained
P1104 P1105 P1300 P1400
Turbocharger Waste Gate Solenoid Malfunction Fuel Pressure Solenoid Malfunction
l l l l l
P1300
Ignition Timing Adjustment Circuit Malfunction Manifold Differential Pressure (MDP) Sensor Circuit Malfunction PG Assy Malfunction Solenoid Assy Malfunction
l l
P1715 P1750
l l l l l l
Retained Retained
NOTE 1. Do not replace the engine control module (ECM) until a through terminal check reveals there are no short/open circuits. 2. After the ECM detects a malfunction, a diagnostic trouble code is recorded when the engine is next started and the same malfunction is re-detected. However, for items marked with a *, the diagnostic trouble code is recorded on the first detection of the malfunction. 3. 02: Heated oxygen sensor 4. Sensor 1: indicates sensors which are mounted closest to the engine. 5. Sensor 2: indicates sensors which are mounted next-closest to the engine.
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Troubleshootinn

DIAGNOSTIC DETECTION LOGIC DTC No. PO1 00
l
Title Volume Air Flow Circuit Malfunction

l l
Probable causes
Volume air flow sensor failed. Open or shorted volume air flow sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
Background While the engine is running, the volume air flow sensor outputs a pulse signal which corresponds to the volume of air flow. l The engine control module checks whether the frequency of this signal output by the volume air flow sensor while the engine is running is at or above the set value. Range of Check Engine speed is 500 r/min or more. Set Conditions Sensor output frequency is 3 Hz or less for 4 seconds.
DTC No. PO1 05

l
Title Probable causes Barometric Pressure Circuit Malfunction

l l
Background The barometric pressure sensor outputs a voltage which corresponds to the barometric pressure. l The engine control module checks whether this voltage is within a specified range.
Range of Check l Ignition switch: ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts. l Battery voltage is 8 V or more. Set Conditions l Sensor output voltage is 4.5 V or more (corresponding to a barometric pressure of 114 kPa (33.7 in.Hg) or more) for 4 seconds. or l Sensor output voltage is 0.2 V or less (corresponding to a barometric pressure of 5.33 kPa (1.57 in.Hg) or less) for 4 seconds.
Barometric pressure sensor failed. Open or shorted barometric pressure sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
d
Probable causes
l l
DTC No. PO110

l
Title Intake Air Temperature Circuit Malfunction
Background The intake air temperature sensor converts the intake air temperature to a voltage and outputs it. l The engine control module checks whether the voltage is within a specified range. Range of Check Ignition switch: ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts.
l
Intake air temperature sensor failed. Open or shorted the intake air temperature sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
Set Conditions Sensor output voltage is 4.6 V or more (corresponding to an intake air temperature of -45C (-49F) or less) for 4 seconds. or l Sensor output voltage is 0.2 V or less (corresponding to an intake air temperature of 125C (257OF) or more) for 4 seconds.
l
TSB Revision

DTC No. Title
13A-39
Probable causes Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Malfunction

l l
PO115
3ackground ) The engine coolant temperature sensor converts the engine coolant temperature to a voltage and outputs it. ) The engine control module checks whether the voltage is within a specified range. In addition, it checks the engine coolant temperature (signal) does not drop while the engine is warming up. Lange of Check, Set Conditions Range of check l Ignition switch: ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts. Set conditions l Sensor output voltage is 4.6 V or more (corresponding to an engine coolant temperature of -45C (49OF) or less for 4 seconds. or l Sensor output voltage is 0.1 V or less (corresponding to an engine coolant temperature of 140C (284F) or more for 4 seconds. Range of check l Ignition switch: ON l Engine speed is approx. 50 r/min or more. Set conditions l The sensor output voltage increases from 1.6 V or less (corresponding to an engine coolant temperature of 40C (104F) or more) to 1.6 V or more (correponding to an engine coolant temperature of 40C (104F) or less). l After this, the sensor output voltage is 1.6 V or more for 5 minutes. Range of check Engine coolant temperature is 20% (68F) or more when the engine is started. Intake air temperature is 20C (68F) or more when the engine is started. Set conditions l The engine coolant temperature takes 5 minutes or more to rise to approximately 50C (122OF) after the engine is started.
l l
Engine coolant temperature sensor failed. Open or shorted the engine coolant temperature sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
DTC No. PO1 20

l
Title Probable causes Throttle Position Circuit Malfunction

l l
Background The throttle position sensor outputs a voltage which corresponds to the throttle valve opening angle. l The engine control module checks whether the voltage is within a specified range. In addition, it checks that the voltage output does not become too large while the engine is idling. Range of Check l Ignition switch: ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts. Set Conditions When the closed throttle position switch is ON, the sensor output voltage is 2 V or more for 4 seconds. or l The sensor output voltage is 0.2 V or less for 4 seconds.
l
l l l
Throttle position sensor failed or maladjusted. Open or shorted throttle position sensor circuit, or loose connector. Closed throttle position switch ON malfunction. Closed throttle position switch signal wire shorted. Engine control module failed.
Range of Check l Ignition switch: ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts. l Engine speed is approx. 500-3,000 r/min or more. l During low load operations Set Conditions l The sensor output voltage is 4.6 V or more for 10 seconds.
TSB Revision
13A-40
DTC No. PO1 25
l l

Title Probable causes Excessive Time to Enter Closed Loop Fuel Control
l l l
Background The MFI system reduces exhaust emissions by means of closed-loop fuel control. The engine control module checks the time taken until closed-loop fuel control commences.
Heated oxygen sensor failed. Injector failed. Engine control module failed.
Range of Check, Set Conditions Even though the specified length of time (approximately 30 seconds) has passed since the conditions* were met following starting of the engine, the MFI system does not enter closed-loop fuel control. *: The conditions are an engine coolant temperature of at least 80% (176OF), an intake air temperature of 20-50C (68-122F), an engine speed of 1,900-2,200 r/min., etc.
Probable causes
l l
When the oxygen sensor begins to deteriorate, the oxygen sensor signal response becomes circuit in oxygen sensor The engine control module forcibly varies the air-fuel mixture to make it leaner and richer, and checks the response speed of oxygen sensor. In addition, the engine control module also checks for an open circuit in the oxygen sensor e control module failed.
when the amount of fuel injected is increased ontrol of the air-fuel ratio.
1 DTC No. / PO1 35

I
Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 1)

l l l
Probable causes
Open or shorted oxygen sensor heater circuit. Open circuit in oxygen sensor heater. Engine control module failed.
Background The engine control module checks whether the heater current is within a specified range when the heater is energized. Range of Check, Set Conditions The oxygen sensor heater current is either lower than several dozen milliamperes or higherthan several amperes.
DTC No. PO1 36
Title Probable causes Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2)

l l l
Background The engine control module checks for an open circuit in the heatd oxygen sensor output line. Range of Check, Set Conditions The heated oxygen sensor output line is open-circuit.
Heated oxygen sensor failed. Engine control module failed. Open circuit in heated oxygen sensor output line.
TSB Revision

DTC No. PO1 41 Title Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
l l l
Probable causes
DTC No. PO1 50

l
Title Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 2 Sensor 1)

l l l
Probable causes
Heated oxygen sensor deteriorated. Open circuit in oxygen sensor output line. Engine control module failed.
Background When the oxygen sensor begins to deteriorate, the oxygen sensor signal response becomes poor. l The engine control module forcibly varies the air-fuel mixture to make it leaner and richer, and checks the response speed of oxygen sensor. In addition, the engine control module also checks for an open circuit in the oxygen sensor output line. Range of Check, Set Conditions The response of the oxygen sensor signal is slow when the amount of fuel injected is increased or decreased by an override during closed-loop control of the air-fuel ratio. The oxygen sensor output line is open-circuit.
/ L
1 DTC No. / po155 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 2 Sensor 1)
l l l
Probable causes
Background The engine control module checks whether the heater current is within a specified range when the heater is energized. Range of Check, Set Conditions The oxygen sensor heater current is either lower than several dozen milliamperes or higher than several amperes.
DTC No. PO1 56
Title Probable causes Oxygen Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Bank 2 Sensor 2)

l l l
Background The engine control module checks for an open circuit in the heatd oxygen sensor output line. Range of Check, Set Conditions The heated oxygen sensor output line is open-circuit.
Heated oxygen sensor failed. Engine control module failed. Open circuit in heated oxygen sensor output line.
1 DTC No. I PO1 61 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction (Bank 2 Sensor 2)
l l l
Probable causes
I TSB
Revision
I r . * , 1- ,
13A-42
DTC No. PO1 70
l

Title Fuel Trim Malfunction (Bank 1) Probable causes
Background l Volume air flow sensor failed. If a malfunction occurs in the fuel system, the fuel compensation value bacomes too large l Injector failed. or too small. 0 Incorrect fuel pressure. l The engine control module checks whether the fuel compensation value is within a specified l Air drawn in from gaps in gasket range. seals, etc. l Heated oxygen sensor failed. Range of Check, Set Conditions l Engine coolant temperature The fuel compensation value exceeds the specified range for 10 seconds during closed-loop sensor failed. control of the air-fuel ratio. 0 Engine control module failed. l Intake air temperature sensor failed l Barometric pressure sensor failed.
Probable causes
Background If a malfunction occurs in the fuel system, the fuel compensation value bacomes too large or too small. 0 The engine control module checks whether the fuel compensation value is within a specified range. Range of Check, Set Conditions The fuel compensation value exceeds the specified range for 10 seconds during closed-loop control of the air-fuel ratio.
l
l l
ygen sensor failed. Engine coolant temperature sensor failed. Engine control module failed. ntake air temperature sensor etric pressure sensor
DTC No. PO201 PO206

l
Title Injector Circuit Malfunction Cylinder-l - Cylinder-6
l-
Probable causes
Injector failed. Open or shorted throttle position sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
Background A surge voltage is generated when the injectors are driven and the current flowing to the injector coil is shut off. l The engine control module checks this surge voltage. Range of Check l Engine speed is approx. 50-1,000 r/min. l The throttle position sensor output voltage is 1.15 V or less. l Actuator test by scan tool is not carried out. Set Conditions Surge voltage of injector coil is not detected for 4 seconds.
l l
DTC No. PO300 Random Misfire Detected
Title
Probable causes
l
Background 0 If a misfiring occurs while the engine is running, the engine speed suddenly changes. l The engine control module checks for changes in the engine speed.
$;mtir system related part(s)
0 Poor crankshaft position sensor signal. Range of Check, Set Conditions 0 Incorrect air-fuel ratio. l There are multiple cylinders for which the number of misfires for every 200 r/min of the l Low compression pressure. engine exceeds the specified number. l Engine control module failed. 0 There are multiple cylinders for which the number of misfires for every 1,000 r/min of the engine exceeds the specified number.
TSB Revision

DTC No. Title Probable causes
/ l l
PO301 - Cylinder-l - Cylinder-6 Misfire Detected PO306

I
Background l If a misfiring occurs while the engine is running, the engine speed suddenly changes. l The engine control module checks for changes in the engine speed. Range of Check, Set Conditions The number of misfires for every 200 r/min of the engine exceeds the specified number (single cylinder). The number of misfires for every 1,000 r/min of the engine exceeds the specified number (single cylinder).
Ignition system related part(s) failed. Engine control module failed.
DTC No. PO325
Title Probable causes Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction

l l l
Background l The knock sensor converts the vibration of the cylinder block into a voltage and outputs it. If there is a malfunction of the knock sensor, the voltage output will not change. l The engine control module checks whether the voltage output changes. Range of Check l Ignition switch: ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts. l Engine speed is approx. 2,000 r/min or more. Set Conditions l The changes in the knock sensor output voltage (knock sensor peak voltage at each l/2 revolution of the crankshaft) is less than 0.06 V for 200 times in succession.
Knock sensor failed. Open or shorted knock sensor circuit, or loose connector Engine control module failed.
DTC No. PO335

l l
Title Probable causes Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction
l Crankshaft position sensor Background failed. When the engine is running, the crankshaft position sensor outputs a pulse signal. The engine control module checks whether the pulse signal is input while the engine is l Open or shorted crankshaft position sensor circuit, or loose crankina. connector. Range of Check l Engine control module failed. Engine is cranking.
Set Conditions Sensor output voltage does not change for 4 seconds (no pulse signal input).
DTC No.
I
Title
Probable causes
l l
1 PO340 /Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction

Background l When the engine is running, the camshaft position sensor outputs a pulse signal. l The enaine control module checks whether the pulse signal is input. Range of Check l Ignition switch: ON l Engine speed is approx. 50 r/min or more. Set Conditions Sensor output voltage does not change for 4 seconds (no pulse signal input). Camshaft position sensor failed. Open or shorted camshaft position sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
/ i
TSB Revision
13A-44
DTC No. PO400
I

Title Probable causes Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow Malfunction
0 EGR valve does not open. Background l When the EGR solenoid switches from OFF to ON while the engine is running, EGR gas l EGR control vacuum is too low. flows. l EGR solenoid failed. l The engine control module checks how the EGR gas flow signal changes. l Open or shorted EGR solenoid circuit, or loose connector. Range of Check, Set Conditions l Manifold differential pressure The EGR gas flow signal changes little when the EGR solenoid switches from OFF to ON. sensor failed. 0 Engine control module failed.
L
DTC No. PO403
Title Probable causes Exhaust Gas Recirculation Solenoid Malfunction

l l
Background l The engine control module checks current flows in the EGR solenoid drive circuit when the solenoid is ON and OFF. Range of Check, Set Conditions 0 No surge voltage is detected even when the EGR solenoid is turned off.
EGR solenoid failed. Open or shorted EGR solenoid circuit, or loose connector. 0 Engine control module failed.
DTC No. PO421

l
Title Probable causes Warm Up Catalyst Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)
0 Catalytic converter deteriorated. Background The signal from the heated oxygen sensor which follows the catalytic converter differs l Engine control module failed. from that which precedes the catalytic converter. That is because the catalytic converter purifies exhaust gas. When the catalytic converter has deteriorated, the signal from the heated oxygen sensor which follows the catalytic converter becomes similar to that which precedes the catalytic converter. l The engine control module checks the outputs of the heated oxygen sensor signals.
Range of Check, Set Conditions The relation between the signals from the heated oxygen sensors preceding (engine side) and following the catalytic converter meets specified condition.
Probable causes
1 TSB Revision

DTC No. PO440 Title
13A-45
Probable causes Evaporative Emission Control System Malfunction

l l
Background 0 The evaporative emission purge solenoid opens and closes while the engine is idling. Then the fuel compensation value change according to whether the evaporative emission canister emits purge air or not. l The engine control module checks for this changes. Range of Check, Set Conditions When the evaporative emission purge solenoid opens and closes while the engine is idling the changes in the fuel compensation value is lower than the specified amounts.
l l
Evaporative emission purge solenoid failed. Open or shorted evaporative emission purge solenoid circuit, or loose connector. Purge hose connection or routing is defective. Engine control module failed.
DTC No.
PO443
I
Title Evaporative Emission Control System Purge Control Valve Circuit Malfunction
l l
Probable causes
Evaporative emission purge solenoid failed. Open or shorted evaporative emission purge solenoid circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
Background The engine control module checks whether current flows in the evaporative emission purge solenoid drive circuit when the solenoid is driven. Range of Check, Set Conditions Even though the evaporative emission purge solenoid has switched from OFF to ON, current does not flow to the coil for 4 seconds.
DTC No. PO500

l
Title Probable causes Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction

l l
Background The vehicle speed sensor outputs a pulse signal while the vehicle is driven. l The engine control module checks whether the pulse signal is output. Range of Check l Ignition switch: ON l Excluding 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON or immediately after the engine starts. l Closed throttle position switch: OFF l Engine speed is 3,000 r/min or more. l Driving under high engine load conditions. Set Conditions Sensor output voltage does not change for 4 seconds (no pulse signal input).
Vehicle speed sensor failed. Open or shorted vehicle speed sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
DTC No. PO505

l
Title Probable causes Idle Control System Malfunction

Idle air control motor failed. Open or shorted idle air control motor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
l Background If there is a malfunction of the IAC system, the actual engine speed will not be identical l to the target engine speed. l The engine control module checks the difference between the actual engine speed and l the target engine speed.
Range of Check, Set Conditions After the engine has warmed up, the difference between the actual engine speed and the target engine speed exceeds the specified value.
1 TSB Revision
13A-46
DTC No. PO51 0
l

Title Probable causes Closed Throttle Position Switch Malfunction
l l
Background While the engine is idling without pressing the accelerator pedal, ON signal can be input from the closed throttle position switch to the engine control module. l The engine control module is used for checking the input signal during the engine idling.
l
Range of Check The vehicle is under stopping, however, the vehicle should have been driven at speed on or over 30 km/h at least one time before the vehicle is stopped. l The engine speed is approx. 800 r/min or below. Set Conditions l OFF signal was input from the closed throttle position switch for 2 seconds.
Closed throttle position switch failed. Open or shorted closed throttle position switch circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
DTC No. 1 PO705

l
Title Transmission Range Sensor Circuit Malfunction (RPNDL Input)
I Probable causes
l l
Background When a malfunction of the park/neutral position switch is detected, the transaxle control module outputs a malfunction signal to the engine control module. Range of Check, Set Conditions The park/neutral position switch failure signal is input to the engine control module.
Park/neutral position switch failed. Open or shorted park/neutral position switch circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
DTC No. PO71 0

l
Title Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction

l l
Probable causes
Oil temperature sensor failed. Open or shorted temperature sensor circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
Background When a malfunction of the fluid temperature sensor is detected, the transaxle control module outputs a malfunction signal to the engine control module. Range of Check, Set Conditions The fluid temperature sensor failure signal is input to the engine control module.
DTC No. P1103

l
Title Probable causes Turbocharger Waste Gate Actuator Malfunction

l l l
Background The engine control module always monitors the intake air amount to check if the engine is in overboosted condition. l When the engine control module judges that the engine is in an overboosted condition, it cuts off the fuel supply to protect the engine.
l
Turbocharger waste gate actuator failed. Boost pressure control system failed. Engine control module failed.
Range of Check, Set Conditions A condition where the fuel supply is to be shut off is detected.
1TSB Revision

DTC No. Title Turbochager Waste Gate Solenoid Malfunction
l l
13A-47
P1104
Background The engine control module checks current flows in the turbocharger waste gate solenoid drive circuit when the solenoid is ON and OFF. Range of Check, Set Conditions No surge voltage is detected when the turbocharger waste gate solenoid is turned off.
Turbocharger waste gate solenoid failed. Open or shorted turbocharger waste gate solenoid circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
DTC No. P1105
Title Probable causes Fuel Pressure Solenoid Malfunction

l l
Background The engine control module checks current flows in the fuel pressure solenoid drive circuit when the solenoid is ON and OFF. Range of Check, Set Conditions No surge voltage is detected when the fuel pressure solenoid is turned off.
Fuel pressure solenoid failed. Open or shorted fuel pressure solenoid circuit, or loose connector. Engine control module failed.
DTC No. P1300

l
Title Probable causes Ignition Timing Adjusting Circuit Malfunction

l
Background If there is a short circuit in the line between the engine control module and the ignition timing adjustment terminal, the line voltage will become low. l The engine control module checks whether this occurs.
Ignition timing adjusting signal wire circuit is shorted to the ground. Engine control module failed.
Range of Check Ignition switch: ON Set Conditions The ignition timing adjusting signal wire is shorted to the ground.
DTC No. / P1400
Title Manifold Differential Pressure Sensor Circuit Malfunction

l l
Probable causes
Manifold differential pressure sensor failed. Open or shorted manifold differential pressure sensor circuit, or loose connector Engine control module failed.
Background l The manifold differential pressure sensor outputs a voltage which corresponds to the negative pressure in the intake manifold. l The engine control module checks whether the voltage output by the manifold differential pressure sensor is within a specified range. Range of Check, Set Conditions l After the engine has warmed up, it runs at low or medium load. l The engine coolant temperature at the time of starting the engine is 18C (654F) or more. l The sensor output voltage is 4.5 V or more for 4 seconds, or the sensor output voltage is 0.2 V or less for 4 seconds.
1 TSB Revision
13A-48
DTC No. P1715
l

Title PG Assy Malfunction
i
l l
Probable causes
Pulse generator failed. Engine control module failed.
Background The transaxle control module monitors the pulse signals of the pulse generator A and B. l When the pulse generators A and B are failed, the transaxle control module inputs the pulse generator failed signal to the engine control module.
l l
Range of Check Engine speed is approx. 500 r/min or more. Position of selector lever: Except P or N
Set Conditions The pulse generator failed signals were inputted from the transaxle control module to the engine control module.
1 DTC No. 1 P1750

l
Solenoid Assy Malfunction
T
l l l l
Probable causes
Torque converter clutch solenoid failed. Shift control solenoid failed. Pressure control solenoid failed. Engine control module failed.
Background The transaxle control module monitors the torque converter clutch solenoid, shift control solenoid and pressure control solenoid. l When some one of these solenoids failed, the transaxle control module inputs these failed signals to the engine control module. Range of Check l Engine speed is approx. 500 r/min or more. l Position of selector lever: Except P or N Set Conditions The failed signals of the torque converter clutch solenoid, shift control solenoid or pressure control solenoid were inputted from the transaxle control module to the engine control module.
1 TSB Revision

LIST OF FAIL-SAFE/BACK-UP FUNCTIONS
i
1344-49
When the failure of a major sensor is detected by the on-board diagnostics, the preset control logic provides controls to assure safe operation of the vehicle. Trouble item Volume air flow sensor . Controls to be provided in the event of trouble (1) Based on throttle position sensor (TPS) signal and engine speed signal (crank angle sensor signal), basic driving time of injectors and basic ignition timing is read from the preset map. (2) Idle air control motor fixed at predetermined position, and no idling speed control achieved Controls provided on the assumption that intake air temperature is 25C (77F) No additional fuel injection provided on the basis of throttle position sensor signal at acceleration Controls provided on the assumption that engine coolant temperature is 80C (176F) (Even if the sensor signal returns to normal, this control mode is retained until the ig,nition switch is set to OFF.) (1) Fuel injected into the cylinders in the order l-2-3-4-5-6 with irregular timing (Provided that no No.1 cylinder top dead center position has been detected since the ignition switch was placed in the ON position) (2) Fuel cut 4 seconds after a failure was detected (Provided that no No.1 cylinder top dead center position has been detected since the ignition switch was placed in the ON position) Controls provided on the assumption that barometric pressure is 101 kPa (760 mmHg) (sea level) Ignition timing is changed from that for premium gasoline to that for regular gasoline. Fuel cut for cylinders whose ignition signal is abnormal
Intake air temperature sensor Throttle position sensor (TPS) Engine coolant temperature sensor Camshaft position sensor
Barometric pressure sensor Knock sensor Ignition coil and ignition power transistor unit Induction control valve position sensor <Non Turbo> Communication line with transmission control module <AiT> Heated oxygen sensor (front) Heated oxygen sensor (rear) Misfire detection
The induction control valve is driven to full open position.
No ignition timing retard control (overall engine-transmission control) achieved when transmission speeds are changed
No air-fuel ratio closed loop control achieved Only signals of oxygen sensor (front) installed upstream of catalyst are used, and the air-fuel ratio feedback control (closed loop control) is not performed. The ECM stops supplying fuel to the cylinder with the highest misfiring rate if a misfiring that could damage the catalytic converter is detected.
i:
1 TSB Revision
13A-50
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Troubleshooting READ OUT OF DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE

Caution (1) When battery voltage is low, no detection of failure is possible. Be sure to check the battery for voltage and other conditions before starting the test. (2) Diagnostic item is erased if the battery or the engine control module connector is disconnected. Do not disconnect the battery before the diagnostic result is completely read. (3) Be sure to connect or disconnect the scan tool with the ignition switch turned off. If the scan tool is disconnected with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, ABS diagnostic trouble code may be stored and ABS warning lamp turned on. WHEN USING THE SCAN TOOL [MULTI-USE TESTER (MUT) <Up to 1993 models> or MUT-II <All models>] (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. NOTE Use adapter harness of MUT-II to connect MUT-II to 1993 and earlier models. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Take a reading of the diagnostic output. (4) Repair the problem location, referring to the diagnostic chart. (5) After turning the ignition switch once to OFF, turn it back to ON. (6) Erase the diagnostic trouble code. (7) Recheck to be sure that the condition is normal.
Scan tool /- (MB991502)
ZZOFO164
27FUO999
r MFI diagnosis
WHEN USING THE VOLTMETER CUP TO 1993 MODELS> (1) Connect an analog voltmeter to the diagnostic output terminal (terminal 1) and ground terminal (terminal 12). (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Read the diagnostic output indicated by the deflection of the voltmeter pointer. (4) Repair the problem location, referring to the diagnostic chart. (5) Erase the diagnostic trouble code by the following procedure. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 2) After removing the battery cable from the battery terminals for 10 seconds or more, reconnect the cable. 3) Turn the ignition switch to ON and take a reading of the diagnostic output to check if a normal code is output. 4) With the engine warmed up, idle the engine for approx. 15 minutes.
L Ground
TSB Revision
13A-51
27FU1468 1
Check engine/malfunction indicator lamp
WHEN USING THE CHECK ENGINE/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP <1994 AND 1995 MODELS> (1) Using the special tool, Diagnostic Trouble Code Check Harness, ground the diagnostic test mode control terminal (terminal 1) of the data link connector. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (3) Read the diagnostic output by blinking of the check engine/ malfunction indicator lamp. (4) Repair the problem location, referring to the diagnostic chart. (5) Erase the diagnostic trouble code by the following procedure. 1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 2) After removing the battery cable from the battery terminals for 10 seconds or more, reconnect the cable. 3) With the engine warmed up, idle the engine for approx. 15 minutes. 4) Turn the ignition switch to ON and take a reading of the diagnostic output to check if a normal code is output.
tiagnostic result indication method when check engine/malfunction indicator lamp is used
Typical blinking, made while diagnostic trouble code is output In case of diagnostic trouble code No.24 Blinking when condition is normal
i I L
1.5 second
0.5 second
- 0.5 second
Ught comes on Light goes out
Light comes on Light go-
I I l-n
- 0.5 second
L Pause time 1 me n u m b e r 3 seconds of tens segnentation 2 <econds
out
Z6FU2060
NOTE Other diagnostic items are also output by lamp blinking corresponding to the same code number as when scan tool is used.
26FU2061
7FU1657
DIAGNOSIS BY DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (INCREASED SENSITIVITY) (1) Using the scan tool, changeover the diagnostic test mode of the engine control module to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (INCREASED SENSITIVITY). (2) Road test the vehicle. (3) Read the diagnostic trouble code in the same manner as READ OUT OF DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE and repair the malfunctioning part. (4) Turn off the ignition switch once. Then turn it ON again. NOTE Turning OFF the ignition switch will cause the engine control module to changeover the diagnostic test module from the diagnostic test mode II to the diagnostic test mode I. (5) Erase the diagnostic trouble code. TSB Revision
13A-52
items
CHECK CHART CLASSIFIED BY PROBLEM SYMPTOMS

Starting Will not start Starting Fires up and dies Hard starting idling stability Idling instability (rough idling) Idling stability Incorrect idle speed idling stability Engine stall Reference page (13A-)
Power supply and ignition switch-IG Engine control module power around Fuel pump Volume air flow sensor Intake air temperature sensor
1 (1) 2 (2) 3 (3) 1 (1) 5 1 (1) 13 (11)
65*, 1 93*2 714, 199*2 72*, 200*2 85*, 21 2*2 aa*. 2152
gnltion switch-ST and Park/Neutral
EGR solenoid <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> <Federal Non-Turbo - From 1996
Variable induction control motor (DC motor) <Non Turbo> Anti-lock braking signal <Turbo> Engine and transaxle total control signal cA!T> Fuel pressure
1 74*3, 276*2 176*, 277*2 177*, 278*2 5 (6) 4 ( 4 ) 7 (6) 180
NOTE The numbers in the table indicates the check order for warm engine. [Numbers in ( ) are for cold engine.]
l l: Up to 1995 Federal Non Turbo models and up to 1993 l 2: From 1994 models except Federal Non Turbo Up to 1995
models models
1 TSB Revision

Items Driving Hesitation Sag / / Engine control module power ground Power supply and ignition switch-IG Fuel pump Volume air flow sensor I Driving Poor acceleration I 1 (1) Driving Stumble I Driving Shock Driving Surge Driving Knocking I stopping Run-on (Dieseling) Reference page (13A-)
I 1 (1) I
I 12 (12) I
I I
I 5 (5)
I I
I 5 (5)
I I I
I I
I 4 (4)
I I I I
1 65*. 193*2 I 71. 1992 / 72*, 200*2 I 85*. 2122
Ignition switch-ST <MIT> Ignition switch-ST and Park/Neutral position switch CA/T> Vehicle speed sensor Power steering pressure switch Air conditioning switch and compressor clutch relay Knock sensor Electrical load switch I I I I Fan motor relay <From i 994 models> I Induction control valve position senI4(4) sor <Non Turbo> Heated oxygen sensor Injectors
112*, 229*2 113*, 230*2 6 117*, 231*2 121*, 235*2 123+, 236*2
I
16(6)
I I I
/
I I I
/
I I I
/
It/11
1125*, 237*2 / 127. 23ag2 I 129*. 240*2 133) 242*2
I I
/
I I I I1
I /
I
I 2 (2) /
I I I I 2 (2) I 1 (11 I
I 1 9 1 (7) 1 (1)
I
11(l) I I /
I
I
I 137*, 247*2 1 l44*. 2572
Idle air control motor j (stepper motor type) Ignition coil and ignition powertransistor Evaporative emission purge solenoid EGR solenoid <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> <Federal Non-Turbo - From 1996 models> Fuel pressure solenoid <Turbo> Turbocharger waste gate control solenoid <Turbo> Active exhaust control unit <Turbo> Variable induction control motor (DC motor) <Non Turbo> Anti-lock braking signal <Turbo> Engine and transaxle total control signal cpJT> Fuel pressure I 3 (3) 7 (7)
153*,
1
26~3~
t58,264*2 162*, 268*2
j 12 (12) /
/ 5 (5) 1
6 (6)
4 (4) 5 (5)
4 (4)
164*, 269*2 166) 270*2 169*, 271 *2 173*, 274*2 1 74*3, 276*2
6 (6)
5 (5) /
8 (8)
7 (7)
I
I 3 (3)
I I 2 (2)
I7
/a(6)
I
/ 176*, 277*2 177*, 27ae2
15(5)
I 2 (2)
I 180
NOTE The numbers in the table indicates the check order for warm engine. [Numbers in ( ) are for cold engine.]
: Up to 1995 Federal Non Turbo models and up to 1993 models *2: From 1994 models except Federal Non Turbo Up to 1995 models
/ TSB Revision
13A-54
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (FOR YOUR INFORMATION)

Items Wont star-l (no initial combustion) Starting Fires up and dies Hard starting Hunting Rough idle Symptom The starter is used to crank the engine, but there is no combustion within the cylinders, and the engine wont start. There is combustion within the cylinders, but then the engine soon stalls. Engine starts after cranking a while. Engine speed doesnt remain constant; changes at idle. Usually, a judgement can be based upon the movement of the tachometer pointer, and the vibration transmitted to the steering wheel, shift lever, body, etc. This is called rough idle. The engine doesnt idle at the usual correct speed. The engine stalls when the foot is taken from the accelerator pedal, regardless of whether the vehicle is moving or not. The engine stalls when the accelerator pedal is depressed or while it is being used. Hesitation is the delay in response of the vehicle speed (engine speed) that occurs when the accelerator pedal is depressed in order to accelerate from the speed at which the vehicle is now traveling, or a temporary drop in vehicle speed (engine rpm) during such acceleration. Serious hesitation is called sag. (Refer to Fig. 1) Poor acceleration is inability to obtain an acceleration corresponding to the degree of throttle opening, even though acceleration is smooth, or the inability to reach maximum speed. Engine rpm increase is delayed when the accelerator pedal is initially depressed for acceleration from the stopped condition. (Refer to Fig. 2) The feeling of a comparatively large impact or vibration when the engine is accelerated or decelerated. This is slight acceleration and deceleration feel usually occurred in steady, light throttle cruise. Most notable under hight loads. A sharp sound like a hammer striking the cylinder walls during driving and which adversely affects driving. Also called dieseling, this is a continued operation of the engine after the ignition switch is turned off.
Idling stability
Incorrect idle speed Engine stall (Die out) Engine stall (Pass out) Hesitation, Sag
Poor acceleration
Driving
Stumble Shock Surge Knocking Run-on (Dieseling)
Stopping
Fig. 1 ,
Hesitation
Fig. 2
; I\ ,* r../I Sag IV
Time
ZlFUGB3
Time
ZlFUOZ24
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - On-vehicle Service
13A-55
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
BASIC IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
NOTE (1) The basic idle speed has been factory-adjusted with the engine speed adjusting screw and does not normally require adjustment. (2) If adjustment has been disturbed, or if the idle speed is too high or it drops owing to application of air conditioning load to the engine, perform the following step to make adjustment. (3) If the adjustment is required, first check that the ignition plug, injector, idle air control motor, and compression pressure are normal. (1) Before starting the inspection and adjustment procedures, set the vehicle in the following conditions: l Engine coolant temperature: 80 to 95C (176 to 203F) l Lights, electric cooling fan, accessories: OFF l Transaxle: Neutral (P range on vehicles with automatic transaxle) l Steering wheel: Straightforward position (2) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (white). NOTE The connection of the scan tool grounds the diagnostic test mode control terminal. (3) If not using the scan tool, proceed as follows: 1) Insert a paper clip into the l-pin blue connector as shown in the illustration.
2) Connect a primary-voltage-detecting tachometer to the paper clip.
1993 model: 3) Using a jumper wire, ground the diagnostic test mode control terminal (terminal (10)) of the data link connector (white).
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT FUEL IbiJECTlON - On-vehicle Service

<From 1994 models> \ From 1994 models: 3) Use the special tool (Diagnostic Trouble Code Check Harness) to ground the diagnostic test mode control terminal (terminal (1)) of the data link connector (16-pin).
WFU1466
(4) Remove the waterproof female connector from the ignition timing adjusting connector (brown). (5) Using a jumper wire, ground the ignition timing adjusting terminal.
Ignition timing adjusting connect01 (brown1
I
27FUO93i
(6) Start the engine and run at idle. (7) Check the basic idle speed. Basic idle speed: 700 + 50 rpm NOTE 1. The engine speed may be low by 20 to 100 rpm while the vehicle is new [distance driven approx. 500 km (300 miles) or less], but no adjustment is necessary. 2. If the engine stalls or speed is low despite a sufficient distance driven [approx. 500 km (300 miles) or more], it is probably due to deposits on the throttle valve. In this case, clean the throttle valve. (Refer to P. 13A-57.) 3. The tachometer should read l/3 of the actual engine speed. This means that the actual engine speed is the tachometer reading multiplied by 3. (8) If the basic idle speed is out of specification, adjust by turning the engine speed adjusting screw. NOTE If the idle speed is higher than the standard value even with engine speed adjusting screw fully tightened, check to see if there is evidence of the closed throttle position switch being moved. If the closed throttle position switch seems to have been moved, adjust it. If it does not seem to have been moved, there may be a leak caused by deteriorated fast idle air valve (FIAV). In such a case, replace the ,throttle body. (9) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (1O)When the scan tool has not been used, remove the jumper wire from the diagnostic test mode control terminal. (ll)Remove the jumper wire from the ignition timing adjusting terminal and replace the connector back again. (12)Star-t the engine again and run at idle for 10 minutes to make sure that the engine runs at proper idle speed. 1 TSB Revision I
LJ I
I I
13A-57
THROTTLE BODY (THROTTLE VALVE AREA) CLEANING

(1) Start the engine, warm it up until engine coolant temperature rises to 80C (176F), and stop the engine. (2) Disconnect the air intake hose at the throttle body side. (3) Put a plug in the inlet of bypass passage in the throttle body. Caution Never allow cleaning agent to flow into the bypass passage. (4) Spray cleaning agent from the intake port of the throttle body to the valve and leave as it is for 5 minutes or (5) &rt the engine and race it several times. Then, run it idle for approx. one minute. NOTE If the engine idle speed becomes unstable (and fails in the worst case) after plugging the bypass passage, run the engine with the throttle valve slightly opened. (6) If the deposit cannot be removed from the throttle valve, repeat steps (4) and (5). (7) Disconnect the plug from the inlet of the bypass passage. (8) Install the air intake hose. (9) Use a scan tool to erase the diagnostic trouble code or disconnect the battery ground cable for more than 10 seconds and then connect it again. (1O)Adjust the basic idle speed (speed adjusting screw). (Refer to P. 13A-55.) NOTE If the engine hunts while it is idling after adjustment of the basic idle speed, disconnect the negative cable from the battery terminal for more than 10 seconds and then idle the engine again.
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH AND THROlTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) ADJUSTMENT
(1) Connect the MUT-II to the diagnosis tester. If the MUT-II is not used, carry out the following. a. Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector.
b. Using jumper wires, connect an ohmmeter across terminal (3) (closed throttle position switch) and terminal (4) (sensor ground) of the throttle position sensor.
27FUO629
TSB Revision
13A-58

(2) Insert a 0.65-mm (.025 in.)-thick feeler gauge between the fixed SAS and throttle lever.
Engine speed adjusting
I screw (3) If the MUT-II is used, turn the ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start the engine.) (4) Loosen the throttle position sensor mounting bolts and turn the throttle position sensor body fully counterclockwise. (5) In this condition, check that the idle switch is ON (continuity exists between terminals (3) and (4)).
(6) Slowly turn the throttle position sensor clockwise until the idle switch is turned OFF (continuity between terminals (3) and (4) disappears). Then, tighten the throttle position sensor mounting bolt securely.
(7) If not using the scan tool, proceed as follows: a. Disconnect the throttle position sensor connectors and connect the special tool, Test Harness Set, between the disconnected connectors. b. Connect a digital voltmeter between the throttle position sensor terminal (2). (sensor output) and terminal (4) (sensor ground). c. Turn the ignition switch ON (but do not start the engine). (8) Check the throttle position sensor output voltage. Standard value: 400-1,000 mV (9) If the voltage is out of specification, check the throttle position sensor and associated harnesses. (lO)Remove the feeler gauge. (ll)Turn the ignition switch OFF.
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - On-vehicle Service FIXED SAS ADJUSTMENT
13A-59
NOTE (1) The fixed SAS has been factory-adjusted. Never attempt to move it. (2) Should it be out of proper adjustment, adjust by following the procedure given below. (1) Sufficiently slacken the accelerator cable. (2) Loosen the lock nut on the fixed SAS. (3) Sufficiently loosen the fixed SAS by turning it counterclockwise to fully close the throttle valve. (4) Tighten the fixed SAS slowly to find a point at which it contacts the throttle lever (where the throttle valve starts opening). From that point, tighten the fixed SAS further 1 1/e turns. (5) Holding the fixed SAS to prevent it from turning, tighten the lock nut securely. (6) Adjust the accelerator cable tension. (Refer to P.17-4.) (7) Adjust the basic idle speed. (Refer to P.l3A-55.) (8) Adjust the closed throttle position switch and throttle position sensor (TPS). (Refer to P.l3A-57.)
1 TSB Revision
13A-60
MULTIPORT _ On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION Components
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION OF MFI COMPONENTS <Up to 1995 Non Turbo Models for Federal and Up to 1993 Models>
COMPONENT LOCATION
Engine control module Engine coolant temperature sensor Evaporative emission purge solenoid
s B X
Throttle position sensor (with built-in closed throttle I, position switch) Turbocharger waste gate solenoid <Turbo> Variable induction control motor (DC motor) (with built-in induction control valve position sensor) <Non Turbo> Vehicle speed sensor Volume air flow sensor (with built-in intake air temperature sensor and barometric pressure sensor)
C U J
Fuel pressure solenoid <Turbo> Heated oxygen sensor Idle air control motor (stepper motor)
V E L
F A
NOTE: The Name column is in alphabetical order.
1 TSB Revision
13A-61
Volume air flow sensor (with built-in intake air
<Fro& 19% models>
<Mechanical Speedometer Type>

Vehicle speed sensor (reed switch)
27FU1004
Y68FOOll
1 TSB Revision
13A-62
On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - ComDonents
Variable induction control motor fi (DC motor) (with built-in induction Z7FUO802 control valG position sensor) Idle air control
Injector
/ \ ,-\ t7FU0803
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components
1349-63
z68FOOH
<From 1994 models>
and diagnostic test mode control terminal control terminal

ZlEFC498
ZlBFO292
TSB Revision
13A-64
COMPONENTS INSPECTION PROCEDURE

USING SCAN TOOL
(1) Check by the data reading and actuator test function. If any abnormality is found, check the body harness, cornponents, etc. and repair as necessary. iii (2) After repair, check again with the scan tool to make sure that the input and output signals are now normal. (3) Erase the diagnostic trouble code in memory. (4) Disconnect the scan tool. (5) Start the engine and perform running test, etc. to make sure that the troubles have been corrected.
Scan tool /- <MB991502>
79nCmed
TSB Revision
On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Components
13A-65
POWER SUPPLY (MFI relay) AND IGNITION SWITCH-IG <Up to 1993 model&
4
nglne control module
16FO29'
P
;jW4~I OFF
lanition switch IIG1 4 Equipment side connector
MFI relay I
A Equipment side connectc br
IT
r
.L x 5
(4 0
108
7FUO927
P
Engine control module Engine control module connector Z7FUO950
7FU1571 27FUO653
OPERATION
l l
While the ignition switch is on, battery power is supplied to the engine control module, the injector, the volume air flow sensor, etc. When the ignition switch is turned on, the battery voltage is applied from the ignition switch to the engine control module, which then turns ON the power transistor to energize the MFI relay coil. This turns ON the MFI relay switch and the power is supplied from the battery to the engine control module through the MFI relay switch.
INSPECTION Using Scan Tool
Function Data reading

16
Item No.
Data display Engine control module power voltage
Check condition Ignition switch: ON
Standard value Battery voltage
1 TSB Revision
13A-66
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the ignition switch terminal input voltage. @ Engine control module connectar: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
module harness side connector
201 Lo227
Repair the harness. (Ignition switch - 62)
age of the MFI relay. l MFI relay connector: Discon-
A Harness side connector
Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the engine control module and the MFI relay. l MFI relay connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Repair the -+ harness. (A4-12,25)
27FUO468
TSB Revision
13A-67
OlL0521
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION (MFI) RELAY INSPECTION Caution When applying battery voltage directly, make sure that it is applied to correct terminal. Otherwise, the relay could be damaged. (1) Remove the MFI relay.
01 LO220 00002531
(2) Using jumper wires, connect terminal (10) of MFI relay to battery (+) terminal and terminal (8) of MFI relay to battery (-) terminal. (3) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire to battery (-) terminal, measure the voltage across terminals (4) and (5) of the MFI relay.
i2V L-l
I
Z7FUO469
Jumper wire
1 Connected 1 Disconnected
Voltage at terminal 4 / 1 B+ 1 ov
/ 1 B+ I ov
Voltage at terminal 5
I I I
i Ij
(4) Using jumper wires, connect terminal (9) of MFI relay to battery (+) terminal and terminal (6) of MFI relay to battery (-) terminal. (5) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire to battery (-) terminal, check the continuity across terminals (2) and (3) of the MFI relay.
H
l 1ZI
Jumper wire
ZOl LO222
Connected Disconnected
Continuity across terminals 2 and 3 Conductive Nonconductive
(6) Using jumper wires, connect terminal (3) of MFI relay to battery (+) terminal and terminal (7) of MFI relay to battery (-) terminal. (7) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire to battery (-) terminal, measure the voltage at terminal (2) of the MFI relay. Jumper wire Connected Disconnected Voltage at terminal 2 B+ ov
(8) Replace the MFI relay if any defect is evident.
1 TSB Revision
13A-68
POWER SUPPLY (MFI relay) AND IGNITION SWITCH IG <From 1994 models>
Battery Ignition 1 itch [IG] A Equipment side connector
8 Engine control module

16FO292
MFI relay
A Harness side connector 4, \/ 2 0 0 A12 A 25 /\ 108
\/ 3 &
1 bv -.-
7FUO927
*
Engine control module connector
*
21 FU0807
Z7FUO653
7FUl572
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-65. INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-65.
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT _ On-Vehicle inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION Components
13A-69
HARNESS INSPECTION
Engine control module harness side connector
Measure the ignition switch (IG) terminal input voltage. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected Ignition switch OFF: O-l V Ignition switch ON: Battery voltage
Measure the power supply voltaoe of the MFI relav. l - Ignition switch: OFF l MFI relay connector: Disconnected Battery voltage
21 FUO808
Engine control module harness side connector connector
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the engine control module and the MFI relay. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected l MFI relay connector: Disconnected
4 l-l
Repair the harness. (A6-108)
21 FUO809 ,

Z6AF0050
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the enaine control module and the MFI reTay. l MFI relav connector: Disconnetted l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
I Repair the harness. (/x&-12,25)
1TSB Revision
IPleasure power voltage to the actuator. l MFI relay connector: Connected l Engine control module connectar: Connected Engine cranking: 8 V or higher Engine racing: Battery voltage
Replace the MFI relay or defective engine control module
13A-70
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components MFI RELAY INSPECTION
(1) Remove the MFI relay. (2) Check for continuity between MFI relay terminals.
29FUOOlO
(3) Using jumper wires, connect terminal (7) of MFI relay to battery (+) terminal and terminal (5) of MFI relay to battery (-) terminal.
Caution If jumper leads are not connected properly the relay will be damaged.
(4) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire to battery (-) terminal, measure the voltage at terminal (1) of the MFI relay.
Jumper wire Connected
29FUOOl8
Voltage B+ OV
Disconnected
(5) Using jumper wires, connect terminal (8) of MFI relay to battery (+) terminal and terminal (6) of MFI relay to battery (-) terminal. (6) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire to battery (-) terminal, check the continuity across terminals (2) and (4) (or (3) and (4)) of the MFI relay.
Jumper wire Connected
ZPFUOOl9
Continuity across terminals 2 and 4 Conductive (0 Sz) Nonconductive (- Q)
Continuity across terminals 3 and 4 Conductive (0 Q) Nonconductive (- Q)
LJ
Disconnected
(7) Replace the MFI relay if any defect is evident.
1 TSB Revision
13A-71
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE POWER GROUND

Engine control module
16FO292
Y
13 Engine control module connector
26
7FUl573
OPERATION Grounds the engine control module TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS If the ground wire of the engine control module is not connected securely to ground, the module will not operate correctly. HARNESS INSPECTION I I
1 I
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Engine control module con-
_: Engine control module harness side connector

201P0150
:-4!2
26
nector: Disconnected
1 TSB Revision
13A-72
FUEL PUMP <Up to 1993 Models - Non Turbo>
A Equipment side connector
Ignition switch (IG,) Ignition switch (ST)
,,g 3,, MFI r e l a y
I
t
B Equipment side connector
/,
,\
Fuel pump B Equipment side connector
\/ \/ 1, \, 6 7 2 C F u e l pump 1 check terminal harness side connector
8 Engine control module +I,
Z7FUO952 Engine control module connector
27FUO653
7Fu1574
OPERATION l Drives the fuel pump during cranking and engine operation. l When the ignition switch is set to START, current flows from the ignition switch through the MFI relay coil to ground. This turns on the MFI relay switch and drive power is supplied from the battery through the MFI relay switch to the fuel pump. l While the engine is running, the engine control module keeps the power transistor on and energizes the MFI relay coil so that drive power is supplied to the fuel pump.
/ TSB Revision
1344-73
INSPECTION Using Scan Tool L

Function Item No. Drive Fuel pump is driven to circulate fuel
l l
Check condition
Check content
Normal state
Actuator test 07
Engine cranking Hold return hose with Pulsation is felt Forced drive of fuel fingers to feel pulsation indicating fuel flow pump Check is made for above two conditions Listen to pump operat- Operating sound ing sound near fuel tank is heard
HARNESS INSPECTION
!-mu I - F&ipum/;,
check terminal r
--
Check the fuel pump. Apply battery voltage to the l checking terminal and operate the pump.
2 -a
\iil\ I I L-
27FUO953
I
Check for continuity between the fuel pump and the checking terminal. l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
&round)
B Harness side connector
Repair the harness. (Bl -Cl)

Z 7FUO955
[ TSB Revision
13A-74
4
1
z
-/ia Z@Q0 0 I2 =

Check for continuity between the checkina terminal and the MFI relay tetminals.
l 0
MFI relay connector: Disconnected Fuel pump connector: Dis- - 1 connected
Repair the harness. &&-Cl)
connectorn,u,,,, .
A Harness side
Measure the Dower SUDDIV voltage of the MFI relay. * l MFI relay connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: START (when A9 checked) l Ignition switch: ON (when A3 checked) 8 V or more
. 27FUO474
!$!ir the harness. (Ignition switch-[IG] - A31 (Ignition switch-[ST]

- A91
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the MFI relay and the engine control module. 0 MFI relay connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected Engine control
7 cl

27FUC475
I
7
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l MFI relay connector: Disconnected
nFUO476
bround)
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the MFI relay and the fuel pump. l MFI relay connector: Disconnected l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
I
13A-75
@--A Repair the harness. (A2-Bl)
7FUO556
MFI RELAY INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-67.
TSB Revision
13A-76
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comraonents
FUEL PUMP <From 1994 Model - Non Turbo>
03FOOO4
A Harness side connector A Equipment side connector
B Equipment side connecfor B Equipment side connector
Z7FU1360 Engine control module connector
i7FU06.53
7FU1575
OPERATION l The fuel pump is driven when the engine is cranking and while the engine is running. l When the engine is cranking and while the engine is running, the engine control module turns the power transistor ON to the MFI relay coil. This causes the MFI relay switch to turn ON, and current is supplied from the ignition switch via the MFI relay switch to drive the fuel pump.
1 TSB Revision
13A-77
INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-73.
HARNESS INSPECTION
Check the fuel pump. l Apply battery voltage to the checking terminal and operate the pump.
\&I
1, 27FUO953
Check the ground circuit of the fuel pump. 0 Fuel pump connector: Disconnected Repair the harness. (82 Ground)
Z7FUO954
B Harness side connector u 4
&Y l---L la E@n !I3 7
Check for continuity between the fuel pump and the checking terminal. l Connector: Disconnected
% +
OK 0
Z 7FUO955 1
Check for continuity between the fuel pump checking terminal and the MFI relav terminals. l MFI relay connector: Disconnected l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
I
I.
4 Ll
Repair the + harness. (Al -Cl)
Z9FlJOO24
1 TSB Revision
13A-78
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Measure the power SUDDIV voltage of the MFI relay. * l Control relay connector: Disconnected Ignition switch OFF: O-l V Ignition switch ON: Battery voltage
- / ReDair
the
connector
Z9FUOO23
or check the ignition switch. Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit, to ground between the MFI relay and the engine control module.* MFI relay connector: Daconnetted l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Engine control module harness side connector connector
Repair the harness. (AS-8)
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the MFI relay (for fuel pump) and . the fuel pump. l MFI relay (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
T
Z7FU1437
iamess side :onnector
Repair the harness. (Al -Bl)
A Harness side
Measure the power supply voltage of the fuel pump. l MFI relay- connector: Connetted l Engine control, unit connector: Connected Engine cranking: 8 V or more Engine racing: Battery voltage
Z6FU1753
Aud!l
c /STOP\
MFI relay or engine control module is defective.
MFI RELAY INSPECTION

Refer to P.l3A-70.
TSB Revision
13A-79
FUEL PUMP <Turbo>
,/ Fuel pump connector j 1-w
1I i I 203kxl04
TSB &vision ._.
13A-80
i g n i t i o n sw,itch [IG] ignition sivitch [STji A Equipment side connector
A Harness side 7
-P 1 ----3
AL
B Equipment side B Harness side connector connector
OI, OFF 4 t l
2
1 M Fuel pump
Z5ElAO03
( I 2
D Fuel pump
connector Engine control module
? 1
6~
Y c Fuel pump check terminal
pikq
7FUO653
7FU1576
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components OPERATION MFI Relay Operation
L,
13A-81
Drives the fuel pump during cranking and engine operation. t When the ignition switch is set to START, current flows from the ignition switch through the MFI relay coil to ground. This turns on the MFI relay switch and drive power is supplied from the battery through the MFI relay switch to the fuel pump. While the engine is running, the engine control module keeps the power transistor on and energizes l the MFI relay coil so that drive power is supplied to the fuel pump.
l
Fuel Pump Relay II Operation

l l
Change the fuel pump discharge in two stages by ON-OFF operation of the relay switch for fuel pump relay II. If the amount of inlet air is small (the engine load is low), the engine control module turns on the power transistor to energize the coil of fuel pump relay II, sending drive power to the fuel pump through the resistor. If the amount of inlet air is large (the engine load is high), the engine control module turns off the power transistor to send drive power directly to the fuel pump without passing through the resistor.
INSPECTION Using Scan Tool <Fuel Pump>

Function 1 Item No. 1 Operation 1 Fuel pump is driven to circulate fuel
l l
Check condition Engine cranking Forced drive of fuel pump Check is made for above two conditions
Check item Hold return hose with fingers to feel pulsation indicating fuel flow
1 Normal condition 1 Pulsation is felt
Actuator test 07
Listen to pump operat- Operating sound ing sound near fuel tank is heard
<Fuel Pump Relay lb L

Function Item No. Operation Turn the fuel pump relay II from OFF to ON Check condition Ignition switch: ON Normal condition Operating sound is heard.
1 I
Actuator test 13
HARNESS INSPECTION
f&l p&p\ check terminal Check the fuel pump. Apply battery voltage to the l checking terminal and operate the pump.
--
Z7FUO953
Check the ground circuit of the fuel pump. l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (B2 Ground)

Z7FUO%4 I
TSB Revision
13A-82
------L 11 ia 3$jn !d 1
lr
C 1
Z 7FUO955
Check for continuity between the fuel pump and the checking terminal. l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected Repair the harness (Bl -Cl)
E Harness side connector
Check for continuity between the checking terminal and the fuel
r6 ;=d27FUO960
D Harness side connector
P
0
l
Resistor (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
I
short-circuit to ground, beheen the fuel pump relay II and the en-
Repair t h e harness. Cl -D2) iD2-E2j
@ Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (Dl-21)
Z7FUO961
Check for continuity between the fuel oumo relay II and the resistor (for iuel bump). l Fuel pump relay II connector: Disconnected l Resistor (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (D4-El)
Z7FUO962
A Harness side
800 Ii!/
- 0 T
Measure the power supply voltage of the MFI relay. 0 MFI relay connector: Disconnetted l Ignition switch: START (when checking A9) l Ignition switch: ON (when checking A3) 8 V or more
Repair the harness. (Ignition switch [IG] - A31 (Igniiion switch W-l - A%
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the MFI relay and the engine control module.l MFI relay connector: Disconnetted l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
1344-83
A Harness side
Enon;control harness side
Repair the harness. (A7-8) i+
9 --I
D Harness side
A Harness side
Check for continuity between the MFI relay and the fuel pump relay II l MFI relay connector: Disconnected l Fuel Dumb relav II connector: Disconnected 1
II.
-/El $@0 H
*
21 4
27FUO963
I
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l MFI relay connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (A2-D3) (A2-D5)
Z7FUC47E
I
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to around. between the fuel pump reiay II and the fuel pump. l Fuel pump relay II connector: Disconnected l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
&round)
LZ7FUO964
Repair the harness. (Bl -D2)
MFI RELAY INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-67.
/ TSB Revision
13A-84
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comaonents
FUEL PUMP RELAY II

INSPECTION (1) Remove fuel pump relay II.
(2) Use a jumper wire to connect terminal (3) of fuel pump relay II and the positive terminal of the battery and use another jumper wire to connect terminal (1) and the negative terminal of the battery. (3) With the jumper wire connected to and disconnected from the negative terminal of the battery, check the continuity between terminals (2) and (5) of fuel pump relay II and between terminals (4) and (5) of fuel pump relay II.
Z7FUlO42
~1 (4) Replace fuel pump relay II if it is faulty.
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT RESISTOR

INSPECTION (1) Disconnect the connectors for the fuel pump circuit resistor.
(2) Measure the resistance between the terminals. Standard value: 0.6-0.9 Q (3) If the resistance deviates from the standard value, replace the fuel pump circuit resistor.
J
27FU1043
/ TSB Revision
13A-85
MFI relay
VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR

Volume air flow sensor (with built in intake air temperature sensor and lVolume air flow sensor
7 7\Y
7FL10941
Output frequency (Hz)
@;7X6sx4x3x2m
ZSEL1803j
1
Z7FUO654
162451
7FU1577
OPERATION l The volume air flow sensor located in the air cleaner converts the engine intake air volume into a pulse signal of frequency proportional to the air volume and inputs it to the engine control module, which then computes the fuel injection rate, etc. based on the input signal. l The volume air flow sensor power is supplied from the MFI relay to the volume air flow sensor and is grounded in the engine control module. The volume air flow sensor generates a pulse signal as it repeatedly opens and closes between the 5 V voltage supplied from the engine control module and ground. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Hint 1: If the engine stalls occasionally, crank the engine and shake the volume air flow sensor harness. If the engine stalls, poor contact of the volume air flow sensor connector is suspected. Hint 2: If the volume air flow sensor output frequency is other than 0 when the ignition switch is turned on (but not starting the engine), faulty volume air flow sensor or engine control module is suspected. Hint 3: If the engine can be run idle even though the volume air flow sensor output frequency is out of specification, troubles are often found in other than the volume air flow sensor itself. [Examples] (1) Disturbed volume air flow in the air flow sensor (Disconnected air duct, clogged air cleaner element) (2) Poor combustion in the cylinder (Faulty ignition plug, ignition coil, injector, incorrect compression pressure, etc.) (3) Air leaking into the intake manifold through gap of gasket, etc. (4) Loose EGR valve seat
TSB Revision
13A-86
INSPECTION Using Scan Tool <Volume Air Flow Sensor>

Data display Sensor air volume (frequency)
l
Check condition
Engine
state
Standard value 22-48 Hz 50-90 <Non turbo> 68-108 <Turbo> Frequency with racing increases
l l
Engine coolant 700 rpm (Idle) temperature: 80 to 95C (176 to 203 F) 2,000 rpm Lights and accessories: OFF Transaxle: Neutral (P range for vehicle with A/T) Racing Steering wheel: Neutral
NOTE When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the volume air flow sensor output frequency may be about 10% higher.
<Volume Air Flow Sensor Reset Signals

Function Data list Item No. 34 Data display Reset signal 0 condition Check conditions Engine warm up Engine conditions 700 rpm (Idle) 2,000 rpm Standard value ON OFF
<Volumetric Efficiency>
ry operation: OFF Transaxle: Neutral creases with rac-
Using Oscilloscope (1) Run the engine at idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform.
Regular waveform
ZO3AO2031
I
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Combonents
13A-87
HARNESS INSPECTION
1 J
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
2 0
Repair the harness (A4 - Control relay) or check the control relay.
Connector: Disconnected Ignition switch: ON
3 --l
Check for continuity of the ground :,.,..,.;..,,.
L
27FUO657
Engine control A Harness side ;q rls$zde har-
ml
r
connector
Check for continuity between the volume air flow sensor and the engine control unit. 0 Volume air flow sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected
@--A Repair the harness. (A7-19)
; Z7FUO745
TSB Revision
13A-88
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Volume air flow sensor (with built in intake air ---- temperature sensor and barometric pressure sensor) Resistance
Temperature A Equipment side connector Intake air temperature sensor \/ 5 \/ 6
Volume air flow sensor connector
r---1
Intake air temperature sensor
I
I ! mx3x2Bj
ZSELlBOSI
1 A 72 Engine control A 52 module
Z7FU0659
5V
I
7FU1576
OPERATION l The intake air temperature sensor converts the engine intake air temperature into a voltage and inputs it to the engine control module, which then corrects the fuel injection rate, etc. based on the input signal. l The 5 V power in the engine control module is supplied via a resistor in the module to the intake air temperature sensor. Via the sensor which is a kind of resistor, it is grounded in the engine control module. The intake air temperature sensor resistor has the characteristic of decreasing its resistance decreases as the intake air temperature rises. l The intake air temperature sensor terminal voltage increases or decreases as the sensor resistance increases or decreases. Therefore, the intake air temperature sensor terminal voltage changes with the intake air temperature, decreasing as the temperature rises. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS The intake air temperature sensor senses the intake air temperature in the air cleaner so that it may indicate a temperature different from outside temperature depending on engine operating state.
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components INSPECTION Using Scan Tool idFunction Item No. Data display Sensor temperature Check condition Intake air temperature
13A-89
Standard value -20C 0C 20C 40C 80C
Data reading 13
Ignition switch: ON or At -20C (-4F) engine running At 0C (32F) At 20C (68F) At 40C (104F) At 80C (176F)
HARNESS INSPECTION
v *, Check for continuity of the ground -T circuit.

l
Connector: Disconnected
2 0
Z7FU0657
Volume air flow sensor side connector
SENSOR INSPECTION
(1) Disconnect the volume air flow sensor connectors. (2) Measure resistance between terminals (5) and (6).
Temperature [C(F)] 0 (32) 20 (68) 80 (176) Resistance (kD) 6.0 2.7 0.4
TSB Revision
13A-90
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components
(3) Measure resistance while heating the sensor using a hair drier. Temperature [C (OF)] Higher Resistance (kL2) Smaller
(4) If resistance does not decrease as heat increases or the resistance remains unchanged, replace the volume air flow sensor assembly.
/ TSB Revision
13A-91
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR

A Equipment side connector Barometric pressure sensor I Volume air flow sensor connector A Harness side connector r 1 1
Barometric pressure sensor -de 161 ,/, 6 5
27FUO663
Engine control unit connector
Barometric pressure [mmHg (in.Hg)]
760 (30)
EC1551
OPERATION l The barometric pressure sensor converts the barometric pressure into a voltage and inputs it to the engine control module, which then corrects the fuel injection, rate, etc. based on the input signal. l The 5 V power in the engine control module is supplied to the barometric pressure sensor. Through the circuit in the sensor, it is grounded in the engine contrcjl module. 0 The barometric pressure sensor output voltage which is proportional to the barometric pressure (absolute pressure) is supplied to the engine control module.
TSB Revision
13A-92
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Hint 1: If the barometric pressure sensor is faulty, poor driveability is caused at high altitude, in particular. Hint 2: If the pressure indication of the barometric pressure sensor drops significantly during high speed driving, check the air cleaner for clogging. INSPECTION Using Scan Tool
Function Item No. Data display Sensor pressure Check condition Ignition switch: ON Altitude At 0 m (0 ft.) At 600 m (1,969 ft.) At 1,200 m (3,937 ft.) At 1,800 m (5,906 ft.) Standard value 101 kPa (760 mmHg) 95 kPa (710 mmHg) 88 kPa (660 mmHg) 81 kPa (610 mmHg)
I 1 ,
I/
Data reading 25
HARNESS INSPECTION
A Harness side Check for continuity of the ground circuit. 0 Connector: Disconnected

Z7FUO657
Measure the power supply voltage of the barometric pressure
Repair the harness. (Al -61)
P F
Z7FUO664
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the engine control module and the barometric pressure sensor. 0 Volume air flow sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
OK 0
A
STOP
1 TSB Revision
13A-93
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR <Up to 1993 models>

Resistance
Output
voltage
IL Coolant temperature
152455
I\ Coolant temperature
1621008
Engine coolant teniperaturesensor A Equipment side connector
27FUO667
7FUl580
OPERATION l The engine coolant temperature sensor converts the engine coolant temperature into a voltage and inputs it to the engine control module, which then controls the fuel injection rate and fast idle speed when the engine is cold based on the input signal. l The 5 V power in the engine control module is supplied via a resistor in the module to the engine coolant temperature sensor. Through the sensor which is a kind of resistor, it is grounded in the engine control module. The engine coolant temperature sensor resistor has the characteristic of decreasing its resistance decreases as the coolant temperature rises. l The engine coolant temperature sensor terminal voltage increases or decreases as the sensor resistance increases or decreases. Therefore, the engine coolant temperature sensor terminal voltage changes with the coolant temperature, decreasing as the temperature rises. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS If the fast idle speed is inadequate or the engine emits dark smoke during engine warm up operation, the engine coolant temperature sensor is often faulty.
TSB Revision
1 3A-94
Function Item No.
On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Comraonents
Data display Sensor temperature
Check condition
Coolant temperature
Standard value -20C 0C 20C 40C 80C
Data reading 21
Ignition switch: ON or At -20C (-4F) engine operating At 0C (32F) At 20C (68F) At 40C (104F) At 80C (176F)
HARNESS INSPECTION
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Connector: Disconnected
A Harness side
27FlJO668
r
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON 4.5-4.9 v
2 J
A Harness side connector 1

27FlJfM69
TSB Revision
13A795
SENSOR INSPECTION (1) Remove engine coolant temperature sensor from the intake manifold. (2) With temperature sensing portion of engine coolant temperature sensor immersed in hot water, check resistance.
Temperature C (OF) 0 (32) 20 (68)
Z7Fu0670
Resistance (Wz) 5 . 6 2.4 1.1 0.3
40 (104) 80 (176)
(3) If the resistance deviates from the standard value greatly, replace the sensor. INSTALLATION (1) Apply sealant to threaded portion. Specified sealant: 3M NUT locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent
27FUO671 -I
(2) Install engine coolant temperature sensor and tighten it to specified torque. Sensor tightening torque: 30 Nm (22 ft.lbs.) (3) Fasten harness connectors securely.
TSB Revision
13A-96
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR <From 1994 models>

Resistance output voltage
Engine coolant temperature , sensor
Engine coolant temperature

d--Y~7Fui638
162460
Engine coolant temperature

1621006
Y\ l/
Engine coolant temperature sensor
ZPFUO106
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-93. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Refer to P.l3A-93. INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-94. HARNESS INSPECTION
1 -
Harness side connector
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Engine coolant temperature sensor connector: Disconnetted Repair the harness. (A2-72)
29FUO112
TSB Revision
On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Components Measure the impressed voltage. Engine coolant temperature sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connectar: Connected l Ignition switch: ON 4.5-4.9 v
l
13A-97
lz -0
Ii T
SENSOR INSPECTION
Refer to 13A-95.
ZPFUO114
INSTALLATION
Refer to 13A-95.
TSB Revision
13A-98
THROlTLE POSITION SENSOR
A Equipment side Throttle position sensor connector
ZSELWOO]
Engine control module , ,
72
61
Terminal voltage (V) I

7 -
I
t7FU0672
Engine control module connector Minimum Maximum Throttle shaft turning angle
162461
7FUO653
7FlJ1582
OPERATION The throttle position sensor converts the throttle position opening into a voltage and inputs it to the l engine control module, which then controls the fuel injection based on the input signal. The 5 V power in the engine control module is supplied to the throttle position sensor. Through l the resistor in the sensor, it is grounded in the engine control module. As the throttle valve shaft rotates from the idle position to wide open position, the resistance between l the variable resistor terminal of the throttle position sensor and the ground terminal increases. As a result, the voltage at the throttle position sensor variable resistance terminal also increases. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Hint 1: The throttle position sensor signal is more important in the control of automatic transaxle than in the engine control. Shifting shock and other troubles will be caused if this sensor is faulty. Hint 2: If the output voltage of the throttle position sensor is out of specification, adjust the sensor and check the voltage again. If there is an evidence of disturbed fixed SAS setting, adjust the fixed SAS.
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - ComDonents INSPECTION
13A-99
Using Scan Tool

Function Data reading Item No. 14 Data display Sensor voltage Check condition Ignition switch: left ON for 15 seconds or more
Open widely
4,500~5,500 mV
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltacle of the throttle position sensor. l - Connector: disconnected l Ignition switch: ON 4.8-5.2 V
A Harness side
0
2
I
*
26FU1241
-I
26FU1242 I I
Engine control
y P Y z6FU1243
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the enaine control module and the n thr&tle position sensor. l Throttle position sensor connectar: disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected l Connector of any control module which uses TPS output signals like ECM: Disconnected
Repair the harness.

(IV-64)
i+
1 TSB Revision
13A-100
shr&e &k%m.&~ connector (sensor side, front view)
SENSOR INSPECTION (1) Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector. L/J
(2) Measure resistance between terminal (4) (sensor ground) and terminal (1) (sensor power). Standard value: 3.5-6.5 kQ
27FUO673
(3) Connect a pointer type ohmmeter between terminal (4) (sensor ground) and terminal (2) (sensor output). (4) Operate the throttle valve slowly from the idle position to the full open position and check that the resistance changes smoothly in proportion with the throttle valve \ opening angle. (5) If the resistance is out of specification, or fails to change d smoothly, replace the throttle position sensor. Throttle position sensor installation torque: 2.0 Nm (1.5 ft.lbs.) For the closed throttle position switch and throttle position sensor adjusting procedure, refer to P.l3A-57.
TSB Revision
13~9101
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

J-- Throttle position sensor (Closed throttle position switch mounted) Engine control module I I
7FUO929
Closed throttle ... poslrlon 5switch
Terminal voltage (V) 4 I
XII
3 4
z7FUO674
Throttle shaft turning angle o, zogl
7FU1583
OPERATION l The closed throttle position switch senses whether the accelerator pedal is depressed or not, converts it into high/low voltage and inputs the voltage to the engine control module, which then controls the idle air control motor based on the input signal. l The voltage in the engine control module is applied to the closed throttle position switch through a resistor. When the accelerator pedal is released, the closed throttle position switch is turned on to conduct the voltage to ground. This causes the closed throttle position switch terminal voltage to go low from high. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS If the closed throttle position switch harness and individual part check results are normal but the closed throttle position switch output is abnormal, the following troubles are suspected. (1) Poorly adjusted accelerator cable or auto-cruise control cable (2) Poorly adjusted fixed SAS INSPECTION Using Scan Tool Function Item No. Data display
Switch state Check condition Ignition switch: ON (check by operating accelerator pedal repeatedIY)
Throttle valve At idle position Open a little
Normal indication O OFF N
Data reading 26
1 TSB Revision
13A-102
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage of the closed throttle position switch. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON 4 V or more
OK
2 cl
C
f7FU0675
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. 0 Connector: Disconnected

26FU1242 I
SENSOR INSPECTION (1) With the accelerator pedal released, check to be sure that the throttle valve lever or the fixed SAS is pushed. NOTE If it is not pushed, adjust the fixed SAS (Refer to P.l3A-59.) di (2) Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector. (3) Check the continuity across the throttle position sensor connector terminal (4) (Sensor ground) and (3) (Closed throttle position switch).
I Accelerator pedal Depressed Released Continuity Non-conductive (- 8) Conductive (0 52)
1 \
I I I
NOTE If there is no continuity when the accelerator pedal is returned, loosen the throttle-position sensor installation screw; then, after turning all the way in the counterclockwise direction, check again. (4) Replace the throttle-position sensor (closed throttle position switch incorporated) if there is a malfunction, NOTE For the closed throttle position switch and throttle position sensor adjusting procedure, refer to P.l3A-57.
! ! ~
\
Z7FUO676
d!
TSB ReviSion
13A-103
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 4 992 models>

MFI relay Crankshaft position sensor (with built-in
Equipment side connector
WI
l-nJLm
0
No.1
Output characteristic
No.4
Time
Z7FUO677
7FUO493 7Fu155.l
OPERATION l The camshaft position sensor senses the top dead center on compression stroke of the No.1, No.3 and No.5 cylinders, converts it into a pulse signal and inputs it to the engine control module, which then controls the fuel injection sequence, etc. based on the input signal. l Power to the camshaft position sensor is supplied from the MFI relay and is grounded to the body. The camshaft position sensor generates a pulse signal as it repeatedly connects and disconnects between 5 V voltage supplied from the engine control module and ground. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Hint 1: If the camshaft position sensor does not function correctly, correct sequential injection is not made so that the engine may stall, run irregularly at idle or fail to accelerate normally. Hint 2: If the sensor outputs a pulse signal when the ignition switch is turned ON (with the engine not running), a faulty camshaft position sensor or engine control module is suspected.
TSB Revision
13A-104
%nn-nn
Normal waveform
INSPECTION Using Oscilloscope (1) Run the engine at an idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform.
HARNESS INSPECTION
Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition: switch ON

l
l l
Connector: Disconnected ignition switch: ON
TSB Revision
13A-105
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR <From 1993 models>

Camshaft position sensor MFI relay
27FU1301
68
Z7FUO677 Engine control module connector t6AF0054
7FU1585
7FUO653
OPERATION The camshaft position sensor senses the top dead center on compression stroke, converts it into l a pulse signal and inputs it to the engine control module, which then controls the fuel injection sequence, etc. based on the input signal. Power to the camshaft position sensor is supplied from the MFI relay and is grounded to the body. l The camshaft position sensor generates a pulse signal as it repeatedly connects and disconnects between 5 V voltage supplied from the engine control module and ground. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Hint 1: If the camshaft position sensor does not function correctly, correct sequential injection is not made so that the engine may stall, run irregularly at idle or fail to accelerate normally. Hint 2: If the sensor outputs a pulse signal when the ignition switch is turned ON (with the engine not running), a faulty camshaft position sensor or engine control module is suspected. / ! INSPECTION L Refer to P.l3A-104.
1 TSB Revision
13A-106
HARNESS INSPECTION
1 --I
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
relay)
I
21
J A Harness side connector
Ground)
Z6AF0057 I
Measure the impressed voltage. Connector: Disconnected Ignition switch: ON 4.8-5.2 V

l l

Z6AF0059
1 TSB Revision
13A-107
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 4 992 models>

MFI rela
/
Crankshaft position sensor A Equipmerit side CI, II ~w#Ld Crankshaft position sensor A I A3 1
n-' \-
;F"6942
* Time
Z7FUO682
7FUO499 7Fuls86
OPERATION
l
The crankshaft position sensor senses the crank angle (piston position) of each cylinder, converts it into a pulse signal and inputs it to the engine control module, which then controls the engine speed and controls the fuel injection timing and ignition timing based on the input signal. Power to the crankshaft position sensor is supplied from the MFI relay and is grounded to the body. The crankshaft position sensor generates a pulse signal as it repeatedly connects and disconnects between 5 V voltage supplied from the engine control module and ground.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
Hint 1: If unexpected shocks are felt during driving or the engine stalls suddenly during idling, shake the crankshaft position sensor harness. If this causes the engine to stall, poor contact of the sensor connector is suspected. Hint 2: If the crankshaft position sensor outputs a pulse signal when the ignition switch is turned ON (with the engine not running), a faulty crankshaft position sensor or engine control module is suspected. Hint 3: If the tachometer reads 0 rpm when the engine that has failed to start is cranked, faulty crankshaft position sensor or broken timing belt is suspected. Hint 4: If the tachometer reads 0 rpm when the engine that has failed to start is cranked, the primary current of the ignition coil is not turned on and off. Therefore, troubles in the ignition circuit and ignition coil or faulty ignition power transistor is suspected. Hint 5: If the engine can be run at idle even though the crankshaft position sensor reading is out of specification, troubles are often in other than the crankshaft position sensor. [Examples] (1) Faulty engine coolant temperature sensor (2) Faulty idle air control motor (3) Poorly adjusted reference idle speed
TSB Revision
13A408
INSPECTION
Using Scan Tool

Check content I I I current of ignition
NOTE (1) The tachometer indicates a third of the actual engine speed. Therefore, 3 times the tachometer indication is the actual engine speed. (2) When the tachometer is set to the 2-cylinder range, it indicates actual engine speed. Function Item No. Data display Idle speed Check condition Coolant temperature Standard value 1,300- 1,500 rpm 1,250- 1,450 rpm l,lOO-1,300 rpm 950-1,150 rpm 600-800 rpm
Data reading 22
0 gtine: Running at At -20C (4F)

l
Closed throttle posi- At 0C (32F) tion switch: ON At 20C (68F) At 40C (104F) At 80C (176F)
L) ~ I
Using Oscilloscope
5V 7
(1) Run the engine at idle speed.
(2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform.
I ~
ov------Normal waveform
I I L&l
TSB Revision
r
1
L r
13A-109
HARNESS INSPECTION t I
Measure the power supply voltage. 0 Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
27FUC496
I
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Connector Disconnected
relay)
J
Z7FUC497
I
Check the voltage of the output
Repair the harness. (A4 Ground)
connector
b
Y7FUO496
TSB Revision
13A-110
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION T Components
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR <From 1993 models>

MFI relay
A Equipment side connector 2 3 lzd A Harness side connector I
ZSEL1303
I
Time _ 27FUO682
\ iJ
26AF0060 7FU0653m
7FU1587
OPERATION
Refer to P.l3A-107.
Refer to P.l3A-107.
INSPECTION
Refer to P.i3A-108.
HARNESS INSPECTION
Harness 7 I1 tonne side
~ Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: OM Battery voltage
I
Repair the harness. (A3 - MFI relay)

27FlJl33L
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - ComDonents Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Connector: Disconnected
13A-111
Repair the harness. (Al Ground)

Z6AF0062
A Harness side
1 TSB Revision
13A-112
IGNITION SWITCH-ST <M/T>

Ignition switch (ST)
Engine control module connector Engine control module
27FUO653
OPERATION
l l
The ignition switch-ST inputs a high signal to the engine control module while the engine is cranking. The engine control module provides fuel injection control, etc., at engine startup based on this signal. When the ignition switch is set to START, the battery voltage at cranking is applied through the ignition switch to the engine control module, which detects that the engine is cranking.

Function / Item No. / Data display / / Switch state Check condition I I Stop Cranking Engine Normal indication 1 OFF ON I
1 Data reading / 18
1 ignition switch: ON
HARNESS INSPECTION
Engine control module harness side connector Measure the input voltage to the
l l
51 --I=
I
engine control module. Engine control module connector: Disconnected

Ignition switch: START
8 V or more Repair the + harness.

(51 - Igni-
26FU1.258
I
Check for continuity of the ground
circuit.
l
tion switch)
2 -J
&round)
z Z6FU1259
1 TSB Revision
13A-113
IGNITION SWITCH-ST AND PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH (PNP SWITCH) <An - 1992 models>
Ignition switch (ST) A Harness side connector
I Park/Neutral 1 position A Equipment switch side connector 8 L? P
v9 T 0
Starter S Control terminal relay ,1 E n g i n e c o n t r o l m o d u l e /
f7FU0625
7FU1999
OPERATION l The ignition switch-ST inputs a high signal to the engine control module while the engine is cranking. The engine control module provides fuel injection control, etc., at engine startup based on this signal. l When the ignition switch is set to START, the battery voltage at cranking is applied through the ignition switch and park/neutral position switch to the engine control module, which detects that the engine is cranking. In case the selector lever is in a position other than the P/N range, the battery voltage is not applied to the engine control module. l The park/neutral position switch converts the selector lever position (whether it is at the P/N range or at others) into high/low voltage and inputs it to the engine control module, which then controls the idle air control motor based on this signal. l The battery voltage in the engine control module is applied through a resistor to the park/neutral position switch. When the selector lever is set to the P/N range, continuity is produced between the park/neutral position switch terminal of the engine control module and ground through the starter motor, thereby making the terminal voltage go low. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS If the park/neutral position switch harness and individual part checked good but the park/neutral position switch output is abnormal, poorly adjusted control cable is suspected.
1 TSB Revision
-< ,I -2s.
.-l_----
13A-114
INSPECTION
Using Scan Tool IGNITION SWITCH-ST Function Item No.
sd i
Data display Switch state Check condition Ignition switch: ON stop Cranking Engine Normal indication OFF ON
Data reading 18
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Function Item No. Data display Shift position Check condition Ignition switch: ON Select lever position P or N D, 2, L or R Normal indication P or N D, 2, L or R
Data reading 29
u
I
HARNESS INSPECTION I
Measure the power supply voltage of the PNP switch. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected l PNP switch connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: START Battery voltage
ZOlA0206
-y
I
Measure the PNP switch terminal input voltage. l Engine control module connector: Connected l PNP switch connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
Check the power supply circuit.
connector
Harness side
=
ZOiA0206
Measure the input voltage of engine control module. l Engine control module connec- _ tor: Disconnected P l PNP switch connector: Connected 0 Select lever: P range l Ignition switch: START
8 V or more
YOl LO427
I I
-++
I
Replace the engine control module
/ TSB Revision
13A-115 .,
IGNITION SWITCH-ST AND PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH (PNP SWITCH) CAIT- From 1993 models>
lqnition switch (ST)
PNP switch r
I 8 -
I
Starter S MFI terminal relay I T7
i
51
,1 71 Engine control module
B u Engine control module connector
27FU1320
7FlJO653
7Fu1590
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-113. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Refer to P.l3A-113.
TSB Revision
13A-116
INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-114.
HARNESS INSPECTION
d
Measure the power supply voltage. l Engine control module con- n nectar: Disconnected l PNP switch connector: Dis- connected 0 Ignition switch: START Battery voltage
1 -J
w-+ P-l
I I
&Y 11 [a 5l@JO0 R
r
131
ZPFUO268
_r Engine control module harness side ZOFUO269 ZPFUO268
I
Check for continuity between the PNP switch and engine control module. f---Y I l Engine control module con, ( nectar: Disconnected l PNP switch connector: Dis- - / connected NOTE Insert the probes of the circuit tester into both ends of the harness.
Repair the harness.
Measure the impressed voltage to the PNP switch. l Engine control module connector: Connected l PNP switch connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
1
d
Replace the engine control module.
TSB Revision
13A-117
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (Mechanical Speedometer Type)

Vehicle speed sensor (reed switch) , Speedometer Enginecontrol module I 5v
F 7
68FOOll
Terminal voltage (V)
1
B Equipment side connector I i I
64
10x470
Vehicle speed sensor 169 (inside speedometer)
:-IUU-LrL
-t
Frequency (Hz)
ZTFUllJS
Vehiclespeed [km/h (mph)]

162451
7FUO6!53
7FUlS91
OPERATION l The vehicle speed sensor which is located in the speedometer converts the vehicle speed into a pulse signal and inputs it to the engine control module, which then provides the idle speed control, etc. based on this signal. l The vehicle speed sensor generates the vehicle speed signal by repeatedly opening and closing between the voltage of about 5 V applied from the engine control module and ground using a reed switch. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS If there is an open or short circuit in the vehicle speed sensor signal circuit, the engine may stall when the vehicle is decelerated to stop. HARNESS INSPECTION
Check the vehicle speed sensor
output circuit for continuity. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected l Move the vehicle.
Continuity Engine control module harness side connector
TSB Revision
13A-118
A Harness side
l l
0 Connector: Disconnected
SENSOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FIJEL INJECTION - Components
13A-119
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (Electrical Speedometer Type)

Ignition switch [IG] A Equipment side connector Engine control module -
ZlZFOO50
Terminal voltage (V) Vehicle speed sensor
b I
66
5;
-I
Frequency(Hz)
162178 Z7FUl434 /
k.
Vehicle speed [km/h (mph)]

162451
7FltO653
7FUl592
OPERATION l The vehicle speed sensor, mounted directly to the speedometer driven gear of the transmission, converts the vehicle speed to the pulse signal to be input to the engine control module. By this signal, the engine control module performs idle speed control servo control. l A voltage of approx. 5V is applied from the engine control module to the vehicle speed sensor output terminal. By turning the power transistor ON and OFF, the vehicle speed sensor generates the pulse signal. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Refer to P.l3A-117.
TSB Revision
13A-120
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the line voltaae of the vehicle steed sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
L r
ZlFUO969
L
tion switch)
I
Check the vehicle speed sensor output circuit for continuity. l Engine control module con- f-\ 1 nectar: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON l Move the vehicle Continuity
control harness side connector
ZO 1 A0508
L
A C - \
~ I I I
C o n t i n u i t y -----r? m m 11 UULJ Nocon- - - - +---- One rotation tinuity
I
age of the vehicle speed sensor. ;
~ Ij
J
ii
Z7FUl442
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Connector: Disconnected @+A
bound)
Z7FU1443
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - ComDonents
13A-121
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
A Harness side connector Power steering pressure switch
ml
ON
I-f----- Pressure [kPa (psi)] zotwuo

27FUO536
700-2,000
(100-284)
1,500-2,000 (213-284)
7FU1593
OPERATION
l
The power steering pressure switch converts presence/absence of power steering load into low/high voltage and inputs it to the engine control module, which then controls the idle air control motor based on this signal. The battery voltage in the engine control module is applied through a resistor to the power steering pressure switch. Steering operation causes the power steering oil pressure to increase, turning the switch on. As a result, continuity is produced between the battery voltage applied and ground. This causes the power steering pressure terminal voltage to go from high to low.
i TSB Revision J
13A-122
_ On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI MULTIPORT Components FUEL INJECTION
Checking Oil Pressure

Steering wheel Straight forward Turned Oil pump delivery pressure (ref. value) 700-l ,200 kPa (loo-171 psi) 1,500-2,000 kPa (213-284 psi)
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage. 0 Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage .
ReDair the hainess. (Al - 107)
SENSOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comtaonents
13A-123
AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH AND COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
dzGq- Battery
Air conditioning control unit
Air conditioning compressor lock controller
.z _
Engine control module ~~, ~fxx;xx;~;ing
Z7FUO966 7FUO653
7FUlS94
OPERATION l The air conditioning switch applies the battery voltage to the engine control module when the air conditioning is turned on. l When the air conditioning ON signal is input, the engine control module drives the idle air control motor and turns ON the power transistor. As a result, the air conditioning power relay coil is energized to turn on the relay switch, which activates the air compressor magnetic clutch. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS If the air compressor magnet clutch is not activated when the air conditioning switch is turned on during idling, faulty air conditioning control system is suspected. INSPECTION Using Scan Tool AIR CONDIT )NING S ITCH 8 Normal indication Item No. Data display Check condition Air conditioning switch
28
Switch state
Engine: Idling (air corn- OFF pressor to be running when air conditioning ON switch is ON)
OFF ON
1 TSB Revision
13A-124
Function Item No.
AIR CONDITIONING POWER RELAY

Data display Air conditioning relay state Check condition Air conditioning switch Normal indication OFF (compressor I/ clutch non-activation) ON (compressor clutch activation)
IL
Data reading 49
Engine: Idling after OFF warm-up ON
HARNESS INSPECTION
II-1
--- -120
age of the air conditioning circuit. ~

l

Z7FUO695
Dual air conditioning switch: ON Battery voltage
Check the air conditioning circuit.
AIR CONDITIONING INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 55 - On-vehicle Service.
\ d
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comnonents
13A-125
KNOCKSENSOR
Engine control module I
I
Knock sensor A Harness side
I
27FU1075
7FUO653
7Fu1595
OPERATION The knock sensor generates a voltage proportional to the magnitude of cylinder block vibration due to knocking and inputs it to the engine control module. Based on this signal, the engine control module provides retard control of the ignition timing. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS When knocking occurs while driving under high-load conditions, the following problems are suspected in addition to the knock sensor itself. (1) Inappropriate ignition plug heat range (2) Inappropriate gasoline (3) Incorrectly adjusted reference ignition timing
i 1 TSB Revision
13A-126
HARNESS INSPECTION
I
harness side short-circuit to
\j ~
nectar: Disconnected
I I I
I ~
\, d,
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comoonents
13A-127
ELECTRICAL LOAD SWITCH
7FUO453
27FUO688
OPERATION l The electrical load switch inputs ON/OFF state of the switch of equipment that consumes much power during idling, namely, equipment with a large electrical load, to the engine control module. Based on this signal, the engine control module controls the idle air control motor. l When the switch of equipment with a large electrical load is turned ON, the battery voltage is applied to the engine control module to indicate that the equipment switch is turned ON. INSPECTION Using Scan Tool
Function
Item No. 33
Data display Switch state
Check condition Operation of equipment: OFF
Equipment state
Normal display
Data reading
Lighting switch only: OFF + ON OFF + ON Rear defogger switch OFF + ON only: OFF + ON Brake pedal only: Depressed + Released ON + OFF
TSB Revision
13A-128
HARNESS INSPECTION
'1 61r 6
0
4
Measure the input voltage of en-0 0
Battery voltage
P
I
Engine control module harness side connector Z7FUO689
Measure the input voltage of engine control module. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected l Defogger switch: ON (Defogger relay ON) Battery voltage
Check circuit related to tail light relay
1 T
Check circuit + related to defogger relay
-T
4
I.
Measure .the input voltage of engine control module. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected l Brake pedal: Depressed (Stop light switch ON) Battery voltage
1
@--A Check circuit -+ related to stoplight relay
TSB Revision
13A-129
FAN MOTOR RELAY (RADIATOR, AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER) <From 1994 models>
Ignitionswitch (IG)
Air conditioner compressor lock controller
To air conditioner compressor
Condenser fan motor
27~~1366
27FltO653
7Fu1597
1 TSB Revision
13A-130
OPERATION The engine control module controls the radiator fan motor and condenser fan motor according to l the engine coolant temperature and vehicle speed via the power transistors (low speed side and Ij high speed side) in the module. If the engine control unit turns ON the low speed side power transistor inside the module, the radiator l fan motor relay (Lo) coil operates to send driving power supply (for low speed rotation) from the battery to the radiator fan motor. If the air conditioner compressor lock controller outputs the air conditioner compressor driving power supply, the current flows to the condenser fan motor relay (Lo). The condenser fan motor relay (Lo) will operate to send driving power supply (for low speed rotation) from the battery to the condenser fan motor. If the engine control module turns ON the high speed side power transistor inside the unit, the radiator fan motor relay (Hi) and condenser fan motor relay (Hi) will operate to send the driving power supply (for high speed rotation) to the radiator fan motor and condenser fan motor. INSPECTION Using Scan Tool
motor are driven at high speeds.
and condenser fan motor rotate at high
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure input voltage applied to ECM. l ECM connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
OK 0 A
STOP
FAN MOTOR RELAY INSPECTION Refer to Radiator Check in GROUP 14 and Power Relay Check in GROUP 55.
Check the fan motor relay circuit
TSB Revision
13A-131
MUFFLER MODE CHANGEOVER SWITCH <Turbo>

r----7
103
ii I
Q
3 ON 2 r
Muffler OFF mode changeover switch

27FU1053
7FUlS98
OPERATION l If the operator turns the muffler mode changeover switch to ON or OFF position, this is converted to high/low voltage to be sent to the engine control module. Receiving this signal, the engine control module performs the dual mode (TOUR/SPORT mode) muffler control. l The output terminal of the muffler mode changeover switch has battery voltage applied to it from the engine control module through the resistor inside the module. Place the muffler mode changeover switch to the ON position, and the muffler mode changeover switch circuit will be closed to short the voltage applied to output terminal to the ground. Accordingly, the output voltage of the muffler mode changeover switch changes from high to low. INSPECTION Using Scan Tool Function Data list 35 Data display Switch condition Check condition Ignition switch: ON Muffler mode changeover switch condition Turn to TOUR mode
Turn to SPORT
Normal display ON OFF
mode
/ TSB Revision
13A-132
HARNESS INSPECTION
AH connector
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Repair the harness. (A3-108) + 27FU1054
A Harness side
l
Z7FU105
TSB Revision
13A-133
INDUCTION CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR <Non Turbo>
Variable induction control motor (DC motor) 1 Induction control valve
A Equipment side connector Variable induction control motor (DC motor) (with built-in induction Iz _ control valve position sensor) 27FUO802 Variable induction control motor connector 72 A103
5v
/ i
Z7FUO968
7Fu1599
OPERATION l The induction control valve position sensor detects the induction control valve opening degree and converts it into a pulse signal to be input into the engine control module, which provides valve opening and closing control based on this signal. l The induction control valve position sensor is supplied with 5V power engine control module and is grounded to the engine control module. A voltage of 5V from the engine control module is impressed to the two output terminals of the induction control valve position sensor. By opening and closing the circuit between the output terminal and ground, the induction control valve position sensor generates the pulse signal.
INSPECTION
Using Scan Tool
Function Item No. Data display Check condition Engine state 700 rpm (Idling) 5,000 rpm or more Standard value 0 or 9 steps 9 or 12 steps
Data reading 62
Induction control Engine: Warm-up valve position
1 TSB Revision
13A-134
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage of the air intake control valve
4.8-5.2 V
26FU1241
-f

27FUO824
\J
Repair the harness. (A2-111) (A4-103) I
27FlJO82S / I
1 TSB Revision
13A-135
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR <California>
EGR temperature sensor I
hV
7FUlOlO 1 I
,
72
5v
output voltage
27FU1239
Temperature
21629008
7FU1600
OPERATION l The EGR temperature sensor converts the temperature of EGR gas downstream from the EGR valve to voltage and inputs it to the engine control module. The engine control module judges the condition of the EGR by this signal. If there is abnormal condition, the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp is turned on to notify the driver. l Five volt power supply in the engine control module is applied to the EGR temperature sensor through the resistance in the module. This power supply further passes through the EGR temperature sensor, which is a kind of resistor, and is grounded at the engine control module. The resistance of the EGR temperature sensor is characterized by a decrease in resistance with an increase of EGR temperature due to increase in quantity of EGR. l EGR temperature sensor terminal voltage increases or decreases with EGR temperature sensor resistance. Therefore, EGR temperature sensor terminal voltage changes with EGR gas temperature. The higher the EGR gas temperature, the lower the EGR temperature sensor terminal voltage.
TSB Revision
13A-136
Data display Sensor temperature
Check condition Engine: Warmed up Engine is maintained in a constant state for 2 minutes or more Disconnect vacuum hose (green stripe) from EGR solenoid and install blind caps to removed vacuum hose end and solenoid nipple.
Engine state 700 rpm (Idle)
Standard value 100C (212F) or less
3,500 rpm
120C (248F) or more
HARNESS INSPECTION
A Harness side
l
SENSOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 17 - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System.
TSB Revision
On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Comoonents
13A-137
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR <Non Turbo>

Heated oxygen / sensor Heated oxygen sensor
7FUO786
Electromotive Theoretical A/F force (V)
MFI relay
L J
Engine control module r\5&72
14
A/F
15
16
ZECl007
DFUO969 Engine control module connector
7FUO653
7FU1601
OPERATION l The heated oxygen sensor senses the oxygen concentration in exhaust gas, converts it into a voltage and inputs it to the engine control module. l The heated oxygen sensor outputs about 1 V when the air-fuel ratio is richer than the theoretical ratio and outputs about 0 V when the ratio is leaner (higher oxygen concentration in exhaust gas). l The engine control module controls the fuel injection ratio based on this signal so that the air-fuel ratio may be kept at the theoretical ratio. l The battery voltage is supplied to the heated oxygen sensor through the MFI relay. Therefore, the sensor element is heated by the heater so that the heated oxygen sensor remains responsive even when the exhaust temperature is low.
1 TSB Revision
13A-138
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Hint 1: Poor cleaning of exhaust gas will result if the heated oxygen sensor fails. Hint 2: If the heated oxygen sensor checked good but the sensor output voltage is out of specification, troubles of parts related to air-fuel ratio control system are suspected. [Examples] (1) Faulty injector (2) Air leaking into the intake manifold through gasket gap, etc. (3) Faulty volume air flow sensor, intake air temperature sensor, barometric pressure sensor, engine coolant temperature sensor INSPECTION Using Scan Tool
L)
Item No. ) Data display

11
Sensor voltage
the heated oxygen se sor signal, check the air/ fuel mixture ratio, and also check the condition of control by the engine control module)
TSB Revision
On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Components HARNESS INSPECTION Measure the power supply voltage of the heated oxygen sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
13A-139
Repair the harness. (A3 - MFI relay)

- Z7FUO827
Er1gine control Check for an open-circuit, or a module harness short-circuit to ground between the engine control module and the heated oxygen sensor. l Heated oxygen sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected
A Harness side
z
ZIFUO829
Repair the #( -+ harness. L (A2-72) (A4 - Ground)/
1 TSB Revision
13A-140
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components SENSOR INSPECTION
(1) Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector. I (2) Check that there is continuity [approx. 20 fiat 20C (SSF)] across terminals (3) and (4) of the heated oxygen sensor LJ connector. (3) If there is no continuity, replace the heated oxygen sensor.
27FU1014
(4) Warm up the engine until the engine coolant temperature becomes 80C (176F) or higher. (5) Using jumper wires, connect terminals (3) and (4) of the heated oxygen sensor connector to battery (+) and (-) terminals respectively.
Caution Ensure that the jumper wires are connected correctly, as wrong connections result in a broken heated oxygen sensor.
Z7FU1015
(6) Connect a digital voltmeter across terminals (1) and (2). (7) Racing the engine repeatedly and measure the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor. Heated oxygen
Engine When engine is ra,ced sensor output Remarks
voltage
0.6-l .O V When the air-fuel mixture becomes richer as a result of repeated racing, the heated oxygen sensor should output a voltage of 0.6-l .O V.
\
d
NOTE For removal and installation of the heated oxygen sensor, refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Manifold.
TSB Revision
13A-141
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR <Turbo>

Heated d&en , sensor (right)
Heated oxygen A Equipment side sensor (right) t I connector
d =
Heated oxygen B 1 sensor (left) Equipment side r connector
Heated oxygen qc sensor (left) . P\ Electromotive force (V) I
Al
A2 MFI relay
I
Theoretical A/F
7FU1004
YY
14
Z7FU1332 A/F l5
16iEC1007
-I
A Harness side connector ~- ---7
B Harness side connector -7
Engine controi module connector
Z7FUO653
TFU1602
OPERATION
Refer to P.l3A-137.
TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to P.l3A-138. INSPECTION Using Scan Tool

Function Item No. Data display Sensor detection voltage Check condition Engine: Warm-up (Make the mixture lean by engine speed reduction, and rich by racing) Engine condition When sudden deceleration from 4,000 rpm Standard value 200 mV or lower
Data reading 11 (right) 39 (lefi)
When engine is 600-1,000 mV suddenly raced Engine: Warm-up (Using the heated oxygen sensor signal, check the air/fuel mixture ratio, and also check the condition of control by the engine control module) 700 rpm (Idling) 2,000 rpm 13A-163 400 mV or lower t) 600- 1,000 mV (changes)
TSB Revision
13/b142
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage of the heated oxygen sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
27FUl333
I
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the engine control module and the heated oxygen sensor. l Heated oxygen sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
hFi relay)
OK
Repair the harness.
3 --I
AB
Harness side
Z6AF0079
(A3,B3 - Ground)
TSB Revision
13A-143
SENSOR INSPECTION (1) Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector and connect the special tool, Test Harness, to the heated oxygen sensor connector. (2) Check that there is continuity [approx. 20 Q at 20% (SSOF)] across terminals (1) and (3) of the heated oxygen sensor connector. (3) If there is no continuity, replace the heated oxygen sensor.
\
MD998i64 ZlFUO979
(4) Warm up the engine until the engine coolant temperature becomes 80C (176F) or higher. (5) Using jumper wires, connect terminals (1) (red clip of the special tool) and (3) (blue clip) of the heated oxygen sensor connector to battery (+) and (-) terminals respectively. Caution Ensure that the jumper wires are connected correctty, as wrong connections result in a broken heated oxygen sensor. (6) Connect a digital voltmeter across terminals (2) (black clip of the special tool) and (4) (white clip). (7) Race the engine repeatedly and measure the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor. Engine When engine is raced Heated oxygen sensor output voltage 0.6-1.0 V Remarks When the air-fuel mixture becomes richer as a result of repeated racing, the heated oxygen sensor should output a voltage of 0.6- 1 .O V.
hAD998464
i!lFU0980
(8) If the measurements are not as specified, defective heated oxygen sensor is suspected. INSTALLATION (1) For removal and installation of heated oxygen sensor, refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Manifold. (2) Tighten the heated oxygen sensor to specified torque.
TSB Revision
13A-144
INJECTORS <Non Turbo>
I 7FUO803
Filter
Engine control module Engine control module connector
27FUO833
@ injection
7FUO832 ,
27FlKU53
7FUl603
OPERATION l The injector is an injection nozzle with a solenoid valve which injects fuel according to the injection signal coming from the engine control module. l The injector has a fixed nozzle opening area and the fuel pressure against manifold inside pressure is regulated to a fixed level. Therefore, the volume of fuel injected by the injector is determined by the time during which the needle valve is open, namely, by the time during which the solenoid coil is energized. l The battery voltage is applied through the MFI relay to this injector. When the engine control module turns on the power transistor in the module, the solenoid coil is energized to open the injector valve, which then injects fuel.
TSB Revision
13A-145
Hint 1: If the engine is hard to start when hot, check fuel pressure and check the injector for leaks. Hint 2: If the injector does not operate when the engine that is hard to start is cranked, the following as well as the injector itself may be responsible. (1) Faulty power supply circuit to the engine control unit, faulty ground circuit (2) Faulty MFI relay (3) Faulty crankshaft position sensor, camshaft position sensor Hint 3: If there is any cylinder whose idle state remains unchanged when the fuel injection of injectors is cut one after another during idling, make following checks about such cylinder. (1) Injector and harness check (2) Ignition plug and high tension cable check (3) Compression pressure check Hint 4: If the injector harness and individual part checked good but the injector drive time is out of specification, the following troubles are suspected. (1) Poor combustion in the cylinder (faulty ignition plug, ignition coil, compression pressure, etc.) (2) Loose EGR valve seating (3) High engine resistance

Function Item No. Data display Data reading 41 Drive time Check condition Engine: Cranking Coolant temperature 0C (32F)*2 20C (68F) 80C (176F) Standard value 15.3-18.7 ms <Up to 1993 models> 13.8- 16.8 ms <From 1994 models> 41.4-50.6 ms <Up to 1993 models> 40-48.8 ms <From 1994 models> 9.9-12.1 ms <Up to 1993 models> 86-l 0.6 ms <From 1994 models> Standard value 2.3-3.5 ms
u
i
Function Item No. Data display I I Drive time3 Data 41 reading
Check condition
l
Engine state 700 rpm (Idle)
Engine coolant temperature: 80 to 95C (176 to 203F) l Lights, electric cooling fan, accessory units: All OFF l Transaxle: Neutral (P range for vehicle! with A/T) 0 Steering wheel: Neutral
2,000 rpm
2.0-3.2 ms
When sharp racing is To increase made
NOTE *1: The injector drive time refers to when the supply voltage is 11 V and the cranking speed is less than 250 rpm. *2: When coolant temperature is lower than 0C (32F), injection is made by 6 cylinders simultaneously. l 3: When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the injector drive time may be about 10% longer. Function Actuator test 01 02 03 04 05 06 item No. Drive content No.1 injector shut off No.2 injector shut off No.3 injector shut off No.4 injector shut off
I
Check condition
Normal state
i/
No.5 iniector shut off No.6 injector shut off
Engine: Idling after Idle state to change warm-up further (becoming less stable or stalling) (Shut off the injectors in sequence during idling after engine warm-up, check the idling condition)
TSB Revision
13A-146
Using Oscilloscope
(1) Run the engine at idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform d at the drive side of each injector.
41 Ak A: Injector drive time Normal waveform 203A0209
- 1
l l
HARNESS INSPECTION
1 J
Measure the power supply voltage of the front bank injector.
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage Repair the harness. (A B Cl MFI relay)

27FUO669
relay)
27FUO970
I---3318 --- i i -i I
short-circuit between the front
bank iniector and the engine control module. l Injector connector: Disconr&ted 0 Engine control module connector: Disconnected
27FUO805
Repair the harness. (A B C2i 23)
1 TSB Revision
13A-147
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit between the rear bank injector and the engine control module. l Connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
i41516)
27FUO971
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Measurement of Resistance between Front Bank Terminals (1) Remove the injector connector. (2) Measure the resistance between terminals. Standard value: 13-16 Q [at 20C (SSF)] (3) Install the injector connector.
///
..
Measurement of Resistance between Rear Bank Terminals (1) Remove the injector connector. (2) Measure the resistance between terminals.
, L;
Standard value: 13-16 Q [at 20C (68F)] (3) Install the injector connector.
i TSB Revision
13A-148
INJECTORS <Turbo>
MFI relay
Injector (Front bank connector) 7F,,0SOR
---6 7 4 - - Injector No.2 . Inject0 5
\/ \I
5 I, - - - - - /\ 6 Rear bank connector Inject0 r,,

No.6
[ - ---_ Inject01 r No.3
\,
OSCilla: 1
bisal3
- - - - - 1, ? 3
rI 5 4 P
3 b
14 K
I5 K
A --
Z7FUO973
Fuel Filter
7FlKM53
@ Injection
7FUO832
7FU1604
[ TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FIUEL INJECTION - Components
13A-149
INSPECTION
Using Scan Tool b Function Data reading item No. 41 (Rear bank)
47
Data display Drive time
Check condition Engine: Cranking
Coolant temperature 0C (32F)**

20C (68F) 80C (176F)
Standard value 8.1-9.9 ms

26.1-31.9 m s 6.3-7.7 m s
(Front bank)
I
Item No.
41
Data display Drive time*

l
Check condition
Engine state
1 Standard value 1
(Rear bank)
47
(Front bank)
1.6-2.8 ms Engine coolant temper- 700 rpm (Idle) ature: 80 to 95C (176 to 203F) 1.4-2.6 ms 0 Lamps, electric cooling 2*ooo rPm fan, accessory units: All OFF When stiarp racing is To increase l Transaxle: Neutral made l Steering wheel: Neutral
NOTE *l: The injector drive time refers to when the supply voltage is 11 V and the cranking speed is less than 250 rpm. *2: When coolant temperature iis lower than 0C (32F), injection is made by 6 cylinders simultaneously. 3: When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the injector drive time may be about 10% longer. Function Act&or test 01
02 03 04
Item No.
Drive content No.1 injector shut off

No.2 injector shut off
Check condition Engine: Idling after warm-up (Shut off the injectors in sequence during idling after engine warm-up, check the idling condition)
Normal state Idle state to change further (becoming less stable or stalling)
No.3 injector shut off No.4 injector shut off No.5 injector shut off
No.6 injector shut off
05
06
Using Oscilloscope
(1) Run the engine at idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform at the drive side of each injector.
-+[A k A: Injector Normal waveform
1 TSB Revision
13A-150
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltaoe of the resistor. l - Resistor connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage _ Repair the harness. (A4 - MFI relay)
Z7FUO976
1
Measure the power supply voltage of the front bank injector. l Resistor connector: Connecteu l Injector connector: Disconnetted l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
27FUO661
Repair the harness. (B C DlMFI relay) Check power supply Check resistor
Rear bank harness side connector _
Measure the power supply voltage of the rear bank injector. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage harness (E456MFI relay) Check power supply Check resis-
i I
.------------------ #
connector
r
=
t7FU0977
J --- I 6 --- 3EiII 0 'I I
L-i
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit between the front bank iniector and the engine control module. l lniector connector: Disconn&ted l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (B C D2i 23)

1
27FUO805
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components -Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit between the rear bank injector and the engine control module. l Connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
-, I
27FUO978
13A-151
ACTUATOR INSPECTION INJECTORS Measurement of Resistance between Front Bank Terminals

(1) Disconnect the injector connector. (2) Measure the resistance between terminals.
Standard value: 2-3 0 [at 20C (SSF)]

(3) Reconnect the injector connector.
Measurement of Resistance between Rear Bank Terminals

(1) Disconnect the injector connector. (2) Measure the resistance between terminals.
Standard value: 2-3 L2 [at 20C (68F)]

(3) Reconnect the injector connector.
TSB Revision
13A-152
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components
RESISTOR Measurement of Resistance between Terminals (1) Disconnect the resistor connector.
(2) Measure the resistance between terminals.
I
1-4 2-4
Measuring terminals
Resistance
VI k!E65c~88F)1 .
I
8-4 I
(3) If the resistance is out of specification, replace the resistor.
TSB Revision
13A-153
A Harness side 7---conn.e&or -
IDLE AIR CONTROL MOTOR (STEPPER MOTOR TYPE)
MFI relay
\, \,
\,
1,
\/
/4 6
IAC motor
m sTWat 7~~039 I Z7FUO518 Engine control module connector
, iJ
7FUO653
7FU1605
OPERATION The intake air volume during idling is controlled by opening or closing the servo valve provided in the air path that bypasses the throttle valve. l The servo valve is opened or closed by operating the stepper motor in the speed control servo in normal or reverse direction. l The battery power is supplied to the stepper motor through the MFI relay. As the engine control module turns on power transistors in the module one after another, the stepper motor coil is energized and the motor rotates in normal or reverse direction. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Hint 1: If the stepper motor step increases to 100 to 120 steps or decreases to 0 step, faulty stepper motor or open circuit in the harness is suspected. Hint 2: If the idle air controll motor harness and individual part checked good but the stepper motor steps are out of specification, the following faults are suspected. (1) Poorly adjusted reference idle speed (2) Deposit on the throttle valve (3) Air leaking into the intake manifold through gasket gap (4) Loose EGR valve seat (5) Poor combustion in the cylinder (faulty ignition plug, ignition coil, injector, low compression pressure, etc.)
l
i TSB Revision
13A-154
Function Data 45 Item No.
Data display Stepper motor steps

l
Check condition Engine coolant temperature: 80 to 95C (176 to 203F) Lights, electric cooling fan, accessory units: All OFF Transaxle: Neutral (P range for vehicle with AlT> Steering wheel: Neutral Idle position switch: ON (compressor clutch to be ON if airconditioning switch is ON) Engine: Idling
Load state Air conditioning switch: OFF
Standard value 2-25 step
Air conditioning switch: ON
Increase by 1 O-70 step
l l
NOTE When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the stepper motor steps may be about 30 steps more than standard.
Caution When the selector lever is shifted to the D range, the brakes must be used to prevent the vehicle from moving forward.
1 ~UYUUV"UUdUL
Using Oscilloscope (1) Connect the probe to each oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram. (2) Start the engine. (3) When the air conditioning switch is turned on, the idling speed increases to operate the idle speed control. Check the instantaneous waveform. NOTE Keep in mind that the waveform can be observed only when idle speed control is in operation.
TSB Revision
MlJLTlPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - ComDonents HARNESS INSPECTION Measure the power supply voltaae of idle air control ,motor. l Idle air control motor connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage 7
ZOlLO395
13A-155
Repair the
(MFIrelay - A5) Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to around between the engine contr;l module andthe idle air control motor. l Enoine control module connectar: Disconnected l Idle air control motor connector: Disconnected
Engine control A Harness side moduk? harness side connector r:i connector
[pq :::;$~
-qp j g F ia-I-,A ----44

ZOlLO397
Repair the harness. (Al -4) (A3-17) (A4-5) (A6-18)
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Checking the Operation Sound (1) Check that the operation sound of the stepper motor can be heard after the ignition is switched ON (but without starting the motor). (2) If the operation sound cannot be heard, check the stepper motors activation circuit. If the circuit is normal, it is probable that there is a malfunction of the stepper motor or of the engine control module.
TSB Revision
13A-156
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Checking the Coil Resistance (1) Disconnect the idle air control motor connector and con-
nect the special tool (test harness). (2) Measure the resistance between terminal (2) (white clip of the special tool) and either terminal (1) (red clip) or terminal (3) (blue clip) of the connector at the idle air control motor side.
Standard value: 28-33 Q at 20C (68F)
(3) Measure the resistance between terminal (5) (green clip of the special tool) and either terminal (6) (yellow clip) or terminal (4) (black clip) of the connector at the idle air control motor side.
/
Standard value: 28-33 Q at 20C (68F)
27FUOOlO
Operational Check
(1) Remove the throttle body. (2) Remove the stepper motor.
(3) Connect the special tool (test harness) to the idle air control motor connector. (4) Connect the positive (+) terminal of a power supply (approx. 6 V) to the white clip and the green clip.
TSB Revision
13A-157
(5) With the idle air control motor as shown in the illustration, connect the negative (-) terminal of the power supply to each clip as described in the following steps, and check whether or not a vibrating feeling (a feeling of very slight vibration of the stepper motor) is generated as a result of the activation of the stepper motor. 1) Connect the negative (-) terminal of the power supply to the red and black clip. 2) Connect the negative (-) terminal of the power supply to the blue and black clip. 3) Connect the negative (-) terminal of the power supply to the blue and yellow clip. 4) Connect the negative (-) terminal of the power supply to the red and yellow clip. 5) Connect the negative (-) terminal of the power supply to the red and black clip. 6) Repeat the tests in sequence from (5) to (1). (6) If, as a result of these tests, vibration is detected, the stepper motor can be considered to be normal.
1 TSB Revision
13A-158
IGNITION COIL AND IGNITION POWER TRANSISTOR

Battery
I--T I, Ignition switch !
connector
Eq
side I3 Harness side connector 1 qj&j) q-1 1 1 B-l B-2 I Spark Plug
II
J
II
1,
iransistor
[T;23
i,ofy
Engine control module 101
5V
5v
UFU1059
7FU1606
7FU0653
OPERATION l When the ignition power transistor unit A is turned on by the signat from the engine control module, primary current flows to the ignition coil A. When the ignition power transistor unit A is turned off, the primary current is shut off and a high voltage is induced in the secondary coil A, causing the ignition plugs of No. 1 and No. 4 cylinders to spark. When the ignition power transistor unit B is turned off, the ignition plugs of No. 2 and No. 5 cylinders spark. In addition, when the ignition power transistor unit C is turned off, the ignition plugs of No. 3 and No. 6 cylinders spark. l When the engine control module turns off the transistor. in the module, the battery voltage in the module is applied to the ignition power transistor unit to turn it on. When the engine control module turns on the transistor in the module, the ignition power transistor unit is turned off. TSB Revision
I L.J
13A-159
INSPECTION Using Scan Tool ;Spark Ad,;,

T 44
Item No.
<Ignition Timing Adjustmernt Mode>

Function Item No Data display Continuiity present or not present between ignition timing adjustment terminal and ground
l
Data display Ignition advance

l l
Check condition
Engine state
Standard value
Engine: Warming up 700 rpm (Idle) 7-23BTDC Timing light: Set (set timing light to check 2,000 rpm 30-50BTDC <Non Turbo> actual ignition timing) 23-43BTDC <Turbo>
Check condition Engine: Idling
Terminal condition
Standard value
ignition timing adjust- ON ment terminal is grounded Ignition timing adjust- OFF ment terminal is disconnected from ground
<Standard Ignition Timing>
I
/
I
Function Actuator test

I
Item No. 17
Drive Set to ignition timing adiustment mode
I
I l l
Check condition Engine: idling Timing light: set
Normal condition 5BTDC
I I
I -
Oscillo 1
Using Oscilloscope
I 1. Primary signal of ignition coil (1) Run the engine at an idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to oscilloscope pick-up point 1 as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the primary signal of the ignition coil.
1 . ..) +:II1.~.-Normal waveform z,,3,,02,, Oscillo 2 2.
Control signal of ignition power transistor Connect the probe to oscilloscope pick-up point 2 as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the control signal of the ignition power transistor.
1 ov-i;
i!.
, L/I
IDV
c-l R Normal waveform

YO3AO20;
13A-160
HARNESS INSPECTION
A Harness side co
Measure the power supply voltage of the ignition coil. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
OK--+0 0
2
ZOl
Lo4ll
Repair the harness. (A3 - Ignition switch)
Ignition power transistor connector: Disconnected
Ignition power transistor connector: Disconnected
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Checkforcontinuity of the ground circuit. l Connector: Disconnected
13A-161
B-2 Harness side connector
6 cl
bound)
1
Measure the voltage of the control signal circuit of the ignition power transistor. l Connector: Disconnected e Ignition switch: START
0.5-4.0
v
Repair the harness. g;::;; (Bl-11)
Z7FUO701
Measure the voltage of the ignition timing adjustment terminal. l Ignition switch: ON
4.0-5.2
V
ACTUATOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 16 - Ignition System.
1 TSB Revision
13A-162
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION PURGE SOLENOID

MFI relay
A Equipment side connector A Harness side connector
Sm.1206
OlAO324
7FUO653
7FU1607
OPERATION l The evaporative emission purge solenoid is an ON-OFF type one which controls introduction of purge air from the canister into the intake air plenum. o The battery power is supplied to the evaporative emission purge solenoid through the MFI relay. When the engine control module turns ON the power transistor in the module, current flows to the coil, introducing purge air. INSPECTION Using Scan Tool
Function Actuator test Item No. 08
Drive content
Solenoid valve from
Normal state Operating sound. is

heard when driven
OFF to ON
TSB Revision
13A-163
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage connector
OK-+ 0
2
Repair the + harness. (MFI relay -Al)
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the evaporative emission purge solenoid and the engine control module. l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected l Evaporative emission purge solenoid connector: Disconnetted
L

-I
A H a r n e s s s i d e - % z7FuoJ26 connector
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 17 - Evaporative Emission Control System.
1 TSB Revision
13A-164
EGR SOLENOID <California - Non Turbo, Turbo>

MFI relay
A1 EGR solenoid
7FUO653
7FU1606
OPERATION l The EGR solenoid is a duty control type solenoid valve. It makes control by leaking EGR valve operating negative pressure to the throttle body A port. l Power supply from the battery is sent through the MFI relay to the EGR solenoid. When the engine control module turns off the power transistor inside the module, current no more flows through the coil and EGR valve operating negative pressure leaks. TROUBLESHOOTING HINT If the results of EGR solenoid on-vehicle and off-vehicle inspections are normal but the diagnostic trouble code for EGR system failure is displayed, check the EGR valve, vacuum hose and EGR passage for blocking.
1 TSB Revision
On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Components INSPECTION Using Scan tool
13A-165
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply volt-
aae.
l
0
- Connector: Disconnected Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
= ZOlAO524
1
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the EGR solenoa and the engine control module. 0 EGR solenoid connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
relay)
I Repair the harness. (A2-6)
T
ZOlAO525
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 17 - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System.
1 TSB Revision
13A-166
FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID <Turbo>
MFI relay
-d 1
f/
7FU1008
Fuel pressure solenoid
l--&l
- 1 A Equipment side connector +I El lnf kl -
7FUO653
7FU1609
OPERATION The fuel pressure solenoid is an ON-OFF type solenoid valve that switches the pressure introduced l to the fuel pressure regulator between either intake manifold pressure or barometric pressure. Battery power is supplied to this valve via the MFI relay. When the engine control module turns l ON the internal power transistor, the coil is energized to allow barometric pressure to be introduced to the fuel pressure regulator.
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUJEL INJECTION - Components INSPECTION
13A-167
Using Scan Tool

Function oFF Actuator test Item No. 1 09to Drive content Turn solenoid valve from ON Check condition Ignition switch: ON / Click heard when driven Normal state
HARNESS INSPECTION Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected
;att;;zt;;;h: ON
Repair the harness. (Al - MFI relay)

=
-
ZOlA0524
Engine control module harness side

CO
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the fuel pressure solenoid and the engine control module. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected 0 Fuel pressure solenoid connector: Disconnected
u
OK
A
STOP
Repair the harness. (A2 -7)
YOlA0525
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components ACTUATOR INSPECTION Operation Check
NOTE Before disconnecting the vacuum hose, mark it to ensure reconnection at the correct position. (1) Remove the vacuum hose (blue stripe on black) from the solenoid valve. (2) Disconnect the harness connector.
(3) Apply a negative pressure to the nipple to which the black vacuum hose has been connected and check airtightness with and without the battery voltage applied to the solenoid valve terminal. ,
Battery voltage The other nipple of solenoid valve Normal state I
Coil Resistance Check
(1) Measure the coil resistance with a circuit tester.

Standard value: 36-46 iR [at 20C (SSF)]
TSB Revision
13A-169
TURBOCHARGER WASTE GATE SOLENOID <Turbo>
7FLJ1007
20110324
7FUCkS3
7FU1610
OPERATION l The turbocharger waste gate solenoid is an ON-OFF type solenoid valve that controls the boost pressure that is introduced to the turbocharger waste gate actuator. l Battery power is supplied to this valve via the MFI relay. When the engine control module turns ON the internal power transistor, the coil is energized to release part of the boost pressure applied to the turbocharger waste gate actuator. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS If the turbocharger waste gate solenoid harness and the unit itself are normal, but poor acceleration or other abnormalities are experienced, the follwing problems are suspected. (1) Faulty boost pressure control system (2) Poor connection of intake air hose (3) Faulty turbocharger or turbocharger waste gate actuator (4) Clogged exhaust system
TSB Revision
13A-170
INSPECTION
Using Scan Tool

Function Actuator test 12 Item No. Drive content Turn solenoid valve from OFF to ON Check condition Ignition switch: ON Normal State Click heard when driven :J
HARNESS INSPECTION
A Harness side connector [-,
l
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Repair the harness. (Al - MFI relay)
\ <
QCCQ
/ r z7Fw525 Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the turbocharger waste gate solenoid and the engine control module. l Turbocharger waste gate solenoid connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected
Z7FUO526
connector
Repair the Harness. (A2-105)
^ 7
ACTUATOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 15.
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FlJEL INJECTION - Components
13~9171
r-A4/--l----l \
I449 2 E-27= lb/&: I@ /
BOOST METER <Turbo>
---===fy, Boost ry teiter
!I
Ignition switch (IG,) I A Equipment side connector Boost meter
UFUO985 Engine control module connector
27FlJO653
TSB Revision
13~9172
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage 1 Repair the harness. (A2 - Ignition coil [IG])
Z7FUO986
Engine controt moduts Check for an open-circuit or a short-circuit to ground, between the engine control module and the boost meter. l Boost meter connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Repair the + harness. (A3-111)
Z7FUO987
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FlJEL INJECTION - ComDonents
13/b173
ACTIVE EXHAUST COIWTROL UNIT <Turbo>

DC motor for valve drive
Active exhaust control unit

27FUO988
z7Fuo653 7FU1612
OPERATION l Muffler noise is controlled1 by opening and closing the valve provided inside the main muffler. l The valve is opened or closed by turning the DC motor in the normal or reverse direction. l The DC motor is driven in the normal or reverse direction by changing the direction of power flow by the motor driving IC in the active exhaust control unit. l The active exhaust control module opens and closes the valve when it receives the signal produced by the engine control unit. HARNESS INSPECTION
1 -I
02
Measure the input voltaae of enaine control mddule. l l
Engine control module connector: Disconnected Ignition switch: ON Repair the
~
Z7FUO689
I
Battery voltage
harness
(A4-102)
ACTUATOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 15. 1 TSB Revision
VARIABLE INDUCTION CONTROL MOTOR (DC MOTOR) <Non Turbo>

Variable induction control motor (DC motor) (with built-in induction _ control valve position sensor)
y 109
7FUO802
v 110
Close A Equipment side connector
Open I I Variable induction control motor
r
M 44
DC motor
ZlFUO646 Engine control module connector
7FUO653
7FU1613
OPERATION As the DC motor is driven clockwise or counterclockwise by the signal from the engine control module, l the variable induction valve opens or closes. The DC motor is driven clockwise or counterclockwise as the direction of current flow is changed l by the motor drive IC in the engine control module. INSPECTION Using Scan Tool <Variable Induction Control Motor> Function Actuator test
11 Item No. tion
Drive content Drive the variable induccontrol (MC) motor (Open and close the variable induction valve)
Normal state Turn the variable induction valve shaft (Variable induction valve: FULL CLOSE + FULL OPEN)
TSB Revision
I I
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components <Variable Induction Control Valve Position>
13A-175
m Vanable rnductton controLv:;:;:.
700 rpm (Idle) ,,,:,:,;;
zz;:;ue
NOTE *: 1992 model only
HARNESS INSPECTION
Engine control module Check for an open-circuit or a short-circuit to ground, between the engine control module and the variable induction control motor connector. l Variable induction control motor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected f2&
27FUO841
connector
Repair the harness. (Al-log) (A2-1lOj

I
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 15.
, L
TSB Revision
13A-176
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comnonents
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SIGNAL <Turbo> I

ABS ECU A ABS control unit equipment side connector
A
28
I
T--- ABSHU
1 114 9
\
26FU1542
7FUO653
7FU1614
OPERATION l The anti-lock braking signal is input to the engine control module from the anti-lock braking system (ABS) control module as a signal to indicate whether or not the motor relay is activated. Based on this signal, the engine control module controls the idle air control motor to secure effective anti-lock braking. l When the motor relay is activated, the ABS control unit turns ON the power transistor, short-circuiting the terminal to ground. This causes the anti-lock braking signal to go from high to low. HARNESS INSPECTION
Engine control moduls
side connector
Check for an open-circuit or a short-circuit to ground, between the ABS control unit and the engine control module. l ABS control unit connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Z6FU1543
TSB Revision
13/b177
ENGINE AND TRANSAXLE TOTAL CONTROL SIGNAL <AK>

Transaxle control module
TT
# module
16FO292
A Transaxle control module connector
Z7FUO903
7Fuo653
7FlJ1615
OPERATION l Three communication lines are connected between the engine control module and the transaxle control module to send and receive the engine and transaxle total control signal. l If the transistor inside the engine control module changes from OFF to ON by the command of the engine control module, the terminal having a voltage of 5 V applied to it from the transaxle control module is grounded in the engine control module. This will change the terminal voltage of the transaxle control module from HIGH to LOW. If the transistor fitted inside the engine control module changes from ON to OFF, the terminal, having applied to it a voltage of 5 V from the transaxle control module and grounded in the engine control module, is released and the terminal voltage of the transaxle control module changes from LOW to HIGH. In this way, the terminal voltage of the transaxle control module is controlled by ON/OFF operation of the transistor inside the engine control module in order to send signal. On the other hand, the transaxle control module also controls the terminal voltage of the engine control module by the ON/OFF operation of the transistor fitted inside the transaxle control module in order to send signal. In this way, the engine and transaxle send control signal to each other.
TSB Revision
13A-178
HARNESS INSPECTION
Engine module control harness A Transaxle control module harness side connector side connector
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the transaxle control module and the engine control module. l Transaxle control module connector: Disconnected 0 Engine control module connector: Disconnected
I d
A Transaxle control module harness side connector
Engine control Check for an open-circuit, or a modu,e hamess short-circuit to ground between the transaxle control module and the engine control module. l Transaxle control module connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Engine control modu,e hamess A Transaxle control module harness side connector side connector
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the transaxle control module and the engine control module. l Transaxle control module connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
\ d
Repair the 3 harness. (Al 08-7)
TSB Revision
13A-179
Fuel gauge cover
RELEASE OF RESIDUAL PRESSURE FROM HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE

Make the following operations to release the pressure remaining in fuel pipe line so that fuel will not flow out. (1) Remove the fuel gauge cover in the luggage compartment. (2) Disconnect the fuel pump harness connector. (3) Start the engine and after it stops by itself, turn the ignition switch to OFF. (4) Connect the fuel pump harness connector.
(5) Apply the specified sealant to the rear floor pan.

Specified sealant: 3M ATD Part No.8509 or equivalent
(6) Install the fuel gauge cover.
FUEL PUMP OPERATION CHECK

(1) Set the ignition switch at OFF. (2) Check that when the battery voltage is directly applied to the fuel pump check terminal (black), the operating sound of the pump can be heard. NOTE Since the fuel pump is installed in the fuel tank, its operating sound cannot be readily heard. Remove the fuel tank cap and listen to the operating sound through the filter port. (3) Hold the high pressure fuel hose between your fingers and check that the fuel pressure can be felt.
TSB Revision
13A-180
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Combonents
FUEL PRESSURE TEST

(1) Reduce the internal pressure of the fuel pipes and hoses. (2) Disconnect the fuel high pressure hose at the fuel rail side. Caution Cover the hose connection with rags to prevent splash of fuel that could be caused by some residual pressure in the fuel pipe line.
(3) Set a fuel pressure gauge on the special tool, placing an adequate O-ring or gasket between the gauge and special tool prevent fuel leaks. (4) Attach the special tool set in step (3) to the fuel rail between high pressure hoses.
(5) Connect a jumper wire to the terminal for activation of the fuel pump and to the positive (+) terminal of the battery to activate the fuel pump. With fuel pressure applied, check to be sure that there is no fuel leakage from the fuel pressure gauge and the special tool connection part. (6) Disconnect the jumper wire (from the terminal for activation of the fuel pump) to stop the fuel pump. (7) Start the engine and let it idle.
(8) Measure the fuel pressure during idling. Standard value: <Non Turbo>Approx. 270 kPa (38 psi) at curb idle <Turbo> Approx. 235 kPa (34 psi) at curb idle
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - ComPonents
13A-181
(9) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the fuel pressure regulator, and then measure the fuel pressure while using a finger to plug the end of the hose. Standard value: <Non Turbo>330-350 kPa (47-50 psi) at-curb idle <Turbo> 295-315 kPa (43-45 psi) at curb idle
(1O)Check to be sure that the fuel pressure during idling does not decrease even after the engine is raced a few times. (ll)Use a finger to gently press the fuel return hose while repeatedly racing the engine, and check to be sure that there is fuel pressure in the return hose also. NOTE There will be no fuel pressure in the return hose if there is insufficient fuel flow. (12)lf the fuel pressure measured in steps (8) to (11) deviates from the standard value range, check for the probable cause by referring to the table below, and then make the appropriate repair.
Condition
l l
Fuel pressure is too low. Fuel pressure drops during raco return side caused by spring deteri-
L
Fuel pressure is too high.
No change of the fuel pres when the vacuum hose is connected and when not connected.
/ id
TSB Revision
13A-182
(13)Stop the engine and check for a change of the value indicated by the fuel pressure gauge. The condition is normal if there is no decrease of the indicated value within two minutes. If there is a decrease of the indicated value, monitor the speed of the decrease, and, referring to the table below, determine the cause of the problem and make the appropriate repair. Condition After the engine is stopped, the fuel pressure drops gradually. Probable cause Injector leakage. Leakage at the fuel pressure regulator valve seat. The check valve (within the fuel pump) is not closed. Remedy Replace the injector. Replace the fuel pressure regulator.
Replace the fuel pump.
There is a sudden sharp drop of the fuel pressure immediately after the
engine is stopped.
(14)Reduce the internal pressure of the fuel pipes and hoses. (15)Disconnect the fuel pressure gauge and the special tools from the delivery pipe. Caution Because there will be some residual pressure in the fuel pipe line, use a shop towel to cover so that fuel doesnt splatter. (16)Replace the O-ring at the end of the fuel high-pressure hose with a new one. (17)After connecting the fuel high-pressure hose to the fuel rail, tighten the installation bolt at the specified torque. Tightening torque: 5.0 Nm (3.6 ft.lbs.) (18)Check to be sure that there is no fuel leakage. 1) Apply battery voltage to the terminal for activation of the fuel pump so as to activate the fuel pump. 2) With fuel pressure applied, check for leakage of the fuel line.
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comuonents
13A-183
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) TERMINAL VOLTAGES INSPECTION

(1) Connect a very thin wire probe (such as a paper clip) to the probe of the voltmeter. (2) Insert the very thin probe from the wire side into contact with each of the terminals of the ECM connector and check the voltage, while referring to the check chart. NOTE 1. Measure a voltage with the ECM connector connected. 2. Measure the voltage between each terminal and the No. 26 terminal (ground terminal). 3. Withdraw the ECM for easier access to the connector terminals. 4. The inspection need not be performed in the order of the chart. Caution Short-circuiting the positive (+) probe between a connector terminal and ground could cause damage to the vehicle wiring, sensors or ECM, or all of them. Use care to prevent it! (3) If the voltmeter shows any deviation from the standard value, check the corresponding sensor, actuator and related electrical wiring, then repair or replace. (4) After repair or replacement, recheck with the voltmeter to confirm that the problem has cleared completely. TERMINAL VOLTAGE CHECK CHART Engine Control Module Connector Terminal Configuration
Z?FUCE3
1 Terminal No. 1 60 12 25 62 108
Check point Back-up power supply Power supply
Check conditions (Engine conditions) Ignition switch: OFF Ignition switch: ON
Standard value / Remarks 1 B+ B+
Ignition switch IG MFI relay (power supply) MFI relay (fuel pump) Sensor impressed voltage
Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: OFF Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch ON Engine: Idle ,
B+ B+ o-3 v B+ o-3 v 4.5-5.5 v II
61
Ignition switch: ON
1 TSB Revision
13A-184
Camshaft position sen-
1TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Terminal No. 66 Check point Vehicle speed sensor
l l
13A-185
Standard value Remarks OH5V (Changes repeated) B+ O-3 V -
Check conditions (Engine conditions) Ignition switch: ON Move the vehicle slowly forward Steering wheel placed in neutral (straight ahead) position Steering wheel turned half a turn
107
Power steering pres- .Engine: sure switch Idle, warm Air conditioning switch 1 Engine: Idle
115
Air conditioning switch set to O-3 V OFF Air conditioning switch set to ON (Air conditioning compressor in driven state) B+
20
Airconditioning switch 2
Engine: Running at idle
Air conditioning switch set to .O-3 V OFF

l l
Air conditioning switch set B+ to ON Indoor set temperature brought closer to atmospheric temperature B+ or 6 V or more for a moment + O-3 V as A/C clutch cycles B+ o-3 v 1994and later Federal model
22
Air conditioning relay
l l
Engine: Idle Air conditioning switch: OFF + ON (Air compressor in driven state)
Fan motor relay (Lo)
Radiator fan not operating (Coolant temperature: below 90C [194F]) Radiator fan operating at low speeds (Coolant temperature: 9%105C [203-221 F])
53
Fan motor relay (Hi)
Radiator fan not operating (Coolant temperature: below 90C [194FJ Radiator fan operating at high speeds (Coolant temperature: above 105C [221 F]
B+ o-3 v
1994 and later Federal model
24
Electric load switch
Engine: Runn i n g at idle
Lighting switch set to OFF Lighting switch set to ON
o-3 v B+ 0 t) 0.8 V (Changes repeated) Terminal 55 for rear bank of turbocharged engine -
56 55
Heated oxygen sensor
Engine: Warm, 2000 rpm (Digital voltmeter to be used for checking)
1 14 2 15 3 16
No.1 injector No.2 injector No.3 injector No.4 injector No.5 injector No.6 injector
Engine: Running at idle after warmup, and accelerated abruptly by depressing accelerator pedal
Falls temporarily a little from 11-14v
TSB Revision
13A-186
Terminal No. 4 17 5 18 10 23 11 9
MULTIPORT OrvVehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Check point Stepper motor coil <Al> Stepper motor coil <AZ?> Stepper motor coil <Bl> Stepper motor coil <B2> Ignition power transistor unit A Ignition power transistor unit B Ignition power transistor unit C Evaporative emission Ignition switch: ON purge solenoid Engine: Warm, 3,000 rpm Fuel pressure solenoid Ignition switch: ON Engine: Warm, 3,000 rpm B+ o-3 v B+ 0-3V+B+ B+ O-3 V 4-13 v Turbo Turbo Turbo Engine speed: 3,000 rpm 0.3-3 v Check conditions (Engine conditions) Engine: Warm Check immediately after hot restart Standard value Remarks B+ttO-3V (Changed repeated) -
105
Turbocharger gate solenoid
waste
Ignition switch: ON Engine: Idle (when the premium gasoline is used) Ignition switch: ON
11
Turbo meter
Engine: Depress the accelerator pedal Falls temporarily from B+ abruptly while the engine is idling 21 Fuel pump relay 2 Engine: Depress the accelerator pedal Rises tempo- Turbo rarily from abruptly while the engine is idling o-3 v Engine: 3,000 rpm Muffler mode changeover switch: ON Engine: Idle 0.3-3 v o-3 v Turbo
101 102
Engine ignition signal Valve opened or closed indication signal
Engine: 4,500 rpm
B+
103
Muffler mode change- Ignition over switch switch: ON
Changeover switch set to ON CrOW Changeover switch set to OFF (SPORT) Ignition timing adjustment terminal connected to ground Ignition timing adjustment terminal disconnected from ground
O-3 V B+ O-l V 4.0-5.5 V o-3v+ 9-13 v (Several seconds later)
Turbo
104
Ignition timing adjust- Ignition switch: ment terminal ON
106
Ignition switch: OFF -+ ON
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Terminal No. 6 Check poi EGR solenoid
13A-187
53
EGR temperatu sor
111
Induction control valve position sensor No. 1
nition switch: ON Engine: Slowly accelerated from idling speed to 5,000 rpm
103
Induction contrc position sensor I Engine: Slowly accelerated from/ idling O-l V or speed to 5,000 rpm 4.5-5.5 v + 1.5-4 v (for a moment)
110 109 114

L
Induction control valve (Opened) Induction control valve (Closed) Anti-lock braking signal
Engine: Slowly accelerated from idling O-l V + speed to 5,000 rpm 4 V or more (for a moment) Engine: Slowly decelerated from 5,000 rpm to idling speed Engine: Idle
l
Non Turbo
B+
Turbo
When vehicle is put in motion for the B+ 3 O-3 V first time after the ignition switch was (for a moment) placed in ON position Vehicle speed: 0 + lOkm/h (0 + 0.6mph) 4.5-5.5 v O-l V o-1 v l-5.5 V AIT AnAn-
116
Total control Reduce Engine: Idle torque request signal 1 Engine: Running at idle after warmup and changing speeds Total control Reduce Engine: Idle torque request signal 2 Engine: Running at idle after warmup and changing speeds
59
Total control Reduce Engine: Running at idle with coolant tern- O-l V perature at 50C (122F) or lower torqueexecutionsignal Engine: Idle, warm l-4v
i 1 TSB Revision
13A-188
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION OF MFI COMPONENTS <From 1994 Models except Non Turbo up to 1995 Models for Federal>
COMPONENT LOCATION L
terminal
Federal - Non Turbo>
Engine coolant temperature sensor Evaporative emission purge solenoid Fuel pressure solenoid <Turbo> Heated oxygen sensor Idle air control motor (stepper motor)
B X V E L
Variable induction control motor (DC motor) (with built-in induction control valve position sensor) <Non Turbo> Vehicle speed sensor Volume air flow sensor (with built-in intake air temperature sensor and barometric pressure sensor)
F A
NOTE: The Name column is in alphabetical order
7FU1003
A7FUl842
TSB Revision
MIULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components

Volume airflow sensor (with built-in intake air temperature sensor and barometric pressure sensoc
13A-189
ii
I\
-bank heated oxygen -wxor (rear)
= 5 cl
sensor (fro1 .
2 y( Heated oxygen sensor, left P\
Z7FU1004
,nia - T u r and Federal - Turbo from 1996~
l%&d,,ge~
I 1
<Mechanical Speedometer Type>

Vehicle speed sensor (reed switch)
Y68FWll
<Electrical Speedometer Type> // \. 1 /i
1 TSB Revision
13A-190
Variable air intake control s (DC motor) (with built-in air intak I
Injector \
I-, 27FUO803
/\
~$~~rtrad;dt
ode& -
R16FOSQO
1 TSB Revision
13A-191
piagnostic output terminal and &agnostic test mode control terminal
ZlBFO292
<California up to 1995 Imodels, _ Federal -Turbo up to 1995 models>
I \v, _E_G_~veraturel
Iii
Z7FUlOlOI
1 TSB Revision
13A-192
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components <From 1996 models>
<Turbo>
Manifolddifferential pressure sensor
1 <Non T u r b o >
Manifolddifferential pressure sensor
TSB Revision
IMULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI IFUEL INJECTION - ComDonents
13A-193
COMPONENTS INSPECTION PROCEDURE
USING SCAN TOOL Refer to P.l3A-64.
POWER SUPPLY (MFI RELAY) AND IGNITION SWITCH - IG <Up to 1995 models>
Ignition switch [IG] A Equipment side connector
En$ine control module

1 16FO292
MFI relay
~4 /\
,\8 /\ A Harness side connector
A r-4
7FUO927
82
I
7FU1616
LL 21 FUO807 Engine control module connector
z9FUo393
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-65. INSPECTlqN Refer to P.l3A-65.
TSB Revision
13A-194
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the ignition switch (IG) terminal input voltage. l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected Ignition switch OFF: O-l V Ignition switch ON: Battery voltage
d
Repair the harness: + (Ignition switch - 82) or check the ignition switch
Harness A side connector
0 I :
21 FUO808
Measure the power supply voltage of the MFI relay. l Ignition switch: OFF l MFI relay connector: Disconnected Battery voltage Repair the harness. (Battery A4, A8)
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the engine control module and the MFI relay. l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected l MFI relay connector: Disconnected
\ \j Repair the + harness. (A6-38)
ZlFUO809
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to earth between the engine control module and the MFI relay. l MFI relay connector: Disconnetted l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Z6AF0050
Repair the + harness. (A2-12, 25)
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Measure power voltage to the actuator. l MFI relay connector: Connected l Engine control module connector: Connected Engine cranking: 8 V or higher Engine racing: Battery voltage
)
13A-195
Hamessside r-:=1 connector
I
26AFOO51
engine control module ,
Refer to P.i3A-70.
1 TSB Revision
13A-196
POWER SUPPLY (MFI RELAY) AND IGNITION SWITCH-IG <From 1996 models>
fl=\ ;
Battery
lcmitionjvitch WI
&
Engi mod A Equipment side connector
I
MFI relay
ED
12 34
1
32
7FUl833 Engine control module connector
9FUO393
7FUl819
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components HARNESS INSPECTION Measure the ignition switch (IG) terminal input voltage. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected Ignition switch OFF: 0- 1 V Ignition switch ON: Battery voltage
13~9197
harness. (Ignition switch - 82) or check the ignition switch
121
1 Measure the Dower subolv volt1 age of the MFI relay. 0 Ignition switch: OFF l MFI relay connector: Disconnected Battery voltage harness. (Battery A3, A4) Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground. between the engine control module and the MFI relay. l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected l MFI relay connector: Disconnected
L-W
17FUl822
z-l
R 1 A Harness
IEngine control module harries! side connector
Engine control Check for an open-circuit, or a module harness short-circuit to ground between side connector the engine control module and the
MFI relay. MFI relay connector: Disconnetted l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
l
OK 0
5 cl
Repair the harness. (Al -12,25)
side connector 17FU1824
Measure power voltage to the actuator. l MFI relay connector: Connetted l Engine control module connectar: Connected Engine cranking: 8V or higher Engine racing: Battery voltage
Replace the + MFI relay or defective engine control module
/ TSB Revision
13A-198
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION (MFI) RELAY AND FUEL PUMP RELAY INSPECTION (1) Remove the relay. (2) Check for continuity between the relay terminals.
ii
Inspection terminals /
Continuity I I Continuity (approx. 70 Q) I
(3) Use the jumper leads to connect relay terminal 4 to the battery (+) terminal and terminal 2 to the battery (-) terminal. (4) Check the continuity between relay terminals 1 - 3 while connecting and disconnecting the jumper lead at the battery (-) terminal. Jumper lead
6FU2461
I I
Connected Disconnected
Continuity across terminals l-3 Continuity (0 Sz) I I No continuity (- Q) I I
(5) yeth;re is a defect, replace the MFI relay or fuel pump
1 TSB Revision
13A-199
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE POWER GROUND

-4
ZOlAOlQl
zpFuo393 7FU1617
OPERATION
Refer to 13A-71.
Refer to 13A-71.
LJ HARNESS INSPECTION
Refer to 13A-71.
TSB Revision
13A-200
FUEL PUMP <Non Turbo - Up to 1995 models>

I
Fuel pump connector

03FOOM J
Ignition switch [IG]
7-r
MFI relay C Fuel pump . check terminal I
B Equipment side connector
)I
Engine control 8 module I n
B Harness side connector - - - .7
-..-_
5EL1603j
7FU1618
OPERATION Refer to 13A-76. INSPECTION Refer to 13A-73. HARNESS INSPECTION Refer to 13A-77. MFI RELAY INSPECTION Refer to 13A-70. TSB Revision
NMULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components
13A-201
'
FUEL PUMP <Non Turbo - From 1996 models>

i-\F (q w j Y -
Fuel pump check terminal
\a b L cm
, \U* ;tol \ 63 //
Fuel pump connector
03FOOO4
7
Fuel pump C Fuel pump check terminal
B Equipment B Harness side connector
7FUi934
9FUO393 7FUl921
OPERATION
Refer to 13A-76. INSPECTION Refer to 13A-73.
1 TSB Revision
13A-202
HARNESS INSPECTION I
i Y-- 1 / ,/XT\ L f--ljjy =/---It 0 Ii!! = :-L.rlmF-3 I I
Check the fuel pump. Apply battery voltage to the l checking terminal and operate the pump.
Z7FUO953
Check the ground circuit of the fuel pump. l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
z7Fuo9a
I
, Check for continuity between the fuel pump and the checking terminal. l Connector: Disconnected
bround)
P 7
B Harness sic connector
Z 7FUO951
I+
Check for continuity between the fuel pump checking terminal and the MFI relay terminals. MFI relay connector: Disconl netted l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
I)
L Harness side connector
!
1 =
Repair the harness. (Al -Cl)
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comwnents Measure the power supply voltaae of the MFI relav. 0 Control relay connector: Disconnected Ignition switch OFF: 0- 1 V Ignition switch ON: Battery voltage
WA-203
A Harness side
III
7FUl822
A Harness side connector Engine control module harness short-circuit to ground bekeen side connector
switch - A3, A4) or check the. ignition
switch.
P
21 43
B Harness side A Harness side connector
the MFI relay and the engine con-
Engine control module connectar: Disconnected
Repair the harness. W-8)
iFUl82i
A Harness side
connector
7FU;828
the MFI relay (for fuel pump) and ~

l
Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (Al -Bl)
Measure the power supply voltage of the fuel pump. l MFI relay connector: Connected l Engine control unit connector: Connected Engine cranking: 8V or more Engine racing: Battery voltage
7FUl825
MFI relay or engine control module is defective.
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION (MFI) RELAY AND FUEL PUMP RELAY INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-198.
/ TSB Revision
13A-204
FUEL PUMP <Turbo - Up to 1995 models>
Equipment side connector B Harness side connector 1 Equipment side -~
A Harness side connector -. -.
E Equipment sidl
C Fuel pump check J m terminal Engine control module connector
27FU1363
\ mFlJo393
7FU1619
TSB Revision
13A-205
OPERATION Refer to 13A-81. INSPECTION Refer to 13A-81. HARNESS INSPECTION
_---k l-7 ia! -gp

4
Check the ground circuit of the
~ 7
t
C
Check for continuity between the fuel pump and the checking terminal. l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
P :
2 7FUO955
Check for continuity between the checking terminal and the fuel
l
Fuel pump relay II connector: Resistor (for fuel pump) connectar: Disconnected Fuel pump connector: Disconnected Repair the harness.
0
l
Z7FUO960
/ i
/ TSB Revision
13A-206

Engine control Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between
51
the fuel pump r&ay II and the engine control module. l Fuel pump relay II connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Repair the
harness. (Dl-31)
E Harness side connector
Check for continuity between the fuel pump relay II and the resistor (for fuel pump). l Fuel pump relay II connector: Disconnected l Resistor (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected.
Measure the power supply voltage of the MFI relay. l MFI relay connector: Disconnected Ignition switch OFF: 0 V Ignition switch ON: Battery voltage
Repair the harness. (Ignition switch [IG] A7)
ZPFUCrO23 Engine control module harness side connector Harness side connector
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to around, between the MFI relay and the engine control module. 0 MFI relay connector: Disconnetted l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
91

4
--
Check for continuity between the MFI relay and the fuel pump relay II. l MFI relay connector: Disconnected l Fuel pump relay II connector: Disconnected
P t
Z7FU1364
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comraonents
13A-207
short-circuit to Fuel pump relay II connector: Disconnected Fuel pump connector: Dis-
D Harness side

Refer to P.l3A-70.
1 TSB Revision
13A-208
FUEL PUMP <Turbo - From 1996 models>
Fuel pump connector

03FOOO4
connector A Fuel pump relay II D Equipment side connector / \/ \/ 1 42 Fuel pump circuit resistor
B Equipment side connector B Harness side connector
r
2
Fuel pump
Fuel pump El C terminal check E.-Equipment side connector iFUl820 Engine control module connector
9FUO393
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comuonents OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-81. L
13A-209
INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-81.
HARNESS INSPECTION
Fuel pump connector: Dis-
connector Harness side r Check for continuity between the checking terminal and the fuel pump relay II, and between the resistor (for fuel pump). l Fuel pump relay II connector: Disconnected l Resistor (for fuel pump) connector: Disconnected l Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
co
Repair the harness.
_ 27FUO960
1 TSB Revision
13A-210
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Engine control module harness side connector
5 -I
D Harness side connector *-L -
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the fuel pump relay II and the engine control module. l Fuel pump relay II connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
ii
Repair the harness. (Dl-31)
I 1
Z7FUO961
Harness side r
Check for continuity between the fuel pump relay II and the resistor
nectar: Disconnected.
I I ~
I-7
77Flm
IDI
7FUl822
module harness short-circuit to ground, between side connector the MFI relay and the engine con-
Engine control
Measure the power supply voltage of the MFI relay. l MFI relay connector: Disconnetted Ignition switch OFF: 0 V Ignition switch ON: Battery voltage
I I i/
Check for an open-circuit, or a
trol module. l MFI relay connector: Disconnetted l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
OK 0 L MC
_ _
I-7FUl827
I
I
I 9 0
D f-farncs~ side MFI relay and the fuel pump relay connector II.
/ Check for continuitv between the
--&31211I l MFI relay connector: Discon514 1 netted 0 Fuel pump relay II connector: h Y Disconnected I -----I _---l
A Harness sic 7FUl854
bid l-id
LZJ AJRepair the (Al -05)
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the fuel pump relay II and the fuel
pump.
l
13A-211
Fuel pump relay II connector: Disconnected Fuel pump connector: Disconnected
@ j+ LTOA Repair the harness. (Bl -D2)
Z7FUO96
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION (MFI) RELAY AND FUEL PUMP RELAY INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-198.
FUEL PUMP RELAY II

INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-84.
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT RESISTOR L

INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-84.
, i
TSB Revision
13A-212
VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR

:I relay Volume air flow sensor (with built in intake air mperature sensor and Volume air flow sensor
Output frequency (Hz)
il
Airflow rate (liters/second) Data reading 12

@&7~6:<5~4~3~2~1] SEL1803
J 7FUO654 Engine control module connector
2162451
\ d
ZPFUO393
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-85. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Refer to P.l3A-85. INSPECTION Using Scan Tool <Volume Air Flow Sensors
1 Function 1 Item No. / Data display 1 Sensor air volume (frequency) Check condition 1 Engine state I Standard value I
tral (P range for t

l
Steering wheel:
. 2,500 rpm 1 --i models>
71-111 Hz <Non Turbo> 93- 133 Hz <Turbo> 1 Frequency increases with racing 1
NOTE When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the volume air flow sensor output frequency may be about 10% higher.
\ d,
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - ComDonents Function Data reading <From 1996 models>
13A-213
Standard value 3.6-7.5 g/s <Non Turbo> 3.9-7.7 g/s CTU rho> 10.6-l 6.5 g/s <Non Turbo> 13.9-19.8 g/s <Turbo> Standard value
-I--Item No. Data display 12 Sensor air volume (Airflow volume) Item No. 87 Data display Calculation load o . Data display Reset signal condition
Check conditions
l
Engine state
Engine coolant tem- Idling perature: 80 to 95C (176 to 203F) Lights, electric cooling fan, accessories: OFF 2,500 rpm Transaxle: Neutral (P range for A/T)
Function Data reading <From 1996 models>
Check conditions
l l
Engine state
Engine: warm range: Operation idling to maximum output
1
1 700 rpm (Idle) 1 2,500 rpm I
15-35% <Non Turbo> lo-30% <Turbo>
<Volume Air Flow Sensor Reset Signal>

~ ,,:lnct;n ;tm N Check conditions
l
Engine conditions 1 Standard value 1 ON I
Engine warm up
<Volumetric Efficiency>
Function Data list Item No. 37 Data display Volumetric efficiency B Check condition Engine coolant temperature: 80 to 95C (176 to 203F) @ Lights, electric cooling fan and accessory operation: OFF l Transaxle: Neutral (P range for vehicle with A/T) wheel: l Steering Neutral Engine state 700 rpm (Idle) Standard value 1 15-35%
ing
Using Oscilloscope
(1) Run the engine at idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform.
Regular waveform
TSB Revision
13A-214
HARNESS INSPECTION
l l
volume air flow sensor and the engine control unit. 0 Volume air flow sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
1 TSB Revision
13A-215
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Volume air flow sensor $1;;;;;;; ;g~ed barometric pressure sensor) Output voltage Resistance I t
.~
Temperature 2162460 A Equipment side connector Volume air flow sensor connector A Harness side connector
\
Temperature
21621CXl8
intake air temperature sensor
intake air temperature sensor
Z7FUO659 .L
5 v
I
7FU1621
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-88. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Refer to P.l3A-88. INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-89.
TSB Revision
13A-216
HARNESS INSPECTION
Repair the harness. (A592)

2 7FUO657
A Harness side
1 l- age. the power supply voltMeasure

0 Connector: Disconnected Ignition switch: ON 4.5-4.9 v
l
SENSOR INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-89.
TSB Revision
13A-217
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR
A EQuiDment side coitriector Barometric pressure sensor Volume air flow sensor connector A Harness side connector .--.-~ 5 Barometi pressure
5ELl803,
Engine confol module

7FUO6631
81
85
Output voltage (V) &
1
92
I 7FUO664
Barometricpressure[mmHg(in.Hg)]
$&KISS
7FU1623
TSB Revision
13A-218
HARNESS INSPECTION
A Harness side
Check for continuity of the ground

l

Z7FUO657
Measure the power supply voltage of the barometric pressure sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON 4.8-5.2 v
l--Y

Z7FUO665
Engine control module harnes side connector
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground between the engine control module and the barometric pressure sensor. 0 Volume air flow sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Z7FlKM64
TSB Revision
13A-219
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Resistance
I\___: %$~\)
sensor \I L/ Coolant temperature lOZ4l8
I
Coolant temperature
1621008
A Equipment connector
9FUO393
7FUl829
id
TSB Revision
13A-220
HARNESS INSPECTION
Check for continuity of the ground circuit 0 Engine coolant temperature sensor connector: Disconnetted Repair the harness. (A2-92)
Z9FUO112 ,
i
a
I
q
Measure the impressed voltage. Engine coolant temperature sensor connector: Disconnected a Engine control module connector: Connected l Ignition switch: ON 4.5-4.9 v
l
ZPFUO114
SENSOR INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-95.
INSTALLATION
Refer to P.l3A-95.
TSB Revision
13A-221
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
sensor
L--
Throttle position sensor
1 rpJ3jsJYJl I / SEl.00~
Engine control module ,84

%
5V 7FUO672 Engine control module connector
Maximum Throttle shaft turning angle

2162461 29Fuo393 7FU1625
Minimum
TSB Revision
13A-222
HARNESS INSPECTION
Throttle position sensor connector: Disconnected Engine control module connector: Disconnected nals like ECM: Discon-
SENSOR INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-100.
TSB Revision
13A-223
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

L -__._. si\\E:+-< Throttle position sensor (Closed throttle position switch mounted) r
PLL r r
5V
a7
92
Closed throttle position switch
I
IL 3 \
,t 4 ,\

-I I
m-e-:Ii : OFF 7FUO674
*
7FU1626
Throttle shaft turning anglezo;t002
, L
TSB Revision
13A-224
r
I
HARNESS INSPECTION
A Harness side connector Measure the power supply voltage of the closed throttle position switch. l Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON 4 V or more Repair thl harness. (A3-87)
Z7FUO675
J I
2 A
Z-- mk gJ0 II
ciizrgg
Check for continuity of the ground Repair the harness. (A4-92)
L
I ~
26FU1242
SENSOR INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-102.
~ \ d
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle lixspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components
13A-225
/ L
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

Camshaft position sensor \ raft position sensor t A Equipment side connector MFI relay
I
3
7FU130t
Engine control module , r

IV1 (
No.4
No.1 5-v
Z7FUO677
6A FOO54
7FU1627
/ L
TSB Revision
13A-226
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Repair the harness. (A3 - MFI relay)
27FU1330
A Harness side
l
1 TSB Revision
_ On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI Components
13A-227
:RANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

CX&haft A Equipment side positioq
7FU130E
A Harness side connector - - - I
put characteristic
27 FU9682
7FU1626
OPERATION
Refer to P.l3A-107.
Refer to P.l3A-107.

Data display Cranking speed Check condition
l l
Check content
Normal state
Engine cranking Tachometer connected (check on and off of primary current of ignition coil by tachometer)
Compare cranking Indicated speed to speed and scan tool agree reading
NOTE (1) The tachometer indicates a third of the actual engine speed. Therefore, 3 times the tachometer indication is the actual engine speed. (2) When the tachometer is set to the 2-cylinder range, it indicates actual engine speed.
TSB Revision
13A-228
Function Item No.
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION Data display Idle speed
_ On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI Components Coolant temperature Standard value 1,275- 1,475 rpm* 1,300-l ,500 rpm*2 1,225- 1,425 rpm* 1,300-l ,500 rpm*2 l,lOO-1,300 rpm*l 1,300-l ,500 rpm*2 950-1,150 rpm* 1,050-l ,250 rpm*2 600-800 rpm
Check condition
l l
Data reading 22
Engine: Running at idle At -20C (4F) Closed throttle position switch: ON At 0C (32F) At 2OC(68F) At 4OC(104F) At 8OC(176F)
NOTE
*l: Non Turbo, Turbo Up to 1995 models *2: Turbo From 1996 models
[[I Using Oscilloscope (1) Run the engine at idle speed. 5v - - - h p m (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform. ov------.
Normal waveform
Z7FUO500
HARNESS INSPECTION
Connector. Disconnected
TSB Revision
13A-229
0 Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON
IGNITION SWITCH-ST <M/T>

Ignition switch (ST) I Engine control module connector
7FUl629
i LJ

HARNESS INSPECTION \ Engine control Measure the input voltage to the module harness engine control module side connector l Engine control module connectar. Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: START 8 V or more Repair the harness. (71 - Ignition switch)
Z6FU1256
Engine control module harness c _ -I side connector /!a
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (91 Ground)
/ id
Z6FU1259
1 TSB Revision
13A-230
_ On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI ComDonents
IGNITION SWITCH-ST AND PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH (PNP SWITCH) <AK>

Ignition switch (ST)
I
Starter S MFI terminal relay A 91 Engine control module
7FU1320 Engine control module connector
ji
zpFuo393 7FU1630
OPERATION
Refer to P.i3A-113.
Refer to P.l3A-113.
INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-114.
HARNESS INSPECTlON
Measure the power supply voltage. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected l PNP switch connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: START Battery voltage
Z9FUO268
1 TSB Revision
_ On-Vehicle.lnspection ComDonents
of MFI
13A-231
I ? A Harness sideI I
harness side cOnnectOr
Check for continuity between the PNP switch and enaine control module. 8 Engine control module connectar: Disconnected 8 PNP switch connector: Disconnected NOTE Insert the probes of the circuit tester into both ends of the harness.
Repair the harness. (A8-91) (A7-71)
ZOFUO269
131
tA Harness side connector
Measure the impressed voltage to the PNP switch. l Engine control module connector: Connected l PNP switch connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON Bakery voltage
OK 0
A
STOP
Replace the engine control module.
ZPFUO268
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (Mechanical Speedometer Type)
I
i
Vehicle speed sensor
I Terminal voltage (V)
68FOOll
5v Lf!il 1 r--L
86 A
Vehicle speed sensor 1 og(inside speedometer)
B Equipment side connector IJJ-UUL -t Frequency (Hz)

2162478 ZTFU1436

b

2162451 Z%Uo393 7FU1631
1 TSB Revision
13A-232
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-117. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Refer to P.l3A-117. HARNESS INSPECTION
onnector: Disconnected
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION \/EHlCLE
13A-233
SPEED SENSOR (Electrical Speedometer Type)

Ignition switch WI ~A Equipment side connector Engine control module p-j -.1
Vehicle rspeed sensor
Frequency (Hz)
2162478
Z?FU1434

2162451 7FUl632
TSB Revision
13A-234
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure line voltage applied to vehicle speed sensor. l Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
OK
2 cl
Repair the harness. (Al - Ignition switch)
ZlFUO969
Check the vehicle speed sensor output circuit for continuity. l Engine control module connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON l Move the vehicle
ZOlA0508
Continuity
Measure the power supply voltage of the vehicle speed sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON 4.5-4.9 v Repair the harness. (A3-86)
Z7FUl442
SENSOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and gauges.
TSB Revision
13A-235
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
L -p-.
37
Power steering pressure switch,, 1 /\
A Harness side connector En
700-2,000
(100-284)
1,500-2,000
Pressure [kPa (psi)]
(213-284)
20,Lo~
Z7FUO536
7FU1633
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-121. INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-122. HARNESS INSPECTION

Measure the power supply voltage. A Harness side connector
0 Connector Disconnected
l
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
Repair the
harness.
(Al -37) Z7FUO505 / I
SENSOR INSPECTION / Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service. TSB Revision
13A-236
AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH AND COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY

(JLWJ !L$lioningJ -.T
Battery
T T
-1
-/
\/
16FOO30
r
L I
Air conditioning compressor
Engine control module connector NOTE *l: Non Turbo **: Turbo
mFuo393 7FU1634
d 27FUO966
OPERATION
Refer to P.l3A-123.
Refer to P.l3A-123.
INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-123.
HARNESS INSPECTION
1 -I
side connector Z7FUO695
Measure the power supply voltage of the conditioning circuit. l Air conditioning switch: ON l Engine control module connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON l Dual air conditioning switch: ON Engine control Battery voltage moduleharness
Check the air conditioning circuit.
NOTE *l: Non Turbo *? Turbo
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components AIR CONDITIONING INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 55 - On-vehicle Service.
13A-237
KNOCK SENSOR
Engine control module I
r 7 78
Knock
sensor
= 7FU1075
A Harness side
29Fuo393 7FU1635
OPERATION
Refer to P.l3A-125.
Refer to P.l3A-125.
HARNESS INSPECTION
connector
I+
78 Y
Check for an open-circuit or a short-circuit to ground, between the engine control module and knock sensor. Knock sensor connector: Disl connected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
27FUo906
TSB Revision
13A-238
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comtsonents
2A
Check for continuity of the ground STOP
I
ELECTRICAL LOAD SWITCH
bound)
Defog ger relay I NOTE *: up to 1995 models 2: From 1996 models
t
27FUO688
7FU1636
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components HARNESS INSPECTION
13A-239
24. 582
Measure the input voltage of engine control module. l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected l Lighting switch: ON (Tail light relay ON) Battery voltage Check circuit related to tail light relay
Measure the input voltage of engine control module. l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected 0 Defogger switch: ON (Defogger relay ON) Battery voltage
Engine control module harness side connector 27FUO689
24. 582
Check circuit related to defogger relay
LJ
Measure the input voltage of engine control module. l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected l Brake pedal: Depressed (Stop light switch ON) Battery voltage Check circuit related to stoplight relay
.I
I )
NOTE 1:: Up to 1995 models : From 1996 models
TSB Revision
13A-240
FAN MOTOR RELAY (RADIATOR, AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER)
Ignition switch-IG
z
Battery z EAir conditioning compressor lock controller
1(Lo) 1Ir
ECM -
Radiato r fan mote 3r relay
0w To air conditioning
compressor
-
I\ 7c 4 Ari , 4,
?
7
u-0)
Condenser fan motor
21
/ i
27FU1366
7FU1637
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-130. id
13A-241
, INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-130. HARNESS INSPECTION Measure input voltage applied to ECM. l ECM connector: Disconnetted l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Check the fan motor
ECM harness / side connector Z6FU2008 relay circuit.
: I -a
FAN MOTOR RELAY INSPECTION Refer to Radiator Check in GROUP 14 and Power Relay Check in GROUP 55.
MUFFLER MODE CHANGEOVER SWITCH <Turbo>

l l: Up to 1995 models
*2: From 1996 models A Equipment side
connector
7FU1053
7FlJ1638
OPERATION
Refer to P.l3A-131.
INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-131.
.TSB Revision
13A-242
HARNESS INSPECTION
CI
1
Measure the power supply voltage. l Connector: Disconnected a ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
2 cl
Repair the harness. (A3-34*, 61**)
2 J
J 0
-Ib!--.c /%@ 6
f Z7FU1054
Checkforcontinuity of the ground circuit. l Connector: Disconnected
Repair the harness. (A2 Ground) Z7FU1055
INDUCTION CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR <Non Turbo>

Variable induction control motor (DC motor) induction control valve
A Eauioment side 1
Variable induction control motor r (DC motor) (with built-in induction fi control valve position sensor) 7FUO802
Variable induction control motor connector
NOTE l : Up to 1995 models l 2: From 1996 models

l
Z7FUO968
7FU1639
TSB Revision
~ MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components
13A-243
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-133. INSPCTION

Refer to P.l3A-133.
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage of the air intake control valve
Z6FU1241
-7 l----L El z@ n 0 H c

27FUO824
A Harness side
fc
l l
Measure the terminal voltage. Connector: Disconnected Ignition switch: ON
harness. (A2-41*,
Z7FUO825 54*9 (A4-33*, 55**)
1 TSB Revision
13A-244
MANIFOLD DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (MDP) SENSOR

<Turbo> Manifold differential pressure sensor <Non Turbo> Manifold differential pressure sensor Manifold differential pressure sensor
output voltage
LL Intake manifold plenum pressure 16z45 l Engine control module connector
9FUO413
9FUO393 7FUl831
OPERATION e Manifold differential pressure switch converts the intake manifold plenum pressure to the voltage and inputs to the engine control module. Engine control module confirms the operation of EGR system from this signal and, if there is any error in the EGR system, memorizes the diagnostic trouble code. l 5 V of power is supplied to the manifold differential pressure sensor from the engine control module, and the sensor circuit ground is located in the engine control module. l The manifold differential pressure sensor output voltage is proportioned to the intake manifold plenum pressure and sent to the engine control module.
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components INSPECTION
13A-245
Using Scan Tool L

Function Item No. Data display Check condition Engine state Idling Standard value 25.5-38.9 kPa <Non Turbo> kPa 29.0-42.4 <Tu rho> Data reading 95 intake manifold Engine: Warm-up plenum pressure
HARNESS INSPECTION
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Manifold differential pressure sensor connector: Disconnected Repair the harness. (A2 - 92)
9FUO414 Engine control module harness side connector 74
LJ
A Harness side
connector
Check for open-circuit, or shortcircuit to ground between the engine control module and the manifold differential pressure sensor. 0 Manifold differential pressure sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
OK 0
t =
9FUO415
Repair the harness. (A3 - 74)
I30.a0 J
Measure the impressed voltage to the manifold differential pressure sensor. l Manifold differential pressure sensor connector: Disconnetted a Engine control module connector: Connected l Ignition switch: ON Voltage: 4.8-5.2 V
9FUO416
Repair the engine control module.
TSB Revision
13A-246
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR <California Up to 1995 models, Federal - Turbo Up to 1995 models>
A Equipment side connector EGR temperature sensor A Harness side
7FUlOlO
5V
i .,\
; % !,
,.-f'
7FUlOli
27FU1239
t
output voltage 1.
I * 7FU1640
Temperature
Z~6Z1008
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-135. INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-136. HARNESS INSPECTION

A Harness side
l l
TSB Revision

Check for continuity of the ground circuit.
l
13A-247
Connector: Disconnected @+A

Z7FU1257
I+
SENSOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 17 - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR <California - Non Turbo Up to 1995 models>

49, ii +&ii &---&
Riaht bank
.---II
L I\-
ABCD Equipment side connector
Right bank heated oxygen sensor (rear)
ilectromotive
Theoretica, NF
14
A/F
15
16 ZECIOO:
7FUl431
z9Fuo3.93
7FU1641
TSB Revision
13A-248
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-137. TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to P.l3A-138. INSPECTION Using Scan Tool
<Heated Oxygen Sensor (front)> Function Data reading Item No. 11 39 Data display Sensor detection voltage Check condition Engine: Warm-up (Make the mixture lean by engine speed reduction, and rich by racing) Engine state When sudden deceleration from 4,000 rpm When engine is suddenly raced Engine: Warm-up (Using the heated oxygen sensor signal, check the air/fuel mixture ratio, and a so check the condition of control by the engine control module) <Heated Oxygen Sensor (rear)> Function Item No. Data display 1 Sensor voltage
l l
Standard value 200 mV or lower
600 - 1,000 mV 400 mV or lower ts 600- 1,000 mV (changes)
700 rpm (Idling) 2,000 rpm
Check condition Transaxle: 2nd gear <M/T> L range <A/T> Drive with wide open throttle
Engine state 3,500 rpm
Standard value 600-l ,000 mV
Data reading 59 69
<Heated Oxygen Sensor (front, rear)> Function Item No. Data display Heater condition Check condition Engine: Warm-up Engine state 750 rpm (Idle) 5,000 rpm Standard value ON OFF
Data reading 48
TSB Revision
13A-249
L.
ABCD Harness side connector
Measure the power supply voltage of the heated oxygen sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Repair the harness. (Al, Bl, C l , Dl MFI relavj
UFU1333
I
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the engine control module and the heated oxygen sensor 0 Heated oxygen sensor connectar: Disconnected l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected
Engine control module harness side connector I - -
harness.
I lJ--TL
27FU1439
/ L
3 -J
Harness sit connector
Engine control module harness short-circuit to ground, between side connector the engine control module and the
74
a
77
:i
27FUl440
Repair the harness. (A3, B3-74) (C3, D3-77)
Il. O-J1
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Connector: Disconnected n
Repair the harness. 642, B2, C2, D2-92)

I-
27FU1441
SENSOR INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-143. INSTALLATION Refer to P.l3A-143.
TSB Revision
13A-250
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR <Federal - Turbo Up to 1995 models>

A Equipment connector Heated oxygen Heated oxygen B Equipment side connector \
i
Al
Electromotive Engine con
T I-- MFI reay =
14
L
27FU1332
16
ZECIOO;
A Harness side connector I
B Harness side
29Fuo393
SELl401
6LLl401 7FU1642
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-137. TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to P.l3A-138. INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-141.
1 TSB Revision
13A-251
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage of the heated oxygen sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Repair the harness. ( A l , Bl MFI relay)
Z7FU1333
A B Harness side
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the enginecontrol module and the heated oxygen sensor. l Heated oxygen sensor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
0
OK L a@
0 I
3
Repair the harness. (A4-76) (84-75)
D ncllltess side
connector
SENSOR INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-143.
INSTALLATION
Refer to P.l3A-143.
TSB Revision
13A-252
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR <California - Turbo Up to 1995 models>

MFi relay ABCD Equipment side connector
heated oxvaen
(front)
I Electromotive Theoretical NF force ! (V
92k,(60 Im
$5
d6
14
A/F
15
16
ZEClOO7
27FU1436
7FlJ1643
OPERATION
Refer to P.l3A-137.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to P.l3A-138.
INSPECTION Using Scan Tool <Heated Oxygen Sensor (front)>

item No.
11 39
Data display Sensor detection voltage
Check condition Engine Warm-up (Make the mixture lean by engine speed reduction, and rich by racing)
Engine state When sudden deceleration from 4,000 rpm When engine is suddenly raced
Standard value 200 mV or lower
600-l ,000 mV 400 mV or lower t) 600-1,000

mV (changes)
Engine Warm-up (Using the heated oxygen sensor signal, check the air/ fuel mixture ratio, and also check the condition of control by the engine control module)
700 rpm
(Idling)
2,000 rpm
[ TSB Revision
13A-253
Standard value 600- 1,000 mV
<Heated Oxygen Sensor (rear)>

Function Item No. Data display Sensor voltage
l l
Check condition Transaxle: 2nd gear Drive with wide open throttle
Engine state 3,500 rpm
Data reading 59 69
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage of the heated oxygen sensor. a Connector: Disconnected --....__ l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
(OK) --++ I 2 I
-!Repair the harness. (Al, Bl, Cl, Dl MFI relay)
f---Y
short-circuit to ground, between the engine control module and the heated oxygen sensor l Heated oxygen sensor connector: Disconnected Engine control module connector: Disconnected
Check for continuity of the ground circuit l Connector: Disconnected
4 OK -+ 0
Repair the harness (A2, B2, C2, D2-92)
)*
27FUl441
Connector:
Disconnected
TSB Revision
13A-254
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR <From 1996 models>

ABCD
7 sensqr (frGtj&
ii
mm
Right bank heated oxygen sensor (rear)
Gh3nn /- -I^ ^
I
92 73 L I 7 I L f oxygen sensor (rear)
1 A2_.I I cI F 1I> 1-! I

I
0 i

34 I I I I 1 I /
SEL140lj
Electromotive
orce (U
Theoretical A/F m Engine control module connector
7FUl862
)I
7FUl859
OPERATION l The heated oxygen sensor senses the oxygen concentration in exhaust gas, converts it into a voltage and inputs it to the engine control module. l The heated oxygen sensor outputs about 1 V when the air-fuel ratio is richer than the theoretical ratio and outputs about 0 V when the ratio is leaner (higher oxygen concentration in exhaust gas). l The engine control module controls the fuel injection ratio based on this signal so that the air-fuel ratio may be kept at the theoretical ratio. l The battery voltage is supplied to the heated oxygen sensor through the MFI relay. Therefore, the sensor element is heated by the heater so that the heated oxygen sensor remains responsive even when the exhaust temperature is low.
TSB Revision
1349-255
Hint 1: Poor cleaning of exhaust gas will result if the heated oxygen sensor fails. Hint 2: If the heated oxygen sensor checked good but the sensor output voltage is out of specification, troubles of parts related to air-fuel raito control system are suspected. [Examples] (1) Faulty injector (2) Air leaking into the intake manifold through gasket gap, etc. (3) Faulty volume air flow sensor, intake air temperature sensor, barometric pressure sensor, engine coolant temperature sensor
INSPECTION Using Scan Tool <Heated oxygen sensor (front)>

Function Data reading item No. 11 39 Data display Sensor detection voltage Check condition Engine Warm-up (Make the mixture lean by engine speed reduction, and rich by racing) Engine state When sudden deceleration from 4,000 rpm When engine is suddenly raced Engine: Warm-up 700 rpm (Using the heated oxygen sensor (Idling) signal, check the air/fuel mixture ratio, and also check the condition of control by the engine control mod- t 2,500 rpm ule) Standard value 200 mV or lower
600 - 1,000 mV 400 mV or lower ts 600- 1,000 FXanges)
L
<Heated oxygen sensor (rear)>
Function Item No. Data display Sensor voltage Data reading 59 69
Check condition
l
Engine condition 3,500 rpm
Standard value 600- 1,000 mV
Transaxle: 2nd gear <M/T>, L range <N-r> Drive with wide open throttle
<Heated oxygen sensor (front, rear)>

Function Item No. Data display Heater condition Check condition Engine: Warm-up Engine condition 750 rpm (Idle) 5,000 rpm Normal indication ON OFF
Data reading 48
/ i
1 TSB Revision
13A-256
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supplv voltage of be heated oxygen sensor. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
dI
27FU1333
. Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the engine control moduleand the heated oxygen sensor l Heated oxygen sensor connectar: Disconnected l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected
i=l, D l MFI relay)

73 75 76
I L-J-33
ABCD Harness sid connector
27FUl439 Engine control Check for an open-circuit, or a module harness short-circuit to ground, between side connector
the engine control module and the heated oxygen sensor. l Heated oxygen sensor connector: Disconnected 0 Engine control module connector: Disconnected
4 cl
Repair the harness. g;:g;
\
L-J
7FUl816
Check for continuity of the ground circuit. l Connector: Disconnected @---A
Z7FUl44
TSB Revision
13A-257
INJECTORS <Non Turbo>
MFI relay
Injector
No. 2
1 No.4
1 Injector
1 lnjectoi
1. 1
2 .-- ---_._ 3 :oscillo)
NO.6
I-
Injector \
-_._____ 7FUO803
1 B 1
D Connector for rear bank 2
rear bank \
,:
A 2
3 I
15
.I3
~&7*~
ii h
Fuel
@
Connector Solenoid coil Plunger 3 71
\\
Filter
27FUO833
Engine control module connector Needle valve - Y Injection
7FUO832
7FU1644
i TSB Revision
13A-258
INSPECTION
Using Scan Tool

Function Item No. Data display Drive time* Check condition Engine: Cranking Coolant temperature 0C (32F)*2 20C (68F) 80C (176F) Function Item No. Data display Drive time*3
l
Standard value 12.9-l 9.3 ms 36.1-54.1 ms 8.2-i 2.4 ms Standard value 2.3-3.5 ms <Up to 1995 models> 2.5-3.7 ms <From 1996 models 2.0-3.2 ms <Up to 1995 models> 2.2-3.4 ms <From 1996 models
Data reading 41
Check condition
Engine state
Data reading 41
NOTE *l: The injector drive time refers to when the supply voltage is 11 V and the cranking speed is less than 250 rpm. *2: When coolant temperature is lower than 0C (32F) injection is made by 6 cylinders simultaneously. *3: When the vehicle is new [within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the injector drive time may about 10% longer. *4: From 1996 models
Engine coolant tern- 700 rpm (Idle) perature 80 to 95C (176 to 203F) Lights, electric cooling fan, accessory units: All OFF 2,500 rpm Transaxle Neutral (P range for vehicle with AIT) Steering wheel: Neutral
/J;; sharp racing is To increase
<Long-term fuel trim>*4

Function / Item No. 1 Data display 1 Specified range Check condition Engine: after warming-up Idling Engine state 1 Standard value 1 -12.5-12.5% Data reading 81
<Short-term fuel trim>*4

Function Item No. Data display Specified range Check condition Engine: afterwarming-up (during closed-loop control) Engine state No load 2,500 rpm Standard value -17-17% Data reading 82
<Fuel control condition>*4

Function Item No. Data display Control condition Check condition Engine: after warming-up Engine state 2,000 rpm Racing Standard value Closed loop Open loop Data reading 86
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Function Actuator test 01 02 03 04 05 1 06 Item No. Drive content No. 1 injector shut off No. 2 injector shut off No. 3 injector shut off No. 4 injector shut off No. 5 injector shut off / No. 6 injector shut off Check condition Engine: Idling after warm-up (Shut off the injectors in sequence during idling after engine warm-up, check the idling condition) I
13A-259
Normal state Idle state to change further (becoming less stable or stalling)
Using Oscilloscope
(1) Run the engine at idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform at the drive side of each injector.
z A: injector drive time Normal waveform
HARNESS INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-146.
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-147.
TSB Revision
13A-260
INJECTORS <Turbo>
MFI relav
E
4 (Front bank connector) I , 7FUO803
Resistor
----. .- _.
--6
lnjectc,r No. 1. 7c
inject0 No. 3
Z7FUO973
Fuel Filter Connector Solenoid coil Plunger q Engine control module connector
Needle valv-
@
Injection
7FUO832 7FU1645
1 TSB Revision
On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Comtaonents
13A-261

Function Data reading Item No. 41 (Rear bank) 47 (Front bank) Item No. 41 (Rear bank) 47 (Front bank) Data display Drive time* Check condition Engine: Cranking Coolant temperature 0C (32F)** 20C (68F) 80C (176F) Data display Drive time*3
l
Standard value 8.4-l 2.6 ms 23.3-34.9 ms 5.4-8.2 ms Standard value 1.6-2.8 ms <Up to 1995 models> 1.7-2.9 ms <From 1996 models> 1.4-2.6 ms <Up to 1995 models> 1.5-2.7 ms <From 1996 models To increase
Check condition
Engine state
Engine coolant tem- 700 rpm (Idle) perature: 80 to 95C (176 to 203F) 0 Lamps, electric cooling fan, accessory units: All OFF 2,500 rpm l Transaxle: Neutral l Steering wheel: Neutral
NOTE *l: The injector drive time refers to when the supply voltage is 11 V and the cranking speed is less than 250 rpm. *2: When coolant temperature is lower than 0C (32F), injection is made by 6 cylinders simultaneously. *3: When the vehicle is new within initial operation of about 500 km (300 miles)], the injector drive time may be about 10% longer. *4: From 1996 models
<Long-term fuel trim>*4

Function item No. Data display Specified range Check condition Engine: after warming-up Idling Engine state Standard value -12.5-l 2.5% Data reading 81
<Short-term fuel trimz-*4

Function Item No. Data display Specified range Check condition Engine: afterwarming-up (during closed-loop control) Engine state No load 2,500 rpm Standard value -17-17% Data reading 82
<Fuel control condition>*4

Function Item No. Data display Control condition Check condition Engine: after warming-up Engine state 2,000 rpm Racing Standard value Closed loop / Open loop Data reading 86
TSB Revision
13A-262
Function Actuator test 01 02 03 04 05 06
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Item No. Drive content No. 1 injector shut off No. 2 injector shut off No. 3 iniector shut off * No. 4 injector shut off
I
Check condition Engine: Idling after warm-up (Shut off the injectors in sequence during idling after engine warm-up, check the idling condition)
1 Idle state to change further (becoming less stable or stalling)
NormaI state
No. 5 iniector shut off No. 6 injector shut off
-/A&- A: injector drive time Normal waveform 203AOX
- : 1
Using Oscilloscope (1) Run the engine at idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to the oscilloscope pick-up point as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the waveform at the drive side of each injector.
HARNESS INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-150. ACTUATOR INSPECTION INJECTORS Refer to P.l3A-151. RESISTOR Refer to P.l3A-152.
I \
LJ I
TSB Revision
13A-263
IDLE AIR CONTROL MOTOR (STEPPER MOTOR TYPE)
MFI relay
I, r /\ A
2
/\ ,Y
1 A Equipment side connector Magnetic rotor Coil
Ball bearing Pintle Throttle body seat /t I ~CJ Y
Oscillo Oscillo I I
1 -T\ G
3 A V 4
IAC motor
Oscillo Oscillo nI
h17h5 -__ v 0
A
V
18
Z7FUO518
ZPFUO393 7FU1646
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-153. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Refer to P.l3A-153. INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-154. HARNESS INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-155. ACTUATOR INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-155.
TSB Revision
13A-264
IGNITION COIL AND IGNITION POWER TRANSISTOR

Batterv
A Harness side connector Engine speed check control terminal
13 Ignition coil
Equipment side connector r B Harness side connector

1
/
B-l _- B-2 iI
Ii
G r 5v
g
5 iransistor ignition timing , adjustment bll connector
Spark Plug
Tachometer __
7 Engine control module connector
1
ZPFUO393
7FU1059
7FU1647
OPERATION Refer to P.d3A-158.
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT _ On-Vehicle inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION Components
13A-265

Data display Data reading 44 Ignition tadvance
T
l l
Check condition
Engine state
Standard value 7-23 BTDC 30-50 BTDC <Non Turbo> 23-43 BTDC <Turbo>
<Ignition Timing Adjustment Mode> Function Data list Item No. Data display
l
I
/
Engine: Warming up 700 rpm Timing light: Set (set (Idle) timing light to check actual ignition tim- 2,000 rpm <Up to 1995 iw) models>
rpm 32-52 BTDC <Non Turbo> 2,500 <From 1996 25-45 BTDC <Turbo> models>
Check condition Engine: Idling
Terminal condition
Standard value
Ignition timing adjust- ON terminal is ment grounded Ignition timing adjust- OFF ment terminal is disconnected from ground
<Standard Ignition Timing> id

Function Actuator test 17 Item No. Drive Set to ignition timing adjustment mode
l l
Check condition Engine: idling Timing light: set
Normal condition 5 BTDC
Oscillo 1 1 i/
Using Oscilloscope
1. Primaty signal of ignition coil (1) Run the engine at an idle speed. (2) Connect the probe to oscilloscope pick-up point 1 as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the primary signal of the ignition coil.
I--Ll---l .-T-.. i o v -I ; ; I Normal waveform ZO3AO20 7 Oscillo 2
1ov
1
2. Control signal of ignition power transistor Connect the probe to oscilloscope pick-up point 2 as shown in the circuit diagram, and check the control signal of the ignition power transistor.
/ 1ov ov ;
k--i-Normal waveform
Y 03AOa
1 TSB Revision
13A-266
HARNESS INSPECTION
1 J
Measure the power supply voltage of the ignition coil. l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
OK
: : I : Repair the harness. (A3 - Ignition switch)
L,
B-2
Measure the power supply voltage of the ignition coil. l Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Repair the harness. (B6 - Ignition switch)
Z7FUO698
i Check for an open-circuit, or a shortcircuit to ground between the engine control unit and the ignition power 0
l
31
Engine control module connecIgnition power transistor connector: Disconnected Repair the harness. (B5-58)
B-l Harness side
Check for an open-circuit, or a shottcircuit to ground between the ignition power transistor and the ignition coil. l Ignition coil connector: Disconnetted 0 Ignition power transistor connector: Disconnected
UFUO699
(A4-Bll)
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Check for continuity of the ground circuit. 0 Connector: Disconnected
13A-267

27FUO700
Measure the voltage of the control signal circuit of the ignition power transistor. l Connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: START 0.5-4.0 v Repair the harness. (B3-10)
27FUO701
ACTUATOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 16 - ignition System.
TSB Revision
13A-268
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION PURGE SOLENOID

MFI relay
j I d
EVAP purge solenoid side
7FU1009
7FU1851
9FUO393 7FUl850
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-162. INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-162. HARNESS INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-163. ACTUATOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 17 - Evaporative Emission Control System.
TSB Revision
13A-269
EGR SOLENOID
MFI relay
-T-
EGR solenoid J 1 /
,Cl!,O,,
EGR solenoid
7FU1649
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-164. TROUBLESHOOTING HINT Refer to P.l3A-164. INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-165. HARNESS INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-165.
r Revision TSB
13A-270
FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID <Turbo>

MFI relay
l-
l : Up to 1995 models
*2: From 1996 models
29Fuo393
7FU1650
OPERATION
Refer to P.l3A-166.
INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-167.
HARNESS INSPECTION
1 -.I
Measure the power supply voltwe l Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
2 cl
ZOlA0524
Repair the harness. (Al - MFI relay)
TSB Revision

Engine control module harness side connector A Harness side connector
13A-271
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the fuel oressure solenoid and the engine control module. l Engine control module connectar: Disconnected a Fuel pressure solenoid connector: Disconnected
(OK) + /roA
I Repair the harness. (A2-7*,
403
YOlA0525
NOTE *I: Up to 1995 models *2: From 1996 models ACTUATOR INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-168.
TURBOCHARGER WASTE GATE SOLENOID <Turbo>
MFI relay
ZOO110324
7FU1651
TSB Revision
13A-272
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-169. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Refer to P.l3A-169. INSPECTION Refer to P.l3A-170. HARNESS INSPECTION I I
I I - -
Measure the power supply voltage. .- Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
relay)
1 AFfidepgiiti3 r
Z7FlJOS26
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to ground, between the turbocharger waste gate solen noid and the engine control module. l Turbocharger waste oate so- l e n o i d connector: bisconnetted 0 Engine control module connectar: Disconnected
(OK) -+ /TOA
TSB Revision
13A-273
BOOST METER <Turbo>
----/---I L i
Boost meter _ - - - _--.__--I = = --- - - - - - - - - - y r -==n 1 7FU1022 Engine control module NOTE *: Up to 1995 models *2: From 1996 models ignition switch (IG,) A Equipment side connector
7FUO985 / ij
29Fuo393 7FU1662
HARNESS INSPECTION
Measure the power supply voltage. 0 Connector: Disconnected l Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Repair the harness. (A2- Ignition coil [IG])
Z7FUO986
1 TSB Revision
13A-274

Engine control module bar ess side connector
A Harness side
short-circuit to ground, between the engine control module and the
Repair the harness. (A3-41*, 39*2)
Z7FUO987
NOTE *I: Up to 1995 models *2: From 1996 models
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 54.
ACTIVE EXHAUST CONTROL UNIT <Turbo>

DC motor for valve drive
A Equipment side
connector Active exhaust control unit
7FUO989
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Comr>onents OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-173. i HARNESS INSPECTION 1
13A-275
1 -I
35 72
Measure the input voltage of engine control module. 0 Engine control module connector: Disconnected 0 Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
A Repair the harness. (A4-35*,

7*9
r Engine control
27FUO689
NOTE *I: Up to 1995 models *2: From 1996 models ACTUATOR INSPECTION Refer to GROUP 15.
1 TSB Revision
13A-276
VARIABLE INDUCTION CONTROL MOTOR (DC MOTOR) <Non Turbo>

Variable induction control motor r (DC motor) (with built-in induction /control valve position sensor) 7FlJflRn7
A Equipment connector
Variable induction control motor
ZlFUO646
ZPFUO393 7FU1654
OPERATION
Refer to P.l3A-174.
INSPECTION
Refer to P.l3A-174.
HARNESS INSPECTION
Enaine control module hasess side connector
Check for an open-circuit or a short-circuit to ground, between the engine control module and the variable induction control motor connector. l Variable induction control motor connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
A
STOP
Repair the harness.
27FUO841
ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 15.
TSB Revision
73A-277
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SIGNAL <Turbo>

ABS ECU
A ABS control unit equipment side connector
28 - ABS HU
5v Engine control module connector
d r:
44
J
Z6FU1542
OPERATION
Refer to P.l3A-176.
HARNESS INSPECTION
Check for an open-circuit or a short-circuit to ground, between the ABS control unit and the engine control module.
l l
A Repair the harness. (A2844
ABS control unit connector: Disconnected Engine control module connectar: Disconnected
26FU1543
TSB r--- Revision
7 314-278
ENGINE AND TRANSAXLE TOTAL CONTROL SIGNAL <A/T>

Transaxle control module
7r :
16FO292
!+
P
6
! 7
5v
108
NOTE l: Up to 1995 models *2: From 1996 models 46
43, 60e2
I
Engine control module f
A Transaxle control module connector Engine control module connector
Z7FUO843
27 FUO903
7FU1656
OPERATION Refer to P.l3A-177
TSB Revision
7 344-279
1 Ll
A Transaxle control module harness side connector
Engine control module harness side cop[RI side corms
26FU1543
Engine control module harness
A Transaxle control module harness side
Repair the harness. (A9-43*, 60*2)
26FU1543
Q I
Engine control module harness side On
4 Transaxle control module harness side [El connector

10
Check for an open-circuit, or a short-circuit to around between the transaxle co%rol module and the engine control module. l Transaxle control module connector: Disconnected l Engine control module connector: Disconnected
T T z
26FU1543
Repair the harness. (Al 08-7)
NOTE *I: Up to 1995 models l 2: From 1996 models
RELEASE OF RESIDUAL PRESSURE FROM HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE

Refer to P.l3A-179.
FUEL PUMP OPERATION CHECK

Refer to P.l3A-179.
FUEL PRESSURE TEST

Refer to P.l3A-180.
TSB Revision
13A-280
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) TERMINAL VOLTAGE INSPECTION

(1) Connect a very thin wire probe (such as a paper clip) to the probe of the voltmeter. (2) Insert the very thin probe from the wire side into contact with each of the terminals of the ECM connector and check the voltage, while referring to the check chart. NOTE 1. Measure a voltage with the ECM connector connected. 2. Measure the voltage between each terminal and the No. 26 terminal (ground terminal). 3. Withdraw the ECM for easier access to the connector terminals. 4. The inspection need not be performed in the order of the chart. Caution Short-circuiting the positive (+) probe between a connector terminal and ground could cause damage to the vehicle wiring, sensors or ECM, or all of them. Use care to prevent it! (3) If the voltmeter shows any deviation from the standard value, check the corresponding sensor, actuator and related electrical wiring, then repair or replace. (4) After repair or replacement, recheck with the voltmeter to confirm that the problem has cleared completely. TERMINAL VOLTAGE CHECK CHART Engine Control Module Connector Terminal Configuration
Z7FU1264
Z9FUO393
TSB Revision
I On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Components Terminal No. 90 Check point Volume air flow sensor Check conditions (Engine conditions) Engine: Idle Engine: 2,000 rpm 19 Volume air flow sensor reset signal Intake air temperature sensor Engine: Idle Engine: 3,000 rpm ignition switch: ON o-1 v 6-9 V -
13A-281
Standard value Remarks 2.2-3.2 V -
72
When intake temperature 3.2-3.8 V is 0C (32F) When intake temperature is 20C (68F) 2.3-2.9 V
When intake temperature 1.5-2.1 V is 40C (104F) When intake temperature is 80C (176F) 85 Barometric pressure sensor Ignition switch: ON 0- 10 V
When altitude is 0 m (0 ft.) 3.7-4.3 V When altitude is 1,200 m (3,937 ft.) 3.2-3.8 V
83
Water temperature sensor
Ignition switch: ON
When water temperature 3.2-3.8 V is 0C (32F) When water temperature is 20C (68F) 2.3-2.9 V
When water temperature 1.3-l .9 V is 40C (104F) When water temperature is 80C (176F) 84 Throttle position sensor Ignitionswitch: Kept in ON $$:y more seconds 87 Closed throttle position switch Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve placed in O-l V idle position Throttle valve placed in slightly opened position 88 Camshaft position sensor Crankshaft position sensor Ignition Switch - ST Park/Neutral position switch Engine: Cranked Engine: Idle Engine: Cranked Engine: Idle Engine: Cranked Ignition switch: ON Selector lever set to P or N Selector lever set to D, 2, L or R 8 V or more o-3 v 8-14 V 0.2-3.0 V 4 V or more 0.2-3.0 V _ Idle 0.3-0.9 V 0.3-1.0 v
Wide open throttle
4.5-5.5 v
89
71 91
MiT AIT
1 TSB Revision
13A-282
Terminal No. 86
MULTIPORT _ On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION Components Check point Vehicle speed sensor
l
Check conditions (Engine conditions) 0 Ignition switch: ON Move the vehicle slowly forward
Standard value Remarks 0*5v (Changes repeated) -
37
Power steering pressure switch
Engine: Idle, warm
Steering wheel placed in B+ neutral (straight ahead) position Steering wheel turned half a turn O-3 V O-3 V B+
45
Air conditioning switch 1
Engine: Idle
Air conditioning switch set to OFF Air conditioning switch set to E conditioning compressor in driven state)
59 <Turbo, Non-Turbo up to 1995 models> 61 <Non-Turbo From 1996 models> 22
Air conditioning switch 2
Engine: Idle
Air conditioning switch set to OFF

l l
O-3 V
Air conditioning switch set B+ to ON Indoor set temperature brought closer to atmospheric temperature
Air conditioning relay
Engine: Idle B+ or 6 V or Air conditioning switch: OFF -+ ON more for a mo(Air compressor in driven state) ment + O-3 V B+ -
21
Fan motor relay (Lo)
Radiator fan not operating [Coolant temperature: below 90C (194F)] Radiator fan operating at low speeds [Coolant temperature: 95-105C (203-221 F)]
o-3 v
20
Fan motor relay (Hi)
Radiator fan not operating [Coolant temperature: b e l o w 90C (194F)I Radiator fan operating at high speeds [Coolant temperature: above 105% (221
B+
o-3 v
VI
24 <up to 1995 models> 58 <From 1996 models> 75 76 Electric load switch Engine: Running at idle Lighting switch set to OFF o-3 v
Lighting switch set to ON
B+
Heated oxygen sensor(front)
Engine: Warm, 2,000 rpm (Check using a digital type voltmeter.)
0 e 0.8 V (Changes repeatedly)
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Terminal No. Check point
l
13A-283
Standard value Remarks ccalifornia, Federal from 1996 models>
Check conditions (Engine conditions)
60 Heated oxygen sensor <Up to 1995 (rear) models> 73,79 <From 1996 models> 1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 No. 1 injector No. 2 injector No. 3 injector No. 4 injector No. 5 injector No. 6 injector Stepper motor coil <Al> Stepper motor coil <A2> Stepper motor coil <Bl> Stepper motor coil <B2> Ignition power transistor unit A Ignition power transistor unit B Ignition power transistor unit C
0
l
Transaxle: 2nd gear <M/T>, L range 0.6-l .O V </VT> Drive with wide open throttle Engine 3,500 rpm or more
Engine: Running at idle after warmup, and accelerated abruptly by depressing accelerator pedal
Falls temporarily a little from 11-14 V.
Engine: Warm Check immediately after hot restart.
B+++O-3V (Changed repeated)
10 23 11 9
Engine speed: 3,000 rpm
0.3-3
Evaporative emission Ignition switch: ON purge solenoid Engine: Warm, 3,000 rpm Fuel pressure solenoid Ignition switch: ON Engine: From cranking to idling (within approx. 2 minutes) Turbocharger gate solenoid waste Ignition switch: ON Engine: Idle (when the premium gasoline is used)
B+ o-3 v B+ O-3 V + B+ Turbo
7 cup to 1995 models> 40 <From 1996 models> 32
B+ O-3 V 4-13 v
Turbo
41 cup to 1995 models> 39 <From 1996 models>
Turbo meter
Ignition switch: ON
Turbo
Engine: Depress the accelerator pedal Falls abruptly while the engine is idling temporarily from B+
TSB Revision
13A-284
Engine: 4,500 rpm
34 <Up to 1995 models> 61 <From 1996 models> 52
Muffler mode change- Ignition switch: over switch ON
Changeover switch set to ON (TOUR)
O-3 V
Turbo
Changeover switch set to B+ OFF (SPORT) Ignition timing adjust- Ignition switch: ment terminal ON Ignition timing adjustment O-l V terminal connected to ground Ignition timing adjustment 4.0-5.5 V terminal disconnected from ground -
36
Ignition switch: OFF -+ ON
o-3v+ 9-13 v (Several seconds later) B+
EGR solenoid
Ignition switch: ON
Engine: Idle Suddenly depress the accelerator pedal
Falls temporarily from B+.
<up to 1995: California Non Turbo, Turbo> <From 1996: All models> California, Fed. eral Turbo <up to 1995: California Non Turbo> <From 1996: All models>
73 EGR temperature sen- Ignition switch: <Up to 1995 sor ON models>
When sensor temperature is 50C (122F) When sensor temperature is 100C (212F)
3.6-4.4 V 2.2-3.0 V o-3 v
74,77 cup to 1995 models> 34, 35, 42, 43 <From 1996 models>
Oxygen sensor heater
Engine: Idle, warm
Engine: 5,000 rpm
B+
1 TSB Revision
MULTIPORT On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI FUEL INJECTION - Components Terminal No. 41 <Up to 1995 models> 54 <From 1996 models> 33 <Up to 1995 models> 55 <From 1996 models> 40 39 44 Check point Check conditions (Engine conditions)
13A-285
Standard value Remarks O-l V or 4.5-5.5 v Non Turbo
Induction control valve Ignition switch: ON position sensor No. 1
Engine: Slowly accelerated from idling O-l V or speed to 5,000 rpm 4.5-5.5 v + 1.5-4 v (for a moment) Induction control valve Ignition switch: ON position sensor No. 2 O-l V or 4.5-5.5 v NonTurbo
Engine: Slowly accelerated from idling O-l V or speed to 5,000 rpm 4.5-5.5 v + 1.5-4 v (for a moment) Induction control valve Engine: Slowly accelerated from idling O-l V + (Opened) speed to 5,000 rpm 4 V or more (for a moment) Induction control valve Engine: Slowly decelerated from 5,000 rpm (Closed) to idling speed Anti-lock braking signal Engine: idle 0
l
Non Turbo
B+
Turbo
When vehicle is put in motion for the B+ + O-3 V first time after the ignition switch was (for a moment) placed in ON position Vehicle speed: 0 + 10 km/h (0 -+ 0.6 mph) 4.5-5.5 v O-l V o-1 v l-5.5 V An An-
16
Total control Reduce Engine: Idle torque request signal 1 Engine: Running at idle after warmup and changing speeds Total control Reduce Engine: Idle torque request signal 2 Engine: Running at idle after warmup and changing speeds
43 <Up to 1995 models> 60 <From 1996 models> 7
Total control Reduce Engine: Running at idle with coolant O-l V torque execution signal temperature at 50C (122F) or lower Engine: idle, warm l-4v
An-
74
Manifold differential Engine: Idle 0.8-2.4 V pressure senosr l Engine: Idle Voltage rises l Suddenly depress the accelerator temporarily pedal. from 0.8-2.4 V
M-T
TSB Revision
13A-286 INJECTOR
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Injector

(Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) Residual Pressure from High Pressure Hose Release (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) (Refer to GROUP 15 - Intake Manifold Plenum.)
O-ring 03N0012
O-ring
03FOO18
ZO3FOO17
00002423
Engine oil
Removal steps (A, .C+ 1. High pressure fuel hose connection 2. Fuel return hose connection 3. Vacuum hose connection FBI 4. Fuel pressure regulator 5. Control harness connection .C+ 6. Fuel pipe 7. Fuel rail
8. insulator 9. Injector support .A+ 10. Injector 11. Insulator 12. O-ring 13. Grommet
TSB Revision
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Injector REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

i
13A-287
(A, HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE DISCONNECTION Bleed the residual pressure within the fuel pipe line so as to prevent the flow of fuel. Caution Cover the hose connection with rags to prevent splash of fuel that could be caused by some residual pressure in the fuel pipe line.

,A4 INJECTOR INSTALLATION (1) Apply a small amount of new engine oil to the O-ring. Caution Do not let the engine oil get into the fuel rail. (2) While turning the injector to the left and right, install it to the fuel rail. (3) Check to be sure that the injector turns smoothly. If it does not turn smoothly, the O-ring may be trapped, remove the injector and then reinsert it into the fuel rail and check again. ,BA FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR INSTALLATION (1) Apply a small amount of new engine oil to a new O-ring and insert it to the fuel rail carefully. Caution Do not let the engine oil get into the fuel rail. (2) If the fuel pressure regulator does not move smoothly, the O-ring may be folded. Then, remove the regulator to check the O-ring for damage. (3) Tighten the regulator to the specified torque. Tightening torque: 9 Nm (7 ftlbs.) ,CdFUEL PIPE / HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE CONNECTION Apply a small amount of new engine oil to the fuel pipe and high pressure fuel hose union, and then insert, being careful not to damage the O-ring. Caution Do not let the engine oil get into the fuel rail.
Grommet
/ Fuel rail
A03A0096
O-ring
?B
B03X0037
INSPECTION
INJECTORS CHECK (1) Measure resistance between terminals of injector using a circuit tester. Standard value: 13-16 Q [at 20C (68F)] <Non Turbo> 2-3 R [at 20C (SSOF)] <Turbo> (2) If the resistance is out of specification, replace the injector. TSB Revision
13A-288
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Throttle Bodv
THROTTLE BODY
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Engine Coolant Draining and Supplying (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) <DOHC (Non Turbo) - California> <DOHC (Turbo)>
18 Nm 13 ft.lbs. . i
ZO : FOOO4
ZOlFOO53 00002424
Removal steps
,Bq
l
Accelerator cable adjustment 1. Accelerator cable connection 2. . Air intake hose connection - . .. 3. vacuum nose connectron 4. TPS connector connection 5. ISC motor connector connection 6. Water hose connection
.A4
7. Vacuum pipe assembly 8. Throttle body 9. Gasket
NOTE The layout of vacuum hoses (No. 3) of the construction drawing is for the DOHC (Non Turbo) - Federal.

.A+ GASKET INSTALLATION Install the gasket so that the projection is where shown in the illustration. Caution Poor idling etc. may result if the gasket is installed incorrectly. .B( ACCELERATOR CABLE ADJUSTMENT For information concerning adjustment of the accelerator cable, refer to GROUP 17 - Engine Control System. 1 TSB Revision 1
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION - Knock Sensor
13A-289
KNOCK SENSOR
L R jMOVAL A N D I N S T A L L A T I O N
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Intake Manifold Plenum Release and Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Intake Manifold Plenum.) l Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Intake Manifold.) 20-25 Nm 14-18 ft.lbs.
203FOO21
+A, .A+ 1. Knock sensor

qA, KNOCK SENSOR REMOVAL Remove the knock sensor with special tool.

.A4 KNOCK SENSOR INSTALLATION When the knock sensor is installed, be sure to tighten it precisely to the specified torque as its installation affects the engine control.
TSB Revision
NOTES
13F-1
FUEL SUPPLY
CONTENTS
FUEL FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 FUEL LINE AND VAPOR LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FUEL PUMP AND FUEL GAUGE UNIT ASSEMBLY AND FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..e.............. 3 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . ..*................. 2
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fuel Tank and Fuel Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
FUEL SUPPLY - SDecifications / Troubleshootinq
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Items 1 Tank capacity dm3 (gal.) 1Return system
I I
1 Specifications / 75 (19.8) / Equipped

I -I
1 Filter
1 High pressure type
SEALANT
Items Fuel tank hole cover Specified sealant / 3M ATD Part No. 8509 or equivalent
TROUBLESHOOTING
FUEL TANK AND FUEL LINE
Water in fuel filter
functions (When tank cap is removed, pressure releasing noise is heard)
/ TSB Revision
FUEL SUPPLY - Fuel Tank
13F-3
FUEL TANK
L, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Pre-removal Operation l Fuel Draining l Residual Pressure from High Pressure Hose Release (Refer to GROUP 13A - On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI Components.)
l
Post-installation Operation Fuel Supplying l Fuel Leakage Checking
3
5-6 Nm .c 3.6-4.3 fLIta.
//1
25 Ribs.
13 Nm
8 ft.lbs.
.- ..*..
v
26 Nm 19 ft.lbs.
203F0007
Removal steps ,Fq 1. Fuel gauge cover 2. Fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly connector 3. Fuel tank cap 4. Drain plug 5. Splash shield 6. Fuel tank filler tube protector ,Bd 7. Vapor hose 8. Fuel tank filler tube 9. Fuel filler hose .Bd 10. Vapor hose
/
.E+ 11. Return hose +A, .D+ 12. High pressure fuel hose .B( 13. Vapor hose 14. Leveling pipe 15. Self-locking nut 16. Fuel tank .C+ 17. Fuel tank pressure control valve .B+ 18. Vapor hose .A+ 19. Fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly
i,
TSB Revision
13F-4
FUEL SUPPLY - Fuel Tank REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

(A, HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE DISCONNECTION Disconnect the hose from body main pipe first and then from fuel pump. Caution Cover the hose connection with rags to prevent splash of fuel that could be caused by some residual pressure in the fuel pipe line.

.A+FUEL PUMP AND FUEL GAUGE UNIT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Align the three positioning projections of the packing with the holes in the fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly.
ZO3FOO
OJFOO8
.B+ VAPOR HOSE CONNECTION (1) If the pipe has a stepped part, connect the vapor hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the illustration. (2) If the pipe does not have a stepped part, connect the vapor hose to the pipe securely, so that it is the standard value. Standard value: 25-30 mm (l-O-1.2 in.)
J
Evaporative emission :anister side
.Cd FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION Install so that the fuel tank pressure control valve is facing in the direction shown in the illustration.
z003041
Flare nut
.D+ HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE CONNECTION Temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand, and then tighten it to the specified torque, being careful that the high pressure fuel hose does not become twisted. Caution When tightening flare nut, be careful not to bend or twist line to prevent fuel pump from damage.
Sedure side Z03YM3
I iLJ
1TSB Revision
FUEL SUPPLY - Fuel Tank
13F-5
.Ed RETURN HOSE CONNECTION Connect the return hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the illustration.
,F( FUEL GAUGE COVER INSTALLATION Before installing the fuel gauge cover, apply the specified sealant to the rear floor pan. Specified sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8509 or equivalent
INSPECTION
l l l l
Check the hoses and the pipes for crack or damage. Check the fuel tank filler tube cap for malfunction. Check the fuel tank for deformation, corrosion or crack. Check the fuel tank for dust or foreign material. NOTE If the inside of the fuel tank is to be cleaned, use any one of the following: (1) Kerosene (2) Trichloroethylene (3) A neutral emulsion type detergent
Fuel tank pressure control valve
FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE REPLACEMENT Connect a clean rubber hose to the fuel tank pressure control valve and check for operation.
InsDection Drocedure Lightly blow from the inlet (fuel tank) side Normal condition Air passes through after a slight resistance
Rubber hose
Z03N0078
Lightly blow from the outlet Air passes through (canister) side
TSB Revision
13F-6
FUEL SUPPLY -
r&4=, rWlfJ all ruta uauye Ill, AsserrlPly

and Fuel Tank Pressure Control Valve
FUEL PUMP AND FUEL GAUGE UNIT ASSEMBLY AND FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE
Removal steps 2. Fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly connector .C+ 3. Fuel tank pressure control valve +A, bB4 4. High pressure fuel hose connection (body side)
.D41. Fuel gauge cover
+B, ,Bd 5. High pressure fuel hose connection (fuel pump side) .A4 6. Fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly

+A, HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE DISCONNECTION (BODY SIDE) Caution Cover the hose connection with rags to prevent splash of fuel that could be caused by some residual pressure in the fuel pipe line.
qB, HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE DISCONNECTION (FUEL PUMP SIDE) NOTE Hold the pump side nut with a wrench while turning the nut on the hose side.
TSB Revision
FUEL SUPPLY - and Fuel Tank Pressure Control Valve
L-=I l-ulrcp all I-UC;, uauye Uilll #hasellluly
13F-7

bAdFUEL PUMP AND FUEL GAUGE UNIT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Align the three positioning projections of the packing with the holes in the fuel pump and fuel gauge unit assembly.
Flare nut
.B+ HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE CONNECTION Temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand, and then tighten it to the specified torque, being careful that the high pressure fuel hose does not become twisted. Caution When tightening flare nut, be careful not to bend or twist line to prevent fuel pump from damage.
Secure side Z03rM3
Evaporative emission
.CAFUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION Install so that the fuel tank pressure control valve is facing in the direction shown in the illustration.
.D+ FUEL G A UGE COVER I N ST A L L A T IO N Before installing the fuel gauge cover, apply the specified sealant to the rear floor pan. Specified sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8509 or equivalent
Fuel tank pressure control valve
FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE REPLACEMENT

Connect a clean rubber hose to the overfill limiter and check for operation.
Rubber hose
iBN0078
1 TSB Revision
13F-8
FUEL SUPPLY - Fuel Line and VaDor Line
FUEL LINE AND VAPOR LINE

Residual Pressure from High Pressure Hose Release
l
Air Cleaner and iir Intake Hose Removal (Refer to GROUP 15 - Air Cleaner.)
30 Nm 2 2 ft.lbs. _ 35 Nm b I 25 ft.lbs.
s/*L-l , _ dg&.Jpf .w. @aa / /P a@ Ba

// r0 A
1s CT
,, ciiiz.l 14m\ L--B 12 Nm /4

8 ft.lbs.
Fuel rail
6
03FOO20 00002427
16 t Removal steps 1. Reserve tank 2. Battery 3. Battery tray with washer tank assembly 4. Purge control valve ,A+ 5. Fuel vapor hose 6. Evaporative emission canister 7. Vapor pipe assembly ,A+ 8. Fuel return hose 9. Eye bolt 4Ab 10. Gasket Engine oil
03NOOV
11. High pressure fuel pipe ,C( 12. Fuel filter 13. Eye bolt 4Ab 14. Gasket FBI 15. High pressure fuel hose 16. O-ring ,A( 17. Fuel vapor hose 18. Stone protector 19. Fuel vapor pipe 20. Fuel return pipe 21. Fuel main pipe
TSB Revision
FUEL SUPPLY - Fuel Line and Vapor Line REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
13F-9
h pressure hose
(A, EYE BOLT REMOVAL Remove the eye bolt while holding the fuel filter nut securely. Caution Cover the hose connection with rags to prevent splash of fuel that could be caused by some residual pressure in the fuel pipe line.
Z03FOOlr 1

.A+FUEL VAPOR HOSE / FUEL RETURN HOSE INSTALLATION (1) If the fuel pipe has a stepped part, connect the fuel hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the illustration. (2) If the fuel pipe does not have a stepped part, connect the fuel hose to the pipe securely, so that it is the standard value. Standard value: 25-30 mm (1.0-l-2 in.) ,B( HIGH PRESSURE FUEL HOSE INSTALLATION Apply small amount of new engine oil to the hose union. Insert the hose, being careful not to damage the O-ring, and tighten securely. Caution Because there is high pressure applied between the fuel pump and the injection mixer, be especially sure that there is no fuel leakage in this area.
OJFOO3
05FOO7
, L
35 Nm 25 ft.1b.s. I i-iare nut
&I@
.CA FUEL -FILTER INSTALLATION (1) When installing the fuel filter, first temporarily install the filter to the filter bracket; then insert the main pipe at the connector part of the high pressure fuel pipe, and manually screw in the main pipes flare nut. (2) Holding the fuel filter nut, tighten the fuel main pipes flare nut and eye bolt at the specified torque. Then tighten the filter to the bracket.
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the hoses and pipes for cracks, bend, deformation and clogging. Check the evaporative emission canister for clogging. Check the fuel filter for clogging and damage.
TSB Revision
13F-10 FUEL FILTER
FUEL SUPPLY - Fuel Filter

0 Residual Pressure from High Pressure Hose
Removal steps
Xl f%s
. .
25 ft.lbs. ,?03F0012 6. Fuel main pipe connection 7. Mounting bolt .A4 8. Fuel filter 9. Eye bolt 10. Gasket 11. High pressure fuel pipe
1. Battery 2. Battery tray with washer tank assenibly 3. Eye bolt 4. Gasket 5. High pressure fuel hose
4Ab
Eye bolt

+A, EYE BOLT REMOVAL Remove the eye bolt while holding the fuel filter nut securely. Caution Cover the hose connection with rags to prevent splash of fuel that could be caused by some residual pressure in the fuel pipe line.
Eye bolt

,A+ FUEL FILTER INSTALLATION (1) When installing the fuel filter, first temporarily install the filter to the filter bracket; then insert the main pipe at the connector part of the high pressure fuel pipe, and manually screw in the main pipes flare nut. (2) Holding the fuel filter nut, tighten the fuel main pipes flare nut and eye bolt at the specified torque. Then tighten the filter to the bracket. TSB Revision
L,,
ENGINE COOLING
CONTENTS
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE UNIT, ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH . . . . . . ..*.......................*. 13 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Cap Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Engine Coolant Concentration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Engine Coolant Leak Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
~ 4
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Lubricant.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 WATER PUMP, WATER PIPE AND WATER HOSE . . . . . * . . . . . * . . . . . . . . . * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
/ LJ
Engine Coolant Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . ..*................... 5
ENGINE COOLING - Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Cooling method Radiator Radiator fan motor Water pump Thermostat Type Type We Type Identification mark Specifications Water-cooled, pressurized, forced circulation with electrical fan Pressurized corrugated fin type Direct current ferrite type Centrifugal impeller type Wax type with jiggle valve 76.5 (Stamped on flange)
8 d
Items Range of coolant antifreeze concentration % Thermostat Valve opening temperature C (OF) Full-opening temperature C (F) Opening pressure of cap high pressure valve kPa (psi) Therm0 sensor (on radiator) operating temperature <up to 1993 models> For radiator fan OFF + ON C (F) ON + OFF C (F) For condenser fan - Vehicles with air conditioning OFF + ON C (OF) ON 3 OFF C (F) Standard value 30-60 76.5 (170) 90 (194) or more 75-105 (11-15) Limit 65 (9.2)
81-89 (178-192) 77 (171) or less 9 1 - 9 9 (196-210) 87 (189) or less
LUBRICANT
Item Engine coolant lit. (qts.) Specified lubricant High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant Quantity 8.0 (8.5)
TSB Revision
ENGINE COOLING - Specifications / Troubleshooting SEALANT

Items i Engine coolant temperature gauge unit Engine coolant temperature sensor (Engine control) Engine coolant temperature sensor (Air conditioning) <Up to 1993 models> Specified sealants 3M Nut Locking Part No. 4171
14-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Overheat Probable cause Insufficient engine coolant Too high an anti-freeze concentration Damaged or blocked (insufficiently ventilated) radiator fins Faulty thermostat operation Faulty water pump operation Water passage clogged with slime or rust deposit or foreign substance Overheat Clean Replace Remedy Replenish Correct anti-freeze concentration Correct Replace
I L
Inoperative electric cooling fan
Faulty coolant temperature sensor <Up to 1993 models> Engine coolant temperature sensor <From 1994 models> Faulty electrical motor Faulty radiator fan relay
Water leaks
Damaged radiator core joint Corroded or cracked hoses (radiator hose, heater hose, etc.) Faulty cap valve or setting of spring Cracked thermostat housing Loose water pump mounting bolt or leaking gasket Loose bolt or leaking gasket in water outlet fitting Loose bolt or leaking gasket in water inlet fitting Loose thermostat housing bolts or leaking from gasket
Replace
Correct or replace
Retorque bolts or replace gasket Replace Correct Replace
/L
Faulty automatic transaxle oil cooler operation No rise in temperature Faulty thermostat
Blocked or collapsed hose and pipe Loose hose and pipe connection
TSB Revision
ENGINE COOLING - On-vehicle Service
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ENGINE COOLANT LEAK CHECK
1. Loosen cap. 2. Confirm that the engine coolant level is up to the filler neck. 3. Install an adapter and cap adapter to the water outlet fitting and apply 160 kPa (23 psi) pressure. Hold pressure for two minutes, while checking for leakage from the radiator, hose or connections. Caution Be sure to completely clean away any moisture from the places checked. When the tester is removed, be careful not to spill any engine coolant from it. Be careful, when installing and removing the tester and when testing, not to deform the water outlet fitting. 4. If there is leakage, repair or replace the appropriate part.
CAP PRESSURE TEST

1. Use a cap adapter to attach the cap to the tester. 2. Increase the pressure until the indicator of the gauge stops moving. Limit: 65 kPa (9.2 psi) Standard value: 75-105 kPa (11-15 psi) 3. Replace the cap if the reading does not remain at or above the limit. NOTE Be sure that the cap is clean before testing, since rust or other foreign material on the cap seal will cause an improper indication.
ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT

Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.
ENGINE COOLANT CONCENTRATION TEST

Refer to GROUP 00 - Selection of Coolant.
TSB Revision
ENGINE COOLING - Radiator
14-5
RADIATOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION L
I l
Pre-removal Operation Engine Coolant Draining (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.)

I L
Post-installation Operation Engine Coolant Refilling (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Checking Automatic Transaxle Fluid Level and Refilling If Necessary
I
<From 1994 models>
8 ft.lbs.
12 Nm
ZO4FOO19
16
9ft.lbs.
/TF=Y
ZO4FOOO2
00002226
181; Radiator removal steps

Drain plug Cap Overflow tube Water level sensor connector Reserve tank Radiator upper hose Radiator lower hose Automatic transaxle oil cooler hoses <Vehicles with AIT> Condenser fan motor connector. <Vehicles with air conditioning> 10. Condenser fan motor assembly <Vehicles with air conditioning> Radiator fan motor connector* Therm0 sensor connection* (For radiator fan)
13. Therm0 sensor connection* (For condenser fan) <Vehicles with air conditioning> 14. Radiator fan motor assembly 15. Upper insulator 16. Radiator assembly 17. Lower insulator 18. Therm0 sensor (For radiator fan)* 19. Therm0 sensor (For condenser fan)* <Vehicles with air conditioningz20. Fan 21. Radiator fan motor 22. Resistor 23. Shroud
l : Up to 1993 models
NOTE
TSB Revision
14-6

<From 1994 models>
204FOO19
<Up to 1993 models>

20\4
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
00002227
ZO4FOOO2
Radiator fan motor assembly removal steps 1. Drain plug 2. Cap 6. Radiator upper hose 9. Condenser fan motor connector <Vehicles with air conditioning> 10. Condenser fan motor assembly <Vehicles with air conditioning> .A4 11. Radiator fan motor connector 12. Therm0 sensor connection* (For radiator fan)
13. Therm0 sensor connection* (For condenser fan) <Vehicles with air conditioning> 14. Radiator fan motor assembly 20. Fan 21. Radiator fan motor 22. Resistor 23. Shroud NOTE *: Up to 1993 models
TSB Revision
ENGINE COOLING - Radiator REMOVAL SERVICE POINT
14-7
+A, AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OIL COOLER HOSES DISCONNECTION Use a plug or otherwise cover the hose and nipple part of the radiator so that dust, dirt, foreign materials, etc. do not enter after the hose has been disconnected from the radiator.

.A+ RADIATOR FAN MOTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTION Connect the radiator fan motor connector to the body harness. Then, insert into the shroud hole and fix securely.
INSPECTION
l l l l
l l
Check for foreign material between radiator fins. Check the radiator fins for bent, or damage. Check the radiator for corrosion, damage, rust or scale. Check the radiator hoses for cracks, damage or deterioration. Check the reserve tank for damage. Check the automatic transaxle oil cooler hoses for cracking, damage or deterioration.
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR CHECK (1) Check to be sure that the radiator fan rotates when battery voltage is applied between terminals (as shown in the figure). (2) Check to see that abnormal noises are not produced, while motor is turning.
204FOO17
TSB Revision
14-8
<UP to 1993 models>
E. l I
0
J

RESISTOR CHECK (1) Measure the resistance between connector terminals (1) and (4) of the radiator fan motor. (2) The resistor is normal if the resistance is within the following range. Resistance: 0.29-0.35 Q
c 04u
<From 1994 models>
<Up to 1993 models>
RESISTOR CHECK (1) Measure the resistance between connector terminals (1) and (3) of the radiator fan motor. (2) The resistor is normal if the resistance is within the following range. Resistance: 0.29-0.35 Q THERM0 SENSOR CHECK <Up to. 1993 models> (1) Immerse the water temperature switch in hot water as shown. (2) Change the water temperature and check continuity with a circuit tester. If it is as specified below, the switch is functioning correctly.
Item With continuity For condenser fan 91-99C (196-210F) 87C (189F) or less
For radiator fan

81-89C (178-192F) 77C (171 F) or less
(temperature of
point A) Without continuity (temperature of point B)
204A0020
216Y1190
00002228
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR RELAY CHECK (1) Remove radiator fan motor relay from the relay box located at the right side in the engine compartment.
\ \71C1FfVfil
1-m + - -I1 gp 1 LA!z

2 34
(2) Check for continuity between the terminals when the battery power-supply is applied to terminal (2) and terminal (4) is grounded.
When current flows When no current flows
00002221
Between terminals l-3 Between terminals l-3 Between terminals 2-4
Continuity No continuity Continuity _\
Y16WO908
ZlliLO312
L/
TSB Revision
ENGINE COOLING - Thermostat
14-9
THERMOSTAT
/

l
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Engine Coolant Draining and Supplying (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.)
17-20 Nm
iL
Removal steps 1. Air hose A <Turbo> .B+ 2. Air intake hose A <Turbo> 3. Air intake hose <Non-Turbo> 4. Radiator lower hose connection 5. Water inlet fitting 6. Gasket .A( 7. Thermostat

.A4 THERMOSTAT INSTALLATION Install the thermostat with its jiggle valve lined up with the mark on the thermostat housing.
.BdAIR INTAKE HOSE A INSTALLATION Assemble the air intake hose A with its notches (arrow-marked) lined up with the A marks on the air intake hoses B and C. Insert the hoses into the air intake hose A until they are bottomed.
Air intake hose B

ZOSFOO23
TSB Revision
14-10
ENGINE COOLING - Thermostat INSPECTION

l l l l
~ ~
\ i d
Check that valve closes tightly at room temperature. Check for defects or damage. Check for rust or encrustation on valve. Remove if any. Immerse thermostat in container of water. Stir to raise water temperature and check that thermostat opening valve temperature and the temperature with valve fully open [valve lift-over 8 mm (.31 in.)] are at the standard value.
Standard value: Opening valve temperature 76SC (170F) Full-open temperature 90C (194F) NOTE Measure valve height when fully closed. Calculate lift by measuring the height when fully open.
Valve lift
TSB Revision
ENGINE COOLING - Water Pump, Water Pipe and Water Hose
14-11
WATER PUMP, WATER PIPE AND WATER HOSE /

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Engine Coolant Draining and Supplying (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Ignition PowerTransistor Unit and Ignition Coil Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 16 - Engine Electrical.)
l
Timing Belt Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 11 - Timing Belt.)
17-20 Nm 12-14ft.lbs.
8
/
17-20 Nm
a- I I 11.105.
Removal steps
Installation steps
1. Water pump 2. Gasket 3. Air hose A <Turbo> 4. Air intake hose A <Turbo> 5. Air intake hose B cTurboz 6. Air intake hose C <Turbo> 7. Air intake hose <Non-Turbo> 8. Radiator upper hose connection 9. Water hose connection <Turbo> 10. Water outlet fitting 11. Gasket 12. Harness connection 13. Heater hose connection 14. Water hose A connection 15. Water hose connection 16. Water hose connection <Turbo> 17. Radiator lower hose connection 18. Water hose connection <Turbo> 19. Thermostat housing 20. Gasket 21. Inlet water pipe 22. O-ring
FBI 22. O-ring .B+ 21. Inlet water pipe 20. Gasket 19. Thermostat housing 18. Water hose connection <Turbo> 17. Radiator lower hose connection 16. Water hose connection <Turbo> 15. Water hose connection 14. Water hose A connection 13. Heater hose connection 12. Harness connection 11. Gasket 10. Water outlet fitting 9. Water hose connection <Turbo> 8. Radiator upper hose connection 7. Air intake hose <Non-Turbo> .C( 6. Air intake hose C <Turbo> .C( 5. Air intake hose B cTurbo> .C+ 4. Air intake hose A <Turbo> 3. Air hose A <Turbo>
.A( 1. Water pump
2. Gasket
TSB Revision
14-12
ENGINE COOLING - Water Pump, Water Pipe and Water Hose INSTALLAilON SERVICE POINTS
.A+ WATER PUMP INSTALLATION (1) Clean both gasket surfaces of water pump body and cylinder block. (2) Install new water pump gasket and water pump assembly and tighten the bolts. (3) Water pump installation bolt size are different and caution must be paid to ensure that they are properly installed.
(.31 x .98) O-ring I
z01L0188
d\ ~ I I
.BAO-RING / INLET WATER PIPE INSTALLATION Replace the O-rings at both ends of the water inlet pipe with new ones and apply water to the outside of O-rings to help smooth insertion of the pipe into the water pump, thermostat housing. Caution Care must be taken not to permit engine oil or other greases to adhere to the O-ring.
.C+AIR INTAKE HOSE C / AIR INTAKE HOSE B / AIR INTAKE HOSE A INSTALLATION Assemble the air intake hose A with its notches (arrow-marked) lined up with the A marks on the air intake hoses B and C. Insert the hoses into the air intake hose A until they are bottomed. Insert the air intake hoses B and C on the turbocharger side until they are bottomed.
Air intake hose B
ZOSFOO23
INSPECTION
WATER PUMP CHECK If any of the following irregularities are observed, replace the water pump as an assembly. (1) Damage or crack on the water pump body (2) Water leakage. With improper sealing, a water leakage mark may be observed around hole (A).
TSB Revision
ENGINE COOLING - s ensor
tngme coolant Temperature Gauge Unit, Engine Coolant Temperature and Air Conditioning Engine Coolant Temperature Switch
14-13
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE UNIT, ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH
l
Pre-removal and Post-installation operation Engine Coolant Draining and Supplying (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.)
cup to 1993 models>

30 Nm
<From 1994 models>

30 Nm
;Jd
i
ZOlFOO38
ZOlFOO62
00002229
Removal steps
1. Air hose A <Turbo>

.A+ 2. Air intake hose A <Turbo>
.A+ 3. Air intake hose B <Turbo> 4. Radiator upper hose connection 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge unit
6. Engine coolant temperature sensor (Engine control) 7. Air conditioning engine coolant temperature switch <Up to 1993 models>
1 TSB Revision
14-l 4
ENGINE COOLING - s ensor
Engme Coolant Temperature Gauge Unit, Engine Coolant Temperature and Air Conditioning Engine Coolant Temperature Switch

,A4 AIR INTAKE HOSE B / AIR INTAKE HOSE A INSTALLATION Assemble the air intake hose A with its notches (arrow-marked) lined up with the A marks on the air intake hoses B and C. Insert the hoses into the air intake hose A until they are bottomed. insert the air intake hose B on the turbocharger side until they are bottomed. 1 ld
Air intake hose 6

205FOO23
INSPECTION
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE UNIT Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Engine control) Refer to GROUP 13A - MFI System Inspection.
QOQQQQ
Z2OAOlS9
AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH cup to 1993 models> (1) Immerse the A/C engine coolant temperature switch in oil and then heat (by using a gas stove flame or similar method) so as to increase the oil temperature. (2) Check to be sure that the AK engine coolant temperature switch is switched OFF when the oil temperature reaches the standard value. Standard value: 112-118C (234-244F) Caution The oil used above should be engine oil and should be stirred well while being heated; do not heat more than necessary.
L,
1 TSB Revision
15-1
INTAKE AND EXHAUST

CONTENTS
ACTIVE EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 AIR CLEANER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CHARGE AIR COOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 EXHAUST MANIFOLD <Non Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I.......... . . . 26 <Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 EXHAUST PIPE, MAIN MUFFLER AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER L <Non Turbo> . . . * . . . . . . . . . . . . . * * . . . . . . . . . . 30 <Turbo> .*............................. . . . 33
Intake Charge Pressure Control System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Intake Manifold Vacuum Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refer to Group 11 Turbocharger Bypass Valve Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Turbocharger Supercharging Pressure Check . . . 6 Turbocharger Waste Gate Solenoid Check . . . . . 8 Variable Induction Control System Check . . . . . . 5
SPECIAL TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..s . . . . . 2

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
INTAKE MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * . 17 INTAKE MANIFOLD PLENUM <Non Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 <Turbo> .*.....*.*..................... . . . 15
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 TROUBLESHOOTING (Active Exhaust System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TURBOCHARGER (FRONT)................2 0 TURBOCHARGER (REAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . m . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . 5
i i
15-2
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Specifications / Special Tool
SPECIFICATIONS
xpansron resonance
Items Intake manifolds Distortion of cylinder head contacting Standard value Less than 0.15 (0059) 36-44 Approx. 69 (10) Limit 0.2 (.008)
surface mm (in.)
Turbocharger waste gate solenoid terminal resistance [at 20C (68 F)] !2 Turbocharger Supercharging pressure kPa (psi)
SPECIAL TOOL
Tool number and name MD998770 Supersession Application Removal/Installation of heated oxygen sensor <Turbo>
MB991 348 Test harness set
Inspection of variable induction control system
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Troubleshooting
15-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Exhaust gas leakage Probable cause Loose joints Broken pipe or muffler Abnormal noise Broken separator in muffler Broken rubber hangers Interference of pipe or muffler with vehicle body Broken pipe or muffler Remedy Retighten Repair or replace Replace Replace Correct Repair or replace
TSB Revision
15-4
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Troubleshooting (Active Exhaust System)
TROlJBLESHOOTlNG (ACTIVE EXHAUST SYSTEM) cup to 1994 models>

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
(1) Make sure that the valve operating cable is not dislocated. (2) Make sure that the connectors of each component are positively connected and that no fuse has blown. (3) Have an overall understanding of the substance and procedure of checking by reference to the Troubleshooting Quick-Reference Table and perform check in the proper sequence. (4) Check each component with its connectors disconnected.
TROUBLESHO.OTING
QUICK-REFERENCE TABLE
If no abnormality is found in all parts by the check performed in the following sequence, the problem is probably caused by faulty active exhaust control unit and therefore the active exhaust control unit is replaced.
Sequence 1 ? Part to be checked Valve Active exhaust switch Power window relay Checking procedure Operate valve manually. Refer to P.1540. Normal condition Operates freely. Probable cause Valve sticking Faulty switch Remedy Replace main muffler. Replace switch.
Check continuity be- Continuity present tween terminals (1) and (3) of relay. With battery voltage applied between terminals (1) and (3) of relay, check continuity between terminals (4) and (5) of relay.
Faulty power window relay
Replace power window relay.
i.J
Continuity present between terminals (5) and
Actuator assembly
No continuity present Check continuity between terminals in between terminals (2) and (5). SPORT mode.
(6).
Check continuity be- Continuity present between terminals while tween terminals (2) and idling in TOUR mode. (5). No continuity present between terminals (5) and (6). Apply battery voltage between terminals (1) and (3). Motor operates. Motor turns in reverse direction when polarity is reversed. Actuator operates and valve operates as well. Broken or maladjusted cable Replace or adjust cable. Faulty actuator assemW Replace actuator assembly.
Cable
Operate active exhaust switch (while idling).
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - On-vehicle Service
15-5
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
VARIABLE INDUCTION CONTROL SYSTEM CHECK (Non Turbo)
cl 992 models> SYSTEM CHECK (1) Warm up the engine. (2) Connect the tachometer. (Refer to GROUP 11 - Engine Adjustment.) (3) Make sure that when the engine speed is increased from the idle speed to 5,000 rpm, the induction control valve shaft turns. VARIABLE INDUCTION CONTROL MOTOR CHECK (1) zrnnect the variable induction control motor connec(2) Check the variable induction control motor coil for continuity. Standard value
26FU1277
Variable induction control servo connectors
Measured terminal
Between terminals (11)
Continuity
and Present
1.535 n: 20C (68F)]
(12)
Open Close
271 NO105
(3) Make sure that when DC 6V is applied to terminals (11) and (12) of the variable induction control motor connector, the induction control valve shaft turns smoothly. Caution Be sure to apply a voltage of not higher than DC 6V to the variable induction control motor connector terminals since application of high voltage may lock the servo gears. (4) If deviation from the standard value occurs or the variable induction control valve shaft does not turn smoothly, replace the intake manifold plenum assembly.
<From 1993 models> SYSTEM CHECK (1) Disconnect the induction control valve position sensor connector. (2) Connect the special tool (test harness set) between the disconnected connectors. (All terminals should be connected.) (3) Connect a circuit tester between terminal (2) and terminal (3) of the induction control valve position sensor and measure the voltage. In addition, measure the voltage between terminal (3) and terminal (4) in the same way. TSB Revision
15-6

Standard value
Engine condition Idle Engine speed gradually Increases to 5,000 rpm 5,000 rpm Voltage [V] O-l or 4.5-5.5 1 Z-4.0 (momentarily) O-l or 4.5-5.5
(4) If the voltages are outside the standard values, inspect the induction control valve position sensor, variable induction control motor and the related harnesses. VARIABLE INDUCTION CONTROL MOTOR CHECK (1) Disconnect the variable induction control motor connectors. (2) Disconnect the air intake hose from the throttle body. (3) Check the variable induction control motor coil for continuity. Standard value
Measured terminal Continuity Between terminals (11) and Present [5-35 Q: 20C (68F)] (12)
Variable induction control motor connectors
J
Z6FU1277
Open
Close
271 NO105
(4) Make sure that when DC 6V is applied to terminals (11) and (12) of the variable induction control motor connector, the induction control valve opens and closes smoothly. Caution Be sure to apply a voltage of not higher than DC 6V to the variable induction control motor connector terminals since application of high voltage may lock the servo gears. (5) If outside the standard value, or if the variable induction valve does not open and close smoothly, replace the intake manifold plenum assembly.
TURBOCHARGER SUPERCHARGING PRESSURE CHECK (Turbo)

Caution Perform running inspection with two passengers in the vehicle and where full throttle acceleration can be safely made. The pressure gauge reading is taken by a front seat passenger.
TSB Revision
15-7
(1) Disconnect the hose (black) from the turbocharger waste
gate solenoid, and connect the pressure gauge to the hose. Plug the nipple of the solenoid valve from which the hose (black) has been disconnected. (2) Drive the vehicle with full throttle and accelerate the engine to a speed of more than 3,500 rpm at 2nd gear. Measure the supercharging pressure when the pointer is stabilized. Standard value: 20-60 kPa (2.9-8.7 psi) Caution If the supercharging pressure deviates from the standard value, check the following items for possible causes. When pressure is high: Turbocharger waste gate actuator malfunction When pressure is low: Turbocharger waste gate actuator malfunction Supercharging pressure leaks Faulty turbocharger
INTAKE CHARGE PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM CHECK (Turbo)

(1) After the diagnostic trouble code of MFI system is com-
pletely read, turn off the ignition switch. (2) Disconnect the hose (black) from the turbocharger waste gate solenoid and connect a three-way joint between the hose and the solenoid. (3) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the three-way joint. (4) Disconnect the hose (with its end painted red) from the turbocharger wastegate actuator control boost nipple and plug the nipple. (5) Applying a negative pressure with the hand vacuum pump, check tightness both when the hose end (with its end painted red) is closed and when it is open.
Engine
state
stop (Ignition switch: ON) Idling (after I warm-up)
Hose (with its end painted red) Opened Closed by finger Closed by finger
Normal state Negative pressure leaks. Negative pressure is maintained. Negative pressure leaks.
NOTE If this check indicates an abnormal condition, the turbocharger waste gate actuator, turbocharger waste gate solenoid or hose is broken.
TSB Revision
15-8
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - On-vehicle Service TURBOCHARGER WASTE GATE SOLENOID CHECK (Turbo)
OPERATION CHECK (1) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the solenoid valve nipple (A) (see the illustration to the left). (2) Using a jumper wire, connect between the solenoid valve terminal and battery terminal. (3) Connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire at the battery negative terminal to apply a negative pressure, check tightness. Jumper wire Connected Disconnected (B) nipple condition Open Close Open Normal condition Negative pressure leaks. Negative pressure is held. Negative pressure is held. I
a-v
7lN0095
COIL RESISTANCE CHECK Measure resistance between solenoid valve terminals. Standard value: 36-44 Q [at 20C (SSF)]
Z7lN009f
TURBOCHARGER BYPASS VALVE CHECK (Turbo)

(1) Remove the turbocharger bypass valve. (2) Connect the hand vacuum pump to the nipple of the turbocharger bypass valve. (3) Apply a negative pressure of approx. 400 mmHg (16 in.Hg), and check operation of the valve. Also check that air tightness is maintained. I
771NfMW7
Negative pressure About 400 mmHg (16 in.Hg)
Valve operation It starts opening
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Air Cleaner
15-9
I I
AIR CLEANER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION L P
<Non Turbo>
<Turbo>
OSFOO54
\ 24/y 18
05FOOO1 00000608
Air cleaner removal steps 1. Volume airflow sensor connector 2. Air cleaner cover and volume airflow sensor assembly 3. Air cleaner element 4. Air cleaner body 5. Air duct 6. Insulator 7. Collar 8. Air cleaner cover 9. Volume air flow sensor gasket 10. Volume air flow sensor assembly Air intake hose removal steps <Non-Turbo> 11. Breather hose 12. Air intake hose 13. Resonator
Air intake hose removal steps <Turbo> 14. Boost hose connection 15. Air hose A 16. Breather hose 17. Vacuum hose connection .A+ 18. Air intake hose A, turbocharger bypass valve and air by-pass hose 19. Purge hose connection .A+ 20. Air intake hose B 21. Boost hose connection .A( 22. Air intake hose C 23. Air by-pass hose 24. Turbocharger bypass valve 25. Air intake hose A
/ TSB Revision
-.
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Air Cleaner

Jir intalJe hose C

.A4 AIR INTAKE HOSE C / AIR INTAKE HOSE B / AIR INTAKE HOSE A, TURBOCHARGER BY-PASS VALVE AND AIR BY-PASS HOSE INSTALLATION Engaging the notch with the A mark at points indicated by the arrows, insert air intake hoses B and C until seated. Insert the turbocharger end of air intake hoses B and C completely.
Air intake hose A
Air intake hose B

ZOSFOO23
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the air cleaner body, cover or packing for deformation, corrosion or damage. Check the air duct for damage. Check the air cleaner element for clogging, contamination or damage. If element is slightly clogged, remove dust by blowing air from inside of element.
VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR CHECK For inspection of volume airflow sensor, refer to GROUP 13A - Volume Air Flow Sensor Check.
1 TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Charge Air Cooler
15-11
CHARGE AIR COOLER i L

Pre-removal Operation l Front Bumper Removal (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.)
(When equipped with charge air cooler left) (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.)
,18
_-
lo-13 Nm
lo-13 Nm 7 - 9 ft.lbs.
L
3 4
lo-13 Nm 7-9 ft.lbs.
2.9 ft.lbs.
/
Turbocharger
O-ring
05FOOO3
10113 Nm 7-9 ft.lbs.
Charge air cooler right removal steps .C+ 1. Air hose C .C+ 2. Air hose D 3. Charge air cooler duct (RH) .C+ 4. Charge air cooler right Charge air cooler left removal steps .B+ 5. Air hose G 6. Air pipe A 7. Heat protector F .B+ 8. Air hose B .B+ 9. Air hose E 10. Air pipe B 11. Air pipe C TSB Revision
4A,
.B+ 12. Air hose F 13. Engine oil cooler 14. Charge air cooler duct (LH) .B+ 15. Charge air cooler left Air intake hose removal steps 16. Boost hose connection 17. Air hose A 18. Volume air flow sensor connector .A( 19. Air intake hose A .A+ 20. Air intake hose B .A+ 21. Air intake hose C 22. Air cleaner 23. Air by-pass hose 24. Turbocharger bypass valve
/ L
15-12
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Charge Air Cooler REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

+A, ENGINE OIL COOLER REMOVAL Disconnect the hose from the engine oil cooler and remove the engine oil cooler only.
-6% Air intake hose C

.A4 AIR INTAKE HOSE C / AIR INTAKE HOSE B / AIR INTAKE HOSE A INSTALLATION Engaging the notch with the A mark at points indicated by the arrows, insert air intake hoses B and C until seated. Insert the turbocharger end of air intake hoses B and C completely.
Air intake hose A
Air intake hose B

205FOO23
Air Charge air cooler left 205FOO28
Matchmark
AIR HOSE E / AIR HOSE B / AIR HOSE G INSTALLATION Aligning the marks at the points indicated by the arrows, insert securely into the stepped portion of the pipe or until seated. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the charge air cooler itself.
.B +CHARGE AIR COOLER LEFr / AIR HOSE F /
Matchmark Hose end...paint Pipe end...protrusion
.CdCHARGE AIR COOLER RIGHT / AIR HOSE D / AIR HOSE C INSTALLATION Aligning the marks at the points indicated by arrows, insert securely into the stepped portion of the pipe. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the charge air cooler itself.
Air hose D
205~0029
coole? right
INSPECTION
l l
Check the charge air cooler fins for bending, damage, or foreign matter. Check the charge air cooler hoses for cracking, damage, or wear.
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Intake Manifold Plenum <Non Turbo>
15-13
INTAKE MANIFOLD PLENUM <Non Turbo>

id
Post-installation operation
l
Accelerator Cable Adjustment (Refer to GROUP 13F - Engine Control.)

5 Nm
L
60 Nm 43 ft.lbs.
18 Nm 13 ft.lbs.
AOSFOO88
Removal steps 1. Air intake hose connection 2. Accelerator cable connection 3. Throttle body assembly 4A, ,A+ 4. Throttle body gasket 5. Brake booster vacuum hose connection 6. Harness connectors 7. VIC motor connection 8. EGR pipe cup to 1995 model for California and from 1996 model> 9. EGR valve cup to 19.95 model for California and from 1996 model> 10. EGR valve gasket <Up to 1995 model for California and from 1996 model> 11. EGR temperature sensor <Up to 1995 model for California>
12. Manifold differential pressure sensor <From 1996 model> 13. Accelerator cable bracket 14. Intake manifold plenum stay connection 15. Intake manifold plenum installation bolts 16. Intake manifold plenum installation nuts 17. Intake manifold plenum 18. Intake manifold plenum gasket NOTE 4 Up to 1993 model l2 From 1994 model
TSB Revision
15-14
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Intake Manifold Plenum <Non Turbo> REMOVAL SERVICE POINT
(A, THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Leaving the water hoses and vacuum hoses in their installed positions, remove from the intake manifold plenum.
I ~
I d

.A4 THROTTLE BODY GASKET INSTALLATION Install with the gasket protrusion positioned as shown. Caution If installed in an incorrect direction, idling failure or other problems may occur.
INSPECTION
Cheek the following points; replace the part if a problem is found. INTAKE MANIFOLD PLENUM CHECK (1) Check intake manifold plenum for defect or cracks. Replace if defective or cracked. (2) Check load (negative pressure) of drain port. Clean if required.
1 TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Intake Manifold Plenum <Turbo>
15-15
INTAKE MANIFOLD PLENUM <Turbo>

i REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
l
Post-installation Operation Accelerator Cable Adjustment (Refer to GROUP 13F - Engine Control.) 4-6 Nm 3-4 ft.lbs.
I
Turbocharger O-ring osFooo3
18 Nm
lo-13 N m
ml
IO-;3 Nm 7-9 ft.lbs.
05FOO89 00004150
Removal steps
1. Air hose A connection 2. Accelerator cable connection 3. Throttle body assembly Mb .A+ 4. Throttle body gasket 5. Air pipe A 6. Vacuum hose connection 7. Brake booster vacuum hose connection 8. Harness connector 9. Clutch booster vacuum hose connection 10. EGR temperature sensor <Up to 1995 model for California> 11. Manifold differential pressure sensor <From 1996 model> 12. EGR valve <Up to 1995 model for California and from 1996 model> 13. EGR valve gasket <Up to 1995 model for California and from 1996 model> 14. EGR pipe installation bolts <Up to 1995 model for California and from 1996 model> 15. EGR pipe gasket <Up to 1995 model for California and from 1996 model> 16. intake manifold plenum stay connection 17. Intake manifold plenum installation bolts 18. Intake manifold plenum installation nuts 19. Intake manifold plenum 20. Intake manifold plenum gasket

i
AA, THROlTLE BODY ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Leaving the water hoses and vacuum hoses in their installed positions remove from the intake manifold plenum. TSB Revision
15-16
Protrus\ion
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Intake Manifold Plenum <Turbo>

I
Throttle body Ifi

,A+ THROTTLE BODY GASKET INSTALLATION install with the gasket protrusion positioned as shown. Caution If installed in an incorrect direction, idling failure or other problems may occur. :L/
d $~~mmanifold
ZO5FOO57
INSPECTION
Check the following points; replace the part if a problem is found. INTAKE MANIFOLD PLENUM CHECK (1) Check intake manifold plenum for defect or cracks. Replace if defective or cracked. (2) Check load (negative pressure) of drain port. Clean if required.
TSB Revision
2.
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Intake Manifold
15-17
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Pre-removal Operation l Residual Pressure Release (Refer to GROUP 13A - On-vehicle Service.) l Engine Coolant Draining (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Intake Manifold Plenum Removal (Refer to P.1513, 15.)
Post-installation Operation 0 Intake Manifold Plenum Installation (Refer to P.1513. 15.) l Engine Coolant Filling (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) 0 Accelerator Cable Adjustment (Refer to GROUP 13F - Engine Control.) l Fuel Leakage Checking 5 Nm 2 4 ft.lbs.
lo-13 Nm 8-9 ft.lbs.
24 Nm 17 ft.lbs. ** 14-17 ft.lbs. i
/x&ryLy=--gg \ \ -::-::
05FOO24 00000612
Removal steps 1. -High-pressure fuel hose connection ^ . 2. u-nng 3. Fuel return hose connection 4. Vacuum hoses connection 5. Injector connector 6. Fuel rail (with injectors) 7. Insulators 8. Timing belt upper cover .C( 9. Intake manifold mounting nut* .B+ 10. Intake manifold mounting nut*2 11. Cone disc spring*2 12. Intake manifold ,A+ 13. Intake manifold gasket
NOTE *l: cl 992 non turbo model> *2: 4992 turbo model and from 1993 model> *3: cl992 turbo model and up to November, 1993 models> *4: <From December, 1993 models>
TSB Revision
15-18
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Intake Manifold INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS

.A( INTAKE MANIFOLD GASKET INSTALLATION Install with gasket protrusions in the position illustrated.
d :
I
ZOlLO857
FRONT A
.B( INTAKE MANIFOLD MOUNTING NUT INSTALLATION cl992 turbo, model and up to November, 1993 models> Tighten the intake manifold mounting nuts one bank after the other by the following procedure. (1) Tighten the nuts in the front bank to 3 to 5 Nm (2.2 to 3.6 ftlbs.). (2) Tighten the nuts in the rear bank to 12 to 15 Nm (9 to 11 ftlbs.). (3) Tighten the nuts in the front bank to 12 to 15 Nm (9 to 11 ftlbs.). (4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) one .more time respectively. <From December, 1993 models> (1) Apply engine oil to the intake monifold mounting stud. (2) Tighten the intake manifold mounting nuts one bank after the other by the following procedure. (1) Tighten the nuts in the front bank to 5 to 8 Nm (4 to 6 ft.lbs.). (2) Tighten the nuts in the rear bank to 20 to 23 Nm (14 to 17 ft.lbs.). (3) Tighten the nuts in the front bank to 20 to 23 Nm (14 to 17 ft.lbs.). (4) Repeat Steps (2) and (3) one more time respectively.
Intake manifold
Z7lN0090
manifold A mounting stud
Cylinder head L
OJPO024
FRONT
Intakemanifold
71N0090
00003707
A 8/ ?O 43u uc000>\-@ =d* 2 l 7 3 a /
,C+ INTAKE MANIFOLD MOUNTING NUT INSTALLATION 4992 non turbo model> Apply lubricant sparingly to the intake manifold mounting nuts.
205LOO77
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Intake Manifold INSPECTION
15-19
Check the following points; replace the part if a problem is found. INTAKE MANIFOLD CHECK (1) Check for damage or cracking of any part. (2) Clogging of the negative pressure (vacuum) outlet port, or clogging of the gas passages. (3) Check deflection of installation surface with straight edge and thickness gauge. Standard value: 0.15 mm (.0059- in.) or less Limit: 0.2 mm (.008 in.)
TSB Revision
15-20
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Front)
TURBOCHARGER (FRONT)
l
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Radiator Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 14 - Radiator.) l Transmission Stay (Right) Removal and Installation
Front Exhaust Pipe Removal and Installation (Refer to P.l5-33, 35, 37.)
O-ring)
fj?+--&; ::+ym 7-S ft.lbs. . /
2\
7-S ft.lbs.
13----bmJF4\/
Y
31 Nm I( 22 ft.lbs.
.li Y, - 24 N m .Ll7 ft.lbs. +,:
JI
Nrn
2 4 - y
9Nm
3---g&
I
27
-v1 1.111
40-47ft.lbs 55-75 Nm 40-54 ft.lbs.
26
-15 Nm .ll ft.lbs. Removal steps
25
05FOO43 00000614
,D+ 1. Air hose C .E( 2. Air intake hose B .D+ 3. Air hose D 4. Air hose A ,C( 5. Air hose B 6. Air pipe B ,C+ 7. Air hose E 8. Air pipe C 9. Drive belt (Refer to GROUP 11 Service Adjustment Procedures.) (Refer to 10. Generator assembly GROUP 16 - Generator.) 11. Engine oil level gauge guide 12. Heat protector B
14. Water pipe B 15. Heated oxygen sensor connection 16. Turbocharger & fitting assembly 17. Gasket
(A, ,Bd it: !tzed oxygen sensor

20. 21. 22. 23. ,A+ 24. 25. 4B, 26. 27. 28.
13. Water pipe A TSB Revision
Turbocharger stay Exhaust fitting Gasket Oil return pipe Turbocharger assembly Air conditioning compressor Tension pulley bracket Air conditioning compressor bracket Oil pipe
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Front) REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
15-21
dA, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REMOVAL Disconnect the connector of the heated oxygen sensor, and install the special tool to the heated oxygen sensor.
+B, AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR DISCONNECTION Disconnect air conditioning compressor with hoses from the bracket. NOTE The removed air conditioning compressor should be fastened (by using rope, etc.) in a position that will not interfere with the removal/installation of the turbocharger assembly.

bAdTURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Clean the alignment surfaces shown in the illustration. Supply clean engine oil through the oil pipe installation hole of the turbocharger assembly. Caution When cleaning, care must be taken so that a piece of the gasket does not enter the oil passage hole.
,Bq HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR INSTALLATION Use the special tool to install the heated oxygen sensor.
Air h
,C( AIR HOSE E / AIR HOSE B INSTALLATION Aligning the marks at the points indicated by the arrows, insert securely into the stepped portion of the pipe or until seated. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses or pipes.
YO5FOOZ3
b Matchmark Hose end . . . paint Pipe end . . . protrusion
1 TSB Revision
15-22
,@ Matchmark
Hose end . . . paint Pipe end . . . protrusion
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Front)

.DqAIR HOSE D / AIR HOSE C INSTALLATION Aligning the marks at the points indicated by the arrows, insert securely into the stepped portion of the pipe. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses or pipes.
.E+ AIR INTAKE HOSE B INSTALLATION Engaging the notches with A marks at the points indicated by the arrows, insert until seated. Insert the turbocharger end of air intake hose 6 completely.
Air intake hose B

YOSFOO23
INSPECTION
TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLYCHECK l Visually check the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel for cracking or other damage. l Check whether the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel can be easily turned by hand. Check for oil leakage from the turbocharger assembly. l l Check whether or not the turbocharger waste gate valve remains open. If any problem is found, replace the part after disassembly. OIL PIPE AND OIL-RETURN PIPE CHECK Check the oil pipe and oil-return pipe for clogging, bending, or other damage. If there is clogging, clean it.
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Rear)
15-23
TURBOCHARGER (REAR)
Post-installation ODeration l Front Exhaust Pipe Installation (Refer to P.15-33, 35. 37.1
(Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.)
t t.ks. ------f l-l
10-13 Nm 7-9 ft.lbs.
3 8
d-ring
OSFOOO3
-ii f ;y;T&.tg . - l7
55-65 Nm 54nf!! 40-47ft.lbs. ,6 Nm 13 ft.lbs.
/ 75Nm -._ . .
18' ' /
22/l /$=yPq&@J
I M~* 45 Nm 33 ft.lbs. 12-15 Nm 0 9-11 ft.lbs.
OSFOO41 0 0 0 0 6 1 5
,Ed ,Ed
FDA ,Dd ,dA, ,Cd iJ
Removal steps 1. Battery 2. Accelerator cable connection (engine side) 3. Air hose A 4. Air pipe A 5. Heat protector F 6. Clutch booster vacuum hose 7. Accelerator cable connection (pedal side) 8. Air intake hose A 9. Air intake hose C 10. Heated oxygen sensor 11. Heat protector D 12. EGR pipe
13. Eye bolt .B+ 14. Oil Pipe 15. EGR valve 16. Water pipe A 17. Water pipe B 18. Exhaust fitting 19. Heat protector E 20. Gasket ^.-. 21. I UrDOCtIarger & return pipe assembly 22. Oil return pipe ,A+ 23. Turbocharger assembly 24. Gasket 25. Ring 26. Exhaust fitting stay
TSB Revision
15-24
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Rear) REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

dA, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REMOVAL Disconnect the connector of the heated oxygen sensor, and install the special tool to the heated oxygen sensor. d

,A4 TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Clean the alignment surfaces shown in the Illustration. Caution When cleaning, care must be taken so that a piece of the gasket does not enter the oil passage hole. .B+ OIL PIPE INSTALLATION Supply clean engine oil through the oil pipe installation hole of the turbocharger assembly. .C+ HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR INSTALLATION Use the special tool to install the heated oxygen sensor.
205FOO19
,
bd Air intake hose C
.D+AIR INTAKE HOSE C / AIR INTAKE HOSE A INSTALLATION Engaging the notches with A marks at the points indicated by the arrows insert until seated. Insert the turbocharger end of air intake hose C completely.
Air intake hose A
Air intake hose B

ZO5FOO23
Air hose,A
0 Matchmark Hose end . . . paint Pipe end . . . protrusion
.E+ AIR PIPE A / AIR HOSE A I,NSTALLATION Aligning the marks at the points indicated by the arrows, insert securely into the stepped portion of the pipe. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses or pipes.
Air hose C
L)
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Turbocharger (Rear) INSPECTION
15-25
'
L
Compressor
TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY CHECK l Visually check the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel for cracking or other damage. l Check whether the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel can be easily turned by hand. l Check for oil leakage from the turbocharger assembly. l Check whether or not the turbocharger waste gate valve remains open. If any problem is found, replace the part after disassembly. OIL PIPE AND OIL-RETURN PIPE CHECK Check the oil pipe and oil-return pipe for clogging, bending, or other damage. If there is clogging, clean it.
, i
15-26
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Exhaust Manifold <Non Turbo>
EXHAUST MANIFOLD <Non Turbo>

<Vehicles for Federal>
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Front Exhaust Pipe Removal and Installation (Refer to P.l5-30, 31.) Condenser Fan Motor Assembly Removal and Installation <Vehicles with Air Conditioning> (Refer to GROUP 14 - Radiator.)
12-15 Nm 9-11 ft.lbs.
.\- . . . /
30 Nm 22 ft.lbs. 12-15 Nm 9-11 ft.lbs.
45 Nm 33 ft.lbs.
Exhaust manifold removal steps (front) 1. Drive belt (Generator) (Refer to GROUP 11 - Service 2. Adjustment assembly Generator Procedures.) 3. 4. 5. 6. Oil level gauge guide Heat protector Exhaust manifold (front) Gasket
Exhaust manifold removal steps (rear) 7. stud 8. Heat protector 9. Exhaust manifold (rear) 10. Gasket
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Exhaust Manifold <Non Turbo>

<Vehicles for California>
l
15-27
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Catalytic Converter Removal and Installation <Front or Rear> (Refer to P.1530, 31.)
Condenser Fan Motor Assembly Removal and Installation <Vehicles with Air Conditioning> (Refer to GROUP 14 - Radiator.) 60 Nm 43 ft.lbs.
<From 1994 model>
<Up to 1993 models>
60 Nm 43 ft.lbs.
, L
12-15 Nm
33 ft.lbs.
00000617
7 Exhaust manifold removal steps (front) 1. Drive belt (Generator) (Refer to GROUP 11 - Service Adjustment Procedures.) 2. Generator assembly
3. Oil level gauge guide 4. Heat protector
8~ Exhaust manifold removal steps (rear) 7. Stud 8. Heat protector

9. EGR pipe
10. Exhaust manifold (rear) 11. Gasket
5. Exhaust manifold (front) 6. Gasket
INSPECTION
/ LJ
Check the following points; replace the part if a problem is found. l Check for damage of cracking of any part.
TSB Revision
15-28
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Exhaust Manifold <Turbo>
EXHAUST MANIFOLD <Turbo>

l
\ d
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Turbocharger Assembly Removal and Installation (Refer to P.1520, 23.)
12-15 Nm 9-11 ft.lbs.
(
9-11 ft.lbs.
I I \ 1 ;ii
Exhaust manifold removal steps (front) 1. Heat protector bC+ 2. Exhaust manifold (front) .Bq ;. Eaha;;t manifold s t a y
Exhaust manifold removal steps (rear) 5. Heat protector ,A+ ;. FaFe;t manifold (rear)
r TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Exhaust Manifold <Turbo> INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS
15-29
I L
,A+ EXHAUST MANIFOLD INSTALLATION (REAR) Tighten the nuts in the following order. (1) Tighten five nuts (A) to 30 Nm (22 ftlbs.). (2) lIghten nuts (B) to 47-53 Nm (34-38 ftlbs.). (3) Back off nuts (B) until torque value of 10 Nm (7 ftlbs.) is achieved. (4) Tighten nuts (B) to 29-31 Nm (21-22 ftlbs.). NOTE 1. Fit the cone disc spring with the grooved side facing the nut. 2. Install the nut, cone disc spring and washer in the order shown in the illustration.
Z7lN0115
Exhaust manifold stay \
.B( EXHAUST MANIFOLD STAY INSTALLATION With the exhaust manifold stay resting on the exhaust manifold, fit it along with the exhaust manifold over the studs.
L
205FOOl:
I
E F 8 63
/
Q 0 Q
,Cd EXHAUST MANIFOLD INSTALLATION (FRONT) Tighten the nuts in the following order. (1) Tighten four nuts (C) to 30 Nm (22 ftlbs.). (2) Temporarily tighten the turbocharger to the exhaust manifold. (3) Tighten nut (D) to 30 Nm (22 ftlbs.). (4) Tighten nuts (E) and (F) to 47-53 Nm (34-38 ftlbs.). (5) Back off nuts (E) and (F) until torque value of 10 Nm (7 ftlbs.) is achieved. (6) Tighten nuts (E) and (F) to 29-31 Nm (21-22 ftlbs.). NOTE 1. Fit the cone disc spring with the grooved side facing the nut. 2. Install the nut, cone disc spring and washer in the order shown in the illustration.
INSPECTION
Check the following points; replace the part if a problem is found. l Check for damage of cracking of any part.
Cone disc spring
8 @P 27lNOll
TSB Revision
15-30
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - <Non rurt~o;
Exhaust Pipe Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter
EXHAUST PIPE, MAIN MUFFLER AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER j <Non Turbo>

<VEHICLE FOR FEDERAL, CALIFORNIA - Up to 1993 models>
50 Nm 36 ft.lbs.
27
anm
25lIl/
24
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
w
/-------
J
13 N m 9 ft.lbs.
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
..---- - < Nm 9 ft.lbs. A -----------?7
13 Nm
12
14
rw 35 Nm
96 ft Ihr
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
10
V
13 Nm 9 ft.1b.s.
ZO5FOO39
Removal steps 1. Main muffler and center exhaust pipe
installation bolts 2. Gasket 3. Rubber hanaers 4. Rubber hanker 5. Main muffle; 6. Mouldings Hanger brackets Catalytic converter and center exhaust pipe installation bolts Hanger bracket Protector 11. Rubber hangers 12. Center exhaust pipe 13. Gasket
i: 10:
14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. E: 2 24: 5:. 27:
Rubber hangers Hanger bracket Hanger brackets Rear floor heat protector Catalytic converter and front exhaust pipe installation bolts Catalytic converter Gasket Heated oxygen sensor connection Self-locking nuts Rubber hanger Front exhaust pipe Gasket Hanger bracket Front floor heat protector
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST

7 Nm 5 ft.lbs.
Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter - <Non Turbo>
15-31
<VEHICLE FOR CALIFORNIA - From 1994 models>

75 Nm 54 ft.lbs lo-13 Nm 7-9 ftlbs. / 45
1. \
34
m
-33 ft.lbs.
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs. 45 Nm 33 ftlbs.
Removal steps
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
A05F0069
:t: 4Ab
1. Main muffler and center exhaust pipe installation bolts 2. Gasket 3. Rubber hangers 4. Rubber hanger 5. Main muffler 6. Mouldings 7. Hanger brackets 8. Catalytic converter and center exhaust pipe installation bolts 9. Hanger bracket 10. Protector 11. Rubber hanger 12. Center exhaust pipe 13. Gasket 14. Rubber hangers 15. Hanger bracket 16. Hanger brackets 17. Rear floor heat protector 18. Catalytic converter and front exhaust pipe installation bolts 19. Catalytic converter
20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39.
Gasket Oxygen sensor protector Heated oxygen sensor connection Self-locking nuts Rubber hanger Front exhaust pipe Gasket Self-locking nuts Catalytic converter (front) Gasket Heated oxygen sensor connection Catalytic converter (rear) and exhaust fitting stay installation nut Exhaust fitting stay Heat protector A Heat protector B Exhaust manifold (rear) and catalytic converter (rear) installation nut Catalytic converter (rear) Gasket Hanger bracket Front floor heat protector
TSB Revision
15-32
Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter INTAKE AND EXHAUST - <Non T u r b o >

dAbRUBBER HANGER / MAIN MUFFLER REMOVAL Support with a transmission jack, etc.
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the mufflers and pipes for corrosion or damage. Check the rubber hangers for deterioration or damage. Check for gas leakage from mufflers and pipes.
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST
Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter - <Turbo>
15-33
EXHAUST PIPE, MAIN MUFFLER AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER <Turbo>

cup to 1993 models>
L
36 ftlbs. I I // /
J -Nm -.-------5 !i f.t. Ihe, - ..I. - - - - - - - - ---%hrn -/ .9/ e
13Nm 9 ft.lbs.
/I
13
\
13Nme gftJ=-.y&$J
4 ft.lbs.
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs. 13 Nm 9 ftlbs. Removal steps

cOSFOO72
1. Main muffler and center exhaust pipe installation bolts 2. Protector ,B( 3. Cable assembly connection 4. Rubber hangers :i: 5. Rubber hangers 6. Main muffler 4w 7. Gasket 8. Mouldings 9. Hanger brackets
10. Catalytic converter and center exhaust pipe installation nuts 11. Hanger bracket 12. Rubber hangers 13. Center exhaust pipe 14. Gasket 15. Rubber hangers 16. Hanger brackets 17. Hanger bracket 18. Rear floor heat protector
TSB Revision
15-34
INTAKE AND EXHAUST
EXhSUSt Pipe, Main Muffler and catalytic Converter - <Turbo> lo-13 Nm
DOSFOO72
,,
19. Catalytic converter and front exhaust pipe installation bolts 20. Catalytic converter 21. Gasket 22. Self-locking nuts 23. Rubber hanger 24. Front exhaust pipe 25. Gaskets 26. Self-locking nuts 27. Right bank warm up threelway catalytic converter
28. Gasket 29. Hanger bracket (B, .A4 30. Heated oxygen sensor connection 31. Heat protector D 32. EGR pipe connection 33. Gasket 34. Left bank warm up three-way catalytic converter 35. Heat protector E 36. Gasket 37. Front floor heat protector
TSB Revision
Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - <Turbo>
15-35
/L
cl 994 models> ,
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Air Conditioning Low-Pressure Hose and Liquid Pipe B Clamp Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 55 - Refrigerant Line.) l Brake Booster VacuumTube Clamp Removal and Installation (Referto GROUP 35 -Master Cylinder and Brake Booster.)
l l l
Clutch Booster Vacuum Pipe Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 21 - Clutch Control.) Drive Shaft (Left Side), Inner Shaft Assembly Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 26 - Drive Shaft.)
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
/ i;
-------
3 6 ft.lbs.
13
13 Nm m
4 n
\
5 Nm 4 ft.lbs.
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
A05F0012
Removal steps 1. Main muffler and center exhaust pipe - installation bolts 2. w-otector .B( 3. Cable assembly connection
4. Rubber hangers
10. Catalytic converter and center exhaust

pipe installation nuts 11. f-i&-rger bracket 12. Rubber hangers
:t: 4Ab
5. 6. 7. 8.
Rubber hangers Main muffler Gasket Mouldings
9. Hanger brackets
13. Center exhaust pipe 14. Gasket 15. Rubber hangers 16. Hanger brackets 17. Hanger bracket 18. Rear floor heat protector
TSB Revision
15-36

lo-13 Nm
12-15 Nm
6.5 ft.lbs.
50 Nm 36 ft.lbs.
11 __ - _ Nm I3 ft.lbs.
---------/--------h -%
,.-------
B05F0012
19. Catalytic converter and front exhaust pipe installation bolts 20. Catalytic converter 21. Gasket 22. Oxygen sensor protector 23. Heated oxygen sensor connection 24. Self-locking nuts 25. Rubber hanger 26. Front exhaust pipe 27. Gaskets 28. Self-locking nuts 29. Right bank warm up three-way catalytic converter
30. Gasket 31. Hanger bracket 4Bb .A+ 32. Heated oxygen sensor connection 33. Heat protector D 34. EGR pipe connection 35. Gasket 36. Left bank warm up three-way catalytic converter 37. Heat protector E 38. Gasket 39. Front floor heat protector
TSB Revision

<From 1995 models>
15-37
/ L
Preremoval and Post-installation Operation Air Conditioning Low-Pressure Hose and Liquid Pipe B Clamp Removal and installation (Refer to GROUP 55 - Refrigerant Line.) l Brake Booster VacuumTube Clamp Removal and Installation (Referto GROUP 35 -Master Cylinder and Brake Booster.)
l
l l
Clutch Booster Vacuum Pipe Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 21 - Clutch Control.) Drive Shaft (Left Side), Inner Shaft Assembly Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 26 - Drive Shaft.)
, L
--------
J
./-37 6
l rl .I,
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
7 A
&x.~/,
/jf
/,[
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
5 Nm 4 ft.lbs,
li Nm 9 ft.lbs.
A05F0071
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs. Removal steps
4Ab / :i:
1. Main muffler and center exhaust pipe installation bolts 2. 3. Rubber hangers
4. Main muffler
8. Catalytic converter and center exhaust pipe installation nuts 9. Hanger bracket 10. Rubber hangers 11. Center exhaust pipe 13. 12. Gasket Rubber hangers 14. Hanger brackets
I,
7. Hanger brackets 5. 6. Gasket Mouldings
TSB Revision
IS-38 INTAKE AND EXHAUST - <Turbo>

18 Nm 13 ft.lbs. \
7-9 ftlbs. -
lit-13 Nrn
g-11 ft.lbs. ,
40-47 ft.lbs.
13 -Nm a *Ike
/---
--I.--..-...- ---
BO5FOO71
15. Hanger bracket 16. Rear floor heat protector 17. Catalytic converter and front exhaust pipe installation bolts 18. Catalytic converter 19. Gasket 20. Oxygen sensor protector 21. Heated oxygen sensor connection 22. Self-locking nuts 23. Rubber hanger 24. Front exhaust pipe 25. Gaskets 26. Self-locking nuts
4Bb l
Z:
2
27. Right bank warm up three-way catalytic converter Gasket Hanger bracket ;y. Heated oxygen sensor connection Heat protector D EGR pipe connection :23. Gasket 34: Left bank warm up three-way catalytic converter Heat protector E Gasket 37: Front floor heat protector
1 TSB Revision
15-39

dAbRUBBER HANGER / MAIN MUFFLER REMOVAL Support with a transmission jack, etc.
+B, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR REMOVAL Disconnect the connector of the heated oxygen sensor, and install the special tool to the heated oxygen.

.A4 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR INSTALLATION Use the special tool to install the heated oxygen sensor.
.B( CABLE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Install with the paint mark facing up and adjust the adjusting nut to obtain the illustrated dimension.
ZOSFOO21
INSPECTION
l l l l
Check the mufflers and pipes for corrosion or damage. Check the rubber hangers for deterioration or damage. Check for gas leakage from mufflers and pipes. Check if the main muffler active exhaust system valve can be moved smoothly by hand.
i i
TSB Revision
15-40
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Active Exhaust Svstem
ACTIVE EXHAUST SYSTEM <Up to 1994 models>

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Rear Side Trim (LH) Removal and installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.)
7 Nm 5 ft.lbs.
Removal steps
1. Active exhaust system control module .B1 2. Cable connection (Actuator side) 3. Actuator
.A+ ;. :;,I: connection (Muffler side)
4. Protector

,A4 CABLE INSTALLATION (Muffler Side) Install with the paint mark facing up and adjust the adjusting nut to obtain the illustrated dimension.
,Bq CABLE INSTALLATION (Actuator Side) After adjusting the cable on the muffler side, adjust the adjusting nuts for an inner cable play of 0 to 1 mm (0 to .04 in.).
205FOO22
TSB Revision
INTAKE AND EXHAUST - Active Exhaust System INSPECTION
15-41
ACTIVE EXHAUST SWITCH CHECK (1) Remove switch garnish B from the knee protector.
(2) Operate the switch and check the continuity between the terminals.
.z ::::: 1 W 1 r$ 1 I ( i!irJ!l t--t --7-f ^ t-y!!>.; o Ll
205FOO51
Switch position 2
1
Terminal No. 3
n
6 O
l/4 II I L-J
TOUR SPORT
c
TSB Revision
NOTES
17-I
I ~
ENGINE AND. EMISSION CONTROL

CONTENTS CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 6
l
~ ~
m
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . .41

CATALYTIC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 71
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM* . . . . . . . . . . . 38 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Cruise Control Cables Check and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Cruise Control System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Individual Parts Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air Conditioning Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporative Emission Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid . . . . . . Fuel Tank Filler Tube Cap Inspection . . . . . . Fuel Tank Pressure Control Valve . . . . . . . . . Purge Control System inspection <Non Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purge Control Valve <Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purge Port Vacuum Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Air Flow Sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor and intake Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
65 57 65 64 65 65 58 60 64 63 65
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Check Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Harness and Component Layout . . . . . . . . . . 28 On-board Diagnostic Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Preliminary Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Troubleshooting Quick Reference Chart . . . . . 8
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injuryordeathtoservicepersonnel(frominadvertentfiringoftheairbag)ortothedriverandpassenger(fromrendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of anycomponent of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*).
17-2
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGR Solenoid <California - Non Turbo, Turbo - Up to 1995 model, Federal Non Turbo from 1996 model> . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGR Solenoid <Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGR System Inspection <California - Non Turbo, Turbo, Federal - Non Turbo from 1996 model> . . . EGR Temperature Sensor <California up to 1995 model, Federal Turbo 1994 and 1995 models> . . . . . . . . . . . EGR Valve <California - Non Turbo, Turbo, Federal - Non Turbo from 1996 model> . . EGR Valve Control Vacuum Check <California - Non Turbo, Turbo, Federal - Non Turbo from 1996 model> . . . Mixture Control (MFI) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Control Valve <Non Turbo> . . . . . . . 66
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . ; . . 3

ENGINE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . . . . 4
Accelerator Cable Check and Adjustment . . . 4 Accelerator Switch Check and Adjustment (1992 models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . _ 4
69 70
67 68 68 67 70 69
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . 3
Accelerator Cable and Accelerator Pedal . . . . 3
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Crankcase Ventilation System Inspection . . . 56 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve . . . . . . . 56
I LJ I
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 41
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 VACUUM HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Hoses Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 55 47 42
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Engine Control System
17-3
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SPECIFICATIONS
Items Accelerator cable play mm (in.)
I
Standard value Ml-lI
l-2 (.04-.08)
I
3-5 (.12-.20)
TROUBLESHOOTING
ACCELERATOR CABLE AND ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Symptom Throttle valve will not fully open or close ProbabUe cause Misadjusted accelerator cable Misadjusted automatic speed-control cable Broken return spring Throttle lever malfunction Accelerator pedal operation not smooth (over acceleration) Accelerator pedal wrongly tightened Misinstalled accelerator cable Accelerator cable requires lubrication Remedy Adjust Adjust Replace Replace Repair Repair Lubricate or replace
TSB Revision
17-4
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ACCELERATOR CABLE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
For models equipped with the cruise control system, refer to P.17-31.
(1) Check the accelerator cable for sharp bends. (2) Check to ensure that the throttle lever is in contact with the engine speed adjusting screw. (3) Check to ensure that the inner cable play is within the standard limits. Standard value: CM/T> l-2 mm (.04-.08 in.) <A/T> 3-5 mm (.12-.20 in.)
Intake manifold
(4) If the play is out of the standard limits, loosen the adjusting bolts, slide the plate so that the inner cable play will fall within the standard limits, and then retighten theadjusting bolts.
ACCELERATOR SWITCH CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT (1992 models)

Make sure that when the accelerator pedal is free, there is continuity between the terminals of the accelerator switch and that when the pedal is pressed until the indicated pedal stroke A reaches the standard value, .there is no continuity between the terminals of the switch. Standard value: Accelerator switch switching point 2-6 mm (.08-.24 in.) If stroke A is out of specification, adjust with adjusting bolt.
00002425
1 TSB Revision
-1
17-5
ENGINE CONTROL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION L
Post-installation
l l
Accelerator Cable Adiustment (Refer to P.li-4.1 Accelerator Switch Adjustment <AA> (Refer to f?17-4.)
5 Nm 4 ft.lbs. /
Operation
4 ft.1b.s. -
5 Nm
03K675
\ 10 Nm 7 ft.lbs.
5 15
07FOO22 00002428
Removal steps
1. Adjusting bolt 2. Throttle body side inner cable connection 3. Bushing 4. Accelerator cable 5. Accelerator pedal 6. Spring 7. Accelerator switch connector connection <AIT>* 8. Accelerator arm bracket 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. NOTE Split pin Accelerator arm Return spring Accelerator switch <A/T>* Accelerator arm stopper Bolt <A/T> Stopper
l : Equipped on 1992 models only
INSPECTION
l l l l l l
/ L
1 TSB Revision
Check the inner and outer cable for damage. Check the cable for smooth movement. Check the accelerator arm for bending. Check the return spring for deterioration. Check the connection of bushing to end metal fitting. Check the accelerator pedal switch for correct ON-OFF switching. <A/T>
17-6
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Cruise Control System
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE *l : Vehicles built up to April 1991. *2 : Vehicles built from May 1991~
TSB Revision
17-7
SPECIAL TOOLS
Up to 1993 models Checking of the diagnostic output
Checking of the diagnostic trouble code
check harness
TSB Revision
TROUBLESHOOTING
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Check the following points and repair defective points, if any, before troubleshooting. (1) Check that the vacuum pump assembly, link assembly, actuator and all cables and vacuum hoses are properly installed and that the cables and vacuum hoses are correctly routed. (2) Check that the link assembly and all cables move smoothly. (3) Check each of the cables for excessive play or tension.
TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK REFERENCE CHART

Cruise control system is canceled when cancellation not wanted. Or, the cruise control system cannot be set after an automatic cancellation.
Check the diagnostic output. (Refer to P17-24.) No ---w
Is the result of diagnostic output check O.K.?
Basedonthediagnostictroublecode,checkthecircuitandindividual parts. (Refer to P.17-25.) Refer to section on trouble symptoms, Cruise control cannot be set. (Refer to P.17-9.)
Can cruise control be set at t
/ Set cruise control and perform driving test. i Does the same problem occur again? No a temporary loose contact in the connector
Check the diagnostic output. (Refer to l?17-24.)
TSB Revision

Cruise control system can not be set. 1
17-9
Check input. (Refer to P.l7-26.)
NOTE This chart contains troubleshooting procedures to perform when a problem cannot be detected by onboard diagnostic.
Yes
4
Is the result of input check O.K.? No
Check vacuum pump assembly circuit. * (Refer to P.17-17.)
NOTE If the results of checks on the vacuum pump assembly circuit and actuator parts (refer to F!17-37.) indicate that they are good, replace the control unit. Result of check None of the codes appear even if input operations are performed. Probable cause Open circuit in control unit power supply circuit. Remedy Reference page
Replace main switch or P.17-12 repair harness.
Open circuit in control Replace control switch P.17-13 switch circuit or repair harness. Defective control unit Replace control unit. -
Even when SET switch is set to OFF, SET switch ON malfunc- Replace the control P.l7-13 code No. 21 does not go away. tion switch. Even when RESUME switch is set to RESUME switch ON Replace control switch OFF, code No. 22 does not go away. malfunction P.17-13 P.17-13
/LJ
Even when CANCEL switch is set to CANCEL switch ON Replace control switch. OFF, code No. 27 does not go away. malfunction Even when brake pedal is depressed, code No. 23 is not,displayed. Even when brake pedal is released, code No. 23 does not go away. Even when clutch pedal is released, code No. 26 does not go away. eMiT> Even when select lever is placed in any position other than N and P, code No. 26 does not go away. cA!T> Code No. 25 is not displayed even when vehicle speed is less than about 40 km/h (25 mph). Even when vehicle speed is increased to more than about 40 km/h (25 mph), code No. 25 does not go away. Code No. 24 is not displayed, either. Defective stop switch circuit
light Replace stop light switch P.17-19 or repair harness.
Defective clutch pedal Replace clutch pedal P.17-19 position switch circuit position switch or repair harness. Defective park/neutral position switch circuit Defective vehicle speed sensor circuit Replace park/neutral P.17-20 position switch or repair harness. Check and repair vehicle speed sensor circuit. P. 17-23
TSB Revision
1740

Probable cause Check chart No. No.4 Remedy Repair the vehicle speed sensor system, or replace the part.
Trouble symptom
l l
The set vehicle speed varies Malfunction of the vehicle greatly upward or downward. speed sensor circuit Hunting (repeated alternating the acceleration and deceleration) Malfunction Of occurs after setting is made. speedometer cable or speedometer drive gear <Up to 1993 models (Non turbo)>
Vacuum pump assembly No.5 circuit poor contact Malfunction of the vacuum pump assembly (including air leaks from negative pressure passage) Malfunction of the ECU -
Repair the actuator systern, or replace the part.
Replace the ECU. Repair the harness or replace the stop light switch. Repair the harness or relace the vacuum pump
The cruise control system is not Brake switch (for cruise No.6 canceled when the brake pedal is control) malfunction depressed. (short-circuit) drive circuit short-circuit
[It is canceled, however, when the xake pedal is depressed.)
brake pedal is depressed.)
SET switch.
disconnected wiring of control switch input circuit Vacuum pump assembly No.5 circuit poor contact Malfunction of the vacuurn pump assembly Malfunction of the ECU -
Repair the harness or replace the control switch. Repair the harness or replace the vacuum pump assembly.
Replace the ECU.
NOTE ECU: Electronic control unit
1 TSB Revision
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Cruise Control Svstem

Trouble symptom Probable cause Check chart No. Remedy Replace switch. the
17-11
Cannot accelerate or resume Open or shot-t circuit in No. 2 speed by using the RESUME RESUME switch circuit in switch. control switch Vacuum pump assembly No.5 circuit poor contact Malfunction of the vacuurn pump assembly (including air leaks from negative pressure passage) Malfunction of the ECU
IEven when CANCEL switch is 1to ON, cruise control is not can(:eled (Cruise control, however, is (zanceled when brake pedal is de-
control
Repair the harness or replace the vacuum pump assembly.
Replace the ECU. the control
set Open or short circuit in If the input check Replace CANCEL switch circuit in code No. 27 indicates switch control switch a malfunction. No.2 Malfunction of the ECU -
I>ressed.)
Replace the ECU Repair the vehicle speed sensor system, or replace the part.
LI
The cruise control system can be Malfunction of the ve- No.4 ! set while traveling at a vehicle hicle-speed sensor circuit !speed of less than 40 km/h (25 the mph), or there is no automatic can- Malfunction of speedometer cable or the cellation at that speed. speedometer drive gear <Up to 1993 models (Non turbo)> Malfunction of the ECU -
Replace the ECU. Repair the harness or replace the light bulb.
The cruise control indicator light of Damaged or discon- No.3 1the combination meter does not illu- netted bulb of indicator Iminate. (But cruise control system light Iis normal) Harness damaged or disconnected Malfunction of the ECU -
Replace the ECU. Repair the harness or replace the main switch.
(Zruise control ON indicator light Burned-out indicator light No.3 (joes not come on. (However, bulb (:ruise control is functional.) Open or short circuit in harness IMalfunction of control function by (3N/OFF switching of ELC 4 AIT ac(:elerator switch. (:Non-operation of damper clutch, ;!nd gear hold, etc.) Malfunction of circuit reto lated accelerator switch OFF function Malfunction of the ECU No. 11 No. 10
Repair the harness or replace the part.
Overdrive is not canceled during Malfunction of circuit reIixed speed driving <A/T> lated to overdrive cancellation, or malfunction No shift to overdrive during manual of ECU ,driving. <A/T>
Repair the harness or replace the part.
TSB Revision
17-12
CHECK CHART
1 inspection of control unit power supply circuit
f$psE
IGNITION SWITCH(IG1) I
ERUISE ONTKJL MAIN

SW ITCH
DHD GND VP 1 .----O._. GND a

14 6 m
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
The power is supplied through the ignition switch (IG,) and cruise control main switch to the control unit. 1. When the cruise control main switch is set to ON with the ignition switch at ON, the current from switch S1 flows through relay Ry, in the switch. Accordingly, the contact of relay Ryl is closed and the power is supplied to the control uhit. 2. When the main switch is released, it automatically returns to the neutral position. Since the current from switch S2 flows to relay Ryl, the contact of relay Ryl remains closed. 3. When the main switch is set to OFF, current to relay Ryl is interrupted. This opens the con1 TSB Revision
tact of relay Ryt to stop the power supply to the control unit. When the switch is released, it automatically returns to the neutral position, but relay Ryl stays in the OFF state. 4. When the ignition switch is set to OFF while relay Ryt in the main switch is ON, relay Ryl is forced to the OFF state just like when the main switch is set to OFF. Even if the ignition switch is set to ON again, relay Ryl stays in the OFF state until the main switch is set to ON. NOTE The numbers beside each connector correspond to those in the section (P.17-28) HARNESS AND COMPONENTS LAYOUT.
I
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Cruise Control @stem

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS ECU terminal voltage
Terminal No. 2 Signal name Control unit power supply Condition Main switch ON and neutral position thereafter Terminal voltage Battery positive voltage
Main switch OFF and neutral position 0 V thereafter 8,14 16 Control unit ground Control unit back up power supply At all times At all times ov Battery positive voltage
I *
Inspection of control switch circuit
IGNITION SWITCH(ACC) I
CLOCK SPRING CRUISE ~~~~~L
%i, to
KXJI-AK-Rt501-N 12~From
1 9 9 3 mooels 1 9 9 4 mode!5
TSB Revision
17-14

to OFF and when the vehicle speed is reduced to less than 40 km/h (25 mph), the vehicle will not resume cruising at the previously set speed even if the RESUME switch is set to ON. If the RESUME switch is kept at ON during cruise operation, the engine accelerates, and the vehicle starts cruising at the speed reached when the RESUME switch was set to OFF. (However, when the vehicle speed is raised to more than 145 km/h (90 mph)*, 200 km/h (124 mph)*2, the vehicle cruises at approximately 145 km/h (90 mph)*, 200 km/h (124 mph)*2. 3. CANCEL switch When the CANCEL switch is set to ON during cruise operation, the cancel signal is input to the control unit which internally interrupts the power supply to the vacuum pump assembly for cancellation of cruise operation. NOTE *l: Vehicles built up to April 1991. *2: Vehicles built from May 1991.
I
\ d
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION The control switch is a switch in which the SET, RESUME and CANCEL switches are integrated. Therefore, different resistance values are used for the individual switches to change the outputs (voltages) to the control unit. Current flows through fuse No. 4 of J/B and through the control switch to the control unit. 1. SET switch When the cruise control switch is ON, if the SET switch is set to ON while vehicle speed is within a range from about 40 to 145 km/h (25 to 90 mph)*, 40 to 200 km/h (25 to 124 mph)*2, the vehicle starts cruising at the speed. If the SET switch is kept at ON during cruise operation, the vehicle coasts, and starts cruising at the speed reached when the SET switch is set to OFF. 2. RESUME switch Even if cruise operation is canceled, the vehicle resumes cruising at the speed set before the cancellation. Both when the main switch is set TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Diagnosis No. 15 (Automatically canceled) ECU terminal voltage
I
Terminal No.
18
Signal name Control switch
Condition When all switches are OFF When SET switch is ON When RESUME switch is ON When CANCEL switch is ON ov
3v
Terminal voltage
6V Battery positive voltage
1TSB Revision
17-15
, L
Inspection of indicator light circuit

$t$ROL IGNI' WITI
l&m
f$#ATION
1Ii :1: Ij
0 & -: Trl i8 i
CRUISE ? CONTROL UNIT
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION 1. Cruise control ON (ASC ON) indicator light Located in the combination meter, it lights as soon as the main switch is set to ON. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS ECU terminal voltage
Terminal No. 23 Signal name Cruise control (CRUISE) indicator light
2. Cruise control (CRUISE) indicator light During cruise control operation, transistor Trl in the control unit is kept in the ON state to keep the indicator light on.
Condition When cruise control is active When cruise control is inactive ov
Terminal voltage
Battery positive voltage
1 TSB Revision
17-16
4
Inspection of vehicle speed sensor circuit
<Up to 1993 models (TURBO) and From 1994 models>

IGNITION
cup to 1993 models (NON-TURBO)>
5 El
CRUISE %FL
Kxs5-AK-R13
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION <Up to 1993 models (TURBO) and From 1994 models> The vehicle speed sensor, mounted in the transmission, delivers pulse signals proportional to the rotational speed of the transmission output gear (vehicle speed) to the control unit. (Four pulse signals generated per rotation of the output gear) Since the vehicle speed sensor is of the electronic type, the power is supplied through the ignition switch (IG,). TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Diagnosis No. 12 (Automatically canceled) ECU terminal voltage Terminal No. 19 Signal name Vehicle speed sensor
<Up to 1993 models (NON-TURBO)> The vehicle speed sensor is a reed switch type and is mounted in the speedometer. It sends pulse signals proportional to the rotational speed of the transmission output gear (vehicle speed) to the control unit. (Four pulse signals generated per rotation of the output gear)
Condition Slowly drive forward with SELECT lever at D or 1 st Speed
Terminal voltage 0 to 0.6 V ++ 2 V or more (Flashing)
TSB Revision
17-17
I ~
I 5
Inspection of vacuum pump assembly drive circuit
LJ
Lp s r- - - - - - - - - - *114
21 I
126
V
J.13
V
112
V
23
ULW-AI-RlsW-YI
NO :&O~,48P3d~~~b~~
, id
TSB Revision
17-18
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL -Cruise Control System
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION The input signal from the control switch causes transistor Trt to be ON. Accordingly, the cruise control relay is placed in the ON state to supply power to the vacuum pump assembly. The vacuum pump assembly consists of a diaphragm type negative pressure pump that is driven
by a DC motor, and two solenoid valves (control valve and relief valve) and is controlled by the control unit as shown in the following table. When the brake pedal is depressed during cruise control operation, the power supply to the vacuum pump assembly is cut off.
(ON: Current flows) (OFF: No current flows)
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Diagnosis No. 11 (Automatically canceled) ECU terminal voltage Terminal No.
12
13 r-
26
25
TSB Revision

6 Inspection of stop light switch circuit
17-19
FUSIBLE LINK@
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION When the brake pedal is depressed during vehicle speed control, the cruise control (NC) contact of the stop light switch is opened to interrupt the power supply to the vacuum pump assembly for cancellation of vehicle speed control. (Refer to P.17-17.) At the same time, the stoplight (NO) contact is closed. As a result, a cancel signal is input to the control unit which internally interrupts the vacuum pump assembly drive circuit. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS ECU terminal voltage Terminal No. 15 Signal name Stop light switch Condition When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is not depressed Terminal voltage Battery positive voltage 0V
K,G,S-AX-RlSOA-N
Inspection of clutch pedal position switch circuit <Mm
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION When the clutch pedal is depressed during vehicle speed control, the contact of the clutch pedal position switch is closed. As a result, a cancel signal is input to the control unit which internally interrupts the power supply to the vacuum pump assembly drive circuit for cancellation of vehicle speed control. TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS ECU terminal voltage Terminal No. 1 Terminal voltage Clutch pedal When clutch pedal 0 V position is depressed switch When clutch pedal Battery positive is not depressed voltage Signal name / Condition
ItXSN-AR-lllSOT1
2
1 TSB Revision
17-20
8
Inspection of park/neutral position switch circuit <A/T>
STARTER
KX35-AK-R1307
NOTE :I 1993 MODEL :2 1992 MODEL
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION The park/neutral position switch is interlocked with the starter switch. When the gear selector lever is placed in the N position during vehicle speed control, a cancel signal is input to the control unit TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS ECU terminal voltage
Terminal No. 1 Signal name Park/neutral position switch
which internally interrupts the power supply to the vacuum pump assembly drive circuit for cancellation of vehicle speed.
Condition Park/neutral position switch in N or P position Park/neutral position switch in II, Z, L or R position 0V
Terminal voltage
TSB Revision
17-21
I I
~
~
I g
Inspection of throttle position sensor circuit
CRUlSE CONTROL UNIT i

KXJS-AK-RIJOI-N4Y
NOTE *I: UP TO 1993 MODELS AND 1994, 1995 MODELS (NON TURBO - FEDERAL) l 2: 1994, 1995 MODELS (TURBO, NON TURBO CALIFORNIA) AND 1996 MODELS
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION The throttle position sensor (with built-in closed throttle position switch) is used for engine control as well as cruise control. The throttle position sensor sends data to the control TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Diagnosis No. 17 (Not automatically canceled) ECU terminal voltage Terminal No. 4 Signal name Closed throttle position switch
unit, regarding the opening of the accelerator. The closed throttle position switch inputs the data to the control unit on whether or not the accelerator pedal is operated.
Condition
When accelerator pedal .is depressed When accelerator pedal is not depressed ov
Terminal voltage
4.5-5.5 v 0.48 -0.72 V 4.0-5.5 v
Throttle position sensor
During idle When fully opened
TSB Revision
17-22
10
Inspection of circuit associated with accelerator pedal switch OFF function <A/T> (1992 models)
IGNITION 'CH (I G2)
J/E
-TV-c?) 101I CAL "2 : 3 T '3
? il,2
: 3
9-.
,3 I
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION The accelerator pedal switch is used to detect the operating state of the accelerator pedal. It is one of the sensors of the ELC-4A/T automatic transmission. Since the accelerator pedal is not operated TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS ECU terminal voltage
during vehicle speed control, the cruise control unit forces transistor Tr1 into the OFF state, creating the same state as when the accelerator pedal switch is placed in the OFF state.
Accelerator pedal switch
TSB Revision

11 / i Inspection of circuits associated with overdrive cancel <A/T>
17-23
l ~
ELC-GA/T FECY$R"L i ;j " 5 3
iKiT5
Xi:JD
r2:crom 1 9 9 5 mooe,s
tO
:993
lOOe,S
CRUISE CONTROL UN!;
%X35-A%-R1304-N
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION On a vehicle with cruise control, the OD switch ON signal is input through the cruise control unit to the ELC-4A/T control unit. When the vehicle speed control is in the overdrive mode, if the actual vehicle speed falls more than about 7 km/h (4 mph) below the set vehicle speed TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS ECU terminal voltage
Terminal No. 3 10
I I
or the RESUME switch is turned ON, the cruise control unit forces transistor Tr, into the OFF state. This cancels the overdrive mode because no OD switch ON signal is input to the ELC-4A/T control unit.
Signal name
Condition When ignition switch is ON When overdrive mode is active

I I
Terminal voltage Battery positive voltage Battery positive voltage

I
OD signal control power supply

ELC-4AiT control unit
When overdrive mode is inactive / OD switch ) When OD switch is ON 1 When OD switch is OFF
0V 1 Battery positive voltage I ov
TSB Revision
17-24
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Cruise Control Svstem ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC CHECKING
On-board diagnostic checking is performed when there has been an automatic cancellation, without cancel switch operation. NOTE Even when the ignition key is placed in the OFF position, all diagnostic trouble codes are stored and retained, until the battery cable is disconnected, to make sure that the problems encountered in the past can be checked. WHEN USING THE SCAN TOOL [MULTI-USE TESTER (MUT) <Up to 1993 models> OR MUT-II <All models>] (1) Connect the scan tool to the data-link connector to read out the diagnostic trouble codes When connecting the scan tool to a vehicle up to 1993 models, use the adapter harness supplied together. Caution Turn off the ignition switch beforehand whenever the scan tool is connected or disconnected. (2) Refer to the diagnostic chart and repair the defective point.
When using the MUT
<Up to 1993 models>
<From 1994 models>
Control switch RESUME switch: Oh
t 4
07FOO17
00002430
(3) Clear the diagnostic trouble codes by the following procedure. 1) Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 2) With the SET switch in the ON state, set the main switch to ON. In less than 1.0 second thereafter, set the RESUME switch to ON. 3) With the SET switch in the ON state again, keep the stop light switch in the ON state for more than 5 seconds. 4) Temporarily place the main switch in the OFF position to let the control unit escape from the input check mode. Then place the main switch in the ON position again. 5) Check the diagnostic trouble code to verify that a normal code is output.
TSB Revision

WHEN USING THE VOLTMETER <Up to 1993 models>
17-25
L.-f-
\.
2161'0246
(1) Connect an analog voltmeter across the diagnostic output terminal and ground terminal of the data link connector. (2) Place the ignition switch in the ON position. (3) Read the diagnostic trouble code on the basis of the deflection of the pointer of the voltmeter. (4) Refer to the diagnostic chart and repair the defective point. (5) Clear the diagnostic trouble codes in the same way as when a scan tool is used.
<From 1994 models>

Connect a voltmeter to the diagnostic output terminal and the ground terminal of the data-link connector using the special tool. Observe the voltmeter pointer deflection to read out the diagnostic trouble codes.
IA
DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY PATTERNS AND CODES
Code No. 11 i 12 n The same pattern repeatedly displayed Display patterns (output codes) (Use with voltmeter) Probable cause Vacuum pump assembly drive output system out of order Check chart No. 5
Vehicle speed signal system out of order
Control switch out of order (When SET or RESUME switch is kept in ON state continuously for more than 60 seconds) 16 Control unit out of order
17* n00002434
Throttle position sensor or closed throttle position switch out of order
TSB Revision
17-26
Normal code

NOTE 1. When two or more problems occur simultaneously, the three latest code numbers are displayed in the order of lowest code number first. 2. Even if the problem represented by the code number marked * occurs during cruise control operation, the cruise control mode will not be canceled. 3. When the system is normal, the diagnostic trouble code is displayed as described below. 1) If a scan tool is used: No abnormality will be displayed. 2) If a voltmeter is used: Continuous ON/OFF signals will be displayed at 0.5 second intervals. (Refer to the illustration at the left.) INPUT CHECKING Input checks should be made when the cruise control system cannot be set and when it is necessary to check (when a malfunction related to the cruise control system occurs) whether or not the input signals are normal. 1 NOTE 1. If inspection of on-board diagnostic is necessary, confirm diagnostic trouble code first and conduct input check. 2. Input check can be conducted by set operations. On-board diagnostic terminal outputs display patterns. 3. Display codes are displayed only if the circuit is normal according to the conditions shown in the table on the next page. Perform checks using the following procedures. (1) Connect a scan tool or a voltmeter to the data link connector. NOTE Connect a voltmeter using the same procedure as for inspection of diagnostic output. (2) Calling up a code 1) Set the ignition switch to ON. 2) With the SET switch in the ON state, set the main switch to ON. In less than 1.0 second thereafter, set the RESUME switch to ON. Then the input check results can be displayed.
Id
c----
T12A0104 -
07FOO17 00002431
(3) Reading a code 1) Perform the individual input operations according to the input check table and read the codes. NOTE 1. When two or more input operations are performed simultaneously, all the associated code numbers are output in ascending order. 2. If no code is output by performing any of the input operations, the control unit power supply circuit or SET and RESUME switches are probably defective. d Check the check tables 1 and 2 (P.17-12, 13). I
1 TSB Revision

INPUT CHECK TABLE
17-27
/ L
Code No. 21
Display patterns (output codes) (use with voltmeter) n
Input operation SET switch ON
Check results SET switch circuit normal
RESUME switch ON
RESUME switch normal
23
Stop light switch ON (brake pedal depressed) Vehicle speed more than approx. 40 km/h (25 mph) Vehicle speed less than approx. 40 km/h (25 mph)
Stop light switch circuit normal
24
Vehicle speed sensor circuit normal if code Nos. 24 and 25 are displayed
25
26
M/T Clutch pedal position Clutch pedal position switch switch ON (clutch pedal circuit normal depressed) A/T Park/neutral position Park/neutral position switch switch ON (SELECT le- circuit normal ver placed in N position) CANCEL switch circuit normal
27
CANCEL switch ON
28
TPS output voltage 1.5 V or more Throttle position sensor circuit (Accelerator pedal depressed normal more than half the way) Closed throttle position switch Closed throttle position switch OFF (Accelerator pedal de- circuit normal pressed)
29
00002432
2) Set main switch to OFF.
TSB Revision
17-28
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Cruise Control System I
HARNESS AND COMPONENT LAYOUT

ENGINE COMPARTMENT a n
01
\ \
16FO256
Engine front view
Engine rear view
36FOO60 16FO175
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND FLOOR CONSOLE
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
Jumper connector Vacuum pump Throttle position sensor Park/neutral position switch <A/T> Vehicle speed sensor Combination meter Combination meter Combination meter Main switch
NOTE 1 1992 model l 2 From 1993 model
36FOO17 00002433
TSB Revision

DASH PANEL
17-29
- ----------- ._.__ ..__.___ -.-Junction block
JUNCTION BLOCK
Front side Rear side
illf
!
--
,17
16
Z36FOO12 00002435
23
36FOOO2
36FOOO3
Clutch pedal position switch <M/T> Stop light switch Clock spring Accelerator pedal switch CA/T>* Cruise control relay Over drive switch CA/T> Cruise control unit Front wiring harness and junction block combination 18. Front wiring harness and junction block combination 19. Front wiring harness and junction block combination
10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
20. Adapter wiring harness and junction block combination 21. Body wiring harness (LH) and junction block combination 22. Body wiring harness (LH) and junction block combination 23. Body wiring harness (LH) and junction block combination
NOTE l : Equipped on 1992 models only.
TSB Revision
17-30
LOCATION OF CONTROL UNIT AND RELAY

L&264 216FO204
control unit
216FO396
GROUND POINT
A -, -+ f--J Ii c\ I 2=%iFc259 I-/ +--T
1 TSB Revision
17-31
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 1
CRUISE CONTROL CABLES CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

Cruise control actuator
Adjusting nut A
Cruise control assembly

Link B Link A
Adjusting nut B ,LA;
rulse control cable Adjusting nut C Throttle cable Accelerator cable --
Throttle,valve
Z07N0004
I \\\
(1) Set the air conditioning, lights and other switches to OFF for inspection at no load. (2) Let the engine warm up until it runs at idle. (3) Check that the idle speed is within the specified range. (4) Stop the engine and set the ignition switch to OFF. (5) Check that the accelerator cable, cruise control cable and throttle cable are routed without sharp bends. (6) Depress the accelerator pedal to check that the throttle lever moves smoothly from the fully-closed to fully-opened position. (7) Check the free travel state of the inner cables of the accelerator cable, cruise control cable and throttle cable. (8) If the inner cables are too loose or have no free travel at all, check using the following procedure. 1) Remove the link protector. 2) Loosen the adjusting and lock nuts of the throttle lever and intermediate links A, B and C to place the throttle lever and intermediate links A, B and C in the free state.
I TSB
Revision
~~~
17-32

3) Set the ignition switch to ON (do not start the engine). 4) Rotate intermediate link C in the direction shown until it is blocked by the stopper, turn down adjusting nut C in the direction that the free travel of the inner cable is reduced, and back off adjusting nut C the specified number of turns just before intermediate link C begins to move. Amount adjusting nut C is to be backed off: <M/T> About l/2 turn [inner cable free travel O-l mm (O-.04 in.)] CM> About two turns [inner cable free travel 2-3 mm (.08-.12 in.)] 5) Secure the accelerator cable with the lock nut. 6) Turn down adjusting nut B in the direction that the free travel of the inner cable of the throttle cable is reduced. At the position where the lever of intermediate link B is brought into contact with intermediate link C, back off adjusting nut B the specified number of turns. Amount adjusting nut B is to be backed off: About one turn [inner cable free travel l-2 mm (.04-.08 in.)] 7) Secure the throttle cable with the lock nut. 8) Secure the adjusting bolt of the intake manifold plenum. 9) Turn down adjusting nut A in the direction that the free travel of the inner cable of the cruise control cable is reduced. At the position where the lever of intermediate link A is brought into contact with intermediate link B, back off adjusting nut A the specified number of turns. Amount adjusting nut A is to be backed off: About one turn [inner cable free travel l-2 mm (.04-.08 in.)] 10) Secure the cruise control cable with the lock nut. 11) After adjustment, check to see that the end of the engine speed adjusting screw is in contact with the stopper of the throttle lever.
\ 1 i)l
Adjusting nut C
207N0019
Link B
Link B lever
Y07N0019
Adjusting nut A
Link B
207NOOlE
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM CHECK

CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH CHECK (1) Turn the ignition key to ON. (2) Check to be sure that the CRUfSE CONTROL ON indicator light within the combination meter illuminates when the main switch is switched ON.
/ TSB Revision

-8
17-33
Control switch \
CRUISE CONTROL SETTING CHECK (1) Switch ON the main switch. (2) Drive at the desired speed within the range of approximately 40-145 km/h (25-90 mph)*, 40-200 km/h (25-124 mph)*2. (3) Operate the control switch downward. (SET switch: ON) (4) Check to be sure that the speed is the desired constant speed when the switch is released, and also check to be sure that the CRUISE indicator light (within the combination meter) illuminates. NOTE (1) If the vehicle speed decreases to approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) below the set speed, because of climbing a hill for example, the cruise control will be cancelled. *I: Vehicles built up to April 1991 [:I *2: Vehicles built from May 1991 SPEED-INCREASE SElTING CHECK (1) Set to the desired speed. (2) Operate the control switch upward. (RESUME switch: ON) (3) Check to be sure that acceleration continues while the switch is held, and that when it is released the constant speed at the time when it was released becomes the driving speed. NOTE Even if, during acceleration, the vehicle speed reaches or exceeds the high limit, acceleration will continue, however, when the switch is released, the set speed (memo-rized speed) will become the high limit of the vehicle speed.
Control switch
SET ON
Control switch \
CANCEL: ON
VO7FOO17
SPEED REDUCTION SETTING CHECK (1) Set to the desired speed. (2) Operate the control switch downward. (SET switch: ON) (3) Check to be sure that deceleration continues while the switch is held, and that when it is released the constant speed at the time when it was released becomes the driving speed. NOTE When the vehicle speed reaches the low limit [approximately 40 km/h (25 mph)] during deceleration, the cruise control will be cancelled. CRUISE CONTROL CANCELLATION AND SET SPEED RESUME CHECK (1) Set.cruise control. (2) In the cruising condition of the cruise control mode, check that when any of the following operations are performed, the normal drive mode is restored and the vehicle coasts smoothly. 1) Move the control switch toward you. (CANCEL switch: ON) 2) Depress the brake pedal. 3) Depress the clutch pedal. CM/T> 4) Place the gear selector lever in the N range. <A/T>
TSB Revision
17-34

(3) With the vehicle at a speed of more than about 40 km/h (25 mph), check that when the control switch is moved upward (RESUME switch: ON), the vehicle resumes cruising at the speed held before cancellation of the cruise control mode. (4) In the cruise control mode, check that when the main switch is set to OFF, the normal drive mode is restored and the vehicle coasts smoothly.
XO7FOOl
INDIVIDUAL PARTS CHECK

CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH CHECK (1) Remove the main switch together with the switch garnish. (2) Remove the main switch from the switch garnish.
(3) Operate the main switch and check for continuitv across the individual terminals.
NOTE ILL: Illumination light

ZO7FOOlO
(4) Connect a positive lead from the battery to terminal (3) and a negative lead from the battery to terminal (4) and check that battery voltage is available across terminal (1) and the ground during the period the ON side of the main switch is pressed and during the period before the OFF side is pressed thereafter. Check that when the OFF side of the main switch is pressed thereafter, the battery voltage available across terminal (1) and the ground is reduced to 0 V.
00002433
TSB Revision
17-35
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH CHECK (1) Remove the air bag module using the following procedure. 1) Remove the negative terminal of the battery and wait for more than 60 seconds. Caution The capacitor in the SRS diagnosis unit retains enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a given period even after disconnection of the battery. If an operation is performed during that given period, unintended deployment of the air bag could result and cause serious injury. 2) Remove the air bag module. To remove the clock spring connector (squib connector) from the air bag module, force the lock outward and pry it with a plain screwdriver as shown at left so that no undue force will be exerted on the connector when it is removed. 3) The removed air bag module should be stored in a clean, dry, flat place with the pad side up.
r \.
RESUME: ON
t &,, CANCEL: ON 4
(2) Disconnect the connector of the control switch and operate the control switch to measure the resistance between the individual terminals. If the readings are as shown below, the control switch may be considered good. Switch operation
When switch is not operated
Resistance between
terminals No continuity Approx. 0 52 Approx. 820 Q Approx. 2,700 a
SET ON
07FOO12
When switch is operated toward you (CANCEL switch: ON) When switch is operated upward (RESUME switch: ON) When switch is operated downward 1 (SET switch: ON)
Z07N00,4 00002439
1 TSB Revision
17-36

STOP LIGHT SWITCH/BRAKE SWITCH CHECK (1) Disconnect the connector. (2) Check for continuity between the terminals of the switch.
Measurement conditions When brake pedal depressed. When brake pedal not derxessed. b--+--I I I For brake switch terminal 1 4 For stop light switch terminal 2 3 I I
00002440
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH CHECK <M/T> (1) Disconnect the connector. (2) Check that there is continuity between the terminals when the clutch pedal is depressed, and that there is no continuity when the pedal is released.
2141014;
--vLJ
1992 model From 1993 model
-m., N
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH (N POSITION) CHECK <A/T> (1) Disconnect the connector. (2) On 1992 models, check to be sure that there is continuity between connector terminals (8) and (9) when the shift lever is moved to the N range. (3) From 1993 models, check to be sure that there is continuity between connector terminal (8) and (7) when the shift lever is moved to the N range.
ZTFAOlE
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CHECK cup to 1993 models (Non Turbo)> Use circuit tester to check circuit repeats off/on between terminals when speedometer shaft turned several times.
Resistance 3-10 kQ Voltmeter

Battery
Z1aR0213 000024.1
<Up to 1993 models (Turbo) and From 1994 models> (1) Remove the vehicles speed sensor and connect as shown in the illustration, using a 3-10 kS2 resistance. (2) Use a voltmeter to check for voltage at terminals (2) and (3) when the pulse generator shaft is turning. (One revolution is four pulses.)
TSB Revision
17-37
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INSPECTION For inspection, refer to GROUP 13A - On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI Components. CLOSED THROlTLE POSITION SWITCH INSPECTION For inspection, refer to GROUP 13A - On-Vehicle Inspection of MFI Components.
07AOO51
VACUUM PUMP INSPECTION Inspection of Solenoid Valves (Control and Relief Valves) (1) Disconnect the connector of the vacuum pump assembly. (2) Measure the resistance values across terminals (1) and (2) and across terminals (1) and (3). Standard value: 50-60 Q (3) Check that when the battery voltage is applied across terminals (1) and (2) and across terminals (1) and (3) the operating sounds of the solenoid valves are heard. (4) If the solenoid valves are defective, replace the vacuum pump assembly. Inspection of Motor (1) Disconnect the connector of the vacuum pump assembly. (2) Check that when the battery voltage is applied across terminals (1) and (4), the motor operates.
207A0050 00002442
ACTUATOR INSPECTION (1) Remove the actuator. (2) Using a vacuum pump, apply a negative pressure to the actuator to check that the holder portion moves more than 35 mm (1.4 in.). Retain the negative pressure in that state to check that the holder portion does not change its position. (3) After the actuator has been mounted, check and adjust the cruise control cable. (Refer to P.17-31.)
207A005;
!-- 4 I
CRUISE CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION (1) Remove the cruise control relay. (2) Apply battery power to terminal (2) and connect terminal (4) to the ground. Check for continuity across the terminals.
When power
i.# 2
is supplied When no power is supplied
Across terminals l-3 Across terminals 1-3 Across terminals 2-4
Continuity No continuity Continuity
TSB Revision
17-38
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

Post-installation Operation 0 Cruise Control Cables Adjustment (Refer to R.17-31.)
8 11
07FOO31 00002444
Actuator removal steps 1. Link protector 2. Accelerator cable and link assembly connection 3. Cruise control cable and link assembly connection 4. Throttle cable and link assembly connection 5. Vacuum pump connector ,A4 6. $w.x;wiorose and vacuum pump 7. Link assembly and vacuum pump 8. Vacuum pump 9. Pump bracket
10. Link assembly 11. Link bracket 12. Accelerator cable and accelerator pedal connection 13. Accelerator cable 14. Throttle cable and throttle body connection 15. Throttle cable 16. Actuator and actuator bracket 17. Cruise control cable and actuator connection 18. Actuator 19. Actuator bracket
TSB Revision
17-39
1.6-2.2ft.lbs.
07FOO27
27
n6FO396
07FOO28 00002445
Control switches removal steps 20. Air bag module (Refer to GROUP 52B - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring.) 21. Air bag module bracket 22. Cruise control switch 23. Switch garnish 24. Main switch
Control unit and relay removal steps 25. Scuff plate (R.H.) 26. Cowl side trim (R.H.) 27. Cruise control unit 28. Cruise control relay
TSB Revision
17-40
07FOO20 00002446
Sensors and switches removal steps 29. Throttle position sensor 30. Accelerator pedal switch* 31. Stop light switch 32. Clutch pedal position switch <M/T> 33. Vehicle speed sensor <Non turbo>*2 (Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.) 34. Vehicle speed sensor*3 (Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.) 35. Park/neutral position switch <A/T>
!pTE Equipped on 1992 models only 1: Up to 1993 models : Up to 1993 models (Turbo) and From 1994 models

bAdVACUUM HOSE TO VACUUM PUMP CONNECTION Route the vacuum hose over the throttle cable and connect the hose to the vacuum pump so as to prevent the slackened hose from interfering with other parts.
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the inner and outer cable for damage. Check the cable for smooth movement. Check the link protector for damage.
INSPECTION OF INDIVIDUAL PARTS Refer to On-vehicle Service - individual Parts Inspection (P.17-34).
TSB Revision
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Emission Control Svstem
17-41
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM L

SPECIFICATIONS
Items Positive crankcase ventilation system Evaporative emission control system Evaporative emission cEVAP> canister Evaporative emission cEVAP> purge solenoid <Up to 1995 models> Evaporative emission cEVAP> purge solenoid <From 1996 models> EGR valve <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> Exhaust gas recirculation EGR temperature sensor system ; <California, Federal - Turbo from 1994 model> EGR solenoid <California - Non Turbo, Turbo> Catalytic converter Location <California - Non Turbo up to 1993 model, Federal - Non turbo UP to 1995 model> Location <Turbo, California - Non Turbo from 1994 model, Federal - Non Turbo from 1996 model> I Specifications Closed type with positive crankcase ventilation valve I 1 Evaporative emission canister storage type ( Charcoal type ON/OFF solenoid valve Duty cycle type Vacuum-activated diaphragm type Thermistor type Duty cycle type solenoid valve I 1 Monolith type Under floor Right bank, Left bank and underfloor
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS L
Items Evaporative emission purge solenoid coil resistance Q EGR temperature sensor resistance cup to 1995 model> kQ EGR solenoid coil resistance Q Specifications
36-44 [at 20% (68F)] 60-83 [at 50C (122F)]
11-14 [at 100C (212F)]

36-44 [at 20C (68F)]
ROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Engine will not start or hard to start / Probable cause Vacuum hose disconnected or damaged The EGR valve is not closed Malfunction of the evaporative emission purge solenoid Rough idle or engine stalls The EGR valve is not closed Vacuum hose disconnected or damaged Malfunction of the positive crankcase ventilation valve Malfunction of the purge control system Engine hesitates or poor acceleration Malfunction of the exhaust gas recirculation Positive crankcase ventilation line clogged Malfunction of the exhaust gas recirculation svstem
/ Remedy
Repair or replace Repair or replace Repair or replace Repair or replace Repair or replace Replace Check the system; if there is a problem, check its component parts Check the system; if there is a problem, check its component parts Check positive crankcase ventilation system Check the system; if there is a problem, check its component parts
/ L
Excessive oil consumption Poor fuel mileage
1 TSB Revision
17-42
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Emission Control System
VACUUM HOSES
VACUUM HOSES ROUTING
<Federal Non Turbo - 1992 models>
Evaoorativ!emkm purge solenoid
AThrottle body
L: Light blue R: R6d B: Black
Fuel pressure regulator
Vehicle front
7EM0131
<Federal Non Turbo - From 1993 up to 1995 models>
Evaporative emission purge solenoid
Evaporative emission canister
Fuel pressure regulator L: Light blue R: Red B: Black
Vehicle front
7EM0285 7EMO 344
1 TSB Revision
.ENGlNE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Emission Control System

<California Non Turbo - 1992 models>
17-43
EGR solenoid /
purge solenoid
Evaporative emission canister
G: Green Y: Yellow L: Light blue R: Red 8: Black
Fuel prkssure regulator Vehicle front
7EM0132
<California Non Turbo - From 1993 up to 1995 models>

L EGR solenoid
&$I.@
I LliLlIEvaporative v emission purge solenoid /
FGR \,al\m b-n. . . ..a.-
Evaporative emission canister Throttle body A ii
Fuel pressure regulator Vehicle front
7EM0286 7EM0 345
G: Green Y: Yellow L: Light blue R: Red B: Black
TSB Revision
17-U

Evaporative emission purge solenoid
EGR solenoid /
valve
Evaporative emission canister Throttle body
G: Green Y Yellow L: Light blue R: Red B: Black W: White
Vehicle front
7F Ul815
1 TSB Revision

Fuel pressure solenoid
EGR solenoid
Turbocharger waste gate solenoid / Turbocharger waste
k- Turbocharger Evapc xative emission purge solenoid
Bypass valve
/
Fuel pressure regulator G Green Y: Yellow L: Light blue R: Red B: Black W: White Purge control valve Vehicle front I \ T u r b o c h a r g e r w a s tTurbocharger e gate actuator
<Turbo - From 1993 up to 1995 models>
EGR valve
3cElII
h/
Turbocharger
EGR solenoid
u Throttle body Bypass valve Purge valve
G: Green Y: Yellow k L$; blue B: Black W: White
IfYJYgig;;p vIront
actuator Turbocharger
27EMOZSA 7EM0346
TSB Revision
IT-46
EVAP purge solenoid
C waste gate solenoid TC waste gate
Turbocharger
PUI I Ucil IJcJU~ r regulator Check valve G: Green Y: Yellow L: Light blue R: Red B: Black W: White Vehicle front actuator
1 TSB Revision
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Emission Control System VACUUM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
<Federal Non Turbo - 1992 models>
17-47
,lntake;z$\num Y
Throes
(,,;
,,,,,,,,,,
To combustion chamber *
From air cleaner
Fuel pressure regulator = EVAP purge solenoid (ON: open)
EVAP canister
B: Black L: Light blue R: Red
Z7EM0248
TSB Revision
17-48
<Federal Non Turbo - From 1993 up to 1995 models>

Intake manifold plenum
EVAP canister
B: Black L: Light blue R: Red

27EM0287
1 TSB Revision

<California Non Turbo - 1992 models>
Intake manifold plenum Throttle body
17-49
To combustion chamber
\ From air cleaner I
(Y
Fuel pressure t regulator -
P1<
- : . . : G G A
EGR solenoid (ON: close)
EGR valve
B: Black G: Green L: Light blue R: Red Y Yellow
EVAP canister
Z7EM0249
TSB Revision
17-50
<California Non Turbo - From 1993 up to 1995 models>

Intake,manifold plenum Throttle body \
EVAP purge solenoid (ON: open)
d
B B: Black G: Green L: Light blue R: Red Y: Yellow
EGR solenoid (ON: close)
EGR valve
EVAP canister
27EM0288
TSB Revision

take/manifold plenum Jp , -.-I-To combustion chamber Throttle body
17-51
.-a
1I
wm17zi/imii~~~/
From
noid e) Fuel pressure regulator
EGR valve G: Green Y: Yellow L: Light blue 6: Red B: Black W: White 7EM0377
TSB Revision
17-52
Throttle body
To combustion chamber a
Fuel pressure regulator TC waste gate solenoid (ON: open) Turbocharger bypass vah EGR valve Air cleaner
EVAP purge solenoid (ON: close)
; 12,ao
B
Air intake hose
(ON: close)
EGR solenoid
EVAP canister
Z7EMO250
TSB Revision

<Turbo - From 1993 up to 1995 models>
Intake manifold plenum
17-53
LJ
Throttle body ! To combustion chamber
: : : Fuel pressure regulator
tii? rn-I I e-n valve 1 W Turbocharger bypass valve I , Air cleaner
cd
EVAP purge solenoid (ON: close) Air intake hose
EVAP canister
Z7EM0251
TSB Revision
17-54

i , YTnifold plenum Throttle body
F1
m
II.
--IL
Check valve EVAP canister
13 3
I
Air cleaner
EGR valve TC waste gate actuator <Front bank> $4==+$
+J
7EM0378
TC waste gate actuator <Rear banlo
G: Green Y: Yellow L: Light blue R: Red B: Black W: White
TSB Revision
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Emission Control System INSPECTION
17-55
(1) Referring to the VACUUM HOSES ROUTING, confirm that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. (2) Check the hoses for irregularities (disconnection, looseness, etc.) and confirm that there is no breakage or damage.
INSTALLATION
(1) When connecting a hose, firmly press it onto the nipple. (2) Referring to the VACUUM HOSES ROUTING, connect the hoses correctly.
1 TSB Revision
17-56
POSITIVE CRANKCiSE VENTILATION SYSTEM

COMPONENT LOCATION
r-
Name
Symbol
Positive crankcase ventilation valve
7EM0340
CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM INSPECTION

(1) After disconnecting the ventilation hose from the positive crankcase ventilation valve, disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation valve from the rocker cover, and reconnect the positive crankcase ventilation valve to the ventilation hose. (2) Idle engine, put finger on the opening end of the positive crankcase ventilation valve, and check that the negative pressure of the intake manifold is felt with finger. NOTE At this time, the plunger in the positive crankcase ventilation valve moves back and forth. (3) If negative pressure is not felt, clean or replace the positive crankcase ventilation valve.
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION VALVE

INSPECTION (1) Remove the positive crankcase ventilation valve. (2) Insert a thin stick into the positive crankcase ventilation valve from the threaded side to check that the plunger moves. (3) If the plunger does not move, the positive crankcase ventilation valve is clogged. Clean it or replace. INSTALLATION Install the positive crankcase ventilation valve and tighten to specified torque. Specified tightening torque: 10 Nm (7.2 ft.lbs.)
Positive crankcase ventilation valve
27EM0109
1 TSB Revision
17-57
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

COMPONENT LOCATION
Name Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister Evaporative emission (EVAP) purge solenoid Symbol C A Name Purge control valve <Turbo> Symbol B
TSB Revision
17-58
PURGE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION

<Non Turbo - 1992 models>
body
EVAP purge solenoid EVAP canister Barometric pressure sensor Intake air temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine control module Volume air flow sensor
.
MFI
T T
<Non Turbo - From 1993 up to 1995 models>
Z7EM5289
Barometric pressure sensor intake air temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Volume air flow sensor Engine control module
/
Z7Eb.40290 7EM0354
1 TSB Revision

/<Non Turbo - From 1996 models>
Throttle body
17-59
Evaporative emission Engine control module Volume air flow sensor
EvaDorative emission purge solenoid
!+a. d
MFI relay h s s 3 1 1
Barometric pressure sensor
7EM0379
(1) Disconnect the vacuum hose (red stripes) from the throttle
body and connect it to a hand vacuum pump. nected. (3) Under the engine conditions shown below, check by appiying vacuum from a hand vacuum pump. When engine is cold - engine coolant temperature: 60C (140F) or less
/- i :
27EM0140]
(2) Plug the nipple from which the vacuum hose is discon-
I I
Engineoperating condition
Idling 3,000 mm
Applying vacuum
375 mmHg (14.8 in.Hg)
Result Vacuum is maintained
When engine is hot - engine coolant temperature: 70C (158F) or higher

Engine operating condition Idling Applying vacuum 3 7 5 mmHg (14.8 in.Hg) Result Vacuum is maintained I
3,000 rpm within Try applying three minutes after vacuum starting engine 3,000 rpm after 375 mmHg three minutes have (14.8 in.Hg) elapsed after starting engine
Vacuum leaks
Vacuum will be maintained momentarily, after which it will leak*.
, L
NOTE * I The vacuum will leak continuously if the altitude is 2,200 m (7,200 ft.) or higher, or the intake air temperature is 50C (122F) or higher.
/ TSB Revision
17-W
PURGE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION <Turbo - 1992 models>

EVAP canister
d I
Barometric pressure sensor Intake air temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Volume air flow sensor
~
(1) Disconnect the purge air hose from the air intake hose, and plug the air intake hose. Then, connect the hand vacuum pump to the purge air hose. (2) Under the engine conditions shown below, check by applying vacuum from a hand vacuum pump. When engine is cold - engine coolant temperature: 60C (140F) or less
I \ Lj ~
I I
Engine operating
condition Idling 3.000 mm
Applying vacuum 375 mmHg

(14.8 in.Hg)
Result
Vacuum is maintained
When engine is hot - engine coolant temperature: 70% (158F) or higher

Engine operating Applying vacuum condition , / Vacuum is maintained / 375 mmHg Idling
(14.8 in.Hg)
3,000 rpm within Try applying vat- Vacuum leaks three minutes af- uum ter starting engine
, ,
3,000 rpm after 375 mmHg

minutes three have elapsed after starting engine (14.8 in.Hg)
NOTE *: The vacuum will leak continuously if the altitude is 2,200 m (7,200 ft.) or higher, or the intake air temperature is 50C (122F) or higher.
J
TSB Revision 1
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL - Emission Control System PURGE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION <Turbo - From 1993 up to 1995 models>
rb.rr,, .,^I.,^
17-61
WAD
valve , Purge control
+; 0 LXLer
Barometric pressure sensor y$yenoid
V P
A
I I/I%
t t t
Intake air temperature sensor 1 Engine coolant temperature sensor Volume air flow sensor
Enginecontrolmodule
ZFXM0405
(1) Disconnect the vacuum hos e (red stripes) from the throttle body and connect it to a hana vacuum pump. (2) Plug the nipple from which the vacuum hose is disconnected. (3) Under the engine conditions shown below, check by applying vacuum from a hand vacuum pump.
When engine is cold - engine coolant temperature: 60C (140F) or less

_---L \ Z7EM0140 1
Engine operating condition 3,000 rpm
Applying vacuum 375 mmHg (14.8 in.Hg)
Result Vacuum is maintained
When engine is hot - engine coolant temperature: 70C (158F) or higher
Engine operating condition
Applying vacuum 1Vacuum leaks
3,000 mm within 1 Try applying three minutes af- vacuum ter starting engine 3,000 rpm after 375 mmHg minutes (14.8 in.Hg) three have elapsed after starting engine
NOTE *: The vacuum will leakcontinuously if the altitude is 2,200 m (7,200 ft.) or higher, or the intake air temperature is 50C (122F) or higher.
1 TSB Revision
17-62

(4) Connect the vacuum hose (red stripes) removed in (1) above to P nipple of the throttle body as before. (5) Disconnect the purge air hose from the air intake hose, and plug the air intake hose. Then, connect the hand vacuum pump to the purge air hose. (6) Under the engine conditions shown below, check by applying vacuum from a hand vacuum pump. When engine is hot - engine coolant temperature: 70C (158F) or higher Applying vacuum 375 mmHg (14.8 in.Hg.) Engine operating condition Idling Sudden racing Result Vacuum is maintained Vacuum leaks
LJ
PURGE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION <Turbo - From 1996 models>
To air intake hose Purge c valve
vaporative emission
Engine control module Volume air flow sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor Intake air temperature sensor Barometric pressure sensor Throttle body
(1) Disconnect the vacuum hose (red stripes) from the throttle body and connect it to a hand vacuum pump. (2) Plug the nipple from which the vacuum hose is disconnected. (3) Under the engine conditions shown below, check by applying vacuum from a hand vacuum pump.
TSB Revision
17-63
When engine is cold - engine coolant temperature: 60C (140F) or less Engine operating condition 3,000 rpm Applying vacuum 375 mmHg (14.8 in.Hg) Result Vacuum is maintained
When engine is hot - engine coolant temperature: 70C (158F) or higher Engine operating Applying vacuum condition 3,000 rpm within Try applying three minutes af- vacuum ter starting engine Result Vacuum leaks
(4) Connect the vacuum hose (red stripes) removed in (1) above to P nipple of the throttle body as before. (5) Disconnect the purge air hose from the air intake hose, and plug the air intake hose. Then, connect the hand vacuum pump to the purge air hose. (6) Apply vacuum in hot engine [coolant temperature: 70C (158F) or higher], and check to see that vacuum leak is caused when performing a sudden racing.
e hose --_-_ - L/---I--_
_C-
PURGE PORT VACUUM CHECK

Check Condition Engine coolant temperature: 80-95C (176-205F) (1) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the throttle body purge hose nipple and connect a hand vacuum pump to the nipple.
Vacuum f. Engine speed (rpm) )

ZlFU
(2) Start the engine and check to see that, after raising the engine speed by racing the engine. <Non Turbo up to 1995 models, Turbo - From 1993 up to 1995 models> Vacuum raises proportionately with the rise in engine speed. NOTE If there is a problem with the change in vacuum, it is possible that the throttle body purge port may be clogged and require cleaning.
TSB Revision
17-64

<Non Turbo - From 1996 models, Turbo - 1992 and from 1996 models> Vacuum is kept constant regardless of the increased engine speed. NOTE If there is no vacuum created, it is possible that the throttle body purge port may be clogged and require cleaning.
Vacuum
Engine speed (rpm)
3
Z3FU26i
PURGE CONTROL VALVE <Turbo>

INSPECTION (1) Remove the purge control valve. of the purge control valve. mmHg in.Hg.) airtightness. (4) Blow in air lightly from the canister side nipple and check conditions as follows.
Valve Jll
(5) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the positive pressure nipple of the purge control valve. mmHg in.Hg.) airtightness.
<Non Turbo> - - EvaDorative
emission 1
_--
\ 2=q-=y-Ey )!/ Fe-T-- ,,I-? IGL
INSPECTION NOTE When disconnecting the vacuum hose, make an identification mark on it so that it can be reconnected to the original position. (1) Disconnect the vacuum hoses (non stripe and red stripe hose) from the solenoid. (2) Disconnect the harness connector from solenoid. the red-striped vacuum hose was connected.
TSB Revision
17-65
(4) Apply a vacuum and check for air tightness when voltage applied directly to the evaporative emission purge solenoid and when the voltage is discontinued.
Battery voltage Non-Turbo, When applied Turbo - From 1993 models When discontinued
I
Result Vacuum leaks Vacuum is maintained

I
ZECl510
Turbo - 1992 1 When applied models When discontinued
1I Vacuum is maintained Vacuum leaks
(5) Measure the resistance between the terminals of the solenoid. Standard value: 36-44 Q [at 20C (68F)]
26EM137
VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR, ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
To inspect these parts, refer to GROUP 13A - MFI System Components.
AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH

To inspect the air conditioning switch, refer to GROUP 55 - Air Conditioning Switch.
FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE

To inspect the fuel tank pressure control valve, refer to GROUP 13F - Fuel Tank.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER

To inspect the evaporative emission canister, refer to GROUP 13F - Fuel Line and Vapor Line.
FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE CAP INSPECTION

Check the gasket of the fuel tank filler tube cap, and the fuel tank fillercap itself, for damage or deformation; replace the cap if necessary.
1 TSB Revision
17-66
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM

COMPONENT LOCATION
Name EGR valve <California - Non Turbo, Turbo, Federal - Non Turbo from 1996 model> EGR temperature sensor <California - up to 1995, Federal -Turbo 1994 and 1995 model> Symbol S C Name EGR solenoid <California - Non Turbo, Turbo, Federal - Non Turbo from 1996 model> Symbol A
TSB Revision
17-67
EGR SYSTEM INSPECTION <California - Non Turbo, Turbo, Federal - Non Turbo from 1996 model>
(1) Disconnect the vacuum hose (green stripe) from the EGR valve, and connect a hand vacuum pump through the three-way terminal. (2) Regarding cold condition [coolant temperature: 20C (68F) or less] and warm condition [coolant temperature: 70C (158F) or more] of the engine, check the following two points: <Cold condition of engine> Engine operation Race the engine by rapidly
press in the accelerator pedal. Normal state
The negative pressure does not

vary. (Atmospheric pressure)
<Warm condition of engine>

Engine operation Normal state Race the engine by rapidly The negative pressure rises to press in the accelerator pedal. 100 mmHg (3.9 in.Hg) or more.
(3) Disconnect the three-way terminal, and connect the hand vacuum pump to the EGR valve. (4) When a negative pressure of 230 mmHg (9.1 in.Hg.) is applied during idling, check that the engine stops or idles unstably.
vacuum --
EGR VALVE CONTROL VACUUM CHECK <California - Non Turbo, Turbo, Federal - Non Turbo from 1996 model>
Check Condition Engine coolant temperature: 80-95C (176-203F) (1) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the throttle body EGR vacuum nipple and connect a hand vacuum pump to the nipple.
4 Vacuum
(2) Start the engine and check to see that, after raising the engine speed by racing the engine. cup to 1995 models> Vacuum raises proportionately with the rise in engine speed.
/ /
2 1 FU446
TSB Revision
17-68
Vacuum

<From 1996 models> Vacuum remains fairly constant. NOTE If there is a problem with the change in vacuum, it is possible that the throttle body port may be clogged and require cleaning.
Engine speed (rpm)
3FU262
EGR VALVE <California - Non Turbo, Turbo, Federal - Non Turbo from 1996 models>
INSPECTION (1) Remove the EGR valve and check it for sticking, deposit of carbon, etc. If such condition exists, clean with adequate solvent to ensure tight valve seat contact. (2) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the EGR valve. (3) Apply a vacuum of 500 mmHg (19.8 in.Hg.) and check air-tightness. (4) Blow in air from one passage of the EGR to check condition as follows. Applying vacuum 45 mmHg (1.8 in.Hg.) or less 230 mmHg (9.1 in.Hg.) or more Result Air does not blow through Air blows through
INSTALLATION Install a new gasket and EGR valve, tighten bolts to specified torque. Specified tightening torque: 22 Nm (16 ft.lbs.)
1i
EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR <California up to 1995 models, Federal - Turbo 1994 and 1995 model>
INSPECTION (1) Remove the EGR temperature sensor. (2) Place the EGR temperature sensor in water, and then measure the resistance value between terminals 1 and 2 while increasing the waters temperature. Replace the EGR temperature sensor if there is a significant deviation from the standard value. Temperature C (OF) 50 (122)
1 100 (212)
1 @ 0 L,
27EMOOd
M// 888888
Resistance k~
60-83 / 11-14
INSTALLATION Install the EGR temperature sensor tighten to specified torque. Specified tightening torque: 11 Nm (8 ft.lbs.)
I d
TSB Revision

Plug
17-69
VACUUM CONTROL VALVE <Non Turbo>

INSPECTION (1) Disconnect the vacuum hose (white stripe) from the vacuum control valve and connect the hand vacuum pump to the vacuum control valve. (2) Put the blind plug to the removed vacuum hose. (3) Start the engine and run at idle. (4) Check the vacuum condition. Engine condition Idling Normal vacuum condition Approx. 170 mmHg (6.7 in.Hg)
EGR SOLENOID <California - Non Turbo, Turbo - Up to 1995 models, Federal - Non Turbo From 1996 models>
INSPECTION NOTE When disconnecting the vacuum hose, make an identification mark on it so that it can be reconnected to the original position. (1) cup to 1995 models> Disconnect the vacuum hose (yellow and green stripe) from the solenoid. <From 1996 models> Disconnect the vacuum hose (yellow and white stripe) from the solenoid. (2) Disconnect the harness connector. (3) <Up to 1995 models> Connect a hand vacuum pump to the nipple to which the green-striped vacuum hose was connected. <From 1996 models> Connect a hand vacuum pump to the nipple to which the white-striped vacuum hose was connected. (4) Apply a vacuum and check for air-tightness when voltage applied directly to the EGR solenoid and when the voltage is discontinued. Battery voltage When applied When discontinued
26EM0167
/ V/R
\ \;! /IV
41 / ;?FUIOll
I/
//
Result Vacuum is maintained Vacuum leaks
1 TSB Revision
17-70

(5) Measure the resistance between the terminals of the solenoid. Standard value: 36-44 !2 [at 20C (68F)]
ZGEMO166
EGR SOLENOID <Turbo>

INSPECTION NOTE When disconnecting the vacuum hose, place an identification mark on it for proper re-connection. (1) Disconnect the vacuum hose (yellow stripe, green stripe, white stripe) from the solenoid valve. (2) Disconnect the harness connector.
(3) Connect a hand vacuum pump to the nipple to which the white-striped vacuum hose was connected. (4) Check air tightness by applying a vacuum with voltage applied directly from the battery to the EGR control solenoid valve and without applying voltage. Battery voltage
Not applied
, I
B Nipple condition Open Open Closed
Normal condition Vacuum maintained Vacuum leaks Vacuum maintained
6EMQ435
Applied
(5) Measure the resistance between the solenoid valve terminals. Standard value: 36-44 S2 [at 20C (68F)]
MIXTURE CONTROL (MFI) SYSTEM

l l
To inspect the mixture control (MFI) system, refer to GROUP 13A - On-vehicle Service. For detailed information concerning the illumination pattern of the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp and other aspects of the on-board diagnostic, refer to GROUP 13A - On-board Diagnostic.
1 TSB Revision
17-71
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Converter.
INSPECTION
Inspect for damage, cracking or deterioration. Replace if faulty. Caution 1. Operation of any type, including idling, should be avoided if engine misfiring occurs. Under this condition the exhaust system will operate at abnormally high temperature, which may cause damage to the catalyst or underbody parts of the vehicle. 2. Alteration or deterioration of ignition or fuel system, or any type of operating condition which results in engine misfiring must be corrected to avoid overheating the catalytic converters. 3. Proper maintenance and tune up according to manufacturers specifications should be made to correct the conditions as soon as possible.
1 TSB Revision
NOTES
21-I
CLUTCH
CONTENTS
CLUTCH CONTROL ....................... 10 SPECIFICATIONS .......................... 2
CLUTCH COVER AND DISC ............... 20 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ............. 14 CLUTCH PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER ............ 16 CLUTCH VACUUM LINE, VACUUM TANK <AWD> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.......... 18
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Lubricants.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . 2
-I ~
TROUBLESHOOTING
.......................
id
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .....................
Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Check Valve Operation Check cAWD> . . . . . . . . 7 Clutch Booster Operating Check cAWD> . . . . . . 6 Clutch Pedal Check and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 5
21-2 SPECIFICATIONS
CLUTCH - Specifications
225 x 150 (8.86 x 5.91)
250 x 160 (9.84 x 6.30)
Clutch booster
Boosting ratio [Clutch pedal depressing force]
1.7 [at 110 N (24 Ibs.)]
TSB Revision
CLUTCH - Specifications / Troubleshooting LUBRICANTS

Items Contact surface of release bearilng and fulcrum of clutch release fork Inner surface of clutch release bearing Inner surface of clutch disc spline Contact portion of release fork to release cylinder push rod Clutch fluid Inner surface of clutch release cylinder and outer circumference of piston and cup Inner surface of clutch master cylinder and outer circumference of piston assembly Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4 Specified lubricants
21-3
MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent
SEALANT
I I
Items 1 Thread part fitting
1Specified sealant 13M ATD Part No. 8663 or equivalent
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Clutch slips Probable cause Clutch,pedal play too small Excessive wear of clutch disc facing Hardened clutch disc facing or oil on facing Clutch release fork not operating smoothly Settled or damaged diaphragm spring Clogged hydraulic system Poorly adjusted clutch booster push rod cAWD> Gear shifting failure Clutch pedal play too large Large clutch disc distortion or runout Worn clutch cover assembly Worn or corroded clutch disc splines Separated clutch disc facing Worn clutch release bearing Damaged pressure plate or flywheel Leaky or clogged hydraulic system or air trapped in hydraulic system Poorly adjusted clutch booster push rod cAWD> Remedy Adjust Replace Replace Repair or replace Replace Repair or replace Adjust Adjust Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Repair or replace Adjust
21-4
CLUTCH - Troubleshooting
I LJ
Excessive wear of clutch disc facin
1 TSB Revision
CLUTCH - On-vehicle Service

Clutch pedal height
21-5
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
CLUTCH PEDAL CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
1. Take off the carpet at under the clutch pedal. Measure the clutch pedal height (from the face of the pedal pad to the firewall). Standard value: cFWD> 177-182 mm (6.97-7.17 in.) <AWD> 183-188 mm (7.20-7.40 in.)
ZO8YO41
<FWD>
d, 0 Vehicles wiiho& - A Vehicles^ with auto-cruise auto-cruise concontrol system trol system Lock nut Lock nut
If the clutch pedal height is not within the standard value range, adjust as follows: For vehicles without auto-cruise control system, turn and adjust the bolt so that the pedal height is the standard value, and then secure by tightening the lock nut to the specified torque. Vehicles with auto-cruise control system, disconnect the clutch pedal position switch connector and turn the switch for standard clutch pedal height. Tighten the lock nut _ to the specified torque. Specified torque: 13 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) NOTE When the pedal height is lower than the standard value, loosen the bolt or clutch pedal position switch, and then turn the push rod to make the adjustment. After making the adjustment, tighten the bolt or clutch pedal position switch to reach the pedal stopper, and then lock with the lock nut.
Clutch pedal position switch

ZO8FOOlC
2. Measure the clutch pedal stroke. Standard value: 160 mm (6.29 in.) or more If the clutch pedal stroke deviates from the standard value, turn the push rod to adjust the stroke.
Lock nut
ZO8FOO54
00002166
Z14UOO52
3.
Return the clutch pedal gradually from its full-stroke position to measure amount of the return made by the pedal until, the interlock switch makes an operating sound. Standard value: lo-15 mm (.3g4-Sgl in.) If the amount of pedal return deviates from the standard value, adjust it by loosening the lock nut and turning the interlock switch.
i i
208FOO55
TSB Revision
21-6
Clutch pedal clevis pin play and clutch pedal free play

4. Measure the clutch pedal clevis pin play. Clutch pedal clevis pin play Standard value: l-3 mm (.04-.12 in.) If the clutch pedal clevis pin play is outside the standard value, adjust with the push rod. Caution Do not push in the master cylinder push rod at this time. 5. Measure pedal play. In the case of AWD vehicles, depress the pedal 2 or 3 times to eliminate booster negative pressure with the engine stopped and then push the pedal with a finger to measure the play. Clutch pedal play Standard value: <FWD> 6-13 mm (.24-51 in.) cAWD> 12-20 mm (.4g-.7g in.)
ZO8YOO3
Distance between the clutch pedal and the firewall when the clutch is disengaged -\
Measure the clearance to the toe board (or pedal stopper) when the clutch disengages. In the case of AWD vehicles, measure with the engine running. Clearance to toe board when clutch disengages: Standard value: 55 mm (2.2 in.) or more 7. If the play and/or clearance is out of specification, bleed the hydraulic system or check the master cylinder, release cylinder or clutch proper. 8. Return the carpet to the original position. 6.
Z08N0010
Good
No good
CLUTCH BOOSTER OPERATING CHECK <AWD>

For simple checking of clutch booster operation, carry out the following tests. (1) Run the engine for one or two minutes, and then stop it. (2) Step on the clutch pedal several times with normal pressure. If the pedal depressed fully the first time but gradually becomes higher when depressed succeeding times, the booster is operating properly. If the pedal height remains unchanged, the booster is faulty. (3) With the engine stopped, step on the clutch pedal several times with the same foot pressure to make sure that the pedal height will not change. Then step on the clutch pedal and start the engine. If the pedal moves downward slightly, the booster is in good condition. If there is no change, the booster is faulty.
Zl4UOO61 When engine is stopped
00002188
Whin engine is started
z14uoo59
00002189
z14u0060
TSB Revision
21-7
(4) With the engine running, step on the clutch pedal and then stop the engine. Hold the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. If the pedal height does not change, the booster is in good condition. If the pedal rises, the booster is faulty. If the above three tests are okay, the booster performance can be determined as good. If one of the above three tests is not okay at last, the check valve, vacuum hose, or booster will be faulty.
CHECK VALVE OPERATION CHECK <AWD>

When checking the check valve, keep the check valve fit in the vacuum hose. 1. Remove the vacuum hose. Caution The check valve is press-fit inside the vacuum hose and do not remove the check valve from the vacuum hose.
1 Clutch booster side
2.
Check the operation of the check valve by using a vacuum
pump.
manifold side
208FOO31
Caution If the check valve is defective, replace it as an assembly unit together with the vacuum hose.
BLEEDING
Whenever the clutch tube, the clutch hose, and/or the clutch master cylinder have been removed, or if the clutch pedal is spongy, bleed the system. Specified fluid: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4 Caution Use the specified fluid. Avoid using a mixture of the specified fluid and other fluid.
r- TSB Revision
21-8 CLUTCH PEDAL
CLUTCH - Clutch Pedal

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation 0 Steering Column Assembly Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 37A - Steering Wheel and Shaft.)
Adjustment Clutch Pedal Adjustment (Refer to F?21-5.) I
30 Nm
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs. _ -A 12 Nm
18
208FOO47 00002218
Removal steps 1. Brake booster connection l Brake pedal adjustment (Refer to GROUP 35 - Service Adjustment Procedures.) 2. Clutch master cylinder connection 3. Clevis pin 4. Clevis pin 5. Return spring 6. Pedal support bracket ;. ;Ie;i; pin 9: Turn over spring 10. Rod B 11. Bush
12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
Clutch pedal shaft Clutch pedal Bushing Spacer Clutch pedal pad Brake pedal shaft Brake pedal Stop light switch Bolt <Vehicles without auto-cruise control system> 21. Clutch pedal positiorxwitch <Vehicles with auto-cruise control system> 22. Interlock syitch
TSB Revision
CLUTCH - Clutch Pedal

13 Nm
,23
1 *,c
,,>
I @ _ 42 rd
208FOO25
00002219
Removal steps
23. Brake booster (Refer to GROUP 35- Brake Booster.) 24. Clutch master cylinder connection 25. Vacuum hose connection 26. Pedal support bracket 27. Clevis pin 28. Clevis pin 29. Clevis pin 30. Yoke 31. Clutch pedal shaft 32. Clutch pedal
33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43.
Bushing Spacer Clutch pedal pad Bolt Lever assembly Bushing Spacer Support bracket Clutch booster Clutch pedal position switch Interlock switch
INSPECTION
Ohmmeter n
l l l
2 9 I
El &t I I
l
Check the Check the Check the <FWD> Check the
pedal shaft and bushing for wear. clutch pedal for bend or torsion. turn over spring for damage or deterioration. pedal pad for damage or wear.
INTERLOCK SWITCH CHECK

(1) Disconnect the connector. (2) Check to be sure that there is continuity between connector terminals 1 and 2.
.I TSB Revision
21-10 CLUTCH CONTROL
CLUTCH - Clutch Control

l
Pre-removal Operation Draining of the Clutch Fluid 0 Clutch Pedal Adjustment (Refer to P.21-5.)
1I
<AWDa
15 Nm
4 1 ftlhr
15 Nm
11 ft.lbs.
?5 Nm
11 ft.lbs.
.-11
-v
ZOBFOO46
00002214
208FOO44
<AWD> Clutch master cylinder removal steps 1. Brake booster (Refer to GROUP 35 - Brake Booster.) 2. Clevis pin &WD> 3. Clutch master cylinder bF+ l Piston adjustment to push rod clearance cAWD> 4. Sealer Clutch tube removal steps 1. Brake booster (Refer to GROUP 35- Brake Booster.) .E+ 5. Air hose A <AWD> 6. Ai4i;;ner cover, air intake hose .D+ 7. ,4;4;ner cover, air intake hose A .C( g. Faren p i p e cAWD> 10. Battery seat, washer tank 11. Steering column assembly (Refer to GROUP 37A - Steering Wheel and Shaft.) (A, .A+ 12. Clutch tube
TSB Revision
21-11
<FWD>
10
15 Nm 11 ft.lbs. \ 17 19 13lt.lbs. Nm I
push rod
zo8wos17
14
19 Nm 13 ft.lbs.
15 Nm 11 ft.lbs.
15 Nm 11 ft.lbs.
ZOEFOO45
00002215
13
Clutch release cylinder removal steps .E+ 5. Air hose A cAWD> 6. Air&e,aner cover, air intake hose ,D( 7. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose A <AWD> .C+ ;. Farey p i p e <AWD> 10: Battery seat, washer tank +B, ,B+ 13. Clutch release cylinder Clutch hose removal steps .E+ 5. Air hose A cAWD> 6. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose <FWD> .D+ 7. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose A <AWD>
,Cd ;. Fare p i p e <AWD> 10: Battery seat, washer tank +C, ,A4 14. Clutch hose Clutch tube A, tube B, tube C, damper removal steps .E+ 5. Air hose A cAWD> 6. Air cleaner, air intake hose <FWD> .D+ 7. ,4;4;~ cover, air intake hose A .Cq i. Fare7 p i p e cAWD> 10: Battery seat, washer tank dD, ,A+ 15. Clutch tube A &AID> +D, ,A+ 16. Clutch tube B eAWD> 17. Clutch tube C cFWD> 18. Clutch damper <FWD>

+A,CLUTCH TUBE REMOVAL (CLUTCH HOSE SIDE) While holding the clutch hose side nut, loosen the clutch tube flare nut. +B, CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER REMOVAL On AWD-vehicles, use a flat type short box wrench to remove the clutch release cylinder mounting bolts.
TSB Revision
21-12
208FOO35
+C, CLUTCH HOSE REMOVAL To disconnect clutch hose from the clutch tube, proceed as follows: (1) Secure the nut on the clutch hose and loosen the flare nut on the clutch tube. (2) Remove the clip from the clutch hose to remove clutch hose from bracket. AD,CLUTCH TUBE A <FWD> (CLUTCH HOSE SIDE) / CLUTCH TUBE B <AWD> (CLUTCH HOSE SIDE) REMOVAL ,While holding the clutch hose side nut, loosen the clutch tube flare nut.

bAdCLUTCH TUBE B <AWD> / CLUTCH TUBE A <FWD> / CLUTCH HOSE / CLUTCH TUBE INSTALLATION Be careful that the clutch hose does not become twisted. ,Bd CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER INSTALLATION On AWD-vehicles, use a flat type short box wrench to tighten the clutch release cylinder mounting bolts. .Cd VACUUM PIPE <AWD> INSTALLATION If the vacuum pipe has a stepped part, connect the vacuum hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the illustration.
Air intake hose C
,D(AIR CLEANER COVER, AIR INTAKE HOSE A INSTALLATION Align slots indicated by arrows in air intake hose A with A markings on air intake hoses B and C; then, insert hoses B and C all the way into air intake hose A. Insert air intake hoses B and C all the way up to the roots on the turbocharger end.
&:_:.,
Air hose A Air
.E( AIR HOSE A INSTALLATION Connect the air hoses ensuring that alignment marks are aligned with projections. Insert air hoses B and C into pipe all the way to its step. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the intercooler itself.
WO5FOO28
TSB Revision
21-13
.Fq CLEARANCE BETWEEN CLUTCH BOOSTER PUSH ROD AND PISTON ADJUSTMENTcAWD> Adjust the clearance (A) between the clutch booster push rod and piston as follows:
(1) Measure the dimension (B) between the master cylinder end face and piston. NOTE To obtain (B), first take measurement with a square placed on the master cylinder end face. Then, subtract the thickness of the square to arrive at (B).
(2) Obtain the dimension (C) between the clutch booster mounting surface on the master cylinder and the end face.
z14u0065
00002195
00002196
(3) Measure the dimension (D) between the master cylinder mounting surface on clutch booster and the push rod end. NOTE To obtain (D), first take measurement with a square placed on the clutch booster. Then, subtract the thickness of the square to arrive at (D). (4) Using the measured values obtained in (1) through (3), obtain the clearance (A) between the clutch booster push rod and piston. Standard value: [A (A = B - C - D)] 0.21-0.46 mm (.0082-.0181 in.) [Atmospheric pressure] [When the clutch booster negative pressure of 66.7 kPa (9.7 psi) is applied, the clearance (A) becomes 0.1 to 0.3 mm (-0039 to .0118 in.).]
TSB Revision
21-14
C L U T C H - Clutch Control / Clutch Master Cylinder

(5) If the clearance is not within the standard value range, adjust by changing the push rod length by turning the adjustable end of the push rod. Caution Insufficient clearance may cause the slippage or seizure of the clutch.
INSPECTION
l
Check the clutch hose or tube for cracks or clogging.
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER

DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
<FWD>
t:: ES.
--5iR/g : + 7 g--P Ii a n
13 Nm 9.0 ft.lbs.
ZOXFOO39
&=4 Q- 8 i,< EF
i,c-
Master cylinder kit 3 Mu

ZOBFOO40
<AWD>
6
10
208FOO38 00002216
1-A
7
7 P
208FOO41
1 Brake fluid: Conformina to DOT3 or DOT4

Disassembly steps
1. Piston stop bolt &WDr 2. Gasket cFWD> 3. Piston stop ring cFWD> :i: 4. Snap ring cAWD> ,A( 5. Push rod cFWD> 6. Boot <FWD>
4W
7. Piston assembly 8. Reservoir cap 9. Reservoir band 10. Reservoir 11. Master cylinder body
1 TSB Revision
C L U T C H - Clutch Master Cvlinder
21-15
+A,PlSTON STOP RING 4WD> / SNAP RING <AWD> DISASSEMBLY Remove the piston stop ring or snap ring, while depressing the piston.
.214LO193
+B, PISTON ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Caution 1. Do not damage the master cylinder body and piston assembly. 2. Do not disassemble piston assembly.
REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINT

,A( PUSH ROD INSTALLATION NOTE Set the push rod length to the dimension shown in the illustration before installation. This can facilitate the clutch pedal adjustment.
II
122 mm (4.80 in.)
-I
0820004 I
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the inside cylinder body for rust or scars. Check the piston cup for wear or deformation. Check the clutch tube connection part for clogging.
TSB Revision
21-16
CLUTCH - Clutch Release Cylinder
CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER

3
6C LO003
ATFM0576
Lubricant: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4
d ~
Lubricant: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4 Disassembly steps 1. Valve plate 2. Spring 3. Push rod 4. Boots 4Ab .A+ 5. Piston and cup 6. Conical smina 7. 8. Bleeder plug 9. Release cylinder
DlSASSEMbLY SERVICE POINT

dA, PISTON AND CUP DISASSEMBLY (1) Remove the corrosion from the piston-removal port of the release cylinder. (2) Remove the piston from the release cylinder using compressed air. Caution 1 s Cover with rags to prevent the piston from popping out. 2. Apply compressed air slowly to prevent brake fluid from splashing. 1 TSB Revision I
(d
C L U T C H - Clutch Release Cylinder REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINT
21-17
.A(FLUlD APPLICATION TO PISTON AND CUP Apply specified brake fluid to the release cylinder inside and outer surface of the piston and piston cup and push the piston cup assembly in the cylinder. Specified brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4
ADCLOOb
INSPECTION
\ *:3
q>ca
(1) Check the inner surface of the release cylinder for scratches or irregular wear. (2) Replace if the piston cup outer circumference is scratched or shows signs of fatigue, or if there is excessive wear of the lip where indicated in the figure.
260 0003
TSB Revision
21-18
C L U T C H - Clutch Vacuum Line, Vacuum Tank <AWD>
CLUTCH VACUUM LINE, VACUUM TANK <AWD>

Sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8663 or equivalent
\
214LO216
43-51 ft.lbs.
208FOO21
0000324g
,A+ 1. Vacuum hose A .A+ 2. Vacuum hose B 4A, .A+ 3. Vacuum hose C with check valve 4. Fitting Vacuum pipe A removal steps .Cd 5. Air hose A .B+ 6. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose A 7. Vacuum pipe A Vacuum pipe B, vacuum hose D removal steps 8. Brake booster (Refer to GROUP 35 - Brake Booster.) 9. Vacuum pipe B ,A( 10. Vacuum hose D
Vacuum tank assembly, vacuum hose E, vacuum pipe C removal steps 11. Right member (Refer to GROUP 32 - Right Member, Left Member and Crossmember.) 12. Vacuum tank assembly ,A4 13. Vacuum hose E 14. Vacuum pipe C
1 TSB Revision
C L U T C H - Clutch Vacuum Line, Vacuum Tank <AWD> REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

dAbVACUUM HOSE C WITH CHECK VALVE REMOVAL
21-19
NOTE Since the check valve is fit to the vacuum hose C, replace the check valve as an assembly unit together with the vacuum hose C if the check valve is defective.
ZO9FO13: 3

,AdVACUUM HOSE E / VACUUM HOSE D / VACUUM HOSE C WITH CHECK VALVE / VACUUM HOSE B / VACUUM HOSE A INSTALLATION If a hose is connected to a pipe with a stepped part, insert the hose up to the stepped part. If it is connected to a pipe without any stepped part, insert the hose until the insertion amount reaches the standard value. Standard value: 20-25 mm (.8-1.0 in.) .BdAIR CLEANER COVER, AIR INTAKE HOSE A INSTALLATION Align slots indicated by arrows in air intake hose A with A markings on air intake hoses B and C; then, insert hoses B and C all the way into air intake hose A. Insert air intake hoses B and C all the way up to the roots on the turbocharger end.
203FOOO8
YO3FOOO7
00002200
T
c A i r
Air intake hose A
i n t a k e hos.o~FOo,,
Air hose A
,C+AIR HOSE A INSTALLATION Connect the air hoses ensuring that alignment marks are aligned with projections. Insert air hoses B and C into pipe all the way to its step. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the intercooler itself.
WO5FOO2i 3
INSPECTION
l l
Check the hose and pipes for cracks, bend, deformation and clogging. Check the vacuum tank for deformation or crack.
1 TSB Revision
21-20
CLUTCH - Clutch Cover and Disc
CLUTCH COVER AND DISC

l
Pre-removal Operation Transaxle Assembly Removal (Refer to GROUP 22 - Transaxle Assembly.)
Post-installation Operation Transaxle Assembly Installation (Refer to GROUP 22 - Transaxle Assembly.)
30-42 Nm
\ \
1 .
15-21 Nm ft.lbs.
4Ab .C+ 4Ab ,C+

3. Return clip
.Bq 4. Clutch release bearing ,A4 5. Release fork 6. Fulcrum 7. Release fork boot
TSB Revision
C L U T C H - Clutch Cover and Disc
21-21
6CLO16
Lubricant: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent
7CLOOO8
Lubricant: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent
6CLO33
Lubricant: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or eauivalent
ATFM0857

dAbCLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY / CLUTCH DISC REMOVAL Diagonally loosen bolts which attach clutch cover to flywheel. Back off bolts in succession, one or two turns at a time, to avoid bending cover flange. Caution DO NOT clean clutch disc or release bearing with cleaning solvent. 1 TSB Revision
21-22
CLUTCH - Clutch Cover and Disc INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS

.A4 GREASE APPLICATION TO RELEASE FORK (1) Apply a coating of the specified grease to the point of contact with the fulcrum and the point of contact with the release bearing. Specified grease: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent Caution When installing the clutch, apply grease to each part, but be careful not to apply excessive grease; excessive grease will cause clutch slippage and shudder. (2) Apply a coating of the specified grease to the end of the release cylinders push rod and to the push rod hole in the release fork. Specified grease: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent
Y6CLCGZ
\d\s
.B+ GREASE APPLICATION TO CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING (FWD) Pack the inner surface of the clutch release bearing and the groove with the specified grease. Specified grease: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent
YGCLOi 6
L)
J
,CqGREASE APPLICATION TO CLUTCH DISC / CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY (1) Apply a coating of the specified grease to the clutch disc spline, and then use a brush to rub it in. Specified grease: MITSUBISHI genuine grease Part No. 0101011 or equivalent (2) Using the universal clutch disc aligner, position the clutch disc to the flywheel. (3) install the clutch cover assembly. Tighten the bolts a little at a time, working in a diagonal sequence, finally tightening them to the specified torque.
Clutch disc
Clutch cove1 assembly
BCLOZ
TSB Revision
C L U T C H - Clutch Cover and Disc INSPECTION
21-23
Z6cLOO3
CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY CHECK Check the diaphragm spring end for wear and uneven l height. Replace if wear is evident or height difference exceeds l the limit. Limit: 0.5 mm (.020 in.) Check the pressure plate surface for wear, cracks and l color change. Check the strap plate rivets for looseness and replace l the clutch cover assembly if loose. CLUTCH DISC CHECK Check the facing for loose rivets, uneven contact, deterioration due to seizure, adhesion of oil or grease and replace the clutch disc if defective. Measure the rivet sink and replace the clutch disc if it is out of specification. Limit: 0.3 mm (.012 in.) Check for torsion spring play and damage and if defective, replace the clutch disc. Combine the clutch disc with the input shaft and check sliding condition and check for play in the rotating direction. If it does not slide smoothly, check after cleaning and reassembling. If the play is excessive, replace the clutch disc and/or the input shaft.
Sleeve Bearing
CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING CHECK Caution 1. The release bearing is packed with grease, so dont use cleaning oil, etc. to clean it. 2. Do not disassemble the bearing and sleeve of the clutch release bearing. If disassembled, replace. (AWD only) Check for bearing heat damage, other damage, abnormal l noise and/or improper rotation. Also check whether or not there is wear at the point of contact with the diaphragm spring. If there is abnormal wear at the point of contact with l the release fork, replace the bearing. RELEASE FORK CHECK If there is abnormal wear at the point of contact with the bearing, replace the release fork.
1 TSB Revision
NOTES
22-1
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
CONTENTS MANUAL TRANSAXLE cAWD> . . . . .13
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . -3. ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Drive Shaft Oil Seals Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Transfer Oil Level Check . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Transfer Oil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Transfer Oil Seal Replacemeni: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Transmission Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Transmission Oil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> . . . . . .2

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Drive Shaft Oil Seals Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Speedometer Cable Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Transmission Oil Level Check .. r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Transmission Oil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY .................. 8 SPECIAL TOOLS ........................... SPECIFICATIONS .......................... 3

2
SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY .................. 16 ~j SPECIAL TOOLS ........................... SPECIFICATIONS .......................... 14 13
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Sealants and Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ................... TRANSAXLE CONTROL* ................... TROUBLESHOOTING .......................
9 6 3
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ............... 19, 23 TRANSAXLE CONTROL* ................... 17 TRANSFER ASSEMBLY . . . .,I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injuryordeathtoservicepersonnel(frominadvertentfiringoftheairbag)ortothedriverandpassenger(fromrendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SK-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 528 -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*).
22-2
MANUAL TRANSAXLE cFWD> - Specifications
MANUAL TRANSAXLE cFWD>

SPECIFICATIONS
LUBRICANTS
Items Manual transmission oil Drive shaft oil seal lip Specified lubricant Quantity dm3 (qts)
Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 2.0 (2.1) 75W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4 As required
SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES

Items Transaxle case - clutch housing mating surfaces Transaxle case - rear cover mating surfaces Differential drive gear bolts Bearing retainer screw (flush head screw) Reverse brake cone mounting screw bolts Air breather 3M ATD part No. 8001 or equivalent -7 3M STUD Locking part No. 4170 or equivalent Specrfred -7.. sealants and adhesives Mitsubishi genuine part No. 997740 or equivalent
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Special Tools / Troubleshooting
22-3
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Tool number and name ME)991113 Steering linkage puller Supersession MB991113-01 Application 0 Disconnection of the coupling- of the knuckle and lower arm ball joint l Disconnection of the coupling of the knuckle and tie-rod end ball joint
kg98325 Ditierential o i l seal installer
MD998325-01
Installation of differential oil seal
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Vibration, noise Probable cause a. Loose or damaged transaxle and engine mounts b. Inadequate shaft end play c. Worn of damaged gears d. Use of inadequate grade of oil e. Low oil level f. Inadequate engine idle speed Oil leakage Hard shift a. Broken or damaged, oil seal or O-ring a. Faulty control cable b. Poor contact or wear of synchronizer ring and gear cone c. Weakened synchronizer spring d. Use of inadequate grade of oil Jumps out of gear a. Worn gear shift fork or broken poppet spring b. Synchronizer hub to sleeve spline clearance too large Remedy a. Tighten or replace mounts b. Correct end play c. Replace gears d. Replace with specified oil e. Replenish f. Adjust idle speed a. Replace oil seal or O-ring a. Replace control cable b. Correct or replace c. Replace synchronizer spring d. Replace with specified oil a. Replace shift fork or poppet spring b. Replace synchronizer hub and Sleeve
1 TSB Revision
22-4
MANUAL TRANSAXLE cFWD> - On-vehicle Service
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL CHECK
TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT

SPEEDOMETER CABLE REPLACEMENT <Up to 1993 models>

1. Correctly insert the adapter into the instrument panel, and fasten the new speedometer cable.
209FOO83
2.
Install the grommet so that, as shown in the illustration, the cable attachment part and the projecting part are horizontal. Caution The cable arrangement should be made so that the radius of cable bends is 150 mm (5.9 in.) or more.
3. At the transaxle end of the soeedometer cable, the key joint should be inserted into the transaxle, and the nut should be securely tightened. Caution If the cable is not correctly and securely connected, it may cause incorrect indication by the speedometer, or abnormal noise. Be sure to connect it correctly.
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE cFWD> - On-vehicle Service

R.H. side
22-5
DRIVE SHAFT OIL SEALS REPLACEMENT

(1) Disconnect the drive shaft from the transaxle. (Refer to GROUP 26 - Drive Shaft.) (2) Using a flat-tip (-) screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
(3) Using the special tool, tap the drive shaft oil seal into the transaxle. The drive shaft oil seal must be installed in the direction shown. (4) Apply a coating of the transmission oil to the lip of the oil seal. Transmission oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4
MD998325
160024
I) Transaxle side Oil seal lip
2200037 00001754
1 TSB Revision
22-6
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Transaxle Control
TRANSAXLE CONTROL
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Front Console Assembly Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.)
4.0 Nm 2.9 ft.lbs.
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
5 Transaxle control cable assembly removal steps 1. Air cleaner, Air intake hose .A( 2. Transaxle control cable assembly connection (Shift lever assembly side) 3. Retainer 4. Transaxle control cable assembly
ZO9FOO79
Shift lever assembly removal steps 1. Air cleaner, Air intake hose .A+ 2. Transaxle control cable assembly connection (Shift lever assembly side) 5. Shift lever assembly
1 TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Transaxle Control INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS
22-7
,A+ TRANSAXLE CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY CONNECTION (SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY SIDE) (1) Move the transaxle shift lever to the neutral position. NOTE The select lever will be set to the neutral position when the transaxle shift lever is moved to the neutral position.
Neutral position Shift lever Adjuster
(2) With the shift lever on the passenger compartment side in the neutral position, turn adjuster on select cable so that select cable end is positioned as shown with reference to lever B of shift lever. (3) Install the select cable so that the flange side of the plastic bushing at the end of select cable is on the end face side of lever B.
I
z/fya;h9,e 22: Shift lever
Lever B ooooi53o
mLhi,; ,ever
(4) Turn adjuster on shift cable so that shift cable end is positioned as shown with reference to shift lever on the passenger compartment side. (5) Install the shift cable so that the flange side of the plastic bushing at the end of shift cable is on the split pin side.
(6) Connect the shift cable, then turn adjuster on shift cable so that dimension A equals dimension B. (7) Move the shift lever to each position and check that the shifting is smooth.
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the transaxle control cable assembly for function and for damage. Check the boot for damage. Check each bushing for wear or abrasion, sticking, impeded action, and damage.
1 TSB Revision
22-8
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Shift Lever Assembly
SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY

16
24 Nm 17 ft.lbs. \
24 17
23 -
09FOO17 00001531
09FOO66
Disassembly steps 1. Nut 2. Spring washer 3. Plain washer 4. Shift lever 5. Bushing 6. Plain washer 7. Wave washer 8. Nut 9. Spring washer 10. Plain washer 11. Return spring 12. Bushing
13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
Pipe Bolt Lever (A) Bushing Bushing Snap ring Washer Lever(B) Bushing Cable bracket Bracket assembly
1 TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <FWD> - Transaxle Assembly
22-9
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Post-installation Operation l Front Under Cover Installation (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.) l Transmission Oil Supplying (Refer to P.22-4.) l Engine Coolant Filling (Refer to GROUP 14- Service Adjustment Procedures.) l Shift Lever at Each Position Checking Operation l Meters and Gauges Checking Operation
(Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.)
19 Nm
209FO112
09FOO99 00001532
Removal steps
1. Side under cover
2. Battery 3. Battery seat, washer tank 4. Air cleaner cover, air intake hose 5. Clutch release cylinder connection
4A,
6. Clutch tube bracket and clutch damper
assembly connection 7. Transaxle control cable connection 8. Speedometer cable <Up to 1993 models> or speedometer connector <From 1994 models> connection
1 TSB Revision
22-10
MANUAL TRANSAXLE 4WD> - Transaxle Assembly

70 Nm 51 ft.lbs. 11
\
Q
11
A 12
/ n-ql.4 d - /. I8
c7
60-72 Nm 43-52 ft.lbs.
60-70 Nm 43-51 ft.lbs. 26 ftlbs.

ZO9FOO84
9. Transaxle mount connection 10. Transaxle mount bracket .B( 11. Mounting stopper 12. Transaxle assembly upper part coupling bolt 13. Tie rod end connection 4Cb 14. Lower arm ball joint connection 4D, 15. Right member 16. Starter
4B,
17. Drive shaft (Left side), Inner shaft assembly +F, .A+ 18. Drive shaft (Right side) 19. Transaxle stay (Front bank side) 20. Transaxle stay (Rear bank side) 21. Transaxle assembly lower part 4G, coupling bolt 22. Transaxle assembly 4Gb
4Eb

dAbCLUTCH TUBE BRACKET AND CLUTCH DAMPER ASSEMBLY DISCONNECTION Remove the clutch release cylinder and clutch oil line bracket installation bolt, and then secure at the body side without disconnecting the oil line coupling.
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE cNVD> - Transaxle Assembly
22-11
+B,TRANSAXLE MOUNT DISCONNECTION Raise transaxle assembly with a jack up to a level where mount bracket no longer receives its weight and remove transaxle mount insulator bolt. Caution Support the transaxle assembly with the jack so that no localized force is applied to the assembly.
+C,TIE ROD END DISCONNECTION Using the special tool, disconnect the tie rod end from the knuckle. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to the nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it.
AD, LOWER ARM BALL JOINT DISCONNECTION Using the special tool, disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to the nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it.
+E, DRIVE SHAFT (LEFT SIDE), INNER SHAFT ASSEMBLY REMOVAL (1) Remove the bearing bracket mounting bolts and insert the pry bar between the bearing bracket and the cylinder block. (2) Remove drive shaft (left side) and inner shaft assembly from transaxle assembly. NOTE Remove drive shaft and inner shaft assembly as an assembly together with hub, knuckle, and other parts. (3) Suspend the removed drive shaft (left side) and inner shaft assembly with wire or something similar to prevent it from sharply bending or turning at each joint.
1 TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE cFWD> - Transaxle Assemblv

+F, DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE) REMOVAL (1) To remove drive shaft (right side) from transaxle assembly, apply pry bar to the protrusion. NOTE Remove drive shaft (right side) as an assembly together with hub, knuckle, and other parts. (2) Suspend the removed drive shaft (right side) with wire or something similar to prevent it from sharply bending or turning at each joint. +G,TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY LOWER PART COUPLING BOLT / TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Support transaxle assembly with a transaxle jack and remove transaxle assembly lower part coupling bolt; then, lower transaxle assembly.
jack
ZOSFOOO4

.A4 DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE) INSTALLATION Provisionally install the drive shaft (right side) so that the inboard joint part of the drive shaft (right side) is straight, and not bent relative to the transaxle. Caution Care must be taken to ensure that the oil seal lip part of the transaxle is not damaged by the serrated part of the drive shaft (right side). .Bd MOUNTING STOPPER INSTALLATION Install mounting stopper in the direction shown.
Transaxle mount \ bracket
1 TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Special Tools

Tool Tool number and name MD998330 Oil pressure gaugle (30 kg/cm2) MD999563 Oil pressure gauge (10 kg/cm2) MD998332 Adapter MD998332-01 Connection of the oil pressure gauge Supersession MD998330-01 Application Measuring oil pressure
23-13
3 H A: MD99891 5
A
MD99891 6-01 MD99891 6-l-01
Adjustment of kickdown servo
Kickdown servo wrench adapter B: MD99891 6 Kickdown servo adjust wrench set MD99891 8 Kickdown servo wrench MD99891 6-2-01 MD99891 6-3-01
69 B Q
Adjustment of kickdown servo
1 TSB Revision
22-14
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Special Tools
SPECIAL TOOLS
Oil seal installer
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - On-vehicle Service
22-15
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL CHECK
TRANSMISSION OIL REPLACEMENT

TRANSFER OIL LEVEL CHECK

TRANSFER OIL REPLACEMENT

R.H. side

(1) Disconnect the drive shaft from the transaxle.
(Refer to GROUP 26 - Drive Shaft.) (2) Remove the transfer assembly. (3) Using a flat-tip (-) screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
For L.H.
Dust seal .
For R.H.
(4) Install the oil seals using the following procedure: Using the special tool, tap the oil seal into the transaxle. Note that there are two types of oil seals, one for R.H. and the other for L.H., and the shape of each type is different, as shown.
TSB Revision
22-I 6 MANUAL TRANSAXLE cAWD> - On-vehicle Service / Shift Lever Assembly

L.H. side , ,, / (5) Drive shaft oil seal must be installed in the direction shown. (6) Apply a coating of the transmission oil to the lip of the oil seal. Transmission oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4
R.H.
side
-.
TRANSFER OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT

(1) Pull out the propeller shaft from the transfer. (Refer to GROUP 25 - Propeller Shaft.) (2) Using a flat-tip (-) screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
(3) Using the special tool, tap the drive shaft oil seal into the transfer. (4) Apply a coating of the transmission oil to the lip of the oil seal. Transmission oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4
SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY

Refer to P.22-8.
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Transaxle Control
22-17
TRANSAXLE CONTROL
I I
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Front Console Assembly Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.)
-![i> 12 Nm
\k \
I .,l
9 ft.lbs.
OQFOO80
00001536
Transaxle controll cable assembly removal steps .Dd .Cd .Bd .A+
1. Air hose A
Shift lever assembly removal steps ,Dq ,Cd .B( .A4

1. Air hose A
2. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose A 3. Vacuum pipe 4. Transaxle control cable assembly connection (Shift lever assembly side) 5. Retainer 6. Transaxle control cable assembly
2. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose A 3. Vacuum pipe 4. Transaxle control cable assembly connection (Shift lever assembly side) 7. Shift lever assembly
TSB Revision
22-18
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Transaxle Control INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS

.A+ TRANSAXLE CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY CONNECTION (SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY SIDE) Refer to P.22-7.
203FOO8
.B( VACUUM PIPE INSTALLATION If the vacuum pipe has a stepped part, connect the vacuum hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the figure. ,C(AIR CLEANER COVER, AIR INTAKE HOSE A CONNECTION Align slots indicated by arrows in air intake hose A with markings on air intake hoses B and C; then, insert hoses B and C all the way into air intake hose A.
Air intake hose B

205FOO23
Air hose C
AirhoseA I
,DqAIR HOSE A CONNECTION Connect the hoses ensuring that paint marks are aligned with projections. Insert air hoses B and C into air hose A all the way, or up to the step in hose A. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the intercooler itself.
WO5FOO28
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the transaxle control cable assembly for function and for damage. Check the boot for damage. Check each bushing for wear or abrasion, sticking, impeded action, and damage.
1 TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWLI> - Transaxle Assembly
22-19
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY /
li
l l

fransmission Oil Draining (Refer to P.22-15.) Transfer Assembly Removal1 (Refer to P.22-22.)
l l
Post-installation Operation Transfer Assembly installation (Refer to P.22-22.) Transmission Oil Supplying (Refer to l?22-15.) l Shift Lever at Each Position Checking Operation l Meters and Gauges Checking the Operation
c
Hose clamp 4.0 Nm
09FOllO 00001537
Removal steps 1. Side under cover .D+ 2. Air hose A

bC+ 3. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose A
.I34 4. Vacuum pipe 5. Air cleaner element 6. Air cleaner body 7. Battery 8. Battery seat, Washer tank
9. Transaxle control cable connection
/ i
TSB Revision
22-20
MANUAL T R A N S A X L E <AWD> Transaxle Assembly 45 Nm
22 lt.lbs.
6.0 Nm 4.0 ft.lbs.
60-70 Nm 43-51 ft.lbs. OWXW
00001538
10. Clutch tube bracket connection 11. Clutch release cylinder connection 12. Transaxle mount connection 13. Plug 14. Transaxle mount bracket (Body side) ,A+ 15. Mounting stopper 16. Transaxle mount bracket (Transaxle side) 17. Transaxle assembly lower part coupling bolt 18. Tie rod end connection 4B, 19. Lower arm ball joint connection 4B, 20. Right member
21. Starter cover 22. Starter 23. Drive shaft (Left side), Inner shaft 6, assembly +C, .A+ 24. Drive shaft (Right side) 25. Transaxle stay connection (Front bank side) 26. Transaxle stay connection (Rear bank side) 27. Transaxle assembly lower part 4C, coupling bolt 28. Transaxle assembly 4C,
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE cAWD> - Transaxle Assembly , REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
22-21
+A, CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER / TRANSAXLE MOUNT CONNECTION Refer to P.22-10. +B,TIE ROD END / LOWER ARM BALL JOINT CONNECTION Refer to P.22-11. +C,DRlVE SHAFT (LEFT SIDE), INNER SHAFT ASSEMBLY / DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE) / TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY LOWER COUPLING BOLT / TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Refer to P.22-il.

.A4 DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE) / MOUNTING STOPPER INSTALLATION Refer to P.22-12.
.B+ VACUUM PIPE INSTALLATION If the vacuum pipe has a stepped part, connect the vacuum hose to the pipe securely, up to the stepped part, as shown in the figure.
ZO3FOO8
Air intake hose C
.C+AIR CLEANER COVER, AIR INTAKE HOSE A INSTALLATION Align slots indicated by arrows in air intake hose A with A markings on air intake hoses B and C; then, insert hoses B and C all the way into air intake hose A. Insert air intake hoses B and C all the way up to the roots on the turbocharger end.
@- A i r
i n t a k e holIoo23
Air hose B
.D+ AIR HOSE A INSTALLATION Connect the air hoses ensuring that alignment marks are aligned with projections. Insert air hoses B and C into pipe all the way to its step. Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into the hoses, pipes, or the intercooler itself.
WOSFOO28
1 TSB Revision
22-22
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Transfer Assembly
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Transfer Oil Draining and Supplying (Refer to !?22-15.)
l
Active Front Venturi Skirt Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.)
2m -
WI .Nm 1 . ..a
36 ft.lbs.
85-90 Nmlb 6 1 - 6 5 ft.lbs. 25-29 Nm*2 18-22 ft.lbs.
q&
Sleeve yoke
lOG0001
Gear oil: Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W conforming to API classifi
09 FOO08
00001539
Removal steps 1. Bolts and nuts 2. Gaskets 3. Warm up catalytic converter and front exhaust pipe 4. Transfer assembly
l l: Up to 1993 models l 2: From 1994 models
NOTE

qA,TRANSFER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
Caution 1. Be cautious to avoid damaging the transfer oil seal lip. 2. Cover the transfer opening with the special tool to prevent transaxle oil discharge and the entry of foreign objects.
09FOOO8 09FOOO9 00001540
TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Transfer Assembly / Transaxle Assembly
22-23
3. The propeller shaft should be suspended so that it is not sharply bent.
;LOSAO027
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
The transaxle cannot be disassembled. If any parts other than describes below are defective, replace the transaxle assembly. REPLACEMENT PART
ZfFM0157
1. Transfer mounting bolts .Fd 2. Transfer case oil seal .E+ 3. Transfer extension housing oil seal 4. Transfer oil seal guide
.D+ .C( .B+ .A4
5. Input shaft rear seal cap 6. Center shaft oil seal 7. Drive shaft oil seal 8. Drive shaft oil seal

,A+DRlVE SHAFT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION Using the special tool, install the drive shaft oil seal.
TSB Revision
22-24
MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> - Transaxle Assembly

.B+DRlVE SHAFT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION Using the special tool, install the drive shaft oil seal.
x1-.
MD998325
2201029
.C+CENTER SHAFT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION Using a pipe shown in the illustration, drive the oil seal until it is flush with the case. Do not drive the oil seal more than necessary.
.DdlNPUT SHAFT REAR SEAL CAP INSTALLATION Using the special tool, install the input shaft rear seal cap.
.E+ TRANSFER EXTENSION HOUSING OIL SEAL INSTALLATION Using the special tool, install the transfer extension housing oil seal.
22200081
MD99881 2
.F+ TRANSFER CASE OIL SEAL INSTALLATION Using the special tool, install the transfer case oil seal.
\I
L I
ZTFM0163
/
/ \
1 TSB Revision
23-1
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Accelerator Switch Check and Adjustment (1992 model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Drive Shaft Oil Seals Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Key Interlock Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Kickdown Servo Adjustment .. : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Line Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park/Neutral Position Switch and Control Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LJ 48 53
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
TRANSAXLE CONTROL* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 TRANSAXLE OIL COOLER, HOSES, TUBES . . . 62 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Reducing Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Selector Lever Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Shift Lock Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Speedometer. Cable Replacement <Up to 1993 models> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
m Safety-lock System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Converter Stall Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Diagnosis and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Element in Use at Each Position of Selector Lever . 29 Hydraulic Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Inspection of Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Inspection of Electronic Control System Components 32 Shift Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Transaxle Control Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Transmission Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Transmission Fluid Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . s . . . . . 59 SPECIAL TOOLS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injuryordeathtoservicepersonnel (from inadvertentfiringoftheairbag)ortothedriverandpassenger(fromrendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 528 -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removedlinstalled in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk ().
i.
NeutraD
To lubrlcatlon (front) To lutmcatm (rear) - mx..
Line pressure /-J Torque converter and lubrlcatlon pressure a Reducing pressure
i.._.i Oil pump suction pressure iModulated line pressure _-- ~ ! Pressure control solenoid valve pressure
m Torque converter clutch pressure m Torque converter clutch solenoid pressure
WA0070
1. Torque converter 2. Front clutch 3. Rear clutch 4. Low-reverse brake 5. End clutch 6. Kickdown servo 7. Transaxle control module 8. Torque converter clutch valve 9. Rear clutch exhaust valve 10. 2-3/4-3 shift valve 11, Torque converter clutch soieno~d 12. Reducing valve 13. Shift control solenoid valve A 14. l-2 shift valve
15. End clutch valve 16. Torque converter control valve 17. Shift control solenoid valve 13 18. Shift control valve 19. WG control valve 20. Regulator valve 21. Manuai valve 22. Pressure control vaive 23. N-R control valve 24. Oil filter 25. Oil pan 26. Oii pump 27. Line relief valve 28. Pressure control solenoid valve
di
Parking
To lubncation (front) .-E? To lubrication (rear) -= 16
25 _ Line pressure m Torque converter and lubrication pressure m Reducing pressure /-J Oil pump suction pressure j Modulated line pressure i Pressure control solenoid valve pressure I que converter clutch ssure que converter clutch ..,.anoid pressure
TFA0071
1. Torque converter
15. End clutch valve

16. Torque converter control valve
2. Front clutch 3. Rear clutch 4. Low-reverse brake 5. End clutch 6. Kickdown servo 7. Transaxle control module
8. Torque converter clutch valve
9. Rear clutch exhaust valve 10. 2-3/4-3 shift valve

11. Torque converter clutch solenoid
12. Reducing valve 13. Shift control solenoid valve A 14. 1-2 shift valve
17. Shift control solenoid valve B 18. Shift control valve 19. N-D control valve 20. Regulator valve 21. Manual valve 22. Pressure control valve 23. N-R control valve 24. Oil filter 25. Oil pan 26. Oil pump 27. Line relief valve 28. Pressure control solenoid valve
TSB Revision
23-4
Drive (Stop)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - General ln~~r~~ti~m

6
El: T
To lubrication (front) .-= To lubrication (rear) -I
25
Ed
a 011 pump suction pressure / Modulated line pressure 0 Pressure control solenoid valve pressure 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. / Torque converter clutch pressure ( Torque converter clutch solenoid pressure
VA0242
Line pressure j Torque converter and lubrrcation pressure II Reducing pressure
Torque converter
:: Front clutch
Rear clutch
t Low-reverse brake
5: End clutch Kickdown servo 7. Transaxle control module 8: Torque converter clutch valve 9. Rear clutch exhaust valve 10. 2-3/4-3 shift valve Torque converter clutch solenoid ::: Reducing valve 13 Shift control solenoid valve A 14. l-2 shift valve
End clutch valve Torque converter control valve Shift control solenoid valve B Shift control valve N-D control valve Regulator valve Manual valve Pressure control valve N-R control valve Oil filter Oil pan Oil pump Line relief valve Pressure control solenoid valve
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSA LE - General h-d

Drive (First) YiFTh &Ah & I* [;
-5
1~ IIL i&II ?--FTTY
To lubrication (front) -3 To lubrication (rear) C=
16 . .
lb5 ----___
24 25
E brque converter clutch lressure brque converter clutch -olenoid pressure
Line pressure ye converter and luulication pressure Reducing pressure
/-J Oil pump suction pressure j Modulated line pressure j Pressure control solenoid valve pressure 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 2 22: 23. 24. 25. 26.
t
1
TFA0072
1. Torque converter 2. Front clutch 3. Rear clutch 4. Low-reverse brake 5. End clutch 6. Kickdown servo 7. Transaxle control module 8. Torque converter clutch valve 9. Rear clutch exhaust valve 10. 2-3/4-3 shift valve 11. Torque converter clutch solenoid 12. Reducing valve 13. Shift control solenoid valve A 14. I-2 shift valve
TSB Revision
riv Ic2%aas-.d\
To lubrication (front) To lubrication (rear) -Z
25
Line pressure j Torque converter and lubrlcatlon pressure Reducing pressure m Oil pmp suction pressure
i__i Torque converter clutch pressure ! Torque, converter clutch solenoid pressure
TFA0073
j Modulated ltna pressure

1. ] Pressure control solenoid valve pressuie 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.
1. Torque converter 2. Front clutch 3. Rear clutch 4. Low-reverse brake 5. End clutch 6. Kickdown servo 7. Transaxle control module 8. Torque converter clutch valve 9. Rear clutch exhaust valve 10. Z&3/4-3 shift valve Il. Torque converter clutch solenoid 12. Reducing valve 13. Shift control solenoid valve A 14. l-2 shift valve
End clutch valve Torque converter control valve Shift control solenoid valve 33 Shift control valve N-D control valve Regulator valve Manual valve Pressure control valve N-R controi valve Oil fitter Oil pan Oil pump Line relief vaive Pressure control solenoid valve
Drive (Third)
I,
rF!zKxzri-t
A==8w ~u
To lubrication (fror.., _~_ To lubrication (rear) +Z 16
19
b 28 7 4
m Line pressure j 011 pump suction pressure / Modulated line pressure Lque converter clutch ssure que converter clutch ?noid pressure m Torque converter and lubrication pressure m Reducing pressure
j Pressure control solenoid valve pressure

TFA0074
1. Torque converter 2. Front clutch 3. Rear clutch 4. Low-reverse brake 5. End clutch 6. Kickdown servo 7. Transaxle control module 8. Torque converter clutch valve 9. Rear clutch exhaust valve 10. 2-3/4-3 shift valve 11. Torque converter clutch solenoid 12. Reducing valve 13. Shift control solenoid valve A 14. l-2 shift valve
15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.
23-8
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - General Information
rive (Fourth)
To lubrrc ation (frc, ,L, To lubric :ation (rear) +I
m Line pressure lue converter and ,ication pressure m Reducing pressure
0 Oil pump suction pressure 0 Modulated line pressure 0 Pressure control solenoid valve pressure
0 Torque converter clutch pressure m Torque converter clutch solenoid pressure
TFA0075
1. Torque converter 2. Front clutch 3. Rear clutch 4. Low-reverse brake 5. End clutch 6. Kickdown servo 7. Transaxle control module 8. Torque converter clutch valve 9. Rear clutch exhaust valve IO. 2-3/4-3 shift valve 11. Torque converter clutch solenoid 12. Reducing valve 13. Shift control solenoid valve A 14. 1-2 shift valve
15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.
1 TSB Revision

.ock-up (First)
23-9
To lubrrcatron (front) .-=/ To lubrication (rear) -=
18
tx
!Ih 5
m Line pressure 0 Torque converter and lubrication pressure m Reducing pressure
I Oil pump suction pressure 1 Modulated line pressure 0 Pressure control solenoid valve pressure 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.
17
rque converter clutch 3ssure rque converter clutch Jenoid pressure
TFA0076
1. Torque converter 2. Front clutch 3. Rear clutch 4. Low-reverse brake 5. End clutch 6. Kickdown servo 7. Transaxle control mod,ule 8. Torque convertor clutch valve 9. Rear clutch exhaust valve 10. 2-3/4-3 shift valve 11. Torque converter clutch solenoid 12. Reducing valve 13. Shift control solenoid valve A 14. l-2 shift v?r\~n
1 TSB Revision
23-10
Reverse
L
/ iso / I!~!~im
To lubrication (front) .-= To lubrication (rearj +Z
25 - Line pressure 0 Oil pump suction pressure 0 Modulated line pressure m Reducing pressure / Pressure control solenoid valve pressure
r--F- -Ia Torque converter clutch pressure 0 Torque converter clutch solenoid pressure
TFA0077
1. Torque converter 2. Front clutch
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Rear clutch Low-reverse brake End clutch Kickdown servo Transaxle control module
8. Torque converter clutch valve
9. Rear clutch exhaust valve 10. 2-3/4-3 shift valve 11. Torque converter clutch solenoid 12. Reducing valve 13. Shift control solenoid valve A 14. l-2 shift valve
End clutch valve Torque converter control valve 17. Shift control solenoid valve B 18. Shift control valve 19. N-D control valve 20. Regulator valve 21. Manual valve 22. Pressure control valve 23. N-R control valve 24. Oil filter 25. Oil pan 26. Oil pump 27. Line relief valve
28. Pressure control solenoid valve
TSB Revision
LJ
LJ
L/
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - SPecifications
23-11
SPECIFICATIONS i L
Items Model Specifications F4A33-1 -MNP2 cl 992 model> F4A33-l-MNP8 cl993 model> F4A33-1 -MNQ2 cl 994 model> F4A33-1 -MNQ7 <From 1995 models> Electronically controlled 4-speed full-automatic 3 element with torque converter clutch 2,200-3,200 rpm
Type
Torque converter
Gear ratio
First
Fourth Reverse Final gear ratio Speedometer gear ratio (Drive/Driven) i

l-
0.685 2.176
3.958 36129 I I
Items Resistance of torque converter clutch solenoid valve coil [at 20C (68F)] <Up to 1993 model> Q Resistance of torque converter clutch solenoid valve coil [at 20C (68F)] <From 1995 model> Q Line pressure Line pressure kPa (psi) Oil pressure change for each turn of adjustment screw kPa (psi) Reducing pressure (when the scan tool is not used) Reducing pressure (when the scan tool is used) Reducing pressure kPa (psi) Oil pressure change for each turn of adjustment screw kPa (psi) Reducing pressure kPa (psi) Oil pressure change for each turn of adjustment screw kPa (psi) Specifications Approx. 3 Approx. 13 870-890 (124-127) 38 (5) 425+10(60&l) 45 (6) 275 (39) 22 (3) 2-6 (.079-.24) 15.2-15.9 (.598-.625)
Accelerator pedal stroke (accelerator pedal switch ON to OFF) cl992 model> mm (in.) Sleeve and selector lever assembly end play mm (in.)
TSB Revision
23-12
LUBRICANTS
Items
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Specifications / Special Tools
Specified lubricants DIAMOND ATF SP or equivalent
Quantity 7.5 (7.9) As required
Transmission fluid dm3 (qts.) Drive shaft oil seal lip
SPECIAL TOOLS
and lower arm ball joint Disconnection of thecoupling of the knuckle and tie-rod end ball joint
ecking of the diagnostic trouble code
stic trouble codes using a check harness
oil seal installer
1 TSB Revision
MANUAL TRANSAXLE cAWD> - Specifications
MANUAL TRANSAXLE cAWD> Li

SPECIFICATIONS
Items Model r\pplicable engine Up to 1993 model W5MGl-0-FNBR 6G72-DOHC (Turbo) 5-speed transaxle floor shift j 1st / 3.071 From 1994 model WGMGl-0-FNBR 6G72-DOHC (Turbo) 1 6-speed transaxle floor shift / 3.266 I
Me
Sear ratio
3rd / 4th
/ 1.103 1 0.823
/ 1.241 / 0.918
I
I
6th Reverse Reduction ratio Primary Front differential Transfer Speedometer gear ratio (driven/drive) Oil quantity dm3 (qts.) / Transaxle Transfer 3.076 1.375 2.888 0.814 27136 2.4 (2.5) 1 0.27 (.29)
0.589 3.153 1.222 3.166 0.958 28136 2.4 (2.5) 1 0.6 (.63) I
LUBRICANTS
Items Transmission oil Transfer oil Hypoid gear oil, SAE 75W-90 or 76W-85W conforming to API classification GL-4 Drive shaft oil seal lip Transfer oil seal lip Specified lubricants Quantity dm3 (qts.) 2.4 (2.5) 0.27 (.29) <W5MGl> 0.6 (63) <WGMGl> As required
TSB Revision
23-14
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshooting
TROUB.LESHOOTING
Based upon use of the troubleshooting guide, the probable location of the problem should be estimated. I
Checks should be made of fluid levels and the condition of the ATF, as well as the condition of the manual control cables; adjustments should then be made if found to 1 be necessary. I
Functional malfunctions of the ELC-4A/T can lead to other problems, such as those described below: (1) Improper maintenance and/or adjustments (2) Malfunctions of the electronic control functions (3) Malfunctions of mechanical functions (4) Malfunctions of hydraulic control functions (5) Malfunctions of engine performance etc. In order to properly determine (Troubleshoot) the source of these malfunctions, it is first essential to methodically question the user concerning the details of the problem, such as the condition of the problem, the situation at the time the problem occurred, and any other relevant information, all in as much detail as possible. The user should also be asked whether or not the problem has occurred more than once, and under what conditions. Subsequently, certain tests should be conducted in a certain order, as described at the left.
If a presumption has been made that there is an abnormalconditionsomewhere in the electronic-control svstern, check the fault code, in order to determine jhe probable location of the problem, by using a multi-use tester or voltmeter.
+
When the abnormal system is discovered, check each element (sensors, etc.) one by one, and make repairs as necessary.
When the abnormal condition is presumed to be in the hydraulic-pressure-control system, check by making an oil-pressure test.
+
When the result of the oil-pressure test does not satisfy the specified pressure, check each system at places related to the valve body, check the hydraulic-pressure oassaaes for leakaae. etc. If the problem is unusually dirty ATF, abnormal noises, oil leakage, or slippage of the clutch or brakes, or an abnormalcondition of the transaxle itself, disassemble and repair the transaxle.
1 TSB Revision

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
1 il terns
23-15
Driving impossible or abnormal (before start-off) Starter motor wont function Forward/ backward movement impossible Forward movement impossible Backward movement impossible
Engine
Abnormal idling rpm

X
2 I Performancemalfunction 3 4 5 Transaxle (power train) / 6 , 8

9
Improper adjustmentof manual linkage Malfunction of torque convertor Operation malfunction of oil pump Malfunction of one-way clutch Damagedor worn gear or other rotating pan, or improper adjustment of the preload ( Malfunction of parking mechanism Cracked drive plate or loose bolt I
8
X X
63
X X X
@
X X
I
X
I
X
10 / Worn inside diameter of front clutch retainer 11 12 Low fluid level Line pressure too low (seal damaged, leakage, looseness, etc.) Malfunction of valve body (sticking valve, working cavity, adjustment, etc.) I I I 63 63 69 I I @ 63 8 8 I I
8 c9 @3 x I I
I I
13 Hydraulicpressure system (including friction elements) ] 14 15 16 17 I 18
r
1Malfunction of front clutch or piston Malfunction of rear clutch or piston Malfunction of kickdown band or piston lmorooer adiustment of kickdown servo 1 Malfunction of low-reverse brake or piston 0-ring of low-reverse brake circuit between valve body and case notinstalled Malfunction of end clutch or piston (check ball hole, other) Malfunction of park/neutral position switch, damaged or disconnected wiring, or improper adjustment Malfunction of TPS, or improper adjustment Pulse generator (A) damaged or disconnected wiring, or shortcircuit Pulse generator(B) damaged or disconnected wiring, or shortcircuit servo switch
I
I
I
I
x
X
I
I
/ I
19 20 21 22 23 24
I
25 26
IElectronic(:ontrol system
I Malfunction of kickdown
SCSV-Aor B damaged or disconnected wiring, or short-circuit or sticking (valve open) Malfunction of ignition signal system
27
1 28 I incorrectly grounded ground strap 29 30 I 31 32 33 34 PCSV damaged or disconnected wiring, or short-circuit PCSV damaged or disconnected wiring (valve open) I TCC solenoid damaged or disconnecting wiring (valve open) TCC solenoid short-circuit or sticking (valve open) Malfunction of overdrive control switch Malfunction of oil-temoerature sensor leadswitch
I
I
I
63 I
I
@
I
8
I I
I 35 I Malfunctlonof I 36
I Poor contact of ignition switch Malfunction of transaxle control module
I I
I I
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I s7 I
OTE: @ Indicates items of priority inspection. PSCV = Pressure control valve
I Abbrevilations: TPS = Throttle position sensor TCC solenoid = Torque converter clutch solenoid
I I SCSV = Shirt control solenoid valve OD = Overdrive
TSB Revision
23-16
-

Driving impossible or abnormal (before start-off)
Engine stalls when N+DorR 1 2 (59

X
Clutch slips at D (stall rpm too high)
Clutch slips at R (stall rpm too high)
Stall rpm too low
Vehicle moves at P or N
Enginestarts, or vehicle moves, between N-R or N-D
Parking doesnt hold
Abnormal vibration-shock when shift to D-2-L-R

X
TSB Revision
23-17
Wont shift from
xcessive creepWont shift to 4th
, 37
X
/
X X
I
X
I
X
I
X
I
X
TSB Revision
23-18
Excessive vibrationshock during upshift
TSB Revision
23-I 9
/-
1 TSB Revision
23-20
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshooting DIAGNOSIS AND TEST

FLUID LEVEL AND CONDITION 1. Drive until the fluid temperature reaches the usual temperature [70-80C (158-176F)j. 2. Place vehicle on level floor. 3. Move selector lever sequentially to every position to fill torque converter and hydraulic circuit with fluid, then place lever in N Neutral position. This operation is necessary to be sure that fluid level check is accurate. 4. Before removing dipstick, wipe all dirt from area around dipstick. Then take out the dipstick and check the condition of the fluid. The transaxle should be overhauled under the following conditions. l If there is a burning odor. l If the fluid color has become noticeably blacker. l If there is a noticeably great amount of metal particles in the fluid. 5. Check to see if fluid level is in HOT range on dipstick. If fluid level is low, add automatic transmission fluid until level reaches HOT range. Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows pump to take in air along with fluid. Air trapped in hydraulic circuit forms bubbles which make fluid spongy. Therefore, pressures will be erratic. Improper filling can also raise fluid level too high. When transaxle has too much fluid, gears churn up foam and cause same conditions which occur with low fluid level, resulting in accelerated deterioration of automatic transmission fluid. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating, fluid oxidation, which can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and servo operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from transaxle vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. 6. Be sure to examine fluid on dipstick closely. CONTROL CABLE Whether control cable is properly adjusted can be confirmed by checking whether park/neutral position switch is performing well. 1. Apply parking brakes and service brakes securely. 2. Place selector lever to R range. 3. Set ignition key to ST position. 4. Slowly move the selector lever upward until it clicks as it fits in notch of P range. If starter motor operates when lever makes a click, P position is correct. 5. Then slowly move selector lever to N range by the same procedure as in foregoing paragraph. If starter motor operates when selector lever fits in IN, N position is correct. 6. Also check to be sure the vehicle doesnt begin to move and the lever doesnt stop between P-R-N-D. 7. The control cable is properly adjusted if, as described above, the starter motor starts at both the P range and the N range.
ZT FA070(
I \ d ~ I
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshootina

cup to 1993 model> %.
23-21
1 Scan tool (MB991341 or MB991502)
2OFOl59
Scan tool /-- (MB991 502)
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION METHOD OF READING THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES When using the scan tool [Multi-use tester (MUT) cl993 model> or MUT-II <All models>] Caution Connection and disconnection of the scan tool should always be made with the ignition switch in the OFF position. (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. NOTE When connecting MUT-II to a vehicle up to. 1993 model, use the adapter harness supplied together. (2) Take a reading of the diagnostic output. (3) Repair the problem location, referring to the diagnostic chart. (4) After turning the ignition switch once to OFF, turn it back to ON.
00002231
2OFO164
When using a voltmeter cl993 model> (1) Connect an analog voltmeter to the diagnostic output terminal (No. 6 terminal) and the ground terminal (No. 12 terminal) of the data link connector (white). (2) Obtain the diagnostic output by observing the voltmeter pointer deflection. (3) Repair the problem location, referring to the diagnostic chart.
r MFI diagnosis
I Ground
YZOFO163
When using a Voltmeter <From 1994 model> (1) Connect an analog voltmeter to the diagnostic output terminal (No. 6 terminal) and the ground terminal (No. 4 or 5 terminal) of the data link connector. Caution Be sure to use the special tool (diagnostic trouble code check harness) to connect the voltmeter to the -ground terminal (No. 4 or 5 terminal). (2) Obtain the diagnostic output by observing the voltmeter pointer deflection. (3) Repair the problem location, referring to the diagnostic c h a r t .
TSB Revision
23-22
Diagnostic result indication by voltmeter r Example of diagnostic trouble code output voltage waveform Waveform for diagnostic trouble code No. 24 ,;;L Waveform when normal
LJ
digit signal
delimiter 2 sec.
digit signal Z14NO173 Z14N0174
NOTE Other diagnostic items are also indicated by the voltage waveforms corresponding to the code numbers obtainea when the scan tool is used.
METHOD OF ERASE THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES When using the scan tool [Multi-use tester (MUT) cup to 1993 model> or MUT-II <All models>] (1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then back to ON again. (2) Erase the diagnostic trouble codes. (3) Check to be sure that no diagnostic trouble codes exist. When using the voltmeter (1) Turn the ignition switch to the OFF. (2) After disconnecting the battery cable from the battery (-) terminal for 10 seconds or more, reconnect the cable. (3) Turn the ignition switch to the ON, and read the diagnostic trouble codes to check that a normal code is output.
I\,.A i - ~ ~
TSB Revision

FAULT CODE DESCRIPTION
23-23
I L
Code No. 11 12 13 14 15
Item Excessively large throttle position sensor output Excessively small throttle position sensor output Defective or improperly adjusted throttle position sensor Improperly adjusted throttle position sensor
l l l l l l
Remedial Action Check throttle position sensor connector. Check throttle position sensor on bench. Adjust throttle position sensor. Check accelerator switch (whether code number 24 is being output). ~199; models only>
Open-circuited low-oil-temperature sensor cl 992 model> Open-circuited oil temperature sensor <From 1993 model> Short-circuited high-oil-temperature sensor cl992 model only> Short-circuited oil-temperature sensor <From 1996 model>
l l
Check oil temperature sensor connector. Check oil temperature sensor on bench.
16
l l
17
Open-circuited high-oil-temperature sensor or shortcircuited low-oil-temperature sensor cl 992 model only> Open-circuited kickdown servo switch Short-circuited kickdown servo switch Open-circuited ignition pulse pickup cable
l l l
21 22 23 ii 24
Check kickdown servo switch connector. Check kickdown servo switch on bench. Check ignition pulse signal line.
Open-circuited or improperly adjusted accelerator l Check accelerator switch connector. l Check accelerator switch on bench. switch l Adjust accelerator switch. cl 992 model only> Open-circuited pulse generator A Open-circuited pulse generator B Short-circuited Park/neutral position switch Open-circuited Park/neutral position switch Open-circuited shift control solenoid valve A Short-circuited shift control solenoid valve A Open-circuited shift control solenoid valve B Short-circuited shift control solenoid valve B Open-circuited pressure control solenoid valve Short-circuited pressure control solenoid valve Open-circuited torque converter clutch solenoid Short-circuited torque converter clutch solenoid Defective torque converter clutch system
l l l l l l l l l l l l l
31 32 36 37 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Check pulse generator A or B on bench. Check vehicle-speed reed switch (chattering). Check Park/neutral position switch connector Check Park/neutral position switch on bench Check solenoid valve connector. Check shift control solenoid valve A on bench Check solenoid valve connector. Check shift control solenoid valve B on bench. Check solenoid valve connector. Check pressure control solenoid valve on bench. Check solenoid valve connector. Check torque converter clutch solenoid on bench
LJ
TSB Revision
Check torque converter clutch hydraulic circuit Check torque converter clutch solenoid on bench 0 Replace control unit.
23-24
Code No. 51

Item 1 st gear incorrect ratio
l
Remedial Action 0 0 0
l l
Check connectors of pulse generators A and B. Check pulse generators A and B on bench. Rear clutch slipping Check connectors of pulse generators A and B. Check pulse generators A and B on bench. Rear clutch slipping Kickdown brake slipping Check connectors of pulse generators A and B. Check pulse generators A and B on bench. Front clutch slipping Rear clutch slipping Check connectors of pulse generators A and B. Check pulse generators A and B on bench. End clutch slipping Kickdown brake slipping Check connector of pulse generator A. Check pulse generator A proper. Replace automatic transmission fluid. Check torque reduction request signal line. Check torque reduction execution signal line. Check torque reduction request signal line. Check torque reduction execution signal line.
di
52
2nd gear incorrect ratio
0 53 3rd gear incorrect ratio

l l l l l l l l
54
4th gear incorrect ratio
59
Dccurence of abnormal vibration <From 1994 model> Short-circuited torque reduction request signal line or open-circuited torque reduction execution signal line Open-circuited torque reduction request signal line Short-circuited torque reduction execution signal line
l l l l l l l
61 62 63
FAIL-SAFE CODE DESCRIPTION

Code No. 81 82 83 84 85 Item Open-circuited pulse generator A Open-circuited pulse generator B Open- or short-circuited shift control solenoid valve A Open- or short-circuited shift control solenoid valve B Open- or short-circuited pressure control solenoid valve Incorrect gear ratio Fail-safe Fixed at 3rd (D) or 2nd (2, L) Fixed at 3rd (D) or 2nd (2, L) Fixed at 3rd Fixed at 3rd Fixed at 3rd (D) or 2nd (2,L) Fixed at 3rd (D) or 2nd (2, L) 31 32 41,42 43,44 45,46 51,52 53,54 Related Self-Diagnosis
L)
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshootina INSPECTION OF CONTROL SYSTEM

Check the control system by using the scan tool and following the procedure given below. L CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION TABLE Check Item Throttle position sensor (TPS) l Data list l Item No. 11 Condition Accelerator pedal fully released Accelerator pedal slowly depressed Accelerator pedal fully depressed Oil temperature sensor l Data list l Item No. 15 Cold engine (before start) Engine warming up After engine warming up Kickdown servo switch l Data list l Item No. 21 Ignition signal line B Data list D Item No. 23 Accelerator pedal switch cl992 model only> D Data list D Item No. 24 Closed throttle position switch D Data list D Item No. 25 Air conditioning compressor clutch relay signal ) Data list D Item No. 26 Transaxle gear position 1 Data list ) Item No. 27 L range, idle D range, 1st or 3rd speed D range, 2nd or 4th speed N range, idle N range, 2,500 rpm (tachometer reading) Accelerator pedal fully released Accelerator pedal slightly depressed Accelerator pedal fully released
,depressed ID range, Iidle-up ID range, Iidle OFF ID
I
23-25
Criteria 0.4-l .o v Varies with throttle opening degree 4.5-5.0 v Equivalent to outside temperature Gradually increases 80-110C ON ON
Possible Cause of Trouble (or Remedy)

l
l l
TPS is improperly adjusted if voltage is high when accelerator pedal is fully depressed or released. TPS or circuit harness is defective if there is no change. TPS or accelerator pedal cable is defective if change is not smooth. Defective oil temperature sensor or circuit harness
0
0
OFF 650-900 rpm 2,400-2,600 rpm ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF C I
Improperly adjusted kickdown servo Defective kickdown servo switch or circuit harness Defective kickdown servo Defective ignition system Defective ignition signal pickup circuit harness Improperly adjusted accelerator pedal switch Defective accelerator pedal switch or circuit harness Improperly adjusted TPS Defective TPS or circuit harness
0
l
0 0
Accelerator pedal slightly air conditioning air conditioning
Defective air-conditioning compressor clutch relay ON signal detection circuit harness
range, idle
IL range, idle 12 range, 2nd speed
1ST 2ND
ID range, O/D OFF, 3rd speed I1 range, O/D, 4th speed
3RD / 4TH
0 Defective TCM l Defective accelerator pedal switch circuit a Defective park/neutral position switch circuit l Defective TPS circuit
-1
TSB Revision
23-26
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Traubleshnntinn
e pulse generator A shieldec rnal noise interference
Item No. 32
l
External noise interference
Overdrive switch
Overdrive switch in ON
tion switch
l l
Defective park/neutral position switch or circuit harness Defective manual control cable If selector lever does not move, check shift lock mechanism.
Vehicle-speed reed D Data list D Item No. 38

l
Duty should become 100% when ac-
D range, gear being shifted
ive TPS circuit ive accelerator pedal switch
) Data list D Item No. 47
tachometer readin
l l
generator B circuit Incorrect transmission fluid pressure Defective T
Item No. 49
generator B circuit
1 TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshooting TRANSAXLE CONTROL MODULE
23-27
The connector has 42 pins to accommodate the increased number of sensor inputs. Here are the pin
L , assignments.
cl 992 models>
ZTFAO360
101. Torque converter clutch solenoid 102. Shift control solenoid valve A 103. 104. Power source 105. Ground 106. Pressure control solenoid valve 107. Shift control solenoid valve B 108. Engine communication signal 109. Power source 110. Ground 1. Ground 2. 3. Accelerator switch 4. 5. On-board diagnostic output 6. Air conditioning compressor clutch relay signal 7. Engine communication signal 8. Diagnostic test mode control terminal 9. Engine communication signal 10. Power source (backup) 11. Kickdown servo switch 12. Closed throttle position switch
13. 14. Oil temperature sensor (Low temperature side) 15. Oil temperature sensor (High temperature side) 16. Throttle position sensor 17. Sensor ground 18. Vehicle-speed reed switch 51. Park/neutral position switch 52. Park/neutral position switch 53. Park/neutral position switch 54. Park/neutral position switch 55. Park/neutral position switch 56. Park/neutral position switch 57. Overdrive switch 58. Pulse generator B 59. Pulse generator B 60. Pulse generator A 61. Pulse generator A 62. Ground 63. Ignition pulse 64. Power mode signal
(P) (R) (N) (D) (2) (L)
TSB Revision
23-28
<From 1993 models>
ZTFA0744
1. Torque converter clutch solenoid 2. Shift control solenoid valve A (SCSV-A) 3. 4. Engine communication signal 65: 1 7. Kickdown servo switch 8. Air conditioning relay signal 9. On-board diagnostic output terminal 10. Pulse generator B (PG-B) output 11. Diagnostic test mode control terminal 12. Power source 13. Ground 14. rpcYe;e control solenoid valve 15. Shift control solenoid valve B (SCSV-B) 16. 17. Engine communication signal 18. Engine communication signal 19.. 20. Closed throttle position switch
;;. Throttle position sensor (TPS) 23: Oil temperature sensor 24. Sensor ground 25. Power source 26. Ground 31. Park/neutral position switch 32. Park/neutral position switch 33. Park/neutral position switch 34. Park/neutral position switch 35. Park/neutral position switch 36. Park/neutral position switch 37. Overdrive switch 38. Power mode signal 39. Power source (backup) 40. Vehicle-speed reed switch 41. Pulse generator B (PG-B) 42. Pulse generator B (PG-B) 43. Pulse generator A (PG-A) 44. Pulse generator B (PG-A) 45. Ground 46. Ignition pulse
(P) (R) (N) (D) (2) (L)
1 TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshooting ELEMENT IN USE AT EACH POSITION OF SELECTOR LEVER
23-29
Selector. lever position P R

N
Overdrive control switch
Shifting gear Neutral Reverse Neutral -
Gear ratio
Engine start Possible
Parking mechanism
l l
Clutch Cl C2 C3
Brake owe Bl B2
2.176
Possible -
ON
1st 2nd 3rd OD
2.551 1.488 1.000 0.685 2.551 1.488 /

I
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l
. ! l l
OFF
1st 2nd 3rd
1.000 2.551
1st 2nd /
l l l
1.488 2.551
1st
NOTE Cl . . Front clutch i C2 . . Rear clutch C3 . . . End clutch Kickdown brake 2:::: Low reverse brake OWC . One way clutch
SHIFT PATTERNS
Two shift patterns are prestored in the control unit of this transaxle. One is the power pattern (for more powerful performance), and the other is the economy pattern (for improved fuel consumption and quieter operation). The driver can select and switch to the desired pattern by using the power/economy select switch on the center console. The solid lines shown in these shift patterns indicate up-shifts, and the broken lines indicate down-shifts. The reason why there is a difference between the shift points for up-shifts and for down-shifts is so that up-shifts and down-shifts will not occur frequently when driving at a speed in the vicinity of the shift point. When the vehicle is stopped, there is a shift to 2nd gear in order to obtain a suitable creeping, but when the accelerator pedal is then depressed the vehicle starts off in 1st gear.
TSB Revision
23-30
cl 992 model> P range
100
80
I I 1
III I /
II
60 Throttle
I
K 1 - 3 in 31 I
I I
/! I 2&3 (2. L1 - I - '-I -' 1 I I I 5000
4Q
20
I 8
0 0
If
f 1000
44 I I
2 (L)
2000 3000 4000
6000
Transfer drive gearspeed(rpm)

I
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120 130 140 150
160 170 180

ZTFA0570
Vehiclespeed(km/h)
E range
100 80 60
_-
I --i-I
27 ~~~
--I J
/
I I I I I
Throttle
i ,/ 1,~ ir ' ng 4ol ,,3~ 40

20
ii
I
0 0 1 0
I/ IA /+F2W
1000 1 10 I 20 I 30 I 40 I 50 2000 3000 4000
il
5000
I
6000 I
Transferdrivegearspeed(rpm) I I I ! I I ! 1 1 I I I I 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 Vehicle speed (km/h)
ZTFAO571
TSB Revision

<From 1993 models> P range
23-31
80 L
0 , 0 I 10 L 20
1000 I 30 1 50
2000
40
5000 4000 3000 Transferdrivegearspeed(rpm) 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I 60 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 70 80 Vehicle speed (km/h)
6000 1 I 160 170 1 180 I 1 c
ZTFA0817
E range
. Ii 11
I I
1000
. 1
2000
L
4000 3000 Transferdrivegearspeed(rpm)

I 1
5000
I
6000
1.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120 130
140 150
160
170 180
ZTFAO818
Vehicle speed (km/h)
i;
TSB Revision
23-32
INSPECTION OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Based on the wiring diagram check whether the continuity and grounding of each harness is OK. 1 Continuity i Normal lmproperconnectionof connectar, damaged or disconnected hamessorincorrectwiringconnection. 1 Reconnecttheconnector; repair or replace the harness.
1: Low temperature side 2: Ground 3: High temperature side --+ Vatythethermo-sensitivepartfromlowtempera3. Oil-temperature ture to high temperature and check the resissensor tance between the terminals 1 and 2. <From 1993 model> Damaged or disconnected wiring 4 Replace the oil-temperature sensor
(resistance: -)
Changes of the resistance continuous and smooth. i Normal ZTFA0821 1: Oil temperature sensor 2: Ground
TSB Revision

Check the resistance between terminals 1 and 4 of the TPS. I Resistance: highorinfinite
23-33
sensor VS) TPS terminal
t
3.5-6.5 kN20C (68F) I
Damaged or disconnected wiring I
Replace the TPS.
imj
Z7FUO535
Check the resistance between terminals 4 and --w Resistance: more or less than 0.4 kW2OC 2 with the engine idling after throttle-valve opening warm-up. (68F) 1 1 Resistance: approx. 0.4 W2OC (68F) I 1 Readjust the TPS installation.
1. Ground 2. Closed throttle position switch 3. output 4. Power
Check for changes of the resistance between --+ Changes of the resisterminals 4 and 2 when the throttle valve is opertance are not continuous. ated from the idling position to the fully open position.
Poor contact
Replace the TPS.
/ Normal
1
Changes of the resistance continuous and I
i i
TSB Revision
23-34

Short-circuit,ordamagedordisconnected wiring 4 Replace the pulse generator,
2 or 3 and 4. Pulse generator terminals 215-275 R/2OC (68F) 1-2: pulse generator A 3-4: pulse generator B J
Normal
6. Pulse generator ---+ Connect the pulse generator and body harness, A or B (checking by and connect an oscilloscope. Check with the an oscilloscope) chassis on a dynamo or with the front wheels raised.
Very low voltage Oscilloscope waveform age waveform between terminals 1 and 2. I
Incorrectinstallationofthepulse generator, or malfunction of the pulse generator. I tion, or replace the pulse gener-
Improper grounding of the pulse generator circuits shielded wir1 ins. I
TFA1328 I With the selector lever at the L position and the engine running at 1,000 rpm, check the voltage waveform between terminals 3 and 4.
Replace the pulse generator.
lncorrectinstallationofthe pulse generator, or malfunction of the pulse generator.
500 mVp-p or higher
1
Noise in thewaveform
1 Correct the installation condition, or replace the pulse generator.
mWpr,r\,
Improper grounding of the pulse generator circuits shielded wiring. 1 Replace the pulse generator.
TFA1328
Normal
TSB Revision

7. Pressure-control sot h solenoidvalveconnectorandthetransaxlecase. i 2.9 f 0.3W2OC (68F) i Connect 12 V between the transaxle case and - No operation noise. terminal 1; switch ON and OFF and check for (stroke: 0.3 mm (.012 operation noise. in.) or less) e too high
23-35
Short-circuit,ordamagedordisconnected wiring i Replace the PCSV. 1
Solenoid valve connector terminals 1: PCS 2: TCC solenoid 3: SCSV-A 4: SCSV-B 21750338
Foreign material caught between the valve and guide 4 Replace the PCSV.
Noise exists.
+
Normal
8. Shift-control solenoid valve (SCSV) A or B
---+ Check the resistance between terminal 3 or 4 ofthesolenoidvalveconnectorandthetransaxle case. I
Short-circuit,ordamagedordisconnected wiring
+
1 22.3 ? 1.5Q/20C (68F) I
t
Replace the SCSV. 1
Connect 12V between the transaxle case and --c No operation noise. (stroke: 0.25 mm terminal 3 or 4; switch ON and OFF and check for operation noise of the solenoid valve, and (.OlO in.) or less) check the valve stroke.
Residue accumulated in valve and core.
4
Noise exists. 1 / Normal
TSB Revision
23-36
clutch system

Pull the parking brake to set it securely. I Set the selector lever to P or N, and start
With the engine idling, depress the foot brake firmly.
Improper adjustment of idling I
Let the engine continue idling.
Readjust the idling. c d Poor closure (sticking) of the / torque converter clutch solenoid. I
/ Normal
Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid.
Sticking of the clutch control valve -
i
Overhaul the valve body.
i Sticking (seizure) of the torque converter clutch -
/ i
Replace the torque converter assemblv.
TSB Revision

10. Torque converter clutch solenoid (KC solenoid) Solenoid valve connector terminals 1: PCS 2: TCC solenoid 3: SCSV-A 4: SCSV-B
21750338
23-37
Short-circuit,ordamagedordisconnected wiring. 1
solenoid valve connector and the transmission case.
t
Standard value: 3 fY2OC (68F) <1992,1993 models> 13 .M?OC (68F) <From 1994 models> Replace the TCC solenoid.
4
Connect 12 V between the transmission case -+ No operation noise. Foreign terminal caught beand terminal 2; switch ON and OFF and check Check for sticking. tween the valve and guide for operation noise. (Valve stroke: in.) or less) I i Replace the TCC solenoid. *Sticking is usually 1 Noise exists. at the release side. I
l
/ Normal
I Check the installation of the acceleratorswitch;adjustifnecessarv.
l-
11. Accelerator switch
cl992 model only
the resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
(resistance: -)
Continuity exists (resiitance: 0) I With the accelerator pedal depressed slightly (aboutli%), check the resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
2171096 1
i
/ Problem not solved. i Replace the accelerator switch.
/ L
No continuity (resistance: -) 1 1 Normal I
TSB Revision
23-38
12. Park/neutral position switch cl992 models

In the P range, check for continuity between terminals 3 and 4, and terminals 8 and 9. 1 1 Continuity exists I
In the R range, check for continuity between terminals 4 and 7, and terminals 10 and 11.
21750339 I
I Continuity exists
In the N range, check for continuity between terminals 2 and 4. and terminals 8 and 9.
c No continuity In the D range, check for continuity between
Poor contact, or damaged or disconnected wiring.
4
/ ContinuiD/ exists Replace the park/ neutral position switch.
In the 2 range, check for continuity between terminals 1 and 4. I I Continuity exists
In the I range, check for continuity between terminals 4 and 5.
i
Continuity exists 1 1Normal
TSB Revision

In the P range, check for continuity between terminals 3 and 4, and terminals 7 and 8.
23-39
i
1Continuity exists
In the R range, check for continuity between teninals 2 and 3, and terminals 5 and 6. 1 I Continuitv exists ZTFA0802 In the R range, check for continuity between terminals 2 and 3. and terminals 5 and 6.
/ Continuity exists
1
1
Poor contact, or damaged or disconnected wiring. i Replace the park/neutral position switch. 1
In the D range, check for continuity between terminals 3 and 10.
/ Continuity exists
In the 2 range, check for continuity between terminals 3 and 11
Continuity exists 1 In the L range, check for continuity between terminals 3 and 9. I
I Continuity exists
Normal
TSB Revision
23-40
servo switch

I
Poor contact, or damaged or disconnected wiring
switch terminal and the transaxle case.
-cl 992 model>

Continuity exists
+
I
Replace the K/D servo switch.
L/
1 Dl
ZTFA0389
t
Start the engine, set to the D range, and let the engine idle: check for continuity between the kickdown servo switch terminal and the Continuity exists 1Poor contact (sticking) I
t
Replace the K/D servo switch.
<From 1993 model>
1 0 43
ZTFA0809 15. Transaxle control module (TCM)
No continuity
Normal - Disconnect the harness (both A and B connec- --+ tors) from the vehicles TCM. Then connect, via an intermediate harness for checking, a new TCM to this harness and make a road test. I
Install a new TCM.
Consider the original TCM to be normal, and again check the sensors, wiring, etc.
i
Same problem (as before TCM exchange) 1occurs.
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshooting HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TESTS
23-41
I pressure(d)Front clutch &t& pressure (h)Torque I\ I converter pressure

I _ pressure
S Ir I ZTFA0333
1. Completely warm up the transaxle. 2. Raise the vehicle by using a jack so that the front wheels can be rotated. 3. Connect an engine tachometer and place it in a position where its easy to see. 4. Attach the special oil-pressure gauge (MD998330 or MD999563) and the adaptor (MD998332) to each oil-pressure outlet port. When the reverse position pressure is to be tested, the 3,000 kPa (400 psi) type of gauge should be used. 5. Measure the hydraulic pressure under various conditions, and check to be sure that the measured results are within the standard value range shown in the Standard oil pressure table below. If the oil pressure is not within the specified range, check and repair as described in the section Remedial action to take for inadequate hydraulic pressure on the next page.
STANDARD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TABLE

Conditions No. Select lever position N D PSW-ON, ;wOFF) 5 6 2 L Engine speed wm Idling Idling APP~~X 2,500 Approx 2,500 Approx 2,500 Approx 1,000 Approx 2,500 7 R Approx 1,000 verse Re360-480 (51-68) (W IUD brake pressure (application) 100-210 (14-30) 830-900 (118-128) 830-900 (118-128) 830-900 (118-128) 1,6402,240 (233-319) 1,000 (142) or more 1,6402,240 (233-319) 1,000 (142) or more 830-900 (118-128) 830-900 (118-128) 830-900 (118-128) 830-900 (118-128) 830-900 (118-128) 730-830 (104-118) 830-900 (118-128) 830-900 (118-128) 300-450 (43-64) 1,6402,240 (233-319) 1,000 (142) or more Standard oil pressure kPa (psi) (a) Reducing pressure 360-480 (51-68) 360-480 (51-68) 360-480 (51-68) 360-480 (51-68) 360-480 (51-68) 360-480 (51-68) 360-480 (51-68) CC) WD brake pressure (release) Cd) Front clutch pressure W Rear clutch pressure (9) Low-reverse brake pressure (W Torque converter pressure
Gear position
0) End clutch pressure
1 2 3 4
Neutral 2nd 4th 3rd
* * 450-650 (64-92) 450-650 (64-92) 450-650 (64-92) * 450-650 (64-92) 450-650 (84-92)
2nd 1st Reverse
NOTE (1) -: Indicates pressure is below 10 kPa (1.4 psi). (2) SW-ON: OD switch in ON position. (3) SW-OFF: OD switch in OFF position. (4) *: Pressure is not standard.
1 TSB Revision
23-42
Symptom 1. All line pressures are low (or high). NOTE: Line pressures are (WY (cl, (4, (e), (0 and (g) shown on the Standard Oil Pressure Table on the preceding page.
REMEDIAL ACTION TO TAKE FOR INADEQUATE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE

Possible cause Plugged oil filter Improperly adjusted regulator valve line pressure Defective valve body assembly Valve body left loose Improper oil pump delivery pressure 2. Improper reducing pressure Plugged reducing pressure circuit filter (L-shaped) Improperly adjusted reducing pressure Defective valve body assembly 3. Improper K/D brake pressure (application) 4. Improper K/D brake pressure (release) 5. Improper front clutch pressure Defective seal ring (1) and D-ring (2) of K/D servo piston and seal ring (3) of sleeve Defective valve body assembly Defective seal ring (1) and D-ring (2) of K/D servo piston and seal ring (3) of sleeve Defective valve body assembly Defective seal ring (1) and D-ring (2) of K/D servo piston and seal ring (3) of sleeve Defective valve body assembly Worn front clutch piston and retainer or defective D-ring (4) or seal ring (5) Remedy Visually check oil filter and replace it if plugged. Measure line pressure (b) (K/D brake pressure) and readjust line pressure if it is out of specifications. Or, replace valve body assembly. Replace valve body assembly. Torque valve body clamp bolt and mounting bolt to specification. Check oil pump gear side clearance pump assembly as necessary.
and replace oil
Disassemble valve body assembly to check filter and replace filter if it is plugged. Measure reducing pressure (a) and readjusts as necessary. Replace valve body assembly. Disassemble K/D servo and check seal ring and D-ring for damage. Replace seal ring or D-ring if damaged or scratched. Replace valve body assembly. Disassemble K/D servo and check seal ring and D-ring for damage. Replace seal ring or D-ring if damaged or scratched. Replace valve body assembly. Disassemble K/D servo and check seal ring and D-ring for damage. Replace seal ring or D-ring if damaged or scratched. Replace valve body assembly. Disassemble transaxle and check front clutch piston and retainer for wear and D-ring and seal ring for damage. Replace piston, retainer, D-ring, or seal ring as necessary. Disassemble rear clutch and check input shaft D-ring, center support seal ring, and piston D-ring; replace if damaged or scratched. Replace valve body assembly. Disassemble the end clutch and check piston oil seal, D-ring, and center support seal ring; replace if damage or scratches are evident. Replace valve body assembly. Remove valve body assembly and check O-ring on top of upper valve body; replace if damage or scratches are evident. Replace valve body assembly. Disassemble transaxle and check D-ring and O-ring; replace if damage or scratches are evident Check torque converter clutch system and TCC solenoid for operation. Repair or replace cooler or pipings. Disassemble transaxle and check seal ring; replace if it is damaaed. Replace torque converter.
6. Improper rear clutch pressure
Defective D-ring (6) of piston, seal ring (7) of retainer, and seal ring (8) and D-ring (9) of input shaft Defective valve body assembly Defective seal ring (IO), D-ring (11) and oil seal (12) of end clutch Defective valve body assembly
7. Improper end clutch pressure
3. Improper low-reverse brake pressure
Damaged O-ring between valve body and transmission Defective valve body assembly Defective D-ring (13) of piston or O-ring (14) of center support.
3. Improper torque converter pressure
Sticking torque converter clutch solenoid (TCC solenoid) or torque converter clutch control valve Plugged or leaky oil cooler and pipings Damaged seal ring (15) of input shaft Defective torque converter
1TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshootina
-l
I-\
(5) Seal ring \
(7) Seal ring \ (4) D-ring\
(14) O-ring I (12) Oil seal D-ring
\ ii \\
(6) D-ring
(8) Seal ring /
(15) Seal ring /
Rear clutch Front clutch
(13) O-ring I
Low-reverse brake
End &tch
(10) SeaI ring
(1) Seal ring
--- (2) Seal ring
brake
c
1TSB Revision
23-44
CONVERTER STALL TEST

Stall test consist of determining maximum engine speed obtained at full throttle in D and R positions. This test checks torque converter stator overrunning clutch operation, and holding ability of transaxle clutches and low-reverse brake. 7. Place selector lever to R position and perform stall test by the same procedure as in foregoing item.
Caution
During this test, make sure that no one stand in front of or behind vehicle. 1. Check transmission fluid level. Fluid should be at normal operating temperature [70-80C (158-176F)]. Engine coolant should also be at normal operating temperature [80-90C (176-194F)]. 2. Apply chocks to both rear wheels. 3. Attach engine tachometer. 4. Apply parking and service brakes fully. 5. Start engine. 6. With selector lever in D position, depress accelerator pedal fully to read engine maximum rpm. Do not hold throttle wide open any longer than is necessary to obtain maximum engine rpm reading, and never longer than 5 seconds at a time. If more than one stall test is required, operate engine at approximately 1,000 rpm in neutral for 2 minutes to cool transmission fluid between tests. Stall speed: 2,200-3,200 rpm
Stall Speed Above Specification in D If stall speed is higher than specification, rear clutch or overrunning clutch of transaxle is slipping. In this case, perform hydraulic test to locate cause of slippage. Stall Speed Above Specification in R If stall speed is higher than specification, front clutch of transaxle or low-reverse brake is slipping. In this case, perform hydraulic test to locate cause of slippage. Stall Speed Below Specification in D and R If stall speed is lower than specification, insufficient engine output or faulty torque converter is suspected. Check for engine misfiring, ignition timing, valve clearance, etc. If these are good, torque converter is faulty.
TRANSAXLE CONTROL Symptom Selector lever operation

is stiff
T
i
Starter motor does not operate with the selector lever in the N or F position Malfunction of starter rela Will not shift to 4-speed
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Troubleshooting A/T SAFETY-LOCK SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Selector lever can be selected into R from P without depressing brake pedal with ignition key in a position other than LOCK. Selector lever cannot be selected into R from P by depressing brake pedal with ignition key in position other than LOCK. Probable cause Damaged lock cam B Improperly adjusted shift lock cable, broken inner cable, loose or off connections Remedy Check and replace lock cam B. Check, adjust or replace the shift lock cable.
23-45
Ref. page 23-59 2357
Broken or sagging outer cable (shift lock Check and replace shift lock 23-56 cable) return spring cable. Defective selector lever assembly Sticking shift lock cable, key interlock cable, and transaxle control cable. Foreign matter wedged in lock cams A and B Improperly adjusted shift lock cable, elongated inner cable Sticking slide lever and cam lever inside key cylinder Check and replace selector lever assembly. 23-55
Check and replace shift lock 23-55 cable, key interlock cable, and transaxle control cable. Check and adjust lock cams A and B. Check, adjust, and replace shift lock cable. Check and adjust slide lever and cam lever. Check and replace lock cam A. Check and replace key interlock cable. 23-59 23-56 23-56 23-59 23-56
/ I/
Selector lever can be selected into R from P when brake pedal is depressed even though the ignition key is in the LOCK position. Selector lever operation from P to R is not smooth.
Damaged lock cam A Broken or disconnected key interlock cable Damaged slide lever and cam lever inside key cylinder Improperly adjusted key interlock cable Improperly adjusted shift lock cable, elongated inner cable Binding lock cams A and B (in rotation) Defective selector lever assembly Binding slide lever inside key cylinder
Check and replace slide lever 23-56 and cam lever. Check and adjust key interlock 23-58 cable. Check, adjust, and replace shift lock cable. Check rotating parts of lock cams A and B. Check and replace selector lever assembly. Check slide lever and cam lever. 23-56 23-59 23-55 23-56
, i
TSB Revision
23-46
Symptom Selector lever cannot be shifted from R to P.

Probable cause Defective selector lever assembly Improperly adjusted transaxle control cable Remedy Check and replace selector lever assembly. Adjust transaxle control cable. Check and replace lock cams A and B. Ref. page 23-55 .\j 23-57 23-59
Ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK posi!iiFinwp selector le-
Foreign matter wedged in lock cams A and B
Improperly adjusted key interlock cable, Check, adjust, and replace key 23-56 sticking inner cable interlock cable. Binding slide lever inside key cylinder Ignition key can be Damaged lock cam A turned to LOCK position even with selec- Loose key cylinder cover tor lever in position Broken key interlock cable, loose connecother than P. tions, elongated inner cable Damaged cam lever inside key cylinder Buzzer does not Defective buzzer sound even when selector lever is placed Open-circuited buzzer circuit harness in R position. Defective park/neutral position switch Improperly adjusted transaxle control cable Check slide lever. Check and replace lock cam A. Check and retighten cover. Check and replace key interlock 23-56 23-59 23-56 23-56 23-56 23-56 -
cable.
Check and replace cam lever. Check and replace buzzer. Check or correct harness.
Check and replace park/neutral position switch. Adjust transaxle control cable. 23-55
I L.&j
I 1 I I
d [ TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - On-vehicle Service
23-47
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL CHECK
i
TRANSMISSION FLUID REPLACEMENT

KICKDOWN SERVO ADJUSTMENT

(1) Remove dust, dirt, and other contaminants completely from kickdown (K/D) servo cover and surrounding areas. (2) Snap off the snap ring and remove K/D servo switch. (3) Fit claw of special tool into cutout in piston to prevent piston from turning and use adapter to fix the piston into position. Caution 1. Do not push piston with the special tool. 2. Secure adapter only hand-tight to L/R brake pressure take-up port and do not apply excessive torque. (4) Loosen lock nut to immediately before V-groove in adjust rod (see illustration on left) and tighten special tool (Inner Wrench) until it contacts lock nut.
(5) Fit special tool (Outer Wrench) over the lock nut. Turn Outer Wrench counterclockwise and turn inner cylinder clockwise to lock the lock nut and special tool (Inner Wrench).
(6) Fit torque wrench to special tool (Inner Wrench) and repeat tightening and loosening cycle two times with a torque of 10 Nm (7.2 ftlbs.). Then, torque-to 5 Nm (3.6 ftlbs.). Next, back off special tool (Inner Wrench) 2 to 214 turns.
TSB Revision
23-48

-I
(7) Fit special tool (Outer Wrench) to lock nut. Turn Outer Wrench clockwise and Inner Wrench counterclockwise to unlock the lock nut from special tool (Inner Wrench). Caution Be sure to apply even torque to the two special tools when unlocking.
(8) Tighten lock nut by hand until it contacts piston. Then, using torque wrench, tighten to specification. Lock nut: 29 Nm (21 ft.lbs.) Caution Use of socket wrench or torque wrench could result in lock nut being turned with adjust rod. (9) Remove the special tool to secure the piston and torque plug to specification at UR brake pressure take-up port.
LINE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

(1) Discharge ATF. (2) Remove oil pan. (3) Remove oil filter. (4) Remove oil temperature sensor.
(5) Press solenoid valve harness grommet catch to push in grommet; then, remove valve body assembly. Caution Do not let manual valve fall.
(6) Turn adjusting screw of regulator valve to obtain the specified line pressure (K/D brake pressure). Standard value: 870-890 kPa (124-127 psi) Oil pressure change for each turn of adjustment screw: 38 kPa (5.4 psi)
TSB Revision
23-49
(7) Check that an O-ring is fitted at the location shown on top of valve body. (8) Replace O-ring of solenoid valve intermediate grommet with a new one and then fit the O-ring into case.
4992 model>
(9) Install valve body and oil temperature sensor. Bolt A = Length 18 mm (.71 in.) Bolt B = Length 25 mm (.98 in.) Bolt C = Length 40 mm (1.57 in.) Caution Secure solenoid valve and oil temperature sensor harness at locations shown. Especially the pressure control solenoid valve (PCSV) harness must be routed and clamped as shown in the illustration since it is separated from other harnesses. Failure to secure the harness results in its contact with the detent plate or parking rod. (1O)lnstall oil filter. (11) Install new oil pan gasket and oil pan. (12)Add the specified amount of ATF. (13)Carry out hydraulic test. Readjust as necessary.
<From 1993 model>
TSB Revision
23-50
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - On-vehicle Service REDUCING PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

When scan tool is not used (1) Following the same steps as those in line pressure adjustment, remove parts up to oil filter. There is no need to remove valve body.
(2) Turn adjusting screw of lower valve body to obtain the specified reducing pressure. Turn it counterclockwise to increase the pressure. Standard value: 425 + 10 kPa (60 & 1 psi) Oil pressure change for each turn of adjusting screw: 45 kPa (6 psi)
(3) In the same way as in line pressure adjustment, install oil filter and oil pan. (4) Perform hydraulic test. Adjust as necessary. When scan tool is used (1) Use scan tool to measure the K/D brake apply pressure when the pressure control solenoid valve is force-driven at 50% duty. If the K/D brake apply pressure is not within the specified limit, make readjustment by using the reducing pressure adjustment screw. Standard value: 275 kPa (39 psi) Oil pressure change for each turn of adjusting screw: 22 kPa (3 psi) (2) After adjustment has been made, check that the reducing pressure is in the range 360-480 kPa (51-68 psi). Caution This adjustment should be made with oil temperature 70-80C (158-176F). The adjustment made with high oil temperature could result in improper adjustment due to a line pressure drop at idle.
( TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - On-vehicle Service ACCELERATOR SWITCH CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT (1992 model)
23-51
09FO117
Check that current flows between terminals of accelerator switch when accelerator pedal is in free state and that no current flows when the pedal is depressed and the specified stroke A is obtained. Standard value: 2-6 mm (.079-.24 in.) If stroke A is out of specification, adjust with adjusting bolt.
09FOO19 00001846
SELECTOR LEVER OPERATION CHECK

r---Push button
my) 4 by) &,t t + m* Q II Lo

zo9Foo61
@J Button pressed (while brake pedal is depressed) c Button not pressed c3 Button pressed
Shift selector lever to each range and check that lever moves smoothly and clicks into position. Check that position indicator is correct. 2. Check to be sure the selector lever can be shifted to each position (by button operation as shown in the illustration). 3. Start the engine and check if the vehicle moves forward when the selector lever is shifted from N to D, and moves backward when shifted to R. 4. When the shift lever malfunctions, adjust control cable and selector lever sleeve. Check for worn shift lever assembly sliding parts. NOTE To move the selector lever from the p,l position to any other position, first turn the ignition key to any position other than LOCK and depress the brake pedal. 1.
KEY INTERLOCK MECHANISM CHECK

. Completely stop the vehicle and switch OFF the engine before making the check 1. Check to be sure that, under the following conditions, the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position to any other position. Also check, at the same time, that the button cannot be pressed. Ignition key position: LOCK or removed
Brake pedal: Depressed

TSB Revision
23-52

2. Check to be sure that, under the following conditions, the selector lever can be moved from the P position to any other position. Press the button a few times and check to be sure that the selector lever moves smoothly. Ignition key position: ACC Brake pedal: Depressed Button: Pressed
3. Check to be sure that, at all positions of the selector lever (other than P), the ignition key cannot be turned to the LOCK position. Check to be sure that the ignition key smoothly turns to the LOCK position when the selector lever is then set to the P position and the button is released. 4. If above are not checked okay, adjust key interlock cable mechanism as follows. (1) Remove front console assembly. (2) Place selector lever into P position. (3) Turn ignition key to the LOCK position. (4) Loosen nut that secures key interlock cable. (5) Lightly pressing lock cam A in the direction of arrow, lightly push key interlock cable to take up slack and tighten nut to secure key interlock cable. (6) Reinstall front console assembly.
SHIFT LOCK MECHANISM CHECK

1. j. -2:
Push button Brake
Check to be sure that, under the following conditions, the selector lever cannot be moved from the P position to any other position. Ignition key position: ACC
Brake pedal: Not depressed

2.
09PO105 00001850
Button: Pressed Check to be sure that, under the following conditions, the selector lever can be moved smoothly from the P position to any other position. Ignition key position: ACC Brake pedal: Depressed
Button: Pressed
Brake
09PO104 00001851
Check to be sure that, under the following conditions, the selector lever can be moved smoothly from the R position to the P position. Ignition key position: ACC Brake pedal: Released Button: Pressed 4. If a malfunction is discovered when following the above checking procedures, either adjust or check the shift lock cable mechanism.
3.
TSB Revision

Manual control lever
23-53
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH AND CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT

1. Place selector lever in N (Neutral) position. 2. Loosen transaxle control cable to manual control coupling adjusting nut to set cable and lever free. 3. Place manual control lever in N (Neutral) position. 4. For adjustment, loosen the park/neutral position switch body mounting bolt, and turn park/neutral position switch body so that the end (section A-A in illustration on left) of manual control lever is aligned with the hole in park/neutral position switch body flange. 5. Tighten the mounting bolts of the park/neutral position switch body to the specified torque. Be careful at this time that the position of the switch body is not changed. Specified torque: lo-12 Nm (7-9 klbs.)
TFA0359
Mounting
bolt
Section A-A
Hole in end
iole in lange
Manual control lever Park/neutral position switch body
09COO89 00001852
Lightly pull the transaxle control cable in the arrow direction, and tighten the adjusting nut to the specified torque. Specified torque: 13 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 7. Check that the selector lever is in N position. 8. Check that it securely operates and functions on the transaxle side in the range which corresponds to each position of the selector lever. 6.

(1) Disconnect the drive shaft from the transaxle. (Refer to GROUP 26 - Drive Shaft.) (2) Using a flat-tip (-) screwdriver, remove the oil seal.
L.H. side\
. .
03K567
\ Front exhaust pipe
TSB Revision
23-54

(3) Using the special tool, tap the drive shaft oil seal into the transaxle. Note in illustration the direction of installation of drive shaft oil seal. (4) Apply a coating of the transmission fluid to the lip of the oil seal. Transmission fluid: DIA QUEEN ATF SP or equivalent
Transaxle side I,
Oil seal lip
22200037
SPEEDOMETER CABLE REPLACEMENT <Up to 1993 models>

1. Correctly insert the adapter into the instrument panel, and fasten the new speedometer cable.
LJ
209FOO8.3
2.
Install the grommet so that, as shown in the illustration, the cable attachment part and the projecting part are horizontal.
Caution
The cable arrangement should be made so that the radius of cable bends is 150 mm (5.9 in.) or more.
3.
At the transaxle end of the speedometer cable, the key joint should be inserted into the transaxle, and the nut should be securely tightened. Caution If the cable is not correctly and securely connected, it may cause incorrect indication by the speedometer, or abnormal noise. Be sure to connect it correctly.
d
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Control
23-55
TRANSAXLE CONTROL L/
l
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Front Console Assembly Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.)
When re;oving and installing the front con shock to the SRS diagnosis unit.
12 Nm / 9 ft.lbs.
7 ft.lbs.
209FOO31
Transaxle control cable removal steps 1. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose ,C+ 4. Transaxle control cable assembly connection (Select lever assembly side) 5. Transaxle control cable assembly 6. Clamp 7. Adjuster
Selector lever assembly removal steps 1. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose FE+ 2. Key-interlock cable connection (Selector lever assembly side) .04 3. Shift-lock cable connection (Selector lever assembly side) .C+ 4. Transaxle control cable connection (Selector lever assembly side) 8. Selector lever assembly
I id [ TSB Revision
23-56
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
17
L) 9 tt.lbS. i
IClYNm 7ft.lbs.
09FOO35 00001854
Key-interlock cable removal steps .Ed 2. Key-interlock cable connection (Selector lever assembly side) 9. Transaxle control module connection 10. Knee protector (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) 11. Column cover lower 12. Cover .B+ 13. Cam lever .B+ 14. Key-interlock cable .B+ 15. Slide lever 16. Cable guide 17. Clamp
Shift-lock cable removal steps .Dq 3. Shift-lock cable connection (Selector lever assembly side) 9. Transaxle control module connection .A4 18. Shift-lock cable 19. Clamp Reverse (R) position alarm buzzer removal 20. Reverse (R) position alarm buzzer
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Control INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS
23-57
bAASHIFT LOCK CABLE CONNECTION (BRAKE PEDAL SIDE) Connect the shift lock cable so that its threads measure about 4 mm (.16 in.). Caution Do not change the routing of shift lock cable to the selector lever assembly.
ZO9FOO21
YO9FOO5
,BdSLlDE LEVER / KEY INTERLOCK CABLE (STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY SIDE) / CAM LEVER INSTALLATION (1) Place the ignition key at the LOCK position or keep it removed. (2) Install the slide lever, key interlock cable, and cam lever to the steering lock assembly as shown. Caution Do not change the routing of key interlock cable to the selector lever assembly. .Cd TRANSAXLE CONTROL CABLE CONNECTION (SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY SIDE) Connect the transaxle control cable, then make the following adjustment. (1) Place the selector lever in N position. (2) Loosen the nut and slightly pull the transaxle control cable in the direction of the arrow; then, tighten the nut.
,DdSHlFT LOCK CABLE CONNECTION (SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY SIDE) (1) Place the selector lever in P position. (2) Disconnect the key interlock cable from the selector lever assembly side. (3) Turn the lock cam B counterclockwise (arrow (1)) to move the set lever upward (arrow (2)). (4) Fit the cutout in set lever to the lock pin of lock cam B.
Set lever
Fixing pin
(5) Connect the shift lock cable to lock cam B and temporarily tighten the nut. At this time, install the spring and washer, which have been fitted to the shift lock cable, as shown. (6) Pressing the set lever to prevent lock cam B from moving, lightly pull the shift lock cable to take up slack and tighten the nut to secure the shift lock cable into position. NOTE Make sure that the shift lock cable end is in contact with the fixing pin of lock cam B as shown, then install the washer and snap pin.
1 TSB Revision
23-58
m

Lock cam A
(7) Connect the key interlock cable to lock cam A and temporarily tighten the nut. At this time, install the spring and washer, which have been fitted to the key interlock cable, as shown. (8) Lightly pressing lock- cam A in the direction of arrow, lightly push the key interlock cable to take up slack and tighten the nut to secure the key interlock cable in position.
209N0049
I ock cam A
(9) Turn the set lever and fit it onto the fixing pin on lock cam A, then install the snap pin. (10)After the key interlock cable has been connected, check the shift lock and key interlock mechanism. (Refer to P.23-51, 52.)
Look cam A
Wa
,Ed KEY INTERLOCK CABLE CONNECTION (SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY SIDE) (1) Place the selector lever into P position. (2) Connect the key interlock cable to lock cam A and temporarily tighten the nut. At this time, install the spring and washer, which have been fitted to the key interlock cable, as shown. (3) Lightly pressing lock cam A in the direction of arrow, lightly push the key interlock cable to take up slack and tighten the nut to secure the key interlock cable in position. (4) Turn the set lever and fit it onto the fixing pin on lock cam A, then install the snap pin. (5) After the key interlock cable has been connected, check the key interlock mechanism. (Refer to P.23-51.)
ZO9N0049
Lock cam A
Reverse (R) position alarm buzzer
INSPECTION
Check the control cable for function and for damage. Check the outer cable (key interlock cable, shift lock cable) for damage and spring for breakage and tension. l Check the inner cable (key interlock cable, shift lock cable) for extension. REVERSE (R) POSITION ALARM BUZZER CHECK Check that the buzzer sounds when battery voltage is applied across terminals.
l
209P0094
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Selector Lever Assembly
SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY

6 -/7
16
1.6
ft.lbs.
1 11 0
09FO108
2.0 1.6
238
26
d
A.
27
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
09FOO39 00001855
4W
4W 4B,
/ Ld
Disassembly steps 1. Overdrive control switch, position light and Power (PWR)/Economy (ECO)/Hold (HOLD) changeover switch connector 2. Cover 3. Selector knob 4. Overdrive control switch button 5. Overdrive control switch 6. Pin 7. Pushbutton 8. Spring 9. Indicator panel 10. Power (PWR)/Economy (ECO)/Hold (HOLD) changeover switch connector 11. Slider 12. Indicator panel lower
13. Socket assembly .A+ ;;. ;leve 16: 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. Lever assembly Bushing Pipe Cotter pin Washer Lock cam B Spring Cotter pin Washer Set lever Lock cam A Bracket assembly
1 TSB Revision
23-60
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Selector Lever Assembly DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

Terminal
+A, OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CONNECTOR REMOVAL Disconnect the overdrive control switch connector and then remove the terminal from the overdrive control switch connector.
Screwdriver
ZOQR0054
qB,OVERDRlVE CONTROL SWITCH BUTTON / OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL (1) Using the flat-tip screwdriver, remove the overdrive control switch button. (2) Remove the overdrive control switch mounting screw. (3) Pressing the switch, remove the overdrive control switch.
Lever assembly
i=
a
/ A

,A( SLEEVE INSTALLATION Place the selector lever in the N position, and then turn the sleeve so that the clearance between the sleeve and the lever assembly end is within the standard value. Standard value (A): 15.2-15.9 mm (.598-.625 in.)
Sleeve
zos*ooo8
INSPECTION
l l l
2 (GW
1 (LW /
Check the detent plate for wear. Check the bushing for wear or damage. Check the spring for damage or deterioration.
09FOO99
09FOlOO 00001857
POWER (PWR)/ECONOMY (ECO)/HOLD (HOLD) SWITCH CHECK Check for continuity between terminals when the switch is OFF and when ON.
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Selector Lever Assembly

OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CHECK
ON
23-61
id
OFF*
6 (RW) (Bw) \ i
Check for continuity between terminals when the switch is OFF and when ON. 1 Switch position
I .
Terminal No.
/
1 ON (Overdrive activation)
09FOO99
09FO101 00001858
1 0
I-+-oI
OFF (Overdrive non-activation)
TSB Revision
23-62
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Oil Cooler, Hoses, Tubes
TRANSAXLE OIL COOLER, HOSES, TUBES

l
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Automatic Transmission Fluid Drainage and Filling (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.)
Front Under Cover Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.)
<Vehicles with oil cooler>

4.0 N m 10 - /- 2.9 ft.lbs; \
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
30-35 Nm 22-25 ft.lbs.
4.0 Nm 2.9 ft.lbs.

09FO,16 00001859
4Ab
:t: 4Ab
1. Hose 2. Tube assembly 3. Feed hose 4. Return hose Hose assembly removal steps 5. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose 6. Hose assembly
Tube assembly removal steps 7. Front splash shield extension +C, .A+ 8 p/ftb?) 9: Tube assembly Transaxle oil cooler removal steps 7. Front splash shield extension (right side) +Cb .A( 8. Eye bolt 10. Transaxle oil cooler
4Bb
\ d
TSB Revision
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Oil Cooler. Hoses. Tubes REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
dA,HOSE / TUBE ASSEMBLY / FEED HOSE / RETURN HOSE REMOVAL
23-63
Caution Be careful not to spill the transmission fluid when removing components.
AB, HOSE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Caution 1. When removing the hose assembly; be careful not to allow the transmission fluid to spill. 2. After removing the hose assembly, plug so that foreign materials cannot enter the transaxle.
(C, EYE BOLT REMOVAL (1) Wipe the connection threads and tightly contacting surfaces clean of dust and dirt. (2) Secure the oil cooler connector with a spanner to prevent excessive force from being applied to it, then loosen the eye bolt.
209FOO95

.A4 EYE BOLT INSTALLATION (1) Wipe the connection threads and tightly contacting surfaces clean of dust and dirt. (2) Secure the oil cooler connector with a spanner to prevent excessive force from being applied to it, then tighten the eye bolt.
ZOSFOO95
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the hose for crack, damage and clog. Check for rusted or clogged radiator oil cooler. Check oil cooler fins for bend, damage, and clogged foreign matter.
1 TSB Revision
23-64
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assembly
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION I
Pre-removal Operation l Place Selector Lever in N Position and Stop the Engine. l Transaxle Fluid Draining (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Front Under Cover Removal (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.)
I
Post-installation Operation l Front Under Cover Installation (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.) l Transaxle Fluid Supplying (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) l Selector Lever Operation Check 0 Speedometer Operation Check
51 ft.lbs.
70 Nm 51 ft.lbs.
ZOSFO112
OSFOO61 00001860
Removal steps 1. Side under cover 2. Battery
3. Battery seat, Washer tank
9. Pulse generator connector 10. Oil temperature sensor connector 11. Shift control solenoid valve connector
8. Kickdown servo switch connector
4. Air cleaner cover, Air intake hose .C4 5. Transaxle control cable connection 6. Oil cooler hose connection 7. Park/neutral position switch connector TSB Revision
l b
12. Speedometer cable <Up to 1993 models> or speedometer connector <From 1994 models> connection 13. Transaxle mount bracket connection I
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assembly

75 Nm
!iA ftlhc . .
23-65
75 Nm
60. 43.
60-70 Nm 43-51 ft.lbs. 26 ft.lbs.

ZO9FOO88
L ::: 4C,
14. Transaxle assembly upper part coupling bolt 15. Tie rod end connection 16. Lower arm ball joint connection 17. Right member 18. Starter 19. Drive shaft (left side), Inner shaft assembly
++ .B+ 20. Drive shaft (right side) 21. Transaxle stay (front bank side) 22. Transaxle stay (rear bank side) 23. Bell housing cover 24. Special bolts ::: 25. Transaxle assembly lower part coupling bolt 4D, .A+ 26. Transaxle assembly

+AbTRANSAXLE MOUNT BRACKET DISCONNECTION (1) Raise the transaxle assembly with a jack up to a level where no weight is applied to the mount bracket. Caution When raising the transaxle assembly, make sure it is supported over a wide area and no local force is being applied. TSB Revision
23-66
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - Transaxle Assemblv

(2) Remove the nut and move the bolt so that a spanner can be applied to the transaxle mount bracket mounting bolt; then, remove the transaxle mount bracket mounting bolt. +B,TIE ROD END / LOWER ARM BALL JOINT DISCONNECTION Refer to GROUP 22 - Manual Transaxle. dC,DRlVE SHAFT (LEFT SIDE) AND INNER SHAFT ASSEMBLY / DRIVE SHAFT (RIGHT SIDE) REMOVAL Refer to GROUP 22 - Manual Transaxle. (D, SPECIAL BOLTS / TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY LOWER PART COUPLING BOLT / TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL (1) Support the transaxle assembly with the transaxle jack. (2) Rotating the crankshaft, remove the special bolts at four places. (3) After removing the special bolts, push the torque converter toward transaxle so that it does not remain on the engine side. (4) Remove coupling bolt at the bottom of transaxle assembly and lower the transaxle assembly.
~ d
bracket installation

.A+ TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Attach the torque converter on the transaxle side and mount the transaxle assembly on the engine. Caution If the torque converter is mounted first on the engine, the oil seal on the transaxle side may be damaged. Therefore, be sure to first assemble the torque converter on the transaxle side. ,B( DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION (RIGHT SIDE) Refer to GROUP 22 - Manual Transaxle. \, I I
,Cq TRANSAXLE CONTROL CABLE CONNECTION (1) Connect the transaxle control cable to the manual control lever and tighten the nut temporarily. (2) Loosen the nut, pull the transaxle control cable lightly in the arrow direction and retighten the nut.
1 TSB Revision
PROPELLER SHAFT
CONTENTS
PROPELLER SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SPECIAL TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Lubricants.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
25-2 SPECIFICATIONS
PROPELLER SHAFT - Specifications
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS PROPELLER SHAFT

Items Specifications 4 joint propeller shaft Front Center Rear Length x O.D. mm (in.) <From 1994 models> Front Center Rear 673.5 x 65 (26.52 x 2.56) 662.5 x 65 (26.08 x 2.56) 555.5 x 75 (21.87 x 2.95) 698.5 x 65 (27.50 x 2.56) 662.5 x 65 (26.08 x 2.56) 555.5 x 65 (21.87 x 2.56)
Type
Length x O.D. mm (in.) cup to 1993 models>
UNIVERSAL JOINT
Items Type No. 1 (front) No. 2 (center front) No. 3 (center rear) [Lobro joint] No. 4 (rear) Lubrication Size mm (in.) Cross type joint journal O.D. Constant velocity joint O.D. Specifications Cross type Cross type Constant velocity type Cross type Pre-packed type 16 (.63) 99.73 (3.93)
NOTE Propeller shaft length indicates the length between the center points of each joint.
Items Propeller shaft runout (Dial indicator reading) mm (in.) Front Center Rear Limit 0.6 (.024) or less 0.6 (.024) or less 0.6 (.024) or less
LUBRICANTS
Items Sleeve yoke surface Lobro joint assembly Outer and inner races ball grooves Lobro joint assembly inner part Specified lubricant Hypoid Gear Oil/API classification GL-4, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W Repair kit grease Repair kit grease Quantity As required As required 45-55 g (1.59-l .94 oz.)
ADHESIVE
Item Lobro joint rubber packing Specified adhesive 3M ATD Part No. 8155 or equivalent
TSB Revision
PROPELLER SHAFT - Propeller Shaft
Special tool / Troubleshooting /
25-3
SPECIAL TOOL
Tool Tool number and name MB991193 Plug
W I
Supersession General service tool
Application Prevention of entry of foreign objects into the transaxle and transfer
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Noise at start Probable cause Worn journal bearing Worn sleeve yoke spline Loose propeller shaft installation Noise and vibration at high speed Unbalanced propeller shaft Worn journal bearing Remedy Replace Replace Retighten Replace Replace
PROPELLER SHAFT
lOGO
Gear oil: Hypoid Gear Oil / API classification GL-4, SAE 75W-90 or 75W-85W
22 ft.lbs. ION0013
00001024
Removal steps 1. Self-locking nut FBI 2. Insulator
:;f& NM i. g;gp shaft
TSB Revision
25-4
Mating marks

/,

+Ab PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL (1) Make mating marks on the differential companion flange and flange yoke.
ProDeller shah
LBbro inint , zL .-..-.-. . . Lo0ro pm DOOK &&&I \
.6b 100
Caution Remove the propeller shaft in a straight and level manner so as to ensure that the boot is not damaged through pinching. NOTE Damage to the boot can be avoided, and the work will be easier, if a piece of cloth or similar material is inserted in the boot.
(2) Use the special tool provided as a cover to prevent the entry of foreign objects into the transfer. +B, SPACER REMOVAL The number of spacers necessary may differ from one location to another (front, rear, right, left). Record the number of spacers used to ensure correct installation.

FAA PROPELLER SHAFT INSTALLATION (1) Caution Be cautious to avoid damage to the oil seal lip of the transfer.
(2) Install the propeller shaft to the companion flange with the mating marks properly aligned. Caution Tighten installation bolts after removing oil and grease from threads to prevent them from loosening due to lubrication.
1 TSB Revision
25-5
.Bq INSULATOR INSTALLATION Install spacers and insulators as indicated in the illustration. Caution When installing the center bearing, assemble the same spacers as removed from it (or new spacers of equal thickness).
ZlOAOOl2
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the sleeve yoke, center yoke and flange yoke for wear, damage or cracks. Check the propeller shaft yokes for wear, damage or cracks. Check the propeller shaft for bends, twisting or damage.
I/
l l l
Measure the propeller shaft runout with a dial indicator. Limit: Front propeller shaft 0.6 mm (.024 in.) or less Center propeller shaft 0.6 mm (.024 in.) or less 0.6 mm (.024 in.) or less Rear propeller shaft NOTE Set the V-blocks as much as possible to the end of the shaft. Measure deflection at the center of the shaft.
Check the universal joints for smooth operation in all directions. Check the center bearing for smooth movement. Check the center bearing mounting rubber for damage or deterioration.
lOW504
lOWSO 00001025
TSB Revision
25-6

55 Nm 40 ft.lbs.
I4
zlOFOOO6
16
Liibro joint assembly
Ltibro joint Lijbro joint [outer race) (inner race) 1oxoo1e
10x0040
lONO 06001026
Grease: Repair kit grease [45-55g (1.59-l .94 oz.)]
Adhesive: 3M ATD Part No. 8155 or equivalent 9. Rubber packing 4Fb .B+ 10. Lobro joint boot 11. Washer 12. Center propeller shaft .A+ 13. Self-locking nut +G, .A+ 14. Companion flange +H, .A+ 15. Center bearing assembly 16. Rear propeller shaft
Disassembly steps 1. Front propeller shaft assembly .iq 2. Self-locking nut +B, .F( 3. Companion flange +C, .F+ 4. Center bearing assembly qD, .E+ 5. Center propeller shaft assembly 6. Snap ring .D( 7. Boot band (E, WC+ 8. LZjbro joint assembly
4Ab
TSB Revision
25-7
, L
Mating marks
DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

+A, FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Put mating marks on the front propeller shaft flange yoke and the companion flange before removing the front propeller shaft assembly.
ZlON0004
Mating marks
+B, COMPANION FLANGE REMOVAL Put mating marks on the companion flange and the center propeller shaft before removing the companion flange.
ZlON0003
+C, CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY REMOVAL First remove the center bearing bracket and then remove the center bearing using a puller (commercially available).
+D, CENTER PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Put mating marks on the center propeller shaft, the Lobro joint assembly and the companion flange before removing the center propeller shaft assembly.
+E, L6BRO JOINT ASSEMBLY REMOVAL (1) Remove the Lobro joint boot from the Lobro joint assembly.
TSB Revision
25-8

(2) Put mating marks on the outer race, cage and inner race with a scriber before removing the outer race and balls. Caution Note the positions of balls so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions.
I d
Cage
Inner race
(3) Remove the inner race with cage from the center propeller shaft by using a puller (commercially available). NOTE When changing the grease on the Lobro joint assembly, wipe off the grease and clean the outer and inner races, cage and balls.
(4) If the outer race cannot be removed, remove the complete Lobro joint assembly from the center propeller shaft by using a puller (commercially available).
+F, LijBRO JOINT BOOT REMOVAL Tape the serration of the center propeller shaft and then remove the Lobro joint boot.
+G,COMPANlON FLANGE REMOVAL Put mating marks on the companion flange and the rear propeller shaft before removing the companion flange.
TSB Revision
25-9
+H, CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY REMOVAL First remove the center bearing bracket and then remove the center bearing using a puller (commercially available).
00001027
Companion flange Dust seal \
Rubber mount
REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

.A( CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY / COMPANION FLANGE / SELF-LOCKING NUT INSTALLATION (1) Install the bearing in the rubber mount groove of the center bearing bracket. (2) Install the center bearing assembly to the rear propeller shaft with its dust seal facing the companion flange side. (3) Install, lining up the mating marks on the companion flange and the rear propeller shaft. (4) While tightening the self-locking nut, install the center bearing assembly with the companion flange. .B+ LOBRO JOINT BOOT INSTALLATION Tape the serration of the center propeller shaft and then install the Lobro joint boot.
Self-locking nut
.Cq L6BRO JOINT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Assemble the Lobro joint as follows: (1) Apply a thin coat of the specified grease to the ball grooves of the inner and outer races. Specified grease: Repair kit grease
x10x0018
Mating marks
Recessed end of inner race Chamfered end
(2) Put the cage on the inner race with the mating marks aligned and install two balls, one in a groove and the other in the groove opposite to that groove. Both balls should be placed in the grooves where they were before disassembly. (3) Assemble the inner race and cage in the outer race with their mating marks aligned. NOTE Make sure that the recessed end (where snap ring will be fitted) of the inner race, the recessed end (where packing will be fitted) of the outer race, and the chamfered end of the cage are all on the same side. Also ensure that the relative positions of the inner and outer races are as shown in the illustration.
TSB Revision
Install these balls first
(4) Install the remaining balls in their original positions. (5) Check that the outer race rotates on the inner race smoothly.
(6) Apply specified grease to the Lobro joint assembly. Specified grease: Repair kit grease [45-55 g (1.59-1.94 oz.)]
Rubber packing
(7) Apply quick fix adhesive at three locations illustrated to prevent displacement of the rubber packing and fix it to the Lobro joint assembly temporarily. Specified adhesive: 3M ATD Part No. 8155 or equivalent
zwxoo37
(8) Lining up the mating marks on the Lobro joint assembly and the center propeller shaft and applying the socket to the inner race of the Lobro joint assembly, install the Lobro joint assembly to the center propeller shaft.
zloxoo36
Mouyting bolts
(9) Using the center propeller shaft bolt, align the bolt holes of the Lobro joint boot and the Lobro joint assembly and install the Lobro joint boot to the Lobro joint assembly.
Lijbro joint boot
TSB Revision
25-11
(10)Check that the Lobro joint assembly moves smoothly.
.D+ BOOT BAND INSTALLATION Caution Clamp the boot band by folding down the lever at a position nearly opposite to the vent groove provided in the Liibro-joint boot (at arrow marked position on boot). Be sure to remove grease, if present, from around the vent groove. Grease obstructs the ventilation air passage.
00001030
.E+ CENTER PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Install, lining up the mating marks on the center propeller shaft, the Lobro joint assembly and the companion flange.
Companion flange Du? seal \
Self-locking. nut
,F+ CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY / COMPANION FLANGE / SELF-LOCKING NUT INSTALLATION (1) Install the bearing in the rubber mount groove of the center bearing bracket. (2) Install the center bearing assembly to the center propeller shaft with its dust seal facing the companion flange side. (3) Install, lining up the mating marks on the companion flange and the center propeller shaft. (4) While tightening the self-locking nut, install the center bearing assembly with the companion flange.
INSPECTION
l l l l
Check the propeller shaft splines for wear or damage. Check the ball grooves in inner or outer race for uneven wear, damage or rust. Check ball surface for rust, wear or other damage. Check the cage for rust or damage.
TSB Revision
NOTES
FRONT AXLE
CONTENTS
DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 HUB AND KNUCKLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Hub End Play Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Lubricants.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
, i
26-2 SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT AXLE - Specifications
WHEEL BEARING
Items Type O.D. x I.D. mm (in.) FWD Double-row angular-contact ball bearing 84 x 45 (3.31 x 1.77) AWD Unit ball bearing
DRIVE SHAFT
Items Joint type Outer Inner Length mm (in.) L.H. shaft R.H. shaft NOTE *: <Al-r> / FWD B.J. T.J. 417 (16.4) 405 (15.9) or 393 (15.5)* AWD B.J. T.J. 419 (16.5) 391(15.4)
Items Setting of T.J. boot length mm (in.)
L.H.
Standard value 85 + 3 (3.35 i- .12) 85 f 3 (3.35 f. .12)
Limit \
R.H. ( Hub end play mm (in.) Wheel bearing starting torque (Hub starting torque) Nm (in.lbs.)
1.8 (16)
LUBRICANTS
TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - SDecial Tools
26-3
SPECIAL TOOLS
A: MB990244
Preload socket
rement of the lower arm ball joint starting ment of the stabilizer link rotation
Press-out of the center bearing Press-fitting of the center bearing Press-fitting of the dust seal outer
TSB Revision
26-4
Tool
FRONT AXLE - Special Tools

Tool number and name MB990890 Rear suspension bushing base MB990883 MB990883-01 Supersession MB990890-01 Application Press-fitting of the dust seal Press-fitting of the wheel bearing, oil-seal (drive shaft side)
/ Fate&suspension
MB990947 4 ki$%i:bor MB990955 Oil seal installer
MB990947-01
Press-fitting of the oil seal (hub side)
MB990955-01
1 TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - Troubleshooting / On-vehicle Service
26-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Vehicle pulls to one side Probable cause Seizure of drive shaft ball joint Abnormal wear, play or seizure of wheel bearing Malfunction of front suspension or steering Vibration Bend, damage or abnormal wear of drive shaft Play in drive shaft and hub serration Abnormal wear, play or seizure of wheel bearing Shimmy Improper wheel alignment Malfunction of front suspension or steering Excessive noise Broken boot, grease leakage Bend, damage or abnormal wear of drive shaft Play of drive shaft and hub serration Abnormal wear, play or seizure of center bearing Abnormal wear, play or seizure of wheel bearing, Loose wheel nut Malfunction of front suspension and steering Remedy Replace Replace Adjust or replace Replace Replace Replace Adjust or replace Adjust or replace Replace, repack grease Replace Replace Replace Replace Retighten Adjust or replace
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
HUB END PLAY CHECK
1. Jack up. the vehicle and remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the disc brake caliper and suspend it with a wire. (Refer to GROUP 35 - On-vehicle Service.) 3. Attach a dial indicator as shown in the illustration, and then measure the axial play while moving the hub back and forth. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.) 4. If axial play exceeds the limit, disassemble and check parts.
21116285
TSB Revision
26-6
FRONT AXLE - Hub and Knuckle
HUB AND KNUCKLE

I :L)
cFWD>
cAWD> 12
w-ius Nm 65-76 ftlbs.
60-;2 Nm 43-52 ft.lbs.
230 Nm 166 ft.lbs. ilN0029
10
50 Nm ;+, 36fLlbs. \
9m
,
1
12 Nm ,9 ft.lbs.
230 Nm 166 ft.lbs.

-r
llFO026 00000628
Removal steps 1. Front speed sensor connection 4Ab <Vehicles with ABS*> .A( 2. Cotter pin :I& .A( 3. Drive shaft nut 4. Callper assembly 5. Brake disc 6. Front hub unit bearing 7. Dust shield 8. Lower arm ball joint connection 4Db 9. Cotter pin TSB Revision
4Eb 4Fb 4,
10. Tie rod end connection 11. Drive shaft 12. Front strut mounting bolt 13. Hub and knuckle 14. Hub
NOTE : Anti-lock braking system

Front speed
26-7

+A, FRONT SPEED SENSOR DISCONNECTION Remove the mounting bolts which hold the speed sensor bracket to the knuckle, and then remove the speed sensor. Caution Be careful when handling the pole piece at the tip of the speed sensor and the toothed edge of the rotor so as not to damage them by striking against other parts.
(B,DRlVE SHAFT NUT REMOVAL Loosen the drive shaft nut while the vehicle is on the floor with the brakes applied. Caution Do not apply vehicle load to the wheel bearing loosing the drive shaft nut. If, however, vehicle load must be applied to the bearing in moving the vehicle, temporarily secure the wheel bearing by using the special tools, MB990998, etc.
+C, CALIPER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Remove the caliper assembly and suspend it with wires. AD, LOWER ARM BALL JOINT DISCONNECTION Using the special tool, disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to the nearby part. 2. Loosen. the nut but do not remove it. +E, TIE ROD END DISCONNECTION Using the special tool, disconnect the tie rod end from the knuckle. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to the nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it.
+F, DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL Use the special tool to push out the drive shaft from the front hub. +G,HUB REMOVAL In the case of AWD-vehicles with ABS, take care not to damage the rotor for ABS installed to the B.J. outer race when removing the hub.
TSB Revision
26-8
FRONT AXLE - Hub and Knuckle INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

bAdDRIVE SHAFT NUT / COTTER PIN INSTALLATION (1) Be sure to install the washer and wheel bearing nut in the specified direction. (2) After installing the wheel, lower the vehicle to the ground and finally tighten the wheel bearing nut. (3) If the position of the cotter pin holes does not match, tighten the nut up to 260 Nm (188 ftlbs.) in maximum. (4) Install the cotter pin in the first matching holes and bend it securely.
INSPECTION
l l l l
Check the hub for cracks and spline for wear. Check the oil seal for damage. Check the knuckle for cracks. Check for defective bearing. NOTE If the meshing of the wheel bearing outer race and the knuckle, or of the wheel bearing inner race and the hub, is loose, replace the bearing or damaged parts.
MEASUREMENT OF FRONT HUB UNIT BEARING ROTATION STARTING TORQUE (1) Set the special tool to the front hub unit bearing. (2) Holding the special tool (bolt), tighten its nut to 200 to 260 Nm (145 to 188 ftlbs.). (3) Turn the hub to cause grease to distribute evenly over the bearing.
do
711FOO4
(4) Measure the rotation starting torque of the hub. Limit: 1.8 Nm (16 in.lbs.) or less (5) The starting torque must be within the limit and, in addition, the bearing must not feel rough when rotated.
TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - Hub and Knuckle DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY cFWD>
26-9
I (9 Nm 7 ft.lbs.
,n.o*lo
,,N0030 00000630
Disassembly steps .D+ 1. Oil seal (drive shaft side) 2. Hub and rotor (A, .C( l Adjustment of wheel bearing starting torque 3. Hub 4. Rotor <Vehicles with ABS>
5. Dust shield .B+ 6. Oil seal (hub side) 7. Snap ring 4B, .A4 8. Wheel bearing 9. Knuckle

+A,HUB AND ROTOR REMOVAL (1) Attach the special tools to the knuckle and front hub. (2) Secure the knuckle in a vise. (3) Tighten the nut of the special tool and remove the hub and rotor from the knuckle.
llLO125
Caution 1. Be sure to use the special tools. 2. If the hub and knuckle are disassembled by striking them with a hammer, the bearing will be damaged. +B, WHEEL BEARING REMOVAL (1) Crush the oil seal in two places to that the tabs of the
special tool will be caught on the wheel bearing inner race.
211 A0281
26-10

(2) Remove the wheel bearing inner race from the hub by using the special tool: Caution Be careful that the hub will not fall down as the wheel bearing inner race (outer side) is removed from the hub.
MB990932
(3) Remove the snap ring from the knuckle. (4) Remove the bearing by using the special tools. NOTE Removal is easier if the outer side inner race removed from the hub is placed on the bearing and the wheel bearing is then removed.
MB991355 00000631 or MB991 056 I I

,A4 WHEEL BEARING INSTALLATION (1) Fill the wheel bearing with multipurpose grease. (2) Apply a thin coating of multipurpose grease to the knuckle and bearing contact surfaces. (3) With the wheel bearing inner race removed, press-in the bearing by using the special tools. (4) Install the wheel bearing inner race to the wheel bearing.
212A05
MB990947
.B+OIL SEAL (HUB SIDE) INSTALLATION (1) Drive the oil seal (hub side) into the knuckle by using the special tools until it is flush with the knuckle end surface. (2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip of the oil seal and to the surfaces of the oil seal which contact the hub.
.C+ WHEEL BEARING STARTING TORQUE ADJUSTMENT (1) Use the special tool to mount the hub assembly onto the knuckle. (2) Tighten ,the nut of the special tool to 200-260 Nm (146-188 fblbs.). (3) Rotate the hub assembly in order to seat the bearing.
MB990998
Turn the nut
ZllR004 7
TSB Revision

MB990998 990326
26-11
(4) Measure the wheel bearing starting torque (hub starting torque) by using the special tools. Limit: 1.8 Nm (16 in.lbs.) or less NOTE The starting torque must be within the limit and, in addition, the bearing must not feel rough when rotated.
ZllKOl2
MB990998
l7h
(5) Measure to determine whether the end play of the hub is within the specified limit or not. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.) (6) If the starting torque and hub end play are not within the limit range while the nut is tightened to 200-260 Nm (145-188 ftlbs.), the bearing, hub and/or knuckle have probably not been installed correctly. Repeat the disassembly and assembly procedure.
.D+OIL SEAL (DRIVE SHAFT SIDE) INSTALLATION Drive the oil seal (drive shaft side) into the knuckle until it contacts the snap ring. Apply multipurpose grease to the lip of the oil seal.
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the hub and brake disc mounting surfaces for galling and contamination. Check the knuckle inner surface for galling and cracks. Check for defective bearing.
TSB Revision
26-12 DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Under Cover Removal and Installation
<FWD>
60-72 Nm 43-52 ft.1 bs I ? 29 Nm 21 ft.lbs.
230 166
<AWD>
50 Nm 4
F@=p
230 Nm 166 ft.lbs.
/! p a IL .-ii-:; <--7q; --L,.L .*-, 7

ZllN0028
Removal steps 1. Cotter pin I;, .A( 2. Drive shaft nut 3. Lower arm ball joint connection 4. Cotter pin 5. Tie rod end connection 6, 6. Center bearing bracket installation bolt 7. Drive shaft and inner shaft assembly (L.H.) 8. Drive shaft (R.H.) 9. Circlip
d
Caution In the case of AWD-vehicles with ABS, take care not to damage the rotor for ABS installed to the B.J. outer race.

+A,DRlVE SHAFT NUT REMOVAL
Loosen the drive shaft nut while the vehicle is on the floor with the brakes applied. Caution Do not apply vehicle load to the wheel bearing loosing the drive shaft nut. If, however, vehicle load must be applied to the bearing in moving the vehicle, temporarily secure the wheel bearing by using the special tools, MB990998, etc. 1 TSB Revision I
26-13
+B, LOWER ARM BALL JOINT DISCONNECTION Using the special tool, disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to the nearby part., 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it.
(C, TIE ROD END DISCONNECTION Using the special tool, disconnect the tie rod end from the knuckle. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to the nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it.
+D,DRlVE SHAFT AND INNER SHAFT ;;FokllLY (L.H.) / DRIVE SHAFT (R-H.) (1) Using the special tool, push out the drive shaft and inner shaft assembly (L.H.) or the drive shaft (R.H.) from the hub.
(2) If the inner shaft is hard to remove from the transaxle, strike the center bearing bracket lightly with a plastic hammer.
/q?p: 1 r,
, i \, :,&;>
!:. . ;F
Protrusion
4 -2 ;/ ._ _c /., ~:.p
~~..----y~ ,\y/: ,! /..- (5 J 3 I pw-& - ~~~~~~ i; \

ZllAO350
(3) To remove the drive shaft (R.H.) from the transaxle, pry off the shaft using a lever against the protrusion of the drive shaft. Caution Pulling the drive shaft can cause damage to the T.J. Be sure to use a lever.
.-
1 TSB Revision
26-14
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

.A+ DRIVE SHAFT NUT INSTALLATION (1) Be sure to install the washer and wheel bearing nut in the specified direction. (2) After installing the wheel, lower the vehicle to the ground and finally tighten the wheel bearing nut. (3) If the position of the cotter pin holes does not match, tighten the nut up to 260 Nm (188 ftlbs.) in maximum. (4) Install the cotter pin in the first matching holes and bend it securely. d
INSPECTION
L@@ \
m\I, lllj J
l l l
Check the drive shaft boot for damage or deterioration. Check the ball joints for wear or operating condition. Check the spline part for wear or damage.
1 TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

cl 992 models>
26-15
T.J. Boot Repair Kit
qq%& ln -, 4 5 ?FqB 15 6 17
r, .%4 0
:1992 models>
,*gg ?f .;q $p$
1@ 2
1110118
:1992 models>
T.J. Repair Kit
2820 P&g y-9 -I5$? 9 ,& L 00 6
/2!8
fh & @ 1 19 ? ,@ lw.0116
llA0315 00000632
B.J. Boot Repair Kit
B.J. Repair Kit
Bearing Dust Seal Rer>air Kit
Bracket Assemblv Reoair---~~--- Kit
Disassembly steps
.G4 1. T.J. boot band (large) T.J. boot band (small) ::: $: T.J. case and inner shaft T.J. case 2: Seal plate 4Ab FE4 F: Inner shaft
4B,
Dust shield Bracket assembly Dust seal outer Dust seal inner .c+ 11: Center bearing 12. Center bearing bracket 13. Circlip
assembly
:;I ,I:
14. Dust shield 15. Snap ring .B( 16. Spider assembly +C, .A( 17. TJ. boot 18. B.J. boot band (large) cl 992 models> 19. B.J. boot band (small) cl 992 models> dC, .A( 20. B.J. boot cl992 models> 21. Dust shield cl992 models> 22. B.J. assembly 4Db Caution in the case of AWD-vehicles with ABS, take care not to damage the rotor installed to the B.J. outer race.
TSB Revision
26-16
Lubrication Points
Dust seal inner 14-20 g (.49-.71 oz.) /Gr:::t ::::::?g;;.42 oz.)
llNoo33
Grease: Repair kit grease 160 g (5.64 oz.) Caution The grease in the repair kit should be divided in half for use, respectively, at the joint and inside the boot. Special grease is used to lubricate the joint. Do not mix old and new grease or different types 1 of grease.
<From 1993 models,
/Grease: Repair kit grease
Grease: Repair kit grease cFWDr 145 g (5.11 oz.) cAWDr 135 g (4.76 oz.) Caution The grease in the repair kit should be divided in half for use, respectively, at the joint and inside the boot. Special grease is used to lubricate the joint. Do not mix old and new grease or different types of grease.
1 TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS
26-17
--
plate
ZllN0036 llA0076
+A, INNER SHAFT REMOVAL (1) Using the special tool, remove the inner shaft assembly, together with the seal plate, from the T.J. case. NOTE Press the tool directly against the seal plate. The tool under oressure will ouncture and deform the seal plate, and push out the inner shaft underneath.
00000634
(2) Use the special tool to remove the inner shaft from the center bearing bracket.
ZllLOllI
+B, CENTER BEARING REMOVAL Use the special tools to remove the center bearing from the center bearing bracket.
+C, T.J. BOOT / B.J. BOOT cl992 models> REMOVAL (1) Wrap vinyl tape around the spline on the T.J. side of the drive shaft so that the T.J. and B.J. boots are not damaged when they are removed. (2) Withdraw the T.J. and B.J. boots from the drive shaft.
ADbGREASE FROM B.J. ASSEMBLY 4992 models> REMOVAL Wipe off grease from the B.J. assembly. Caution B.J. assembly cannot be disassembled.
TSB Revision
26-18
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

,A4 B.J. BOOT cl992 models> / T.J. BOOT INSTALLATION (1) Wrap vinyl tape around the splines on the drive shaft, and then install the R.J. boots and T.J. boots, in that order. Ij
4 992 models>
(2) Fill the inside of the B.J. and B.J. boot with the specified grease. Specified grease: Repair kit grease <PWD> 145 g (5.11 oz.) cAWD> 135 g (4.76 oz.) Caution 1. The grease in the repair kit should be divided in half for use, respectively, at the joint and inside the boot. 2. Special grease is used to lubricate the joint. Do not mix old and new grease or different types of grease. (3) Secure the boot bands.
ZllK033
Caution 1. The boot bands should be tightened with the drive shaft at a 0 joint angle. 2. The B.J. boot band and T.J. boot band are identified by the identification number stamped on the lever. Take good care to install the correct one.
llE560 00000635
,B( SPIDER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION (1) Pack specified grease amply between the spider shaft and rollers of the spider assembly. Specified grease: Repair kit grease Caution Special grease is used to lubricate the joint. Do not mix old and new grease or different types of grease. (2) To install the spider assembly to the shaft, insert the shaft from the chamfered end of the spider.
TSB Revision
26-19
i;
ZllLOO64
.CA CENTER BEARING INSTALLATION (1) Apply multipurpose grease to the center bearing and inside the center bearing bracket.
(2) Use the special tools to press-fit the center bearing into the center bearing bracket.
ZllLOO1O
,DA DUST SEALS INSTALLATION (1) Apply multipurpose grease to the rear surfaces of all dust seals. Dust seal inner: 14-20 g (.49-.71 oz.) Dust seal outer: 8-12 g (.28-.42 oz.)
Dust seal inner

MB990890
(2) Press the oil seal into the center bearing bracket using the special tool. Caution Take care not to damage the rubber part on the periphery of the dust seal. (3) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip of each dust seal. NOTE When applying grease, make sure that it does not adhere to anything outside the lip.
ZllLOO93
Dust seal outer .
1 TSB Revision
26-20
J

---I-p inner shaft
.E( INNER SHAFT INSTALLATION Use the special tool to hold the inner race of the center bearing and force the inner shaft into place.
MB991172
Zll
LOO94
Inner shaft assembly
bF4T.J. CASE AND INNER SHAFT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION (1) Apply multipurpose grease to the inner shaft spline, then press fit it into the T.J. case.
grease
(2) Using the special tool, press the seal plate into the T.J. case.
T.J. case
ZllN0033
(3) Fill the specified grease furnished in the repair kit to the T.J. case. Specified grease: Repair kit grease 160 g (5.64 oz.) Caution 1. The grease in the repair kit should be divided in half for use, respectively, at the joint and inside the boot. 2. The drive shaft joint uses special grease. Do not mix old and new or different types of grease. bG4T.J. BOOT BANDS INSTALLATION Set the T.J. boot bands at the specified distance in order to adjust the amount of air inside the T.J. boot, and then tighten the T.J boot band securely. Standard value (A): 85 + 3 mm (3.35 + .12 in.)
TSB Revision
FRONT AXLE - Drive Shaft INSPECTION

l
26-21
l l l l l l l l l
Check the drive shaft for damage, bending or corrosion. Check the inner shaft for damage, bending or corrosion. Check the drive shaft splines for wear or damage. Check the inner shaft splines for wear or damage. Check for entry of water and/or foreign material into B.J. Check the spider assembly for roller rotation, wear or corrosion. Check the groove inside T.J. case for wear of corrosion. Check the boots for deterioration, damage or cracking. Check the center bearing for seizure, discoloration or roughness of rolling surface. Check the dust cover for damage or deterioration.
B.J. BOOT (RESIN BOOT) REPLACEMENT

(1) Remove the large and small boot, bands. NOTE Do not reuse the boot bands. (2) Remove the B.J. boot.
(3) Install the small diameter end of the B.J. boot by so locating it as to expose only one of the grooves provided on the shaft.
1
r
/
11X0138
MB991561 Stopper
(4) Turn the adjusting bolt of the special tool to obtain a standard value of the opening width (W). Standard value (W): 2.9 mm (.114 in.) <When width is above 2.9 mm (.114 in.)> Tighten the adjusting bolt. <When width is below 2.9 mm (.114 in.)> Loosen the adjusting bolt. NOTE (1) One complete turn of the adjusting bolt will change the width by approx. 0.7 mm (.028 in.). (2) Do not give more than one turn to the adjusting bolt.
Adjusting bolt
11x0141
*1x0131
00003420
TSB Revision
26-22

(5) Install the boot band (small) against the projection at the boot end to provide clearance A as shown in the illustration.
B.J. boot band
\ d
AllSO
(6) Using the special tool, crimp the boot band. Caution 1. With the drive shaft secured vertically, pinch positively the portion to be crimped of the band between the tips of the special tool. 2. Be sure to compress the boot band until the special tool handle comes in contact with the stopper.
(7) Make sure that the amount of boot band crimping (B) is of the standard value. Standard value (B): 2.4- 2.8 mm (.094 - .llO in.) <When amount of crimping is above 2.8 mm (.llO in.)> Readjust W given in (4) above to the value calculated by the following formula, and repeat work described in (6). W = 5.5 mm (.217 in.) - B [Example: When B = 2.9 mm (.114 in.), W = 2.6 mm (.102 in.)] <When amount of crimping is below 2.4 mm (.094 in.)> Remove the boot band, readjust W given in (4) to the value calculated by the following formula and repeat work described in (5) and (6) by using a new boot band. W = 5.5 mm (.217 in.) - B [Example: When B = 2.3 mm (.091 in.), W = 3.2 mm (.126 in.)] (8) Make sure that the boot band does not protrude from the band mounting area. If the band protruds, replace it with a new band and repeat work described in (5) through (7). (9) Pack the boot with specified amount of grease to specification. Specified grease: Grease in repair kit Amount applied: 155 g (5.47 oz.)
00003422
TSB Revision
26-23
(10)lnstall the boot with a clearance of standard value (C) provided between the large diameter end of the boot and the shoulder of B.J. housing. Standard value (C): 0.1 - 1.55 mm (.004 - .061 in.) (ll)Adjust the width of opening in the special tool (W) to standard value in the same manner as described in (4). Standard value (W): 3.2 mm (.126 in.)
(12)lnstall the boot band (large) against the projection at the boot end to provide clearance D as shown in the illustration. (13)Crimp the boot band (large) with the special tool in the same manner as described in (6) above.
AllS0169
>,meA
00003424
(14)Make sure that the amount of boot band crimping is within the range of standard value (E). Standard value (E): 2.4-2.8 mm (.094- ,110 in.) <When amount of crimping is above 2.8 mm (.llO in.)> Readjust W given in (11) to a value obtained by the following formula and repeat work described in (13) above. W = 5.8 mm (.228 in.) - E [Example: When E = 2.9 mm (.114 in.), W = 2.9 mm (114 in.)] <When amount of crimping is below 2.4 mm (.094 in.)> Remove the boot band, readjust W given in (11) to a value calculated by the following formula and repeat work described in (12) and (13) by using a new boot band. W = 5.8 mm (.228 in.) - E [Example: When E = 2.3 mm (.091 in.), W = 3.5 mm (.138 in.)] (15)Make sure that the boot band does not protrude from its mounting area. If the band protrudes, replace it with a new -band and repeat work described in (12) through (14).
TSB Revision
NOTES
27-1
REAR AXLE
CONTENTS REAR AXLE <AWD> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
AXLE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 LSD CASE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Gear Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Limited-Slip Differential Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Rear Axle Total Backlash Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Rear Wheel Bearing End Play Check . . . . . . . . 14 Rear Wheel Bearing Rotary-Sliding Resistance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
REAR AXLE cFWD> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Rear Hub Rotary-Sliding Resistance Check . . . . 3 Wheel Bearing End Play Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
REAR AXLE HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Lubricants.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Sealants and Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
L;
27-2
REAR AXLE <FW& - Specifications / Troubleshooting
REAR AXLE <FWD>

SPECIFICATIONS
Item Wheel bearing Type Specification Unit ball bearing
Items Wheel bearing end play mm (in.) Rear hub rotary-sliding resistance N (Ibs.) Limit 0.05 (.002) or less 31 (7) or less
TROUBLESHOOTING
1 TSB Revision
REAR AXLE cFWD> - On-vehicle Service
27-3
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
WHEEL BEARING END PLAY CHECK
1. 2. 3. 4.
\
// 712NOOO
5.
Inspect the play of the bearings while the vehicle is jacked up and resting on floor jack. Remove the hub cap and then release the parking brake. Remove the caliper assembly and the brake disc. Check the bearings end play. Place a dial gauge against the hub surface; then move the hub in the axial direction and check whether or not there is end play. Limit: 0.05 mm (-002 in.) or less NOTE If the limit value is exceeded, the lock nut should be tightened to the specified torque and check the end play again. Replace the rear hub bearing unit if an adjustment cannot be made to within the limit.
REAR HUB ROTARY-SLIDING RESISTANCE CHECK

Inspect the play of the bearings while the vehicle is jacked up and resting on floor jack. 2. Release the parking brake. 3. Remove the caliper assembly and the brake disc. 1.
4. After turning the hub a few times to seat the bearing, attach a spring balance to the hub bolt, and, pulling at a 90 angle from the hub bolt, measure to determine whether or not the rotary-sliding resistance of the rear hub is the limit value. Limit: 31 N (7 Ibs.) or less NOTE If the limit value is exceeded, loosen the nut and then tighten it to the specified torque, and check the rear hub rotary-sliding resistance again. 5. Replace the rear hub unit bearing if an adjustment cannot be made to within the limit.
1 TSB Revision
27-4 REAR AXLE HUB
REAR AXLE cFWD> - Rear Axle Hub

50-60 Nm 36-43 ft.lbs.
Removal steps
l b
1. Rear speed sensor <Vehicles with ABS> 2. Caliper assembly 4Bb 3. Brake disc 4. Hub cap .A( 5. Wheel bearing nut 6. Tongued washer
4CP
7. Rear hub assembly 8. Rear rotor <Vehicles with ABS> 9. Rear hub unit bearing
Caution Rear hub unit bearing cannot be disassembled.

+A, REAR SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL <VEHICLES WITH ABS> Caution Be careful when handling the pole piece at the tip of the speed sensor and the toothed edge of the rotor so as not to damage them by striking against other parts.
Pole pie/cc
ZlCN0107
+B, CALIPER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Remove the caliper assembly and suspend it with a piece of wire.
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE eFWD> - Rear Axle Hub

(C,REAR ROTOR REMOVAL <VEHICLES WITH ABS>
27-5
Caution Care must be taken not to scratch or scar the rotors toothed surface, and not to drop it. If the rotors toothed surface is chipped or the rotor is deformed, it might not be able to accurately sense the wheel rotation speed and the system as a result might not perform normally.

.A( WHEEL BEARING NUT INSTALLATION After tightening the wheel bearing nut, align with the spindles indentation and crimp.
Z 13NOO(!
idi
TSB Revision
27-6
REAR AXLE cAWD> - Specifications
REAR AXLE <AWD>

SPECIFICATIONS
AXLE SHAFT
DRIVE SHAFT
items Joint type Outer Inner Length (joint to joint) x diameter mm (in.) N O T E B.J.: Bit-field Joint T.J.: Tripod Joint Specifications B.J. T.J. 395x28 (15.6x 1.10)
DIFFERENTIAL
items Reduction gear type Reduction ratio Specifications Hypoid gear <Up to 1993 models> 3.545 <From 1994 models> 3.307 Differential gear type Side gear and configuration Pinion gear Number of teeth Drive gear Straight bevel gear x 2* Straight bevel gear x 4 <Up to 1993 models> 39 <From 1994 models> 43 Drive pinion Side gear Pinion gear 1 O.D. x I.D. mm (in.) / Side Front <Up to 1993 models> 11 <From 1994 models> 13 16 10 1I 82.500 x 45.242 (3.25 x 1.78) 68.263 x 30.163 (2.69 x 1 .19) 1 76.200 x 36.513 (3.00 x 1 A-4) NOTE l : Denotes the gear (L.H.) which is in a single body with the viscous coupling.
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Specifications SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS

Items Setting of T.J. boot length mm (in.) Final drive gear backlash mm (in.) Differential gear backlash (Limited slip differential) mm (in.) Drive pinion rotation torque Nm (in.lbs.)
c
27-7
~
/ Standard value 1 85c3 (3.35k.12) 0.11-0.16 (.004-.006) 0.03-0.09 (.0012-.0035) 0.5-0.7 (4-6)
1 Limit 1 / 12 (2.6) 5 (.2) I 1 0.05 (002) I I
With oil seal
New part (with rust-prevention oil)
N e w parVreusable part 0.35-0.45 ( 3 - 4 ) (gear oil application) Without oil seal New part (with rust-prevention oil) 0.3-0.5 (3-4)
Rear wheel bearing rotation torque N (Ibs.) Rear axle total backlash mm (in.) Drive gear runout mm (in.) Rear wheel bearing end play mm (in.)
New part/reusable part 0.15-0.25 (l-2) (gear oil application) I -
I -
I 0.8 (.031)
LUBRICANTS
Items Rear axle gear oil Specified lubricants Hypoid Gear Oil API classification GL-5 or higher Above -23C (-10F) SAE 90,85W-90,8OW-90 From -34C (-30F) to -23C (-10F) SAE 8OW, 8OW-90 Below -34C (-30 F) SAE 75W Repair kit grease Quantity 1.1 lit. (1.2 qts.)
B.J. boot grease T.J. boot grease
125 g (4.41 oz.) 135 g (4.76 oz.)

Items Drive gear threaded hole Vent plug 3M ATD Part No. 8663 or equivalent Differential cover Specified sealants and adhesives 3M Stud Locking Part No. 4170 or equivalent
1 TSB Revision
27-8 SPECIAL TOOLS
REAR AXLE eAWD> - Special Tools
MB990560 * Bearing remover MB990925
General service tooj
Removal of the axle shaft dust shield, outer bearing and rear rotor Press-in the outer wheel bearing and rear rotor
MB990925 or General service Bearing and oil tool seal installer set
Removal of axle shaft inner bearing Installation of axle shaft inner bearing Installation of drive pinion rear bearing outer race Installation of drive pinion front bearing outer race Installation of differential side oil seal (Use in conjunction with MB991 380) Removal of drive pinion front bearing and drive pinion rear bearing outer race Adjustment of differential final gear tooth contact Press-fitting of axle housing oil seal
MB990641 Lower arm bushing installer and remover A
TSB Revision
RFAR AXI F eAWl& .1-m I.. I Is.--I . ..-r
Snnttinl -r--m-= - --.-
Tnnln
27-9
Tool
Tool number and name MB990901 Drive pinion setDrive pinion gauge assembly B: MB990552 Cylinder gauge MB991 378 Drive pinion setting gauge set A: MB991 366 Head B: MB991 365 Cylinder gauge MB990802 Bearing installer
Supersession MB990901 -01 MIT21 5838
Application Drive pinion height adjustment (Use in conjunction with MB991 366)
MB991366-01
MB990802-01
Pressing of drive pinion rear bearing inner race Pressing of side bearing inner race
MB990326 Preload socket
General tool
service
Measurement of the drive pinion preload
MB990728 Bearing installer
MB990802-01
Press-fitting of the side bearing inner race
MB991 380 Oil seal installer
MB991 380-01
Press-fitting of differential oil seal
MB991294 Side gear holding tool MB990799 Ball joint dust shield installer 6 MB990799-01
Inspection of differential gear backlash
Press-fitting the axle shaft dust shield
TSB Revision
27-10
REAR AXLE eAWD> - Special Tools

Tool number and name MB991153 Bushing remover & installer arbor MB990831 Bushing remover & installer ring Supersession Application Driving-out and press-fitting of differential support bushing and differential support member bushing
MB990847 Bushing remover & installer base MB990909 Working base General service tool Disassembly and reassembly of differential carrier assembly (Use in conjunction with adapter MB991 116)
MB991116 Working base adapter
General service tool
MB991 367 Special spanner
MB991367-01
Removal and installation of side bearing nut
MB991 385 Pin
MB99081 0 Bearing puller
P-334 MB990339-01 MB990811 -01 MIT44801 MIT303173 MB990767-01
Removal of companion flange Removal of the side bearing inner race and drive pinion rear bearing inner race
MB990850 End yoke holder
Removal and installation of companion flange
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE cAWD+ - SDecial Tools

Tool number and name MB990339 Taper roller bearing puller Supersession General service tool Application Removal of drive pinion rear bearing inner race
MB990648 General service Bearing remover tool @
MB990890 Rear suspension bushing base
MB990890-01
Press-fitting of drive gear (for 4WS)
1 TSB Revision
27-12
REAR AXLE eAWD> - Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
AXLE SHAFT
DRIVE SHAFT
Symptom Noise Probable cause Wear, play or seizure of ball joint Excessive drive shaft spline looseness Remedy Replace
DIFFERENTIAL (LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL)
driving or gear changing*
when cornering
Damaged, broken, and/or seized drive pinion bearings Damaged, broken, and/or seized side bearings Damaged differential case Inferior gear oil lnsuff icient gear oil quantity Replenish
N O T E (1) *: In addition to a malfunction of the differential carrier components, abnormal noise can also be caused by the universal joint of the propeller shaft, the axle shafts, the wheel bearings, etc. Before disassembling any parts, take all possibilities into consideration and confirm the source of the noise. (2) *2: Noise from the engine, muffler vibration, transaxle, propeller shaft, wheel bearings, tires, body, etc., is easily mistaken as being caused by malfunctions in the differential carrier components. Be extremely careful and attentive when performing the driving test, etc. Test methods to confirm the source of the abnormal noise include: coasting, acceleration, constant speed driving, raising the rear wheels on a jack, etc. Use the method most appropriate to the circumstances.
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Traubleshootina

Symptom Gear oil leakage Probable cause Worn or damaged front oil seal, or an improperly installed oil seal Damaged gasket Loose companion flange self-locking nut Loose filler or drain plug Clogged or damaged vent plug Seizure* Insufficient final drive gear backlash Excessive drive pinion preload Excessive side bearing preload Insufficient differential gear backlash Excessive clutch plate preload Inferior gear oil Insufficient gear oil quantity Breakdown*2 Incorrect final drive gear backlash Insufficient drive pinion preload Insufficient side bearing preload Excessive differential gear backlash Loose drive gear clamping bolts The limited slip differential does not function (on snow, mud, ice, etc.) The limited slip device is damaged Retighten Disassemble, check the functioning and replace the damaged parts Replace Replenish Adjust Retighten or replace Retighten or apply adhesive Clean or replace Adjust Remedy Replace
NOTE (1) l : In the event of seizure, disassemble and replace the parts involved, and also be sure to check all components for any irregularities and repair or replace as necessary. (2) l ? In addition to disassembling and replacing the failed parts, be sure to check all components for irregularities and repair or replace as necessary.
TSB Revision
27-14
REAR AXLE cAWD> - On-vehicle S&vice
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
REAR AXLE TOTAL BACKLASH CHECK
If the vehicle vibrates and produces a booming sound due to an imbalance of the driving system, measure the rear axle total backlash by the following procedures to see if the differential carrier assembly required removal. (1) Place the gearshift lever in the neutral position, apply the parking brake and jack up the vehicle.
Mating marks
(2) Manually turn the propeller shaft clockwise as far as it will go and make mating marks on the companion flange dust shield and the differential carrier.
(3) Manually turn the propeller shaft counterclockwise as far as it will go and measure the movement of the mating marks. Limit: 5 mm (.2 in.) (4) If the backlash exceeds the limit, remove the differential carrier assembly and adjust the backlash. (Refer to P.27-27.)
GEAR OIL LEVEL CHECK

1. Remove the filler plug, and check the oil level. 2. The oil level is sufficient if it reaches the filler plug hole. Specified gear oil: Hypoid Gear Oil API classification GL-5 or higher [1.1 liter (1.2 qts.)] NOTE Above -23C (-10F): SAE 90, 85W-90, 8OW-90 From -34C (-30F) to -23C (-10F): SAE 8OW, 8OW-90 Below -34C (-30F): SAE 75W
REAR WHEEL BEARING END PLAY CHECK

1. 2. 3. 4. Support the vehicle on axle stands positioned at the specified locations and remove the rear wheel. Separate the parking brake cable from the rear brake. Remove the caliper assembly and brake disc. Place a dial gauge as shown in the illustration, and then measure the play when the axle shaft is moved in the axial direction. Limit: 0.8 mm (.031 in.) If the play exceeds the limit, check the tightening torque of the companion flange of the axle shaft; if it is correct, replace the wheel bearing.
5.
1 TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - On-vehicle Service
27-15
REAR WHEEL BEARING ROTARY-SLIDING RESISTANCE CHECK

1. Remove the drive shaft from the companion flange. 2. Remove the brake pad or caliper assembly. 3. Attach a spring balance to the hub bolt, then, pulling the balance at a right angle to the hub bolt, measure the rotary-sliding resistance to see whether it is within the limit value. Limit: 12 N (2.6 Ibs.)
Z14AO521
4. If the rotary-sliding resistance exceeds the limit value, check the tightening torque of the axle shaft companion flange. If it is normal, replace the bearing.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL CHECK

Correct &ncorrect
1. Block the front wheels and move the shift lever to neutral. 2. Completely release the parking brake. 3. Jack up the rear wheels and place a rigid rack at the specified part of the side sill. 4. Disconnect the coupling of the differential and propeller shaft. 5. When one wheel is slowly rotated, check whether or not the wheel on the other side turns in the same direction. 6. If it turns in the opposite direction, replace the viscous unit.
TSB Revision
27-16
AXLE SHAFT
REAR AXLE cAWD> - Axle Shaft

55-65 Nm 40-47 ft.lbs. 50-60 Nm 36-43 ft.lbs. 12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
I ===ib
llA0325 ,,A0263
11 NO021 00001040
Removal steps 4w
1. Rear speed sensor <Vehicles with ABS> 2. Brake caliper assembly 4Bb 3. Brake disc 4. Drive shaft mounting nut +C, .G( ;. $++e;king n u t 4W 7: Companion flange 8. Axle shaft assembly
dE, .F+ 9. Rear rotor <Vehicles with ABS> 4F, FE+ 10. Outer bearing (F, .D( 11. Dust shield .C+ 12. Dust shield 13. Axle shaft 4G, .B( 14. Oil seal (G, .A4 15. Inner bearing

; +A,REAR SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL <VEHICLES WITH ABS> Caution Be cautious to ensure that the tip of the pole piece does not come in contact with other parts when removing the speed sensor. +B, BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
Remove the brake caliper assembly and suspend it with a piece of wire.
1 TSB Revision
REAR AXLE eAWD> - Axle Shaft
27-17
+, SELF-LOCKING NUT REMOVAL With the special tool, secure the axle shaft and remove the companion flange self-locking nut.
i;
MB99 c>lN0039
qD, AXLE SHAFT ASSEMBLY REMOVAL With the special tool, remove the axle shaft from the axle housing.
MB990560 \
+E, REAR ROTOR REMOVAL <VEHICLES WITH ABS> Using the special tool, remove the rear rotor from the axle shaft.
dF, OUTER BEARING / DUST SHIELD REMOVAL Using the special tool, remove the outer bearing and dust shield concurrently from the axle shaft.
MB990560
MB990938
dG,OIL SEAL / INNER BEARING REMOVAL With the special tool, remove the inner bearing and oil seal from the axle housing.
MB990928 nlAQQ3s
1 TSB Revision
27-18
REAR AXLE cAWD> - Axle Shaft

Axle housing /

MB990938
F
MB990931 Axle hou
ZllNOOlS
.A( INNER BEARING INSTALLATION With the special tool, press fit the inner bearing onto the axle housing.
Lj,
211 A 0 0 3 9
B990641
.B+OIL SEAL INSTALLATION (1) With the special tool, press the oil seal onto the axle housing with the depression in the oil seal facing upward, and until it contacts the shoulder on the inside of the axle housing. NOTE When tapping the oil seal in, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the top and circumference of the special tool, press fitting gradually and evenly. (2) Apply multipurpose grease to the oil seal lip. .C( DUST SHIELD INSTALLATION Orienting the dust shield as shown in the illustration, and using the special tool, press fit the dust shield until it contacts the axle shaft shoulder. NOTE When tapping the oil seal in, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the top and circumference of the special tool, press fitting gradually and evenly.
LJ
00001041
.D+ DUST SHIELD INSTALLATION With the special tool, install the dust shield so that the depression is facing upward. NOTE When tapping the oil seal in, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the top and circumference of the special tool, press fitting gradually and evenly.
.E( OUTER BEARING INSTALLATION (1) Apply multipurpose grease around the entire circumference of the inner side of the outer bearing seal lip. (2) Using the special tool, press fit the outer bearing to the axle shaft so that the bearing seal lip surface is facing towards the axle shaft flange.
00001043
11AO263
ce
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Axle Shaft / Drive Shaft
27-19
.F( REAR ROTOR INSTALLATION <VEHICLES WITH ABS> Using the special tool, press fit the rear rotor to the axle shaft with the rear rotor groove surface toward the axle shaft flange.
.G+ SELF-LOCKING NUT INSTALLATION With the special tool, secure the axle shaft and tighten the companion flange self-locking nut.
MB9 c AN0039
INSPECTION
l l l
iv
DRIVE SHAFT
l l l
Check the companion flange for wear or damage. Check the dust shield for deformation or damage. Check the wheel bearings for burning or discoloration. Check the wheel bearing for unsmooth rotation. Check the axle shaft for cracking, wear or damage. Check oil seal for cracking or damage.
55-65 Nm 40-47 ft.lbs.
llN0020 00001045
Removal steps / L
1. Bolt I+A, .Bd 2. Drive shaft 3 . Circlip .A+ 4. Oil seal
TSB Revision
27-20
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Drive Shaft REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

+A, DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL Using a tire lever, etc. remove the drive shaft from the differential carrier.

.A( OIL SEAL INSTALLATION (1) If the oil seal is to be replaced because of damage, drive it in by using the special tool. (2) Apply the specified grease to the oil seal lip.
MB991380
ZllFOO12
.B+ DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION

Boot band (B.J<side) I
Two-part serration
ZilAO260
Caution 1. Be cautious to ensure that the differential carrier oil seal is not damaged by the drive shaft spline. 2. The right drive shaft for models equipped with the LSD having a VCU has a two-part serration. Be very careful to install each one on the correct side. NOTE The left and right drive shafts can also be distinguished from each other by the identification color of boot band (B.J. side). item Boot band (B.J. side) identification color Drive shaft (LH) White Drive shaft (RH) Blue
Caution Be sure to thoroughly remove any oil or grease, etc. from the threaded part of the bolt and nut used for installation to the companion flange, because any oil, grease, etc. on these parts might cause later loosening even though tightening is at the specified torque.
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the drive shaft boots for damage or deterioration. Check the ball joints for excessive play or check operation. Check the drive shaft spline for wear or damage.
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Drive Shaft DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
27-21
1 2
Li if)
llUOO77
T.J. boot repair kit
llN0022 llA0108
B.J. boot repair kit

P i
1 lN0023
fg ;% c T.J. repair kit
llNO024 00001046
B.J. repair kit Disassembly steps .C+ 1. T.J. boot band (large) .C( 2. T.J. boot band (small) 3. T.J. case 4. Snap ring 4W +A, FBI 5. Spider assembly +B, .A+ 6. T.J. boot
,A+ 7. B.J. boot band (large) .A( 8. B.J. boot band (small) (f3, .A( 9. E.J. b o o t 10. B.J. assembly 4C, 11 . Circlip
1 TSB Revision
27-22
Lubrication Points
REAR AXLE cAWD>
- Drive
Shaft
llA0084
Grease: Repair kit grease Quantity to use: 135 g (4.76 oz.) Caution Apply all of the grease from the repair kit to the joint and boot, a half to each as a rule. Special grease is used for the joint. Do not mix old grease with new or mix different types.
- llA0369
Grease: Repair kit grease Quantity to use: 125 g (4.41 oz.) Caution Apply all of the grease from the repair kit to the joint and boot, a half to each as a rule. Special grease is used for the joint. Donot mix old grease with new or mix different types.
llN0022 00001047
1 TSB Revision
REAR AXLE cAWD> - Drive Shaft DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS
27-23
Snap ring
+A,SNAP RING / SPIDER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL (1) Remove the snap ring from the drive shaft with the snap ring pliers. (2) Take out the spider assembly from the drive shaft. (3) Clean the spider assembly. Caution 1. Do not disassemble the spider assembly. 2. If the T.J. of the drive shaft assembly is bent, the joint may be damaged. Use care in handling the drive shaft. 3. The drive shaft joint use special grease. Do not add another type of grease. 4BbT.J. BOOT / B.J. BOOT REMOVAL (1) Wrap vinyl tape around the spline part on the T.J. side of the drive shaft so that the T.J. and B.J. boots are not damaged when they are removed. (2) Withdraw the T.J. and B.J. boots from the drive shaft.
ZllYO97I
+C,GREASE FROM B.J. REMOVAL Wipe out the grease from the B.J. Caution Do not disassemble the B.J.
YllKOO7

bA4B.J. BOOT / B.J. BOOT BAND (SMALL) / B.J. , BOOT BAND (LARGE) / T.J. BOOT INSTALLATION (1) Wrap vinyl tape around the drive shaft spline. (2) Insert the drive shaft in B.J. boot, boot bands, T.J. boot in that sequence.
(3) Fill the inside of the B.J. and B.J. boot with the specified grease. Specified grease: Repair kit grease 125 g (4.41 oz.) Caution The grease in the repair kit should be divided in half for use, respectively, at the joint and inside the boot. A special type of grease is used on the joint. Be cautious to ensure that not other grease is allowed to come in contact with the joint.
ZllKOO8 1
TSB Revision
27-24
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Drive Shaft

(4) Secure the boot bands. Caution 1. The boot bands should be tightened with the drive shaft at a 0 joint angle. 2. The B.J. boot band and T.J. boot band are identified by the identification number stamped on the lever. Install correct ones at correct positions.
B.J. boot band: 20-74 #BJ95 T.J. boot band: 20-75#BJ95
ZllK033
,Bq SPIDER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION (1) Apply the specified grease furnished in the repair kit to the spider assembly. Specified grease: Repair kit grease (2) Install the spider: assembly with the chamfered spline end first.
11560 00001048
,C+ T.J. BOOT BANDS INSTALLATION Set the T-J. boot bands at the specified distance in order to adjust the amount of air inside the T.J. boot, and then tighten the T.J. boot band securely. Standard value (A): 85 + 3 mm (3.35 f -12 in.)
INSPECTION
l l l l l l
Check the drive shaft for damage, bending or corrosion. Check the drive shaft spline part for wear or damage. Check for entry of water and/or foreign material into B.J. Check the spider assembly for roller rotation, wear or corrosion. Check the groove inside T.J. case for wear or corrosion. Check the boots for deterioration, damage or cracking.
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE cAWD> - Differential Carrier
27-25
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER Ld
l
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Differential Gear Oil Draining and Filling (Refer to Group 00 - Maintenance Service.) 24 Nm 17 ft.lbs. \
Main Muffler Removal and Installation (Refer to Group 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Muffler.)
90 Nm
90 Nm 65 ft.lbs.
22-25 ft.lbs. 90 Nm 65 ft.lbs.
Removal steps 1. Drive shaft +A, 2. Circlip (BF bB+ 3. Propeller shaft connection 4. Differential support assembly
5. Differential support member assembly
6. Rear wheel oil Pump installation bolt (C, .A( ;. ~-i%rx-d~al earner
i 1 TSB Revision I
27-26
REAR AXLE cAWD> - Differential Carrier REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

+A, DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL With atire lever, etc., remove the drive shaft from the differential carrier. NOTE Be cautious to ensure that the differential carrier oil seal is not damaged by the drive shaft spline.
Mating marks
(B, PROPELLER SHAFT DISCONNECTION (1) Make mating marks on the differential companion flange and the propeller shaft flange yoke for reference during reassembly. (2) Remove the differential carrier and propeller shaft connection. (3) Support the propeller shaft with wire.
ZlOD505
(C, DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER REMOVAL Holding the bottom of the differential carrier and removing the rear wheel oil pump through the mounting hole, remove the differential carrier. Caution 1. Use care not to damage the rear wheel oil pump gears. 2. Use care not to allow dirt or foreign matter to fall into the differential carrier.
DIFFERENTIAL SUPPORT BUSHING AND DIFFERENTIAL SUPPORT MEMBER BUSHING REPLACEMENT

Install or remove the bushing using the special tool. Install the bushing with its hollow portion facing in the direction shown. Caution Install the bushing with the differential support and differential support member chamfered end first and install until the bushing outer case end face is flush with the support and support member.
MB990831 ----+ MB990847
rDifferential support member
Differential
(?g) (yi;&*$ >3 j0 cc
llNOOl1
llN0053 00001049
TSB
evision
REAR AXLE cAWD> - Differential Carrier INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS
27-27
.A+ DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER INSTALLATION Install the rear wheel oil pump by inserting it through the mounting hole and install the differential carrier securely. Caution Use care not to damage the rear wheel oil pump gears. .B+ PROPELLER SHAFT CONNECTION Align the mating marks on the flange yoke and the companion flange to install the propeller shaft.
MB991116
BEFORE DISASSEMBLY CHECK

Hold the special tools in a vice, and attach the differential carrier to the working base.
FINAL DRIVE GEAR BACKLASH CHECK With the drive pinion locked in place, measure the final drive gear backlash with a dial indicator on the drive gear. NOTE Measure at four points or more on the circumference of the drive gear. Standard value: 0.11-0.16 mm (.004-.OOS in.)
DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT CHECK Measure the drive gear runout at the shoulder on the reverse side of the drive gear. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.)
FINAL DRIVE GEAR TOOTH CONTACT CHECK Check the final drive gear tooth contact by following the steps below. (1) Apply a thin, uniform coat of machine blue to both surfaces of the drive gear teeth.
TSB Revision
27-28
REAR AXLE eAWD> - Differential Carrier

(2) Insert a brass rod between the differential carrier and the differential case, and then rotate the companion flange by hand (once in the normal direction, and then once in the reverse direction) while applying a load to the drive gear, so that the revolution torque [approximately 2.5-3.0 Nm (28-33 in.lbs.)] is applied to the drive pinion. Caution If the drive gear is rotated too much, the tooth contact pattern will become unclear and difficult to check. (3) Check the tooth contact condition of the drive gear and drive pinion.
211 GO076
1 TSB Revision

Standard tooth contact pattern 1 Narrow tooth side 2 Drive-side tooth surface (the side applying power during forward movement) 3 Wide tooth side 4 Coast-side tooth surface (the side applying power during reverse movement)
27-29
I L
Problem Tooth contact pattern resulting from excessive pinion height
Solution
The drive pinion is positioned too far from the center of the drive gear.
Increase the thickness of the pinion height adjusting shim, and position the drive pinion closer to the center of the drive gear. Also, for backlash adjustment, position the drive gear farther from the drive pinion.
I,
Tooth contact pattern resulting from insufficient pinion height
The drive pinion is positioned too close to the center of the drive gear.
Decrease the thickness of the pinion height adjusting shim, and position the drive pinion farther from the center of the drive gear. Also, for backlash adjustment, position the drive gear closer to the drive pinion.
NOTE (1) Tooth contact pattern is a method for judging the result of the adjustment of drive pinion height and final drive gear backlash. The adjustment of drive pinion height and final drive gear backlash should be repeated until tooth contact patterns bear a similarity to the standard tooth contact pattern. (2) When adjustment is not able to obtain a correct pattern, it may be judged that the drive gear and drive pinion have exceed their usage limits and both gears should be replaced as a set.
TSB Revision
27-30
DISASSEMBLY
Inspection Before Disassembly l Final Drive Gear Backlash (Refer to P.27-27.) l Drive Gear Runout (Refer to P.27-27.)
Final Drive Gear Tooth Contact (Refer to P.27-27.)
:ig ::: 4W 4Eb
Disassembly steps 1. Differential cover assembly 2. Vent plug 3. Oil seal 4. Snap ring 5. Side bearing nut 6. Side bearing outer race 7. Differential case assembly 8. Side bearing inner race 9. Drive gear (for 4WS) 10. Drive gear 11. Spring pin (for 4WS) 12. LSD case (Refer to P.27-40.) 13. Self-locking nut 14. Washer
4F,
4,
15. Drive pinion assembly 16. Companion flange 17. Drive pinion front shim (for preload adjustment) 18. Drive pinion spacer 19. Drive pinion rear bearing inner race 20. Drive pinion rear shim (for pinion height adjustment) 21. Drive pinion 22. Oil seal 23. Drive pinion front bearing 24. Drive pinion rear bearing outer race 25. Differential carrier

+A,SlDE BEARING NUT REMOVAL Using the special tool, remove the side bearing nut.
TSB Revision
27-31
+B,SlDE BEARING OUTER RACE REMOVAL (1) Using a press, push the differential case until it is pressed against the carrier. (2) Remove the differential case from the press. Insert two spacers in diagonally opposed positions between the side bearing outer race to be removed and the inner race. Using the press again, remove the outer race. Caution Use care not to drop the side bearing outer race. NOTE (1) Identify the right-and left-hand side bearing outer races for correct reassembly. (2) Use a spacer, approx. 30 mm (1.18 in.) long, 10 mm (.39 in.) wide and 1 to 2 mm (.04 to .08 in.) high, made of copper sheet or the like to prevent damage to the bearing.
(C,SlDE BEARING INNER RACES / DRIVE GEAR (FOR 4WS) REMOVAL Pull out the side bearing inner races by using the special tools. NOTE (1) For 4WS, remove the side bearing inner race together with the rear wheel oil pump drive gear. (2) Hook the pawl of the special tool to the side bearing inner race using the two notches on the differential case.
+D, DRIVE GEAR REMOVAL (1) Make the mating marks to the differential case and the drive gear. (2) Loosen the drive gear attaching bolts in diagonal sequence to remove the drive gear.
+E, SELF-LOCKING NUT REMOVAL Use the special tools to hold the companion flange and remove the companion flange self-locking nut.
TSB Revision
27-32
Mating marks

MB99081 0 G/
+F, DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY REMOVAL (1) Make the mating marks to the drive pinion and companion flange. NOTE Mating marks should not be made to the contact surfaces of companion flange and propeller shaft. (2) Drive out the drive pinion together with the drive pinion spacer and drive pinion front shims.
dG,DRlVE PINION REAR BEARING INNER RACE REMOVAL Pull out the drive pinion rear bearing inner race by using the special tools.
MB990939
+H,OIL SEAL / DRIVE PINION FRONT BEARING REMOVAL Using the special tool, drive out the drive pinion front bearing from the gear carrier.
MB990939
+I, DRIVE PINION REAR BEARING OUTER RACE REMOVAL Using the special tool, drive out the drive pinion rear bearing outer race from the gear carrier.
INSPECTION
l l l l l l l
Check the companion flange for wear or damage. Check the oil seal for wear or deterioration. Check the bearings for wear or discoloration. Check the gear carrier for cracks. Check the drive pinion and drive gear for wear or cracks. Check the side gears, pinion gears and pinion shaft for wear or damage. Check the side gear spline for wear or damage.
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE cAWD> - Differential Carrier REASSEMBLY
27-33
I Aen
YllFOO32
Reassembly steps 1. Spring pin (for 4WS) ;- Drive gear (for 4WS) Differential carrier 2: Drive pinion rear bearing outer race Drive pinion front bearing outer race ; Drive pinion height adjustment Drive pinion 7: Drive pinion rear shim (for drive pinion height adjustment) Drive pinion rear bearing inner race :: Drive pinion spacer FE4 ,o Drive pinion preload adjustment Drive pinion front shim 11: Drive pinion assembly Drive pinion front bearing inner race E Oil seal 14: Companion flange
.A4 .BI p: 4
15. Washer 16. Self-locking nut 17. LSD case (Refer to P.27-40.) .F+ 18. Drive gear ,G+ 19. Side bearing inner race 20. Side bearing outer race bH( l Final drive gear backlash adjustment 21. Differential case assembly 22. Side bearing nut 23. Snap ring ,I+ 24. Oil seal 25. Vent plug 26. Differential cover assembly
NOTE *: Tightening torque with oil applied.
c
TSB Revision
27-34

I-
Lubrication, Sealing and Adhesion Points
llK801
llFOOI1
zllFOO32
llFO019 113364 -00001519
Adhesive: 3M Stud Locking Part No. 4170 or equivalent
Spring
pin
Drive gear

bAdSPRING PIN INSTALLATION (FOR 4WS) Tap the spring pin into the differential case to the position shown in the illustration before press fitting the rear wheel oil pump drive gear. The notch on the spring pin should be in the position shown in the illustration.
llA0262
llA0261 00001520
27-35
Beveled (law) pati
llA0318
.B+DRlVE GEAR PRESS-IN (FOR 4WS) (1) With the beveled (large) part of the rear wheel oil pump drive gear at the inner side, press in the drive gear (by using the special tool) until the drive gear contacts the end surface of the differential case. (2) Check to ensure that the drive gear and the spring pin are flush.
MB!390938
.C+DRlVE PINION REAR BEARING OUTER RACE / DRIVE PINION FRONT BEARING OUTER RACE INSTALLATION Press-fit the drive pinion rear and front bearing outer races into the gear carrier by using the special tools. Caution Be careful not to press in the outer race at an angle.
.D+ DRIVE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT Adjust the drive pinion height by the following procedures: (1) Install special tools and drive pinion front and rear bearing inner races on the gear carrier in the sequence shown in the illustration. NOTE Apply a thin coat of multipurpose grease to the mating face of the washer of the special tool.
(2) Tighten the special tool until the standard value of drive pinion rotation torque is obtained. (3) Measure the drive pinion rotation torque (without the oil seal). Standard value
NOTE (1) Gradually tighten the nut of the special tool while checking the drive pinion rotation torque. (2) Because the special tool cannot be turned one turn, turn it several times within the range that it can be turned; then, after fitting to the bearing, measure the rotation torque.
TSB Revision
27-36
REAR AXLE <AWD> - Differential Carrier

(4) Position the special tool in the side bearing seat of the gear carrier, and then select a drive pinion rear shim of a thickness which corresponds to the gap between the special tools. NOTE Clean the side bearing seat thoroughly. When selecting the drive pinion rear shims, keep the number of shims to a minimum.
(5) Fit the selected drive pinion rear shim(s) to the drive pinion, and press-fit the drive pinion rear bearing inner race by using the special tool.
.E( DRIVE PINION PRELOAD ADJUSTblENT Adjust the drive pinion rotation torque by using the following procedures: (1) Fit the drive pinion front shim(s) between the drive pinion spacer and the drive pinion front bearing inner race. (2) Tighten the companion flange to the specified torque by using the special tools. NOTE Do not install the oil seal. (3) Measure the drive pinion rotation torque (without the oil seal) by using the special tools. Standard value Bearing classification New New/reused Bearing Rotation torque lubrication Nm (in.lbs.) None (with 0.3-0.5 rust-prevention oil) (3-4) Gear oil 0.15-0.25 application (l-2)
(4) If the drive pinion rotation torque is not within the range of the standard value, adjust the rotation torque by replacing the drive pinion front shim(s) or the drive pinion spacer. NOTE When selecting the drive pinion front shims, if the number of shims is large, reduce the number of shims to a minimum by selecting the drive pinion spacers.
TSB Revision
27-37
(5) Remove the companion flange and drive pinion once again. Drive the oil seal into the gear carrier front lip by using the special tool. Apply multipurpose grease to the oil seal lip. (6) Apply a thin coat of multipurpose grease to the companion flange contacting surface of the washer before installing drive pinion assembly.
U ZllD55r
(7) Install the drive pinion assembly and companion flange with mating marks properly aligned, and tighten the companion flange self-locking nut to the specified torque by using the special tools.
(6) fvleasure the drive pinion rotation torque (with oil seal) to verify that the drive pinion rotation torque complies with the standard value. Standard value Bearing classification
New
New/reused
Bearing Rotation torque Nm (in.lbs.) lubrication None (with 0.5-0.7 rust-prevention oil) (4-6) Gear oil 0.35-0.45 aoolication (3-4)
If there is a deviation from the standard value, check whether or not there is incorrect tightening torque of the companion flange tightening self-locking nut, or incorrect fitting of the oil seal.
.Fd DRIVE GEAR INSTALLATION (1) Clean the drive gear attaching bolts. (2) Use an Ml 0 x 1.25 tap to remove the adhesive adhering to the threaded holes of the drive gear, and then clean the threaded holes by applying compressed air.
[ TSB Revision
27-38

(3) Apply multipurpose adhesive to the threaded holes of the drive gear. Specified adhesive: 3M Stud Locking Part No. 4170 or equivalent (4) Install the drive gear onto the differential case with the mating marks properly aligned. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a diagonal sequence.
IContactlk &%%I
.G+SIDE BEARING INNER RACE PRESS-FITTING Press-fit the side bearing inner races to the differential case by using the special tool.
~~
ZllGO121
.H+ FINAL DRIVE GEAR BACKLASH ADJUSTMENT (1) Using the special tool, temporarily tighten the side bearing nut until it is in the state just before preloading of the side bearing.
(2) Measure the final drive gear backlash. Standard value: 0.11-0.16 mm (.004-.006 in.) NOTE Measure at four or more points around the drive gear circumference.
When backlash i
(3) Using the special tool (MB991 367 and MB991 385), adjust the backlash to standard value by moving the side bearing nut as shown. NOTE First turn the side bearing nut for loosening, and then turn (by the same amount) the side bearing nut for tightening.
1 When backlash is ] excessive
2110267
TSB Revision

MB991 367
27-39
(4) Using the special tool, to apply the preload, turn down both right and left side bearing nuts on half the distance between centers of two neighboring holes.
I
Snap ring
00001523
(5) Fit the snap ring at either position shown to lock the side bearing nut. (6) Check the drive gear and drive pinion for tooth contact. If poor contact is evident, make adjustment. (Refer to P-27-29.)
llFOOO9
llFOOl0 00001524
(7) Measure the drive gear runout at the shoulder on the reverse side of the drive gear. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.) (8) If the drive gear runout exceeds the limit, reinstall by changing the phase of the drive gear and differential case, and remeasure.
ZllFOO20
.I+ OIL SEAL INSTALLATION (1) Using the special tool, install the oil seal flush with the gear carrier end face. (2) Apply a thin coat of Multi-purpose grease to the oil seal lip.
TSB Revision
27-40
REAR AXLE <AWD> - LSD Case Assembly
LSD CASE ASSEMBLY

ZllFOO33
Disassembly steps 4Ab .Cd 3. Thrust washer (L.H.) .B+ 5. Pinion mate washer .A+ 2. Differential case A
1. Screw
4. Viscous unit
7. Differential pinion shaft 8. Differential side gear (R.H.) 9. Thrust washer (R.H.) +A, .A4 10. Differential case B
.Bd 6. Differential pinion mate
BEFORE DISASSEMBLY CHECK

DIFFERENTIAL GEAR BACKLASH CHECKING (1) Secure the differential case assembly in a vise so that the differential side gear (right) is facing upward. Caution When securing the vise, be sure not to hold the differential case assembly too tightly. (2) Insert a 0.03 mm (.0012 in.) feeler gauge at two places (diagonally) between differential case B and the thrust washer (right). Caution Do not insert a feeler gauge in the oil groove of differential case B.
ZllFOO31
Diffkential side gear (right)
Thnk w&her (right) YllFM)37 TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - LSD Case Assembly I,

eeler gauge r f
27-41
=eeler gauge
(3) insert the special tool at the spline part of differential case B (right) and check to be sure the side gear (right) rotates. (4) Then insert a 0.09 mm (.0035 in.) feeler gauge to replace a 0.03 mm (.0012 in.) gauge. (5) insert the special tool at the spline part of the differential side gear (right) and check to be sure the side gear (right) does not rotate. Differential gear backlash Standard value (clearance in thrust direction of side gear): 0.03-0.09 mm (.0012-.0035 in.) NOTE if the clearance in the thrust direction of the side gear is within the standard value range, the backlash of the differential gear is normal. (6) If the clearance in the thrust direction of the side gear is not within the standard value range, remove differential case A and make the adjustment by adjusting the thickness of the thrust washer (left).
00001525

dAbTHRUST WASHER (LEFT) / THRUST WASHER (RIGHT) REMOVAL The thrust washers (left and right) are of different thickness, and so should be discriminated in some way for reference. during installation.
, L
a Differential case B

.A+DlFFERENTlAL CASE B / DIFFERENTIAL CASE A INSTALLATION Align the mating marks of differential cases B and A, and assemble the cases.
I\
k?llFOO30
Pinion mate
.B+DlFFERENTlAL PINION MATE / PINION MATE WASHER INSTALLATION With the washer in the position shown in the illustration, install to the differential pinion shaft, and then install to differential case B.
ZllPO134
TSB Revision
27-42
REAR AXLE <AWD> - LSD Case Assemblv

.Cd THRUST WASHER (LEFT) SELECTION If the differential side gear and pinion mate gear have been replaced, select the thrust washer (left) by following the steps below. (1) Wash the differential side gear and pinion mate gear in unleaded gasoline to remove all oil, grease, etc. (2) Install the previously used thrust washers (being careful the left and right ones are used at the correct side), together with the gears, viscous unit, pinion mate washer and pinion shaft, to differential cases A and B, and then, using screws, secure them temporarily. (3) Secure the differential case assembly in a vise so that the differential side gear (right) is facing upward. Caution When securing in the vise, be sure not to hold the differential case assembly too tightly. (4) Insert a 0.03 mm (.0012 in.) feeler gauge at two places (diagonally) between differential case B and the thrust washer (right). Caution Do not insert a feeler gauge in the oil groove of differential cace B.
ij~
Differential gear (r&V)
Thrust washer (@W
llFO937 00001526
-Feeler gauge , P-
r-3==-
Feeler gauge MB991 \ H---- ----294
(5) Insert the special tool at the spline part of differential side gear (right) and check to be sure the side gear (right) rotates. (6) Then insert a 0.09 mm (.0035 in.) feeler gauge to replace a 0.03 mm (-0012 in.) gauge. (7) Insert the special tool at the spline part of the differential side gear (right) and check to be sure the side gear (right) ) /-,J does not rotate. Differential gear backlash Standard value (clearance in thrust direction of side gear): 0.03-0.09 mm (.0012-.0035 in.) NOTE If the clearance in the thrust direction of the side gear is within the standard value range, the backlash of the differential side gear is normat. (8) If the clearance in the thrust direction of the side gear is not within the standard value range, remove differential case A and make the adjustment by adjusting the thickness of the thrust washer (left).
11 FOO36 00001525
TSB Revision
REAR AXLE <AWD> - LSD Case Assemblv

Thrust washer (left) Part No. Thickness mm (in.) 0.8 (.031) 0.9 (.035) 1 .o (.039) 1.1 (.043) 1.15 (.045) MB83746 1 1.2 (.047) 1.25 (.049) 1.3 (.051) 1.35 (.053) 1.4 (.055) 1.5 (.059)
1 Thrust washer (right) (reference) Part No. M B837522 Thickness mm (in.) 0.8 (.031)
NOTE Select one thrust washer (left) from the eleven types in the kit.
Differential side
Differential
INSPECTION
(1) Check the gears and differential pinion shaft for unusual wear or damage. (2) Check the spline part of the differential side gear (right) for stepped wear or damage.
Differential pinion mate

HlP0128
Thrust washer mate r c @ 3 Q1 od I ( 69 n fi TV

7HP012l
(3) Check the thrust washer and pinion mate washer for unusual wear of contact surfaces, heat damage or other damage.
PinioiZnate washer
TSB Revision
27-44
Differential case B
REAR AXLE cAWD> - LSD Case Assembly

Differential
(4) Check differential cases A and B for unusual wear of contact surfaces, heat damage or other damage. 1: Contact surface with the viscous unit 2: Contact surface with the pinion mate washer 3 and 4: Contact surfaces with thrust washer
ZllFOO35
Contact surface with differential
(5) Check the spline part of the viscous unit for stepped wear or damage, and check the contact surface with differential case B. (6) Check the side gear (left) of the viscous unit for unusual wear or damage.
1 TSB Revision
31-1
WHEEL AND TIRE

CONTENTS
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Tire Inflation Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tire Wear Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Wheel Runout Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Bald Spots Cracked Treads Feathered Edge Rapid Wear at Center Rapid Wear at Shoulders Scalloped Wear Wear on One Side
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General Specifications . . . . . . I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Service Specifications . . . . . . ~ . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . 2
WHEEL AND TIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
31-2 SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL AND TIRE - Specifications
Items
except spare wheel)
except spare tire)
Size Amount of wheel offset mm (in.) Pitch circle diameter (P.C.D.). mm (in.) Spare tire Size
16 x 4T 14 (55) 114.3 (4.50) T125/90D16
16 x 4T*, 17 x 4T*2 14 (.55)* 14 * 1 .o (.55 + .04)2 114.3 (4.50) T125/90016*, T135/8ODl 7*2
17 x 4-r 14 III 1 .o (55 zk .04) 114.3 (4.50) T135/80D17
l l: Up to 1993 models
*2: From 1994 models *3: From 1995 models <Option>
NOTE
1 TSB Revision
WHEEL AND TIRE - Troubleshooting
31-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Rapid wear at shoulders
Probable cause Under-inflation or lack of rotation
Remedy Adjust the tire pressure.
Rapid wear at center
Over-inflation or lack of rotation
llXO110 Cracked treads Under-inflation
11x0117
Adjust the tire pressure.
Wear on one side
Excessive camber
Inspect the camber.
Feathered edge
Incorrect toe-in
Adjust the toe-in.
Bald spots
Unbalanced wheel
Adjust the unbalanced wheels.
1,X0114
llXO120
Scalloped wear
Lack of rotation of tires or worn or out-of-alignment suspension
Rotate the tires. Inspect the front suspension alignment.
TSB Revision
31-4
WHEEL AND TIRE - On-vehicle Service / Wheel and Tire

1
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE CHECK
Check the inflation pressure of the tires. If it is not within the standard value, make the necessary adjustment. L)
TIRE WEAR CHECK

Wear indicator
Measure the tread depth of tires. Limit: 1.6 mm (.06 in.) If the remaining tread depth is less than the limit, replace the tire. NOTE When the tread depth of tire is reduced to 1.6 mm (.06 in.) or less, wear indicator will appear.
/,/ / /I1:, / I/ --&!I(?= Tia 4 w@ -/ Lateral
253Y510 -I
WHEEL RUNOUT CHECK

Jack up the vehicle so that the wheels are clear of the floor. While slowly turning the wheel, measure wheel runout with a dial indicator. Limit: Radial 1.0 mm or less (.04 in. or less) Lateral 1.0 mm or less (.04 in. or less) If wheel runout exceeds the limit, replace the wheel.
ZllFOO13
WHEEL AND TIRE

SERVICE POINTS OF INSTALLATION
Tighten the wheel nut to the specified torque. Tightening torque: 120-140 Nm (87-101 ft.lbs.)
TSB Revision
32-1
POWER PLANT MOUNT

CONTENTS
ENGINE MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ENGINE ROLL STOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 RIGHT MEMBER, LEFT MEMBER AND CROSSMEMBER* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SPECIFICATIONS .......................... 2
2 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSAXLE MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 I
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component;can lead to personal injuryordeath toservicepersonnel(from inadvertentfiringoftheairbag)ortothedriverandpassenger(fromrendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 528 -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00- Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*).
, LJ
32-2
POWER PLANT MOUNT - Troubleshootincl
3pwIIbamni3 I qaxdal IuUlIi I
SPECIFICATIONS
Items No. 1 crossmember Crossmember Bushing (B) projection mm (in.) Bushing (A) projection mm (in.) Bushing (B) projection mm (in.) Standard value 7.5-10.5 (.30-.41) 7.2-10.2 (.28-.40) 6.5-9.5 (.26-.37)
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Excessive engine wobble or vibration (with engine in normal condition) Abnormal noise Probable cause Cracked rubber parts of insulator Insufficiently tightened parts lnsuff iciently tightened parts Remedy Replace Retighten Retighten
TSB Revision
POWER PLANT MOUNT - Engine Mounting
32-3
ENGINE MOUNTING
Raise and Suspend the Engine to the Extent Force is not Applied to the Engine Mount
<Up to 1993 models>

100-120 NIT .1 72-87 ft.lbs. /12 Nm 7 9 ft.lbs.
<From 1994 models>

loo-120 Nm . 72-87 ft.lbs. h31 1 c
35 Nm R 25 ft.lbs.,-&//,i I
Removal steps
4A,
1. Air hose G connection <Turbo> 2. Cruise control pump and link assembly <Vehicles with Cruise Control> 3. Engine mount bracket and body connection bolt
4. Engine mount bracket
,A4 5. Mounting stopper 6. Dynamic damper <Up to 1993 models>

(A,CRUlSE CONTROL PUMP AND LINK ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Remove the actuator mounting nuts and place the actuator where it will not interfere with the work.
32-4
POWER PLANT MOUNT - Engine Mounting INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

.A4 MOUNTING STOPPER INSTALLATION Attach the engine mounting bracket so that the arrow mark on the mounting stopper is in the direction as shown in the illustration. d
:From 1994 models>
Engine mount bracket
INSPECTION
l l
Check each insulator for cracks or damage. Check each bracket for deformation or damage.
TSB r---- Revision
POWER PLANT MOUNT - Transaxle Mountina
32-5
TRANSAXLE MOUNTING
(Refer to GROUP 15 - Air Cleaner.) 45 Nm / 33 ft.lbs.
mount
201 Fow4
Removal steps 1. Transaxle mount bracket and transaxle connection bolt 2. Cap Transaxle mount bracket \ Engine
3. Transaxle mount bracket installation bolt 4. Transaxle mount bracket .A+ 5. Mounting stopper

.A+ MOUNTING STOPPER INSTALLATION Attach the transaxle mounting bracket so that the arrow mark on the mounting stopper is in the direction as shown in the illustration.
Arrow mark
INSPECTION
l l
TSB Revision
32-6
POWER PLANT MOUNT - Engine Roll Stopper
ENGINE ROLL STOPPER

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Condenser Fan Motor Assembly Removal and Installation <Turbo> (Refer to GROUP 55 - Condenser and Condenser Fan Motor.) l Left Bank Warm Up Three-Way Catalytic Converter Removal and Installation <Turbo> (Refer to GROUP 15 - Turbocharger <Rear>.)
l
P--, ,I,,
43-51 ft.lbs.
.50-60 Nm 36-43 ft.lbs.
d
ZOlFOO30
Front stopper bracket removal steps 1. Front roil stopper bracket and engine connection bolt 2. Front roll stopper bracket installation bolt Front roll stopper bracket 43: Heat protector <Turbo>
Rear roll stopper bracket removal steps Air hose A <Turbo> :: Air intake hose C <Turbo> .B4 7. Rear roll stopper bracket and engine connection bolt 8. Rear roll stopper bracket installation bolt 4Ab .A4 ,;. Rear roll stopper bracket Heat protector <Turbo>

+A,REAR ROLL STOPPER BRACKET REMOVAL
(1) Slightly raise the rear roll stopper bracket. (2) Turn the rear roll stopper bracket in the direction shown in the illustration and lift upward to remove.
sropper orawe
TSB Revision
POWER PLANT MOUNT - Engine Roll Stopper INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS
32-7
,A+ REAR ROLL STOPPER BRACKET INSTALLATION Install the rear roll stopper bracket as shown in the illustration. ,B+REAR ROLL STOPPER BRACKET AND ENGINE CONNECTION BOLT INSTALLATION Install the bolt as shown in the illustration.
INSPECTION
l l
TSB Revision
32-8
POWER PLANT MOUNT - Crossmember
nlgrrr ivtr311u~r, L~IL nfIt3rIuer arlu
RIGHT MEMBER, LEFT- MEMBER AND CROSSMEMBER

Pre-removal Operation
l
I
Post-installation Operation
l l
;/,
Under Cover Removal (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.)
CAUTION: SRS Before removal of steering gear box, refer to GROUP 528 - SRS, center front wheels and remove ignition key. Failure to do so may damage SRS clock spring and render SRS system inoperative, risking serious driver injury.
Under Cover Installation (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.) Power-steering Fluid Air Bleeding (Refer to GROUP 37A - Service Adjustment Procedures.) Front Wheel Alignment Adjustment (Refer to GROUP 33A - Service Adjustment Procedures.) Transfer Oil Supplying <AWD> (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.)
No. 1 crossmember, Left member, Right member

60-70 Nm
11
90 Nm / 65 Klbs.
43-51 ft.lbs.
60-70 Nm 43-51 ft.lbs.

ZOlFOO47
60-70 Nm 43-51 ft.lbs.
No. 1 crossmember, left member, right member removal steps 1. Cover installation screw 2. Left member 3. Clutch vacuum hose connection <Turbo> 4. Vacuum tank installation bolt <Turbo>
5. Right member
6. Vacuum tank <Turbo>
7. Front roll stopper installation bolt 8. No. 1 crossmember installation nut 9. Lower plate 10. No. 1 crossmember 11. Stopper(B) 12. Bushing (B)
TSB Revision

Crossmember
mgni wemuer, Leli wlemaer anu
r--L
45 Nm 33 ft.lbs.
24
26
90 Nm / 65 ft.lbs.
78 ft.lbs.*
28 23
16
40 Nm 29 ft.lbs.
Crossmember removal steps

l
l l
Front exhaust pipe (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe, Main Muffler and Catalytic Convener.) Transfer cAWD> (Refer to GROUP 22 - Transfer.) Stabilizer bar #?$r to GROUP 33A - Stabilizer Steering gear box (Refer to GROUP 37A - Power Steering Gear Box.) Self-locking nut Clamp installal:ion bolt (short) Clamp installal:ion bolt (long) Clamp Lower arm mounting bolt
18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.
Stopper Rear roll stopper bracket mounting bolt Self-locking nut Lower plate Self-locking nut Lower plate Crossmember Stopper B Stopper A Bushing B Bushing A
13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
Caution *: Indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle on the ground in the unladen condition.
TSB Revision
32-10
nlyllr
I~I~III~~I,
LCIL
IvI~lIILJcI
QIIU
INSPECTION Check the crossmember for cracks or deformation. l Check the bushings for cracks or deterioration. l Check the right member for cracks or deformation. l Check the left member for cracks or deformation. l
Press out
Press fit
Nut Base
BUSHING A AND B REPLACEMENT

Use the special tool to remove and press in bushings A and B.
Washer Bolt
10120
Front
Press in bushings A and B so that the arrows on their bottom surfaces may be directed in the crosswise direction (except those on No. 1 crossmember of FWD vehicles). Caution Shifting of the arrow in the direction of rotation shall be within +5 of the crosswise direction.
Rear
ZOlFOO52
Bushing A
Bushing B
Inner sleeve
12RO128 12R0129 00002122
Press in bushings A and B so that the projecting amount of the inner sleeve agrees with the standard value. Standard value: No. 1 crossmember Bushing B 7.5-10.5 mm (.30-.41 in.) Crossmember Bushing A 7.2-10.2 mm (.28-.40 in.) Bushing B 6.5-9.5 mm (.26-.37 in.) Caution When pressing in, apply a solution of soap and water to the slidina Dart of the bushings, and then press them in without s%pping one after tile other. If there is a pause during the pressing operation, the frictional resistance will prevent installation.
TSB Revision
33-1
FRONT SUSPENSION ~
CONTENTS
FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33A ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ECS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33B ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION (ACTIVE PREVIEW ECS) . . . 33C
NOTE (1) Shaded groups in the above list are not included in this manual. (2) *: Up to 1995 models
i:
33-2
NOTES
33A-1
FRONT SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
LOWER ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Front Wheel Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wheel Bearing Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . ..s................. 2
General SpecificationS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 STRUT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
33A-2 SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT SUSPENSION - Specifications
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Items Suspension type Specification McPherson strut with coil spring and compression rod type
COIL SPRING (Hatchback) <Up to 1993 models>

Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) FWD M/T: 14.8 x 170 x 322.5 (.58x 6.69 x 12.70) Wr, M/T*: 15.0 x 1,70 x 331 .O (.59 x 6.69 x 13.03) Coil spring identification color M/TI Orange x 1 A/T Orange x 2 Spring constant N/mm (Ibs./in.) 30 (168) Blue x 1 AWD 15.7x170x301.5 (.62 x 6.69 x 11.87)
<From 1994 models>

Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) FWD MTT: 14.4 x 170 x 322.7 (.56x 6.69 x 12.4) NT, M/T*: 14.5 x 170 x 329.3 (.57 x 6.69 x 12.96) Coil spring identification color M/T Green x 1 AfE Green x 2 Spring constant N/mm (Ibs./in.) 29 (162) 38 (212) Brown x 1 AWD 15.2x170x301.6 (.60 x 6.69 x 11.87)
CZOIL SPRING (Convertible)

Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (Ibs./in.) NOTE *: Option FWD 14.7 x 170 x 338.0 (.58x 6.69 x 13.31) Orange x 1 30 (168) AWD 15.4x170x308.5 (.61 x 6.69 x 12.15) Gray x 1 39 (218)
1 TSB Revision
FRONT SUSPENSION - Specifications

SHOCK ABSORBER
Items Vehicles without ECS Vehicles with ECS (up to 1995 models)
33A-3
Maximum length mm (in.) Compressed length mm (in.) Stroke mm (in.) Damping force [at 0.3 m/set. (0.984 ft./ sec.)] Expansion 1,080 (238)
I 150 (5.91)
Hard: 2,530 (558) Medium: 1,580 (348) Soft: 620 (137) Hard: 1 ,190 (262) Medium: 1,120 (247) Soft: 970 (214)
Contraction
540 (119)
Items Camber Caster Toe-in mm (in.) Lower arm ball joint breakaway torque Nm (in.lbs.) Stabilizer link ball joint breakaway torque Nm (in.lbs.) Steering angle Inner wheel Cuter wheel Standard value 0 +30 355 Lk 30 O&3(0&.12) lo-22 (86-191) 1.7-3.2 (15-28) 3345 1 2821
TSB Revision
3344-4 SPECIAL TOOLS

Tool
FRONT SUSPENSION - Special Tools
A: MB991 237 B: MB991 238
Compression of the front coil spring
MB990326
General service
Measurement of the ball joint and stabilizer link ball joint starting torque
@ @ P r e l o a d s o c k e t too
1 TSB Revision
FRONT SUSPENSION - Troubleshooting
33A-5
TROUBLESHOOTIIWG
Symptom i Steering wheel is heavy, vibrates or pulls to one side Suspension malfunction Ball joint Coil spring Wheel alignment Unbalanced or worn tires Excessive vehicle rolling Poor riding Broken or deteriorated stabilizer Shock absorber malfunction Improper tire inflation pressure Broken or deteriorated coil spring Shock absorber malfunction Inclination of vehicle Noise Broken or deteriorated coil spring Lack of lubrication Looseness and wear of each part Broken coil spring Shock absorber malfunction Replace Lubricate Retighten or replace Replace Adjust Replace Replace Adjust or replace Probable cause Remedy
-TSB Revision
33A-6
FRONT SUSPENSION - On-vehicle Service
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
TOE-IN Standard value: 0 + 3 mm (0 f .12 in.) 1. Adjust the toe-in by undoing the clips and turning the left and right tie rod turnbuckles by the same amount (in opposite directions). 2. After making the adjustments, use a turning radius gauge to confirm that the steering wheel turning angle is within the standard value range. (Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.) Standard value: inner wheel Outer wheel 3345 2821
Strut lower mounting bolt (upper)
CAMBER AND CASTER Standard value: Camber 0 f 30 Caster 355 * 30 Install the special tool by tightening it to the same torque as that applied to the drive shaft nut. To adjust camber, turn the strut lower mounting bolt (upper). One graduation is equivalent to about 20 in camber. Caster has been factory-adjusted to the standard value and requires no adjustment. Caution 1. One camber graduation changes toe by about 0.5 mm (.02 in.). Be sure to adjust toe after camber has been adjusted. 2. The difference in camber between right and left should be within O30.
- camber
+ camber
Z12FOO31
WHEEL BEARING ADJUSTMENT

Bearing preload is preset to the specified value by design and therefore can not be adjusted.
TSB Revision
FRONT SUSPENSION - Strut Assemblv
33A-7
STRUT ASSEMBLY
Wheel Alignment Adjustment (Refer to P.33A-6.)
Removal steps 1. Brake hose tube clamp mounting bolt 2. Brake hose tube clamp 3. Front speed sensor clamp mounting nut <ABS> 4. Front speed sensor clamp <ABS> i
5. Strut lower mounting bolt 6. Strut upper mounting bolt 7. ECS connector <EC&8. Cap <EC&- or dust cover 9. Strut assembly
1 TSB Revision
3344-8
FRONT SUSPENSION - Strut Assembly
78 Nm 56 ft.lbs.
3 4 5
12FC024 00000616
Caution When applying the grease, take care that grease does not adhere to the insulators rubber part.
12FOO30
Disassembly steps 1. Dust shield dA, .Bd 2. Self-locking nut 3. Strut insulator assembly .A4 4. Spring upper seat assembly 5. Upper spring pad 6. Bump rubber 7. Dust shield 8. Front coil spring 9. Strut assembly
\ -I U ~ I
DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINT

+A, SELF-LOCKING NUT REMOVAL
(1) Holding the spring upper seat with the special tool, loosen the self-locking nut. Caution The self-locking nut should be loosened only not removed.
I ~
MB991238
(2) Using the special tools, compress the coil spring, and then remove the self-locking nut. Caution (1) Install the special tools evenly, and so that the maximum length will be attained within the installation range. (2) Do not use an air tool to tighten the bolt of the special tool and to remove the self-locking nut.
1 TSB Revision
FRONT SUSPENSION - Strut Assemblv REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS
33A-9
.A+ SPRING UPPER SEAT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION (1) Assemble the spring upper seat to the piston.rod, fitting the notch in the rod to the shaped hole in spring seat.
(2) Using a pipe, line up the holes in the strut assembly spring lower seat with the hole in the spring upper seat. NOTE The job is easily accomplished with a pipe [Q 8 mm x 300 mm (+ .3 in. x 11.8 in.)].
.B+ SELF-LOCKING NUT INSTALLATION (1) With the coil spring held compressed by the special tools (MB991 237 and MB991 238), provisionally tighten the self-locking nut. Caution Do not use an air tool to tighten the bolt of the special tool. (2) Correctly align both ends of the coil spring with the grooves in the spring seat, and then loosen the special tools (MB991237 and MB991238). (3) Using the special tool, tighten the strut insulator at the specified torque. Caution Do not use an air tool.
212FOO2~
TSB Revision
33A-10 LOWER ARM
FRONT SUSPENSION - Lower Arm

l
Wheel Alignment- Adjustment (Refer to P.33A-6.)
shield
00000619
IPNOO17
Removal steps
1. Stabilizer link mounting nut (stabilizer bar side) 2. Stabilizer link mounting nut (lower arm side) 3. Stabilizer link 4. Self-locking nut connecting lower arm ball joint to knuckle 5. Lower arm mounting nut 6. Lower arm mounting bolt 7. Clamp mounting self-locking nut 8. Clamp mounting bolt (small) 9. Clamp mounting bolt (large)
,A4 10. Logw;:rarm clamp mounting self-lock11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Lower arm mounting clamp Lower arm Stopper Dust shield Rod bushing
NOTE *: Indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle on the ground in the unladen condition.
/ TSB Revision
FRONT SUSPENSION - Lower Arm REMOVAL SERVICE POINT
33A-11
+A,LOWER ARM BALL JOINT REMOVAL Using the special tool, disconnect the knuckle from the lower arm ball joint. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to a nearby pa& 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it.

.A+LOWER A R M C L A M P MOUNTING SELF-LOCKING NUT INSTALLATION Place the lower arm bushing bracket so that its mounting surface tilts 6 + 1 with respect to the bottom surface of the lower arm; then, mount the self-locking nut.
INSPECTION
Check the bushing for wear and deterioration. Check the lower arm for bend or breakage. l Check the clamp for deterioration or damage. l Check the ball joint dust shield for cracks. l Check all bolts for condition and straightness. CHECKING BALL JOINT FOR BREAKAWAY TORQUE Using the special tool, measure the ball joint breakaway torque. Standard value: lo-22 Nm (86-191 in.lbs.)
l l
212UOO18
BALL JOINT DUST SHIELD REPLACEMENT

Dust shield
(1) Remove the dust shield. (2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust shield.
Y12RO487
(3) &izedn the dust shield with special tool until it is fully
MS990799 Dust shield Snap ring
1 TSB Revision
33A-12 STABILIZER BAR
FRONT SUSPENSION - Stabilizer Bar

l
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Front Exhaust Pipe Removal and installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) l Under Cover Removal and Installation
Left Member and Right Member Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 32 - Right Member, Left Member and Crossmember.)
36 Nm 26 ft.lbs. 40 Nm 29 ft.lbs.
1210011
00000627
Removal steps 1. Transmission stay B cAWD vehicles with automatic transaxle> 2. Transfer (AWD) (Refer to GROUP 22 - Transfer.)
3. Stabilizer link 4. Stabilizer bar bracket mounting bolt .A+ 5. Stabilizer bar bracket 6. Bushing 7. Stabilizer bar

.A+ STABILIZER BAR BRACKET POSITIONING
(1) Align the bushing (LH) with the stabilizer bar marking end and temporarily tighten the stabilizer bar bracket (LH). (2) In this condition, mount the stabilizer bar bracket (RH) and temporarily tighten it. (3) Temporarily fix the both ends of the stabilizer bar to the link and tighten the stabilizer bar bracket mounting bolts to specification.
1 TSB Revision
FRONT SUSPENSION - Stabilizer Bar INSPECTION

l l l l
33A-13
Check Check Check Check
the bushing for wear and deterioration. the stabilizer bar for deterioration or damage. the stabilizer link ball joint dust cover for cracks. all bolts for condition and straightness.
CHECKING STABILIZER LINK BALL JOINT BREAKAWAY TORQUE Install the nut to each stud. Then use the special tool to measure the ball joint breakaway. torque. Standard value: 1.7-3.2 Nm (15-28 in.lbs.)
BALL JOINT DUST SHIELD REPLACEMENT

(1) Remove the clip ring and the dust shield.
Clipiing
(2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust shield.
ere
I
j 9042or, Clip ring ends (Could beon 1 80,07~~~~~ ~0156 opposite side)
(3) Use vinyl tape to tape the stabilizer link where shown in the illustration, and then install the dust shield to the stabilizer link. (4) Secure the dust shield by the clip link. At this time, make sure that the clip ring ends are located at a point 90 + 20 with reference to the link axis.
1 TSB Revision
NOTES
33B-1
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SUSPENSION 0

CONTENTS
DAMPING FORCE CHANGEOVER ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ECS CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ECS INDICATOR LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ECS SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4
STEERING ANGULAR VELOCITY SENSOR* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
STOP LIGHT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 THROlTLE POSITION SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . 19 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . 5 VEHICLE SPEED, SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ~
c G SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 POSITION DETECTION SWIITCH . . . . . , . . . . . 19 SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES.. . . 11

On-Vehicle Inspection . _ . . . ,. _ _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SPECIAL TOOLS .*.....................*...
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injuryordeathtoservicepersonnel(from inadvertentfiringoftheairbag)ortothedriverandpassenger(from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 528 -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk ().
33B-2 SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT SUSPENSION
item Suspension system
ECS - Specifications
/ Specification McPherson strut type
COIL SPRING (Hatchback) <Up to 1993 models>
58 x 6.69 x 12.70
.59 x 6.69 x 13.03
.62 x 6.69 x 11.87
<From 1994 models>

Items Wire dia. x center dia. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring (Ibs./in.) N/mm constant FWD - M/l 14.4 x 170 x 322.7 (.57 x 6.69 x 12.70) Green x 1 29 (162) FWD-A/T 14.5 x 170 x 329.3 (.57 x 6.69 x 12.96) Green x 2 29 (162) AWD 15.2 x 170 x 301.6 (.60 x 6.69 x 11.87) Brown x 1 38 (212) I
COIL SPRING (Convertible)

Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (Ibs./in.) FWD 14.7 x 170 x 338.0 (58 x 6.69 x13.31) Orange x 1 30 (168) AWD 15.4 x 170 x 308.5 (.61 x 6.69 x 12.15) Gray x 1 39 (218)
SHOCK ABSORBER
Items Type Max. length mm (in.) Min. length mm (in.) Stroke mm (in.) Damping force at 0.3 m/set. (.9 ft.)/sec.,N (Ibs.) Expansion Hard Medium soft Contraction 1 Hard 1 Medium L Specifications Hydraulic, cylindrical double-acting type 485 (19.1) 335 (13.2) I 150 (5.9) 2,530 (558) 1,580 (348) 620 (137) 1 1.190 (262) I 1.120 (247) 1 970 (214)
TSB Revision
ECS - Sl>ecifications
STABILIZER BAR
Items Mounting method Outside dia. mm (in.) 1 FWD Pillow ball type 22 i.86)
TiiiD 7
Pillow ball type 23 t.91)
REAR SUSPENSION
Items Suspension system FWD Multi-link type AWD Double-wishbone type
COIL SPRING (Hatchback)

<Up to 1993 models> Items Wire dia. x center dia. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (Ibs./in.) <From 1994 models> Items Wire dia. x center dia. x free length mm (in.) / FWD 11.6 x 105 x 350.0 (.46 x 4.13 x 13.78) Green x 1 34 (190) / AWD 11.5x105x379.3 (.45 x 4.13 x 14.93) Brown x 1 28 (157) FWD 12.2 x 105 x 350.0 (.48 x 4.13 x 13.78) Orange x 1 35 (196) AWD 12.2 x 105 x 379.3 (.48 x 4.13 x 14.93) Blue x 2 28 (157)

Items Wire dia. x center dia. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (Ibs./in.) 1 FWD 12.0 x 105 x 366.5 (.47 x 4.13 x 14.43) Blue x 1 35 (196) / AWD 11.8x105x395.2 (.46 x 4.13 x 15.56) Gray x 1 28 (157) 1 I
SHOCK ABSORBER
Items FWD AWD
We
Hydraulic, cylindrical double-acting type 515 (20.3) 610 (24.0)
Damping force at 0.3 m/set. (.9 ft.)/sec. N (Ibs.)
Expansion
Hard Medium soft
I,71 0 (377) 1,160 (256) 560 (123)
1,710 (377) 1,160 (256) 560 (123) 1,010 (223) 880 (194) 48)
670
(,
1 TSB Revision
ECS - SDecifications / SDecial Tools

STABILIZER BAR
Items Mounting method Outside dia. mm (in.) FWD Pillow ball type 10 (.37) AWD Pillow ball type 22 (.86)
Items Standard value Camber Caster Toe-in mm (in.) Front suspension 0 + 30 355 ri: 30 Ozk3(Ok.12) Rear suspension - FWD 0 t 30 At-2.5 (.02+.1j .5+ 2.5 1.02f .l) Rear suspension- AWD -010~30
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool ectronic control suspension
l l
Reading service data Actuator test
Reading and erasing diagnostic trouble

l l
Reading service data Actuator test
Electronic control system inspection using a check harness
TSB Revision
ECS - Troubleshooting
33B-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
WICK REFERENCE CHART FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptoms When diagnostic trouble code No.
When diagnostic trouble code No. 21 is output. *2
When diagnostic trouble code N
ECS indicator light does not switch is operated. ECS control unit Anti-roll control only stops. *2 Steering angular velocity sensor *2 ECS control unit P.33B-6
/ Anti-dive control only stops.
Stop light switch ECS control unit
P.33B-9
Anti-squat control only stops. *4
Throttle position sensor *4 ECS control unit
P.33B-10
*I. The G sensor is a sensor associated with ride control (detecting pitching, bouncing and rough road).
If it fails, therefore, ride control stops. *2. A self diagnostic decision on the steering angular velocity sensor is made by the ECS control unit which internally detects the voltages of the two sensor output lines connected to the ECS control unit to detect an open circuit in the signal line. When the signal line is short-circuited or when the power line is open-circuited, however, it cannot be detected. In a situation where anti-roll control only stops, if diagnostic trouble code No. 21 is not on display, a short-circuited sensor output line or open-circuited sensor power line is suspected. *3. The vehicle speed sensor is a sensor associated with attitude controls (anti-dive, anti-squat) and steering stability controls (anti-roll, high speed sensitive controls). If all these controls stop, therefore, trouble in the sensor is suspected. The vehicle speed sensor is also in use for operation of the speedometer and for the other electronics controlled systems for the engine, automatic transaxle, etc. *4. The sensor associated with anti-squat control is the throttle position sensor. The sensor is also used for control of the engine and automatic transaxle. If the sensor fails, therefore, the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp in the combination meter will light, and engine diagnostic trouble code No. 14 will be output. In a situation where anti-squat control only stops, therefore, if the check engine/malfunction indicator lamp does not light, defective wiring is suspected between the ECS control unit and throttle position sensor.
TSB Revision
33B-6
1
ECS - Troubleshootina
When diagnostic trouble code No. 11 is output
Using scan tool, check sensor. Good? No Disconnect G sensor connector. With ignition switch at ON, check harness connector.
Check by entering simulated vehicle speed from scan tool to simulate pitching and bouncing controls. (Refer to P.33B-17.) Good?
/Good/
/ Replace ECS control unit.
No. 1 terminal voltage and continuity between No. 3 terminal and ground up to specification? (Sensor power supply and ground)
Is continuity provided across the following areas? Between G sensor and ECS control unit Between No. 1 terminal and No. 54 terminal
Yes Correct harness.
No
Continuity provided between No. 2 terminal of G sensor and No. 61 terminal of ECS control unit? Yes Is trouble cleared by replaced G sensor? Yes 1 End
Correct harness.
Replace ECS control unit.
When diagnostic trouble code No. 21 is output, or when anti-roll control only stops.
Check by entering simulated vehicle speed to simulate anti-roil controls. (Refer to P.33B-15.) Good?
Disconnect steering angular velocity sensor con-
1;
Withignition switch at ON, check harnessconnecNo.2,3and4terminalvoltagesuptospecification? / Standard: 5 V
o -/ Is continuity provided across the following areas? Between steering angular velocity sensor Between No. 2 terminal and No. 56 terminal Between No. 3 terminal and No. 55 terminal
Is continuity provided between No. 1 terminal of steering angular velocity sensor and No. 57 terminal of ECS control unit?
Is trouble cleared by replacing steering angular
End
1 TSB Revision
.3 When diagnostic trouble code No. 24 is output
L, <Turbo>
Yes Using scan tool, check service data on vehicle p Check by entering simulated vehicle speed from scan tool to simulate high speed-sensitive control. (Refer to P.33B-16.) Good? speed sensor. Good? I No 1 Disconnect vehicle speed sensor check harness connector. I No 1 Replace ECS control unit.
No No. 1 terminal voltage and continuity between No. p Correct harness (between No. 1 terminal of vehicle speed sensor and battery and between No. 2 terminal of vehicle speed sensor 2 terminal and ground up to specification? and ground). (Sensor power supply and ground)
1
1
Is continuity provided between No. 3 terminal of vehicle speed sensor and No. 53 terminal of ECS control unit? Yes + No Check vehicle speed sensor. (Refer to P.33B-18.) _____t Replace vehicle speed sensor. Good?
4
<Non-Turbo>
Yes
1 Reolace ECS control unit.
Using scan tool, check service data No
Check by entering simulated vehicle speed from scan tool to simulate high speed-sensitive control. (Refer to P.33B-16.) Good?
t No Is continuity provided between No. 109 _____c Correct harness. of combination meter and No. 53 terminal of ECS control unit? +YeS No Is continuity provided between No. 64 terminal - Correct harness. of combination meter and ground? 1 Replace vehicle speed sensor.
1 Replace ECS control unit.
1 TSB Revision
33B-8
4
When diagnostic trouble code Nos. 61, 62, 63 and 64 are output.
Using scan tool, check actuator. (Refer to P.33B-15.) Good?
with diagnostic trouble code No., disconnect connector directly connected to shock absorber, and
Standard: 5 V Y
Is continuity provided across the following areas of shock absorber associated with diagnostic trouble code No.? Shock absorber terminal FR No. 1 FR No. 3 FL No. 1 FL No. 3 RR No. 1 RR No. 3 RL No. 1 RL No. 3 ECS control unit terminal No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. 7 6 10 9 13 12 16 15
Check the shock absorber which corresponds to the displayed diagnosis code No. for the continuity between terminal No. 1 and the body ground and terminal No. 3 and the body ground. No Replace ECS control unit. Yes Correct harness.
Yes
.INO + Correct harness.
t
Is continuity provided between No. 2 and 4 terminals and ground? Correct harness (between No. 2 and 4 terminals of shock absorber and ground).
1 Yes
While measuring No. 5 terminal voltage, forcedrive actuator by scan tool. Is terminal voltage up to specification? Standard: 9 V during forced drive of actuator (for approx. 1 sec.) 0 V except during forced drive Yes
I--
No
Is continuity provided across the following areas of shock absorber associated with diagnostic trouble code No.?
P N o Is trouble corrected by replacing shock absorber (includingdamping force changeover actuator and positiondetectionswitch)associatedwithdiagnostic trouble code No.? Yes
Yes
No + Correct harness.
Check the shock absorber which corresponds to the displayed diagnosis code No. for the continuity between terminal No. 5 and the body ground. No Yes Correct harness.
End - Replace ECS control unit.
TSB Revision
5 ECS indicator light does not switch when ECS switch is operated.
Yes Does ECS indicator light flash? No i Disconnect ECS switch connector and check harness connector with ignition switch at ON. + Read diagnostic trouble code and check area associated with diagnostic trouble code.
No. 10 terminal voltage and continuity between No. 11 terminal and ground up to specification?
Is continuity provided between No. 10 terminal of ECS switch and No. 1 terminal of ECS control unit and between No. 11 terminal of ECS switch and ground?
t
1 Replace ECS control unit. 1 1 Correct harness.
+
Check ECS switch. (Refer to P.33B-18.) C--W Replace ECS switch. Yes Removecombination meter and check cator light for burnt filament. Good? Replace ECS indicator light bulb.
/ LBetween No. 11 and 3 terminals J Yes
1 1 Is continuity provided between No. 2 terminal of ]Ee, Correct harness. combination meter and ground? I Yes 1 Istroubleclearedbyreplacing combinationmwL* Replace ECS control unit. lYes ( End
I
Anti-dive control only stops.
Check by entering simulated vehicle speed from scan tool to simulate anti-dive control. (Refer to P.33B-15.) Good?
I 6
Good Does stop light illuminate when brake depressed? No + Disconnectstop light switch connector and check harness connector.
Replace EC; control unit
Is continuity provided between No. 3 terminal of stop light switch and No. 58 terminal of ECS control unit?
Yes i Replace ECS control unit.
No Correct harness.
/JL*i Correct harness. No. 2 terminal voltage up to specification? (Between No. 2 terminal of stop light switch and battery) Standard* Battery postwe voltage
Check stop light switch. (Refer to F!33B-19.) Good? I i Yes Replace ECS control unit.
Replace stop light switch. -
T S B Revision *
33B-10
7 Anti-squat control only stops.
Check by entering simulated vehicle speed from scan tool to simulate anti-squat control. (Refer to P.33B-16.) Good?
Does check engine/malfunction indicator lamp illuminate?
Is continuity provided between No. 2 terminal of throttle position sensor and No. 59 terminal of ECS control unit? 1 Yes Correct harness. No
Check throttle position sensor. (Refer to P.33B-19.) Good? Yes Disconnectthrottle position sensor connector and check harness connector with ignition switch at ON. -f No. 1 terminal voltage and continuity between No. 4 terminal and ground up to specification? (Sensor power supply and ground) Standards: No. 1 terminal 5 V No. 4 terminal Continuity provided / Yes N o Replace E&control unit. 1No
7
Replace throttle position sensor.
c Is continuity provided across the following areas? Between throttle position sensor and engine control unit Between No. 1 and 61 terminals Between No. 4 and 72 terminals Yes No
t
Defective engine control unit. Correct harness.
Replace throttle position sensor.
TSB Revision
ECS - Service Adjustment Procedures
33B-11
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES

ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. WARNING INDICATION BY ECS INDICATOR LIGHT If a problem associated with the following items occurs, the ECS indicator light (Tour Sport) in the combination light flashes at intervals of 0.5 sec. At the same time, the diagnostic trouble code associated with the problem is output to the data link connector. Warning Indication Items l G sensor 0 Steering angular velocity sensor l Vehicle speed sensor l Damping force changeover actuator (including position detection switch)
1Zl2FOOO61
When using the MUT
I .-.. ( . . . f--__ -1 wnen usmg tne MUT-II cup to 1993 models>
\ZlZFOO57
2. ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC OUTPUT CHECK When using the scan tool [multi-use tester (MUT) <Up to 1993 models> or MUT-II call models>] (1) Connect scan tool to the data link connector. When connecting the scan tool (MUT-II) to a vehicle up to 1993 model, use the adapter harness supplied together with the scan tool. Caution Turn off the ignition switch beforehand whenever the scan tool is connected or disconnected. (2) Check the diagnostic trouble code. (3) After the defective portion has been repaired, erase the diagnostic trouble code. (If the defective portion is not completely repaired, it may be impossible to erase the diagnostic trouble code by the scan tool.) (4) Perform on-board diagnostic output check again and check that the diagnostic trouble code is good.
.<From 1994 models>
ZZOFO164 0~0001022
TSB Revision
33B-12

-I
5c @+
When using the voltmeter <Up to 1993 models> (1) Set the ignition switch to OFF. (2) Connect the positive (+) terminal of the voltmeter to the No. 3 terminal of the data link connector beside the junction d block and connect the negative (-) terminal of the voltmeter to the No. 12 terminal. (3) Set the ignition switch to ON. (4) Read the diagnostic trouble code on the basis of the deflection of the pointer of the voltmeter. (5) Based on the diagnostic trouble code, repair the associated defective portion. (6) Set the ignition switch to OFF. (7) Disconnect the battery cables from the battery terminals and reconnect them more than 10 seconds thereafter. (8) Set the ignition switch to ON, perform on-board diagnostic check again, and check that the diagnostic trouble code is good.
<,I
\(A
1121,3\4151617!8
Ground term;)
<From 1994 models> Connect a voltmeter to the diagnostic output terminal and ground terminal of the data link connector using the special tool. Observe the pointer deflection to read out the diagnostic trouble code.
TSB Revision
KS. - Service Adjustment Procedures

Fail Safe and Diagnosis List
33B-13
output Code No. 0
Output Code indication Pattern
Diagnostic Item [Good] [Good]
Fail Safe
llm
11
G sensor defective*
Ride controls (pinching and bouncing control, bad road detection control) stop.
Steering angular J-j-Jg~!$:$$g;;;: n
Anti-roll control stops.
:
nnnnnn
Vehicle speed sensor * . open-crrcurted *
Steering stability controls (anti-roil, high speed sensitive controls) and attitude controls (anti-dive, anti-squat) stop. Shock absorber damping force fixed at MEDIUM All ECS controls stop. Normal shock absorber damping force fixed at HARD.
f51
,- ,-,-,-,-,- Ln
F. R. damping force cj$;iver actuator
l l
LJ-Y
62
F. L. damping force nr~ cdf7gncever actuator
I63
]-flJljlj-[lJljljL
R. R. damping EEiPlZZL
R. L. damping force ;ha;zrr actuator
NOTE (1) Control stop, warning indication and fixed damping force return to normal when the ignition switch is set to OFF. When any of the problems marked * occurs, if no subsequent problem occurs (for example, when the problem is transient), normal operation will be restored even if the ignition switch is not set to OFF. (2) Even if control stop, warning indication and fixed damping force return to normal as described above, the diagnostic trouble code is stored in the memory in the ECS control unit. (3) The diagnostic trouble code can be force-cleared by use of the scan tool or by stopping the power supply to the ECS control unit. In addition, it is automatically cleared if the ON/OFF control of the ignition switch is repeated 60 times after the diagnostic trouble code has been output, provided that no new diagnostic trouble code is output during the period.
TSB Revision
33B-14
Code No. 11 21 24
On-board Diagnostic Determination Conditions

What is Defective G sensor defective Steering angular velocity sensor open-circuited Vehicle speed sensor defective On-board Diagnostic Determination Conditions When sensor input of 0.5 or less or 4.5 V or more lasts for more than 10 seconds. Open circuit detected on the basis of difference in voltage level of sensor signal. When throttle opening of 30% (1.5 V) or more lasts for more than 60 seconds with the ignition switch at ON and if there is no input from the vehicle speed sensor during the period, it is regarded as a problem. If no damping force changeover is made in a second afteractuatordrive signal has been output (position detection switch output pattern does not change to that of target damping force), it is regarded as a problem.
61-64
Damping force changeover actuator defective
3. SERVICE DATA OUTPUT CHECK Using the scan tool, check the service data. Service Data Inspection List
Item No. 11 decreases from 2.5 V 14 sensor Throttle fully opened 21 sensor 4,500-5,500 mV
24 ication coincide. sensor 26
61
62
F.L. actuator R.R. actuator R.L. actuator
Tour mode with vehicle stationary Sport mode with vehicle stationary Tour mode with vehicle stationary Sport mode with vehicle stationary Tour mode with vehicle stationarv Sport mode with vehicle stationary I
SOFT HARD ~~ ---r&r HARD SOFT HARD I
63
64
TSB Revision
33B-15
4. ACTUATOR CHECK (1) Using the scan tool, force-drive the actuator and fix the damping force changeover. (2) Check service data (Item No. 61 through 64) to verify that the actuator has been force-driven. NOTE l All of the four actuators in the shock absorbers are simultaneously changed over by forced drive. l The damping force changed over and fixed by forced drive is cleared by the following three conditions. 1. Ignition switch OFF 2. Vehicle speed 3 km/h (1.9 mph) or more 3. Scan tool disconnected Actuator Check List
Item No. 01 03 04 Check Point Damping force SOFT Damping force MEDIUM Damping force HARD Check Condition Vehicle in stationary condition Scan Tool Service Data Item No. 61-64 Indicated SOFT MEDiUM HARD
5. CONTROL FUNCTION SIMULATION CHECK 110004356 Using the scan tool, check all control functions during operation with the vehicle in stationary condition. 5-1. Anti-Roll Control Function Check (1) Raise the front wheels on a jack and have them supported by rigid racks. (2) Place the steering wheel in straight ahead position. (3) Select the Tour mode by the ECS switch. (4) Enter a simulated vehicle speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) from the scan tool. (5) Using the scan tool, check the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64. Scan tool indication: SOFT (6) Turn the steering wheel clockwise or counterclockwise from the straight ahead position. (7) Using the scan tool, check that the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 change over. Steering turning speed
Scan tool indication MEDIUM HARD
Approx. 0.3 seconds for 90 rotation Approx. 0.2 seconds for 90 rotation
(8) Check that the original damping force indication (SOFT) is restored a second later. 5-2. Anti-Dive Control Function Check (1) Select the Tour mode by the ECS switch. (2) Enter a simulated vehicle speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) from the scan tool. (3) Using the scan tool, check the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64.
i
Scan tool indication: SOFT TSB Revision
I 33B-16
(4) Depress the brake pedal and simultaneously change the entered simulated vehicle speed by the scan tool. (Change the speed in 0.4 seconds after depressing the brake pedal.) (5) Using the scan tool, check that the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 change over. Changing entered simulated vehicle soeed 1 100 km/h (62 mph) to 80 km/h (50 mph)
212FOO64
I a
Scan tool indication 1 HARD
(6) Check that the original damping force indication (SOFT) is restored a second later.
5-3. Anti-Squat Control Function Check

(1) Select the Tour mode by the ECS switch. (2) Enter a simulated vehicle speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) from the scan tool. (3) Using the scan tool, check the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64.
Scan tool indication: SOFT
(4) Check that when the accelerator pedal is operated, the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 on the scan tool change as shown in the following table. (5) With the simulated vehicle speed at 60 km/h (37 mph) and 90 km/h (56 mph), similarly operate the accelerator pedal and check that the scan tool indications change over. Entered simulated Accelerator operating condition vehicle speed Quickly A second later with km/h (mph) depress oedal deoressed 1 HARD t MEDIUM I I 30 (19) 1 MEDIUM I / MEDIUM 1 60 (37) -1 1 MEDIUM I SOFT 1 90 (56) (6) Check that when the accelerator pedal is released, the original damping force (SOFT) is restored in less than a second.
5-4. High Speed Sensitive Control Function Check

(1) Select the Tour mode by the ECS switch. (2) Check that when the entered simulated vehicle speed is changed by the scan tool, the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 change. (If the simulated vehicle speed is continuously changed by the fixed function keys of the scan tool, however, the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 do not change during the period the fixed function key is pressed.) Scan tool Changing entered simulated vehicle speed I indication Acceleration 129 km/h (80 mph) to 130 km/h 1 SOFT + MEDIUM
I
(81
mph)
MEDIUM + SOFT
Deceleration 120 km/h (75 mph) to 119 km/h (74 mob)
\ d
I ~
TSB Revision
33B-17
5-5. Pitching and Bouncing Control Function Check (1) Select the Tour mode by the ECS switch. (2) Using the scan tool, check the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64. Scan tool indication: SOFT
(3) Remove the G sensor, slowly shake it up and down through a space of about 5 cm (1.9 in.) with the connector connected, and check that the indications of service data items No. 61 through 64 change. G sensor status
Shake up and down at a speed of a round trb in a second.
Scan tool indication HARD
I I
(4) Check that when the G sensor is held stationary, the original damping force indication (SOFT) is restored. 6. ACTUATOR OPERATION CHECK 6-1. Actuator Operating Sound Check (1) Set the ignition switch to ON. (2) Bring your ear near the top of the shock absorber. NOTE In the case of the rear shock absorbers, remove the trim cover at the top of the shock absorber before bringing your ear near the shock absorber. (3) Check that the operating sound of the actuator in the shock absorber can be heard each time the control modes are changed by pressing the ECS switch. 6-2. Damping Force Check (1) Set the ignition switch to ON. (ECS indicator Tour ON, damping force SOFT) (2) Check the damping force SOFT state by shaking the top mounting points of the front shock absorbers or the top of the rear end panels of the rear shock absorbers up and down. (3) Press the ECS switch to change the control mode to sport. (ECS indicator Sport ON, damping force HARD) (4) Shake the vehicle up and down to check that the damping force is harder than in the SOFT state.
,
12FOO65 12FOO66 00001023
(Front)
(Rear)
212FOO67
1 TSB Revision
33B-18
ECS - G Sensor / Vehicle Speed Sensor
rb3 3wmn 1 3Ieermg nngular velocuy 3ensor
ECS SWITCH
To mount or remove the ECS switch, refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges. Remove the meter bezel before mounting or removing the ECS switch.
212FOO68
INSPECTION
Operate the switch to check for continuity between the individual terminals.
Switch position 3 ECS switch ON OFF 14 Terminal No.
1 10
1 11
0 0
0 0
STEERING ANGULAR VELOCITY SENSOR

To mount or remove the steering angular velocity sensor, refer to GROUP 54 - Column Switch. Remove the Steering wheel and clock spring before mounting or removing the sensor. CAUTION: SRS Before removal of air bag module, refer to GROUP 528 - Service Precautions and Air Bag Module and Clock Spring.
/ ~, a/-y/,/:;i & af1- i+--JL .$._-I 3 pi 1 w+\j

\\
212FOO72 \ / 212FOO96
G SENSOR
To mount or remove the G sensor, refer to GROUP 52A - Front Seat. Remove the front seat (L.H.) before removing or mounting the sensor.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

To mount or remove the vehicle speed sensor, refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.
INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.
TSB Revision
ECS - Damping Force Changeover Actuator / ECS Indicator Light
Throttle Position Sensor I Stop Light Switch / Position Detection Switch /
338-l 9
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Li
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

Refer to GROUP 13A - Fuel System.
STOP LIGHT SWITCH

To remove or mount the stoplight switch, refer to GROUP 35 - Brake Pedal.
INSPECTION
Refer to GROUP 35 - Brake Pedal.
POSITION DETECTION SWITCH and DAMPING FORCE CHANGEOVER ACTUATOR
To remove or mount the position detection switch and damping force changeover actuator, refer to GROUP 33A - Strut Assembly and GROUP 34 - Shock Absorber Assembly. Caution The position detection switch and damping force changeover actuator are built into the shock absorber assemblies of front and rear suspensions. Since they are of the non& disassembly type, remove or mount them in the form of a strut assembly or shock absorber assembly.
ECS INDICATOR LIGHT

To remove or mount the ECS indicator lights, refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.
/ i
TSB Revision
33B-20 ECS CONTROL UNIT
ECS - ECS Control Unit
Z12FOO98
Removal steps
1. Cargo floor box (R.H.) 2. Lid 3. ECS control unit
1 TSB Revision
34-1
REAR SUSPENSION
CONTENTS REAR SUSPENSION <AWD>
ASSIST LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Rear Wheel Alignment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
REAR SUSPENSION cFWD>

Rear Hub Rotary-sliding Resistance Check . . . . . 6 Rear Wheel Alignment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Wheel Bearing End Play Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . 26 SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY.. . . . . . . . . . 36 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...*..... 22 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
REAR AXLE HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . 13 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 rn~ Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 TRAILING ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 UPPER AND LOWER ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 TRAILING ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 UPPER ARM, LOWER ARM AND ASSIST LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
34-2
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Specifications
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD>

SPECIFICATIONS
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Item Suspension system Specification Multi-link

<Up to 1993 models> Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (IbsAn.) <From 1994 models> Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (Ibs./in.) Vehicles without ECS 11.3x95x350 (.44 x 3.74 x 13.78) Pink x 2 34 (190) Vehicles with ECS 11.6~105~350 (.46x 4.13 x 13.78) Green x 1 34 (190) Vehicles without ECS 12X95X350 (.47 x 3.74 x 13.78) Pink x 1 35 (196) Vehicles with ECS 12.2~105~350 (.48x 4.13 x 13.78) Orange x 1 35 (196)

cl 995 model> Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (Ibs./in.) cl 996 model> Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (IbsAn.) Specifications 11.7 x 95 x 366.5 (.46 x 3.74 x 14.43) Blue x 2 34 (190) Specifications 12.0 x 105 x 366.5 (.47 x4.13 x 14.43) Blue x 1 35 (196)
SHOCK ABSORBER
Items 1Vehicles without ECS Hydraulic cylindrical double-acting type 515 (20.2) / 356 (14.0) / 159 (6.3) 1,000 (220) 1Vehicles with ECS Hydraulic cylindrical double-acting type 515 (20.2) j 356 (14.0) / 159 (6.3) Hard: 1,710 (377) Medium: 1 ,160 (256) Soft: 560 (123) Hard: 1 ,010 (223) Medium: 880 (194) Soft: 670 (148) I
We
Max. length mm (in.) Min. length mm (in.) Stroke mm (in.) Damping force [at 0.3 m/set. (.9 ft./set.)] N (Ibs.) Contraction
550 (121)
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Specifications / Special Tools

WHEEL BEARING
I Item
34-3
I Soecification
I .
Unit ball bearing
Items Toe-in (Left-right difference) mm (in.) Camber Stabilizer link ball joint breakaway torque Nm (inlbs.) Ball joint rotation breakaway torque Nm (in.lbs.) Stabilizer link protrusion mm (in.) Crossmember bushing projection mm (in.) 11 Wheel bearing end play mm (in.) Rear hub rotary-sliding resistance N (Ibs.) Standard value 0.5 + 2.5 (.Ol + .09) 0 f 30 1.7-3.2 (15-28) 2-9 (17-78) 5-7 (.197-.276) 8.5-9.5 (.33-.37) 0.05 (.002) or less 31 (7) or less Limit / ! -
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool
TOOI number and Supersession
name MB991113 Steering linkage puller MB991 113-01
Application Removal of the ball joint
i MB990326 Preload socket 0 El Y-l 0 MB990800 MB990800-01 Installation of the dust cover General service tool Measurement of the ball joint break away torque
0
8
Ball joint remover and installer
MB991 071 Bushing remover and installer A: MB991 073 Base B: MB991 072 Arbor
Removal and installation of bushing from/to upper arm, lower arm, and assist link
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Special Tools / Troubleshootina

Tool Tool number and name A: MB991 237 Spring compressor body B: MB991 239 Arm set Supersession MIT62220 Application Compression of the coil spring
MB991 045 Bushing remover and installer
Removal and installation of the crossmember bushing
MB990880
MB991 005-01
,-t \ :.\:. Y 0
Removal and installation of trailing arm bushing
Arbor
MB990847 Base
MB991389-01
TROUBLESHOOTING
pper arms and/or lower arms a
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - On-vehicle Service
34-5
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT CHECK
CAMBER Standard value: 0 f 30 To adjust camber, turn the lower arm mounting bolt (crossmember side). NOTE (1) Make the adjustment with the assist link mounting bolt (crossmember side) loosened. (2) The difference between the right and left wheels should be 30 or less. (3) Left wheel: Clockwise ((-) camber) Right wheel: Clockwise ((+) camber) One graduation changes camber by about 15.
TOE-IN Standard value: 0.5 & 2.5 mm (.Ol + .09 in.) To adjust toe, turn the assist link mounting bolts (on crossmember side) on both sides the same amount. NOTE (1) The difference between right and left wheels should be 3 mm (.12 in.) or less. (2) Left wheel: Clockwise (toe-in) Right wheel: Clockwise (toe-out) One graduation changes toe by about 4.8 mm (-19 in.) <equivalent to toe angle 27 on one side>. Caution 1. Adjust the eccentric bolt within 90 from the central position. 2. Adjust camber and toe, in that order, and, if camber is adjusted, be sure to adjust toe also.
Z12FOO251
TSB Revision
34-6
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - On-vehicle Service WHEEL BEARING END PLAY CHECK
1. 2. 3. 4. Inspect the play of the bearings while the vehicle is jacked up and resting on floor jack. Remove the hub cap and then release the parking brake. Remove the caliper assembly and the brake disc. Check the bearings end play. Place a dial gauge against the hub surface; then move the hub in the axial direction and check whether or not there is end play. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.) or less NOTE If the limit value is exceeded, the lock nut should be tightened to the specified torque and check the end play again. Replace the rear hub bearing unit if an adjustment cannot be made to within the limit.
5.
REAR HUB ROTARY-SLIDING RESISTANCE CHECK

inspect the play of the bearings while the vehicle is jacked up and resting on floor jack. 2. Release the parking brake. 3. Remove the caliper assembly and the brake disc. 1.
4. After turning the hub a few times to seat the bearing, attach a spring balance to the hub bolt, and, pulling at a 90 angle from the hub bolt, measure to determine whether or not the rotary-sliding resistance of the rear hub is the limit value. Limit: 31 N (7 Ibs.) or less NOTE If the limit value is exceeded, the lock nut should be tightened to the specified torque and check the end play again. 5. Replace the rear hub unit bearing if an adjustment cannot be made to within the limit.
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Rear Suspension Assembly
34-7
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
cd
RI MOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Pre-removal Operation l Absorber Lid Removal from Rear Side Trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 0 Main Muffler Removal (RefeitoGROUP 15-Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) Post-installation Operation Main Muffler Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) 0 Wheel Alignment Check (Refer to P.34-5.) l Parking Brake Lever Stroke Check (Refer to GROUP 36 - On-vehicle Service.) l Absorber Lid to Rear Side Trim Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.)
l
Z12FOllO
Removal steps
1. Shock absorber mounting nuts (upper) 2. ECS connector <EC% 3. Cap 4. Brake tube clannp bolt 5. Brake caliper mounting bolt 6. Brake caliper assembly 7. Brake disc 8. Parking brake cable clamp bolt 9. Parking brake cable end (Referto GROUP 36- Parking Brake.) 10. Rear speed sensor clamp bolt CABS> 11. ABS speed sensor CABS> 12. Trailing arm mounting bolt and nut 13. Crossmember mounting nut 14. Rear suspension assembly NOTE
*: i indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle on the ground In the unladen condition.
TSB Revision
34-8
\\\
REAR SUSPENSION eFWD> - Rear Suspension Assembly

I

+A,CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING NUT I REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Support the crossmember with a transmission jack, then remove the crossmember mounting nut and rear suspension assembly. i cJ
INSPECTION
l l
Check the crossmember for cracks or deformation. Check the bushings for cracks or deterioration.
Press out
Press fit
CROSSMEMBER BUSHING REPLACEMENT

(1) Using the special tool, remove and press-fit the bushing.
(2) When press-fitting the bushing, apply soapsuds to it and position the arrows as shown.
Z12FOO78
Inner sleeve
(3) Make sure that the protrusion (dimension A) of the inner sleeve is up to specification. Standard value (A) : 8.5-9.5 mm (.33-.37 in.)
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD>
upper nrm, Lower nrm ano - Assist Link
34-9
UPPER ARM, LOWER ARM AND ASSIST LINK

Post-installation Operation l Wheel Alignment Check (Refer to P.34-5.) l Shock Absorber Installation (Refer to P.34-13.) 140-160 Nm* lOl-116ft.lbs.* \
Shock Absorber Removal (Refer to P.34-13.)
Nm ft.lbs.
12FO10, 00001032
Upper arm removal steps
Assist
link removal steps
4Ab
1. Brake tube clamp bolt 2. Self-locking nut 3. Upper arm mounting bolt and nut 4. Upper arm
4Ab
8. Assist link mounting bolt and nut 9. Self-locking nut 10. Assist link
Lower arm removal steps
4Ab
5. Lower arm mounting bolt and 6. Self-locking nut 7. Lower ami
nut
l .
NOTE . Indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle on the ground in the unladen condition.

+A, SELF-LOCKING NUT REMOVAL Using the special tool, disconnect the knuckle from the upper arm, lower arm, and assist link. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to a nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it.
I
212A0091 1 TSB Revision I
REAR SUSPENSION cFWD>
upper Arm, Lower Hrm anu - Assist Link
INSPECTION
l l l l
Check the bushing for wear and deterioration. Check the upper, lower arm or assist link for bend or breakage. Check the ball joint dust cover for cracks. Check all bolts for condition and straightness.
di
BALL JOINT BREAKAWAY TORQUE CHECKING Using the special tool, measure the ball joint breakaway torque. Standard value: 2-9 Nm (17-78 in.lbs.)
z12u001.3
m-u
MB990800 Dust cover Snap ring
BALL JOINT DUST COVER REPLACEMENT

(1) Remove the dust cover. (2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust cover. (3) LVFedn the dust cover with special tool until it is fully
L) ,
,
212R0119 J
Removal
Pressure fitting
LOWER ARM, UPPER ARM, ASSIST LINK BUSHING REPLACEMENT

Use the special tool to remove and press-fit the bushing.
l?NOIOl
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION cFWD> - Trailing Arm
34-11
TRAILING ARM
l l
Parking Brake Lever Stroke Check (Refer to GROUP 36 - On-vehicle Service.)
Rear Brake Disc Run-out Check (Refer to GROUP 35 - On-vehicle Service.)
54-64fLlbs.
5-89 Nm l/T%
83 Nm 60 ft.lbs.
/ c
18
140- 160 Nm* 2 101- 116 ft.lbs.*
8-
13<
36-43 ft.lbs.
Z12FOlll
Removal steps
Brake caliper mounting bolt
bAd.13. Stabilizer link mounting nut

4Bb Self-locking nut 2 Shock absorber mounting bolt (upper) 16. Self-locking nut 17. Self-locking nut Trailing arm mounting bolt and nut Trailing arm assembly
:* Brake caliper
Hub cap
3: Brake tube clamp bolt 4. Rear brake disc 2. Wheel bearing nut 7: Rear hub assembly
Parking brake cable clamp bolt
i: Parking brake cable end (Refer to

GROUP 36 - Parking Brake.) 10. Rear speed sensor clamp bolt CABS> ABS speed sensor CABS> ::: Backing plate
NOTE Indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and 1 then fully tightened with the vehicle on the ground in the unladen condition.
TSB Revision
34-12
REAR SUSPENSION cFWD> - Trailing Arm REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

AA, REAR HUB ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Caution Replace the rear hub assembly with a new one if the bearing inner race is left on the spindle when removing the rear hub assembly. If the removed rear hub assembly is reinstalled with the inner race attached on the spindle, it can be caused that the oil seal lip is pushed in the reverse direction, resulting in oil leaks or loose mounting. +B, SELF-LOCKING NUT REMOVAL Using the special tool, remove the knuckle from the lower arm, upper arm, and assist link. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to a nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it. ~

wrench
,A+ STABILIZER LINK MOUNTING NUT INSTALLATION Holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, tighten the self-locking nut so that the protrusion of the stabilizer link (dimension A indicated in illustration) is within the standard value. Standard value (A) : 5-7 mm (.197-.276 in.)
212AOlOO
INSPECTION
l l
Check trailing arm for cracks and deformation. Check bushing for cracks, deterioration and wear.
Press-fit I I Removal
TRAILING ARM BUSHING REPLACEMENT

1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION cFWD> - Shock Absorber Assembly
34-13
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
212F0087
Removal steps
L. n
1. Shock absorber upper mounting nut 3 L nnnnnrtnr CCC. l=clc IIIIULI .L/
J. biqJ
n--
4. Brake tube clamp bolt
5. Shock absorber lower mounting bolt

6. Shock absorber
NOTE Indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle on the ground in the unladen condition.
1 TSB Revision
34-14
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Shock Absorber Assembly
11
,A, -!3 3
[iI ;; l-q 4 --A --Y..
C 3
12
Z12A0328
Disassembly steps +A, .B+ 1. Piston rod tightening nut 2. Washer 3. Upper bushing (A) .B( 4. Bracket assembly 5. Upper spring pad 6. Upper bushing (B)
7. 8. 9. 10. .A( 11. 12.
Collar Cup assembly Dust cover Bump rubber Coil spring Shock absorber

+A,PlSTON ROD TIGHTENING NUT REMOVAL (1) Before removing the piston rod tightening nut, compress the coil spring using the special tool.
(2) While holding the piston rod, remove the piston rod tightening nut.
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Shock Absorber Assembly REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS
34-15
.A( COIL SPRING INSTALLATION (1) Use the special tool (MB991237 and MB991239) to compress the coil spring and insert it in the shock absorber. (2) Align the edge of the coil spring to the position of the shock absorber spring seat as shown.
Coil sprin
212A004
c
FBdBRACKET ASSEMBLY t PISTON ROD TIGHTENING NUT INSTALLATION (1) With the position of the bracket assembly as shown in the figure, tighten the tightening nut to the specified torque. (2) Install the coil spring so that the lower edge fits into the spring seat groove and the upper edge fits into the spring pad groove, then remove the special tool (MB991237 and MB991 239).
Lower bushing inner pipe
zlZFOO77
INSPECTION
l l
Check the rubber parts for damage. Check the coil springs for crack, damage or deterioration.
1 TSB Revision
34-16
REAR SUSPENSION cFWD> - Stabilizer Bar
STABILIZER BAR
Removal steps 1. Stabilizer bracket mountina bolt ,Bd 2. Stabilizer bar bracket 3. Bushing .A+ 4. Self-locking nut 5. Joint cup (A) 6. Stabilizer rubber
7. Joint (B) ,A+ 8. Self-locking nut ,A+ 9. Stabilizer link 10. Joint cup (A) 11. Stabilizer rubber 12. Stabilizer bar
CUD

Hold with wrench ,AdSTABlLlZER LINK / SELF-LOCKING NUT / SELF-LOCKING NUT INSTALLATION (1) Hold the stabilizer link ball studs with a wrench and install the self-locking nut (A). (2) Holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, tighten the self-locking nut (B) so that the protrusion of the stabilizer link is within the standard value. Standard value: 5-7 mm (.197-.276 in.)
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Stabilizer Bar
34-17
,B+ STABILIZER BAR BRACKET INSTALLATION (1) Align the bushing (L.H.) with the stabilizer bar marking end and temporarily tighten the stabilizer bar bracket (L.H.). (2) In this condition, mount the stabilizer bar bracket (R.H.) and temporarily tighten it. (3) Temporarily fix the both ends of the stabilizer bar to the link and tighten the stabilizer bar bracket mounting bolts to specification.
ZlZFOO76
INSPECTION
Check the bushing for wear and deterioration. Check the stabilizer bar for deterioration or damage. l Check the stabilizer link ball joint dust cover for cracks. l Check all bolts for condition and straightness. STABILIZER LINK BALL JOINT BREAKAWAY TORQUE CHECKING Using the special tool, measure the ball joint breakaway torque. Standard value: 1.7-3.2 Nm (15-28 in.lbs.)
l l
212L0241

(1) Remove the clip ring and the dust cover.
ZlZL024E
(2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust cover.
(3) Use vinyl tape to tape the stabilizer link where shown in the illustration, and then install the dust cover to the stabilizer link. (4) Secure the dust cover by the clip ring.
TSB Revision
34-18
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Rear Axle Hub
REAR AXLE HUB

50-60 Nm 36-43 ft.lbs.
Removal steps
1. Rear speed sensor CABS> 2. Caliper assembly 3. Brake disc 4. Hub cap ,A+ 5. Wheel bearing nut 6. Tongued washer 4, 7. Rear hub assembly
4D,
8. Rear rotor CABS> 9. Rear hub unit bearing
Caution Rear hub unit bearing cannot be disassembled.

dA,REAR SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL <ABS> Caution Be careful when handling the pole piece at the tip of the speed sensor and the toothed edge of the rotor so as not to damage them by striking against other parts.
Pole piece
214N0107
(B, CALIPER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Remove the caliper assembly and suspend it with a piece of wire.
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <FWD> - Rear Axle Hub

+C, REAR HUB ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
34-19
Caution Replace the rear hub assembly with a new one if the bearing inner race is left on the spindle when removing the rear hub assembly. If the removed rear hub assembly is reinstalled with the inner race attached on the spindle, it can be caused that the oil seal lip is pushed in the reverse direction, resulting in oil leaks or loose mounting.
+D,REAR ROTOR REMOVAL CABS> Caution Care must be taken not to scratch or scar the rotors toothed surface, and not to drop it. If the rotors toothed surface is chipped or the rotor is deformed, it might not be able to accurately sense the wheel rotation speed and the system as a result might not perform normally.

,A4 WHEEL BEARING NUT INSTALLATION After tightening the wheel bearing nut, align with the spindles indentation and crimp.
Spindle
I L
214NO00
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION cAWD> - Specifications
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD>

SPECIFICATIONS
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
d )
Specification 1 Double wishbone suspension type I I
I I
Item Suspension system

cup to 1993 models> Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (Ibs./in.) Specifications 12.2 x 105 x 379.3 (.48x 4.13 x 14.93) Blue x 2 28.0 (157)
cl994 and 1995 models>
items
Specifications 11.5x 105x379.3 (.45x4.13x14.93) 1Light brown x 2 28.0 (157)
I I
I Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.)

I Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (IbeAn.)
\d\
cl 996 models>
Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (IbsAn.) Specifications 11 .l x 95 x 372 (44 x 3.74 x 14.65) Light blue x 1 28.0 (157)
COIL SPRING (Convertible) cl 995 model>

Items Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color Spring constant N/mm (IbsAn.) Specifications 11.8x 105x395.2 (.46x4.13x 15.56) Gray x 1 28.0 (157)
cl 996 model> Items

Wire dia. x O.D. x free length mm (in.) Coil spring identification color L Spring constant N/mm (IbsAn.) Specifications 11.5 x 95 x 395.2 (.45 x 3.74 x 15.56) Grayx2 28.0 (157)
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Specifications

SHOCK ABSORBER <Up to 1995 models>
Items Type Max. length mm (in.) Min. length mm (in.) Stroke mm (in.) Damping force [at 0.3 m/set. (0.9 ft./set.)] N (Ibs.) Expansion Specifications Hydraulic, cylindrical, double-acting type 610 (24.0) 407 (16.0) 203 (8.0) Hard: 1,710 (377) Medium: 1 ,160 (256) Soft: 560 (123) Hard: 1 ,010 (223) Medium: 880 (194) Soft: 670 (148)
Contraction
cl 996 models>
Items Type Max. length mm (in.) Min. length mm (in.) Stroke mm (in.) Damping force [at 0.3 m/set. (0.9 ft./set.)] N (Ibs.) Expansion Contraction Specifications Hydraulic, cylindrical, double-acting type 610 (24.0) 407 (16.0) 203 (8.0) 1,400 (309) I / 500 (110)
Items Toe-in mm (in.) Camber Protruding length of stabilizer bar mounting bolt mm (in.) Lower arm ball joint breakaway itorque Nm (in.lbs.) Stabilizer link ball joint break away torque Nm (in.lbs.) Standard value 0.5 + 2.5 (.Ol zk .09) -010+30 5-7 (.197-.276) 2.0-9.0 (17-78) 1.7-3.2 (15-28) ,
I
Crossmember support bushing projection mm (in.)

/
Upper part Lower part
15.5 (59) 2.1-3.7 (.08-.15) 6.7-7.3 (.26-.29)
Differential support bushing projection mm (in.)
1 TSB Revision
34-22
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Special Tools
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Tool numberand name A: MB991 387 Arbor B: MB991 388 Base C: MB990890 Base B Supersession Application Removal and installation of the crossmember bushing
@ f!? 6
MB990958 Arbor 8 MB991113 Steering linkage puller
MB990958-01
Removal and installation of crossmember bushings
MB991113-01
Disconnection of the ball joint
MB990326 Preload socket 0 J Em
Measurement of the ball joint break away torque
0
8
MB990800 Ball joint remover and installer MB991 071 Bushing remover and installer A: MB991 073 Base B: MB991 072 Arbor
Installation of the dust cover
A /
Removal and installation of bushing from/to upper arm, lower arm, and assist link
Q@
MB990767 End yoke holder
MB990767-01
To stop axle shaft turning
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Special Tools
34-23
B: lMB990244
TSB Revision
34-24
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - On-vehicle Service
34-25
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT CHECK
Standard value: -0lO + 30 To adjust camber, turn the lower arm mounting bolt on the crossmember side. Left wheel: Clockwise ((-) camber) Right wheel: Clockwise ((+) camber) The difference between the right and left wheels should be 30 or less. One graduation changes camber by about 12.
/1 T
g yzf+lM8j
TOE-IN Standard value: 0.5 + 2.5 mm (.Ol + -09 in.) To adjust toe, turn the trailing arm mounting bolts on the crossmember side on both sides the same amount. NOTE Left wheel: Clockwise (toe-out) Right wheel: Clockwise (toe-in) The difference between right and left wheels should be 3 mm (.12 in.) or less. One graduation changes toe by about 2 mm (.08 in.). Caution 1. Adjust the eccentric cam bolt within 90 from the central position. 2. Adjust camber and toe, in that order, and, if camber is adjusted, be sure to adjust toe also. 3. Make the adjustments with the 4WS tie rod end disconnected from the trailing arm. 4. On vehicles without 4WS, disconnect the assist links from the trailing arms before adjustment.
/ i
TSB Revision
34-26
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Rear Suspension Assembly
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY

l I
\ I Id 1
l
Rear Side Trim Absorber Lid Removal (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.)
Center Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler Removal (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.)
I
Post-installation Operation Center Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) l Rear Side Trim Absorber Lid Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) l Power Steering System Refilling and Bleeding (Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.)
l
l l l
Wheel Alignment Checking (Refer to P.34-25.) 4WS System Bleeding and Operation Inspection (Refer to GROUP 378 - On-vehicle Service.) Parking Brake Lever Stroke Checking (Refer to GROUP 36 - On-vehicle Service.)
45 Nm 3 ft.lbs.
_12
30-35 Nm \ /%Bi
50-60 N m 36-43 ft.lbs.
4
,5
.Ibs.
/6
\ L)
80-94 ft.lbs. )bx
Removal steps
1. Shock absorber mounting nuts bweO* 2. ECS connector cECS>* 3. Cap* 4. Brake tube to brake hose connection* (Refer to GROUP 35 - Brake Line.) 5. Brake caliper* 6. Brake disc* 7. Parking brake cable end* (Refer to GROUP 36 - Parking Brake.) 8. Pressure tube assembly to pipe assembly connection <4WS> 9. Feed pipe assembly to suction hose connection <4WS> 10. Return pipe assembly to rubber hose connection c4WS> 11. Power cylinder tie rod coupling nut <4WS>* or assist link coupling nut <except 4WS>* 12. Differential carrier to propeller shaft coupling bolt and nut 13. Center bearing mounting nut 14. Harness connector CABS>* 15. Parking brake cable and ABS sensor fixing bolt CABS>* 16. Cable band* 17. Crossmember bracket* 18. Crossmember mounting nut (on differential side)* 19. Rear suspension assembly
:t: 4A, NOTE
Parts marked with * are symmetrical.
d,
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSUENSION cAWD> - Rear Suspension Assembly REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
34-27
dA, CROSSMEMBER BRACKET / CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING NUT (ON DIFFERENTIAL SIDE) / REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY REMOVAL (1) Before removing the crossmember bracket, support the differential case with the transmission jack. (2) Remove the crossmember mounting bolt and nut.
NOTE Lowering the rear suspension assembly down from the transmission jack requires three persons, as the rear suspension assembly is very heavy. (Assign one person to the differential and one each to the left and right lower arm.) (3) Apply a wood block to the ball joint of the lower arm to prevent the dust shield from being deformed.
\
212A022:
Press out
MB991 387
INSPECTION
l l
Check the crossmember for cracks or deformation. Check the bushings for cracks or deterioration.
CROSSMEMBER SUPPORT BUSHING (FRONT) REPLACEMENT

MB991 388
212N008f 5
(1) Using the special tool, remove and press-fit the crossmember support bushing.
212NOOB
(2) When press-fitting the bushing, make sure that the hollow portions are positioned as shown. NOTE Ensure that the shift in rotating direction is within So.
" 212FOO79
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Rear Suspension Assembly

(3) Make sure that the protrusion of the inner sleeve (dimension A and B) are up to specifications. Standard value Dimension A: 15.5 mm (59 in.) Dimension B: 2.1-3.7 mm (.08-.15 in.)
Y12FW7!
Press out
CROSSMEMBER BUSHING (REAR) REPLACEMENT

(1) Using the special tool, remove and press-fit the bushing.
212N0088
212N0081
(2) When press-fitting, position the bushing as shown. NOTE Ensure that the shift in rotating direction is within +5.
X12FOO79
(3) Make sure that the protrusion of the inner sleeve (dimension A) is up to specification. Standard value (A) : 6.7-7.3 mm (.26-.29 in.)
Wl2FOO79
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION cAWD> - Upper and Lower Arm
34-29
UPPER AND LOWER ARM

iI
Post-installation Operation 0 Wheel Alignment Check (Refer to P.34-25.)

I
140-160 Nm 1 0 1 - 1 1 6 ft.lbs. Dust cover
4
r g!-Wd 3:::: ft.lbs.
Nm
EL/
i 2 R0487
140-160 Nm* 1 0 1 - 1 1 6 ft.lbs.* g E
L7Bl
12FOO93 00001036
Upper arm removal steps 1. Self-locking nut 2. Upper arm mounting nut 3. Upper arm mounting bolt 4. Upper arm 4Bb
Lower arm removal steps 5. Lower arm mounting nut 6. Lower arm mounting bolt .A4 7. fzbilizer link to lower arm coupling 8. Self-locking nut 9. Lower arm
NOTE *: Indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle on the ground in the unladen condition.

(A, SELF-LOCKING NUT REMOVAL Using the special tool, disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to a nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it.
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION cAWD> - Upper and Lower Arm

(B, SELF-LOCKING NUT REMOVAL Lower down the lower arm on the crossmember side. Then, install the special tool and disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to a nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it. I
212A009d

.AQSTABlLlZER LINK TO LOWER ARM COUPLING NUT INSTALLATION Holding the stabilizer link with a wrench, tighten the self-locking nut so that the protrusion of the stabilizer link (dimension A indicated in illustration) is within the standard value. Standard value (A) : 5-7 mm (.197-.276 in.)
ZlZAOlOt I
INSPECTION
l l l l
Check the bushing for wear and deterioration. Check the upper arm or lower arm for bend or breakage. Check the ball joint dust cover for cracks. Check all bolts for condition and straightness.
BALL JOINT BREAKAWAY TORQUE CHECKING Using the special tool, measure the ball joint breakaway torque. Standard value: 2-9 Nm (17-78 in.lbs.)
zl2UOO18

MB990800 . Dust cover
(1) Remove the dust cover. (2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust cover. (3) Drive in the dust cover with special tool until it is fully seated.
Snap ring
212R019 9
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION cAWD> - Upper and Lower Ark
34-31
, L
Removal
MI3991 072
LQWER ARM BUSHING REPLACEMENT

(1) Use the special tool to remove and press-fit the bushing.
MB991 073
YlZNOlOl
Press-fit
(2) Press-fit the lower arm bushing until the bushing outer pipe edge flush with the lower arm pipe edge.
i
Pipe (lower am) OLer pipe (bushing)
12A003!
TSB Revision
34-32 TRAILING ARM
REAR SUSPENSION cAWD> - Trailina Arm

l Wheel Alignment Check (Refer to P.34-25.) * Parking Brake Lever Stroke Check (Refer to GROUP 36 - On-vehicle Service.)
Lj
l
Rear Brake Disc Run-out Check (Refer to GROUP 35 - On-vehicle Service.)
50-60 Nm 36-43 ft.lbs. 260-300 Nm 188-217 ft.lbs.
9
\
55-6 40-4
200-240 Nm* 145-174 ft.lbs.*
Al2FO134
58 Am 42 ft.lbs.
Removal steps 1. Rear brake caliper assembly 2. Rear brake disc 3. Drive shaft to companion flange mounting bolt and nut 4. Self-locking nut 5. Companion flange 6. Rear axle shaft 7. Parking brake cable end 8. Parking brake cable clamp bolt 9. Rear speed sensor CABS> 10. Rear speed sensor cable and parking brake cable bands CABS> 11. Dust shield 12. Self-locking nut (upper arm)
4Cb
13. Self-locking nut (lower arm) 14. Assist link or tie rod end mounting nut 15. Trailing arm mounting bolt and nut 16. Stopper (18 in.-wheel equipped vehicles) 17. Rear shock absorber mounting bolt 18. Trailing arm
l:
NOTE Indicates parts which should be temporarily tightened, and then fully tightened with the vehicle on the ground in the unladen condition.
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Trailing Arm REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
34-33
+A, SELF-LOCKING NUT REMOVAL With the special tool, secure the rear axle shaft, then remove the self-locking nut.
+B,REAR AXLE SHAFT REMOVAL With the special tool, remove the rear axle shaft.
+C,SELF-LOCKING NUT (UPPER ARM) / SELF-LOCKING NUT (LOWER ARM) REMOVAL Using the special tool, disconnect the ball joint from the knuckle. Caution 1. Be sure to tie the cord of the special tool to a nearby part. 2. Loosen the nut but do not remove it.
Press-fit
Removal
INSPECTION
l l
Check trailing arm for cracks and deformation. Check bushing for cracks, deterioration and wear.
TRAILING ARM BUSHING REPLACEMENT

CONNECTING ROD REPLACEMENT

Replace the connecting rod using the following procedure: (1) Remove the trailing arm bushing. (2) Remove the bolt and nut.
Trailina arm bushina
2i2A0298
I~ TSB
Revision
34-34
REAR SUSPENSION cAWD> - Trailina Arm

Bolt B
i i - \ -A
MB991254
(3) Set the special tool onto the trailing arm as shown in the illustration. NOTE (1) Apply lubricant to the sliding portion of the special tool (at the arrow marked A in the illustration). (2) Install bolt B to the trailing arm, at the point shown in the figure. (4) Use a spanner, etc., to turn the portion marked C in the illustration to remove the connecting rod. (5) Installation of the body (special tool) should be performed with the screw shaft and guide shaft center lines oriented as shown in the illustration.
\.i I
(6) ,pdpy soapy water to the rubber portion of the connecting (7) Reverse the removal procedures to press-fit.
(8) Remove the special tool after aligning the holes in the special tool and trailing arm. (9) Tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque. Tightening torque : 98 Nm (71 ft.lbs.) (lO)Press-fit the trailing arm bushing. (Refer to P.34-33.)
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION cAWD> - Assist Link
34-35
ASSIST LINK cup to 1994 models>
Wheel Alignment Check (Refer to P.34-25.)
40 Nm 29 ft.lbs.
i.
58 Nm 42 ft.lbs. .A+ 1. Assist link
A12F0126
NOTE L.H. side shown.

Bolt
.A+ ASSIST LINK INSTALLATION If the ball studs of the assist link does not align with their mounting holes, loosen the lock nuts and turn the adjusting bolt to adjust the length of the assist link.
Lock nut
A12FO125
i TSB Revision
34-36
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Shock Absorber Assembly
SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation 0 Rear Side Trim Absorber Lid Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.)
ZlZFOO86
Removal steps
1. Shock absorber upper mounting nut 2. ECS connector <EC&3. Cap 4. Shock absorber lower mounting bolt 5. Shock absorber assembly
1 TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Shock Absorber Assembly DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

20-25 14-18
34-37
Z12AO360
Disassembly steps 1. Cap 2. Piston rod tightening nut (Refer to P.34-14.) 3. Washer 4. Upper bushing (A) 5. Bracket assembly (Refer to P.34-15.) 6. Spring pad
;. &&; bushing (B) 9: Cup assembly 10. Dust cover 11. Bump rubber 12. Coil spring (Refer to P.34-15.) 13. Shock absorber
INSPECTION
l l
Check the rubber parts for damage. Check the coil springs for crack, damage or deterioration.
TSB Revision
34-38
REAR SUSPENSION cAWD> - Stabilizer Bar
STABILIZER BAR
Nm .Ibs.
12FO109
2 9 f t . l b s . s -)
-;1 49& .A, n4, -+?!a $Q

-3
2P
L 12LO217 00001037
11.
Removal steps ,A+ 1. Self-locking nut* .A+ 2. Self-locking nut* 3. Joint cup A* 4. Stabilizer rubber* 5. Joint cup B* 6. Stabilizer link 7. Joint cup A* 8. Stabilizer rubber* 9. Tie rod end mounting nut* 10. Parking brake cable bracket mounting bolt*
:t: 4Bb
11. 4WS piping fixing bolt <4WS> 12. Rear shock absorber mounting bolt 13. Power cylinder mounting bolt <4WS> 14. Crossmember bracket* 15. Crossmember mounting nut* 16. Stabilizer bracket* 17. Bushing* 18. Stabilizer bar
NOTE Parts marked with * are symmetrical.
TSB Revision
REAR SUSPENSION cAWD> - Stabilizer Bar REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
34-39
L/
+A, CROSSMEMBER BRACKET / CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING NUT REMOVAL (1) Support the rear suspension assembly with the transmission jack. (2) Remove the crossmember bracket and crossmember mounting nut.
i-_--I 3 -------I -&I$ -A -1. -\ L-. I, Air7

b--
I I
Zl2AOlO$
+B, STABILIZER BAR REMOVAL (1) Lower the transmission jack a little to obtain a gap between the rear suspension and body. (2) Remove the stabilizer bar.

.A+STABlLlZER LINK / SELF-LOCKING NUT / SELF-LOCKING NUT INSTALLATION (1) Secure the stabilizer link ball stud with a wrench and mount the self-locking nut.
L
/Z,2A wyny j
(2) Hold the stabilizer link with a wrench so that its protrusion on the lower arm side (dimension A) is up to specification, then mount the self-locking nut. Standard value (A) : 5-7 mm (.197-.276 in.)
with wrench
c 12AO099
TSB Revision
34-40
REAR SUSPENSION <AWD> - Stabilizer Bar INSPECTION

l l l l
the bushing for wear and deterioration. the stabilizer bar for deterioration or damage. the stabilizer link ball joint dust cover for cracks. all bolts for condition and straightness.
STABILIZER LINK BALL JOINT BREAKAWAY TORQUE CHECKING Using the special tool, measure the ball joint breakaway torque. Standard value: 1.7-3.2 Nm (15-28 in.lbs.)

(1) Remove the clip ring and the dust cover.
(2) Apply multipurpose grease to the lip and inside of the dust cover.
(3) Wind tape around the threads of the stabilizer link stud and install the dust cover. (4) Secure the dust cover with the clip ring. At this time, make sure that the clip ring ends are located at a point 90 + 20 with reference to the link axis.
TSB Revision
35-1
i id
SERVICE BRAKES
CONTENTS
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 BRAKE LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 BRAKE PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ABS-ECU) <ABS> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 FRONT DISC BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 G SENSOR <AWD-ABS>* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 HYDRAULIC UNIT (HU), RELAY <ABS> . . . . . . . 110 MASTER CYLINDER AND BRAKE BOOSTER . . 87 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Brake Booster Operating Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Brake Drum Inside Diameter Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Brake Fluid Level Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Brake Lining and Brake Drum Connection Check . . . 74 Brake Lining Thickness Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Brake Pedal Check and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Check Valve Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Front Brake Disc Run-out Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Front Brake Disc Run-out Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Front Brake Disc Thickness Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Front Disc Brake Pad Check and Replacement . . . . 66 Hydraulic Unit (HU) Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Power Relay Check .............................. 82 Proportioning Valve Function Test ................. 65 Rear Brake Disc Run-out Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Rear Brake Disc Run-out Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Rear Brake Disc Thickness Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Rear Disc Brake Pad Check and Replacement . . . . . 71 Remedy for a Discharged Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Valve Relay and Motor Relay Check CABS> . . . . . . . 83 Wheel Speed Sensor Output Voltage Measurement . 75
REAR DISC BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SPECIFICATI;PNS ...................... . ....... 2

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 WHEEL SPEED SENSOR <ABS> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 I
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injuryordeathtoservicepersonnel(frominadvertentfiringoftheairbag)ortothedriverandpassenger(fromrendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 528 -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*).
35-2 SPECIFICATIONS
SERVICE BRAKES - Specifications
i
FWD without ABS Tandem type (with level sensor) 25.4 (1) or 26.9 (1 /,s) FWD with ABS Tandem type (with level sensor) 26.9 (1 /,s) AWD Tandem type (with level sensor) 26.9 (1 1/,6)
MASTER CYLINDER
Items Type I.D. mm (in.)
BRAKE BOOSTER
Items Type Effective dia. of power cylinder mm (in.) Boosting ratio [Brake pedal depressing force] FWD without ABS Vacuum type, tandem 180 (7.0) + 205 (8.0) or 203 (8.0) + 230 (9.0) 6.0 [at 247 N (54 Ibs.)] FWD with ABS Vacuum type, tandem 203 (8.0) + 230 (9.0) 7.0 [at 261 N (58 Ibs.)] AWD Vacuum type, tandem 203 (8.0) + 230 (9.0) 7.0 [at 261 N (58 lb.%)]
PROPORTIONING VALVE
Items Split point MPa (psi) Decompression ratio Convertible 4.95-5.45 (704-775) 0.43 Hatchback 3.75-4.25 (533-604) 0.96
FRONT BRAKES
REAR BRAKES
Items FWD Floating caliper, 1 -piston, ventilated disc (MR45V) 228 (9.0) 18 (.71) / 15.5 (.61) 34.9 (1 s/*, Automatic AWD AWD <From 1994 models> CUD to 1993 models> Floating caliper, 1 -pis- Rigid caliper, 2-piston, ventilated disc ventilated disc (MR68X) ton, (MR58V) 237 (9.4) 20 l.79) / 15.5 (.61) 38.1 (1 12) Automatic 2 5 0 20 (.79) 1 15 (.60) 38.1 (1 12) Automatic ( 9 . 8 )
Type
Disc effective dia. mm (in.) Disc thickness m m (in.) Pad thickness mm (in.) Wheel cylinder I.D. mm (in.) Clearance adiustment
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR <ABS>

Items Rotor teeth Speed sensor Front wheel side Rear wheel side Specifications 47 47 Magnet coil type
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Specifications SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS

Items
Front disc thickness mm (in.)
Rear disc thickness mm.(in.)
to master cylinder
Disc brake drag force (tangenti mounting bolts) N (Ibs.) Speed sensors internal resistance CABS> kQ
Solenoid valve (HU) resistance R <Up to 1995 models> Hydraulic unit solenoid valve inte nal resistance R G-sensor output voltage V
clearance cAWD> m m (in.) Clearance between the speed pal iece and the toothed rotor 4WD> Left/right proportioning valve out difference MPa (psi) Front disc run-out mm (in.)
, \ id
35-4
Items
SERVICE BRAKES - Specifications / Special Tools

Standard value 2.8 (.ll) 1 168.0 (6.6) Limit 1 .o (.04) 1 169.0 (6.7) 0.05 (.002) 0.08 (.0031) or less FWD AWD 0.05 (.002) 0.8 (.031) I
Rear brake lining thickness mm (in.) 1 Rear drum inside diameter mm (in.) Front hub end play mm (in.) Rear disc run-out mm (in.) Rear hub end play mm (in.)
LUBRICANTS
Items Brake fluid Inside of shim A and shim B, or inside of inner shim A, inner shim B, and outer shim Guide pin and lock pin sliding part Piston boot inner surface Pin boot inner surface Specified lubricant Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4 Brake grease SAE J310, NLGI No. 1 Repair kit grease
SEALANTS
Items Specified sealant 3M ATD Part No. 8663 or equivalent
I Thread part fitting

SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Tool number and name MB990964 Brake tool set 4: MB990520 Disc brake piston expander MB991 356 4BS check harless MB991341C MB991 356 Supersession General tool
\ d
I I
Application Compressing disc brake piston
service
For checking of ABS
MB991 341 Scan tool (Multi-Use Tester <MUT>)
Up to 1993 models For checking of ABS
I- TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Special Tools / Troubleshootincl
refer to GROUP
For checking of ABS
check harness
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Vehicle pulls to one side when brakes are applied Probable cause Grease or oil on pad or lining surface Inadequate contact of pad Auto ad,juster malfunction Insufficient braking Dower Low or deteriorated brake fluid Air in brake system Overheated brake rotor due to dragging of pad Grease or oil on pad surface Inadequate contact of pad Brake booster malfunction Auto adjuster malfunction Remedy Replace Correct Adjust Add or refill Bleed air from system Correct Replace Correct Correct Adjust Correct Replace
c/
Clogged brake line
Proportioning valve malfunction
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Troubleshootina
Insufficient parking brake function Excessive parking brake lever stroke
the parking brake lever stroke ck the parking brake cable rout-
Scraping or grinding noise when brakes are applied
when brakes are ap-
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES
Symptom Squealing noise when brakes are not applied
- Troubleshooting / Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting
35-7
Probable cause Disc brakes - rusted, stuck Loose or extra brake parts Improper positioning of pads in caliper
Remedy Lubricate or replace Retighten
Correct Correct Replace
Improper installation of support mounting to caliper body Poor return of brake booster or master cylinder
Incorrect adjustment of brake pedal or booster Adjust push-rod setting Groaning, clicking or rattling noise when brakes are not applied Stones or foreign material trapped inside wheel covers Loose wheel nuts Disc brakes -failure of anti-rattle shim Disc brakes - loose installation bolt Remove stones, etc. Retighten Replace Retighten
Incorrect adjustment of brake pedal or booster Adjust push-rod setting.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

<Up to 1995 models> PARTICULAR PHENOMENA OF THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
Models equipped with the anti-lock braking system (ABS) may exhibit one or more of the following phenomena from time to time, but none of these are abnormal. (1) A pulsing feeling in the brake pedal, or vibration of the body or the steering wheel, when the anti-lock braking system is activated by sudden braking or by braking on a slippery road surface. Actually, this phenomenon is an indication that the anti-lock braking system is functioning normally. (2) When the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 km/h (4 mph) after the engine is started and the vehicle starts off (for the first time), a whining motor noise may be heard from the engine compartment if the vehicle is traveling in a quiet place, but this noise is simply the result of a self-check being made of the anti-lock braking system operation. For problems in the electrical system, the on-board diagnostic is built into the electronic control unit (ECU) causing the ABS warning light to illuminate as a warning to the driver. In this instance, checks can be made by using the multi-use tester and oscilloscope. Problems in the hydraulic system (poor, braking, etc.) can be located in the same way as for ordinary brakes. There is, however, the necessity to check to determine whether the problem is related to ordinary brake components or to the components related to the ABS. To make this check, use the scan tool.
HOW TO USE THE TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW CHART

(1) Using the flow chart, check the ABS warning light light-up sequence. Read the diagnosis codes and check the condition of braking operation. (2) Following the check chart listed in the remedy column, perform the checks. There are [Explanation] and [Hint] in each check chart. Refer to them when troubleshooting. NOTE ECU: Electronic control unit HU: Hydraulic unit /
TROUBLESHOOTING METHODS
I L Problems related to the anti-lock braking system (ABS) can be classified into two general categories: problems in the electrical system and those in the j hydraulic system. TSB Revision
35-8
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting (ABS-FWD)

(2) With the ignition key in the START position, power to the ABS ECU is interrupted and the ABS warning light remains lit because the valve relay is OFF. (3) When the ignition key is returned from the START position to the ON position, the ABS warning light flashes twice in about one second (during which the valve relay self check is made again) and then goes out.
1 sec. ABS warning light ONI OFF ignition key
00002166
TROUBLESHOOTING
Confirm condition in the following way and diagnosis accordingly. Does the ABS warning light illuminate as described below up to the time the engine starts? (1) When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the ABS ECU causes the ABS warning light to flash twice in about one second (during which the valve relay self check is made) and then causes it to go out. -
1 sec. / I 1 I c
- CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE 1
Yes
No
warntng light drive cir-
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking Svstem Troubleshooting

No. 4 Trouble condition After the ignition key is turned to the ON position, it blinks once and then illuminates when it is turned to the START position. When the key is returned to the ON position, the light blinks again. (Blinking with the ignition key in the ON position is synchronized with operation noise of the valve relay.)
ABS light
Remedy Major causes Break in harness for ECU warning light Check, using flow drive circuit chart D (Refer to Malfunction of ECU p.3519.j
warning
ST Ignition ON key ACC, LOCK J-214AO593
1 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS=/
when starting to drive the car?
Trouble with the motor relay, solenoid valve [due to self test at start-up or malfunction of wheel speed sensor]
Is there one-sided braking, insufficient braking force or malfunction of ABS operation? Yes i Trouble condition One-sided braking lnsuff icient braking force Decline in ABS function
Major causes
l l l l
Remedy Check HU operation and, if necessary, replace HU. If HU is normal, check structural parts for normal braking.
Hydraulic line in HU is clogged. Mechanical lock of HU solenoid valve Hydraulic line in HU is clogged. Malfunction in HU solenoid valve operation Insufficient wheel speed sensor output voltage (sensor malfunction, too large a gap between sensor rotor, missing rotor teeth). Malfunction of ABS ECU
ABS sometimes functions even when there is no sudden braking. (ABS operation vibration is transmitted.)
Check wheel speed sensor (Refer to P.3575.) and, if necessary, replace sensor, adjust gap or replace rotor. If tests indicate that there are no mechanical or electrical failures, replace the ECU.
TSB Revision
35-10
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting
/ CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE /
After a test drive*, use on-board diagnostic to check (Refer to P.3520.). / No diagnostic trouble codes output and normal codes are displayed? I Yes
I
NOTE l : Drive at 19 mph or higher for more than 30 seconds. .
on-board diagnostic output terminals and the diagnosis check
intermittent or other trouble.
/ If trouble does not reappear 1 watch vehicle movements until it reappears. (Refer to P.35-11.)
1 All ABS functions are normal. (Nor are there stored memory of past diagnostic trouble code.)
d
Caution 1. When carrying out inspection of the ABS-ECU terminal voltage and resistance, the special tool (MB991356)
should be used.
Connector terminal No. layout for troubleshooting
2.
Terminal No. layout shown on the special tool connector
Because the ABS-ECU connector terminal No. layout for troubleshooting is different from the terminal No. layout shown on the special tool connector, when using the special tool for inspecting, take the readings from the special tool terminal Nos.
Example
00002535
r~ ~
18
ABS-ECU connector terminal No. for troubleshooting
Terminal No. shown on the special tool connector 1 I
1TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting METHOD OF CLEARING DIAGNOSTIC TROlJtiLE CODE MEMORY
Caution ii l When servicing is finished, clear the diagnostic trouble code memory. Trouble codes cannot be cleared from memory when the ABS ECU system is in fail safe. Proceed to diagnosis and repair. (1) Clear memory using scan tool. (No. 7 DIAG. ERASE in the actuator test is selected to erase the diagnostic trouble code.) (2) After clearing, recheck the diagnostic trouble codes, and check that memory is cleared.
35-11
ACTUATOR TEST FUNCTION

The actuator can be forcibly driven in the following way by using the scan tool. NOTE l The actuator test cannot be carried out when the ABS ECU System is in fail safe. l When using forced drive using the scan tool, the vehicle must be stopped. l During forced drive using the scan tool, forced drive operation is stopped when any wheel speed reaches 10 km/h (6 mph).
Actuator test specifications
I I
No.
02 03
Scan tool display FR VALVE A FL VALVE A REAR VALVE A FR VALVE M
Drive solenoid valve and motor Not used
Drive pattern
/ LJ
04
05
FL VALVE M
Soleinoid valve and pump motor for each HU car- zz/;responding than- va,ve nel. <Manual pattern> Pump motor Start of forced drive End of forced drive Z14A0508
06
REAR VALVE M
TSB Revision
35-12
A
ABS warning light does not light at all.
[Explanation] When it does not light up at all, there is a strong possibility that there is trouble with ABS warning light or with power to the light.
[Hint] If other warning lights do not light up either, fuse is probably blown.
IGNITION SWITCH(IG2) 00 d 2 -____-________ J/B 0 IGNIT 3N SWITC (!Gl) 3 ::
ABS POWER RELAY (~gwTls1994)
$;$gCU
5g IN
.
29
= SUPPLY (1995 MODELS)
G-R
COMBINATiON
.0_- _-_- __-- -1 ylTT%aq 1 2; -7 SOLE NO11 VALV E
Ll
f . I
> w A .> k! s
.127 .
G-R
! = 3 3
41 FL 1
1 cs 1 iI 7 ?+
1 9
* %
ABS ECU [ 11213/415 161718 /9~10~11~:2~13~14~15~16137l~E~ ~'9~al21~2~31~125~6~~2~~Q~30~1~2~3~~~35~
KXI-kKK-R35Rl-I1
1 TSB Revision

With the ignition key in the ON position, No do other warning lights (except door-ajar warning light, seat belt warning light) illu- I---minate? / Yes Remove the combination meter, and check with the ignition key ON. i No Does voltage between harness connector terminal No. 14 and ground indicate battery positive voltage? I Check fuse No. 11. If it is blown, correct the cause of the blown fuse and then replace the fuse.
35-13
Yes
I--
1
is broken. Turn the ignition switch OFF and check.1 I Is the ABS warning light normal? for burned bulb.)
+
* ABS warning light bulb burned.
Is there continuity between combiination meter No. 58 and No. 59 terminals? Yes
/ No
-- * 1 Faulty combination meter
c Repair or replace combination meter.
Connect connectors firmly. (Check for pins pulled out or bent, and repair as needed.)
drive circuits. Check both circuits.
1 TSB Revision
35-14
/ Remove the ECU connector and check. /
Repair harness. connector terminal No. 25 and ground the ignition key is in the ON position?
ABS ECU malfun
Replace ABS ECU.
[ Check valve relay.
Remove valve relay and check.
Replace valve relay.
Install the valve relay, remove the HU connector and check.
Yes
Does positive .voltage between the HU K-**i;;E3]4 Repair harness. harness connector termrnal No. 8 and ground rndrcate battery positive voltage while the ignition key is in the ON posiYes t Is there continuity between HU harness connector terminal No. 9 and ground? Broken harness wire between HU and ground Repair harness.
Replace HU. connector terminals No. 8 and No. 9? Yes .I Connector not connected securely. Replace connector.
1 Revision TSB

B ABS warning light stays on when the ignition key is in the ON position.
35-I 5
[Explanation] This is the symptom when the ABS ECU does not power up due to broken ECU power circuit, etc., when the fail safe function operates and isolates the system or when the warning light drive circuit is short circuited.
[Hint] Check the on-board diagnostic output and if there is no output voltage or if the scan tool and ABS ECU cannot communicate, there is a good possibility that power is not flowing to the ECU. Caution l If the diagnostic trouble code is output, the system can be in the fail safe mode. In such a case, erase the diagnostic trouble code and then restart the engine to check if the system is currently in a fault condition.
EYWPbE
IGNiTlOW SWITCti(IG1)
~ No Is there on-board diagnostic
output? (Is there communication with scan tool?) Yes
On vehicles produced up to Oct. 1994, refer to P.35-16. On vehicles produced from Nov. 1994, refer to P.35-17. * Check, using the diagnostic trouble code check chart (Refer to P.3521.).
No
Yes
t No Does the ABS warning light re- - Short in ECU transistor main illuminated even with the ECU connector disconnected? I I Yes
86 ,,87 t --I ,,30
Does the ABS warning light remain illuminated even with the HU connector disconnected? Yes
1 85 87a'lALVE RELAY
lNo
No
~n~oflZ!h!ZZrr~~o~~ I
+,
tween HU or ECU and ABS

warning light
* Repair harness or replace combination meter.
KX35-AK-R3513-K
TSB Revision
35-16
<Models produced up to Oct. 1994>

CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
:GNI:ION SWITCH (lG2)
Can other electronic control systems communicate with scan tool?
No
c Scan tool related malfunction. Repair and recheck.
* Correct cause of blown Yes

ABS POWFR RELAY
Disconnect ECU connector and check harness connector

ABS ECU I 18
Is there continuity between body harness terminals No. 9 and No. 34, and ground? Yes
No
-7
x2 RI! 1-1 -1 z2 EZ pg$q r;

KX35-RK-R3514-W
NOTE x::1994 -0061.5. :2:ur, to 1993 rn30815.
Is there continuity between body harness connector terminals No. 23 and No. 24, and diagnosis inspection terminals No.4&No.lOorNo.7&No. 8?
Repair harness. Harness wire between diagnosis inspection terminal and ABS ECU is broken.
Malfunction of ABS ECU
Yes
1 Repair harness. Replace ABS ECU.
1 TSB Revision

<Models produced from Nov. 1994>
IGNITION SWITCH (IG2) I
35-17
m d
JB @ IOA
No
* Scan tool related malfunction. Repair and recheck.
_I
B
Correct cause of blown fuse and replace fuse. Disconnect ECU connector and check harness connector
. . . . : No pizfy ~~~~
ABS ECU
Yes Is there continuity between body harness terminals No. 9
1 bodv harness connector termi1 ry7rNT;d No 24-and diagnosis inspection terminals Yes i 1 Repair harness. t ) Malfunction of ABS ECU
KK35-AK-R3315-N
Replace ABS ECU.
TSB Revision
35-18
C
ABS warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is in the START position.
[Explanation]
The ABS ECU uses the IGz power source which is turned off in the START position. The ABS warning light uses the IG, power source which is not turned off even in the START position. Con-
sequently, in the START position power is off and the ECU turns the valve relay OFF. If the warning light does not illuminate at this time, there is trouble in the warning light circuit on the valve relay side.
;yWx;B E !a
IGNiTlON SWITCH(IG1)
Remove the No. 3 fuse from the junction box to turn off power to the ABS-ECU. Disconnect the hydraulic unit connector (A-64) and the ABS valve relay connector (A-65). Inspect the harness side of both connectors for damage to the terminal pins. Repair terminal pins as needed.
- No With the ignition key in the ON position, does voltage between body connector terminal No. 8 and ground indicate the battery positive voltage? Yes t Is there continuity between body connector terminal No. 9 and ground? , Yes i
86 B? T ,\30 _ --I 85 4, B7a;gw;p 1
- Harness wire between HU and warning light is broken.
No
+ Broken line between HU and body ground
1; I
Is there continuity between HU connector terminal No. 8 and terminal No. 9? Yes
No
- Valve relay malfunction or break in HU harness wire
1 I
t Remove the valve relay. Is there continuity between terminal No. 87a and No. 30? Yes t HU harness malfunction
Replace HU.
KXB-AK-R35134
NOTE When performing the check marked *, note polarity of the diode (refer to the circuit diagram).
TSB Revision
35-19
When power flows, the ABS ECU turns on the warning light for approximately 1 sec. while it performs a valve relay test. If there is a break in the
harness between the ECU and the warning light, the light illuminates only when the valve relay is off in the valve relay test, etc.
IGNITION SWITCH(lG1) j: w -TJ/B
Disconnect the hydraulic unit connector (A-64) and the ABSECU connector (E-12). Inspect the harness side of both connectors for damage to individual terminal pins. Repair terminal pins as needed.
In the ignition key ON position, does voltage between terminal No. 25 and ground indicate battery positive voltage? Yes
No
i
t [Malfunction of ABS ECU
Replace ABS ECU.
ABS-ECU
TSB Revision I-- ~~~
35-20
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting CHECK USING ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC When using the scan tool [Multi-use tester (MUT) <Up
to 1993 models> or MUT-II <All models>] (1) With the ignition switch OFF, connect the scan tool. When connecting the scan tool (MUT-II) to a 1993 model vehicle, use the adapter harness supplied together. Caution Turn off the ignition switch beforehand whenever the scan tool is connected or disconnected. Turn the ignition ON and select the ABS system. (The ABS warning light lights up, it goes into the scan tool mode. In the scan tool mode, ABS does not function.) If it does not go into the scan tool mode, check the ECU power circuit and the harness between the ECU and diagnostic output terminals. (2) Read the on-board diagnostic output codes from the ECU memory. (3) Clear the diagnostic trouble codes once from memory. (Refer to P.3511.) If the memory cannot be cleared, the ECU is currently detecting the trouble and the ABS ECU is in fail safe. If it can be cleared, the trouble is either temporary or appears only when driving. (4) When the diagnostic trouble codes cannot be cleared, or when the ABS ECU goes into fail safe during another test drive and diagnostic trouble codes are output, check according to diagnostic trouble code check charts (E-l -E-6).
When using the MUT
khb using th/e MUTill
\Z12FOO57
<From 1994 models>
i2OFO159
I
Z2OFOl64 00002160
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
/ VEH. SPD. SNSR. STOP LAMP SW
E-2 E-3
1 P.3521 P.3523
1 52 55
MOTOR RELAY CONT. UNIT
1TSB Revision
35-21
I
I
I
E-l
When the following diagnostic trouble codes are displayed 11 FL SNSR. OPEN 12 FR SNSR. OPEN 13 RL SNSR. OPEN 14 RR SNSR. OPEN [Hint]
Ld
[Explanation]
The ABS ECU detects breaks in the wheel speed sensor wire. This trouble code is output if the wheel speed sensor signal is not input (or short circuited) or if its output is low when starting to drive or while driving.
In addition to a broken wire/short circuit in the wheel speed sensor, also check whether the sensor gap is too large, sensor harness wire is broken, or sensor harness and body connector are not properly connetted.
1 E-2
When diagnostic trouble code 15 VEH. SPD. SNSR. is displayed
[Explanation]
This trouble code is output when there is an abnormality (other than broken wire or short circuit) in any of the wheel speed sensor output signals while driving.
[Hint]
The following can be considered as the cause of the wheel speed sensor output abnormality. l Distortion of rotor, teeth missing Low frequency noise interference when sensor l harness wire is broken l Noise interference in sensor signal Sensor output signal is below the standard vall ue or amplitude modulation is over the standard / value. Using an oscilloscope to measure the L; wave shape of the wheel speed sensor output signal is very effective. l Broken sensor harness 0 Poor connection of connector
NOTE (1) If contact is poor, check the sensor cable by bending and lightly stretching it. (2) Except for the case where a fault condition exists in the system, but the inspection results are normal; if an abnormality cannot be found in the sensor circuit displayed as abnormal, erase the diagnostic trouble code and turn the ignition switch to OFF once, and then test-drive* again. If the same diagnostic trouble code is output, replace the ABS ECU. If the trouble does not occur anymore, the problem is likely to be with the ABS ECU. (If the trouble is in the speed sensor circuit, but is difficult to recreate, it will recur even after the ABS ECU has been replaced.) (3) *: Drive at 19 mph or higher for more than 30 seconds.
SPEED SENSOR
ASS ECU
/ Ld
DATA LlNK CONNECTOR
TSB Revision
35-22

NOTE When checking with an oscilloscope, first measure voltage variations in the wheel speed sensor output. (Refer to P.35-75.) sensor * Replace wheel speed sensor
Check flow connected with wheel speed sensor
sr
Is the resistance value of the wheel speed Yes
No Is the resistance value with the ECU con- ----+ Harness wire for wheel speed nectar normal? sensor circuit is broken Standard value: Front 0.8-1.2 Wz Rear 0.6-0.8 kQ Yes
Repair harness.
Is the standard value for the gap between the wheel speed sensor and rotor within the range? Standard value: Front 0.3-0.9 mm (.012-.035 in.) Rear 0.2-0.7 mm (.008-.028 in.) Yes t Is the wheel speed sensor rotor normal, with no missing or damaged teeth? Yes Check the output of each wheel speed sensor with an oscilloscope, including the waveform. (Refer to measurement of wheel speed sensor output voltage variations on P.3575.) Is the output voltage for each wheel speed sensor over the standard value and is the waveform normal? Yes t If the above checks are normal, there is a malfunction of ABS ECU when this diagnostic trouble code re-occurs often. No
- Adjust the gap between the
* Replace rotor that has missing or damaged teeth.
No
Recheck if below the standard value or if the sensor has a poor waveform. Replace sensor or rotor.
- Replace the ABS ECU and check that the trouble code does not reoccur.
1 TSB Revision

E-3 L When diagnostic trouble code 22 STOP LAMP SW is displayed [Hint]
35-23
[Explanation]
The ABS ECU outputs this diagnostic trouble code in the following cases. l Stop light switch may remain on for more than 15 minutes without ABS operation. l The harness wire for the stop light switch may be open.
Do the stop lights light up and go out normally?
If the stop light operates normal, the harness for the stop light switch input circuit is broken or there is a malfunction in the ABS ECU.
/ Disconnect the ABS ECU con- / nectar and inspect at the harness side connector.
Repair harness.
Malfunction of ABS ECU /
Yes Replace ABS ECU. 1
I/
<HatchtIack>
<ConventiDle>
STOP LIGHT
ABS ECU
NOTE
Kx33-u-*soc-I
w
WITH AUTO-CRUISE CONTRO SYSTEH >ROL SYSTEM Y,THO"T AUTO-CRUISE CO NC Kx3s-u-!asIo- 00002529
xI:EHICLES
t2:YEHlCLES
/ TSB Revision
35-24
E-4

When diagnostic trouble codes 41 FL SOL. VALVE, 42 FR SOL. VALVE or 43 REAR SOL. V. are displayed.
[Explanation]
The ABS ECU normally monitors the solenoid valve drive circuit. If no current flows in the solenoid even if the ECU turns the solenoid ON or if it continues to flow even
when turned OFF, the ECU determines the solenoid coil wire is broken/short-circuited or the harness is broken/short-circuited, and then these diagnostic trouble codes are output.
IGR:ITION SWiTCy(IG1)
+ Is the resistance solenoid valve within the ranae of the standard values? Standard value: 1.0-l .3 Q
Replace HU.
+I
I
Is the solenoid valve resistance value within the range of the standard values when measured at the ECU connector? Standard value: 1.0-l .3Q Yes
, G-R $l G-R ]
No
The harness wire for the solenoid valve circuit whose resistance value is outside the range of the standard value is broken or short circuited.
SOLENOID
I I
/ Malfunction of ABS ECU
7 Replace ABS ECU.
ABS ECU
Ll 121 3 14 15 1617 (6 19 jlO~l1~12~13/i4/15~16~17~16~ ~19~20~1e2~23~426i26~7~6~~30~1~2l~~~~5~ Iu(35-AK-R3512-2
TSB Revision

E-5 When diagnostic trouble code 51 VALVE RELAY is displayed
35-25
[Explanation]
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ABS ECU switches the valve relay OFF and ON for an initial check, compares the voltage of the signal to the valve relay and valve power monitor line voltage to check whether the valve relay operation is normal. In addition, normally it monitors whether
SE L!L IGNITION
or not there is power in the valve power monitor line since the valve relay is normally ON. Then, if the supply of power to the valve power monitor line is interrupted, this diagnostic trouble code will be output.
Remove and check the valve

SWITOH(IG1)
relay.
:.I 0 d 5l ; oi cjl 0 2--?. B3 3 Dz c:1 1227 52 P
8- 8f: 4
t When the valve relay is checked, are the following conditions found? No. 85-No. 86: Resistance value 60-120 Q No. 30-No. 87a: Continuity No. 30-No. 87: No continuity When battery positive voltage is applied between terminals No. 86 and No. 85. No. 30-No. 87: Continuity No. 30-No. 87a: No continuity Yes i Install the valve relay and remove the HU connector. I i No 1With the ignition -ON,
+/ HU power harness wire is 1
Is there continuity between HU No. 8 and No. 7 terminals?

3 e -I -L 5 8 7a II I8 1 -__-_---- ----------- (+ ----- 1# I p!iiazq$: __________________--. T1
1 Yes
Faulty harness in HU I
Yes Connect the HU harness and remove the ECU connector.
P.
i1
B 22 .;
I
Yes t No Is there continuitv between 1 harness side connector terminal No. 22 and ground? Yes
Repair harness. -+I Malfunction of harness 1 !betxtn H U ; ABS!
ABS
ECU
ABS ECU malfunction
Repair harness. Replace ABS ECU.
TSB Revision
35-26
E-6
SERVICE. BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting

When diagnostic trouble code 52 MOTOR RELAY is displayed
l
[Explanation]
The ABS ECU outputs this diagnostic trouble code for the motor relay and motor in the following cases. l When the motor relay does not function l When there is trouble with the motor itself and it does not revolve l When the motor ground line is disconnected and the motor does not revolve
FUGIBLE LINK @ I
When the motor continues to revolve
[Hint]
If there is motor operation noise during scan tool forced drive mode, there is a broken or short circuited motor monitor wire.
Does the motor make a noise

during scan tool forced drive mode? No + Remove the motor relay.
Yes
/I
i - No Remove the motor relay and -----+ Motor relay malfunction check resistance values. No. 8%No. 86: Resistance I value 72-88 Q Replace motor relay. No. 30-No. 87: No continuity Battery positive voltage is applied between terminals No. 85
and No. 86.

No. 30-No. 87: Continuitv Is pump motor ground connetted normally? Yes Install motor relay and remove HU connector. I Connect ground wire.
Connect the HU connector and remove the ECU connector Is resistance between body .%-..connector terminal No. 2 and No. 26: 72-88 Q?
i Yes 1 ABS ECU malfunction
4 Replace ABS ECU.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking Svstem Troubleshootina TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS-AWD)

Confirm condition in the following way and diagnosis accordingly. Ioes the ABS warning light illuminate as described lelow up to the time the engine starts? :l) When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the ABS ECU causes the ABS warning light to flash four times in about one second (during which the valve relay self check is made) and then causes it to go out.
35-27
(2) With the ignition key in the START position, power to the ABS ECU is interrupted and the ABS warning light remains lit because the valve relay is OFF. (3) When the ignition key is returned from the START position to the ON position, the ABS warning light flashes four times in about one second (during which the valve relay self check is made again) and then goes out.
214AO594 00002165
No. Trouble condition 1 ABS warning light does not light up at all. ABS warning
light
Major causes
l l
Remedy
ON
OFF -
ABS warning light bulb is burnt out. Check, using flow Open in ABS warning light electrical chart A (Refer to circuit (check for blown fuse) P.3531.)
Ignition key
214A0690
When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, it remains lighted.

ABS ON
l l l
Fail safe is functioning due to ECU Check, using flow self diagnosis. chat-l B (Refer to
Short in ECU warning light drive cir- P.35-34.) cuit

Malfunction of ECU
warning light Ignition key 3
OFF -I-
214A0597
Does not illuminate when ignition key is in

START position. ABS warning ON light OFF
Ignition W ACC, LO:: --k5
l l l
Check, using flow Malfunction of valve relay Break in harness between ABS chart C (Refer to
warning light and HU

Break in harness between HU and body ground
P.35-37.)
1 TSB Revision
35-28
No.
4

Major causes
l l
Trouble condition After the ignition key is turned to the ON position, it blinks once and then illuminates when it is turned to the START position. When the key is returned to the ON position, the light blinks again. (Blinking with the ignition key in the ON position is synchronized with operation noise of the valve relay.) ABS warning
light
Remedy Check, using flow chart D (Refer to P.3538.) .i
Break in harness for ECU warning light drive circuit Malfunction of ECU
Ignition key ACC, LO?L14A0693
j CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE Does the ABS warni when starting to drive * Trouble with the motor relay, solenoid valve [due to self test at start-up or malfunction of wheel speed sensor] /No 1 + 4 No Is there one-sided braking, insufficient CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE braking force or malfunction of ABS operation? Yes
!
Trouble condition
Yes Major causes

l
Remedy Check HU operation and, if necessary, replace HU. If HU is normal, check structural parts for normal braking.
One-sided braking lnsuff icient braking force Decline in ABS function
0
l l
Hydraulic line in HU is clogged. Mechanical lock of HU solenoid valve Hydraulic line in HU is clogged. Malfunction in HU solenoid valve operation
ABS sometimes functions even when there is no sudden braking. (ABS operation vibration is transmitted.)
Insufficient wheel speed sensor out- Check wheel speed sensor put voltage (sensor malfunction, too (Refer to P.35-60.) and, if neclarge a gap between sensor rotor, essary, replace sensor, adjust missing rotor teeth) gap or replace rotor. Malfunction of ABS ECU If tests indicate that there are no mechanical or electrical failures, replace the ECU.
TSB Revision

1 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS=]
35-29
/ LA
After a test drive, use on-board tic to check (Refer to P.35-39.). 1 t No diagnostic trouble codes out normal codes are displayed? Yes No No No on-board diagnostic output + Check and repair the harness Diagnostic trouble codes are OUtpUt bebeen the ABS ECU serial/ 1 on-board diagnostic output terminals and the diagnosis check connector. Referring to the diagnostic trouble code check chart E-l-E-7, make the diagnostic trouble code reoccur to discover the main cause of intermittent or other trouble.
1
t 1 All ABS functions are normal. (Nor are there stored memory of past diagnostic trouble code.) If trouble does not reappear, watch vehicle movements until it reappears. (Refer to P.35-30.)
Connector terminal No. layout for troubleshooting
Terminal No. layout shown on the special tool connector
Caution 1. When carrying out inspection of the ABS-ECU terminal voltage and resistance, the special tool (MBgg1356) should be used. 2. Because the ABS-ECU connector terminal No. layout for troubleshooting is different from the terminal No. layout shown on the special tool connector, when using the special tool for inspecting, take the readings
from the special tool terminal Nos.
1 OO(802535
Example
ABS-ECU connector terminal No. for troubleshooting 18 Terminal No. shown on the special tool connector 1
TSB Revision
35-30
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting ACTUATOR TEST FUNCTION

The actuator can be forcibly driven in the following way by using the scan tool. NOTE l The actuator test cannot be carried out when the ABS ECU system is in fail safe mode. l When using forced drive using the scan tool, the vehicle must be stopped. l During forced drive using the scan tool, forced drive operation is stopped when any wheel speed reaches 10 km/h (6 mph).
METHOD OF CLEARING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE MEMORY

Caution When servicing is finished, clear the diagl nostic trouble code memory Diagnostic trouble codes cannot be cleared from memory when the ABS-ECU system is in fail safe mode. Proceed to diagnosis and repair. (1) Clear memory using scan tool. (No. 7 DIAG. ERASE in the actuator test is selected to erase the diagnostic trouble code.) (2) After clearing, recheck the diagnostic trouble codes, and check that memory is cleared. Actuator test specifications No.
01
02 04
Scan tool display FR VALVE A FL VALVE A FR VALVE M
Drive solenoid valve and motor Not used
Drive pattern
valve Solenoid and pump motor for each HU carresponding channel. <Manual pattern>
valve solenoid Lfg3J +/-d e c r e a s e I44 rmsf Pump motor
I
3s : 3s IrnS I
05
FL VALVE M
O N
OFF
I Start of forced drive
End of forced drive

214AO588
TSB Revision
35-31
ABS warning light does not light at all.
[Explanation]
When it does not light up at all, there is a strong possibility that there is trouble with ABS warning light or with power to the light. If other. warning lights do not light up either, fuse is probably blown.
IGNITION SWITCH(IG2) FUSIBLE LINK0 IGNI' TIO. N SWITi 3 ( IGl) 3
J/B
t3 2 --_---__- ____. 7 [ 0 - i - - G i i 6
: 2 c5 I I 6 : E2 5 c
0
m d
1234 5678 BE!
i%Efi"" %R RELAY RELAY (KoEgg4) (B%E5LS)
G-R
HU I
w 1_5_?----------~2 I I
II: 8 E Fp;om EL f
: n ,,E 19 -x- COMBINATION METER c9 AL 51 3 : 9
x 5--Y 3_____:
3 7
I 1
I I I I
~ I "
2 i-4 -- ~~ 6--1:11 paq ': :: G
12 3s 17 (1: A 25 * F GND v GND v I J
______.___
> :I
::m I 1
-1
,;;I& [ / Ill
-PP
i
ABS ECU
Y Y
I L 1(x35-AK-R350*-*
TSB Revision
35-32
door-ajar warning light, seat belt warning light) illuminate? Yes
* The harness between the -1
1 Repair harness.
I
t Turn the ignition switch OFF and check. No (Check for burned bulb.) i Yes Is there continuity between combination meter No. 58 and No. 59 terminals? c ABS warning light bulb burned. Faulty combination meter
Repair or replace combination meter.
* Replace ABS warning light bulb. Repair or replace combination meter
1 Yes
Are instrument panel wiring harness and body wiring harness connected properly?
drive circuits. Check both circuits.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Brakina Svstem Troubleshooting

Check ABS ECU. i Remove the ECU connector and check. t Broken wire between ABS warning light and ECU Repair harness.
35-33
, L,
+-- No Does the voltage between ECU harness connector terminal No. 25 and ground indicate battery positive voltage while the ianition kev is in the ON oosition?
ABS ECU malfunction
Replace ABS ECU.
1 Check valve relav. t Remove valve relay and check. i No [ Is valve relay normal? (Refer to P.3583.) I-* 1 Valve relay malfunction 1 Yes Install the valve relay: remove the HU conReplace valve relay. I
Does voltage between the HU harness 1 No connector terminal No. 8 and ground indicate battery positive voltage while the ignition kev is in the ON position? Yes
w 1 Broken harness wire between r 1 Repair harness. ABS warning light and HU
Repair harness. Is there continuity between HU harness connector terminal No. 9 and ground? Yes 1 1 Is there continuitv between HU harness % I1 H U m a l f u n c t i o n - [ I R e p lI a c e H U . connector terminals No. 8 and No. 9? L Connector not connected se- r 1 Replace connector. curely.
1 TSB Revision
35-34
B
ABS warning light stays on when the ignition key is in the ON position. [Hint] Check the on-board diagnostic output and if there is no output voltage or if the scan tool and ABS ECU cannot communicate, there is a good possibility that power is not flowing to the ECU. Caution
l
[Explanation]
This is the symptom when the ABS ECU does not power up due to broken ECU power circuit, etc., when the fail safe function operates and isolates the system or when the warning light drive circuit is short circuited.
If the diagnostic trouble code is output, the

system can be in the fail safe mode. In such a case, erase the diagnostic trouble code and then restart the engine to check if the system is currently in a fault condition.
iYWR"8
IGNIT!OPd SWITCti(IG1)
Is there diagnosis output? (Is there communication with scan tool?) --------------O Yes I Does diagnostic trouble code output display normal codes? iNo Yes
@WIW;NATON 159
bpl
1 No Does the ABS warning light re- ------+ Short in ECU transistor main illuminated even with the ECU connector disconnected? 1 Yes Replace ECU.
__;I I
e5
,,30
1 Does the ABS warning light remain illuminated even with the yiizyzz HU connector disconnected? Yes /I 1 or ECU and ABS warning light
I 87aVALVE RELAY I ___ -_ _____----------1 10 4m9
25 -
KX35-AK-R353-R
TSB Revision

<Models produced up to Oct. 1994>
35-35
KR1
IGNITION SWITCH(iG21
Yes
is fuse No. 3 normal? Yes -TN0 t No Is power relay normal? - Power relay malfunction (Refer to P.3565.) Yes I I Replace power relay. Disconnect ECU connector / and check harness connector 1
ABS-ECU
:B
With the ignition key in the ON position, does voltage between ECU connector terminal No. 18 and ground indicate the battery positive voltage? Yes
Harness wire between power relay and ECU is broken I
/ L
Ti
lx L lx i2 a
Repair harness.
tm GND v v
23 24 a 12a
9 E R
34
i -21 ~~&CToR
4:2 lo:2 *:1 7:' u
t Is there continuity between body harness terminals No. 9 and No. 34, and ground? Yes
t 1213141 5/6~7(*~8/~0/Hj12113~14~15i16117/18
x1 RF ylgg@lgv
Is there continuity between body harness connector terminals No. 23 and No. 24, and diagnosis inspection terminals No. 4 & No. 10 or No. 7 & No. 8? Yes Repair harness. - Replace ABS ECU.
Repair harness.
NOTE r1:1994 moDel5. t2:LJo to 199.2 nwae15
.t Malfunction of ABS ECU
TSB Revision
35-36
<Models produced from Nov. 1994>
IGNITION SWiTCH(IG2) I
JB @
r-T-l
2 a .L
9 1234 d Im 2 5678
,234 5678 El
tion. Repair and recheck.
T @I
Ls:
ABS ECU
V
DIODE
Disconnect ECU connector and check harness connector
18
I
Is there continuity between body harness terminals No. 9 and No. 34, and ground?
Is there continuity between body harness connector terminals No. 23 and No. 24, and diagnosis inspection terminals No. 7 & No. 8? Yes Repair harness. t Malfunction of ABS ECU 1-b Replace ABS ECU.
KX35-AR-R3516-N
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking System -Troubleshooting
35-37
I
/ i Explanation] LJThe ABS ECU uses the IG2 power source which
( C
ABS warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is in the START position.
is turned off in the START position. The ABS warning light uses the lG1 power source which is not turned off even in the START position. Consequently, in the START position, power is off
and the ECU turns the valve relay OFF. If the warning light does not illuminate at this time, there is trouble in the warning light circuit on the valve relay side.
FUS LIN -
IGNIT swm - -
IN 1Gl) -
Remove the No. 3 fuse from the junction box to turn off power to the ABS-ECU. Disconnect the hydraulic unit connector (A-64) and the ABS valve relay connector (A-65). Inspect the harness side of both connectors for damage to the terminal pins. Repair terminal pins as needed.
and ground?
SmJ -L
12. 17 30
7
G-R 11 G-R I--+-8-----1 I

1;
L1:
u I
connector terminal No. 8 and terminal No. 9?
ii
______--_______,
Yes i HU harness malfunction
1 1 Replace valve relay. Replace HU.
ABS ECU
KK35-AK-R3513-N
NOTE When performing the check marked *, note polarity of the diode (refer to the circuit diagram).
TSB Revision
35-38
D
ABS warning light blinks once after the ignition key is turned to the ON position. It illuminates in the START position and blinks once again when turned to the ON position. ,
[Explanation] When power flows, the ABS ECU turns on the warning light for approximately 1 sec. while it performs a valve relay test. If there is a break in the harness between the ECU and the warning light, the light illuminates only when the valve relay is off in the valve relay test, etc.
IGNITION SWITCH(IG1) I
J/B
Disconnect the hydraulic unit connector (A-64) and the ABSECU connector (E-l 2). Inspect the harness side of both connectors for damage to individual terminal pins. Repair terminal pins as needed.
In the ignition key ON position, does voltage between terminal No. 25 and ground indicate battery positive voltage?
fX&NATON
Malfunction of A& ECU
Yes
Repair harness. Replace ABS ECU.
A&3-ECU
I 25
TSB Revision

When using the MUT
35-39
CHECK USING ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC

When using the scan tool [Multi-use tester (MUT) <Up to 1993 models> or MUT-II <All models> (1) With the ignition switch OFF, connect the scan tool. When connecting the scan tool (MUT-II) to a 1993 model vehicle, use the adapter harness supplied together. Caution Turn off the ignition switch beforehand whenever the scan tool is connected or disconnected. Turn the ignition ON and select the ABS system. (The ABS warning light lights up, it goes into the scan tool mode. In the scan tool mode, ABS does not function.) If it does not go into the scan tool mode, check the ECU power circuit and the harness between the ECU and diagnostic output terminals. (2) Read the on-board diagnostic output codes from the ECU memory. (3) Clear the diagnostic trouble codes once from memory. (Refer to P.3512.) If the memory cannot be cleared, the ECU is currently detecting the trouble and the ABS ECU is in fail safe. If it can be cleared, the trouble is either temporary or appears only when driving. (4) When the diagnostic trouble codes cannot be cleared, or when the ABS ECU goes into fail safe during another test drive and diagnostic trouble codes are output, check accordinn to diaanostic trouble code check charts (E-l -E-i).
Whk using t/he MUT-II
harness
Z2OFO159
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
TSB Revision
I 35-40
E-l

When the following diagnostic trouble codes are displayed 11 FL SNSR. OPEN 12 FR SNSR. OPEN 13 RL SNSR. OPEN 14 RR SNSR. OPEN [Hint] #L)
I I
[Explanation]
The ABS ECU detects breaks in the wheel speed sensor wire. This diagnostic trouble code is output if the wheel speed sensor signal is not input (or short circuited) or if its output is low when starting to drive or while driving.
In addition to a broken wire/short circuit in the wheel speed sensor, also check whether the sensor gap is too large, sensor harness wire is broken, or sensor harness and body connector are not properly connetted.
1 E-2
I
When diagnostic trouble code 15 VEH. SPD. SNSR. is displayed
I,
i
I
[Explanation]
This diagnostic trouble code is output when there is an abnormality (other than broken wire or short circuit) in any of the wheel speed sensor output signals while driving.
[Hint]
The following can be considered as the cause of the wheel speed sensor output abnormality. l Distortion of rotor, teeth missing l Low frequency noise interference when sensor harness wire is broken l Noise interference in sensor signal l Sensor output signal is below the standard value or amplitude modulation is overthe standard value. Using an oscilloscope to measure the wave shape of the wheel speed sensor output signal is very effective. l Broken sensor harness
FRONT CLH) FRONT (RH;
0 Poor connection of connector NOTE (1) If contact is poor, check the sensor cable by bending and lightly stretching it. (2) Except for the case where a fault condition exists in the system, but the inspection results are normal; if an abnormality cannot be found in the sensor circuit displayed as abnormal, erase the diagnostic trouble code and turn the ignition switch to OFF once, and then test-drive again. If the same diagnostic trouble code is output, replace the ABS ECU. If the trouble does not occur anymore, the problem is likely to be with the ABS ECU. (If the trouble is in the speed sensor circuit, but is difficult to recreate, it will recur even after the ABS ECU has been replaced.)
SPEED SENSOR REAR (LH) REAR (RH)
-\
12 gcg 12 &?g
NOTE tl:From 1 9 9 4 moWIs. :2:uo t o 1 9 9 3 modles
1 TSB Revision

Check flow connected with speed sensor NOTE Check speed sensor harness and connector connection and then observe with oscilloscope. (Refer to P.3575.)
35-41
L
Is the resistance value of the sensor part normal? Standard value: 0.8-1.2 k~2 Yes Is the resistance value at the ECU tor normal? Standard value: 0.8-1.2 kL2 1 Yes
Malfunction of wheel speed
Harness wire for wheel speed sensor circuit is broken
Repair harness.
i Is the front wheel speed sensor-to-rotor clearance nor- Owl mal? Standard value: 0.3-0.9 mm (.012-.035 in.) Yes
Is the rear speed sensor surface-to-rotor mounting tooth flank (all around) distance normal? Standard value: 28.15-28.45 mm (1.11-1.12 in.) Yes
214NOlW
Yes
Check the output of each wheel speed sensor with an oscilloscope, including the waveform. (Refer to P.3575.) Is the output voltage for each wheel speed sensor over the standard value and is the waveform normal? Yes t 4 mal, there is a malfunction of ABS ECU when this diagnostic trouble code reoccurs often. Replace the ABS ECU and
Yes
1 TSB Revision
35-42
E-3

When diagnostic trouble code 21 G SNSR. is displayed I
[Explanation]
The ABS-ECU outputs this diagnostic trouble code in the following cases. l G sensor OFF trouble (It is judged that the G sensor continues to be OFF for more than approximately 13 seconds except when the
l
vehicle is stopped or when there is stop light switch input.) When there is a broken wire or short circuit in the harness for the G sensor system.
LJ
( iwsgg ) xibE
-IT--
(1995 MODELS) IGNITION SWITCH (:S2) -
Is G sensor normal? (Refer to P.35117.) Yes
Replace G sensor.
-1
~~~~1~
Yes Repair harness. v ABS-ECU malfunction Replace ABS-ECU. I I
iJ
NOTE
fl:FROM 1 9 9 4 M O D E L S Z2:UP T O 1 9 9 3 M O D E L S
TSB Revision

E-4 When diagnostic trouble code 22 STOP LAMP SW is displayed
35-43
( [Explanation] id The ABS-ECU outputs this diagnostic trouble code in the following cases. l Stop light switch remains on for more than 15 minutes while the ABS is not functioning. l The harness wire for the stop light switch may be open. cup to 1994 models> FSiSLE LINKQ
[Hint]
If the stop light operates normal, the harness for the stop light switch input circuit is broken or there is a malfunction in the ABS-ECU.
~1995 models> Hatchback
cl 995 models> Convertible eriy%f
W 1 --m-o ,* m g3 gj
L
T
%d
i?T% G
,,2
If =
ABS ECU ABS ECU
B d 0.8% 1
RESISTOR rfk3 i c) f: 8iiT
x7 Am-EC P 42?A
cm cxo i o_-0 0 34 m, % B J : 8 1
;:;7 cam 29 z n =
NOTE S,:YEH,~L~ w,TH AUTO-CRUISE CjNTROL gYSTEM *B:EH, L 5 Y,THOu? NJro-CRUIS CONTR I. SYSTEM KXW-AK-R5?)00 XX30-AK-R38,7-~
xX55-AX-RWOO-N
00002538
TSB Revision
35-44
Do the stop lights light up and go out normally? Yes Disconnect the ABS-ECU con-
1 When the brake pedal is
No py-------*I Repair harness.
1 Zjrr!$$o~~ZtKYZ$~
I ~ pjii%zq-bl Repair harness.
Yes I
Is resistor resistance 780 to 860 !a? Replace resistor.
Is there continuity 2 terminal and ground? I Yes
Yes
No
) Open circuit in harness between resistor and ground.
Repair harness.
[ Malfunction of ABS-ECU
Replace ABS-ECU.
TSB Revision
35-45
JcrLT
[Explanation]
When diagnostic trouble codes 41 FL SOL. VALVE , 42 FR SOL. VALVE or 43 VALVE DRIFT
The ABS-ECU normally monitors the solenoid valve drive circuit. If no current flows in the solenoid even if the ECU turns the solenoid ON or if it continues to flow even when turned OFF, the ECU determines the solenoid coil wire is broken/short-circuiited or the harness
iGNiTlON SWITCH(IG1)
is broken/short-circuited, and then these diagnostic trouble codes are output. ABS-ECU controls the solenoid valve current and if the current value of the solenoid valves differs from each other in the same mode, solenoid valve drift error is produced and the ABS-ECU goes into the failsafe mode.
In the No solenoid valve within the range / of the standard values?

Standard value: 1.0-1.3 Q Yes
c1 * I Reolace HU.
iLJ
E A HU *
\
!LM;NATON
m 59
I -= 56
tance value within the range of the standard values when measured at the ECU connector?
Standard value: 1.0-1.3 Q Yes
The harness wire for the solenoid valve circuit whose resistance value is outside the range of the standard value is broken or short circuited.
+
,,8 __-_---__- __-, I

I ym;oHI
Repair harness.
f
x1xi _ _ I _-
I -_-__I
Malfunction
of
ABS-ECU
Replace ABS-ECU.
>7 5 3 u :: g OJ % ;7 > -f--J1 pLii$q $ g i*-+ & ABS ECU
c
TSB Revision
35-46
E-6

When diagnostic trouble code 51 VALVE RELAY is displayed
[Explanation]
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ABS ECU switches the valve relay OFF and ON for an initial check, compares the voltage of the signal to the valve relay and valve power monitor line voltage to check whether the valve relay operation is normal. In addition, normally it monitors whether
IGNITION SWITCH (IGil
or not there is power in the valve power monitor line since the valve relay is normally ON. If the supply of power to the valve power monitor line is interrupted, this diagnostic trouble code will be output.
Remove and check the valve relay.
No. 30-No. 87a: Continuity No. 30-No. 87: No continuity

When battery voltage is applied between terminals No. 86 and No. 85. No. 30-No. 87: Continuity No. 30-No. 87a: No continuity Yes i Install the valve relay and remove the HU connector. With the ignition key ON, does the v&age betv\;een the connector terminal No. 52 and around indicate battery positive voltage? Yes
Repair harness.
1 Yes Connect the HU harness and remove the ECU connector.
No Is there continuity between HU - Faulty harness in HU Vo. 8 and No. 7 terminals? 1
Repair harness.
harness side connector termlYes t ABS ECU malfunction
Repair harness. 1-b Replace ABS ECU.
TSB Revision

E-7 / iI [Explanation] The ABS ECU outputs this diagnostic trouble code for the motor relay and motor in the following cases. l When the motor relay does not function l When there is trouble with the motor itself and it does not revolve
l l
35-47
When diagnostic trouble code 52 MOTOR RELAY is displayed When the motor ground is disconnected and the motor does not revolve When the motor continues to revolve
[Hint] If there is motor operation noise durino scan tool forced drive mode; there is a broken or short circuited motor monitor wire.
r Remove the motor relay.

I
Does the motor make a noise -yes during scan tool forced drive mode? !No
1 B$
ii
_Ft:: IM - ------ 2 10 Z 1 10 --------;
Remove the motor relav and No Pw Motor relay malfunction check resistance values. 1 No. 85-No. 86: Resistance value 72-88 SLZ Replace motor relay. No. 30-No. 87: No continuity Battery voltage is applied between terminals No. 85 and No. 86. No. 38-No. 87: Continuity Yes r Is pump motor ground cont netted normally? Connect ground wire.
pFizdqs,O
d ABS-ECU
;j
~
4.
connector terminal 11 and ground indicate battery positive voltaae? I
Broken wire in pump motor power circuit Repair harness.
I
I
Yes
Is resistance between HU con-t H a r n e s s i n H U faulty No nectar terminals No. 1 and No. 10 72-88 Q? i I
Is resistance between body connector terminal No. 2 and No. 26 72-88 !2? Yes 1 Is resistance between body connector terminal No. 5 and around 0.1-0.3 Q? iYes ABS ECU malfunction TSB Revision I-~-- ~~~~
tween HU and ECU Repair harneis.
Replace ABS ECU.
35-48
<From 1996 models> DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW

Gather information from customer Verify complaint
Reoccurs Check diagnostic trouble code (Refer to P.3551.) No diagnostic trouble code or cant communicate with scan tool / Is the basic brake system functioning / normally?
Does not reoccur Check diagnostic trouble cod (Refer to P.35-51.)
Diagnostic trouble code displayed
Diagnostic trouble code displayed
Nodiagnostic trouble code
I 1 Recheck diagnostic trouble code(s) then erase (Refer to P.35-51.)
es
t
Recheck trouble symptom
Check diagnostic trouble codes Diagnostic trouble

t
No diagnostic trouble code
lnspectionchartfortroublesymptoms (Refer to P.35-58.)
lnspectionchartfordiagnosttctroubie codes (Refer to P.35.51.)
f -
Intermittent malfunction (Refer to INTRODUCTION AND MASTER TROUBLESHOOTING P.OO-10.)
NOTES WITH REGARD TO DIAGNOSIS

The condition listed in the following table are considered normal. Condition System check sound Explanation of condition When starting the engine, a thudding sound can sometimes be heard coming from inside the engine compartment, but this is because the system operation check is being performed. This is considered normal. 1. 2. 3. I ABS operation (Long braking distance) Sound of the motor inside the ABS hydraulic unit (HU) operating (whine) Sound is generated along with vibration of the brake pedal (scraping) When ABS operates, sound is generated from the vehicle chassis due to repeated brake application and release. (Thump: suspension; squeak: tires)
ABS operation sound
For road surfaces such as snow-covered roads and gravel roads, the braking distance for vehicles with ABS can sometimes be longer than that for other vehicles. Accordingly, advise the customer to drive safely on such roads by lowering the vehicle speed and not being overconfident.
Diagnosis detection condition can vary depending on the diagnostic trouble code. When checking to see if the trouble symptom reoccurs after the diagnostic trouble code has been erased, check the memorize timing column in the inspection chart for diagnostic trouble codes (refer to P.3551) and the memorize conditions recorded in the Comments column of the inspection procedure chart for diagnostic trouble codes in order to carry out testing under driving conditions which satisfy each of the given conditions.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
35-49
ytoo
22OFO164
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES CHECK With the Scan Tool Connect the scan tool to the data link connector, then check diagnostic trouble codes. Caution Always turn the ignition switch to connect or disconnect the scan tool. NOTE Diagnostic trouble code No. 16 can be output when the ABS system fails because of a battery surge.
With 3he ABS Warning Light (1) Use the special tool (diagnostic trouble code check harness) to ground the terminal (1) of the data link connector. (2) Take a reading of the diagnostic trouble code from the flashing of the ABS warning light.
0.5 second: 1.5 0.5 seconds-~-j-f- seconds lluminated Switch OFF 1 Pause One-digit Ten-digit Digit time: signal signal section: 3 seconds 2 seconds 14N0173 No diagnostic trouble code is output I I Diagnostic trouble code No. 24 is output
Al4FOl66
0.5 seconds
14NO174
NOTE (1) Other diagnostic trouble codes also are output as the same code numbers as when using the scan tool. (2) Diagnostic trouble code No. 16 can be output when the ABS system fails because of a battery surge.
TSB Revision
35-50
ERASING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES With the Scan Tool Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (l&pin), then erase the diagnostic trouble codes. With the ABS Warning Light When the ignition switch is turned on while the stop light switch is on, the stop light switch will operate 10 times in succession according to the timing given below. Caution The memory cannot be erased under the following conditions. (1) When the stop light switch is not turned on and off according to the table below. (2) When the generator L terminal voltage increased (HI state).
Ignition switch ON OFF I I I I I I I I Warning light ON OFF 1 second ABS-ECU memory I Eliminated
14x0229
Generator HI L terminal LOW voltage ON
Within 3seconds
Within Within Within lsecond 1 second 1 second
Within 1 second
Stop light switch
OFF ----j 1st 2nd 3rd
A-p-~----~ -I 4th 9th 10th I I
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking System Troubleshooting INSPECTION CHART FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
Code No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 21 22 23 24 26 38 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 51 53 63 Diagnostic Item F.R. wheel speed sensor system (open-circuited) F.L. wheel speed sensor system (open-circuited) RR. wheel speed sensor system (open-circuited) R.L. wheel speed sensor system (open-circuited) Wheel speed sensor system (output signal abnormal) ABS-ECU power supply system (voltage abnormally low or high) F.R. wheel speed sensor system (shorted) F.L. wheel speed sensor system (shorted) R.R. wheel speed sensor system (shorted) R.L. wheel speed sensor system (shorted) G-sensor system (open- or short-circuited or signal provided abnormally) Stop light switch system (open-circuited or ON trouble) F.R. solenoid valve IN system F.L. solenoid valve IN system R.R. solenoid valve IN system R.L. solenoid valve IN system F.R. solenoid valve OUT system F.L. solenoid valve OUT system R.R. solenoid valve OUT system R.L. solenoid valve OUT system ABS valve relay system HU pump motor or ABS motor relay system ABS-ECU system
35-51
Reference Page 35-52 35-52 35-52 35-52 35-52 35-53 35-53 35-53 35-53 35-53 35-54 35-54 35-55 35-55 35-55 35-55 35-55 35-55 35-55 35-55 35-56 35-57 ABS-ECU replacement
1 TSB Revision
35-52
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Brakina Svstem Troubleshooting
INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

Code Nos. 11, 12, 13, 14 Wheel speed sensor system (open-circuited) .
Output is provided when signal is not input due to breakage of the (+) or (-) wire of one or more of the four wheel speed sensors.
Probable cauSe
l l l
Wheel speed sensor defective Harness and connector defective ABS-ECU defective
* Repair tion.
E-i 2. Disconnect connectors and make measurements on harness side. l Resistance between 74-75, 69-70, 71-72, 73-46 OK: 0.8 - 1.2 kR
l
/A-29, A-12, E-l!
Check wheel speed sensor output voltage.
ol
t
1 / Check trouble symptoms. wheel speed sensor and ABS-ECU,
Check wheel speed sensor. IOK
Replace wheel speed sensor.
Check the following connector +y Repair 1 C h e c k r o t o r . loK ILeI
Replace rotor.
Check trouble symptoms.. NG + Replace ABS-ECU.
Check wheel bearing.
Code No. 15 Wheel speed sensor system (output signal abnormal)

Output is provided when output signal produced by any of wheel speed sensors is abnormal (excluding short- and open-circuits). (Improper number of rotor teeth or the like)
Probable cause
Wheel speed sensor installation defective Wheel speed sensor defective o Harness and connector defective l Rotor defective l Wheel bearing defective l ABS-ECU defective
l l
NG OK
c Repair
1 Check trouble syrir:oCms. OK Replace ABS-ECU. Check harness between each wheel
1 TSB Revision

Code No. 16 ABS-ECU power supply system (voltage Probab,e cauSe abnormally low or high)
Output is provided when ABS-ECU power supply voltage drops below or rises above if power supply voltage returns to normal
l l
35-53
Harness and connector defective ABS-ECU defective
Caution If battery voltage drops or rises while making this check, this code is output as an existing trouble, making it impossible to perform correct trouble diagnosis. Before carrying out the following check, be sure to check the battery for conditions and charge it if necessary.
Start engine. Measure voltage between terminal No. 83 and body ground. OK: Batterv voltaae Repair Check battery. lnu
Check harness between ignition
Code Nos. 21,22,23 and 24 Wheel speed sensor system Probab,e cauSe (shorted)
Output is provided in the following case. I is received by one or more of the four wheel speed sensors at a vehicle speed of 10 km/h (6 mph) or more.
l l l l l l
Wheel speed sensor defective Harness and connectors defective Rotor defective Excessive clearance between sensor and rotor ABS-ECU defective Wheel bearing defective
-1 NG Check wheel speed sensor installation. I IOK
------+ Repair
~~-~-- Repair
Check the following connectors. NG Check harness betweeneach wheel - Check wheel speed sensor. Replace wheel speed sensor.
Replace rotor.
Check wheel bearing.
Replace ABS-ECU. /
TSB Revision
35-54

Probab,e cauSe
l l l
Code No. 26 G-sensor system (open-, short-circuited or signal abnormal)

Output is provided in the following cases. l G-sensor output drops below 0.W or rises above 4.W l G-sensor svstem harness is broken or shorted
G-sensor defective Harness and connector defective ABS-ECU defective
Check G-sensor. (Refer to P.35117.) OK t ,NG Measure at ABS-ECU connector E-12. l Disconnect connectors and make measurements on harness side. l Ignition switch: ON l Voltage between No. 62 and 45 OK: 2.3 - 2.7 V OK
Replace G-sensor.
--t Check the following connector. D-27 OK / Check trouble svmptoms. NG
NG
+ Repair
Check harness between G-sensor and ABS-ECU. and repair if necessarv. Check the following 1OK r Check trouble symptoms. Replace ABS-ECU. NG * Repair
Code No. 38 Stop light switch system (open-circuited or ON trouble) ,

Output is provided in the following cases. Stop light switch is in trouble and remains in ON state for more than 15 minutes. l l Stop light switch system harness is broken and no signal is input to ABS-ECU.
Probab,e cauSe
l l l
Stop light switch defective Harness and connector defective ABS-ECU defective c Repair
or distinguish stop light. OK
-1NG Check stop light switch installation. 1 lOK Check stop light switch.
Replace stop light switch.
E-12. Disconnect connectors and make measurements on harness side. l Stop light switch ON l Voltage between terminal No. 36 and body ground OK: Battery voltage
l
iOK
1
Check the following connector. E-12 OK Check trouble symptoms.
NG
B- Repair
Replace ABS-ECU.
TSB Revision

Code Nos. 41,42,43,44,45,46,47 and 48 Solenoid valve systems Probab,e cauSe
HU defective Harness, connector defective * ABS-ECU defective
l l
ABS-ECU monitors solenoid valve drive circuit at all times. When solenoid is not energized with solenoid valve turned ON by ABS-ECU or when it is kept energized with solenoid valve turned OFF by ABS-ECU, solenoid coil is judged to be openor short-circuited or harness is judged to be broken or shorted and output is provided. Replace HU.
Check solenoid valve. (Refer to P.35-112.) IOK
-I UG vleasure at HU connector A-64 and p Check th A-64, E-12, C-32 jBS-ECU connector E-l 2. ) Disconnect connectors and IOK make measurements on hart ness side ) Continuitybetween the following terminals OK: Continuity ABS-ECU side HU side 78 3 50 7 31 4 59 8
NG
* Repair
NG
* Check harness between HU and ABS-ECU, and repair if necessary.
: 2 6
30 58 79 51 OK NG * Repair
Check the following connector. E-12 lOK 1 Check trouble symptoms.
Replace ABS-ECU.
1 TSB Revision
35-56

Probable cause
l l l l
Code No. 51 ABS valve relay system

ABS-ECU monitors solenoid valve drive circuit at all times. When 5 or more solenoids are not energized with solenoid valve turned ON by ABS-ECU or when 5 or more solenoids are kept energized with solenoid valve turned OFF by ABS-ECU, ABS valve is judged to be in trouble and output is provided.
ABS valve relay defective Harness, connector defective HU defective ABS-ECU defective
Check ABS valve relay. (Refer to P.35-83.)
Replace ABS valve relay.
r Measure
at ABS valve relay connector A-80. l Disconnect connectors and make measurements on harness side. l Voltage between terminal No. 5 and body ground OK: Battery voltage AOK
Check harness between ABS valve
NG Measure at ABS-ECU connector Ii NG E-12. [ c-94, A-80 - l Disconnect connectors and 1OK make measurements on harNG ness side. l Resistance between 82-47
* Repair
L Check harness between ABS valve
Check solenoid valve. (Refer to P.35-112.) AOK
Replace HU.
Measure at HU connector A-64 and Check the following connectors. iBS-ECU connector E-l 2. -7-i A-64, Er] NG 1 Disconnect connectors and make measurements on harness side. 1 Continuity between the following terminals OK: Continuity provided HU side ABS-ECU side 78 3 50 7 31 4 59 8 30 1 58 5 79 2 51 6 OK NG NG * Check the following connectors. Measure at HU connector A-65 and A-65, A-80 ABS valve relay connector A-80. l Disconnect connectors and /AK make measurements on har- 1 ness side. l Continuitybetween thefollowing &^-:^^I^ ,Ollllllld,S OK: Continuity provided HU side ABS valve relay side ) 1 2 - 4 OK NG b Repair E-12 / 1 lOK
* Repair
Check harness between HU and ABS-ECU, and repair if necessary.
* Repair
Check harness between HU and ABS valve relay, and repair if necessary.
Check trouble symptoms.
Replace A&-ECU.
1 TSB Revision

1 Code No. 53 HU pump motor or ABS motor relav svstem / Probable cause
l l l l
35-57
I
Output is provided in the following cases. No signal is received by motor monitor line with ABS motor relay turned ON. l (HU pump motor does not run.) Signal is received by motor monitor line for 5 seconds or more with ABS motor l relay turned OFF. (HU pump motor continues to run.) l ABS motor relay does not operate.
ABS motor relay defective. Harness, connector defective HU defective ABS-ECU defective
Caution Driving HU pump motor for actuator test discharges the battery. After the test, therefore, start the engine and keep it running for a while.
Scan tool actuator test Is sound of HU pump motor running is heard? Check harness between HU and ABS-ECU, and
Check ABS motor relay. (Refer to i?35-83.)
Check harness between main fusible link No. ? and ABS motor relay, and repair if necessary.
NG NG -1-1 Check the following] I I Disconnect connectors and make measurel OK ments on harness side. Resistance between termianl No. 82 and 77. l Check trouble symptoms. OK: 78 - 88 i-2 . .I
I N(i
4 OK
C Repair
Check harness between ABS motor relay and ABS-ECU, and repair if necessarv
id
I
t ------I
/ Disconnect connectors and make measurel ments on harness side. l Resistance between terminal No. 65 and body ground OK: 0.1-0.3 R OK
NG
--c
l l
Check harness between HU and ABS-ECU, and repair if necessary. Check and repair HU pump motor ground.
Check HU pump motor operation. (Refer to P.35-112.) OK
y-1Replace HU
/ Check the following connector. E-12-l I OK Check trouble symptoms.
NG
* Repair
Replace ABS-ECU.
TSB Revision
35-58
SERVICE BRAKES - Anti-lock Braking Svstem Troubleshootina
INSPECTION CHART FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS
Caution 1. Under certain driving conditions such as going on a low p road surface, high speed turning and passing over projection, ABS may operate even if no sudden brake is applied. When making diagnosis by questioning the user, therefore, be sure to check if the trouble occurred under such driving conditions. 2. When ABS is in operation, changes are caused in a feeling of the brake pedal (pedal vibration and inapplicable brake pedal). This is due to intermittent changes of fluid pressure inside the brake line in order to prevent the wheels from locking. There is nothing abnormal.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS

Inspection Procedure 1 No communication is possible between scan tool and any / ,+.cbable cauSe of control systems.
The power circuit and ground circuit of data link connector are probably defective.
l l
Data link connector defective Harness defective NG c Repair
~t NG Measure at data link connector C-79. l Voltage between terminal 16 and ground OK: Battery voltage
j Check the following con OK Check trouble symptoms. NG Check harness between power supply and data link connector, and repair if necessary.
Check the following

l
NG OK
b Repair
Continuity between terminal 5 and ground
Check trouble symptoms. ~NG

I
Replace scan tool.
Check and correct harness between data link connector and ground, and repair if necessary.
1 TSB Revision

Inspection Procedure 2 : No communication is possible between scan tool and ABS-ECU.
output circuit is probably open-circuited.
Pr,,bab,e =auSe
l l l
Fuse blown Harness, connector defective ABS-ECU defective * Repair
Measure at data Iinkconnector C-79 and ABS-ECU E-12. l Disconnect connectors and make measurements on harness side.
l Continuity between the following
\lG NG --I Check the followina connector. 1
WNG
Confirm trouble symptoms. i
- Check harness between ABS-ECU
terminals OK: Continuity ABS-ECU side 68 38 -
provided Data link connector side 1 7 OK
Measure at ABS-ECU connectr E-12. l Disconnect connectors and make measurement on harness side. l Ignition switch: ON l Voltage between terminal No. 83 and ground OK: Battery voltage jOK
I
*-----1 Check the f-1 N G

1/ C-32, C-69, C-8io;
, NG
Check trouble symptoms.
* Repair
Measure at ABS-EC- h Repair E-12. l Disconnect connectors and make measurements on harness side. l Continuity between terminal No. 55, 56 and ground OK: Continuity provided e+------+ Repair the following connector. Check
1Replace ABS-ECU.
1 TSB Revision
35-60
Inspection Procedure 3 ABS warning light is not lighted with the ignition key Probablecause turned ON (stationary engine).
Probably light power supply circuit is open-circuited, light bulb has burned out or circuit between warning light and ABS-ECU is open-circuited.
l l l
Fuse blown ABS warning light bulb burned out. Harness, connector defective
NG IOK
Refer to check procedure for blown fuse.
+
Measure at connector D-16. l Disconnect connectors and make measurements on female connector. l Ignition switch: ON l State of warning light when terminal No. 6 grounded OK: Light comes on. OK
I--
NG
- Check that bulb has not burned out. OK NG D-l 6, D-04, D-44, C-71, C-82 OK Check trouble symptoms.
Replace ABS warning light bulb. * Repair
Replace combination meter.
~ ~~re;~e~ness between ABS-ECU 1 and connector D-16 and repair if
Inspection procedure 4 ABS warning light does not go out after turning ON of the ignition switch.
ABS warning light lighting circuit is probably short-circuited.
Probable cauSe
l l l
Combination meter defective ABS-ECU defective Harness defective (shorted)
NOTE This trouble symptom is limited to the case where communication with scan tool is possible (ABS-ECU power supply is normal) and diagnostic code is normal code.
Disconnect D-16 connectors. Is ABS warning light lighted with the ianition switch turned ON? NO Disconnect ABS-ECU connector E-12. l Ignition switch: ON l Does ABS warning light go out? NO Check harness between combination meter and ABS-ECU, and repair if necessary. YES - Replace ABS-ECU. Replace combination meter.
TSB Revision

inspection Procedure 5 Brakes operate abnormally,.
Troubles are hard to be judged since they differ according to the driving conditions and the state of road surface, when the diagnostic trouble code is normal code, perform the following check.
35-61
Probable cause
l l l l l l l l
Wheel speed sensor installation defective Harness, connector defective Wheel speed sensor defective Rotor defective Wheel speed sensor having foreign matter deposited on it. Wheel bearing defective HU defective ABS-ECU defective
Check wheel speed sensor installation.
NG
- Repair
Check HU. (Refer to P.35-76.)
* Check wheel speed sensor. 1OK 1 Check rotor. OK Check wheel bearing. iOK 1 A-29, A-12, E-19, E-16, C-33 OK Check trouble symptoms. ~NG Measure at ABS-ECU connector E-12. l Disconnect connectors and make measurements on harness side. l Resistance between 74-75, 69-70, 71-72, 73-46 OK: 0.8-1.2 R Be sure to perform checks while moving the sensor harness and connectors. I OK Check the following connector. E-12 OK Check trouble symptoms. 1 NG NG NG
Replace wheel speed sensor. Replace rotor. * Repair * Repair
* Repair
NG
c Repair
NG I* Replace ABS-ECU.
TSB Revision
35-62
SERVICE DATA CHART

Of all ECU input data, the following items can be read by the scan tool. Check Item F.R. sensor
F.L. sensor
Checking Condition Perform actual running.
Criterion for normality Agreement of speedometer reading with scan tool display
-sensor ou
38
ACTUATOR TEST CHART

The following actuators can be force-driven by use of the scan tool. NOTE (1) Actuator test cannot be made when ABS-ECU is not functioning. (2) Actuator test can be carried out only when the vehicle is not running. If the vehicle speed reaches 10 km/h (6 mph) while the actuator is force-driven, force driving is discontinued. ACTUATOR TEST SPECIFICATIONS
Drive Pattern
Pressure increase Solenoid valve Pressure holding Pressure decrease I 40-45 mkeci ~, 78 f Pump motor j mkec.
Start of fbrced drive
End of forced drive
14co113
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - On-vehicle Service
35-63
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE i
Operatin rod Operat rod lot
BRAKE PEDAL CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT 1. Turn off the carpet etc. at under the brake pedal. 2. Measure the brake pedal height as illustrated. If the brake pedal height is not within the standard value, adjust as follows. Standard value (A): 177-182 mm (7.0-7.2 in.) (1) Disconnect the stop light switch connector, loosen the lock nut, and move the stop light switch to a position where it does not contact the brake pedal arm. (2) Adjust the brake pedal height by turning the operating rod with pliers (with the operating rod lock nut loosened), until the correct brake pedal height is obtained. (3) Screw in the stop light switch until it contacts the brake pedal stopper (just before the brake pedal is caused to move). Back off the stop light switch l/2 to 1 turn and secure by tightening the lock nut. (4) Connect the connector of the stop light switch. (5) Check to be sure that the stop light is not illuminated with the brake pedal released. Reference value (B): OS-l.0 mm (.02-.04 in.) (6) On vehicles with automatic transaxle, check the shift-lock mechanism. (Refer to GROUP 23 Transaxle Control.) 3. Return the carpet etc. to the original position.
.._
214F5lf
Lock nut
214FOO7
BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY 1. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal two or three times. After eliminating the vacuum in the power brake booster, press the pedal down by hand, and confirm that the amount of movement before feeling resistance is met (the free play) is within the standard value range. Standard value (C): 3-8 mm (.l-.3 in.) 2. If the free play is less than the standard value, confirm that the clearance between the stop light switch and brake pedal is within the standard value. If the free play exceeds the standard value, it is probably due to excessive play between the clevis pin and brake pedal arm. Check for excessive clearance and replace faulty parts as required.
1 TSB Revision

CLEARANCE BETWEEN ;RAKE PEDAL AND FLOOR BOARD
ZF1451!
1. Turn off the carpet etc. at under the brake pedal. 2. Start the engine, depress the brake pedal with approximately 500 N (110 Ibs.) of force, and measure the clearance between the brake pedal and the floorboard. Standard value (D): 80 mm (3.1 in.) or more 3. If the clearance is less than the standard value, check for air trapped in the brake line and for brake fluid leaks. If necessary, check the brake system mechanism (excessive shoe clearance due to faulty auto adjuster) and repair faulty parts as required. 4. Return the carpet etc. to the original position.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR CHECK

1. Connect a circuit tester to the brake .fluid level sensor. 2. Move the float from top to bottom and check for continuity. 3. The brake fluid level sensor is in good condition if there is no continuity when the float surface is above A, and if there is continuity when the float surface is below A.
Good
When engine is stopped
T li A
z14uoo59
0v I
When engine is started
214UOO60 00002125
0v \
No good
BRAKE BOOSTER OPERATING CHECK

For simple checking of brake booster operation, carry out the following tests. 1. Run the engine for one or two minutes, and then turn the engine off. 2. Step on the brake pedal several times with normal pressure. If the pedal depresses fully the first time but gradually becomes higher when depressed succeeding times, the booster is operating properly. If the pedal height remains unchanged, the booster is faulty. 3. With the engine stopped, step on the brake pedal several times with the same pressure to make sure that the pedal height will not change. Then step on the brake pedal and start the engine. If the pedal moves downward slightly, the booster is in good condition. If there is no change, the booster is faulty. 4. With the engine running, step on the brake pedal and then stop the engine. Hold the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. If the pedal height does not change, the booster is in good condition. If the pedal rises, the booster is defective. Brake booster performance is satisfactory if it passes all three operating tests. If the brake booster does not pass all three tests, there may be a fault in the check valve, vacuum hose or in the booster itself.
214110062 00002124
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - On-vehicle Service CHECK VALVE OPERATION CHECK
35-65
When checking the check valve, keep the check valve fit in the vacuum hose. 1. Remove the vacuum hose. Caution The check valve is press-fit inside the vacuum hose and do not remove the check valve from the vacuum hose. 2.
Valve Spring
Check the operation of the check valve by using a vacuum pump.
1 Vacuum pump connection 1Accept/reject criteria Connection at the brake A negative pressure (vacuum) is booster side (1) created and held. I Connection at the intake A negative pressure (vacuum) is not manifold side (2) created. Caution If the check valve is defective, replace it as an assembly unit together with the vacuum hose.
,
Pressure
PROPORTIONING VALVE FUNCTION TEST

1. Connect two pressure gauges, one each to the input side and output side of the proportioning valve, as shown. 2. Air bleed the brake line and the pressure gauge. 3. While gradually depressing the brake pedal, make the following measurements and check to be sure that the measured values are within the allowable range.
Proportioning valve Z,4L0,8,
output pressure
bYi3
Split point , I I , , , ,,11 , , I Input pressure
71411nn55
(1) Output pressure begins to drop relative to input pressure (split point). Standard value: 4.85-5.45 MPa (704-775 psi) Convertible Hatchback 3.75-4.25 MPa (533-604 psi) (2) Output fluid pressure when input fluid pressure is 10 MPa (1,422 psi) Standard value: Convertible 6.72-7.52 MPa (856-1,070 psi) 5.82-6.62 MPa (828-842 psi) Hatchback (3) Output pressure difference between left and right brake lines Limit: 0.4 MPa (57 psi) If the measured pressures are not within allowable ranges, replace the proportioning valve.
4.
1 TSB Revision
35-66
SERVICE BRAKES - On-vehicle Service BLEEDING

Caution Use the specified brake fluid. Dont use a mixture of the specified brake fluid and another non-specified fluid. Specified brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT 4
BLEEDING THE MASTER CYLINDER If the master cylinder is empty of brake fluid, bleed the cylinder as follows. (1) Fill the reserve tank with brake fluid. (2) Depress and hold the brake pedal. (3) Let your fellow worker plug the master cylinder outlet with finger. (4) Keeping the condition (3), release the brake pedal. (5) Repeat steps (2) to (4) three to four times while filling the master cylinder with brake fluid.
214P0030
1 0 /I
1
Z14AO4&
BLEEDING THE BRAKE LINE Start the engine and bleed the air in the sequence shown in the figure. Caution For vehicles with ABS, be sure to filter/strain the brake fluid being added to the master cylinder reservoir tank. Debris may damage the HU.
When new
When worn
FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD CHECK AND REPLACEMENT

NOTE The brake pads have wear indicators that contact the brake disc when the brake pad thickness becomes 2 mm (.079 in.). The wear indicators emit a squealing sound to warn the driver to have the pads replaced and to have the brake system checked.
Wear indicator
\ Brake .
214G0017
Wear 1 indicator
--ke disr -.A
Zl4F0040 0002126
TSB Revision

r
35-67
=%??/32i
i
1
214LO289
cFWD> 1. Visually check the brake pad thickness through the inspection hole in the caliper body. Standard value: 10.0 mm (.39 in.) Limit: 2.0 mm (.08 in.) Caution 1. Replace the pad if worn beyond the limit. At this time, replace the pads on right and left wheels as a set. 2. If there is a large difference in thickness between the pads on the right and left wheels, check the sliding portions of the caliper. 2. Remove the guide pin, lift caliper assembly, slide the assembly toward the inside of the wheel well until separated from the lock pin. Support it with a wire, etc. Caution The guide pin has been coated with special grease. Do not wipe off the special grease on the lock pin, and do not contaminate the lock pin.
c, C Ia-1 ,. \ .a
4 3
214L0297
3. Remove the following parts from the caliper support. (1) Pad and wear indicator assembly (2) Pad assembly (3) Clip (4) Outer shim
Using the following method, measure the drag force of the disc brake after installation of the brake assembly. 4. With the brake assembly removed, use a spring scale to measure the rotary sliding resistance of the hub in the forward direction. 5. Install the pad clips to the caliper support in position.
214AO400
6. Clean the piston and, using the special tool, push the piston into the cylinder (caliper). 7. With care not to allow the piston boot to be wedged, lower the caliper assembly and fit the lock pin. 8. Start the engine, depress the brake pedal firmly two to three times and stop the engine. 9. Give the brake disc ten turns in the forward direction.
TSB Revision
35-68
10. Using a spring scale, measure the rotary sliding resistance of the hub in the forward direction. 11. Obtain the drag force of the disc brake (the difference between the values measured in 10 and 4). Standard value: 70 N (15.4 Ibs.) or less 12. If the drag force of the brake exceeds the standard value, disassemble the piston and check for dirty or corroded piston sliding surface and deteriorated piston seal.
I
214A0399 I
cAWD> 1. Visually check the brake pad thickness. Through the opening in the caliper body. Standard value: 10.0 mm (.39 in.) Limit: 2.0 mm (.08 in.) Caution 1. Replace the pad if worn beyond the limit. At this time, replace the pads on right and left wheels as a set. 2. If there is a large difference in thickness between the pads on the right and left wheels, check the sliding portions of the caliper. Remove the clip and, holding the cross spring with hand, remove the pad pins.
Pad pin
Z14FOO37
2.
-irgLJ-jc,Uj (1.Bl,i\!tb7,\/ - -2. !I i\ F, 1 I r_li1 Ifi

L--W $==+) 214FOOZl
214FOO22
3. Using a screwdriver, remove the pads and shims. (1) Inner pad (with wear indicator) (2) Outer pad (3) Shim B (4) Shim A
/ TSB Revision
35-69
Using the following method, measure the drag force of the disc brake after installation of the brake assembly. 4. With the brake assembly removed, use a spring scale to measure the rotary sliding resistance of the hub in the forward direction.
5. Clean the piston and then using the special tool, push the piston into the cylinder (caliper).
Pad assembly Shim A Shim B
6.
Apply repair kit grease to both sides of the inner shims.
Shim B Grease Grease
Shim A
214FOO9t
Specified grease: Brake grease SAE 5310, NLGI No. 1 Caution 1. Make sure that the friction surfaces of pads and brake discs are free of grease and other contaminants. 2. The grease should never squeeze out from around the shim. 7. Start the engine, depress the brake pedal firmly two to three times and stop the engine. 8. Give the brake disc ten turns in the forward direction.
9.
Using a spring scale, measure the rotary sliding resistance of the hub in the forward direction. 10. Obtain the drag force of the disc brake (the difference between the values measured in 9 and 4). Standard value: 70 N (15.4 Ibs.) or less 11. If the drag force of the brake exceeds the standard value, disassemble the piston and check for dirty or corroded piston sliding surface and deteriorated piston seal.
TSB Revision
35-70
SERVICE BRAKES - On-vehicle Service FRONT BRAKE DISC THICKNESS CHECK

Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at eight positions, approximately 45 apart and 10 mm (.39 in.) in from the outer edge of the disc. Standard value: cFWD> 24.0 mm (94 in.) cAWD> 30.0 mm (1.18 in.) Limit: cFWD> 22.4 mm (.88 in.) cAWD> 28.4 mm (1.12 in.) Thickness variation (At least 8 positions) The difference between any thickness measurement should not be more than .015 mm (.OOOS in.). 2. If the disc is beyond the limits for thickness, remove it and install a new one. If thickness variation exceeds the specification, replace the disc or turn rotor on the car type brake lathe (MAD, DLl-8700PF or equivalent). Be sure to follow the exact brake lathe manufacturer instructions. 1.
Z14N0178
FRONT BRAKE DISC RUN-OUT CHECK

1. Remove the front brake assembly; and support it with a wire, etc. 2. Inspect the disc surface for grooves, cracks and rust. Clean the disc thoroughly and remove all rust.
214FOO43
3.
Place a dial gauge approximately 5 mm (.2 in.) from the outer circumference of the brake disc, and measure the run-out of the disc. Limit: cFWD> 0.07 mm (.0028 in.) or less cAWD> 0.10 mm (.004 in.) or less NOTE Secure the disc to the hub with wheel nuts.
FRONT BRAKE DISC RUN-OUT CORRECTION

1. If the run-out of the brake disc is equivalent to or exceeds the limit specification, change the phase of the disc and hub, and then measure the run-out again. (1) Before removing the brake disc, chalk both sides of the wheel stud on the side at which run-out is greatest.
Chalk mark
Z14A0398
TSB Revision
35-71
(2) Remove the brake disc, and then place a dial gauge as shown in the illustration; then move the hub in the axial direction and measure the play. Limit: 0.05 mm (.002 in.) If the play is equivalent to or exceeds the limit, replace the front hub unit bearing.
Z14FGO34
Z14AO407
(3) If the play does not exceed the limit specification, and then check the run-out of the brake disc once again. Mount the brake disc on the position dislocated from the chalk mark. 2. If the run-out cannot be corrected by changing the phase of the brake disc, replace the disc or turn rotor on the car type brake lathe (MAD, DL-8700PF or equivalent). Be sure to follow the exact brake lathe manufacturer instructions. Rotors turned on the vehicle will often have a lower run-out than a new brake disc.
REAR DISC BRAKE PAD CHECK AND REPLACEMENT

1. Check brake pad thickness through caliper body check port. Standard value: 10.0 mm (.39 in.) Limit: 2.0 mm (-08 in.) Caution 1. When the limit is exceeded, the brake pads on both the left and right wheels must be replaced as a set. 2. If there is a large difference in thickness between the pads on the right and left wheels, check the sliding portions of the caliper. 2. Loosen the parking brake cable (from the vehicle interior), and disconnect the parking brake end installed on the rear brake assembly. cFWD (All models), AWD (Up to 1993 models)> 3. Remove lock pin. Lift caliper assembly, slide the assembly toward the inside of the wheel well until separated from the lock pin. Support it with wires. Caution Do not wipe off special grease on lock pin or do not make it ditty. cAWD (From 1994 models)> 3. Remove the clip and pull out the pad pin while holding the cross spring by hand.
L14F0126
TSB Revision
35-72

4. Remove the following parts from caliper support, (1) Outer shim (2) Pad assembly (3) Pad & wear indicator assembly (4) Clip (5) Inner shim A (6) Inner shim B (7) Outer shim A (8) Outer shim B
<FWD>
<AWU>
(Up to 1993 models)
<AWD> (From 1994 models) c
4
14N0137
$y2fJg!&y 8 7
4
5 6
14FO153
v.LLM
14FOl48
0000215~
Using the following method, measure the drag force of the disc brake after installation of the brake assembly. 5. With the brake assembly removed, use a spring scale to measure the rotary sliding resistance of the hub in the forward direction. Disengage the drive shaft and companion flange. NOTE Secure the disc to the hub with wheel nuts. 6. Securely attach the pad clip to the caliper support. Caution Do not deposit grease or other dirt on pad or brake disc friction surfaces. 7. Clean the piston and then using the special tool, push the piston into the cylinder (caliper). 8. cFWD (All models), AWD (Up to 1993 models)> With care not to allow the piston boot to be wedged, lower the caliper assembly and fit the lock pin. 9. Start the engine, depress the brake pedal firmly two to three times and stop the engine. 10. Give the brake disc ten turns in the forward direction.
214NOO32 1 Z14FO129 000021523
11. Using a spring scale, measure the rotary sliding resistance of the hub in the forward direction. 12. Obtain the drag force of the disc brake (the difference between the values measured in 11 and 5). Standard value: 70 N (15.4 Ibs.) or less 13. If the drag force of the brake exceeds the standard value, disassemble the piston and check for dirty or corroded piston sliding surface and deteriorated piston seal.
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - On-vehicle Service REAR BRAKE DISC THICKNESS CHECK
35-73
If
214NO178
1. Remove dirt and rust from brake disc surface. 2. Measure disc thickness at 4 locations or more. Standard value: cFWD> 18.0 mm (.71 in.) <AWD> 20.0 mm (.79 in.) Limit: cFWD> 16.4 mm (.65 in.) cAWD> 18.4 mm (.72 in.) Replace the discs and pad assembly for both sides left and right of the vehicle if they are worn beyond the specified limit.
REAR BRAKE DISC RUN-OUT CHECK

1. Remove the rear brake assembly, and support it by a wire, etc.
2.
Place a dial gauge approximately 5 mm (.2 in.) from the outer circumference of the brake disc, and measure the run-out of the disc. Limit: 0.08 mm (.0031 in.) or less NOTE Tighten nuts to secure the disc to the hub.
REAR BRAKE DISC RUN-OUT CORRECTION

1. If the run-out of the brake disc is equivalent to or exceeds the limit specification, change the phase of the disc and hub, and then measure the run-out again. N O T E The procedures for checking and changing the rear disc phase are the same as those for the front brake discs. Note, however, that the axial play (limit) in the hub differs. (Refer to P.3556.) Limit: <FWD> 0.05 mm (.002 in.) cAWD> 0.8 mm (.031 in.)
TSB Revision

2. If the problem cannot be corrected by changing the phase of the brake disc, replace the disc or turn rotor using an on the car type brake lathe. Be sure to follow the exact brake lathe manufacturer instructions. Rotors turned on the vehicle will often have a lower run-out than a new brake disc.
BRAKE LINING THICKNESS CHECK

;I /ol
@ -v
i j+\ I
\ Q % 14WOO86
1. Remove the rear brake assembly, and support it by a wire, etc. 2. Remove the brake disc. 3. Measure the wear of the brake lining at the place worn the most. Standard value: 2.8 mm (.ll in.) Limit: 1.0 mm (.04 in.) Replace the shoe and lining assembly if any location of the brake lining thickness is less than the limit. Caution Whenever the shoe and lining assembly is replaced, replace both RH and LH assemblies as a set to prevent car from pulling to one side when braking.
BRAKE DRUM INSIDE DIAMETER CHECK

1. Remove the rear brake assembly, and support it by a wire, etc. 2. Remove the brake disc. 3. .Measure the inside diameter of the hub and drum at two or more locations. Standard value: 168.0 mm (6.6 in.) Limit: 169.0 mm (6.7 in.)
14X0367
Replace brake drums and shoe and lining assemblies when wear exceeds the limit value or is badly out of balance.
BRAKE LINING AND BRAKE DRUM CONNECTION CHECK

1. Remove the rear brake assembly, and support it by a wire, etc. 2. Remove the brake disc. 3. Remove the shoe and lining assembly. 4. Chalk inner surface of brake disc and rub with shoe and lining assembly.
214NOO85
TSB Revision
/ L
5.
Replace shoe and lining assembly or brake disc if very irregular contact area is observed. NOTE Clean off chalk after check.
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT

tor
1. Lift up the vehicle and release the parking brake. 2. Disconnect the ECU harness connector and measure with the adapter harness (MB991356) connected to the harness side connector.
Body harness
MB991 356
214N018C
Caution 1. Never insert a probe, etc. into the connector as it may result in poor contact later. 2. Do not connect the connector (Special Tool) marked with *I except when recording the waveform on a driving test. In such a case, connect the connector to the ECU.
Terminal No. (same for AWD and FWD)
~~
I,
When turned manually .-..i.--[...l--.L--I j I I I ; ; i I I 1 I -;--:----:--.--t--- L---~---t---*-I ! t ,I I I I II I !

.+--:--- ,--1 ! I : ! ; - I , ;-~--:---t---:--~---*--I I I I !
3. Manually turning the wheel to be measured by l/2 to 1 turn/second, measure the output voltage with a circuit tester or oscilloscope. Output voltage: When measured with circuit tester: 70 mV or more When measured with oscilloscope (max. voltage): 100 mV or more Probable causes of low output voltage l Speed sensor pole piece-to-rotor clearance too large l Faulty speed sensor 4. Then, in order to observe the output state of the wheel speed sensors, shift into low gear (AWD vehicle) and drive the wheels, observe the output voltage waveform of each wheel speed sensor with an oscilloscope. In the case of the FWD vehicle, observe the waveform with an oscilloscope; for the front wheels, shift into low gear and drive the wheels; for the rear wheels, turn the wheels manually at a constant speed. NOTE 1. Waveform may also be observed by actually driving the vehicle. 2. The output voltage is low when the wheel speed is low and similarly it will be higher as the wheel speed increases.
-~---~--1~~~~~~~~~~~ .-+-;---r--y- 1 v/q1v ! ! I I I

TSB Revision
35-76
POINTS IN WAVEFORM MEASUREMENT
tude Waveform amplitude fluctuates ex(this is no problem if the amplitude is 100 mV or Axle hub eccentric or with large runout
NOTE The wheel speed sensor cable moves following motion of the front or rear suspension. Therefore, it is likely that it has an open circuit only when driving on rough roads and it functions normally on ordinary roads. It is, therefore, recommended to observe sensor output voltage waveform also under special conditions, such as rough road driving.
When using the MUT
HYDRAULIC UNIT (HU) CHECK

<Up to 1995 models> INSPECTION BY FEEL When using the scan tool [Multi-use tester (MUT) <Up to 1993 models> or MUT-II <All models>]
(1) Jack up the vehicle and support the vehicle with rigid racks placed at the specified jack-up points. (2) Release the parking brake and determine the drag force (drag torque) of each wheel by feel. (3) Set the scan tool as illustrated. When connecting the scan tool (MUT-II) to a 1993 model vehicle, use the adapter harness supplied together.
When using t<e MUT-II <Up to 1993 models>
\ Z12FOO57 y
Caution Turn off the ignition switch beforehand whenever the scan tool is connected or disconnected.
(4) After confirming that the shift lever or selector lever is in the neutral position, start the engine. The ABS warning light lights up, it goes into the scan tool mode. In the scan tool mode, ABS does not function. (5) Operate the scan tool to force the actuator to operate (item No. 04, 05, 06). (6) Turning the wheel manually, check the change of the braking force when the brake pedal is depressed. The change should be as shown in the following illustration. NOTE While the ABS is in the fail safe mode, the scan tool actuator test cannot be made.
Adapter harness
<From 1994 models>
, , ,
22OFO15! 3
22OFO164
00002160
TSB Revision
Scan tool actuator Pressure increase pi Pressure hold * Pressure decrease Pedal operation pattern 2 J r--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - I I II -______- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - d Pedal operation pattern 1 J 11
3 sec.
Depress /Pedaloperation/ Release
Fforce;
I
Lock
1 Drag force when pedal is released
r - - - - - - - - - - I I --J --_----_------------------------- jZ14FOO96
6 sec.
(7) If any abnormality is found in the check, take corrective action according to the following Judgement in Inspection by Feel table.
Judgement
No.
Inspection by Feel
Operation Normal condition Abnormal condition Probable cause Remedy Check and clean brake line Replace HU assembly
Scan tool display
04
35
FR VALVE M (1) Depress brake pedal Brake force released for 6 to lock wheel. (2) Using the scan tool, se- seconds after lect the wheel to be locking. checked and force the actuator to operate. FL VALVE M ( 3 ) T u r n t h e s e l e c t e d wheel manually to check the change of brake force. Rear VALVE M*
Wheel does Clogged not lock when brake line brake pedal other than HU is depressed. Clogged hydraulic circuit in HU
06*
Brake force is Incorrect HU Connect corbrake t u b e rectly not released connection HU solenoid Replace HU not assembly valve functioning correctly
NOTE *: FWD
TSB Revision
35-78

INSPECTION BY USING BRAKE FORCE TESTER When using the scan tool [Multi-use tester (MUT) <Up to 1993 models> or MUT-II <All models>] NOTE (1) The brake force tester roller and tire must be dry during the test. (2) When testing the front brakes, apply the parking brake and when testing the rear brakes, apply chocks to the front wheels to lock them.
I \*j ~
When using the MUT
(1) Place the front or rear wheels on the brake force tester roller. (2) Set the scan tool as illustrated. When connecting the scan tool (MUT-II) to a 1993 model vehicle, use the adapter harness supplied together.
Caution Turn off the ignition switch beforehand whenever the scan tool is connected or disconnected.
(3) After confirming that the shift lever or selector lever is in the neutral position, start the engine. (The ABS warning light lights up, it goes into the scan tool mode. In the scan tool mode, ABS does not function.) (4) Operate the brake force tester roller. (5) Depress the brake pedal until the brake force tester indicates the following value and keep the brake force at this level during the test.
When usina the MUT-II <Up to 1953 models>
Front wheels: 1,000 N (220 Ibs.) Rear wheels: 650 N (143 Ibs.)
(6) Allow the brake tester indication to stabilize before operating the scan tool to perform actuator test (Item No. 01, 02, 03). Then, read change of tester indication. Referring to the following Judgement in Inspection by Using Brake Force Tester table, judge and take corrective action if necessary. NOTE While the ABS is in the fail safe mode, the scan tool actuator test cannot be made.
i2OFO159
<From 1994 models>
\ L /
Z2OFO164 00002160
1 TSB Revision

Judgement in Inspection by Using Brake Force Tester
35-79
Probable cause Incorrect HU brake tube connection Faulty HU Clogged brake line other than HU Faulty HU Fluid leaking in HU (poor sealing)
id
No.
04
Scan tool display FR VALVE M
Operation After brake force c( 1) tester indication has stabilized, operate scan tool to force the actuator to operate and check the change in brake force.
Normal condition Brake force changes as shown in Table 1 after actuator is forced to drive with a scan tool.
Abnormal condition Brake force in Step 1 shows very little or almost no decrease.
Remedy Connect correctly Replace HU assmbly Check and clean brake line Replace HU assmbly Replace HU assembly
05
FL VALVE M
Brake force decreases in Step 1 but in Step 2, it shows very little or almost no increase. Increasing brake pedal depression force increases brake force.
b6
REAR VALVE M
2) Immediately after checking Step 2 value (in approx. 3 s), increasing brake pedal depression force does not increase brake force.
Table 1: Change in brake force
/ L/
Front wheels: / 1,000 (220) I Step 1
N (la.) II
&I
NOTE (1) During forced drive using the scan tool, forced drive operation is stopped when any wheel speed reaches 10 km/h (6 mph). (2) Failure to keep the brake pedal depression force constant can result in misjudgement. Even if the judgement has resulted in NG, it might be that the depression force was not kept constant. Therefore, repeat the same check again as necessary. (3) The probable causes given above all assume that all the other brake parts are normal.
Step 2 + (In approx. 6 s) / [ 1,000 + 200 (220 I!z 44)
Rear wheels: 1650 (143) I Step 1
i-l
&l
Step 2 (In approx. 6 s) 650+150 (143+33) 1
TSB Revision
35-80

<From 1996 models> Caution Turn the ignition switch off before connecting or disconnetting the scan tool.
1. Jack up the vehicle and support the vehicle with rigid racks placed at the specified jack-up points or place the wheels which are checked on the rollers of the braking force tester.
\ d
22OFO164
Caution 1. The roller of the braking force tester and the tire should be dry during testing. 2. When testing the front brakes, apply the parking brake, and when testing the rear brakes, stop the front wheels by chocking them.
Release the parking brake, and feel the drag force (drag torque) on each road wheel. When using the braking force tester, take a reading of the brake drag force. 3. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and set the scan tool as shown in the diagram. 4. After checking that the shift lever <M/T> or the selector lever <A/T> is in neutral, start the engine. NOTE 1. At this time, the ABS system will switch to the scan tool mode and the ABS warning light will illuminate. 2. When the ABS has been interrupted by the fail-safe function, the scan tool actuator testing cannot be used. 5. Use the scan tool to force-drive the actuator. 6. Turn the wheel by hand and check the change in braking force when the brake pedal is depressed. When using the braking force tester, depress the brake pedal until the braking force is at the following values, and check to be sure that the braking force changes to the brake drag force inspected in step 2 when the actuator is force-driven. Front wheel Rear wheel 882-l ,078 N (194-238 Ibs.) 539-735 N (119-162 Ibs.) d 2.
The result should be as shown in the following diagram.
TSB Revision

Depressed Released Pressure increase Pressure hold Pressure decrease Lock Drag force when the pedal is free 3 sec. Scan tool actuator test (ltym No. 01, 02, 03, 04) start
35-81
A14FO165
7.
If the result of inspection is abnormal, correct according to the Diagnosis Table.
Diagnosis Table No.

01 Scan tool display FR VALVE M FL VALVE M RR VALVE M RL VALVE M Operation Normal condition released for 2 seconds after locking. Abnormal condition not lock when brake pedal is depressed. Probable
cause
Remedy
(1) Depress brake pedal to Brake force Wheel does
02
03
lock wheel. (2) Using the scan tool, select the wheel to be checked and force the actuator to operate. (3) Turn the selected wheel manually to check the change of brake force.
Clogged Check and brake line clean brake otherthan HU line Clogged hydraulic circuit in HU Replace HU assembly
Brake force is not released.
Incorrect HU Connect brake tube correctly connection HU solenoid valve not functioning correctly Replace HU assembly
04
8. After inspection, disconnect the scan tool immediately after turning the ignition switch to OFF.
/ TSB Revision
35-82
SERVICE BRAKES - On-vehicle Service POWER RELAY CHECK

<up to Oct. 1994> 1. Remove the relay box cover in the engine compartment and remove the power relay. 2. Apply the battery voltage to the terminal (1) and check for continuity between the following terminals when the terminal (3) is short-circuited to ground. When energized When de-energized Between terminals 4 and 5 Between terminals 4 and 5 Between terminals 1 and 3 Continuity Nocontinuity Continuity
16FO122
18FOOfi' 00002161
<Up to October, 1994>
REMEDY FOR A DISCHARGED BATTERY

If the engine is jump-started, because of a completely discharged battery, the vehicle may suffer misfiring and fail to start if an attempt is made to start without allowing the batterty to recover sufficientry. This is because the ABS consumes a great deal of current for its self check. In such a case, allow the battery to sufficiently charge or deactivate ABS in the following manner. <Up to October, 1994> Remove the ABS power relay in the engine compartment to disable the ABS. Removing the ABS causes the ABS warning light to light. After the battery is charged sufficiently, install the power relay and restart the engine to check that the ABS warning light goes out. <From November, 1994> Disconnect the ABS-ECU connector. (Refer to P.35119.) Removing the ABS causes the ABS warning light to light. After the battery is charged sufficiently, connect the ABS-ECU connector and restart the engine to check that the ABS warning light goes out.
00002162
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - On-vehicle Service VALVE RELAY AND MOTOR RELAY CHECK <ABS>
cup to 1995 models>
1. Remove the splash shield (FR) and remove the relay box cover by inserting a screwdriver between the hydraulic unit and cover to pry off the lock. 2. Remove the relays. The one closest to you (larger one) is the motor relay and the one farthest from you (smaller one) is the valve relay.
3.
Check continuity of the relays both when they are energized and de-energized.
Motor Relay
When de-energized Between terminals 30-60 !A (85) and (86) Between terminals No continuity (30) and (87) (- Q) Between terminals Continuity (30) and (87) (approx. 0 a)
When energized beEde;8$rminals (85)
Valve Relay
When de-energized Between terminals 60-120 R (85) and (86) Between terminals Continuity (30) and (87a) (approx. 0 Q) Between terminals No continuity (30) and (87) (- Q) Between terminals No continuity (30) and (87a) 6-J Q) Between terminals Continuity (approx. 0 !A) (30) and (87)
i/
Y16R0670 L J
When energized between terminals (85) and (86)
r
i
/
1 i. l -;.j
3 5F
I
J
<From 1996 models>

Remove the splash shield (FR) and remove the relays. Battery voltage 1 Continuity no voltage Continuity with voltage Terminal No. 3 4 5
0
0
0 0 0 0
:0172 0
14130235 00003725
TSB Revision
35-84 BRAKE PEDAL
SERVICE BRAKES - Brake Pedal

l
Steering Column Assembly Removal (Refer to GROUP 37A - Steering Wheel and Shaft.)
Steering Column Assembly Installation (Refer to GROUP 37A - Steering Wheel and Shaft:)
(Refer to GROUP 21 - Clutch Pedal.) 0 Brake Pedal Adjustment (Refer to P.35-63.)
<FWD-MTT>
30 Nm 22 ft.lbs. ,
21
w
14
214A0256
14 \
i; m
,6
20
214FO106 00002129
Stop light switch removal steps 1. Stop light switch connector 2. Stop light switch Brake pedal removal steps .A+ 3. Return spring 4. Cotter pin 5. Washer 6. Clevis pin 9. Brake pedal assembly (parts from step 10 to step 21) 10. Brake pedal shaft bolt TSB r- ~~~
13. 14. 15. 20.
Brake pedal Bushing Spacer Clutch pedal (Refer to GROUP 21 Clutch Pedal.) * I 21. Brake peaal suppon memoer
L/~
Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Brake Pedal

30 Nm 22 ft.lbs.
35-85
VP/.// I I
12 Nm
214FOlOB 00002130
Stop light switch removal steps 1. Stop light switch connector 2. Stop light switch Brake pedal removal steps ,A4 3. Return spring 4. Cotter pin 5. Washer 6. Clevis pin 7. Cotter pin 8. Shift lock cable connection 9. Brake pedal assembly (parts from step 10 to step 21) 10. Brake pedal shaft bolt 11. Lever assembly installation nut
12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 21.
Lever assembly Brake assembly Bushing Spacer , Cotter pin Link assembly Lever assembly Bushing Brake pedal support member
TSB Revision
35-86
SERVICE BRAKES - Brake Pedal INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

.A( RETURN SPRING INSTALLATION
Install the return spring with the shorter hook on the brake pedal.
&
column racket Return spring
- Brake pedal
214FOO76
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the bushing for wear. Check the brake pedal for bend or twisting. Check the brake pedal return spring for damage.
STOP LIGHT SWITCH CHECK

(1) Connect a circuit tester to the stop light switch. (2) The stop light switch is in good condition if there is no continuity when the plunger is pushed in to a depth of within 4 mm (.16 in.) from the outer case edge surface, and if there is continuity when it is released. For vehicles with the cruise control system, the check for continuity should be made at connectors a and b of the stop light switch.
Z14LO141
No continuity
Continuity
4mm (.16 in.)

Z14LO171
<Vehicles with cruise control> a
Zl4LO170 00002131
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Master Cylinder and Brake Booster
35-87
MASTER CYLINDER AND BRAKE BOOSTER L REp=, 11

l
Brake Pedal Adjustment (defer to I?3563.)
LIIOOSO
<AWD>
15-18 Nm 11-13 ft.1b.s.

14 Nm
10 ft.lbs.
7 ft.lbs.
Z14FOlll 00002132
Master cylinder removal steps 1. Low-pressure hose 2. Brake fluid level sensor connector 3. Brake tube connection 4. Master cylinder ,B+ l Clearance between brake booster push rod and primary piston adjustment
Brake booster removal steps 4. Master cylinder 5. Vacuum hose 6. Vacuum tube ,A4 7. Vacuum hose with check valve 8. Fitting 9. Cotter pin 10. Washer 11. Clevis pin 12. Sealer 13. Spacer 14. Brake booster
TSB Revision
35-88
SERVICE BRAKES - Master Cylinder and Brake Booster REMOVAL SERVICE POINT
+A, MOVING LOW-PRESSURE HOSE
Remove the nuts and bolts securing low-pressure hose shown in the illustration, and using a wire, suspend the hose from the hood to a position where it does not hamper the removal and installation of the brake booster.
Caution Move the hose slowly with care not to bend it.
Vacuum hose Cheryk valve
Clip
mm (in.)

.A+VACUUM HOSE WITH CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION
(1) In the case of AWD, install the vacuum hose to the brake booster nipple as shown in the figure. Secure the hose with the hose clip.
Caution The check valve and the pipe part of the brake booster must not contact each other.
214AO395
(2) Install the other end of the vacuum hose fully onto its port on the engine. Secure the hose using the hose clip.
,B+ CLEARANCE BETWEEN BRAKE BOOSTER PUSH ROD AND PRIMARY PISTON ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the clearance (A) between the brake booster push rod and primary piston as follows:
(1) Measure the dimension (B) between the master cylinder end face and piston. NOTE To obtain (B), first take measurement with a square placed on the master cylinder end face. Then, subtract the thickness of the square to arrive at (B).
214u0064 00002133
(2) Obtain the dimension (C) between the brake booster mounting surface on the master cylinder and the end face.
214UOO65 00002134
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Master Cvlinder and Brake Booster
35h89
(3) I Measure the dimension (D) between the master cylinder

mounting surface on brake booster and the push rod end. NOTE To obtain (D), first take measurement with a square placed on the brake booster. Then, subtract the thickness of the square to arrive at (D).
\ Block gauge
I -
214w590
(4) Using the measured values obtained in (1) through (3),

214w573
00002135
obtain the clearance (A) between the brake booster push rod and primary piston.
Standard value: A (A = B - C - D) 7 + 8 inch brake booster 0.55-0.75 mm (.022-.030 in.) 8 + 9 inch brake booster 0.65-0.85 mm (.026-.033 in.) (5) If the clearance is not within the standard value range,
turn the push rod screw to achieve desired length.
Caution Improper clearance may cause excessive brake drag.

Z14A0471
00002136
, id
214FOO75 I
Brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4 1 57 \ 12lil
214FO112
1.4 ft.lbs.
11
14FOll3 00002137
Brake master cylinder kit
Disassembly steps 1. Reservoir cap assembly 2. Diaphragm 3. Reservoir cap 4. Filter <Vehicles with ABS> 5. Brake fluid level sensor 6. Float 7. Reservoir stopper bolt 8. Reservoir 9. Reservoir seal
10. Piston stopper bolt 11. Gasket 12. Piston stopper ring 13. Primary piston assembly 14. Secondary piston assembly 15. Master cylinder body Caution . . Do not Uisassemble the primary and secondary piston assemblies.
( TSB Revision
35-90
SERVICE BRAKES - Master Cylinder and Brake Booster DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS
+A, PISTON STOPPER BOLT DISASSEMBLY
Remove the piston stopper bolt, while depressing the piston.
+B, PISTON STOPPER RING DISASSEMBLY

Remove the piston stopper ring, while depressing the piston.
(C, SECONDARY PISTON ASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY

NOTE If it is hard to remove the secondary piston from the cylinder, gradually apply compressed air from the outlet port on the secondary end of the master cylinder.
INSPECTION
l l l
Check the inner surface of master cylinder body for corrosion or pitting. Check the primary and secondary pistons for corrosion, scoring, wear or damage. Check the diaphragm for cracks and wear.
1 TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Brake Line
35-91
BRAKE LINE L
<Vehicles without ABS>
l l
Brake Fluid Supplying Bleeding (Refer to P.35-66.)
214FOlo9 00002138
1. Brake hose 2. Brake tube (strut) 3. Brake tube (A) 4. Brake tube (B) 5. Brake tube (front, R.H.) 6. Brake tube (front, L.H.) 7. Brake tube (main, R.H.) 8. Brake tube (main, L.H.) 14. Proportioning valve
Caution Do not disassemble the proportioning valve because its performance depends on the set load of the spring.
1 TSB Revision
35-92
<Vehicles with ABS>
l
SERVICE BRAKES - Brake Line
Brake Fluid Draining
l l
Brake Fluid Supplying Bleeding (Refer to P.3566.)
Flared brake line nuts m

15 Nm
11 ft.lbs. ,4F038
Connecting part of hydraulic unit <Up to 1995 models> <From 1996 models> 4 5 5 4 12 12
14FOllO 00003717
11
3 6
11
1480167
14FOOlQ
1. Brake hose 2. Brake tube (strut) 3. Brake tube (A) 4. Brake tube (B) 5. Brake tube (front, PH.) 6. Brake tube (front, L.H.) 7. Brake tube (main, PH.)
8. Brake tube (main, L.H.) 9. Brake tube cup to 1995 models> 10. 2-way connector <Up to 1995 models> 11. Brake tube (rear, PH.) 12. Brake tube (rear, L.H.) ,A+ 13. Hydraulic unit (HU) 14. Proportioning valve
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Brake Line / Front Disc Brake

<Up to 1995 models>
35-93

bAdTUBE TO HYDRAULIC UNIT CONNECTION
Connect the tubes to the HU as shown in the illustration. <Up to 1995 models> 1. HU - front brake (L.H.) 2. HU - rear brake (R.H.) 3. HU - front brake (R.H.) 4. HU - rear brake (L.H.) 5. Master cylinder - HU (for left front and right rear) 6. Master cylinder - HU (for right front and left rear)
14F0020
<From 1996 mcldels>

6 ,
7
-2
14FO163
<From 1996 models> 1. HU - front brake (L.H.) 2. HU - rear brake (R.H.) 3. H U - rear brake (L.H.) 4. HU - front brake (R.H.) 5. Master cylinder - HU (for left front and right rear) 6. Master cylinder - HU (for right front and left rear)
INSPECTION
l l l
5 lAwf--l
Check the brake tubes for cracks, crimps and corrosion. Check the brake hoses for cracks, damage and leakage. Check the flared brake line nuts for damage and leakage.
FRONT DISC BRAKE

REMOVAL AND INSTALILATION
Brake Fluid Supplying 0 Bleeding (Refer to P.3566.)
l
Removal steps 1. Connection for brake hose and the brake tube 1 TSB Revision
.A+ 2. Front brake assembly 3. Brake disc
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

.A+ FRONT BRAKE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
Using the following method, measure the drag force of the disc brake after installation of the brake assembly. (1) With the brake assembly removed, use a spring scale to measure the rotary sliding resistance of the hub in the forward direction. NOTE Secure the disc to the hub with wheel nuts.
Zi4AO400
<MID>
MB990520
(2) After installing the caliper support to the knuckle, expand the piston by use of the special tool, and then install the caliper body.
:A\
\I
MB990520
(3) Start the engine, depress the brake pedal firmly two to three times and stop the engine. (4) Turn the brake disc ten times in the forward direction. (5) Using a spring scale, measure the rotary sliding resistance of the hub in the forward direction. (6) Obtain the drag force of the disc brake (the difference between the values measured in 5 and 1).
Standard value: 70 N (15.4 Ibs.) or less

(7) If the drag force of the brake exceeds the standard value, disassemble the piston and check for dirty or corroded piston sliding surface and deteriorated piston seal.
INSPECTION
l l l
Check disc for wear. (Refer to P.3570.) Check disc for runout. (Refer to P.3570, 71.) Check disc for damage.
TSB Revision
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY <FWD>
Brake caliper kit Pad kit Seal and boot kit
l&O298 14LO296
Caliper assembly disassembly steps pl 1. - Guide pin ,A( 2. .LOCK pin 3. Bushing 4. Caliper support (pad, clip, shim) 5. Pin boot 6. Boot ring :i: 7. 8. Piston Piston boot 4Bb 9. Piston seal 10. Caliper body
Pad assembly disassembly steps .A+ 1. Guide pin .A4 2. Lo+. pin 3. Busnlng 4. Caliper support (pad, clip, shim) 11. Pad & wear indicator 12. Pad assembly 13. Outer shim 14. Clip
TSB Revision
35-96
Lubrication points
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake
214K069
Z14AO54 I
Grease: Repair kit grease (orange)
Zl4Yl84
Brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4
Grease:
Repair kit grease (orange) I Grease:
Z14L0128 1
Repair kit grease (orange)
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS
35-97
When disassembling the front disc brakes, disassemble both sides (left and right) as a set.
+A, PISTON BOOT / PISTON REMOVAL

Send compressed air from the port to which brake hose is installed and remove the pistons and piston boots.
214AO553
Caution Send the air gradually, and using the handle of a plastic hammer etc., keep the protrusions of the two pistons even. If one of the two pistons is removed, the other one cannot be removed.
214AO552 00002143
dB, PISTON SEAL REMOVAL

(1) Remove piston seal with finger tip.
Caution Do not damage the cylinder inner surface.

(2) Clean piston surface and inner cylinder with trichloroethylene, alcohol or specified brake fluid.
Specified brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4
Identification

,A+LOCK PIN / GUIDE PIN INSTALLATION
Install the guide pin and lock pin mating the head markings on the guide and lock pins with the identification markings on the caliper body.
INSPECTION
l l l l
Check cylinder for wear, damage or rust. Check piston surface for wear, damage or rust. Check caliper body or sleeve for wear. Check pad for damage or adhesion of grease, check backing metal for damage.
TSB Revision
35-98

PAD WEAR CHECK
Measure thickness at the thinnest and worn area of the pad. Replace pad assembly when pad thickness is less than the limit value. i d
Standard value: 10.0 mm (.39 in.) Limit value: 2.0 mm (.08 in.)
14WOD95
Caution 1. When the limit is exceeded, the brake pads on both the left and right wheels must be replaced as a set. 2. If there is a large difference in thickness between the pads on the right and left wheels, check the sliding portions of the caliper.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY cAWD>

11 12lI J /
108
Seal and boot kit
43
@
214FO117 00002144
l2 10 g 10
4 d 0 @Q Q @ 0 S, r eaY@b
I
Pad kit Brake caliper kit
214FO120
Z14FO118
Disassembly steps 1. Clip 2. Pad pin 3. Cross spring 2. ;;~ma~mbly -.. 6. Shim B 7. inner pad (with wear indicator)
8. Outer pad 9. Retaining ring 10. Piston boot ::: 12. 11. .13. 14. Piston Piston seal .. Washer Caliper body
TSB Revision

lrication points
214FOO25
214FOO24
1 Grease:. _
Zaution The piston seal contained in the seal and boot kit is coated with special grease. lo not wipe off the grease. Brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4
ZUY184
14FO117 00002145
Zl4FOO97
Grease: Brake grease SAE J310, NLGI No. 1
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Front Disc Brake DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

+A,PAD PIN REMOVAL
35-101
Holding the cross spring with hand, remove the pad pin.
+B, PAD ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

Using a screwdriver, remove the pad assembly.
+, PISTONS REMOVAL
Install a wood block as shown and send compressed air through the port, to which brake hose is attached, to remove the pistons. At this time, make sure that the four pistons come out evenly.
Caution 1. Be careful not to get your fingers to be pinched. 2. Be careful not to let the brake fluid splash.
+D, PISTON SEAL REMOVAL

(1) Remove the piston seal.

(2) Clean the piston surfaces and cylinder inner surfaces with trichloroethylene, alcohol, or the specified brake fluid.

214FOO42
INSPECTION
l l l l
Check cylinder for wear, damage or rust. Check piston surface for wear, damage or rust. Check caliper body or sleeve for wear. Check pad for damage or adhesion of grease, check backing metal for damage.
id
TSB Revision

PAD WEAR CHECK
Measure the thickness at the thinnest and worn area of the pad. Replace pad assembly when pad thickness is less than the limit value.
14FO155
Standard value: 10.0 mm (.39 in.) Limit: 2.0 mm (08 in.) Caution 1. When the limit is exceeded, the brake pads on both theleft and right wheels must be replaced as a set. 2. If there is a large difference in thickness between the pads on the right and left wheels, check the sliding portions of the caliper.
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Rear Disc Brake
35403
REAR DISC BRAKE

l l
Brake Fluid Filling Brake Line Bleeding (Refer to P.3566.)
Flared brake line nuts 15 Nm
4WD>
50-60 Nm 36-43 ft.lbs.
<AWD>
50-60 Nm 36-43 ft.lbs.
11 ft.lbs.
i -L-. r/ =+-1 @,<;q\, 1 / /:iI /I!lr /; i,,L @, I!,; 0 I I/.j ,:c 2 9 ! 0 &x2
e Q y \ _ 0
Z14N0035
Z14N0036 00002146
Removal steps 1. Brake hose .A+ 2. Rear brake assembly 3. Brake disc

FAA REAR BRAKE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
Install the rear brake assembly using the same procedure as that for the front brake assembly. (Refer to P.3594.)
INSPECTION
INSPECTING THE BRAKE DISC
l l l
Check disc for wear. (Refer to P.3573.) Check disc for runout. (Refer to P.3573.) Check disc for damage.
TSB Revision
35-104
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY cAWD>

(Up to 1993 models)
24 23 21 18 .
Z14FO154 00002163
Grease: Brake grease SAE J310, NLGI No. 1 Brake caliper kit Pad kit Seal and boot kit
214FO152
Grease
Z14N0159
Pad assembly disassembly steps .A+ 1. Lock pin ,A+ 2. Guide pin 3. Bushing 4. Caliper support (pad, clip, shim) 18. Pad and wear indicator assembly 19. Inner shim B 20. Inner shim A 21. Pad assembly 22. Outer shim B 23. Outer shim A 24. Clip
Caliper assembly disassembly steps ,A+ 1. Lock pin FAA 2. Guide pin 3. Bushing 4. Caliper suppart shim) 10: 5 Boot ~;4~~~7 ring 12. Piston boot 13. Piston 14. Piston seal 15. Caliper body
TSB Revision

(From 1994 models) l6 19 1 *?18
35-105
23 21 18
i&
&
214FO151
Grease: Brake grease SAE 5310, NLGI No. 1
Z14FO149 00002148
Brake caliper kit
Pad kit 9 2018 l7
Seal and boot kit
iJ
11
214FO140
Grease
Z14FO120
Caliper assembly disassembly steps 9. Pad pin 11. Retaining ring 12. Piston boot 13. Piston 14. Piston seal 15. Caliper body
Pad assembly disassembly steps 9. Pad pin ,16. Clip 17. Cross spring 18. Pad and wear indicator assembly 19. Inner shim B 20. Inner shim A 21. Pad assembly 22. Outer shim B 23. Outer shim A
L:
TSB Revision
35106
cFWD>

,24
27 Nm 20 ft.lbs. I9
23
00002147
Grease: Brake grease SAE 5310, NLGI No. 1 Brake caliper kit Pad kit Seal and boot kit
Grease
Z14N0156 Zl4N0155
Z14N0157
Caliper disassembly steps

1. Lock pin
;. &I&~; support (pad, clip, shim) 7: Lock pin boot 8. Guide pin boot 10. Boot ring 12. Piston boot 13. 14. Piston Piston seal 15. Caliper body
+A, :i:
Pad assembly disassembly steps \ 1. Lock pin 4. Caliper support (pad, clip, shim) 18. Pad and wear indicator assembly 19. Inner shim B . . _ 20. Inner snlm A 21. Pad assembly 23. Outer shim 24. Clip
1 TSB Revision

Lubrication Points cAWD> (Up to 1993 models) , <FWD>
35107
'
<FWD> 7
._ --_ .i &dl
'-A:4LO124
Z14N0121
:aution he piston seal contained in ie seal and boot kit is coated

rith special grease. Do noi
Z14LO128
riDe off the arease.

3rake fluid: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4
Z14N0158
& Y14N0121
AWD> (From 1994 model2
Y14FO149
00002164
Caution
.-.
The piston seal contained in the seal and boot kit is coated with special grease. Do noi wipe off the grease. Brake fluid: Conforming to DOT3 or DOT4 i
t 1
:14FOO24
TSB Revision
35408
SERVICE BRAKES - Rear Disc Brake DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS dA, PISTON BOOT / PISTON REMOVAL
cAWD> (Up to 1993 models) <FWD>
I
Zl4N0139
Protect caliper body with cloth. Blow compressed air through brake hose to remove piston boot and piston.
Caution Blow compressed air gently.

-
cAWD> (From 1994 models)

insert a piece of wooden plate as shown and blow compressed air through the brake hose connecting hole to remove the pistons. Adjust the compressed air pressure as necessary so that both pistons are forced out evenly.
Caution 1. Be careful not to pinch your fingers. 2. Be careful not to splash the brake fluid.
Z14FO125
+B, PISTON SEAL REMOVAL

(1) Remove piston seal with finger tip.
* > h+ -iF(i fjf& /i=

Z14NO138

(2) Clean piston surface and inner cylinder with trichloroethylene, alcohol or specified brake fluid.
Identification

FAdGUIDE PIN / LOCK PIN INSTALLATION cAWD> (Up to 1993 models)
Front
Install the guide pin and lock pin mating the head markings on the guide and lock pins with the identification markings on the caliper body.
Y14LO294
INSPECTION
l l l l l
Check cylinder for wear, damage or rust. Check piston surface for wear, damage or rust. Check caliper body or sleeve for wear. Check pad for damage or adhesion of grease, check backing metal for damage. Check wear indicator for damage.
TSB Revision

PAD WEAR CHECK
35109
Measure the thickness at the thinnest worn area of the pad. Replace pad assembly when pad thickness is less than the limit value.
14woo95
Standard value: 10.0 mm (.39 in.) Limit: 2.0 mm (.08 in.) Caution 1. When the limit is exceeded, the brake pads on both the left and right wheels must be replaced as a set. 2. If there is a large difference in thickness between the pads on the right and left wheels, check the sliding portions of the caliper.
TSB Revision
35-110
SERVICE BRAKES - Hydraulic Unit (HU), Relay CABS>
HYDRAULIC UNIT (HU), RELAY CABS>

(Refer to Group 42 - Fender.)
Splash Shield Installation (Refer to Group 42 - Fender.) l Air Duct installation l Relay Box Installation l Brake Fluid Filling 0 Bake Line Bleeding (Refer to P.3566.)
l
<Up to 1995 models>
Flared brake line nuts
15 Nm 11 ft.lbs. 4FO3s
<From 1996 models>
iemi27
3 Hydraulic unit removal steps (A, .B+ 1. Brake tube 2. Harness connector 3. Bracket nut 4. Hydraulic unit (HU) (with bracket) 4Bb 5. Hydraulic unit (HU) bolt ,A+ 6. Grounding wire Relay removal steps 7. ABS valve relay 8. ABS motor relay
14F0172
00003988
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Hvdraulic Unit (Huh Relav CABS> REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
dA, BRAKE TUBE REMOVAL
35-111
Pull. up the relay box with harness attached and inserting a hand under the relay box, remove the brake tube using the flare nut wrench.
dB, HYDRAULIC UNIT (HU) REMOVAL

Remove the hydraulic unit together with the bracket from the wheel house.
Caution 1. The HU is heavy. Use care when removing it. 2. The HU cannot be disassembled. Never loosen its nuts or bolts. 3. Do not drop or shock the HU. 4. Do not turn the HU upside down or lay it on its side.
cup to 1995 mod

,A4 GROUNDING WIRE CONNECTION
Connect the grounding wire at the point shown in the illustration.
/iJ
<From 1996 models>
<UD to 1995 models> .

* *
,Bd BRAKE TUBE INSTALLATION <Up to 1995 models>

Pull up the relay box with harness attached and inserting a hand under the relay box, install the brake line using flare nut wrench. Connect the line and hose to the hydraulic unit correctly. (Refer to P-35-93.)
TSB Revision
35412
<From 1996
SERVICE BRAKES - Hydraulic Unit (HU), Relay CABS>

6 <From 1996 models>
Connect the tubes to the HU as shown in the illustration. 1. HU - front brake (L.H.) 2. HU - rear brake (R.H.) 3. HU - rear brake (L.H.) 4. HU - front brake (R.H.) 5. Master cylinder - HU (for left front and right rear) 6. Master cylinder - HU (for right front and left rear)
INSPECTION
SOLENOID VALVE CHECK <From 1996 models>
Measure resistance between terminals of each of the following solenoid valves.
Standard value:
14CO121
Front IN (left side) Front OUT (left side) Rear IN (right side) Rear OUT (right side) Rear IN (left side)
L
/ 2-12 6-12 3-12 7-12

I
/ 8.5 - 9.5 Sz 4.45 - 4.95 n 8.5 - 9.5 i-2 4.45 - 4.95 Q

1
4-12 8-12
8.5 - 9.5 Q 4.45 - 4.95 Q
Rear OUT (left side)
HYDRAULIC UNIT PUMP MOTOR CHECK

With the battery connected, confirm operating sound of the hydraulic unit pump motor.
Caution Do not apply battery voltage for more than 1 second.
1 -
14CO122
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Wheel Speed Sensor CABS>
35-113
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CABS>

REMOVAL AND INSTALsLATION
4WD>
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
9 ft.lbs.
214FOO78
:i:
1. Front rotor 2. Rear rotor
Front speed sensor removal steps 3. Clip qB, ,C+ 4. Front speed sensor ,Bd 5. Front speed sensor bracket
Rear speed sensor removal steps 6. Clip 8. Rear speed sensor
TSB Revision
35114
l
SERViCE BRAKES - Wheel Speed Sensor CABS>
Splash Shield Removal (Front Only) (Refer to Group 42 - Fender.)
0 Splash Shield Installation (Front Only)

l
ABS Inspection (Refer to P.35-7.)
cAWD>
!r-
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
214FOlOO
:i:
1. Front rotor 2. Rear rotor
Front speed sensor removal steps 3. Clip AB, .C( 4. Front speed sensor
Rear speed sensor removal steps 6. Clip 7. Cable band +B, .A+ 8. Rear speed sensor 9. O-ring

dAbFRONT ROTOR / REAR ROTOR REMOVAL Caution Do not damage rotor teeth and never drop the rotor. If the rotor has missing teeth or is deformed, accurate wheel speed detection cannot be expected and the system may fail to function normally. Use particular care in handling the front rotor of an AWD vehicle as it cannot be disassembled. TSB Revision

+B, FRONT SPEED SENSOR / REAR SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL
'35115
Caution When removing the speed sensor from the knuckle, be careful not to strike the tip of the pole piece against the rotor teeth or any other parts.

,A4 REAR SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION <FWD>
Insert a feeler gauge between the speed sensor pole piece and the rotor tooth surface and tighten the speed sensor to specified torque where the clearance is as specified all around.
Standard value: 0.2-0.7 mm (.008-.028 in.)

NOTE The rear speed sensor pole piece-to-rotor tooth surface clearance is not adjustable in the case of AWD vehicles. In this case, measure the sensor mounting surface-to-rotor tooth surface clearance.
Standard value: 28.15-28.45 mm (1.11-1.12 in.)
*0+ 0 7
0 G) -
.BA FRONT SPEED SENSOR BRACKET INSTALLATION

NOTE (1) The right and left speed sensor brackets differ in shape. Install correctly referring to the identification symbols. FR: For front speed sensor R: For right wheel L: For left wheel (2) After installation of the speed sensor to the bracket, check that the letters FR are visible.
Z14LO189
.CA FRONT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION Caution Handle the speed sensor carefully so as not to strike the tip of the pole piece or the rotor teeth against any metal parts and damage them.
Insert a feeler gauge between the speed sensor pole piece and rotor tooth surface and tighten the speed sensor to specified torque where the clearance is as specified all around.
Standard value: 0.3-O-9 mm (.012-.035 in.) TSB Revision
I 35416
Front <FWD>

Rear
INSPECTION
SPEED SENSOR CHECK
(1) Check the tip of the speed sensor pole piece for deposits of metal or other foreign matter and clean the pole piece as necessary. Also check the pole piece for damage and replace if damaged.
I I \ 3
Caution The speed sensor pole piece is magnetized by a builtin magnet inside the sensor, so it tends to attract metal. If the pole piece is damaged, accurate wheel speed detection may not be expected.
l : Pole piece
214NOiti;
(2) Measure resistance between speed sensor terminals.
Standard value: cFWD> Front 0.8-1.2 kL? Rear 0.6-0.8 k&2 <AWD> 0.8-1.2 kG
If the internal resistance of the speed sensor is out of specification, replace with a new one.
214N0103
(3) Check the speed sensor cable for open circuit and replace if faulty. NOTE Remove the cable clamp from the body and, while flexing the cable near the clamp, check for temporary open circuit. Also check connector connection and terminal insertion.
ROTOR CHECK
Check the rotor for missing or worn teeth and replace if faulty.
Zl4RO146
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - G Sensor <AWD-ABS>
G SENSOR <AMID-ABS>
5 Nm 4 ft.lbs.
214FO115
Removal steps 1. G sensor connector 2. G sensor 3. G sensor bracket
INSPECTION
G SENSOR CHECK cup to 1995 models>
(1) Lay the G sensor on a level surface and check for continuity between its terminals.
Z14AO194
(2) Incline the G sensor toward the vehicle front gradually and check that continuity is lost at an angle of 30 or more.
Z14A0195
TSB Revision
35418
SERVICE BRAKES - G Sensor cAWD-ABS>

(3) Incline the G sensor toward the vehicle rear gradually and check that continuity is lost at an angle of 30 or more.
214A0196
<From 1996 models>

(1) Disconnect G-sensor connector and connect special tool between terminals of the disconnected connector. (2) With the ignition switch turned ON, read output voltage between terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
Standard value: 2.3-2.7 V
(3) With the special tool connected, fix the connector in such a manner as to direct the front mark on the G-sensor mounting surface downward and read output voltage between terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
Standard value: 3.3-3.7 V

(4) If the output deviates from the standard value, make sure that nothing is wrong with the power supply wire and ground wire and then replace G-sensor.
14woo7
J
1
TSB Revision
SERVICE BRAKES - Electronic Control Unit (ABS-ECU) CABS>
35419
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ABS-ECU) <ABS>
l l l
Rear Seatback (RH) installation Rear Seat Cushion Installation ABS Inspection (Refer to P.357.)
14FOO79
<From 1996 models>
14FO169 00003719
Removal steps
1. Control unit connector connection 2. Electronic control unit 3. ABS-ECU bracket .

+A, CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR REMOVAL
Insert a screwdriver into the lock section as illustrated and pull out the connector from below.
NOTES
36-1
i;
PARKING BRAKES
CONTENTS
Lining Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Parking Brake Lever Stroke Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Parking Brake Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Lubricants.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PiRKlNG BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 PARKING BRAKE LEVER AND PARKING BRAKE CABLE* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injuryordeathtoservicepersonnel(frominadvertentfiringoftheairbag)ortothedriverandpassenger(fromrendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B -Suppiemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 -Maintenance service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE
The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring, and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*).
36-2 SPECIFICATIONS
PARKING BRAKES - Specifications
I I
items Parking brakes Type Brake lever type Cable arrangement Specifications Mechanical brake acting on rear wheels Lever type V-type
Lj
LUBRICANTS
Items Rear brake shoe and backing plate contact surfaces Contact surface between shoe & lining assemblys strut and adjuster Contact surface between shoe & lining assembly and shoe-adjustment bolt and shoe-support piece Specified lubricant Brake grease SAE J310, NLGI No. 1
v,,
TSB Revision
PARKING BRAKES - Special Tools / Troubleshooting
36-3
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Tool number and name MB990767 End yoke holder Supersession MB990767-01 Application Removal of the rear axle shaft assembly
MB990241 Axle shaft puller A: N1B990244 Puller bar MB990211 Sliding hammer
MB990211 -01
MB991 354 Puller body
1 TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Brake drag 1Probable cause Incomplete release of parking brake Incorrect parking brake adjustment lnsuff icient parking brake function Worn brake pad Excessive parking brake lever stroke 1 Remedy Correct Adjust Replace Adjust the parking brake lever stroke or check the parking brake cable routing Replace Replace
Grease or oil on pad surface Parking brake cable sticking
1 TSB Revision
36-4
PARKING BRAKES - On-vehicle Service
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
PARKING BRAKE LEVER STROKE CHECK
1. Pull the parking brake lever with a force of approx. 200 N (45 Ibs.), and count the number of notches.
Caution The 200 N (45 Ibs.) force of the parking brake lever must be strictly observed. Standard value: 3-5 notches
2. If the parking brake lever stroke is not the standard value, adjust as described below. (1) Remove the cup holder and plug and loosen the adjustment nut to the cable end so that the cable becomes free. (2) Repeat depressing the brake pedal until the pedal stroke becomes stable. NOTE When the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed, shoe clearance is adjusted properly. (3) Disengage the drive shaft and companion flange.
Adjuster
h2
(4) Remove the adjusting hole plug. Using a screwdriver, turn the adjuster in the direction of the arrow (to expand the shoe) until brake is lightly applied [where the disc cannot be turned with both hands: approx. 2.7 Nm (23 in.lbs.)]. Then, turn the adjuster five notches in the direction opposite the arrow. (Reference: Shoe clearance on one side 0.19 mm [.0075 in.])
(5) Turn the adjusting nut to obtain specified parking brake lever stroke. After the adjustment, check that there is no play between the adjusting nut and pin.
Caution Do not adjust parking brake lever stroke too tight, less than,the standard value, or brake drag could result.
(6) After the parking brake lever stroke has been adjusted, jack up the rear part of the vehicle. Loosen the parking brake and turn the rear wheel to check that the parking brake does not drag.
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CHECK

1. Disconnect the connector of the parking brake switch, and connect an ohmmeter to the parking brake switch and the switch installation bolt. 2. The parking brake switch is good if there is continuity when the parking brake lever is pulled and there is no continuity when it is returned.
TSB Revision
PARKING BRAKES - Lever and Parkina Brake Cable LINING RUNNING-IN
On-vehicle Service / Parking Brake
36-5
L
mm (in.)
214FO147
Carry out running-in by the following procedure when replacing the parking brake linings or the rear brake disc rotors, or when brake performance is insufficient. 1. Adjust the parking brake stroke to the specified value. 2. Hook a spring balance onto the center of the parking brake lever grip and pull it with a force of 98-147 N (22-32 lbs.) in a direction perpendicular to the handle. 3. Drive the vehicle at a constant speed of 35-50 km/h (22-31 mph) for 100 m (328 ft.). 4. Release the parking brake and let the brakes cool for 5- 10 minutes. 5. Repeat the procedure in steps (2) to (4) 4-5 times.
Caution Carry out running-in in a place with good visibility, and pay careful attention to safety.
PARKING BRAKE LEVER AND PARKING BRAKE CABLE

l
Front and Rear Console Removal (Refer to GROUP 52A - Console Box.)
0 Parking Brake Lever Stroke Adjustment

l
Front and Rear Console Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Console Box.)
Z14FOlOl
/ 4
Zl4FOO67 00002155
/ LJ
Parking brake lever removal steps

1. Cable adjuster 2. Parking brake stay 3. Bushing 4. Parking brake switch 5. Parking brake lever
TSB Revision
36-6
I
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake Lever and Parking Brake Cable

50-60 Nm 36-43 ftlbs.
<FWD>
/7
16 n
13
<AWD>
18 Parking brake cable removal steps

1. Cable adjuster 6. Rear speed sensor (Refer to GROUP 35Speed Sensor.) 7. Rear brake assembly 8. Rear brake disc 9. Adjusting wheel spring 10. Shoe hold-down cup 11. Shoe hold-down pin
Zl4FOO70
.Bd 12. Adjuster ,A+ ii. S$+to-anchor spring

15: Strut return spring 16. Shoe & lining assembly 17. Clip 18. Parking cable protector 19. Parking brake cable
TSB Revision
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake Lever and Parking Brake Cable REMOVAL SERVICE POINT
+A,SHOE HOLD DOWN CUP REMOVAL
36-7
Expand the shoe & lining assembly and remove the shoe hold down cup.

.A+ SHOE TO ANCHOR SPRINGS INSTALLATION
The shoe-to-anchor spring must be installed in the sequence shown in the illustration.
Caution Each shoe-to-anchor spring has a unique spring load and the spring a is painted to prevent erroneous installation.
214N0009
NOTE The figure shows the left wheel; for the right wheel, the position in symmetrical.
.B( ADJUSTER INSTALLATION

Install the adjuster facing the left adjusting bolt to the vehicle front and right adjusting bolt to the vehicle rear.
bolt
214FOO39
1 TSB Revision
36-8 PARKING BRAKE
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake

l
Parking Brake Lever Stroke Adjustment (Refer to P.36-4.)
<FWD>
\ 166 ft.lbs. $ \
zl4N0004
Z14LOOl5
:a
Z14D0650
Grease: Brake grease SAE 5310, NLGI No. 1 Removal steps +A, .E( 1. Rear speed sensor 3. Rear brake assembly 4. Rear brake disc 5. Hub cap WI ;. paw&nut 8: Rear hub unit bearing 12. Adjusting wheel spring 13. Shoe hold-down cup 14. Shoe hold-down spring 15. Shoe hold-down pin .B+ 16. Adjuster ,A( ;;. gg+to-anchor spring 19: Strut return spring 20. Shoe & lining assembly 21. Clip 23. Backing plate
TSB Revision
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake

cAWD> 260-300 Nm 188-217ftlbs. 98 Nm 71 ft.lbs. 12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
36-9
50-60 Nm i 36-43 ft.lbs.
55-65 Nm 40-47 ft.lbs.
Z14N0010
00002157
36-43 ftlbs.
Z14N0004
Z14LOO15
+ : d Z1400650
Grease: Brake grease SAE 5310, NLGI No. 1 Removal steps 1. O-ring 2. Rear speed sensor
4Ab
16. Shoe hold-down pin .Bd 15. Adjuster .A+ ;;. zS+to-anchor spring 19: 20. 21. 22. 23. Strut return spring Shoe & lining assembly Clip Brake tube connection Backing plate
3. Rear brake assembly 4. Rear brake disc: +B, .C+ 9. Self-locking nut 10. Companion flange 4Cb 11. Rear axle shaft 12. Adjusting wheel spring 13. Shoe hold-down cup 14. Shoe hold-down spring
TSB Revision
36-10
PARKING BRAKES - Parking Brake REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

AA, REAR SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL Caution When removing the speed sensor from the knuckle, use care not to hit the pole piece at its tip against the rotor teeth or other parts. d
dB, SELF-LOCKING NUT REMOVAL

With the special tool, secure the axle shaft and remove the companion flange self-locking nut.
MB99
lN0039
(C, AXLE SHAFT ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

With the special tool, remove the axle shaft from the trailing arm.
MB991 354
nlN0040
I

,A4 SHOE-TO-ANCHOR SPRING INSTALLATION
The shoe-to-anchor spring must be installed in the sequence shown in the illustration.
I
2 a 214N0009
Caution Each shoe-to-anchor spring has a unique spring load and the spring a is painted to prevent erroneous installation.
NOTE The figure shows the left wheel; for the right wheel, the position in symmetrical.
,B( ADJUSTER INSTALLATION

Install the adjuster facing the left adjusting bolt to the vehicle front and right adjusting bolt to the vehicle rear.
bolt
L
214FOO39
1 TSB Revision
PARKING BRAKES - Parkino Brake

.C+ SELF-LOCKING NUT INSTALLATION
36-11
L
MB990
hNOO39
With the special tool, secure the axle shaft and tighten the companion flange self-locking nut.
,/
.D+ FLANGE NUT INSTALLATION

After tightening the flange nut, align with the spindles indentation and crimp.
/ i ii I hi
Ii !
Spindle
i ,
z 14N000~
,E+ REAR SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION

Insert a filler gauge between the speed sensor pole piece and rotor teeth and tighten the speed sensor at such position where the gap is as specified below over the entire circumference.
Standard value: 0.2-O-7 mm (.008-.028 in.)
INSPECTION
CHECKING FOR UNUSUAL WEAR OF THE BRAKE LINING AND BRAKE DRUM
(1) Measure the thickness of the brake lining at several places.
14WOOBb
Standard value: 2.8 mm (.llO in.) Limit: 1.0 mm (.039 in.) Caution Replace the brake shoes if the thickness of the brake lining is the limit value or less.
(2) Measure the brake disc drum inner diameter at two or more places.
Standard value: 168.0 mm (6.6 in.) Limit: 169.0 mm (6.7 in.) Caution Replace if the brake disc drum inner diameter is the limit value or more.
14X0367
1 TSB Revision
NOTES
1 I
37-1
STEERING
CONTENTS
STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37A 4-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 CWHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (ACTIVE 4WS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37C
NOTE Shaded groups in the above list are not included in this manual.
37-2
37A-1
STEERING
CONTENTS
Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Drive Belt Tension Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Fluid Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Oil Pressure Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Oil Pump Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Stationary Steering Effort Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Steering Angle Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Steering Wheel Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Steering Wheel Free Play Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Steering Wheel Return to Center Check . . . . . . . 9 Tie Rod End Ball Joint Starting Torque Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
POWER STEERING GEAR BOX* . . . . . . . . . . . 18 POWER STEERING HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
STEERING WHEEL AND SHAR . . . . . . . . . . 14
Tie Rod End Ball Joint Variation Check (Shaft direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenanceof any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injuryordeathtoservicepersonnel (from inadvertentfiringoftheair bag)ortothedriverand passenger(fromrendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk ().
STEERING - Specifications
NOTE *I: Up to 1993 models *2: From 1994 models
Items Steering wheel free play (with engine stopped) mm (in.) Steering angle FWD, AWD* AWD*2 lie rod end ball joint starting torque Nm (in.lbs.) Stationary steering effort N (Ibs.) Drive belt deflection mm (in.) When belt tension is inspected When belt tension is readjusted When new belt is installed 3il pump pressure MPa (psi) Pressure gauge valve closed Pressure gauge valve opened Inner wheel Outer wheel Inner wheel Outer wheel FWD AWD 1Standard value 11 (.43) 3345 f 2 2821 3145 * 2 27lO 0.5-3.0 (4-26) 1 .O-3.0 (9-26) 35 (8) or less 9.5-13.5 (.37-.53) 10.5-12.5 (.41-.49) 7.5-9.0 (.30-.35) 7.5-8.2 (1,067-1,166) 0.8-l .O (114- 142) I Limit I
Oil pressure switch operating Oil pressure switch contacts 1.5-2.0 (213-284) closed (continuity) pressure MPa (psi) Oil pressure switch contacts 6.7-1.2 (100-171) opened (no continuity) Total pinion torque Nm (in.lbs.) Tie-rod joint swing resistance N (Ibs.) Tie-rod joint swing torque Nm (in.lbs.) Steering wheel free play (when hydraulic operation) mm (in.) Variation of tie rod end ball joint shaft direction mm (in.) Oil pump pressure MPa (osi) Pressure gauge valve opened 0.6-1.3 (5-11) 8-18 (1.8-4.0) 2-5 (17-43) 30 (1.2) 1.5 (.059) 1.5 (213)
Space between vane and rotor mm (in.) NOTE *l: Up to 1993 models *2: From 1994 models
/ 0.06 (.0024)
TSB Revision
STEERING - Specifications LUBRICANTS

Items Gear box Bearing O-ring Oil seal Special tool (MB991213) Pinion and valve assembly seal ring part Bellows Oil pump Power steering fluid Flow control valve Friction surface of rotor, vane, cam ring and pump cover O-ring Silicone grease Automatic transmission fluidDEXRON II Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II As required 0.9 dm3 (.95 qt.) As required Specified lubricant Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II Quantity As required
SEALANT
Items Power steering gear box End plug screw Power steering rack support cover screw Dust cover Specified sealant 3M ATD Part No. 8663 or equivalent
TSB Revision
37A-4 SPECIAL TOOLS
STEERING - Snecial Tools
Preload socket
General service
TSB Revision
STEERING - Special Tools

Tool Tool number and name MB991199 Oil seal installer Supersession General service tool Application To press in the oil seal for the rack
37A-5
MB991197 Bar (long type) MB991 202 Oil seal and bearing installer MB991213
To press in the oil seal for the rack
Press-fitting of rack housing bearing
General service
Rack installation
TSB Revision
37A-6
STEERING - On-vehicle Service
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
STEERING WHEEL FREE PLAY CHECK
1. 2. With engine running (hydraulic operation), set front wheels straight ahead. Measure the play on steering wheel circumference before wheels start to move when slightly moving steering wheel in both directions.
Limit: 30 mm (1.2 in.)

213FOOO2
3. 4.
When the play exceeds the limit, check for play on steering shaft connection and steering linkage. Correct or replace. If the free play still exceeds the limit value set steering wheel straight ahead with engine stopped. Load 5 N (1 lb.) towards steering wheel circumference and check play.
Standard values (steering wheel play with engine stopped): 11 mm (.43 in.)
If the play exceeds the standard value, remove steering gear box and check total pinion torque.
213FOOO3
STEERING ANGLE CHECK

1. Set front wheels on turning radius gauge and measure steering angle.
Standard values: cFWD, AWD (Up to 1993 models)> Inner wheel 3345 z!I 2 Outer wheel 2821 <AWD (From 1994 models)> Inner wheel 3145 + 2 Outer wheel 27lO
2. When not within the standard value, it is probably a toe problem. Adjust toe (refer to GROUP 33A-Service Adjustment Procedures) and recheck.
TIE ROD END BALL JOINT VARIATION CHECK (SHAFT DIRECTION)

1. Hold the ball joint with pliers. 2. Set a caliper gauge as illustrated and measure the displacement with the ball stud compressed.
Limit: 1.5 mm (.059 in.)
TSB Revision

3.
37A-7
If the measured displacement exceeds the limit, replace the tie-rod end.
Caution Even if the variation is within the limit, check ball joint starting torque.
TIE ROD END BALL JOINT STARTING TORQUE CHECK

1. Disconnect tie rod and knuckle with special tool.
2.
Move ball joint stud several times and install nut on stud. Using the special tool, measure ball joint starting torque.
Standard value: 0.5-3.0 Nm (4-26 in.lbs.) <FWD> 1.0-3.0 Nm (9-26 in.lbs.) <AWD>
When starting torque exceeds the standard value, replace tie rod end. 4. When the starting torque is under the standard value, check for play or ratcheting in ball joint. If none of these, it is still serviceable. 3.
213GOO55
Tape or mark / on steering column cover Tape or mark on steering whee hub
STEERING WHEEL CENTERING

SIMPLIFIED STEERING WHEEL CENTERING Determining Steering Wheels Off Center
1. For the road test, take along chalk or tape and a ruler. 2. Drive straight ahead on an uncambered level surface. 3. When the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead, mark the steering wheel hub and column cover with a chalk or tape line. 4. Stop the vehicle and line up the marks on the hub and column cover. 5. Place a tape strip or mark on the steering wheel rim. 6. Hold a ruler next to the rim as shown in the illustration, and then steer the steering wheel until it is in the desired centered position. 7. Record the distance the strip or mark on the rim has moved. This is how far the steering wheel is off center. If it is more than 16 mm (5/8 in.) off center, it can be centered by indexing it ten degrees towards the center.
213FOO47
Dotted lines
Ruler
Y13FOO47
3744-8
IO"

Indexing Steering Wheel to Center It
The steering wheel shaft has 36 splines, a lowing the steering wheel to be indexed in ten-degree increments. 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Without disturbing the position of the steering wheel shaft, re-install the wheel as near on-center as possible.
36 splines
PRECISION STEERING WHEEL CENTERING

In general, the tie rods are adjusted to steer the front wheels in the same direction that the steering wheel is off center. If the steering wheel is off center to the left, center it by adjusting the tie rods to make the front wheels steer toward the left, and vice versa.
213FOO46
Steering wheel off center left
00002167
--
1. 2. 3.
Mark the tie rods and tie rod ends with chalk before loosening the lock nuts. Hold the tie rod with a wrench and loosen the lock nut. Hold the tie rod end with a wrench and turn the tie rod the desired number of turns.
For 2 or 6 mm (.25 in.) at the steering wheel rim l/5 turn of tie rods
4. Tighten the lock nut to specified torque, taking care not to turn the tie rod.
Z13FOO48
Off center to left
Off centerto left
Off center to right
Off center to right
Turn both tie rods in the same direction.

Z13RO555 00002168
TSB Revision
37A-9
STATIONARY STEERING EFFORT CHECK
1. With the vehicle stopped on a flat, paved surface, turn the steering wheel to the straight ahead position. 2. Start the engine and set it to 1,000 + 100 rpm.
Caution After checking the engine speed, there must be a return to the standard idling speed.
213FOOO3 J
3. Attach a spring balance to the outer circumference of the steering wheel and measure the steering force required to turn the steering wheel from the straight ahead position to the left and right (within a range of 1.5 turns). Also check to be sure that there is no significant fluctuation of the required steering force.
Standard value: Steering effort 35 N (8 Ibs.) or less Fluctuation allowance 6 N (1.3 Ibs.) or less
STEERING WHEEL RETURN TO CENTER CHECK

To make this test, conduct a road test and check as follows. 1. Make both gradual and sudden turns and check the steering feeling to be sure that there is no difference in the steering force required and the wheel return between left and right turns. 2. At a speed of 35 km/h (22 mph), turn the steering wheel 90, and release the steering wheel after 1 or 2 seconds. If the steering wheel then returns 70 or more, the return can be judged to the satisfactory. NOTE There will be a momentary feeling of heaviness when the wheel is turned quickly, but this is not abnormal. (This is because the oil pump discharge amount is especially apt to be insufficient during idling.)
Z13FOOOl
DRIVE BELT TENSION CHECK

Refer to GROUP 11 - On-vehicle Service.
/ id
1 TSB Revision
37A-10
Fluid fluctuation
STEERING - On-vehicle Service FLUID LEVEL CHECK

Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface, start the engine, and then turn the steering wheel several times to raise the temperature of the fluid to approximately 50-60C (122-140F). 2. With the engine running, turn the wheel all the way to the left and right several times. 3. Check the fluid in the oil reservoir for foaming or milkiness. Check the difference of the fluid level when the engine is stopped, and while it is running. If the fluid level changes considerably, air bleeding should be done. 1.
_-
-_-
--- -_. - - -
El+3 While engine While engine running stopped

213uo139
FLUID REPLACEMENT
Raise the front wheels on a jack, and then support them with rigid racks. 2. Disconnect the return hose connection. 3. Connect a vinyl hose to the return hose, and drain the oil into a container. 4. Disconnect the high-tension cable, and then while operating the starting motor intermittently, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right several times to drain all of the fluid. 1.
3 1 / -!Fb Return hose Vinyl hose
213A0142
Caution Be careful not to position the high-tension cable near the carburetor or the delivery pipe.
5. Connect the return hoses securely, and then secure it with the clip. 6. Fill the oil reservoir with the specified fluid up to the lower position of the filter, and then bleed the air.
Specified fluid: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II
TSB Revision
STEERING - On-vehicle Service BLEEDING
37A-11
1. Jack up the front wheels and support them by using a floor stand. 2. Manually turn the oil pump pulley a few times. 3. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and to the right several times. 4. Disconnect the high-tension cable, and then, while operating the starting motor intermittently, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right several times (for 15 to 20 seconds).
Caution 1. During air bleeding, replenish the fluid supply so that the level never falls below the lower position of the filter. 2. If air bleeding is done while engine is running, the air will be broken up and absorbed into the fluid; be sure to do the bleeding only while cranking.
5. Connect the ignition cable, and then start the engine (idling). 6. Turn the steering wheel to the left and right until there are no air bubbles in the oil reservoir. 7. Confirm that the fluid is not milky, and that the level is up to the specified position on the level gauge. 8. Confirm that there is very little change in the fluid level when the steering wheel is turned left and right.
Fluid level change: within 5 mm (.2 in. )
9. Check whether or not the change in the fluid level is within 5 mm (.2 in.) when the engine is stopped and when it is running.
.--F--z; _ . -_.
B
While engine running While engine stopped
213uo139
Caution 1. If the change of the fluid level is 5 mm (.2 in.) or more, the air has not been completely bled from the system, and thus must be bled completel y . 2. If the fluid level rises suddenly after the engine is stopped, the air has not been completely bled. 3. If air bleeding is not complete, there will be abnormal noises from the pump and the flow-control valve, and this condition could cause a lessening of the life of the pump, etc.
TSB Revision
37A-12

Shut-off valve Pressure gauge (Fully close)
OIL PUMP PRESSURE TEST

CHECKING THE OIL PUMP RELIEF PRESSURE
1. Disconnect the pressure hose from the oil pump, and then connect the special tools. 2. Bleed the air, and then turn the steering wheel several times while the vehicle is not moving so that the temperature of the fluid rises to approximately 50-60C (122-140F). 3. Start the engine and idle it at 1,000 + 100 rpm. 4. Fully close the shut-off valve of the pressure gauge and measure the oil pump relief pressure to confirm that it is within the standard value range.
Standard value: 7.5-8.2 MPa (1,067-1,166 psi) Caution Pressure gauge shut off valve must not remain closed for more than 10 seconds.
If it is not within the standard value, overhaul the oil pump. Remove the special tools, and then tighten the pressure hose to the specified torque. 7. Bleed the system. 5. 6.
Shut-off valvt
CHECKING THE PRESSURE UNDER NO-LOAD CONDITIONS

1. 2. Disconnect the pressure hose from the oil pump, and then connect the special tool. Bleed the air, and then turn the steering wheel several times while the vehicle is not moving so that the temperature of the fluid rises to approximately 50-60C (122-140F). Start the engine and idle it at 1,000 f 100 rpm. Check whether or not the hydraulic pressure is the standard value when no-load conditions are created by fully opening the shut-off valve of the pressure gauge.
3. 4.
Standard value: 0.8-1.0 MPa (114-142 psi) Limit: 1.5 MPa (213 psi)
5. If it is not within the standard value, the probable cause is a malfunction of the oil line or steering gear box, so check these parts and repair as necessary. Remove the special tools, and then tighten the pressure hose to the specified torque. Bleed the system.
6. 7.
TSB Revision

Shut-off valve Pressure gauge (Fully open) Temperature (MB990662 w-w
37A-13
CHECKING THE STEERING GEAR RETENTION HYDRAULIC PRESSURE

1. Disconnect the pressure hose from the oil pump, and then connect the special tools. 2. Bleed the air, and then turn the steering wheel several times while the vehicle is not moving so that the temperature of the fluid rises to approximately 50-60C (122-140F). 3. Start the engine and idle it at 1,000 f 100 rpm. 4. Fully open the shut-off valve of the pressure gauge. 5. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right; then check whether or not the retention hydraulic pressure is the standard value.
Standard value: 7.5-8.2 MPa (1,067-1,166 psi)

When not within the standard value, overhaul the steering gear box. Remeasure fluid pressure. 7. Remove the special tools, and then tighten the pressure hose to the specified torque. 8. Bleed the system. 6.
Shut-off
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK

1. 2. Disconnect the pressure hose from the oil pump, and then connect the special tools. Bleed the air, and then turn the steering wheel several times while the vehicle is not moving so that the temperature of the fluid rises to approximately 50-60X (122-140F). The engine should be idling. Disconnect the connector for the oil pressure switch, and place an ohmmeter in position. Gradually close the shut-off valve of the pressure gauge and increase the hydraulic pressure then check whether or not the hydraulic pressure that activates the switch is the standard value.
3. 4. 5.
Standard value: 1.5-2.0 MPa (213-284 psi)

6. Gradually open the shut-off valve and reduce the hydraulic pressure; then check whether the hydraulic pressure that deactivates the switch is the standard value.
Standard value: 0.7-1.2 MPa (loo-171 psi)

7. 8. Remove the special tools, and then tighten the pressure hose to the specified torque. Bleed the system.
TSB Revision
37A-14
STEERING - Steering Wheel and Shaft
STEERING WHEEL AND SHAF

l
Checking Steering Wheel Position with Wheels Straight Ahead
\ 40 Nm 29 ft.lbs.
8 ft.lbs. 12 Nm 8 ft.lbs.
18 N 13 ft.lbs.
\ \
Removal steps
1. Air bag module (Refer to GROUP 52B - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring.) +A, .A4 2. Steering wheel 3. Lower column cover 4. Upper column cover 5. Knee protector (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) 6. Lap cooler duct and foot shower duct 7. Column switch assembly 8. Cover* (Refer to GROUP 23 Transaxle Control.) 9. Key interlock cable* (Refer to GROUP 23 - Transaxle Control.) 10. Slide lever* (Refer to GROUP 23 Transaxle Control.) 11. Steering column assembly 12. Column support assembly
NOTE l : <Automatic transaxle vehicles>
1 TSB Revision
STEERING - Steering Wheel and Shaft REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

(A, STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL
37A-15
Remove the steering wheel by using the special tool.
Caution Do not hammer on the steering wheel to remove it; doing so may damage the collapsible mechanism.

,A( STEERING WHEEL INSTALLATION
Line up the NEUTRAL mark of the clock spring with the mating mark before installing the steering wheel.
213RO654
Caution If the clock springs mating mark is not properly aligned, the steering wheel may not be completely rotational during a turn, or the flat cable within the clock spring may be severed, obstructing normal operation of the SRS and possibly leading to serious injury to the vehicles driver.
TSB Revision
37~916
STEERING - Steering Wheel and Shaft
18 Nm
2
213FOO58
00002169
Disassembly steps 1. Boot 2. Cover assembly .B( 3. Bearing 4. Joint assembly
,A+ 5. Special bolts +A, ,A+ 6. Steering lock bracket +A, ,A4 7. Steering lock cylinder 8. Steering column assembly
DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINT dAbSTEERING LOCK BRACKET / STEERING LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL
If it is necessary to remove the steering lock cylinder, use a hacksaw to cut the special bolts at the steering lock bracket side.
Steering lock cylinder
213FOOSl
TSB Revision
STEERING - Steering Wheel and Shaft REASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

\ ii
37A-17
bAdSTEERING LOCK CYLINDER / STEERING LOCK BRACKET / SPECIAL BOLT INSTALLATION

(1) When installing the steering lock cylinder and steering lock bracket to the column tube, temporarily install the steering lock in alignment with the column boss.
(2) After checking that the lock works properly, tighten the special bolts until the head twists off.
Caution The steering lock bracket and bolts must be replaced with new ones when the steering lock cylinder is installed.
Z13FOO52 00002170
.B+ BEARING INSTALLATION

(1) Fill the inside of the bearing with multipurpose grease. (2) Install the bearings to the shaft on the joint assembly. (3) Wrap vinyl tape approximately one and one-half times around the concave circumferences of the bearings, and then press fit the bearings into the cover assembly.
i-
213N0012
INSPECTION
l l l l
the the the the
steering shaft for play and round movement. joints for play, damage, or rough movement. joint bearing for wear and damage. dust shield for damage.
1 TSB Revision
37A-18
POWER STEERING GEAR BOX

l l l l l l
Transfer Assemblv installation (Refer to GROUP 22 - Transfer.) Front Exhaust Pioe Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Main Muffler.) Power Steering Fluid Supplying (Refer to P.37A-10.) Power Steering Fluid Line Bleeding (Refer to P.37A-1 I .) Steering Wheel Position with Wheels Straight Ahead Checking Front Wheel Alignment Adjustment (Refer to GROUP 33A - On-vehicle Service.)
35 Nm 25 ft.lbs. 15 Nm 11 ft.lbs.
29 Nm*l g; ft$* 36 ft.lbs.*2
ZUFOO55 00002171
60-70 Nm 60-70 Nm 43-51 ft.lbs. 43-51 ft.lbs. Removal steps 1. Joint assembly and gear box connecting bolt 2. Cotter pin
3. Tie-rod end and knuckle connecting
nut 4. Left member 5. Right member 6. Stabilizer bar bracket
7. Connection of steering gear box with 4WS oil line 8. Clamp dB, .A+ 9. Gear box assembly .A+ 10. Mounting rubber NOTE 1;; gy;
TSB Revision
STEERING - Power Steering Gear Box REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

+Ab TIE-ROD END DISCONNECTION
37A-19
Using the special tool, disconnect the tie rod from the knuckle.
+B, GEAR BOX ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

(1) Move the rack completely to the right and then remove the gear box from the crossmember. (2) While tilting the gear box downward, remove it to the left.
Caution When removing the gear box, pull it out carefully and slowly to avoid damaging the boots.

.A+MOUNTlNG RUBBER / GEAR BOX ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
When installing the mounting rubber, align the projection of the mounting rubber with the indentation in the crossmember to install the gear box.
4 Mothting c l a m p
INSPECTION
GEAR BOX FOR TOTAL PINION TORQUE
Using the special tools, rotate the pinion gear at the rate of one rotation in approximately 4 to 6 seconds to check the total pinion torque.
Standard value: 0.6-1.3 Nm (5-11 in.lbs.)

NOTE Measure the pinion torque through the whole stroke of the rack. If the measured value is not within the standard range, first adjust the rack support cover, and then check the total pinion starting torque again. If the total pinion starting torque cannot be adjusted to within the standard range by adjusting the rack support cover, check the rack support cover, rack support spring, rack support and replace any parts necessary.
CHECK THE TIE ROD FOR SWING RESISTANCE

(1) Give 10 hard swings to the tie rod. (2) Measure the tie rod swing resistance with a spring balance.
Standard value: 8-18 N (1.8-4.0 lbs.) [2-5 Nm (17-43 in.lbs.)]

(3) If the measured value exceeds the standard value, replace tie rod assembly. NOTE Even if the measured value is below the standard value, the tie rod which swings smoothly without excessive play may be used.
TSB Revision
37A-20

<Vehicles with 4WS> 1OR 1om Steering gear seal kit
<Vehicles without 4WS>
22 Nm 16 ft.lbs.
Fire nut
15 Nm 9 Z13N0023 1 ft.lbs
2 \XBA4
- 3 7 :/ -f2&%4
-kh
60 Nm 1..,43 ft.lbs.
50-55 Nm 36-40 ft.lbs.
?%a A /
?324
1
25
d I
Z13FOO30
00002172
b i
Disassembly steps +A, .O+ 3. Dust shield

4W
.P4 2. Tie rod ends
1. Tie rod end locking nuts
4Fb .K4 18. Oil seal

19. Pinion and valve assembly 4G, .I4 21. Ball bearing 4G, .H4 22. Oil seal 4H, .G4 23. Circlip 24. Rack stopper .F4 25. Rack bushing 41, .E4 26. Rack .D4 27. O-ring 4J, .D4 28. Oil seal 29. Seal rings
,J( 20. Seal rings
4. Bellows clips 5. Bellows bands 6. Bellows 7. Tab washers W-W .N+ 8. Tie rods 9. Feed tubes 10. O-rings FM4 l Total pinion torque adjustment 4D, bL4 11. End plug 12. Self-locking nut 13. Locking nut 14. Rack support cover 4Eb 15. Rack support spring 16. Rack support 17. Valve housing
4K, .C4 %I ZXearing 4L, .B4 32. Needle roller bearing 4M, .A( 33. Oil seal 4M, ,A( 34. Back-up washer
35. Rack housing
TSB Revision

LUBRICATION AND SEALING POINTS
37A-21
Z13N0087
Fluid: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II Sealant: 3M ATD, Part No. 8663 or equivalent
IJ
213N0022
L-J
Fluid: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II

213G0070
Grease: Silicone grease
Z13N0019
Z13POO77
21310564
213GO186
Sealant: 3M ATD, Part No. 8663 or equivalent

X13FOO30
00002173
TSB Revision
3749-22
STEERING - Power Steering Gear Box DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

+A, DUST SHIELD REMOVAL
Remove the dust shield from the tie rod end.
+B, BELLOWS BANDS REMOVAL

Using a screwdriver or similar tool, loosen and then remove the boot retaining band.
+C, TAB WASHER REMOVAL

Unstake the tab washer which fixes the tie rod and rack with a chisel.
Z13PO126
+D, END PLUG REMOVAL

Disconnect end plug caulking and remove end plug.
+E, RACK SUPPORT
COVER
REMOVAL
Using the special tool, remove the rack support cover from the gear box.
TSB Revision
STEERING - Power Steering Gear Box dF, OIL SEAL REMOVAL
37A-23
Using a plastic hammer, gently tap the pinion to remove it.
Zl3A0284
+G,BALL BEARING / OIL SEAL REMOVAL

Using a socket, remove the oil seal and the ball bearing from the valve housing simultaneously.
213A0285
dH, CIRCLIP REMOVAL

Rack stopper
(1) Turn the rack stopper clockwise until the end of the circlip comes out of the slot in the rack housing. (2) Turn the rack stopper anticlockwise to remove the circlip.
00002174
+I, RACK REMOVAL

Pull out the rack slowly. At this time also take out the rack stopper and the rack bushing simultaneously.
+J, OIL SEAL REMOVAL

Partially bend oil seal and remove from rack bushing.
Caution Do not damage oil seal press fitting surface.
TSB Revision
3744-24

AK, BALL BEARING REMOVAL
MB990939 or brass bar
Use a brass bar to remove the ball bearing from the gear housing.
Ball bearing
213RO548
dL, NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING REMOVAL

Use the special tool to remove the needle roller bearing from the rack housing.
Caution Do not open special tool excessively to prevent damaging housing interior.
213RO581
+M,OIL SEAL / BACK-UP WASHER REMOVAL

Pipe
Use a piece of pipe or similar tool to remove the back-up washer and oil seal from the gear housing.
Caution Be careful not to damage the inner surface of the rack cylinder of the gear housing.
Back-up washer Oi; seal
MB991197

bAdBACK-UP WASHER / OIL SEAL INSTALLATION
(1) Apply a coating of the specified fluid to the outside of the oil seal.

bil seal Back-up washer
213A018
(2) Using the special, tool, press the back-up washer and the oil seal into the rack housing to the specified position (where the upper surface of the press-in guide coincides with the stepped part of the press-in tool).
I-Y
MB990938 MB991202 Needle roller bearing
.B+ NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING INSTALLATION

(1) Apply specified fluid to housing, bearing and oil seal press fitting surface.

(2) Using the special tools, press fit needle roller bearing.
Caution Press fit straight as valve housing is aluminium. TSB Revision

,CA BALL BEARING INSTALLATION
Use the special tools to press fit ball bearing.
37A-25
213R0380
.DdOIL SEAL / O-RING INSTALLATION
MB990927
(1) Apply a coating of the specified fluid to the outside of the oil seal and O-ring.

-ring
(2) Using the special tool, press fit oil seal until it touches rack bush end.
213R0378
.E( RACK INSTALLATION

(1) Apply a coating of multipurpose grease to the rack teeth face.
Caution Do not close the vent hole in the rack with grease.
Vent hole
213K583
Oil seal /
MB991213 /
(2) Cover rack serrations with special tool. (3) Apply specified fluid on special tool.

(4) Match oil seal center with rack to prevent retainer spring from slipping and slowly insert rack from power cylinder side.
Back-up washer
21360147
,Fq RACK BUSHING INSTALLATION

Wrap the rack end with vinyl tape, apply a coating of the specified fluid, and then install the rack bushing and rack stopper.
B&k bushing
IZ13R02'
Specified fluid: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II Caution Do not allow oil seal retainer spring to slip out.
TSB Revision
37A-26
STEERING - Power Steerina Gear Box

.G+ CIRCLIP INSTALLATION
Insert circlip to rack stopper hole through cylinder hole. Turn rack stopper clockwise and insert circlip firmly.
Caution Insert circlip to rack stopper hole while turning rack stopper clockwise.
21360148
213K687 00002175
rv
Oil
.H( OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

MB990938
Apply a coating of the specified fluid to the outside of the oil seal. Using the special tools, press the oil seal into the valve housing.

MB991203
z13poo71
r-b
Ball beari
.I( BALL BEARING INSTALLATION

MB990938
Apply a coating of the specified fluid to the outside of the ball bearing. Using the special tools, press the ball bearing into the valve housing.

, MB991203
213WO72
,J+ SEAL RING INSTALLATION

(1) Kneed the seal ring to soften it. (2) Apply the specified fluid to the seal ring, and install to the rack groove.

Pinion gear
(3) Insert the tapered side of the special tool from the pinion gear side, and compress the seal ring.
Z13AO313 1
,K+ OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

Using the special tool, press the oil seal into the valve housing.
Caution In order to eliminate a seal malfunction at the valve housing alignment surface, the upper surface of the oil seal should project outward approximately 1 mm (.040 in.) from the housing edge surface.
213POO76
00002176
1 TSB Revision
STEERING - Power Steerina Gear Box

.L+ END PLUG INSTALLATION
37A-27
i b
End plug
(1) Apply the semi-drying sealant to the threaded part of the end plug.
Specified sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8663 or equivalent

(2) Secure the threaded portion of the end plug at two places by using a punch.
Sealant
Zl3K0130
Zl3K013?
00002177
.M( TOTAL PINION TORQUE ADJUSTMENT

(1) Position rack at its center. With special tool, tighten rack support cover to 15 Nm (11 ftlbs.). (2) In neutral position, rotate pinion shaft clockwise one turn/4-6 seconds with special tool. Return rack support cover 30-60 and adjust torque to the standard value.
Standard value: O-6-1.3 Nm (5-11 in.lbs.)
Caution 1. When adjusting, set the standard value at its highest value. 2. Assure no ratcheting or catching when operating rack towards the shaft direction.
NOTE When it cannot be adjusted within the specified return angle, check rack support cover components or replace. (3) After adjusting, lock rack support cover with lock nut.
.N+ TIE ROD INSTALLATION

After installing tie rod to rack, fold tab washer end (2 locations) to tie rod notch.
MB990776
.O+ DUST SHIELD INSTALLATION

(1) Pack dust shield interior and lip with multipurpose grease. (2) Apply semi-drying sealant to dust shield.
Specified sealant: 3M ATD Part No. 8663 or equivalent

(3) Using the special tool, press dust shield to tie rod end.
L,
Sealant
Y13YO564
TSB Revision
37A-28
End of insertion

.P+TIE ROD END INSTALLATION
Lock nut
Screw in tie rod end to have its right and left length as illustrated. Lock with lock nut.
<191.64) cAWD> 194.6 (7.66)

A13X0217
INSPECTION
RACK CHECK
l l l
Check the rack tooth surfaces for damage or wear. Check the oil seal contact surfaces for uneven wear. Check the rack for bends. Check the pinion gear tooth surfaces for damage or wear. Check for worn or defective seal ring. Check for roughness or abnormal noise during bearing operation. Check the bearing for play. Check the needle roller bearings for roller slip-off. Check the damage. Check the Check the Check the cylinder inner surface of the rack housing for boots for damage, cracking or deterioration. rack support for uneven wear or dents. rack bushing for uneven wear or damage.
PINION AND VALVE ASSEMBLY CHECK

l l
BEARING CHECK
l l l
OTHERS CHECK
o
l l l
TSB Revision
STEERING - Power Steering Oil Pump
37A-29
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP

1
Pre-installation
l
Operation
Power Steering Fluid Draining
l l l l
Power Steering Fluid Supplying Drive Belt Tension Adjusting (Refer to P.37A-9.) Power Steering Fluid Line Bleeding (Refer to P.37A-11.) Oil Pump Pressure Checking (Refer to P.37A-12.)
22 Nm
Nm ft.lbs.
43 Nm 31 ft.lbs.
Zl3NOO29
Removal steps
1. Drive belt
2. Suction hose .A+ 3. Pressure hose 4. O-ring
5. 6. 7. 8.
Pressure switch connector Oil pump Oil pump bracket Tensioner pulley
INSPECTION
l l
Check the drive belt for cracks. Check the pulley assembly for uneven rotation.

.A4 PRESSURE HOSE INSTALLATION
Connect the pressure hose so that its slit part contacts the oil pumps guide bracket.
T r-SB
Revision
37A-30
Y13N0030 Z13N0030
xl 3N0030
Oil pump seal kit
1 Oil pump cartridge k/t
Fluid: Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II 20 Nm 14 fi.1b.s. 60 Nm 43 ftlbs. z2====-gm 6
1$lg&ji2\ $1 q -- Ia l 25-kO Nm 16-22 ft.lbs. Disassembly steps 1. Pump cover .E+ 5: ;$j ,D+ 5: Cam ring .C+ 6. Side plate .A+ 7. O-ring 8. Connector .A+ 9. O-ring 10. Flow control valve 11. Flow control spring 12. Terminal assembly .A4 13. O-ring .Bd 14. Spring 15. Plunger TSB Revision
Zl3N0031 00002179
16. Piston rod 18. Snap 17. Terminal ring 19. Washer 20. insulator .A+ ;;. ;,-$g 23: 24. ,A4 25. 26. Clip Suction connector O-ring Oil pump body and pulley assembly
Caution Do not disassemble the flow control valve.

Side plate .-.
37A-31
~ I

.A+ O-RINGS INSTALLATION
-.
213N0059
Apply specified fluid on O-rings to install. No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 11 x 1.9 13x 1.9 17.8 x 2.4 13.5 x 1.5 3.8 x 1.9 16.8 x 2.4 I.D. x Width mm (in.) (.433 x .075) (.512x .075) (.701 x .094) (531 x .059) (.150x .075) (.661 x .094)
Suction connector mounting portion of oil pump body

213K752
Terminal assembly
Z13N0057
213K753
00002180
.B+ SPRING INSTALLATION

Fit the spring to the oil pump body with the larger-diameter end at the terminal assembly side.
Z13FCXXO
,Cq SIDE PLATE INSTALLATION

Line up the dowel pin hole of the side plate with the dowel pin of the pump body when installing the side plate.
.D( CAM RING INSTALLATION

Install the cam ring with the punch mark facing the side plate.
Punt
Cutouts for dowel pin

S;id
TSB Revision
37A-32

.E+ VANES INSTALLATION
Direct round edge
Install the vanes on the rotor, paying close attention to the installation direction.
~ ~ ii
INSPECTION
l l l l l
Check the flow control spring for wear. Check the shaft of the pulley for play and round movement. Check the groove of rotor vane for stepped wear. Check the contact surface of cam ring and vanes for stepped wear. Check the vanes for breakage.
CHECK OF GAP BETWEEN VANE AND ROTOR GROOVE

Install vane to rotor groove as illustrated. Measure the gap between vane and rotor groove with thickness gauge.
Limit: 0.06 mm (.0024 in.)
TSB Revision
STEERING - Power Steering Hoses
37A-33
POWER STEERING HOSES

l
Pm-removal and Post-installation Operation Power Steering Fluid Draining, Supplying, and Bleeding (Refer to P37A-10,ll.)
<Vehicles without 4WS> <Vehicles with 4WS>

12 Nm 8 ft.lbs. 5 Nm 4 ft.lbs. 12 Nm 8 ft.lbs. 35 Nm 25 ft.lbs. _
12 Nm 8 ft.lbs. I 22 Nm
24 Nm 17 ft.lbs.
-------
12 Nm 15 Nm 11 ft.lbs.
mFoo2s
Removal steps
1. Return hose 2. Suction hose 3. Return hose l $ 2;9ure hose 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Cooler tube Pressure tube Return tube O-ring Oil reservoir

,A+ PRESSURE HOSE INSTALLATION
(1) Connect the pressure hose so that its slit part contacts the oil pumps guide bracket.
Z13N0060
(2) When the pressure hose is installed, align the white line on the pressure hose with the white line on the pressure tube so that together they form a straight line.
White line
Z13PO143
TSB Revision
NOTES
37B-1
4-WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM (4WS)

CONTENTS
CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*........ 9 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . m m . . . . . s. . . . . . . m 4
Ball Joint Rotation Starting Torque Check . . . . . . 5 Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Oil Pump Discharge Flow Volume Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5
REAR OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
POWER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 REAR OIL LINE . . . . . ..*................... 10
378-2
SPECIFICATIONS
4WS - Specifications I Special Tools
Items Standard value Approx. 1 .O (1.06) / 0.5 (4) or less 1 9-55 (2-12) [0.5-3.0 (4-26)] 1 67 (15) or less 1 I
Rear oil pump displacement [at speedometer reading of 31 mph (50 km/h) for 30 seconds] dm3 (qts.)
1 Power cylinder ball joint rotation starting torque Nm (in.lbs.) 1 Power cylinder tie rod swing torque N (Ibs.) [Nm (in.lbs.)] I Power cylinder slide resistance N (Ibs.)
LUBRICANTS
Items Power steering fluid Dust cover 1 Specified lubricant Automatic Transmission fluid DEXRON II Silicone grease 1 Quantity 1.45 dm3 (1.53 qts.) As required
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Tool number and
name
Supersession
Application Air bleed
MB991230 Air bleeder set , MB990993 Power steering oil pressure gauge adapter MB990993-01
Measurement of fluid flow volume
/ TSB Revision
4WS - Troubleshootina
37B-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Before inspecting, check the following items: Ensure that the suspension has not been modified l Tire and wheel size, specifications, air pressure, balance and amount of wear l Steering wheel type Malfunction symptom 4WS does not operate Malfunctioning system Power cylinder
l l l l l
Wheel alignment Oil pump drive belt tension Power steering fluid level, and air in the system Engine idle speed and even idle Oil leakage
Inspection item Tie rod swing torque Power cylinder slide resistance
Rear oil pump Control valve Poor steering feeling Feeling of friction in steering Poor steering return Steering wheel efforts excessive Steering gears and linkage
Flow volume check
Rack cracks or deformation
Control valve Power cylinder Oil line Oil reservoir
Oil leakage from control valve joint Oil leakage from piston rod Pressure hose breakage Oil reservoir deformation or oil leakage Stuck control valve spool Stuck power cylinder Relief valve remains open Excessive power or cylinder friction
/ L
Rear wheels cannot be Control valve steered Power cylinder Poor rear wheels return Hydraulic pressure for rear Rear oil pump wheel is constantly high
Poor rear wheel steering response Poor rear wheel steering range Poorsteerability (extreme tire wear) Power cylinder
Oil leakage from control valve spool Oil leakage from power cylinder Extreme oil pump internal wear Tie rod length improperly adjusted after toe-in adjustment
TSB Revision
37B-4
4WS - On-vehicle Service
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
BLEEDING
(1) Bleed air from power steering system. (Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.) (2) Lift up the vehicle. (3) Start the engine and let it idle.
(4) Loosen the bleeder screw on the left side of the control valve and set the special tool to the bleeder screw. (5) Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, immediately returning it half way back. At this time confirm that air is discharged with the fluid. (6) Repeat step (5) two or three times to make sure that there is no more air in the system. Tighten the bleeder screw and remove the special tool. (7) Repeat steps (4) through (6) for the right side bleeder screw, turning the steering wheel to the right this time. (8) Loosen the power cylinder bleeder screw and set the special tool to the bleeder screw.
Caution Loosen the bleeder screw about 30 to 45 degrees, and secure it with the special tool (rotation prevention metal fixtures) so as not to be loosened more.
(9) Start the engine and keep the front wheels in a straight ahead position. Increase the engine speed once to a speedometer reading of 70-80 km/h (43-50 mph) to operate the oil pump for the rear wheels.
Caution Pay particular attention to all four wheels that rotate.

NOTE When the engine speed is increased, the fluid circulates through the oil pump but it does not circulate through the tube (special tool). (lO)With a 30-40 km/h (19-25 mph) speedometer reading maintained, turn the steering wheel all the way clockwise and counterclockwise to ensure that pressure rises, causing air to circulates through the tube (special tool) and to be discharged from the reserve tank. (11) Repeat step (10) several times to make sure that there is no more air in the system. Tighten the bleeder screw and remove the special tool. (12)Ensure that the difference in the fluid levels when the engine is running and when it is stopped are within 5 mm (.20 in.). If the difference exceeds 5 mm (.20 in.), there is still air in the system and it must be bled again.
Fluid level difference within 5 mm (.20 in.)
While engine is running
While engine is stopped

z13uo13
Caution If air has not been completely bled from the system, the pump will make a humming sound or an unusual noise will come from the flow control valve; this also contributes to shortened pump life. I
1 TSB Revision
4WS - On-vehicle Service FUNCTION CHECK
37B-5
(1) Raise the vehicle so that all four wheels may turn freely. (2) Start the engine, running the vehicle at an indicated speed of about 80 km/h (50 mph). (3) Turn the steering wheel all the way to left and right and turn it swiftly, checking to ensure that the rear wheels steer to the same directions as the front wheels.
Rubber hose
REAR OIL PUMP DISCHARGE FLOW VOLUME CHECK

(1) Disconnect the pressure hose from the rear oil pump and install the special tool with a rubber hose. (2) Place the other end of the rubber hose in a container which permits measurement of flow rate (2-dm3 graduated cylinder).
213FOOl
(3) Start the engine. Increase speed slowly, then hold the indicated speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), measuring discharge flow volume for 30 seconds.
Graduated cylinder
t13FOOl
Caution While performing this work, continuously add fluid into the oil reservoir. Standard value: Approximately 1.0 dm3 (1.06 qts.)
(4) If the discharge flow volume is extremely high or low, the rear oil pump should be replaced.
BALL JOINT ROTATION STARTING TORQUE CHECK

(1) Holding the power cylinder tie rod with a spanner, disconnect the tie rod and trailing arm.
ZlZA0219
(2) After swinging the ball joint stud several times, install the stud nut, then measure the ball joint rotation starting torque with the special tool.
Standard value: 0.5 Nm (4 in.lbs.) or less

(3) If the rotation starting torque exceeds the standard value, replace the tie rod end. (4) If the rotation starting torque is less than the standard value, check that the ball joint is not loose and operates smoothly. If not, it may be reused.
TSB Revision
378-6 POWER CYLINDER
4WS - Power Cylinder

l l l
e Main Muffler Assembly Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Muffler.) l Power Steering System Refilling and Bleeding (Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.) l 4WS System Bleeding (Refer to P.37B-4.) l 4WS System Operation Checking (Refer to P.37B-5.) l Wheel Alignment Checking (Refer to GROUP 34 - On-vehicle Service.)
Cleaning of Pipings with Steam Power Steering Fluid Draining (Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.) Main Muffler Assembly Removal (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Muffler.)
\ 110-130 Nm 78 Nm $4 ft.lbs. 5 8 ft.lbs. -I
Q 78 Nrn 58 ft.lbs.
58 Nm 42 ft.lbs.
3
110-130 Nm
&I-130 Nm 8 0 - 9 4 ft.lbs.
0 0 0 0 2 1 8 :z
212FOO8i I
80-94 ft.lbs.
4Ab
Removal steps 1. Rear shock absorber lower mounting bolt 2. Crossmember bracket 3. Crossmember mounting nut (on differential side) 2. Ergure tube (RL) . -
;. l$zssgure tube (RR) 4B, 8: Oil line clamp bolt 9. Tie rod end nut ,A4 10. Power cylinder installation bolt .A+ 11. Power cylinder
1 TSB Revision
4WS - Power Cvlinder REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
37B7
(A, CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING NUT REMOVAL (1) Before removing the self-locking nuts, support the differential case with a transaxle jack. (2) Remove the self-locking nuts.
dB,TIE ROD END NUT REMOVAL Secure the power cylinder on the tie rod side with a spanner and remove the power cylinder mounting nut.

,AlPOWER CYLINDER / POWER CYLINDER INSTALLATION BOLTS INSTALLATION (1) Secure the power cylinder to the crossmember. (2) Move the power cylinder piston rod over its full stroke to determine its neutral position. (3) Align tie rod ends and the installation holes at trailing arm.
Z13A0124
(4) When the tie rod ends and the installation holes at the trailing arm do not meet, loosen the tie rod end securing nut, then adjust the length. The dust cover fastener clip should be removed for this. (5) The difference between the lengths of the left and right tie rods should be less than 1 mm (.039 in.). NOTE The threads of the tie rod ends may be used as a guide for this.
Z13AO125
INSPECTION.
TIE ROD SWING TORQUE INSPECTION (1) Swing the tie rod ten times, hard. (2) Point the tie rod end down, then attach a spring balance as shown in the illustration to measure swing resistance (swing torque). Standard value: 9-55 N (2-12 Ibs.) [OS-3 Nm (4-26 in.lbs.)]
213A0091
TSB Revision
37B-8
4WS - Power Cvlinder

(3) If the swing resistance exceeds the standard value, replace the tie rod. (4) If the swing resistance is less than the standard value, the ball joint may be reused as long as it is not loose and operates smoothly.
Wire
213A008R
POWER CYLINDER SLIDE RESISTANCE CHECK (1) Place the piston in a neutral position. (2) Wrap a wire around the tie rod end, then measure slide resistance with a spring balance as shown in the illustration. Standard value: 67 N (15 Ibs.) or less (3) If the slide resistance exceeds the standard value, replace the power cylinder. (4) If the slide resistance is less than the standard value, the power cylinder may be reused as long as it is not loose and slides smoothly.
Z13G0070
Grease: Silicone grease

7 Nm 5 ft.lbs. Z13AO128
00002183
Disassembly steps
1. Nut
,B+ ;. ;;prod end assembly

4: Wire
.A4 5. Dust cover 6. Bleeder caps 7. Bleeder screws 8. Cylinder assembly

.A+ DUST COVER INSTALLATION Apply the specified grease to the place indicated in the illustration, then install the dust cover to the cylinder assembly. Specified grease: Silicone grease
213G0070
TSB Revision
4WS - Power Cviinder / Control Valve

J
37B-9
i p
.B+TIE ROD END ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Temporarily attach the tie rod end assembly to the cylinder assembly at the place of dimension as illustrated. NOTE To adjust the assembly dimensions of the tie rod end assembly, remove the dust cover clip and rotate the rod.
Rod
Ah
Z13P 10202
CONTROL VALVE
Pre-removal Operation Cleaning of Pipings with Steam Power Steering Fluid Draining (Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.) l Rear Suspension Assembly Removal (Refer to GROUP 34- Rear Suspension Assembly.)
l l L
Post-installation Operation Rear Suspension Assembly Installation (Refer to GROUP 34 - Rear Suspension Assembly.) l Power Steering System Refilling and Bleeding (Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.) l 4WS System Bleeding (Refer to P.378-4.) l 4WS System Operation Checking (Refer to i?37B-5.)
l
12 Nm 15 Nm 9 ft.lbs. 11 ft.lbs. \
35 Nm 25 lt.lbs.
24 Nm ,17 ft.lbs. 12 Nm / / 9 ft.lbs.
\A\ i
I/
V
15 Nm 11 ft.lbs.
95 Nrn
35 Nm 25 ft.lbs.
25 ft.lbs.
, L/J
Removal steps 1. Pressure hose 2. Pressure tube 3. O-ring 2. zFgure tube (RR) 6: Pressure tube (RL) TSB Revision
7. O-ring
;. ;-;rgure tube (FL, FR) 10: 11. O-ring Return pipe

12. Control valve
37B-IO REAR OIL LINE

0 Cleaning of Pipings with Steam
4WS - Rear Oil Line
(Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.)
Post-installation Operation Power Steering System Refilling and Bleeding (Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.) l 4WS System Bleeding (Refer to P.378-4.) l 4WS System Operation Checking (Refer to P.378~5.)
l
35 Nm 25 ft.lbs.
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs. Removal steps
213FOO24
1. Return hose 2. Suction hose 3. Protector 4. Pipe assembly to pressure tube connection 5. Pipe assembly 6. Suction hose
Rubber hose Feed pipe assembly Return pipe assembly Pressure tube assembly to pipe assembly connection 11. Suction hose 12. Reserve tank
INSPECTION
l l l
Check tubes and pipes for cracking, damage or corrosion. Check hoses for cracking, damage, leakage or fluid seepage. Check flare nuts for damage.
TSB Revision
4WS - Rear Oil Pump
37B-11
REAR OIL PUMP

i

l l
Power Steering Fluid Draining Main Muffler Assembly Removal (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Muffler.)
Post-installation Operation l Main Muffler Assembly Installation (Refer to GROUP 15 - Exhaust Pipe and Muffler.) l Power Steering System Refilling and Bleeding (Refer to GROUP 37A - On-vehicle Service.) l 4WS System Bleeding (Refer to P.37B-4.) l 4WS System Operation Checking (Refer to P.37B-5.)
110-130 Nm. 80-94 ft.lbs.
80-94 ft.lbs.
213FOO2:
Removal steps
1. ;;;r shock absorber lower mounting :t: 2. Crossmember bracket 3. Crossmember mounting nut 4 (gt~~ffge;r-&.~; side) 5. Suction hose 6. Rear-wheel oil pump 7. O-ring I N O T E Do not disassemble the rear-wheel oil pump.

(A, CROSSMEMBER BRACKET / CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING NUT (ON DIFFERENTIAL SIDE) REMOVAL (1) Support the differential case with the transmission jack, then remove the crossmember bracket and crossmember mounting nut (on the differential side). (2) Slightly lower the crossmember.
TSB Revision
NOTES
42-1
BODY
CONTENTS
CENTER PILLAR GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR HANDLE AND LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR TRIM AND WATERPROOF FILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRIP LINE WEATHERSTRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGINE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FENDER* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUEL TANK FILLER DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIFTGATE GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOOSE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 49 41 43 47 42 63 18 24 23 52 20 38 25
11 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .............................. Door Adjustment ................................. 12 Door Inside Handle Play Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Door Window Glass Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Floor Pan Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i6 Fuel Filler Door Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11 Hood Adjustment ................................. Liftgate Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Sunroof Fit Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Sunroof Leakage Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 POWER WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
QUARTER WINDOW GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Sealants and Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 SUN ROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 WINDOW GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 WINDSHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injuryordeathtoservicepersonnel(from inadvertentfiringoftheairbag)ortothedriverand passenger(from rendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of,any SRS component or SF&related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*).
42-2 SPECIFICATIONS
HOOD, DOOR, LIFTGATE
Items Hood Door We Construction Regulator system Locking system Liftgate Type
BODY - Specifications
Specifications Rear hinged, front opening type (with gas damper) Front-hinged, sashless Wire type Pin-fork type Inner-hinged, with gas damper
GLASS
POWER WINDOW
Power window motor Items Type Revolutions under no load rpm Revolutions under At 1 Nm (.72 ftlbs.) load rpm At 2 Nm (1.45 ftlbs.) Bound current A Direction of rotation Power window main switch Specifications Permanent magnet type (Built-in circuit breaker) 75 or more 45-75
50-80
34 or less Clockwise and counter-clockwise
Power window sub switch Items Type Rated load current A Specifications Automatic reset type 10
1 TSB Revision
BODY - Specifications
Power window relay Items Maximum contact current A Rated coil current A Voltage drop between terminals V (At 12 V and the rated load current) Specifications 20 Max. 0.2 0.2 or less
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM
Items Door lock power relay
Specifications 8-16 10 0.2 or less / Voltage drop between terminals V / 0.2 or less
Door lock actuator
.2.5-4,.5 9-15 *Tripping time (at 12 V) second 5-30
NOTE *: Tripping time is the time consumed until current reaches 0.5 A after power connection.
Items Play of door inside handle mm (in.) 1 A Way) B (OPEN) C (FULL) Clearance of window glass to weatherstrip holder mm (in.) Adjustment of glass inclination amount Adjustment of glass longitudinal inclination Front pillar Roof 1 Quarter pillar j / Standard value 1 7 (28) 46 f 9 (1.81 f .35) 69 (2.72) 1 I
7.0 + 1 .O (.28 + .04) 7.7 + 1 .o (.30 rt .04) 12.0?1.0(.47+.04) 1
I
Roof lid sliding resistance N (Ibs.) Sunroof motor clutch slippage force N (Ibs.)
j 147 (33) or less 39-49 (8.7-11)
I
I

Items Front fender panel Splash shield Waterproof film Specified sealant 3M ATD Part No. 8625 or equivalent Remarks Ribbon sealer
1 TSB Revision
42-4
Items 1 Windshield Quarter window glass Liftgate glass
BODY - Specifications / Special Tools

Specified sealant Remarks
/ 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or eauivalent 1 and 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 or equivalent
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Tool number and name MB990834 / l$x;djusting Supersession MB990834-01 Application Adjustment of door fit
MB990449 / ::EG:PldMB991341C
Removal of window moulding
MB991 341 Scan tool (Multi-use tester cMUT>) ROM pack (For the number, refer to GROUP 00 - Precau-
<Up to 1993 models> Checking the power-windows system and the central door-locking system (ETACS input check)
power-window system and the oor-locking system (ETACS input
Checking the power-window system and the central door-locking system by using a check harness
1 TSB Revision
BODY - Troubleshooting
42-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
HOOD, LIFTGATE, GLASS AND DOORS
Symptom Hood/ Liftgate Improper closure Difficult locking and unlocking Uneven body clearance Uneven height
T
Incorrectly installed hood or liftgate
Window glass
Water leak through windshield Water leak through door window glass Water leak through liftgate window
IDoors
Door window malfunction Water leak through door edge Water leak from door center Door hard to open Door does not open or close completely
Uneven gap between body Wind noise around door
TSB Revision
42-6
BODY - Troubleshootina
HOW TO LOCATE WIND NOISES (1) Attach cloth tape to every place which might conceivably be the source of wind noise, such as panel seams, projections, moulding seams, glass and body seams, etc. (2) Then make a road test in order to determine that the places not covered by tape are not sources of wind noise.
Z18FOlOO
(3) Then remove the strips of tape one by one, making a road test after each is removed, until a wind noise source is discovered.
Y18FOiOO
(4) When such a place is found, cover it again and continue with the procedure so as to determine if there are any other noise sources. (5) If no others are found, the last remaining tape is the only source.
produced here
218FOO99
(6) Cut the remaining piece of tape into smaller pieces, attach it again as it was before, and then remove the pieces one by one in the same way so as to narrow down the source.
(7) Check to confirm that wind noise occurs when the last remaining tape is removed, and that noise does not occur when it is re-attached. (8) When the source(s) of the wind noise is finally located, attach butyl tape, body sealer or similar material to obstruct this source as much as possible.
Z18FOO97
1 TSB Revision
BODY - Troubleshootina POWER WINDOW AND CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM
42-7
With voltmeter
Data link connector
Im,rrnl \ \connector -~Jg~~~-
With &a
INPUT SIGNAL <Up to 1993 models> When using the scan tool (MUT) or voltmeter Using the scan tool or voltmeter, check whether or not the input signals from each switch are being input to the ETACS unit. (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector located at the right side of the junction block or connect the voltmeter between the ETACS terminal and the ground terminal. (2) Check if the buzzer of the scan tool sounds or the needle of the voltmeter moves when each switch is operated. If the buzzer sounds or the needle moves, the input signals are being input to the ETACS unit, so that switch can be considered to be functioning normally. If not, the switch or switch input circuit is faulty. Check the switch and the switch input circuit.
When using the MUT-II <Up to 1993 models>
<All models> When using the scan tdol (MUT-II) (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. On 1993 and earlier models, use the adapter harness contained in the scan tool to connect the scan tool. Caution Be sure to place the ignition switch in the OFF position before connecting or disconnecting the scan tool. (2) Perform ON/OFF operation of each switch. If the buzzer of the scan tool sounds once, the ECU input signal sent from the corresponding switch circuit system is normal.
00002231
Y2OFO164
Ground
<From 1994 models> When using the voltmeter (1) Use the special tool to connect a voltmeter to the ETACS terminal and ground terminal of the data link connector. (2) Perform ON/OFF operation of each switch. If the pointer of the voltmeter moves once, the ECU input signal sent from the corresponding switch circuit system is normal.
W2OFO163
1 TSB Revision
42-8
KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION
Disconnect the amplifier and inspect the connector on the wire harness side as shown in the chart below.
18X0820
Terminal No. 1
Signal Key reminder switch (vehicles with theft alarm)
Conditions ON (Key removed) OFF (Key installed)
Terminal voltage Battery positive voltage ov Battery positive voltage ov I I 5V
Door switch
All doors close (Door switch: OFF) One of doors open (Door switch: ON)
/ Door lock actuator (L.H.)
/ LOCK 1 UNLOCK
Keyless entry control unit power source
Ignition switch (ACC or ON) / Ignition switch (OFF)
10 11
Keyless entry control unit power source Dome light
Always All doors close (door switch: OFF) To operate Not to operate
Door lock output
ov Battery positive voltage ov
Door unlock output
To operate
theft-alarm system>
TSB Revision
BODY - Troubleshooting ELECTRICALLY OPERATED SLIDING SUNROOF

INSPECTION CHART FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS
Trouble symptom Sunroof does not operate within 30 seconds after drivers door is opened. Sunroof does not operate at all. I Inspection procedure 1 2 I
INSPECTldN PROCEDURE FOR TROUBLE SYMPTOMS Inspection Procedure 1 does not operate within 30 seconds after drivers door is opened.
After the drivers door is opened within 30 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off, the sunroof can still be operated for a further 30 seconds. If it is impossible, the drivers door switch or the sunroof control unit may be defective.
Procedure cause
l l l
Malfunction of door switch (drivers side) Malfunction of sunroof control unit Malfunction of wiring harness or connector
Drivers door switch continuity inspec-
Check the following connectors.
Replace
c Repair control unit and the drivers door switch
1 OK
1 Reolace the sunroof control unit.
Inspection Procedure 2 Sunroof does not operate at all.

One of the following items may be defective. Sunroof switch Sunroof motor Sunroof control unit Power supply circuit (including the fuse)
Procedure cause
l l l l
Malfunction Malfunction Malfunction Malfunction
of of of of
sunroof switch sunroof motor sunroof control unit wiring harness or connector
r-TSB Revision
42-10
NG
c Replace
Measure at sunroof control unit termina IA E-45. l Disconnect the connector antI mea8ure at the harness side. l Ignition switch ON (1) Voltage between terminal (3) ground OK: System voltage (2) Voltage between terminal (4) ground OK: System voltage ( (3) Co&-tin$ty between terminal (14) OK: Continuity
* Check the harness between the ignition switch (IGl)andthesunroofcontrolunit. Repair, if necessarv.
NG C-01, F-50, E-46, E-45 1 Check trouble symp
fi Repair
c Check the harness between fusible link No. 7 and the sunroof control unit. Repair, if necessarv.
1 OK
to P.23A-62.) Measure at sunroof switch terminal
63) NG - Check the following connector. E-45 NG OK + Replace
NG c Repair
Checkthe harness between the sunroof
Disconnect the connector and measure at the harness side. e Voltage between terminal (3) - NG ground E-45, E-47 OK: Svstem voltaae l-7 l Voltage- between ferminal (1) ground OK: System voltage l Continuity between terminal (2) ground OK: Continuity
l
NG OK NG
* Repair
* Check the harness between the sunroof control unit and the sunroof switch. Repair, if necessarv.
Replace the sunroof motor. P.23A-61 .I
* Repair
Continuity between temrinal (8) -
Check trouble shi NG
-vi Check the harness between the sunroof
Replace the sunroof control unit. NG Repair
TSB Revision
BODY - On-vehicle Service
42-11
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
HOOD ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen the hood mounting bolts, and then adjust the hood by moving it so that the clearance is equal on all sides. 2. Turn the bumpers A and B, adjust the height of the hood.
Z16FOO66
00002232
3. Loosen the hood latch mounting bolts, and move the hood latch to adjust the attachment between the hood latch and hood striker.
LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen the liftgate hinges mounting bolts, and then adjust the liftgate by moving it so that the clearance is equal on all sides.
Z18PO586
2. Turn the bumper to adjust the liftgate height.
Zl3FOO63
3. Loosen the liftgate latch mounting bolts, and move the liftgate latch to adjust the attachment between the liftgate latch and liftgate striker.
TSB Revision
42-12
BODY - On-vehicle Service FUEL FILLER DOOR ADJUSTMENT

Loosen the fuel filler door mounting screw and adjust the fuel filler door so that the clearance around the fuel filler door is even without any height differences.
DOOR ADJUSTMENT
Use the special tool to loosen the hinge mounting bolts on the body side, and then adjust the clearance around the door so that it is uniform on all sides. 2. If the door is not flush with the body, remove the spring pin from the door check, use the special tool to loosen the bolts for mounting the door hinges to the door. Move the door to adjust the door position along the body surface. Caution Attach protection tape to the fender edges where the hinge is installed. 3. If the door does not open freely, adjust the engagement of the striker with the door latch by means of the striker mounting shim and move the striker up and down or from side to side. 1.
21 MO461
00002233
Door belt
Door belt
DOOR WINDOW GLASS ADJUSTMENT (When removing and installing the door window glass)
1. Remove the door trim and waterproof film. (Refer to P.42-42.) 2. Remove the front pillar trim. 3. Remove the drip line weatherstrip. 4. Loosen the bolts and nuts of the following parts. l Glass guide front track l Glass guide rear track l Delta sash l Stabilizer inner front l Stabilizer inner rear . up stop l Door belt line outer weatherstrip NOTE Move the window glass down to the lowest position before removing the delta sash bolt.
TSB Revision

5.
42-13
/ L
Remove the stabilizer inner front and adjust the adjusting bolt for the dimension shown here.
mm (.20 in.)
218FO152
14.5 mm (57 in.)
Adjust the adjusting bolt for the stabilizer inner rear dimension shown here. 7. Raise door window glass. Push glass against the outer stabilizer of the door belt line outer weatherstrip and insert cloth or the like between the door inner panel and glass.
6.
ZlEFO154
8. Adjust glass to have standard clearance between the weatherstrip holder and window glass.
,ii
Caution Measure the clearance, specified in section A-A, B-B and C-C, at the corresponding weatherstrip holder screws as shown in the illustration. Section A-A Section B-B
(2)
W eatherstrip
Section C-C
218FO156
218FO155 moo1234
Adjustment
Adjustment procedures Adjust by turning the adjusting bolts of the glass guide front track and glass guide rear track. Caution Turn the two adjusting bolts of the glass guide rear track same amount. Move the stabilizer inner front and up stop up and down to adjust the forward or rearward tilt of glass when glass is fully closed. Do not turn the stabilizer inner front adjusting bolt. Section A-A
Standard value mm (in.) (1): 11.7f 1.0 (.46+ .04)
Adjustment of 1 inward tilt of glass
Section B-B
(1): 11.8 rt 1 .O (.46 ? .04)
Section C-C
(1): 20.5 + 1 .O (.80 + .04)
Section A-A
(2): 7.0 zk 1 .O (.28 + .04)
Section B-B
(2): 7.7 * 1 .o (.30 + .04)
Section C-C
(2): 12.0 + 1 .o (.47 + .04)
NOTE Adjust both inward tilt and forward or backward tilt of glass at the same time. TSB Revision
42-14

9. Force the stabilizer inner front onto the glass guide slider of the window glass assembly and tighten in position.
GI sli
Stabilizer inner front
Z18FO153
10. Force the up stop onto the glass stop of the window glass assembly and tighten in position. 11. Tighten the glass guide front and rear tracks. Caution Do not turn the adjusting bolts of guide tracks.
up stop
ZlSFO158
Window glass-end
12. Adjust the delta sash. so that the window glass end and the delta sash lip end are positioned as illustrated and tighten in position.
y1~~05mrn (.b4 + .b2 in.)
&
/ /
I
Lipend----
- Delta sash --
218FO161
13. Install the drip line weatherstrip. 14. Install the front pillar trim. 15. Install the door trim and the waterproof film. (Refer to P.42-42.) 16. Open and close the door and move up and down the window glass to check fitting of the door.
(When not removing and installing the door window glass)

Stabilizer inner front Stabilizer inner rear
IIll I liTiY/I~,/!,(i~e -1 \ Do& window ~~~~r~~ II I\ \-.-.

(front t r a c k 1 p 1, 3 18Fo368
1. Remove the door trim and waterproof film. (Refer to P.42-42.) 2. Loosen the bolts and nuts of the following parts. l Glass guide front track l Glass guide rear track l Door window regulator l Stabilizer inner front l Stabilizer inner rear . up stop 3. Lift the window glass up to its highest position.
Door wind& regulator
TSB Revision

4.
42-15
Tighten the stabilizer inner front so that it presses against the glass guide slider of the window glass assembly.
Stabilizer inner front
18FO153
5.
Tighten the up stop so that it presses against the glass stop of the window glass assembly.
6.
Tighten the stabilizer inner rear so that it presses against the window glass assembly.
7.
Check that the clearance between the weatherstrip holder and the top edge of the window glass is as shown in the illustration when the top edge of the window glass is touching the weatherstrip. 8. Check that the relative position of the window glass end the lip end of the delta sash is as shown in the illustration. 9. If the clearance or the position is not at the standard values, repeat the procedures in steps 4 and 5.
Window glass end
Weatherstrip holder
I
Deka sash
Weatherstrip W&w
ZlSFOlSl
ZlSFOXiS 00002235
glass j
TSB Revision
42-16

10. Turn the adjusting bolts of the glass guide rear track and the glass guide front track to adjust so that the corner of the window glass touches the, weatherstrip when the door is opened by the amount shown in the illustration. 11. Install the door trim and the waterproof film. (Refer to P.42-42.) 12. Open and close the door and move up and down the window glass to check fitting of the door.
Quarter panel
ZlEFO366
Larger dimension
dimension
Z18NO114 00002236
DOOR INSIDE HANDLE PLAY CHECK

1. Check that the door inside handle play is as specified. Standard value A (play): 7 mm (.28 in.) B (OPEN): 46 a 9 mm (1.81 + .35 in.) C (FULL): 69 mm (2.72 in.)
2. If out of specifications, adjust as described below. 1) Remove the door trim. (Refer to P.42-42.) 2) Loosen the screw attaching the inside handle and slide the inside handle back and forth to adjust the inside handle play.
Z18FOO33
FLOOR PAN CHECK

A common result of body leaks is a soaked floor mat pad or carpet, and its not unusual to find that the water is getting in through the floor pan to some other low point in the body. It is possible however, for water to enter higher up and run downward to soak the mat. Since a soaked mat should be removed for drying, its a good way to start your check. Of course, mat removal means youll have to take off door sill plates and pull out seats or seat cushion. But, this gives you a clear field for action so you can check body seam sealing and the plugs in the floor pan.
ZlSFOO91
TSB Revision
42-17
'
Its usually not practical to water test for floor pan or wheelhousing leaks unless a special underbody water spray arrangement is available. As an alternate, the best way to locate these leak points is to look for rusty seam edges or other traces of leaks after the mats and cushions are removed. Traces of mud are an indication that the water is coming in from below.
<;; .-iL
Z18FOO9C
SUNROOF LEAKAGE INSPECTION

Check if there are any leaks in the sunroof by the following procedure. (1) Fully close the roof lid. (2) Adjust the water pressure so that water comes out of the hose to a height of approximately 50 cm (20 in.) when the hose is held vertically facing upwards.
(3) Hold the end of the hose about 30 cm (12 in.) above the roof and let the water run onto the weatherstrip for 5 minutes or more. (4) While doing this, check if any water leaks through into the passenger compartment from around the roof lid.
SUNROOF FIT ADJUSTMENT

LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL ADJUSTMENTS 1. Remove the roof lid trim. 2. Fully close the roof lid. 3. Loosen the four roof lid assembly mounting nuts to adjust the roof lid assembly forward and back or to the left and right.
16WO163 16FO400 00003720
I
D -
I 0
VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the headlining. 2. Fully close the roof lid. 3. Loosen four adjuster nuts and adjust so that the roof lid is flush with the roof panel.
A16F03DQ
TSB Revision
42-18 ENGINE HOOD
BODY - Engine Hood
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION I
1
I
Adjustment l Hood Adjustment (Refer to P.42-11.)
6.
4 8 20 \I /
cup to 1993 models>

5 Nm 4 ft.lbs.
- _.
14
ZlRFO261
15 6
9 Nni i 5
<From 1994 models> y ,20

8 ft.lbs.
7 ft.lbs.
Zl RF01 27
.;bs.
7 ft.lbs. m
8 ft.lbs.
1
1. Hood latch 2. Hood lock release handle 3. Hood lock release cable 4. Hood weatherstrip (Front) 5. Hood weatherstrip (Rear) ,A+ 6. Bumper A (Body side) ,A( 7. Bumper A (Hood side) .A+ 8. Bumper B 9. Bumper 10. Hood side weatherstrip (LH) 11. Hood side weatherstrip (RH) 12. Heat protector panel 13. Heat protector 14. Hood garnish assembly 15. Hood switch (Vehicles with theft-alarm system)
00002237
Zl RF0347
16. Engine room inspection light 17. Inspection light switch
Hood hinge removal steps

Washer tube (Refer to GROUP 51 - Windshield Wiper and Washer.) 18. Inspection light wiring harness 19. Hood gas spring 20. Hood 21. Hood hinge
l
Caution 1. p try to disassemble the hood gas spring or burn 2. Aiways bore a hole in the gas spring to release the interior gas before the spring is discarded.
TSB Revision
BODY - Engine Hood INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS

.A+BUMPER B, A INSTALLATION Install the bumpers as illustrated.
1 .I
42-19
INSPECTION
HOOD SWITCH CHECK Check the continuity between the terminals.
Switch position
1 Z18RO665
Terminal No. 2 0
Lid switch unpressed Lid switch depressed
218FOO84
00002230
LIGHT SWITCH CHECK Turn the switch ON/OFF and check continuity between terminals (between the connector terminal and the switch body).
Switch position 1 (Connector terminal) I 2 (Switch body) I
I
218F0044
ON OFF
1 TSB Revision
42-20 LIFTGATE
Adjustment l Liftgate Adjustment (Refer to P.42-11.)
BODY - Liftgate
6 \
Z18FO262
5 Nm I 4 ft.lbs.
00002240
Z18FO138
;b/Nm 7 ft.lbs.
.A4 1. Bumper
2. Liftgate damper (upper) 3. Liftgate damper (lower)
Liftgate gas spring and liftgate opening weatherstrip removal steps

Liftgate trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) l Rear side trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 4. Liftgate gas spring 5. Liftgate opening weatherstrip
l
Liftgate trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) l Liftgate side trim (LH) (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) l Rear side trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 4. Liftgate gas spring 6. Connection for liftgate wiring harness 7. Liftgate l Headlining (Refer to GROUP 52A - Headlining.) 8. Liftgate hinge
l
Liftgate and liftgate hinge removal steps

l
Washer tube (Refer to GROUP 51 - Windshield Wiper and Washer.)
Caution 1. Never try to disassemble the liftgate gas spring or burn it. 2. Always bore a hole in the gas spring to release the interior gas before the spring is discarded.
TSB Revision
BODY - Liftgate
42-21
'4
00002241
218FO138
9 Nm
7 ft.lbs.
11 Liftgate lock cylinder removal steps

l l
Liftgate lock release cable and handle removal steps

Scuff plate (drivers side) (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 9. Release handle cover 10. Liftgate lock release handle l Quarter trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) l Rear side trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) l Rear end trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 11. Liftgate latch 12. Liftgate lock release cable
l
Rear end trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) Rear combination light (Refer to GROUP 51 - Garnishes and Mouldings.) Rear panel garnish (Refer to GROUP 51 - Garnishes and Mouldings.)
14. Liftgate lock cylinder switch 15. Retainer 16. Liftgate lock cylinder
Liftgate latch removal steps

Rear end trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 11. Liftgate latch
l
Liftgate striker removal steps

0 Liftgate trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 13. Liftgate striker
1 TSB Revision
42-22
BODY - Liftgate INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

.A+ BUMPER INSTALLATION Install the bumper so that the amount of projection from the liftgate is as shown in the illustration.
Y18FOOW
INSPECTION
LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH CHECK (1) Unlock the liftgate latch. (2) Check the continuity between the terminals.
Switch position 1 Liftgate latch locked
Z18FOO89
Terminal No. 2
Liftgate latch unlocked
LIFTGATE LOCK CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK Check the continuity between the terminals.
Switch position Press When switch is pressed
ZlBFOO88
,Termiyal
Noi
Li
When switch is not pressed n
TSB Revision
BODY - Fuel Tank Filler Door
42-23
FUEL TANK FILLER DOOR

i I
I
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Rear Side Trim,. Quarter Trim and Scuff Plate Removal and lnstallatlon (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.)
I
Adjustment
l
Fuel Filler Door Adjustment (Refer to f?42-12.)
!i
Z18FO130
Z18FOO68
00002242
218FOO69
Z18FOO85 Removal steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Fuel filler door Fuel filler door hook Release handle cover Fuel filler door lock release handle Fuel filler door lock release cable
TSB Revision
42-24 FENDER
BODY - Fender
When remkving and installing the front fender panel
Section A-A
Z18FOO62 Fender
00002243
218FO126
Sealant:
3M ATD
Part No. 8625 or equivalent Removal steps

1. Front splash shield
l
Side airdam
(Refer to GROUP 51 - Aero Parts.) 2. Front splash shield 0 Front bumper (Refer to GROUP 51 - Front Bumper.) 3. Front fender panel 4. Front fender bracket
TSB Revision
BODY - Loose Panel
42-25
LOOSE PANEL
Liftgate gas spring r bracket
18FO124
Rear floor side member
fiEfZE&. < L * \ *, z$$&:-a
xossmemuar
Air guide duct
18FO120
TSB Revision
BODY - Window Glass
WINDOW GLASS
GENERAL
For bonding of the windshield and liftgate glass, a single-liquid urethane adhesive is used. ADHESIVE AND RESERVE ITEMS
Adhesive and Reserve Items Applications Quantity One cartridge As required for cutting adhesive Five pieces of wire ,ii
Adhesive
3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608
Reserve items
Wire (dia. x length)
0.6 mm x 1 m j (.02 in. x 3.3 ft.)

Adhesive gun 3M ATD Part No. 8906 Wiping rags Sealer Glass holder Windshield moulding (Service Part) Window dam (Service Part) for prevention of water leaks and gathering after adhesive application for adhesive application for cleaning jointing surfaces One As required As required As required Two One / As required
d,
TSB Revision
BODY - Window Glass

WINDSHIELD AND LIFTGATE GLASS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
( Removal of glass from I-, body i (wire)
Cleaning bonding surface Scoop out existing adhesive to less than 2 mm (.08 in) thick and clean bonding surface. Then dn/ 3 minutes or more.
L
Body side
Glass side
I ,
When glass is reused
When glass is replaced
Cleaning bonding surface Scoopoutexistingadhesivecompletelyand clean bonding surface. Then, dry 3 minutes or more.
Cleaning bonding surface Clean the bonding surface and dry 3 minutes or more.
Applying primer Apply primer amply on bonding surface and dry 3 minutes or more.
Bonding window dam Apply the window dam to the glass along the reference position inside of the glass periphery.
Fitting clips Fit the liftgate moulding upper and lower clips.
Applying primer Apply primer amply on bonding surface and dry 3 minutes or more.
Applying adhesive Applying uniform coat of adhesive to the inside of glass periphery.
Installation of glass to
Cleaning of attaching
(afier aboti 3. minutes or _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ !fwaty leaks 1: more folEQjtZtallation) / 1 Application of sealer ( 1 Installation of mouldina. 1
,r---A-l
1 TSB Revision
42-28
Recommended tool Make the tool by
BODY - Window Glass MOULDING REPLACEMENT (BONDING TYPE)

1. Remove the mouldings. 2. To cut the existing adhesive, make a tool such as the one shown.
Sharpen the edge here
mm 16 in.)
218u0161
3. Using the tool, scoop out the existing adhesive. Caution 1. Do not remove existing adhesive more than necessary. Be careful not to damage the coated surface. 2. If the coated surface is damaged, apply paint.
Existing adhesive Remove here
ZlWO160
oulding
Apply primer
4. Cut off the lower portion of a new moulding and install the moulding temporarily to check that it is seated securely. 5. Apply primer to the moulding. Caution Never touch the primer coated surface.
Lower portion of moulding
216FOOE'
6.
Mouding ----x?
Apply adhesive to the illustrated area and install the moulding before it hardens.
216FOO57
Scrape away excessive sealant forced out during installation of the moulding from the glass or body and wipe the surfaces clean with 3M ATD Part No. 8906 or equivalent. 8. After the work, leave the vehicle as it is until the adhesive hardens. 7.
TSB Revision
BODY - Windshield
42-29
WINDSHIELD

l
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Deck Garnish Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 51 - Garnishes and Mouldings.) l Roof Drip Moulding Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 51 - Garnishes and Mouldings.) Yellow \
l l
Headlining Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Headlining.) Front Pillar Trim Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.)
2*
White
NOTE * Vehicles with sun
Section A <Vehicles without sun roofj
Section B Adhesive
;x$ 12-15@;;z~ -/;/
C[ Cut off nozzle end
Section A <Vehicles with sun roof> Adhesive
Section C Adhesive
a
(.31) Zl SF0060 mm (in.) 12 (47)
00002245
/ L
Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent Primer: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 or equivalent Removal steps <Vehicles with sun roof> <Vehicles without sun roof> 1. Windshield moulding .A+ 3. Windshield moulding 2. Moulding clip (A, ,A4 4. Windshield glass +A, ,A4 4. Windshield glass 6. Window spacer (lower) ,A4 5. Window spacer (upper) ,A4 6. Window spacer (lower) TSB Revision
42-30
BODY - Windshield REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

dA, WINDSHIELD GLASS REMOVAL Remove windshield using the following procedure. (1) For protection of the body (coated surface), apply cloth tape to all around the body where the glass is installed. (2) Using a drill of sharp bit, drill a hole through the adhesive fixing the windshield glass. (3) Run a wire through the hole from inside of the compartment. (4) Pull the wire alternately from inside and outside of the compartment to cut off the adhesive. Caution Be careful to prevent contact of the wire with the windshield glass edge. (5) Put matchmarks on the body and the glass. (6) Using the special tool, remove the windshield glass.
MB99fl80
Matchmarks
\\
219M0099
(7) Using a sharp knife, scoop out existing adhesive from the body flange to 2 mm (.08 in.) or less thickness all around the window opening. (8) Finish smooth the flange surfaces. Caution 1. Do not remove the adhesive more than necessary. 2. Be careful not to damage the coated surface of the body with the knife. If it is damaged, apply retouch paint of anti-corrosive. (9) If the glass is reused, scoop out existing adhesive and fragments of the window dam completely from the glass and degrease with 3M ATD Part No. 8906 or equivalent. (lO)Degrease the body same way. Caution After degreasing, allow three minutes or more to dry well before next work. Do not touch the degreased surface.
TSB Revision
BODY - Windshield INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS
42-31
<Vehicles without sun roof>

Windshield moulding
ZlSFOO55
<Vehicles with sun roof>

12 (.47) Windshield moulding
,A+WlNDOW SPACER (LOWER) / WINDOW SPACER (UPPER) / WINDSHIELD GLASS / WINDSHIELD MOULDING INSTALLATION (1) <On vehicles without sun roof> Install the windshield moulding to the windshield. <On vehicles with sun roof> Affix the window spacer (upper) to the specified area of the windshield. (2) Affix the window spacer (lower) to the specified area of the windshield. (3) When replacing glass, fit a new glass once to the body and put matchmarks on the body and glass. (4) Apply a uniform coat of primer to the illustrated areas of the body and glass making sure it is applied without breaks or thin spots. Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 or equivalent Caution 1. The primer is used to strengthen bonding power. Make sure that it covers the surfaces completely. Note that the primer if applied to thick can cause loss of bonding power. 2. Never touch the primer coated surface. (5) Allow 3 to 30 minutes to dry the primer.
218FO310
Section a.
1)
Section
218FOO54
mm (in.) *l: Glass surface l 2: Body surface
TSB Revision
I
42-32
BODY - Windshield
(6) Within 30 minutes of primer application, apply the adhesive all around the windshield glass uniformly. Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent NOTE Cutting the nozzle tip of the sealant gun to a V-shape will help application. (7) Install the windshield moulding.
Cut off nozzle tip mm (in.)
~18~0060 J
LJ
1 A
Section A <Vehicles without sun roof>
(8) After application of the adhesive, line up the match-marks on the glass and body and force the glass lightly and evenly onto the body for complete fitting. (9) Remove adhesive from around and on the glass and body surfaces using a spatula and wipe the surfaces clean. (lO)After the work (installation of the glass), allow to stand until the adhesive hardens. Caution If an infrared lamp or other means are used for quicker hardening, keep the surface temperature 60C (140F) or lower. (11)After about 30 minutes or more following bonding of the windshield glass to the body, check for water leaks.
! I L, I I ~
Caution
1. If the vehicle is to be moved, do so gently. 2. When checking for water leaks, do not apply water with the hose end squeezed.
<Vehicles with sun roof>

Adhesive indow spacer(upper; Windshield glass
12 (.4j)
Section B
Adhesive
Section C ()
55 (2.17)
4 mm (in.)
218FO307
TSB Revision
BODY - Center Pillar Glass
42-33
~ I
CENTER PILLAR GLASS

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Quarter Upper Trim Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.)
Center Pillar Garnish Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 51 - Garnishes and Mouldings.)
18FOOO2
00002240
18FOl34
LJ
1. Center pillar glass 2. Packing
TSB Revision
42-34
BODY - Quarter Window Glass
QUARTER WINDOW GLASS

l
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Quarter Upper Trim Removal and installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.)
Center Pillar Garnish Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 51 - Garnishes and Mouldings.)
Zl8FOOO2
218FO132
Section A Adhe 7 Adhesive
Cut off nozzle tip Section C 50 (1.97) -
mm (in.) I Adhesive:
218F0060
IIPrimer:
L
3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 or equivalent
Removal steps 4A, ,A+ 1. Quarter window moulding and glass

2. Packing 3. Window dam
TSB Revision
BODY - Quarter Window Glass REMOVAL SERVICE POINT
42-35
(A,QUARTER WINDOW MOULDING AND GLASS REMOVAL (1) For protection of the body (coated surface), apply cloth tape to all around the body where the glass is installed. (2) Using a cutter knife, cut off the quarter window moulding along its edge.
(3) Run a wire between the glass and the body at the upper portion of the quarter window and pull it back and forth along the glass to cut through the adhesive. When doing so, pay attention to the bolt. Caution Hold the window glass with the .glass holders to prevent it from falling when the adhesive is cut through.
(4) Using a sharp knife, scoop out existing adhesive from the body flange to 2 mm (.08 in.) or less thickness all around the window opening. (5) Finish smooth the flange surface. Caution 1. Do not remove the adhesive more than necessary. 2. Be careful not to damage the coated surface of the body with the knife. If it is damaged, apply retouch paint or anti-corrosive. (6) Degrease using 3M ATD Part No. 8906 or equivalent. Caution After degreasing, allow three minutes or more to dry well before next work. Do not touch the degreased surface.
1 TSB Revision
42-36
BODY - Quarter Window Glass INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT
Section A
cGT~q$~ B..
lo* (.39) 10* (.39) ;/ *& 20'2(.79)
4 c -r-,:,0002
bAdQUARTER WINDOW MOULDING AND GLASS INSTALLATION (1) Apply a uniform coat of primer to the illustrated areas of the body and glass making sure it is applied without breaks or thin spots. Caution 1. The primer is used to strengthen bonding power. Make sure that it covers the surfaces completely. Note that the primer if applied to thick can cause loss of bonding power. 2. Never touch the primer coated surface. (2) Allow 3 to 30 minutes to dry the primer.
Section B 50(1.97)
Section C
l 1 : Glass surface l 2: Body surface mm (in.)
218FO143
00002250
(3). Within 30 minutes of primer application, apply the adhesive all around the windshield glass uniformly. Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent NOTE Cutting the nozzle tip of the sealant gun to a V-shape will help application.
Y18FOO60
Cut off nozzle tip
mm (in.)
TSB Revision
BODY - Quarter Window Glass
42-37
Section A
Adhesive
10 (.39)
(4) After application of the adhesive, line up the matchmarks on the glass and body and force the glass lightly and evenly onto the body for complete fitting. (5) Remove adhesive from around and on the glass and body surfaces using a spatula and wipe the surfaces clean. (6) After the work (installation of the glass), allow to stand until the adhesive hardens. Caution If an infrared lamp or other means are used for quicker hardening, keep the surface temperature 60C (140F) or lower. (7) After about 30 minutes or more following bonding of the windshield glass to the body, check for water leaks. Caution 1. If the vehicle is to be moved, do so gently. 2. When checking for water leaks, do not squeeze the hose end.
Section B
Section C
Adhes$e
mm (in.)
7 (.28)
Y18FO137
TSB Revision
42-38 LIFTGATE GLASS
BODY - Liftgate Glass

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Rear Wiper Arm Removal and installation (Refer to GROUP 51 -Windshield Wiper and Washer.) l Liftgate Upper Trim Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.)
l l
Liftgate Trim Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) Liftgate Side Trim Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.)
21 SF0323 Section A
Section B
12-15 (.47-59) Primer
Adhesive
1 (.26) 7 0 (.39) 7
lfib Section C
27 (1.06) (.,_I!; 12-15 10 (.39) ~,8F0308
00002317
mm (in.)
Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent rimer: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 or equivalent Removal steps
1. Defogger connector 2. Glass antenna connection 7. Clip grommet
4A, AA,
3. Liftgate 4. Liftgate 5. Liftgate 6. Liftgate
moulding upper moulding upper clip moulding lower moulding lower clip
+Bb .A( 8. Lift gate glass

9. Liftgate moulding side 10. Window spacer (upper) 11. Window spacer (lower)
TSB Revision

MB990449
42-39

(A,LlFTGATE MOULDING UPPER / LIFTGATE MOULDING LOWER REMOVAL Using the special tool, pry up the clipped portions to remove the liftgate moulding upper and lower. +B, LIFTGATE GLASS REMOVAL Remove the same way as the windshield glass. (Refer to P.42-30.)

.A+ LIFTGATE GLASS INSTALLATION (1) Affix the window spacer to the specified area of the liftgate glass. (2) To replace the liftgate glass with a new one, fit the new liftgate glass to the body and put match marks to the body and the liftgate glass. (3) Apply a uniform coat of primer to the illustrated areas of the body and glass making sure it is applied without breaks or thin spots. Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN PRIMER 8608 or equivalent Caution 1. The primer is used to strengthen bonding power. Make sure that it covers the surfaces completely. Note that the primer if applied to thick can cause loss of bonding power. 2. Never touch the primer coated surface. (4) Allow 3 to 30 minutes to dry the primer.
v 18*2 (.71)
~64 (2.52)
(3) 7
Section B
18*2 (.71) *l: Glass surface *2: Body surface mm (in.)
00002318
Zi
8FO309
(5) Within 30 minutes of primer application, apply the adhesive all around the liftgate glass uniformly. Adhesive: 3M SUPER FAST URETHAN 8609 or equivalent NOTE Cutting the nozzle tip of the sealant gun to a V-shape will help application.
i
1 TSB Revision
42-40
1 A L-..---------- -----------=y

(6) After application of the adhesive, line up the matchmarks on the glass and liftgate and force the glass lightly and evenly for complete fitting. (7) Remove adhesive from around and on the glass and body surfaces using a spatula and wipe the surfaces clean. (8) After the work (installation of the glass), allow to stand until the adhesive hardens. Caution If an infrared lamp or other means are used for quicker hardening, keep the surface temperature 60C (140F) or lower. (9) After about 30 minutes or more following bonding of the liftgate glass to the tail gate, check for water leaks. Caution 1. If the vehicle is to be moved, do so gently. 2. When the checking for water leaks, do not squeeze the hose end.
Section A
Adhesive Window spacer
j37 (1.06) 64 (2.52) Section B
-1
27 (1.06) Section C Adhesive
mm (in.)
10 (.39)
218FO308
TSB Revision
BODY - Door Assembly
42-41
DOOR ASSEMBLY
LJ , REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Adjustment l Door Adjustment (Refer to P.42-12.)
45 Nm*l 33 ft.lbs.
. :f i?b,. 12 Nm 8 ft.lbs.
22 N m
16 ft.lbs.
LJ
NOTE *l: Up to 1994 models *2: From 1995 models
5
16FO206 00002320
22 Nm
16 ft.lbs.
Door assembly removal steps

1. Connection for door wiring harness connector 2. Spring pin 3. Door assembly 4. Upper hinge 5. Lower hinge
Striker removal steps

7. Striker 8. Striker shim
Door switch removal steps

9. Door switch cap 10. Door switch
Door check strap removal steps

Waterproof film (Refer to P.42-42.) 2. Spring pin .A+ 6. Door check strap
l l
Door trim (Refer to P.42-42.)
TSB Revision
42-42
BODY - Door Assembly / Door Trim and Watekproof Film INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT
,A+ DOOR CHECK STRAP INSTALLATION Install the door check strap with the identification mark facing Hi
ldentificition mark
Z18FOO38
INSPECTION
DOOR SWITCH CHECK Operate the switch, and check the continuity between the terminals.
Switch position 1
t=-,-z. 0
Terminal No. 2 3
Switch
218AO158
Open (ON)
Depressed (OFF)
DOOR TRIM AND WATERPROOF FILM

NOTE C : Clip locations
8 Removal steps
00002321
218FO203
4Ab
1. 2. 3. 4.
Clip Door window regulator handle Escutcheon Door light
6. Door trim carpet 7. Door trim 8. Speaker garnish 9. Power window switch
5. Inside handle cover 1 TSB Revision
10. Waterproof film
BODY - Door Glass and Reaulator

9 n
uoor lrlm ana waterproor him I
42-43

+A, CLIP REMOVAL Use a shop towel to remove the clip; and remove door window regulator handle.
Lji
Clip
218UO392
i i-l; 4ih ti
218UO430 00002322
DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR

Adjustment l Door Window Glass Adjustment (Refer to P.42-12.)
00002323
218FO200
Removal steps
l l
Door trim (Refer to P.42-42.) Waterproof film (Refer to P.42-42.) 1. Delta cover inner 2. Delta cover outer l Door belt line outer weatherstrip (Refer to P.42-63.) 3. up stop
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Stabilizer inner front Stabilizer inner rear Delta sash Door window glass Door glass guide track front Door window regulator assembly Door glass guide track rear
1 TSB Revision
42-44 POWER WINDOW
BODY - Power Window

Adjustment
l
Door Window Glass Adjustment (Refer to P.42-12.)
9----a
218FOlQQ
218F0198
00002324
Door window regulator assembly removal steps

0 Door trim (Refer to P.42-42.) 0 Waterproof film (Refer to P.42-42.) 1. Delta cover inner 2. Delta cover outer l Door belt line outerweatherstrip (Refer to P.42-63.) 3. up stop 4. Stabilizer inner front /
5. Stabilizer inner rear 6. Delta sash 7. Door window glass 8. Door window regulator assembly 9. Door glass guide track front 10. Door glass guide track rear
Power window switch assembly removal steps

l Door trim (Refer to P.42-42.) 11. Power window switch assembly
INSPECTION
POWER WINDOW RELAY CHECK
(1) Remove the knee protector assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) (2) Remove the power window relay from indoor relay box.
f/YJ
218FOO86
TSB Revision
BODY - Power Window
42-45
(3) Apply battery voltage to terminal 1, and check for continuity when terminal 3 is grounded.
Battery voltage 1 Continuity no voltage Continuity with voltage Terminal No. 3 4 5
0 0 0
I I I I I I I I I I L.
POWER WINDOW MOTOR CHECK (1) Connect the battery directly to the motor terminal and check that the slider moves smoothly. (2) Connect the battery in reverse polarity and check that the slider moves in opposite direction.
I
ZlBFO195
CIRCUIT BREAKER CHECK (INCORPORATED IN THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR) (1) Press the UP switch to fully close the window glass, and
continue to press the switch for 10 seconds.
(2) At the moment that the UP switch is released, press the DOWN switch. The circuit breaker can be considered good if at this time the door window glass begins to open
within 60 seconds.
TSB Revision
BODY - Power Window

Power window passengers side switch ~
/ D&or lock A Power window drivers side switch View A
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH CHECK Check for continuity in accordance to the following connection table.
I switch =ower window

ock switch
Switch position
Terminal No.
Drivers side switch
Passengers side switch
Power window switch Power window lock switch (lock)
v
UP OFF DOWN
, 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
o-
0 n
0
0 0
POWER WINDOW SUB SWITCH CHECK Check for continuity in accordance with the following connection table.
Switch position Door lock switch / Power window View A switch Terminal No.
3
UP OFF 0
0
0
0 0 0
DOWN
tot
TSB Revision
BODY - Door Handle and Latch
42-47
DOOR HANDLE AND LATCH I REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION id- Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation
l
Door Trim and Waterproof Film Removal and Installation (Refer to P.42-42.)
\ 6
ZlSFO202 ZlSFOO41
OoooP325
Door inside handle removal

l
Door inside handle play check (Refer to P.42-16.) 1. Door inside handle
Door outside handle and latch removal steps

2. Door key cylinder unlock switch connectoi (Vehicles with central door locking or theft-alarm system) 3. Door outside handle 4. Ring 5. Door lock key cylinder 6. Door latch assembly
TSB Revision
42-48
BODY - Door Handle and Latch INSPECTION

DOOR KEY CYLINDER UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK cup to 1993 models> The key cylinder unlock switch is normal if there is not continuity between terminals 1 and 2 when the key is turned approx. 20 clockwise or counterclockwise from the neutral position, and there is continuity when it is turned further.
<From 1994 models> Insert the key and turn it to the LOCK or UNLOCK position to check for continuity as follows: <Vehicles with central door locking system> or <Vehicles with central door locking system and theft-alarm system> Switch position
218FO349
00002327 I
Terminal No.
I
1 L.H. side Door key cylinder unlock switch LOCK Neutral UNLOCK R.H. side LOCK Neutral UNLOCK <Vehicles with theft-alarm system only> 1 Switch position I
,
0 0
0
I
0 0
I
0 /
Terminal No. 1
TSB Revision
BODY - Central Door Locking System
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM / L/

\ Qb
16FOl96 18FO205 00002328
Door lock actuator removal
Door lock switch removal

l
\ L
Door trim and waterproof film (Refer to P.42-42.) l Door latch assembly (Refer to P.42-47.) 1. Door lock actuator
l
Door trim (Refer to P.42-42.) 2. Door lock switch
<Drivers side>
INSPECTION DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

(1) Place the rod in the LOCK position, apply the battery power to the terminal [(3) for drivers side or (1) for passengers side] and check to see that when the terminal [(l) for drivers side or (3) for passengers side] is grounded, the rod moves to the UNLOCK position. (2) Then place the rod in the UNLOCK position, apply the battery power to the terminal [(l) for drivers side or (3) for passengers side], and check to see that when the terminal [(3) for drivers side or (1) for passengers side] is grounded, the rod moves to the LOCK position. (3) Check to ensure that when the rod is placed in the UNLOCK position, there is a continuity between the terminals (2) and (4), and that when the rod is placed in the LOCK position, there is no continuity.
View A
LOCK
218FOO62
View A
TSB Revision
42-50

DOOR LOCK SWITCH CHECK Check for continuity in accordance to the following connection table. <Vehicles with power window> Power window main switch side
<Vehicles with power window>

Power window main switch side
YlSFOlO7
Power window sub switch side
Power window sub switch side
<Vehicles without power window>
<Vehicles without power window>
WEif--$
View A
>l
218FOO50
UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK POWER RELAY CHECK (1) Remove the knee protector assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) (2) Remove the door lock power relay 1 from indoor relay box. (3) Remove the door lock power relay 2. (Refer to P.42-52.)
TSB Revision
42-51
(4) Check for continuity between terminals under the conditions described below.
/ i
Continuity no voltage
TSB Revision
42-52
BODY - Keyless Entry System
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM <From 1993 model>

ZlSF0317
Removal steps
l
Quarter trim (L.H.) (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 1. Antenna 2. Light automatic shut-off unit 3. Rear intermittent wiper relay 4. Door lock power relay 2 5. Receiver assembly
1 TSB Revision
BODY - Keyless Entry System INSPECTION
42-53
Screw F12D004
BATTERY REPLACEMENT (1) Remove the mounting screw and take the battery out of the transmitter. (2) Install a new battery with its positive side down. Replacement battery: Coin type j battery ,CR2032 (3) Insert the tabs first. Then, being careful not to shift the O-ring, assemble the transmitter. (4) Make sure that the keyless entry system operates properly. NOTE (1) When the transmitter is opened, be careful not to allow water, dust, etc. to stick to the inside of the transmitter. In addition, do not touch the precision electronic device. (2) If the O-ring is shifted while assembling the transmitter, water, dust, etc. may enter the transmitter, resulting in transmitter troubles.
Code registration switch
L
218NO364
SECRET CODE REGISTERING METHOD <Up to 1995 models> The transmitter has each individual secret code stored in memory. When, therefore, the transmitter or receiver is replaced or the trouble is presumed to be caused by the faulty registration of the secret code, it is necessary to register the secret code on EEPROM inside the receiver. Since two different secret code at the most can be placed in the storage space of EEPROM, the old code will no longer be usable if the undermentioned registration operation is repeated twice. Meanwhile, before registering the code, it should be confirmed that an ordinary door lock function can be performed by key operation. (1) Place the code registration switch to the SET I position (registration mode).
(2) Press the LOCK or UNLOCK switch of the transmitter.
/ L
~18N0527
TSB Revision
42-54
Code

(3) Set the code registration switch of the receiver to the FIX position (operation mode). (4) Confirm that the keyless entry system operates normally. The registration is completed if the system operates normally. If not, repeat the steps (1) through (3). NOTE (1) In case there are two transmitters, register the code on the SET II side in the same manner as the SET I side. In addition, even if there is only one transmitter, register the code on SET I and SET II to prevent malfunction. (2) Make sure that after a code has been registered, the registration switch is set to the FIX position positively.
*y.*.y.blA.olv;.-----. ic I:_:
218N0363
1 ~ I I
<From 1996 models> Since the transmitter is memorized by each individual code, it is necessary to register a code on EEPROM in the receiver if the transmitter or receiver is replaced, or cause of the trouble is presumed to be due to faulty registration of the code. Since two different codes at the most can be memorized in the memory space of EEPROM, the old code will become unable to be used if the following registration operation is repeated twice. Meanwhile, register a code after confirming that an ordinary door lock function can be worked through key operation. (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. NOTE This grounds the data link connector No. 1 and gets ready for a code registration. Caution Turn the ignition switch to OFF before connecting or disconnecting the scan tool. (2) Close all doors. (3) Turn the ignition switch to ACC and return it to OFF. NOTE This locks and unlocks the door once, and then a code can be registered. (4) After pressing any switch on the transmitter once, press it two more times within 10 seconds to register the same code for SET I and SET II. (5) After registration is completed, the door will be locked and unlocked once.
I ~ Lj I I I
S&n tool
I
22OFO164 1
tin
TSB Revision
42-55
NOTE If there are two transmitters, one registration procedure is the same as the other one. In addition, the second registration shall be done within a minute after the first one was completed. (6) After the second registration is completed, the door will be locked and unlocked once. (7) Registration mode finishes under the following conditions. l Registration of two transmitter codes are completed. l One minute has passed since the registration mode setting. l Scan tool is disconnected. (ground released.) o Ignition switch is turned ON. l Any of the doors are opened.
.. ITSBRevtslon
42-56
BODY - Sunroof
SUNROOF <Removable type>

l
Sunroof Leakage Inspection (Refer to p.42-17.)
218FO292
Roof lid glass removal steps

1. Sunroof trim assembly _ 2. Roof lid glass assembly 3. Weatherstrip 4. Slide lock latch assembly 5. Roof lid male hinge 6. Roof lid glass .A4 7. Roof inner weatherstrip 8. Roof lid female hinge 9. Deflector
Roof lid regulator assembly removal steps

1. Sunroof trim assembly 2. Roof lid glass assembly 10. Interior temperature sensor 11. Regulator cover 12. Roof lid regulator assembly

,A+ ROOF INNER WEATHERSTRIP INSTALLATION Install the roof weatherstrip with its adhered joint located on the center line of the vehicle (toward the rear of the vehicle).
Front of vehicle
219FO203
TSB Revision
BODY - Sunroof
42-57
SUNROOF <Electrically operated sliding type>

( REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
u , I
Post-installation Operation l Sunroof Leakage Inspection (Refer to p.42-17.) l Sunroof Fit Adjustment (Refer to p.42-17.)
7 6
A18FO389
Roof lid removal steps

1. Roof lid trim 2. Roof lid 3. Roof lid weatherstrip
Slide & tilt ECU removal steps

9. Headlining 10. Slide & tilt ECU
Sunroof motor removal steps Sunroof switch removal steps

4. Cover 5. Sunroof switch panel assembly 6. Sunroof switch 9. Headlining
,Bd 11. Sunroof motor
Deflector assembly removal steps

l
Roof lid fully opened 7. Link assembly 8. Deflector assembly TSB Revision
42-58
BODY - Sunroof
A18FO390
Lifter-slider assembly/drive unit assembly removal steps

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Front corner panel Front holder Rear holder Slide rail Lifter assembly Slider assembly Rear timing Tube cover Drive unit assembly
Frame assembly removal steps +A,

+A, 1. Roof lid trim 2. Roof lid 7. Link assembly 8. Deflector assembly 9. Headlining +B, .A+ 21. Drain hose 22. Frame assembly
TSB Revision
BODY - Sunroof REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
42-59
dA, ROOF LID TRIM/ROOF LID REMOVAL (1) Fully slide-open the sunroof and bring it in the tilted position. (2) Remove the roof lid trim. (3) Remove the roof lid mounting nuts, then lift off the roof lid.
Rear \
Front / /
+B, DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL Tie a cord to the end of the drain hose, and wind tape around the tie until it is smooth. Then pull the drain hose out from the passenger compartment.
Drain h&e I
Cord
Al8FO3Sa

.A+ DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION (1) Tie the cord which has been used for removal again to the end of the drain hose, and wind tape around the tie until it is smooth. (2) Pull at the cord to install the drain hose. .Bd SUNROOF MOTOR INSTALLATION (1) Remove the cover. (2) Align the main gear tooth with the square hole in the transmission gear as shown in the illustration. (3) While keeping the gear position attained in Step (2), turn the drive gear in the direction given by the arrow to rotate the transmission gear 180. Then, check to ensure that the alignment mark on the transmission gear is on the vertical line.
Transmission gear
18FO387
00003723
18FO388
TSB Revision
42-60
Roof lid
BODY - Sunroof
(4) Press the roof lid against the front holder while keeping it in the tilted-up position. (5) Install the sunroof motor.
ii,
A18FO405
1 I INSPECTION
SLIDING RESISTANCE OF ROOF LID CHECK (1) Remove the roof lid trim. (2) Loosen the roof lid front mounting nuts and tie a rope to them. (3) Fully close the roof lid and then remove the sunroof motor.
Front holder
I I I
(4) Use a spring balance to measure the sliding resistance of the roof lid. Standard value: 147 N (33 Ibs.) or less (5) If the sliding resistance of the roof lid is higher than the standard value, check the following. Lifter-slider assembly installation, warping or jamming by foreign materials Drive cable connection Tilt of roof lid
i Al8A0201
~ I
IL&J I
SLIDING FORCE OF SUNROOF MOTORS CLUTCH CHECK 1. Insert the sunroof wrench of the on-board tools into the hexagonal hole in the motor drive shaft, and hook a spring balance as shown in the illustration. 2. Apply battery voltage between terminals (1) and (2) of the sunroof motor connector to operate the motor. 3. Measure the load on the spring balance at the point where the rotation torque of the motor matches the spring force of the spring balance. Standard value: 39-49 N (8.7-11 Ibs.) Caution 1. The spring balance should be kept a right angle to the sunroof wrench. 2. If a wrench other than that in the on-board tools is used, the value for the clutch sliding force will be different, so only the on-board tool should be used. If the clutch sliding force is outside the standard value, replace the sunroof motor. ,
I ~ I iJ
4.
TSB Revision
BODY - Sunroof
OPEN Drivy gear CLOSE 1
42-6 1
SUNROOF MOTOR CHECK Battery connection terminal

1 2
Drive gear rotation direction Right Left I
0
@
I
I
@
-
Ml
AlSS0159
LIMIT SWITCH CONTINUITY CHECK 1. Remove the limit switches from the sunroof motor, and then check the operation of the limit switches. Switch position Limit switch A
18S0159
Terminal No. 5 ON OFF ON OFF 0

6 8
0 0
Limit switch B ,
We),
Limit switch B
2. Check the identification colors. Then install the limit switches as shown in the illustration.
ROTATION SENSOR CHECK 1. When connecting an ohmmeter negative probe to terminal (3) and the positive probe to terminal (8), there should be continuity. When the probes are reversed, there should be no continuity. 2. Remove the cover, and then check that there is no continuity when connecting the negative probe to terminal (7) and the positive probe to terminal (8). Also check that there is continuity when the probes are connected to the same terminals and light is shined onto the sensor receiver.
Sensor receiver
00002722
1 TSB Revision
42-62
BODY - Sunroof
SUNROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY CHECK
18FO403
TSB Revision
BODY - Drip Line Weatherstrip
42-63
/ REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION L
DRIP LINE WEATHERSTRIP
ZlEFO219
Removal steps
l l l
Delta cover inner (Refer to P.42-43, 44.) Delta cover outer (Refer to P.42-43,
3. Door inner opening weatherstrip front 4. Door inner opening weatherstrip rear 5. Door opening weatherstrip lower
$r!)r trim (Refer to P.42-42.) 1. Door belt line outer weatherstrip +A, .A+ 2. Door outer opening weatherstrip
Drip line weatherstrip removal steps

6. Drip line weatherstrip 7. Door weatherstrip holder

(A, DOOR OUTER OPENING WEATHERSTRIP REMOVAL Place a tool as shown in the illustration to remove the door opening weatherstrip.

.A4 DOOR OUTER OPENING WEATHERSTRIP INSTALLATION The clip color identifies the left and right weatherstrips, so be sure to use the colors so as to install correctly. -1
TSB Revision
NOTES
51-l
i;
EXTERIOR
CONTENTS
AERO PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 DOOR MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 FRONT BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 GARNISHES AND MOULDINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Active Aero System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
REAR WIPER AND WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2 4
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER . . . . . . . 25
REAR BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
I I
51-2 SPECIFICATIONS
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
EXTERIOR - Specifications
rpm at load of 1 Nm (0.72 ft.lbs.)
Nominal torque Nm (ft.lbs.)
REAR WIPER MOTOR

Items Type Braking system rpm at load of 0.6 Nm (0.43 ftlbs.) Specifications Ferrite-magnet type Dynamic braking system 38f5
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE
REAR WIPER BLADE

Items Wiping angle Wiper blade length mm (in.) Specifications 87 + 1.5 550 (21.7)
WINDOW WASHER MOTOR AND PUMP
Time of continuous use
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Specifications
REAR WINDOW WASHER MOTOR AND PUMP
items Specifications Direct current ferrite magnet type Centrifugal type 3.8 or less Max. 60 Max. 20 120 (17) or more 1.2 (1.3) or more
51-3
L Motor type
Pump type Power consumption A Time of continuous use With washer fluid sec. Empty operation Nozzle jet pressure kPa (psi) Tank capacity dm3 (qts.)
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Items Rated load A Wiper switch (LO, HI) Wiper switch (INT) Washer switch Voltage drop (at 12V Wiper switch and the rated load) V Washer switch Specifications 4 0.22 * 0.05 Max. 4 0.2 or less 0.5 or less
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

i, Items Rated load A Wiper switch Washer switch Voltage drop V Specifications 5 5 0.1 or less
INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY

Items Front (incorporated in column switch) Rear Intermittent interval (min.-max.) sec. [Variable-interval intermittent wiper] Delay time in washer moving sec. Intermittent interval sec. 1 Specifications Approx. 3-12 0.6 I8f2 I
DOOR MIRROR
Items Printed II lines heater 1Working voltage V 1Operating current A / Resistance Q / Specifications 1 10-15 I 3.5 or less I 7.7- 10.2 I
TSB Revision
51-4
EXTERIOR - Specifications / Special Tools
Items Front~wiper blade park position (A) mm (in.) Standard value 15-20 (.6-.8)
ADHESIVES
Items Side protect moulding Side air dam Side garnish, Cushion Specified adhesive 3M ATD Part No. 8609 SUPER FAST URETHAN or equivalent and 3M ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent 3M ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Tool numberand name MB990449 Window moulding remover MB991 341 Scan tool (Multi-use tester <MUT>) ROM pack (Forthe number, refer to GROUP 00 - Precautions Before Service.) MB991 502 Scan tool (MUT-II) MB991 502 <All models> Windshield wiper and washer system (ETACS input check) and active aero system inspection MB991341C <Up to 1993 models> Windshield wiper and washer system (ETACS input check) and active aero system inspection Supersession General service tool Application Removal of liftgate moulding, upper and liftgate moulding, lower
ROM pack
MB991 529 Diagnostic trouble code check harness
MB991 529
<From 1994 models> Windshield wiper and washer system inspection by using a voltmeter
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Troubleshooting
51-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
INPUT SIGNAL <WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER> cup to 1993 models> When using the scan tool [Multi-Use-Tester (MUT)] or a voltmeter Check whether or not the input signals from each switch are being input to the ETACS unit. (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector or connect the voltmeter between the ETACS terminal and the ground terminal. (2) Check if the buzzer of the scan tool sounds or the needle of the voltmeter moves when each switch is operated. If the buzzer sounds or the needle moves, the input signals are being input to the ETACS unit, so that switch can be considered to be functioning normally. If not, the switch or switch input circuit is faulty. Check the switch and the switch input circuit.
Ground ETACS With voltmeter Data link connector
,__ --im
Voltmeter
i
With scan tool
ZZOFO107
ffpjqlz / g\
Scan tool
gs
h2FOO57
11
00002330
TSB Revision
51-6
EXTERIOR - Troubleshooting
<All models> When using the scan tool (MUT-II) (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. (2) When connecting the scan tool (MUT-II) to a vehicle up to 1993 model, use the adapter harness supplied together with the scan tool. Caution Turn off the ignition switch beforehand whenever the scan tool is connected or disconnected. (3) The ECU input signal of individual circuit systems is normal, if the scan tool buzzer sounds once when the respective switches are operated (turned ON/OFF).
t i)
Ground
<From 1994 models> When using the voltmeter (1) Connect a voltmeter to the ETACS and ground terminals of the data link connector using the special tool. (2) The ECU input signal of individual circuit systems is normal, if the voltmeter pointer deflects once when the respective switches are operated (turned ON/OFF).
WZOFO163
1TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - On-vehicle Service
51-7
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ACTIVE AERO SYSTEM CHECK
1. INSPECTION BY WARNING LIGHT Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON to see if the warning light is lit for approx. three seconds and then goes out. If not, replace the control unit. NOTE (1) The active aero control unit has a self-check function which is designed as follows: Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. If the unit is in normal condition, the warning light is lit for approx. three seconds and then goes out. (2) If the front venturi skirt does not return to the standard condition properly in normal use, the warning light comes on.
Active aero warning light
ive aero switch
2. INSPECTION BY ACTIVE AERO SWITCH AT AUTO 2 (1) With the vehicle stopped, insert the key in the ignition key cylinder. (2) Set the active aero switch to AUTO 2 to make sure that the active aero system is placed in the operative condition and the indicator light comes on. Then turn off the active aero switch to confirm that the system returns to the standard condition and the indicator light goes out. (3) If there is abnormality, check the following parts. l Active aero switch l Lighting monitor switch l Air dam link assembly and rear spoiler l Wiring harness
I TSB Revision
51-8
When using the MUT
EXTERIOR - On-vehicle Service / Front Bumper

3. INSPECTION WITH SCAN TOOL When using the scan tool [multi-use tester (MUT) cup to 1993 models> or MUT-II <all models>] Using pseudo vehicle speed input function of the scan tool, inspection can be made by means of vehicle speed. (1) Set the scan tool to the data link connector. When connecting the scan tool (MUT-II) to a vehicle up to 1993 model, use the adapter harness supplied together with the scan tool. Caution Turn off the ignition switch beforehand whenever the scan tool is connected or disconnected. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON. (3) Place the active aero switch to AUTO 1. (4) Using the scan tool, increase the vehicle speed to approx. 80 km/h (50 mph) or more to make sure that the active aero system is placed to the operative condition. Then decrease the vehicle speed to approx. 50 km/h (30 mph) or less to confirm that the system returns to the standard condition.
22OFO159
Type A
Removal
Installation
FRONT BUMPER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CLIP WITH SCREW
Normally, remove the clip with a Phillips screwdriver. If, however, there is enough space to insert a screwdriver or the like behind the clip, use the following procedure for ease of work. 1 . R e m o v a l Using a screwdriver or the like, press the screw from the inside of the bumper to remove the clip. 2. Installation With the grommet inserted in the hole, press the screw in.
218N0187 Type B Installation Grommet
218NOl a
Screw
218N0186 t 218N018 4
0000233 2
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Front Bumper REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
51-9
<Up to 1993 models> 40 Nm 29 ft.lbs.
9 <Vehicles with active aero system>
id
Removal steps
1. Front under cover side panel (Vehicles without active aero system) 2. Front under cover center panel (Vehicles without active aero system) 3. Side cover panel (Vehicles with active aero system) 4. Front cover panel (Vehicles with active aero system) 5. Center cover panel (Vehicles with active aero system) .A+ 6. Front under cover panel (Vehicles with active aero system) 7. Front splash shield extension 8. Fog light 9. License plate bracket 10. Front combination light 11. Optical horn lens 12. Clips with screw 13. Tapping screws 14. Bolts ;!6. f33;per face assembly 17: Bumper reinforcement assembly
TSB Revision
51-10
<From 1994 models>
EXTERIOR - Front Bumrzer
44 Nm 32 ft.lbs.
<Vehicles with active aero system>
Removal steps
1. Front under cover side panel (Vehicles without active aero system) 2. Front under cover center panel (Vehicles without active aero system) 3. Side cover panel (Vehicles with active aero system) 4. Front cover panel (Vehicles with active aero system) 5. Center cover panel (Vehicles with active aero system) .A( 6. Front under cover panel (Vehicles with active aero system) 7. Front splash shield extension 8. Fog light 9. License plate bracket 10. Front combination light 11. Headlight 12. Clips with screw 13. Tapping screws 14. Bolts 15. Bumper face assembly 16. Nuts 17. Bumper reinforcement assembly

,A+ FRONT UNDER COVER PANEL INSTALLATION Install the air dam link assembly in the operative condition for ease of front under cover panel.
1 TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Front Bumper DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
51-11
<Up
to 1993 models>
8 \
12 Nm - 9 ft.lbs.
Z18FOO21
<worn
1~~4
moaew
12 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
Z18FO332
00002333
Bumper face disassembly steps

1. Bumper face side plate 2. Bumper face comer plate cup to 1993 models> 3. Bumper face outer corner plate <From 1994 models> 4. Bumper face inner corner plate <From 1994 models> 5. C corner plate <From 1994 models> 6. Bumper face upper front plate 7. Bumper face upper center plate 8. Bumper face protector
9. 10. 11. 12.
Side lower plate Center lower plate Pad Bumper face
Bumper reinforcement disassembly steps

13. Fog light bracket
+Ab ,A4 14. Bumper absorber
15. Bumper reinforcement stay 16. License plate bracket support 17. Bumper reinforcement
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Front Bumper DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINT

+A, BUMPER ABSORBER REMOVAL Caution 1. Do not attempt to repair a bumper absorber that has been compressed in an accident; replace it with a new one. 2. Before discarding the bumper absorber, drill a 3 mm (.13 in.) diameter hole to discharge the gas contained in the unit. Be sure to wear safety goggles while performing this operation as the gas is not harmful but chips may be ejected with it. 3. If the bumper absorber is to be discarded, do not burn it. d

.A4 BUMPER ABSORBER INSTALLATION If the squareness between the bumper reinforcement stay and the bumper absorber is improper, adjust it by putting a spacer between them.
reinforcement
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Rear Bummer

Installation Grommet
51-13
REAR BUMPER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CLIP WITH SCREW
Normally, remove the clip with a Phillips screwdriver. If, however, there is enough space to insert a screwdriver or the like behind the clip, use the following procedure for ease of work.
Screw
Z18N0187
Screw
t Z18N0185
00002334
1. Removal
Using a screwdriver or the like, press the screw from the inside of the bumper to remove the clip.
2. Installation
With the grommet inserted in the hole, press the screw in.

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Rear End Trim and Rear Side Trim Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 528 - Trims.)
l
ECS Control Unit Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 338 - ECS Control Unit.)
c
.lO
Removal steps
1. Rear combination light 2. Rear panel garnish 3. Bolts 4. License plate light ;. CJ& with screw 7: Tapping screws i
8. Bolts 9. Bumper face upper plate 10. Bumper face assembly 11. Rear bumper upper extension 12. Rear bumper harness connector 13. Nuts 14. Bumper reinforcement assembly
TSB Revision
51-14
EXTERIOR - Rear Bumper

<Up to 1993 models> <From 1994 models>
11 ill 8 ft.lbs. 7+Jf3-3
712mn37 218FO340 00002335
Bumper face assembly disassembly steps

1. Bumper face side plate 2. License plate light bracket 3. Bumper muffler plate 4. Bumper face . 4Ab
Bumper reinforcement assembly disassembly steps

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Rear bumper harness Bumper reinforcement bracket Bumper reinforcement extension Bumper reinforcement stay Bumper absorber Bumper reinforcement

dA, BUMPER ABSORBER REMOVAL Caution 1. Do not attempt to repair a bumper absorber that has been compressed in an accident; replace it with a new one. 2. Before discarding the bumper absorber, drill a 3 mm (.13 in.) diameter hole to discharge the gas contained in the unit. Be sure to wear safety goggles while performing this operation as the gas is not harmful but chips may be ejected with it. 3. If the bumper absorber is to be discarded, do not burn it.
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Garnishes and Mouldings
51-15
GARNISHES AND MOULDINGS /

REMOVAL AND INSTALtLATION
13 Nm
218FO337
Rear
Front
LJ
10
11
218FO302
Z18FO178 00002336
Adhesive tape: 3M ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent Front deck garnish removal steps
1. Wiper arm assembly 2. Front deck garnish
Quarter window moulding and glass removal steps <Hatchback>

4. Center pillar garnish 7. Quarter window moulding and glass (Refer to GROUP 42 Quarter Window Glass.)
Drip moulding and center pillar garnish removal steps <Hatchback>

Drip line weatherstrip (Refer to GROUP 42 - Drip Line Weatherstrip.) l Door weatherstrip holder (Refer to GROUP 42 - Drip Line Weatherstrip.) 3. DriD mouldina l Quarter uppeT trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 4. Center pillar garnish
l
Rear roof extension removal steps (with sunroof) <Hatchback>

Headlining (Refer to GROUP 52A Headlining) 8. Rear roof extension
l
Windshield moulding removal steps <Hatchback>

3. Drip moulding 5. Windshield moulding (Refer to GROUP 42 - Windshield.)
Side garnish removal <Hatchback> (A, ,A4 9. Side garnish Rear panel garnish removal steps
Rear end trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) l Rear side trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 10. Rear combination light 11. Rear panel garnish
l
Liftgate moulding removal <Hatchback>

6. Liftgate moulding (Refer to GROUP 42 - Liftgate Glass.)
TSB Revision
51-16
EXTERIOR - Garnishes and Mouldings REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

dA, SIDE GARNISH REMOVAL (1) Remove the side garnish mounting nuts. (2) Affix protective tape to the periphery of the side garnish.
Protective tape
218FO182
(3) Insert a fishing line [@0.8 mm (.03 in.)] between the body and the side garnish and grip each end of the fishing line. Cut through adhesive material by pulling wire in a sawing motion and remove the side garnish.
(4) When the side garnish is fastened with a clip or bolt, pull the side garnish toward you to remove the clip or the bolt. Caution 1. To reuse the side garnish, remove it by pulling the fishing line along the body so as not to damage the edges of the side garnish. 2. If it is hard to cut through adhesive material, heat it to approx. 40C (104F).
(5) Use an infrared lamp or the like to heat the pressure sensitive double-sided tape remaining on the body to 40 to 60C (104 to 140F) for 5 to 10 minutes. Caution Do not overheat the tape until its surface dries to turn white.
(6) Use a resin spatula to scrape off the pressure sensitive adhesive double coated tape.
Pressure sensitive double-sided tape /
Resin\spatula
Z18FO187
1TSB Revision
51-17
(7) Wipe off application surface of body with clean cloth dampened with degreaser (3M ATD Part No. 8906 or equivalent). NOTE After wiping surface, leave surface as it is to volatilize degreaser.
Z18FO188

.A4 SIDE GARNISH INSTALLATION Adhesion of Pressure Sensitive Double-sided Tape to Side Garnish (For Reuse) (1) Use an infrared lamp or the like to heat the pressure sensitive double-sided tape to 40 to 60C (104 to 140F) for 5 to 10 minutes. Caution Do not overheat the tape until its surface dries to turn white. (2) Using a resin spatula or gasket scraper, scrape off the pressure sensitive double-sided tape. (3) If the pressure sensitive double-sided tape remains on the side garnish, repeat steps (1) and (2).
(4) Use cloth moistened with degreaser (3M ATD Part No. 8906 or equivalent) to wipe the side garnish clean. (5) Scrape old adhesive slightly. Caution Do not scrape off all old adhesive.
Rear
Front
1
Y18FO178
2
(6) Affix specified pressure sensitive double-sided tape to the side garnish. Specified adhesive tape: 3M ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent
Pressure sensitive double-sided tape
TSB Revision

Side Garnish Installation (1) Remove strip paper from the pressure sensitive doublesided tape. NOTE Affix adhesive tape to the end of strip paper for ease of strip paper removal.
ZlBFO194
Zl8FO177
(2) With its clips and bolts aligned with the respective holes in the body, install the side garnish to the body. NOTE If it is hard to affix the pressure sensitive double-sided tape in winter, heat the application surface of the body and the adhesive surface of the side garnish before affixing the tape. Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40-60C (104-140F) Side garnish.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30C (68-86F) (3) Apply pressure fully to the side garnish.
1TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Aero Parts
51-19
AERO PARTS L
<Vehicles without active aero system>
<Up to 1993 models>
2.5 Nm~ 1.8 ftlbs.
Rear
Front
Z18FO339 00002337
m Adhesive tape: 3M ATD Part No. 8382 or equivalent m Adhesive: 3M ATD Part No. 8609 SUPER FAST URETHAN or equivalent
Side air dam removal steps

Front splash slhield (Refer to GROUP 42 - Fender.) l Quarter trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) +A, .B+ 1. Side air dam
l
Rear spoiler removal steps

l
Liftgate lower trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 2. Rear spoiler assembly 3. Center stay 4. High mounted stop light
1 TSB Revision
51-20
<Vehicles with active aero system>
<From 1994 models>
218FO338
Side air dam removal steps

Front splash shield (Refer to GROUP 42 - Fender.) dA, .B+ 1. Side air dam
l
9. Lower plate 10. Upper plate ,A( 11. Air dam link assembly 12. Under cover bracket
Rear spoiler removal steps

0 Liftgate lower trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 2. Rear spoiler assembly 4. High mounted stop light
Active aero switch removal steps

13. Switch garnish C 14. Active aero switch
Active aero control unit removal steps

Rear side trim (L.H.) (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 15. Active exhaust control unit <Up to 1994 models> 16. Active aero control unit
l
Front under cover panel, air dam link assembly removal steps
5. Side cover panel (L.H.) 6. Front cover panel 7. Center cover panel 8. Front under cover panel
1 TSB Revision
51-21
/ L

dA,SlDE AIR DAM REMOVAL Remove the side air dam by the same procedure as the side garnish. (Refer to P.51-15.)

,A4 AIR DAM LINK ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Install the air dam link assembly in the operative condition for ease of front under cover panel.
Rear
Front
.BdSlDE AIR DAM INSTALLATION Install the side air dam by the same procedure as the side garnish (refer to P.51-15), provided that specified adhesive is used. Specified adhesive: 3M ATD Part No. 8609 SUPER FAST URETHAN or equivalent
INSPECTION
1. REAR SPOILER MOTOR AND LIMIT SWITCH CHECK (1) Connect the battery as shown in the illustration to make sure that the motor and spoiler operate freely. Then connect the battery with the reversed polarity to make sure that the motor and spoiler operate freely. (2) While performing the inspection described in (1) above, check the limit switch for continuity. Spoiler position
3
Terminal No.
1 4 1 5
1 FLAT (standard position)
i-1
[p$!j!!~ I
Motor
-
During operation SLANT (operative position)
0
0 0
0 0
Limit switch
_
i
ZlEFO258
TSB Revision

2. AIR DAM LINK ASSEMBLY MOTOR AND LIMIT SWITCH CHECK (1) Connect the battery as shown in the illustration to make sure that the motor and the linkage operate freely. (2) While performing the inspection described in (1) above, check the limit switch for continuity. Linkage position 1 UP (standard position) During operation 1-1
1 , Termi;lNo. 4 1
b-+--+OI
I lo--coI
I DOWN (operative position)

Limit switch -_---218FO259
3. ACTIVE AERO SWITCH CHECK Operate the switch to check the continuity between the terminals.
Switch position
Terminal No. 5
1
218FO257
AUTO 2 (Automatic reset type)
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Aero Parts DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY <REAR SPOILER ASSEMBLY>
I I
218FO268 dhesive tape: Ul ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent
218FO272 00002336
Disassembly steps
1. Spacer 2. Bracket .Bd 3. Motor and cable assembly 4. Rear spoiler .A4 5. Motor
Standard position of motor
.A+ MOTOR INSTALLATION (1) Make sure that the motor is in the standard position as shown in the illustration.
Gear for limi switch
zlAFO27CI
Allen wrench
(2) If the motor is not in the standard position, use Allen wrench to turn the gear for the limit switch until the motor is in the standard position.
218F0267
TSB Revision
51-24

(3) Align the center of the guide pin with the positioning mark of the guide base to set the cable in the standard position. (4) Install the motor to the cable assembly. NOTE When the motor is installed to the cable assembly, the drive gear of the motor may not engage with the cable. In such a case, they can be engaged with each other by tightening the motor mounting screw.
1,aj
.Bd MOTOR AND CABLE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Affix pressure-sensitive adhesive double coated tape to the projection of each cushion and install the cushion in the position shown in the illustration. Specified adhesive tape: 3M ATD Part No. 6382 or equivalent
ZWFO271
I I
\J, I
1 TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Windshield Wiper and Washer
51-25
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER i

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION se
9 Nm 7 R.lbs.
- 4 ft.lbs.
5 Nm
8
i
I 14 2
11
00002339
z16FO103
Linkage removal steps

1. Wiper blade
Column switch (wiper and washer switch) removal

15. Column switch (Refer to GROUP 54 - Column Switch.)
.A+ 2. Wiper arm
4Ab
3. Front deck garnish 4. Air inlet garnish (RH) 5. Hole cover 6. Wiper motor 7. Linkage
Washer tank removal steps 8. Battery

9. Battery tray 10. Washer tank 11. Washer motor 12. Washer fluid level sensor
Wiper motor removal steps

1. Wiper blade
.A( 2. Wiper arm 5. Hole cover

4Ab 6. Wiper motor
Washer tube removal steps 8. Battery

9. Battery tray 13. Washer nozzle 14. Washer tube
TSB Revision
51-26
EXTERIOR - Windshield Wiper and Washer REMOVAL SERVICE POINT

+A, WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL (1) Remove the wiper motor mounting bolts. (2) Using a plain screwdriver, detach the crank arm of the wiper motor from the linkage to remove the wiper motor. Caution Do not remove the crank arm from the wiper motor except when necessary, as the auto stop angle has been preset. When the crank arm is to be removed, make a mark on both of them before removal.
I L+l

.A+ WIPER ARM INSTALLATION (1) The wiper arms, right and left, are different in shape. Check the identification symbol. (2) After the wiper blades have been set, install them in such a way that the ends of the wiper blades will stop at the specified positions (standard values). Standard value (A): 15-20 mm (.6-.8 in.)
/
Identification mark: A Front deck garnish
I
Identification mark: D
218FO164
INSPECTION
WIPER MOTOR CHECK Inspect the wiper motor mounted on the vehicle with its connector disconnected. Wiper Motor Operation at LOW and HIGH Speeds Check Connect the battery to the wiper motor as shown, and check its operation at LOW and HIGH speeds. Wiper Motor STOP Position Check (1) Operate the wiper motor at LOW speed and intermediately disconnect the battery to let the wiper motor stop. (2) Connect the terminals as well as the battery, as shown, and check that the wiper motor stops at the automaticallystopped position following LOW-speed operation. COLUMN SWITCH CHECK (1) Remove the knee protector. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) (2) Remove the column cover. (3) Remove the column switch right coupling connector (11 terminals).
:Lj I
Inspection of Operation &yiy&jp Low-speed High-speed operation operation Inspection of Stop Position 218N0026
218NOO25
00002340
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Windshield Wiper and Washer

Wiper and Washer Switch Check Operate the switch to check for continuity between the terminals.
Switch position I
Terminal No. 3 4 5 6 0 0 0
I I
I 8 9 1 0
0
Wiper switch
OFF INT
/
LO
Variable intermittent wiper control switch Washer switch

216FO200
00002341
Connector B
-.-.-J
00002342
Zl8N0027
21 EN0075
1 TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Rear Wiper and Washer
REAR WIPER AND WASHER

1 8 \ P
216FO104
Wiper motor removal steps

1. Wiper blade
Washer tube removal steps

Front pillartrim (RH) (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) Quarter trim (RH) (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) Quarter upper trim (RH) (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) Rear roof rail trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 0 Rear side trim (RH) (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 8. Liftgate upper moulding 9. Washer nozzle 10. Tube and grommet assembly 11. Washer tube
)A4 2. WiDer arm

? :rg% lower trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 4. Wiper motor
Washer tank removal steps

l
Rear end trim (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) 5. Cap 6. Washer tank 7. Washer motor
4Ab
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Rear Wiper and Washer REMOVAL SERVICE POINT
51-29
(A, LIFTGATE UPPER MOULDING REMOVAL Using a special tool, pry the clip portion to remove the upper liftgate moulding.

.A( WIPER ARM INSTALLATION After assembling the wiper blade to the wiper arm, install the wiper arm with its tip positioned along the ceramic part,
INSPECTION
WIPER MOTOR CHECK Check the wiper motor with it mounted on the vehicle and with its harness connector disconnected. Wiper Motor Operation Connect a battery to the wiper motor, as shown, to check the operation of the wiper motor. Wiper Motor Stop Position (1) Operate the wiper motor by the procedure described above and intermediately disconnect the battery to let the wiper motor stop. (2) Reconnect the battery as shown and check that the wiper motor stops at the automatically-stopped position after operation.
inspection of operation
Zl8NOO29
Inspection of stop position
Zl8NOO28
00002343
WIPER WASHER SWITCH CHECK (1) Remove switch garnish B from the knee protector.
1 TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Rear Wiper and Washer

(2) Operate the switch to check for continuity between the terminals.
216FO191
Zl6FO201 00002344
INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY CHECK (1) Remove the quarter trim. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Trims.) (2) With the intermittent wiper relay connected to the wiring harness connector, let the wiper operate intermittently
and check the voltage at terminal (2). I Condition / ov 1System voltage Standard I
1 When wiper is stationary When wiper is in operation
WASHER MOTOR CHECK (1) When the washer motor is inspected, make sure that it is mounted on the washer tank and that the washer tank is filled with water. (2) Connect the battery as shown to check whether water is pumped out.
ZlEN0075
TSB Revision
EXTERIOR - Door Mirror
51-31
DOOR MIRROR
218FO166
00002346
Door mirror removal steps 1. Door mirror 2. Harness connector 3. Mirror Electric remote controlled mirror switch removal steps 4. Instrument panel switch 5. Electric remote controlled mirror switch

dA, DOOR MIRROR REMOVAL Tilt the door mirror backward and forward to remove the attaching bolts.
Zl6FO16 9
+B, MIRROR REMOVAL Tilt the mirror upward and fit a screwdriver blade covered with protective tape in the notch between the mirror and the pivot plate to pry up the mirror. Caution Do not fit the screwdriver blade between the pivot plate and actuator assembly.
Notches
TSB Revision
51-32
<Vehicles without heater>
EXTERIOR - Door Mirror INSPECTION

DOOR MIRROR CHECK (1) Check to be sure that the mirror moves as described in the table when each terminal is connected to the battery. (2) Check to see that there is continuity between terminals 1 and 5.
Zl6FO167
ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROLLED MIRROR SWITCH CHECK Operate switches and check for continuity between terminals. Left side
I
Right side
Direction
Terminal No.
/
/3/416/71812141617/9
218FO220
1 1 DOWN 1 LEFT RIGHT
I I
b-I---w b-+--w I
I I Io-+-tq IO-l-l+-0
Io+d
I I
1 TSB Revision
-1
52-1 ~ i
INTERIOR
CONTENTS
INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
52-2
NOTES
INTERIOR
CONTENTS
FLOOR CONSOLE* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 FRONT SEAT* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 HEADLINING..............................1 6 SEAT BELT* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 TRIMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
INSTRUMENT PANEL*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 REAR SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injuryordeathtoservicepersonnel(frominadvertentfiringoftheairbag)ortothedriverandpassenger(fromrendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 528 -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRSrelated component. NOTE The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*).
ADHESIVES
Item
INTERIOR - Specifications / Special Tools
1Specified adhesive 1 Lower rail and nut housing mounting bolts

I
I 1
I
IL Front seat
1 3M Stud Locking Part No.41 70 or equivalent

I
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool g the seat belt warning light and buzzer
)
Checking the seat belt warning light and buzzer
I ( :
MB991 529 Diagnostic trouble code check harness MB991 529 <From 1994 models> Electronic control system inspection by using a voltmeter
I I I,
( Ll
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Troubleshooting
52A-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
INPUT SIGNAL <POWER SEAT, TENSION-REDUCER TYPE SEAT BELT AND BUZZER> <Up to 1993 models> When the scan tool [Multi-use tester (MUT)] or a voltmeter is used Using the scan tool or voltmeter, check whether or not the input signals from each switch are being input to the ETACS unit. (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector or connect the voltmeter between the ETACS terminal and the ground terminal. (2) Check if the buzzer of the scan tool sounds or the needle of the voltmeter moves when each switch is operated. if the buzzer sounds or the needle moves, the input signals are being input to the ETACS unit, so that switch can be considered to be functioning normally. If not, the switch or switch input circuit is faulty. Check the switch and the switch input circuit.
J' Ground
EfACs 216R1333
YZOFOO17
With voltmeter
\ Data link
With scan tool
When using the MUT-II CUP to 1993 models>
<All models> When the scan tool (MUT-II) is used. (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector to read out the diagnostic trouble codes. When connecting the scan tool to a vehicle up to 1993 model, use the adapter harness supplied together. Caution Make certain that the ignition switch is at OFF when the scan tool is connected or disconnected. (2) If the buzzer of the scan tool sounds once when each switch is operated (turned ON/OFF), the circuit system of the switch sends the input signal to the ECU normally.
Y2OFO164
00002231
TSB Revision
52A-4
INTERIOR - Troubleshooting <From 1994 models>

When a voltmeter is used: Connect a voltmeter to the ETACS terminal and the ground terminal of the data link connector using the special tool. Observe the voltmeter pointer deflection to read out the diagnostic trouble codes.
1 TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Instrument Panel
INSTRUMENT PANEL
For installation of the instrument panel, the bolts and screws described below are used. They are indicated 1: by symbols in the illustration. Name Symbol Size mm (in.) PxL) Color Shape
E Washer assembled F screw
4x16(.16x.63)
5x16(.20x.63)
4x12(.16x.47)
id
I J K L NOTE D = Thread diameter L = Effective thread length 6 x 16 (;24x .63) 6 x 20 (.24 x .79) 6 x 20 (.24 x .79) 6 x 25 (.24 x .98) Black Black
/ TSB Revision
52A-6
<Up to 1993 models>

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation
l
Floor Console Removal and Installation (Refer to P.52A-IO.)
L)i ~ ~ I I I I ~
15
~ d , ~ ~ ~
219FO180
219FO131
00002349
~ 1 I
Removal steps
1. Hood lock release handle 2. Rheostat 3. Switch garnish B 4. Knee protector assembly 5. Column cover 6. Glove box striker 7. Glove box and cross pipe cover 9. Center air outlet assembly 10. Heater control assembly installation screws 6, 11. Meter bezel 12. Combination meter 13. Speedometer cable adapter (Mechanical type speedometer) 14. Speaker or plug 15. Harness connector 16. Steering shaft mounting bolts 17. Instrument panel assembly
4Ab 4W
\L)
1 TSB Revision

:rom 1994 models>
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Floor Console Removal and Installation (Refer to P.52A-10.)
52A-7
CAUTION: SRS (1) When removing and installing the floor console assembly, dont allow any impact or shock to the SRS diagnosis unit. (2) For the passenger side air bag module removal/installation, always observe the service procedures of GROUP 528 - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring.
IJ
/ L \
-00 $
3 2
Y19FO244
00002350
219FO180
Removal steps
4Ab
1. Hood lock release handle 2. Rheostat 3. Switch garnish B 4. Knee protector assembly 5. Column cover 6. Glove box striker 7. Glove box and cross pipe cover 8. Passenger seat air bag module (Refer to GROUP 52B - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring.)
4W
9. Center air outlet assembly

10. Heater control assembly installation screws
11. Meter bezel 12. Combination meter 14. Speaker or plug

15. Harness connector 16. Steering shaft mounting bolts 17. Instrument panel assembly
1 TSB Revision
52A-8
INTERIOR - Instrument Panel REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

+A, COLUMN COVER REMOVAL Remove the screws and remove the column cover while being careful not to break the claws.
AB, CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Disengaging the clips of the center air outlet assembly with a fiat tip (-) screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with the trim stick.
+C, SPEEDOMETER CABLE ADAPTER (MECHANICAL TYPE SPEEDOMETER) REMOVAL (1) Disconnect the speedometer cable at the transaxle end of the cable. (2) Remove the adapter locks from the instrument panel. (3) Pull the speedometer cable slightly toward the passenger compartment and remove the adapter.
1 TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Instrument Panel DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
52A-9
/ iJ
Glove box disassembly steps 1. Glove box stopper 2. Cross pipe cover 3. Glove box cover 4. Ratchet assembly 5. Lock cylinder assembly 6. Glove box
- r& .f 4
1. I,t+$&$
Instrument panel disassembly steps 7. Glove box lower frame (Refer to GROUP 55 - Ventilators.) l Side air outlet (Refer to GROUP 55 - Ventilators.) l Photo sensor (Refer to GROUP 55 - Ventilators.) e Defroster garnish (Refer to GROUP 55 - Ventilators.) l Heater ducts (Refer to GROUP 55 - Ventilators.) l Combination gauge (Refer to GROUP 54 - Meters and Gauges.) 8. Instrument panel wiring harness
1 TSB Revision
52A-10 FLOOR CONSOLE
INTERIOR - Floor Console
Removal steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Cup holder Console plug Rear console assembly Radio panel Radio
6. Switch garnish C 7. Console side cover 8. Front console garnish 9. Manual transaxle shift lever knob 10. Front console assembly
\ 4
Front console disassembly steps 1. PJT garnish <A/T> 2. M/T shift lever cover <M/T> 3. Ashtray 4. Cigarette lighter 5. Power seat switch 6. Front console 7. Front console bracket TSB Revision
-20 Rear console disassembly steps 8. Plug 9. Console lid 10. Lock lever 11. Spring 12. Rear console
INTERIOR - Trims
52A-11
TRIMS
TRIM CLIP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
The type of clip shown in the illustration, which is used for the installation of instrument panel, should be removed and installed by the following procedures described below. REMOVAL (1) Use a cross-tip (+) screwdriver to push inward the pin (at the center of the trim clip) to a depth of about 2 mm (.08 in.). (2) Pull the trim clip outward to remove it. Caution Do not push the pin inward more than necessary because it may damage the grommet, or the pin may fall in, if pushed too far.
00002351
Pin Trim
INSTALLATION (1) With the pin pulled out, insert the trim clip into the hole in the trim. (2) Push the pin inward until the pins head is flush with the grommet. (3) Check whether the trim is secure.
00002352
/ TSB Revision
52A-12
<Interior>
INTERIOR - Trims
219FO933
00002353
Scuff plate
c-i
B-B
Front pillar trim Z19FOO21 Quaker upper trim Z19FOO18
Clip
Z19FO172
Clip NOTE (1) 0 : Location of metallic clip (2) C : Location of resin clip (3) * indicates trim clip. (Refer to P.52A-11.) (4) For door trim, refer to GROUP 42 Door Trim and Waterproof Film. Qua&r uppertrim Z19FOO20 rail trim z19Foo22
Cowl side trim removal steps

1. Scuff plate 2. Cowl side trim
Quarter upper trim removal steps

3. 4. 8. 9. Quarter trim (Refer to P.52A-13.) Coat hanger Screw Quarter upper trim
Front pillar trim removal steps

4. 5. 6. 7. Hanger bracket Sasli guide cover mounting bolt Clip Front pillar trim
Rear roof rail trim removal steps

8. Screw 10. Rear roof rail trim
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Trims
18
52A-13
Scuff plate NOTE C : Location of resin clip
17
25 Nrn
33 ft.lbs.
219FO160
A-AI
Clip
Z19FOO46
Quarter trim
Quarter trim removal steps +A, ,A4 11. Rear seat 12. Shelf cover assembly 13. Shelf catcher 14. Cover 15. Garnish 16. Sash guide cover mounting bolt 17. Front seat belt anchor plate mounting bolt
18. Retractor cover 19. Rear seat belt anchor plate mounting bolt 20. Screw 21. Quarter trim 22. Rear side trim (Refer to P.52A-14.) 23. Quarter trim bracket

+A, REAR SEAT REMOVAL With the lever pulled forward, raise the seat cushion to remove it.
1 TSB Revision
52A-14
Rear seat belt buckle
INTERIOR - Trims INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT

.A+ REAR SEAT INSTALLATION (1) Fit the seat cushion attachment wire under the seat-back positively. (2) Pass the rear seat belt buckles through the seat cushion. (3) Insert the lock plate of seat cushion in the hole provided in the floor positively. \ d ~ I
LHole
iEm_ 1

<Luggage compartment> 8
0
karter trim
4-A 1
B-B
Clip
Z19FOO28
00002355
Rear end trim 219FOO47
NOTE (1) Q : Location of metallic clip (2) C : Location of resin clip
~ Rear side trim, rear end trim removal steps
1. Luggage compartment floor box (R.H.) 2. Luggage compartment floor box (L.H.) 3. Lid (R.H.) 4. Lid (L.H.) 5. Rear end trim
6. Screws
7. Floor mat mounting clip 8. High floor center board 9. Luggage compartment light connector connection 10. Rear side trim
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Trims
cLiftgate>
52A-15
,4
219FOO27
00002356
L-A 1
Clip
E3-BJ
Clip
Clip
/
E 219F0017 Liftgate lower trim Liftgate lower trim 219FOO16
Liftgate upper trim 219FOO13
--~ D-D 1
NOTE (1)e : Location of metallic clip (2)C : Location of resin clip Liftgate side trim 219FO173
Liftgate trim removal steps 1. Shelf hook 2. Liftgate lower trim 3. Liftgate upper trim 4. Liftgate side trim
1 TSB Revision
52A-I 6 HEADLINING
INTERIOR - Headlining
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION t

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Sunroof Lid Glass Assembly and Sunroof Trim Assembly Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 42 - Sunroof.)
l l
4,
Rear Roof Rail Trim Removal and Installation (Refer to P.52A-12.) Front Pillar Trim Removal and Installation (Refer to P.52A-12.)
<Vehicks without sunroof>
<Vehicles ,woith removable sunroof> 15 6 4
) I I I I ! I
lQF0162
19FO202
<Vehicles with electrically operated sliding sunroof> A-A 1

Clip I
\ I L) I (
19FO207
00003716
NOTE c : Location of resin clip
V
19FO283
I
11. Cover <Vehicles with electrically operated sliding sunroof> 12. Sunroof switch panel assembly <Vehicles with electrically operated sliding sunroof> with 13. Sunroof switch <Vehicles electrically operated sliding sunroof> 14. Headlining trim <Vehicles with electrically operated sliding sunroof> 15. Headlining
Removal steps
1. Hanger bracket 2. Sash guide cover mounting bolt 3. Clip 4. Interior temperature sensor 5. Sunvisor assembly 6. Sunvisor holder 7. Room light assembly 8. Regulator cover
<Vehicle with removable sunroof>
I ! L.+i
9. Sunroof <Vehicle .A+ 10. Sunroof <Vehicle
regulator with removable sunroof> inner weatherstrip with removable sunroof>
1 TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Headlining / Front Seat INSTALLATION SERVICE POINT
52A-17
L
Front of vehicle
219FO203
.A4 SUNROOF INNER WEATHERSTRIP INSTALLATION Install the sunroof inner weatherstrip with its adhered joint located toward the rear of the vehicle and on its center line.
FRONT SEAT
CAUTIOPI: SRS When removing and installing the floor console assembly, dont allow any impact or shock to the SRS diagnosis unit.
<Standard type> f--Y A-1
eSnartv tvnab
33 ft.lbs.
Nm ft.lbs.
30 Nrnm
19FO191
00004040
1. Head restraint Front seat removal steps .B+ 2. Seat anchor covers
Power seat switch removal steps

7. Front console assembly (Refer to P.52A-10.) 8. Power seat switch A
3. Seat mounting nut 4. Seat mounting bolt 5. Harness connector ,A4 6. Front seat assembly
TSB Revision
52A-18
Position A Position B
INTERIOR - Front Seat FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION POINTS WHEN THERE IS A MALFUNCTION IN THE POWER SEAT SLIDE MECHANISM
If removal of the seat mounting nut and bolt is impossible when there is a malfunction in the slide motor or the slide switch and the seat cannot slide, remove and install the front seat assembly by the following procedure. In addition, two removed and installation procedures are established depending on the seat positions. l Position A shown in the illustration - Refer to procedure.
l
, d
bosition B shown in the illustration - Refer to procedure 2.
1. Procedure for removal and installation of seat stopped at forward position (1) Working from behind the seat, remove the bolt from under the seat cushion as illustrated.
Nut housing
(2) Insert a flat tip screwdriver between the plate and the nut housing, pry the pawl of the nut housing from the hole of the plate and rotate the housing. (3) Slide the seat and remove the seat mounting nuts and bolts.
Lower rail
(4) When the power seat adjuster assembly is reused, apply specified adhesive to the mounting bolts before, tightening them. Specified adhesive: 3M stud locking 4171 or equivalent. Caution Be sure that the right and left nut housing are in alignment.
z19FO215
2. Procedure for removal and installation of seat stopped at rearward position (1) Take off the seat cover from the front end of the seat cushion.
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Front Seat
52A-19
Motor bracket
(2) Remove the slide motor mounting bolts (eight bolts at A in the illustration). Slightly pull the slide motor assembly forward to disconnect the screws from the respective brackets at C in the illustration. Removing only bolts at A in the illustration may not allow the slide motor to be pulled out, depending on the seat position. In that case, further remove the motor bracket mounting nuts (four nuts at B in the illustration). (3) Slide the seat and remove the seat mounting nuts and bolts. NOTE If the seat does not move for enough to remove the seat mounting nuts and bolts, slide the seat forward as much as possible and remove the seat in accordance with procedure 1.
Inboard
Outboard

.A+ FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION (1) Locate the lower rails correctly so that the front side seat mounting holes may be positioned at the same relative positions on both R.H. and L.H. sides. (Except power seat) Caution Note that when the slide is pulled, the inboard slide rail is unlocked, causing the slide rail to be pulled back by spring force. (2) After checking that the seat adjuster is locked at both sides, provisionally tighten (in the A, B, C and D sequence) the seat installation nuts and the seat installation bolts; then fully tighten at the specified torque.
(Outboard)\
ront seat forward installation bracket
.B( SEAT ANCHOR COVERS INSTALLATION (1) Install the forward tab of the front seat anchor cover to the front seat forward mounting bracket positively. Then rotate the cover in the direction of arrow to install the side tabs in the side holes of the bracket.
Fe/hard tab
A-A kross c/e&ion ZlQFoom 1 .TSB Revision
52A-20
Rear (outboard) Claw wc,aws

(2) Insert the rear side seat anchor cover (outer side) to the front seat rearward installation bracket, and then attach each tab of the seat anchor cover to the hole of the bracket. I
1 d,
Hole
(3) Insert the rear tab of the rear seat anchor cover in the front seat rear mounting bracket positively. Then rotate the cover in the direction of arrow to install the side tabs in the side holes of the bracket.
\ h
cover
Forward tab
ZlSFOO.43 J
B-B cross section
INSPECTIQN
POWER SEAT SWITCH A CHECK Operate the power seat switch A to check for continuity.
Y19FOO96
Lumbar support Switch position 2 PUSH (1) OFF RELEASE (2)

0
Side support Switch position 7 0 SPREAD (3) OFF 1 Terminal No. 2 7
Terminal No. 3
0
a
0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 n 0
0 0
0 0
n 0
0 0
CLOSE (4)
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Front Seat DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

DRIVER SEAT <Standard seat> 19 /l <Sporty seat> 19 n
52A-21
, LJ
24 Nm 17 ft.lbs.
219FO136
219FO192
00002359
Removal steps
1. Reclining adjuster knob
2. Plug
3. Cap (Standard seat) 4. Height adjuster lever (Standard seat) 5. Power seat adjuster lever (Sporty seat) 6. Garnish (Sporty seat) 7. Power seat switch B (Sporty seat) 6. Side shield cover (L.H.) 9. Side shield cover (R.H.) _ .A+ 10. Inner seat belt 11. Seat cushion assembly
Memory reclining knob Sliding adjuster knob Seat back panel (Sporty seat) Seat back assembly Seat belt guide Lumbar support knob (Standard seat) Lumbar support garnish (Standard seat) 19. Head restraint guide 20. Reclining adjuster lower cover 21. Height adjuster (Standard seat) 22. Power seat harness (Sporty seat) 23. Power seat adjuster (Sporty seat)
12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
TSB Revision r--~ ~~~~~
52A-22
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
24
26
J-Y
c;
45 Nm 33 ft.lbs.
45 N m
& 24 N m 17 ft.lbs. Removal steps
ZlSFO184
1. Reclining adjuster knob 2. Plug 6. Side shield cover (L.H.) 9. Side shield cover (R.H.) ,A4 10. Inner seat belt 11. Seat cushion assembly 13. Sliding adjuster knob
14. 15. 16. 19. 24. 25. 26.
Seat back panel Seat back assembly Seat belt guide Head restraint guide Walk-in knob Walk-in knob garnish Slide adjuster
pm& ll fl ,,,,q--j& i ;
Harness
.A+ INNER SEAT BELT INSTALLATION (1) Route the seat belt switch connector harness on the adjuster bracket. (2) Use clips to secure the harness to the adjuster bracket. (3) Fit the locking claw of the inner seat belt positively in the locking hole provided in the seat bracket.
Locmg claw
1TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Front Seat INSPECTION
52A-23
POWER SEAT SWITCH B CHECK Operate the power seat switch to check for continuity.
Z19FO205
Switch position
Slide switch Slide switch Front height switch
Forward Backward UP Down
Rear height switch
UP Down
All switches
OFF
ALL POWER SEAT MOTORS CHECK (1) Disconnect each motor at the connector. To disconnect the lumbar support and side support motors, remove the seatback panel in advance. (2) Connect the terminals of each motor directly with the battery and check to see that the motor turns freely and each adjusting mechanism operates in the directions shown in the table below. (3) If there is any abnormality, replace the power seat adjuster assembly or seatback assembly.
194
Rear height motor rg@ 219F0199

00002360
TSB Revision
52A-24

LIMIT SWITCH CHECK (1) Disconnect each limit switch at the connector and connect a circuit tester between the terminals. (2) Operate each switch to check for continuity between the terminals. (3) If there is any abnormality, replace the power seat adjuster assembly. <Slide limit switch>
Rear height limit switch \
Front height limit switch
Slide kit switch
<Front and rear height limit switch>
I I
I I
~ I
1 dl
TSB Revision
INTERIOR - Rear Seat
52A-25
REAR SEAT
Zl9FOO62
Rear seat removal steps 4A, .A+ 1. Rear seat cushion 2. Rear seat back
Striker removal steps 3. Quarter trim (Refer to P.52A-13.) 4. Striker

qA, REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL With the lever pulled, raise the seat cushion, and remove the seat cushion.

.A4 REAR SEAT CUSHION INSTALLATION (1) Fit the attachment wire of the seat cushion under the seatback positively. (2) Pass the rear seat belt buckle through the seat cushion. (3) Insert the lock plate of the seat cushion in the respective holes provided in the floor.
\
Hole in floor
1TSB Revision
5244-26 SEAT BELT
INTERIOR - Seat Belt

<Front Seat Belt>
When radoving and installing the floor console as sembly, dont allow any impact or shock to the SRS
\ LJ
>
1 I 1
45 Nm 33 ftlbs.
~ I ~ ~ ~
L&J I I
%s.
00002361
Z19FO152
Outer seat belt removal steps

1. Quarter trim (Refer to P.52A-13.) .C( 2. Outer seat belt
Inner seat belt removal steps
Buzzer removal steps

l
Floor console assembly (Refer to P.52A-10.) 5. Buzzer
Floor console assembly (Refer to P.52A-10.) 3. Shield cover ,Bd 4. Inner seat belt
l
~ I
I LA
TSB Revision

<Rear Seat Belt>
45 Nm 33 ft.lbs.
52A-27
45 Nm
Outer seat belt removal steps 1. Quarter trim (Refer to P.52A-13.) .A+ 6. Outer seat belt
Inner seat belt removal steps 0 Rear seat cushion (Refer to P.52A-25.) 7. Inner seat belt 8. Inner seat belt bracket
Paw1 to --.---. __ prevent .->. retractor

Bead
.A4 OUTER SEAT BELT INSTALLATION (1) Positively insert the pawl to prevent the retractor from
rotating in the hole provided on the body. (2) Install the anchor plate along the bead of the body.
Hole ~$-f-&,,
,B( INNER SEAT BELT INSTALLATION
(1) Route the seat belt switch connector harness on the adjuster bracket. (2) Use clips to secure the harness to the adjuster bracket. (3) Fit the locking claw of the inner seat belt positively in the locking hole provided in the seat bracket.
Adjuster bracket
iotation
YlQFO12Q
TSB Revision
52A-28

,CA OUTER SEAT BELT INSTALLATION (1) Positively insert the pawl to prevent the retractor from rotating in the hole provided on the body. (2) After connecting the seat belt harness with the body harness, insert the clip on the connector into the hole on the body panel.
Jo
Paw1 to prevent rotation
I
Zl9FOlX1
I
(3) Insert the pawl of the belt guide in the hole provided on the body. (4) Install the final anchor of the front seat belt with the belt twisted 180 at the section between the sash guide and the final anchor so that the tip of the tongue is directed toward the front of the vehicle.
I ~ INSPECTION
BUCKLE SWITCH CHECK (1) Disconnect the buckle switch connector. (2) Check the continuity between the terminals.
Terminal No. Items Buckle unlock
Zt9FOO69
Z19FOO99
~ I \/ LA,
4
I ~ ~
0 0 0
Buckle lock
BUZZER CHECK Check that buzzer sounds when battery voltage is applied to the buzzer terminal.
I I
I \ dl
TSB Revision
52B-1
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

CONTENTS
AIR BAG MODULE AND CLOCK SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 AIR BAG MODULE DISPOSAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Deployed Air Bag Module Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Undeployed Air Bag Module Disposal . . . . . . . . 82
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 POST-COLLISION DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Service Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
COMPONENT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 FRONT IMPACT SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Configuration Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Connector Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Construction Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Schematic.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Warning/Caution Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT (SDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 TEST EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Diagnostic Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 SRS Diagnostic Procedures - Initial Steps . . . . 23
CAUTION Il Carefully read and observe the information in the SERVICE PRECAUTIONS (PS2B-18) prior to any service. l For information concerning troubleshooting or maintenance, always observe the procedures in the Troubleshooting (P.528-23) or the SRS Maintenance (GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service) sections, respectively. l If any SRS components are removed or replaced in connection with any service procedures, be sure to follow the procedures in the COMPONENT SERVICE section (P.52B-68) for the components involved. l If you have any questions about the SRS, please contact your local distributor.
52B-2
INTRODUCTION
SRS - General Information
GENERAL INFORMATION
On vehicles up to 1993 model, the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is adopted for the drivers side, and on vehicles from 1994 model, it is adopted both for drivers and passengers side. SRS is designed to supplement the front seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury to the front seat occupants by activating and deploying two air bags during certain frontal collisions. The SRS consists of: left front and right front impact sensors (located on the right and left front upper frame lowers); air bag modules for the driver (located in the center of the steering wheel) and for the front seat passenger (located above the glove box). Each module contains a folded air bag and an inflator unit. The SRS also contains: an SRS Diagnosis Unit with safing impact sensor (located under the floor console assembly); and SRS warning light to indicate the operational status of the SRS (located on the instrument panel); clock spring (mounted behind the steering wheel); and wiring. The SRS is designed so that the air bag will deploy when the safing sensor, plus either or both of the left front and right front impact sensors simultaneously activate while the ignition switch is in the ON position. These sensors are designed to activated in frontal or near-frontal impacts of moderate to server force. Only authorized service personnel should work on or around SRS components. Those personnel should read this manual carefully before starting any work. Extreme care must be used when servicing the SRS to avoid injury to service personnel (by inadvertent deployment of the air bags) or vehicle occupant (by rendering the SRS inoperative).
SRS warning light
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICISRS WARNING LIGHT FUNCTION The diagnosis unit monitors the SRS system and stores data concerning any detected faults in the system. When the ignition key is in ON or START position, the SRS warning light should illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn off. That indicates that the SRS system is in operational order. If the SRS warning light does any of the following, immediate inspection by an authorized dealer is needed. (1) The SRS warning light does not illuminate as described above. (2) The SRS warning light stays on for more than 7 seconds. (3) The SRS warning light illuminates while driving. If a vehicles SRS warning light is in any of these three conditions when brought in for inspection, the SRS system must be inspected, diagnosed and serviced in accordance with this manual.
TSB Revision
SRS - General Information CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM (Up to 1993 models) L

Right front impact sensor / Left front impact sensor
52B-3
SRS diagnosis unit (Incorporated safing
19FO138 00004055
VEHICLE
19FOO73
19FO118 0020008
NOTE This construction diagram displays the general view of the SRS components. For details, refer to Schematic (P.52B-7), Configuration Diagrams (P.52B-9) and Circuit Diagram (P.52B-13).
TSB Revision
52B-4
(From 1994 models)
I)
i I
Rightfront impact sensor SW warning light \\
Air baa module (Passkgers side)

19FO244
19FO241
SRS diagnosis unit (Incorporated safing imnsrt cancnri VEHICLE IDENTIFIPLATE
:;$I$ CODE
16FOO73
19FO230 00004054
NOTE This construction diagram displays the general view of the SRS components. For details, refer to Schematic (P.52B-8), Configuration Diagrams (F?52B-9) and Circuit Diagram(P.52B-15).
TSB Revision
SRS - General Information WARNING/CAUTION LABELS

A number of caution labels relating to the SRS are found in the vehicle, as shown in the following i illustration. Follow label instructions when servicing SRS. If labels are dirty or damaged, replace them with new ones.
52B-5
NOTE Shown here are the contents of the caution labels attached to a vehicle from 1994 model. On caution labels attached to 1992 and 1993 model vehicles, slightly different expressions are used in places.
.F
E i
<Up to 1993 models>
Z19FO143
<From 1994 models>

219NO245
Z19LO458
Z13R0683
Z19LO423
00002553
TSB Revision
52B-6
A

Contents of the labels
WARNING F This vehicle has an air bag system. Refer to service manual before servicing or disassembling underhood components. Read SRS section of manual for important instructions. Improper service procedures can result in the air bag firing or _ G becoming inoperative, leading to injury.
CAUTION: SRS Before replacing steering wheel, read service manual, center front wheels and align SRS clock spring neutral marks. Failure to do so may render SRS system inoperative, risking serious driver injury. WARNING: SRS This air bag module cannot be repaired. Do not disassemble. Do not tamper. Do not perform diagnosis. Do not touch with electrical test equipment or probes. Refer to service manual for further instructions, and for special handling, storage and disposal procedures. Tampering or mishandling can result in injury. Danger Poison. Keep out of the reach of children. Contains sodium azide and potassium nitrate contents are poisonous and extremely flammable. Contact with acid, water, or heavy metals may produce harmful and irritating gases or explosive compounds. Do not dismantle, incinerate, bring into contact with electricity or store at temperatures exceeding (93.3%) 200F. First aid: If contents are swallowed induce vomiting. For eye contact flush eye with water for 15 minutes If gases from acid or water contact are inhaled, seek fresh air. In every case, get prompt medical attention. For additional information, see material safety data sheet (MSDS) for this product. CAUTION: SRS clock spring This is not a repairable part. Do not disassemble. Do not tamper. If defective, remove and replace entire unit per service manual instructions. Before replacement, read service manual, center front wheels and align neutral marks. Failure to follow instructions may render SRS system inoperative, risking serious driver injury. CAUTION: SRS Before removal of steering gearbox, read service manual, center front wheels and remove ignition key. Failure to do so may damage SRS clock spring and render SRS system inoperative, risking serious driver injury. WARNING: SRS This air bag module cannot be repaired. Do not disassemble. Do not tamper. Do not perform diagnosis. Do not touch with electrical test equipment or probes. Refer to service manual for further instructions, and for special handling. Storage and disposal procedures. Tampering or mishandling can result in injury. DANGER POISON Keep out of the reach of children. Contains sodium azide and potassium nitrate contents are poisonous and extremely flammable. Contact with acid, water or heavy metals may produce harmful and irritating gases or explosive compounds. Do not dismantle. Incinerate, bring into contact with electricity or store at temperatures exceeding 93C (200F). FIRST AID: If contents are swallowed induce vomiting. For eye contact flush eye with water for 15 minutes. If gases from acid or water contact are inhaled, fresh air. In every case, get prompt medical attention.
CAUTION: SRS Read service manual. Do not drop. Do not tamper or disassemble. This vehicle has air bags for front occupants as a supplemental restraint system (SRS). You must always wear your seatbelt, even with an air bag: . Air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers or in rear, side or low-speed frontal crashes. 0 Air bags inflate powerfully and in moment. If youre too close to an inflating air bag. It could seriously injure you. Seatbelts help keep you in position for air bag inflation in a crash. 0 An inflating air bag can seriously injure small children. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be badly injured by an inflating air bag so never use a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of this vehicle: a rear-facing child restraint should be used only in the rear seat. Use a forward-facing child restraint with the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or in the rear seat. 0 Before driving read label inside the glove box: if theSRS light comes on while you are driving or does not come on when you first start the vehicle, see your dealer for service. See your owners manual for more information. H
::
iJ
Air bag system information This vehicle has an air bag which will supplement the seatbelt in certain frontal collisions. The air bag is not a substitute forthe seatbelt in any type of collision. The driver and all other occupants should wear seatbelts at all times. WARNING! If the SRS warning light does not illuminate for several seconds when the ignition key is turned to ON or engine is started, or if the warning light stays on while driving, take the vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately. Also, if the vehicles front end is damaged or if the air bag has deployed, take the vehicle for service immediately. The air bag system must be inspected by an authorized dealer ten years after the vehicle manufacture date shown on certification label located on left front door-latch post or door frame. Read SRS section of your owners manual before driving, for important information, about operation, and service of the air bag system. When you are going to discard your gas generator or vehicle, please see your dealer.
CAUTION: SRS diagnosis unit This unit cannot be repaired. If defective, remove and replace entire unit per service manual instructions. Do not disassemble or tamper. See service manual for handling and storage instructions. Do no drop: keep dry. Failure to follow instructions could render air bag inoperative and result in driver injury.
1 TSB Revision
SRS - General Information SCHEMATIC (Up to 1993 models)
52B-7
/ L
STARTER RELAY M/T
IGNITION SWITCH <ST> -
IGNITION SWITCH <IGl> I Multi-purpose fuses
Connector lock switch
iCombination meter (SRS waming light) MIT A!T 1
r----
Crank signal detection circuit
Warning light malfunction detection circuit
sensor
sensor (R.H.)
xor tL.H.1 ser.--. ,-.. ..,
Frc- I,,,pxA :-..^^1 ,I II
I . ..I Airg module
1
Data link connector (For Scan tool)
Z19FO141
1 TSB Revision
SRS - General Information (From 1994 models)
STARTER RELAY IGNITION SWITCH <ST>
IGNITION SWITCH clGl>
1
L
I
Multi-purpose fuses Connector lock switch r---UNLOCK
M/T
AI-r
malfunction detection circuit
Connector lock detection circuit
I
D.C.-DC. converter
LI rl u m
u m ti VI
I
t 0
I
Safing impact sensor ib
Clock spring
ON FF Front impact sensor (R.H.) m Front impact sensor (L.H.) Air bag module (passengers side) Air bag module (drivers side) L Data link connector
I-
ZlSFO232
/ TSB Revision
SRS - General Information CONFIGURATION DIAGRAMS

Engine compartment
A-09X f-l
528-9
I
-38
A-09X Starter relay A-38 Front impact sensor (L.H.) A-63 Front impact sensor (R.H.)
B. Engine and transaxle (Front view)
I
B-26* B-23 Starter motor B-24 Starter motor B-26 Park/neutral position switch NOTE l 1 1992 model *2 From1 993 model
\
B-26*2
00002554
.TSB Revision
52B-10
C. Dash panel
z36FOOOl c-57 Clock sprinq c-59 Ignition switch c-79 Data link connector C-86
Jr.&ion block 236FOO84

00002587
(For scan tool)
Passengers air bag module
NOTE *l Up to 1993 models ** From 1994 models
D. Instrument panel and floor console

D-05 D-23
D-24 D - 2 5
D-26 D-03 Combination meter (For SRS warning light) D-04 Combination meter (For SRS warning light) D-05 Combination meter (For SRS warning light) D-23 14-pin red connector to body wiring harness D-24 e-pin blue connector to right front impact sensor (Up to 1993 models) or 2-pin green connector to passengers air bag module (squib) <From 1994 models>
/Y
D-25
236FOO81
00002555
-25* 2-pin yellow connector to left front impact sensor <Up to 1993 models> or no connection <From 1994 models> -26 P-pin red connector to clock spring NOTE l : Connector to SRS Diagnosis Unit
) TSB Revision
SRS - General Information CONNECTOR CONSTRUCTION
52B-11
Lock lever
The connector of the SRS diagnosis unit has a double lock mechanism, fit verification mechanism and connector shorting mechanism. DOUBLE LOCK MECHANISM The mechanism is composed of two mechanisms: each connector of the SRS diagnosis unit is locked to the connector of the harness, then these connectors (of the four harnesses) are locked with the secondary lock lever mounted on the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit side. The secondary lock lever locking is done as the lock spring fits in the notch of the connector. The operating principle is described below.
Connector notch
Z13R0721
-7% ozd, BO2556
SRS diagnosis unit side connector Harness side connector Primary lock
When Connectors Are To Be Fitted (1) The SRS diagnosis unit and harness side connectors are connected. (Primary lock) (2) The secondary lock lever mounted to the SRS diagnosis unit side connector, is pressed down until a click is heard indicating that the connectors have been locked. (Secondary lock) If the harness and SRS diagnosis unit connectors do not properly fit, the secondary lock lever side projection and the harness side connector projection interfere with each other, making it impossible to lock the connectors. When Connectors Are Unlocked (1) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever (Type 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the lock lever Ojrpe 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. (2) Press the primary lock of each of the harness side connectors and remove the harness side connector.
Improperly fitted state

Forced down
zi 3&84
Properly fitted state

Lock spring Primary lqck
Z13R0685
ff0686 00002557
TSB Revision
52B-12
Secondary lock lever

FIT VERIFICATION MECHANISM The mechanism is used to electrically check the engagement of the connector between the SRS diagnosis unit and the body wiring harness. The operating principle is described below. (1) Securely connect the SRS diagnosis unit and harness sidexonnectors and press the secondary lock lever down to lock the connectors. (2) At this time, the short bar provided on the rear surface of the secondary lock lever produces a short circuit across terminals No. (7) and (8) of the SRS diagnosis unit. The SRS diagnosis unit supplies monitoring current to the circuit to electrically verify that the connectors have been locked. CONNECTOR SHORTING MECHANISM The mechanism is designed for prevention of accidental ignition of the inflator when the clock spring connector (for the squib circuit) is removed from the SRS diagnosis unit. The operating principle is described below.
d I 1 ~ 1 ~ ~ I I
II
u !!3RO687
Short bar (Press-fitted terminal
I I
z13R0688
Short bar
247
I d I I
When Connectors Are Fitted When the SRS diagnosis unit and clock spring connectors are coupled, the circuit between the short terminals and clock spring connector terminals is kept in the OFF state by the partition plate provided in the connector of the SRS diagnosis unit.
Press-fitted tab terminals
To body wiring harness (14-pin) \ To clock spring Z19NO303

00002558
Short terminal (open)
chd;zE.g* _ pafly ,TYh?F=s

I
Short terminal
Zl3R0690
f-n
I I
When Connectors Are Disconnected When the clock spring connectors are disconnected from the SRS diagnosis unit, the partition plate between the short terminals and clock spring connector terminals is removed. As a result, a short circuit is formed between the two poles of the clock spring connector terminals to prevent generation of a potential difference (current) between the squib terminals.
213R0691
I vi
TSB Revision
SRS - General Information CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (Up to 1993 models) id

STARTER RELAY --TIGNI ION SW11 :H r I 8
52B-13
IGNITION SWITCHtIGl) 2B-W
? E ,I I
3---_---------_ A/T
> f II
VIlY THEFTRLAEU I
?52
a
COMBINATION METER (SRS WARNING LIGHT)
>
:
ti I
ggy
FM I
8 CRANKING SIGNAL DETECTION CIRCUIT DRIVE CIRCUIT t
/~
i 1992 MODEL g g y 1993 MODEL z
MICROCOMPUTER
,I II II II II II-----Y 93 zm IB
CONNECTOR
t MULTI-USE TESTER INTERFACE CIRCUIT

I
DETECTION CIRCUIT
I @
-_-_I
CONNEflOR LOCK SWITCH J/B
1 TSB Revision

CAUTION 1. Do not repair, spline or modify SRS wiring (except for specific repairs to the body wiring harness shown on page 528-18; replace wiring if necessary, after reading and following all precautions and procedures in this manual. 2. Do not use an analogue ohmmeter to check SRS wiring or components; use only special tools and digital multi-meter shown on page 528-22.
I Lj ~
2B-W J/B ML&PURPOSE
I I ~ I ~
SRB DIAGNOSIS UNIT 0 v
1 I I
D.C. -D.C. CONVERTER IL IL I
\ ~ d
AIR ~$&i&DULE
TSB Revision
SRS - General Information (From 1994 models)
52B-15
fJ3F)-"
ANT& fU1SE s
O ------ __-_____ _2_B:_y ;I,l~~~~~E~~~~~2B-~~~~~~~~R-~~-~g5;

2B-Y 2B-Y
-
STARTER RELAY
IGNITION SWITCH(ST) 28-y/ 2m t
p$B6E a :W-B 57 +
HORN j
SW-B l(c-68)
1
2B-Y I
CONNECTOR 1 (A-1IX) n "r-7, \I u. n130- I

y-----& +
I R-B I
I,,
@R'LIGHT 1 liCCBr?sI
L $&4LARM &g$4RM
2B-Y I8 2B-' Y
E@FMENT
0.85B-W
LTp
"fwF
iJ
1.25B-Y i
.MFI SYSTEM XWING
PARK/NEUTRAL &I~~&"" 2B-Y 2B-Y 28-R

MFI SYSTEM
SEilSOR
I I I I r A+
1
;--CT) ha5w
+ 5 (D-24)
rrSTARTING
0.85B-
0.858-F; M/T . A/T 2 lm 0.858-Y t FRONT IMPACT SENSORCLH) (A-38) FRONT !MPACT SENSORCRH) (A-63)
I-
1 I
PASSENGER'S $&;IRBgy MODULE (c-86)
1 TSB Revision
52B-16
CAUTION 1. Do not repair, spline or modify SRS wiring (except for specific repairs to the body wiring harness shown on page 52B-20; replace wiring if necessary, after reading and following all precautions and procedures in this manual. 2. Do not use an analogue ohmmeter to check SRS wiring or components; use only special tools and digital multi-meter shown on page 528-22.
IGNI :ON
ii I I
0-w
SWiT I(IG1) 2B-W
IOA
63
B-W
I I
0.833-k
I 1
0.858-R 12
'HEADLIGHT .FOG LIG? .!3ACK-UP LIGHT
i/~ 1 I ~
LOCK SWITCH .--7 R-B Y-B B B 2B DATA LINK CONNECTOR 0
~ I I
(c-15)
(c-7?)
(c-77)
-FRONT SIDE (c-82)
(D-04)
(D-05) n 1o1/1o2llm~1M/1s(IBll~~lw ID) 1IO~IIII1U/1U/1X~I(I!B1117
HRISHIBAB
dl
1 TSB Revision
52B-17
COMPONENT LOCATION
Name Data link connector <From 1994 models> Data link connector <Up to 1993 models> Symbol D C Name Front impact sensor SRS diagnosis unit Symbol A B
YlQFO243
1. cur, to 1993 models>
<From 1994 models>
L(BFO49
1 TSB Revision
52B-18
SRS - Service Precautions
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
1. In order to avoid injury to yourself or others from accidental deployment of the air bag during SRS servicing, read and carefully follow all the precautions and procedures described in this manual. 2. Do not use any electrical test equipment on or near SRS components, except those specified on P.528-22. Never use an analog ohmmeter. 4. 3. Never Attempt to Repair the Following Components: l Front Impact Sensors 0 SW Diagnosis Unit (SDU) l Clock Spring 0 Air Bag Module If any of those components are diagnosed as faulty, they should only be replaced, in accordance with the COMPONENT SERVICE procedures in this manual, starting at page [52B-681.
v)
Do not attempt to repair the wiring harness connectors of the SRS. If any of the connectors is diagnosed as fault, replace the wiring harness. If the wires are diagnosed as faulty, replace or repair the wiring harness according to the following table. (Up to 1993 models) Harness SDU Terminal No.
1 2 3 4 5 2 pins, Connector
(No. of
Terminals, Color)
Destination of Harness
Corrective
Action
2 pins,
red
Clock spring
Replace clock
spring. Replace with

sensor cable.*
yellow 2 pins,
blue
Body wiring harness + Front wiring harness + Front impact sensor (LH)
Body wiring harness + Front wiring harness

+ Front impact sensor (RH) Body wiring harness -
I ~
Body wiring harness + Diagnosis check pin
Correct or replace
I 1 I
NOTE (1) The sensor cable marked with
is available as service part.
~ LJ
(2) The sensor cable used as a replacement part is routed along the body wiring harness.
TSB Revision
528-l 9
2-pin blue connector to right front impact sensor e-pin yellow connector to left front impact sens SRS diagnosis unit xi 3RO704 2-pin red connector to clock spring
SDU ./ ..
View A
To front impact sensor (L.H.) \
To front impact sensor (R.H.)
Y19FO104
\
harness (14-pin)
00002559
14-pin red connector to body wiring harness
1 TSB Revision
52B-20
(From 1994 models)
Destination of Harness
Body wiring harness + Junction block + Body wiring harness + Ground
NOTE (1) The sensor cable marked with * is available as service part. (2) The sensor cable used as a replacement part is routed along the body wiring harness.
1 TSB Revision
SRS - Service Precautions / SPecifications
52B-21
2-pin green connector to air bag module <Passengers side>
SDU /
View A
Unused terminals To air bag module <Passengers side> / \
Xl 3R0704
2-pin red connector to clock spring
\
To clock spring
To body wiring harness (14-pin) Y19NO303
14-pin red connector to body wiring harness
After disconnecting the battery cable, wait 60 seconds or more before proceeding with the following work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag for a short time even after the battery has been disconnected, so serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cables are disconnected. 6. SRS components should not be subjected to heat over 93C (2OOF), so remove the front impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit and air bag module and clock spring before drying or baking the vehicle after painting. 7. Whenever you finish servicing the SRS, check the SRS warning light operation to make sure that the system functions properly. (Refer to P.52B-2). 8. Make certain that the ignition switch is at OFF when the scan tool is connected or disconnected. 5. NOTE SERIOUS INJURY CAN RESULT FROM UNINTENDED AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, SO USE ONLY THE PROCEDURES AND EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL.
SPECIFICATIONS
SERVICE SPECIFICATION
Items
Standard value
2,000 f 40 I
Front impact sensor resistance Sz

1
Clock spring resistance ~2
less than 0.4
TSB Revision
52B-22 SPECIAL TOOLS
SRS - Special Tools
l l l
Ing diagnostic trouble codes Erasing diagnostic trouble code Reading trouble period Reading erase times
l l l
Reading diagnostic trouble code Erasing diagnostic trouble code Reading trouble period Reading erase times
SRS check harness is used on various QUENCE (P.52B-24-P.52B-63)
4 ~ ~ I
I I
~ I
d
TSB Revision
SRS - Test Equipment / Troubleshooting
528-23
TEST EQUIPMENT
Tool Name Digital multi-meter (Use a multi-meter for,which the Maximum test current is 2 mA or less at the minimum range of resistance measurement.) Use Checking the SRS electrical circuitry with SRS Check Harness
TROUBLESHOOTING
M;P;lAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES - INITIAL
FOLLOW THESE STEPS WHEN BEGINNING ANY SRS SERVICE: 1. Check the SRS fuses (multi-purpose fuses No. 11 and No. 18). If either is loose, tighten it; if damaged or blown, replace it. 2. After performing step 1, turn the ignition key to the ON position. Does SRS warning light illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn OFF? If yes, SRS system is functioning properly. If no, continue with following steps. NOTE 1. From 1993 model, the SRS warning light illuminates also when the battery voltage drops. In that case, the SRS warning light goes out if the battery voltage returns to the normal level. 2. On 1992 model, if the vehicle has a discharged battery or battery power supply (multi-purpose fuses No. 11 or No. 18) is disconnected with the ignition key in the ON position, the SRS warning light will continue to illuminate even after the battery is recharged or the fuses are replaced in .their original positions. In this case, the SRS warning light can be extinguished by turning the ignition switch ON and OFF 10 times.
ZlSFO304
SRS warning light
TSB Revision
52B-24
When using the MUT
SRS - Troubleshootina
3. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position. 4. Connect the scan tool (MUT or MUT-II). When connecting the scan tool (MUT-II) to a vehicle up to 1993 model, use the adapter harness supplied together. Caution Make certain that the ignition switch is at OFF when the scan tool is connected or disconnected. 5. Start the SRS diagnosis by conducting TEST 1 (SRS warning light does not extinguish) or TEST 2 (SRS warning light does not illuminate) which begins on next page.
When using ihe MUT-II
I I I I I
22OFO159
<From 1994 models>
, , ,
,,
I ~ d i
00002561
YZOFO164
DIAGNOSTIC SEQUENCE
TEST 1 SRS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT EXTINGUISH
I 1
(2) Erase the diagnostic trouble codes following the scan tool messages. (3) Start engine. Does SRS warning light illuminate for about 7 seconds, turn OFF and then remain extinguished for at least 45 seconds? If yes, SRS system is functioning properly now. If no, check the diagnostic trouble codes written down at step (4) above, refer to ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC QUICK REFERENCE CHART (P.528-25) and perform service indicated there.
(1) Read (and write down) all of the displayed diagnostic trouble codes and service data (fault duration and how many time memories are erased) using the scan tool. NOTE (1) Maximum stored period: 9999 minutes (approximately 7 days) (2) Maximum number of times to be stored: 250 (3) If the scan tool displays CANT COMM., check the scan tool and vehicle side self-check data link connector for poor connections (Refer to P.528-27.) and perfom TEST 3.
~ I I 1
I d I
/ TSB Revision
SRS - Troubleshooting
TEST 2 L SRS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
528-25
I
(1) Read (and write down) all of the displayed diag-
nostic trouble codes and service data (fault duration and how many time memories are erased) using the scan tool. NOTE (1) Maximum stored period: 9999 minutes (approximately 7 days) (2) Maximum number of times to be stored: 250
(3) If the scan tool displays CANT COMM., check the scan tool and vehicle side self-check data link connector for poor connections (Refer to P.52B-24.) and perform TEST 4. (2) Check diagnostic trouble codes against ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC QUICK REFERENCE CHART and perform service indicated there.
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC QUICK REFERENCE CHART

Fault No. Explanation Normal. The SRS is in good order. 11 The circuits for the front impact sensor are shorted to each other. Or the negative harness between the air bag module and the SDU is shorted to ground or the positive harness between the front impact sensor and the SDU is shorted to ground. Right or left impact sensor circuit is open or the wire from the sensor to the SDU is open-circuit. Right and left impact sensor circuits are open or the wires from the sensors to the SDU are open-circuit. The circuits for the drivers air bag module (squib) are shorted to each other or the circuit is grounded. The drivers seat air bag module (squib) circuit is open or the wire from the drivers air bag module to the SDU (clock spring) is opencircuit. Or the harness connector make a poor contact or the positive harness between the drivers air bag module and the SDU is shorted to ground. The circuits for the passengers air bag module (squib) are shorted to each other or the circuit is grounded. The passengers air bag module (squib) circuit is open or the wire from the passengers air bag module to the SDU (clock spring) is open-circuit. Or the harness connector make a poor contact or the positive harness between the passengers air bag module and the SDU is shorted to ground. The capacitor (integrated in the SDU) terminal voltage is higher than the specified value for 5 seconds. If the battery voltage is normal, replace SDU. (Refer to P.52B-71.) If the battery is run down, turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and wrap the terminal with tape for insulation. Then, charge the battery. Perform TEST 8 Perform TEST 7 Perfom TEST 6 Perform TEST 5 Service
12 13
, L
21 22
24 25
31
32*
The capacitor (integrated in the SDU) terminal voltage is lower than the specified value for 5 seconds. Or the battery runs short.
33*
The circuit for the cranking signal is shorted to some power supply circuits. It takes at least 45 seconds that the SDU detects this fault.
TSB Revision
528-26
The multi-purpose fuse (No. 18) is blown or the wire from the fuse to the SDU is open-circuit or its resistance value is increased, or the battery runs short. It takes at least 5 seconds that the SDU detects this fault.
to the SDU is open-circuit or its resistance value is increased, or the battery runs short. It takes at least 5 seconds that the SDU detects this fault.
wrap the terminal with
sulation. Then, charge
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnostic trouble code memory from the scan tool and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit (3) *: If the vehicle has a discharged battery it will store the fault code 32. When this diagnostic trouble code is displayed, check the battery. (4) **: Upon recovery from the fault identified with the code No. marked with **, the SRS warning light goes out and the function returns to the normal condition. (From 1993 model)
TSB Revision
SRS - Troubleshootinn
NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN SCAN TOOL AND SDU (SRS warning light does not extinguish)
FuslBLELlmQ IGNITION 3~Il'Cli(IGl)
52B-27
TEST 3
SRS diagnosii unit
View A
To front impact sensor (L.H.)* or unused terminals*2 To front impact sensor (R.H.)* or to passengers airbag module*2 \
To klock spring To body wiring harness (14-pin)
NOTE
I-
l l Up to 1993 models
*2 From 1994 models
lnsuking tape c_ Battery (-) cable
Battery
219FOlO:
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.)
TSB Revision
52B-28
(3) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever (Type 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the lock lever (Type 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against thelock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. (4) Disconnect the red 14-pin connector from the SDU.
driver
di ~ I I I 1 I I I 1 I do I ~
219N0289
SRS Check Harness
MB991349 (Up to 1993 models) MB991530 (From 1994 models)
(5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (16pin) to the connector (3) of the SRS Check . Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart on the next page, using the specified digital multi-meter.
SRS Check Harness connector (5) Data link connector
i I I 1
00002563
I I L/l
TSB Revision
No Is there continuity between the No. 8 termi- -----+ Body wiring harness damaged or disnal (vehicles up to 1993 model) or No.12 connected between the SDU and the terminal (vehicles from 1994 model) of the data link connector data link connector and the No. 9 terminal of the SRS Check Harness Connector (5)? Data link connector <uoto 1993models> <From 1994models> c
528-29
Repair or replace the body wiring har1 yg%r to P.528-18, 20.)
Yes
No ~1 Malfunction of the SDU. I * Replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-71.)
/ IS there continuity] or No. 14 terminal of SRC Check Harness connector (5) and around?
1 Yes
Disconnect the connector between the body wiring harness and instrument panel wiring harness. Check for continuity between the grouna and terminal No. 12 or No. 13 of the body wiring harnesss connector which is con netted to the instrument panel wiring bar ness. The harness between SDU and instrument panel wiring harness is short-circuited. t Repair or replace the body wiring harness at the location of the short circuit (Refer to P.528-18, 20.) 1
/,yes
19FO281 + The instrument panel wiring harness between SRS warning lamp and body wiring harness is short-circuited. * Repair or replace the instrument panel wiring harness at the location of the short-circuit.
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnostic trouble code memory from the scan tool and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit
TSB Revision
52B-30
TEST 4
NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN SCAN TOOL AND SDU
(SRS warning light does not illuminate) I
<d ,
IGNITION tWKH(IGl~ I
I I 1
SRS diagnosis unit
View A
zl3R0704
I I ~ ~
To front impact sensor (L.H.) or unused terminaF2 To front impact sensor (R.H.)* or to passengers airbag module*2 \
To c&k spring
ZlSNO302 00002607 I To body wiring harness (14-pin)
I d I ~ ~ ~ ~
mm-Ax-IIWOI-Y I-
NOTE *l Up to 1993 models *2 From 1994 models

J
lns&ting tape _L Battery (-) cable
Battery
1 I 3
1 TSB Revision
-7
52B-31
Z19N02.99
<TYPe 2> Lock lever
(3) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever (Type 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the. lock lever Crype 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. (4) Disconnect the red 14-pin connector from the SDU.
MB991349 (Up to 1993 models) MB991530 (From 1994 models) SRS Check Harness
(5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (14-pin) to the connector (3) of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart on the next page using the specified digital multi-meter.
View A
Zl9N0231
SRS Check Harness Connector (5) Fuse No. 11
Flse No. 18
Grobd
19LO567 00002564
TSB Revision
52B-32
N o IS there continuity between the No. 19 or No. 20 - Ground circuit open terminal of SRS Check Harness connector (5) and ground? I i Yes Reconnect negative terminal of battery, and turn the ignition key to the ON position.
~ d, I
(l)Tum the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2)After waiting at least 80 seconds, repair or reDiaCethebodvwiring harness. (Reier to P.528-18, 20.)
1 1 ~ I I
-/Malfunctionof
(1)Tum the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2)After waiting at least 60 seconds, replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-71.)
I I 1 ~ \ LJ
TSB Revision
WHEN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE No. 11, No. 12 OR No. 13 IS DISPLAYED (Up to 1993 models)
TEST 5
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR CL. H. 1 UXRS-AX-RAW-I
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR CR. H. I
View A
SRS diagnosis unit

a3Fto704
Front impact sensor resistance check
To front impact sensor (L.H.) To front impact sensor (R.H.) \
L
/
Z19FO102
To/clock spring
I To body wiring harness (14-pin)

19N0200
00002565
NOTE If combined front impact sensor and air bag module (squib) failure modes simultaneously occur in two places, the preconditions for the respective detection circuits will go out of order. For this reason, both diagnostic trouble codes may not be stored but only one of them may be indicated. Their relationships are shown in the following table. Failure modes Front impact sensor short-circuited Short-circuited Open-circuited
11
Front impact sensor open-circuited (one side)

12 or
Front impact sensor open-circuited (both side) 13 or 21 13or22
Air bag module (Squib)
or 21
21
11 or 22
12or22
The numbers in the boxes are diagnostic trouble codes numbers. (Refer to P.526-25.)
1 TSB Revision
52B-34
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) (3) Apply a flat tip screwdriver to the lock spring (metallic portion) of the SDU connector lock lever as illustrated and push it horizontally toward the back of the unit. Caution 1. Do not push up the lock lever (green) by force. 2. Never insert a screwdriver between the lock lever (green) and the lock spring (metallic portion). (4) Disconnect each connector other than 14-pin connector from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of each connector. (Refer to PS2B-11.) (5) Locate the blue and yellow connectors for the wiring leading to the front impact sensors, which were connected to the now-disconnected harness-side connector of the SDU. Connect those blue and yellow connectors to connector (3) of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart on the next page, using the specified digital multi-meter and scan tool.
Batte 4
219FOlO7
MB991 349 SRS Check Harness
Front impact sensor connect01 (R.H.) (blue)
cd 4
A
-1
\ Front impact sensor connectar (L.H.) (yellow)
View A \
SRS Check Harness connector@) Zl9N9232
Z18fI2189
0ooo2586
TSB Revision
Is the resistance between the terminals of the left front impact sensor normal?
52B-35
Replace the left front impact sensor.
minal of SRS Check Harness connector (5) and the No. 4 terminal nomtal?
Yes c Replace the sensor cables. (Refer to P.52B-18.) Y e s there continuity between left front im)act sensor terminal and sensor brack?t? s * Replace the left front impact sensor. (Refer to l?52B-68.)
For terminals No. 3 and No. 4 of the SRS check harness connector (5) IS there continuity between each of them
19FO282
L
1Short-circuit of the harness between left 1-w front impact sensor and SRS diagnosis unit.
I Is the resistance between the No. 5 terminal of SRS Check Harness connector
Replace the right front impact sensor. of the right front impact sensor normal?
Front wiring hamiss is grounded or open. Yes
- Replace the sensor cables. (Refer to i?52B-18.)
/I SRS check harness connector (5) is there continuitv between each of them and the bodyground? I IUO
Yes c Is there continuity between right front - Replace the right front impact sensor. (Refer to P52B-68.) impact sensor terminal and sensor bracket?
19FO282
No 7 Yes Short-circuit of the harness between - Replace harness. right front impact sensor and SRS diagnosis unit. 1 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnostic trouble code memory from the scan tool and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit / TSB Revision
528-36
CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE I

Resistor (322)
(1) Connect the red 2-pin connector (1) of the SRS Chec Harness to the SDU in place of the now-disconnecte clock spring-SDU connector. NOTE A 3-ohm resistor that corresponds to the resistance ( the air bag module (squib) and the wiring resistance i connected between the terminals of the connector (1 of the SRS Check Harness.
I I I I ~ I
SRS Check Harness
(2) Reconnect blue and yellow connectors, for the wiring lead ing to the front impact sensors, to the SDU and double lock them. (Refer to P.52B-11.) NOTE If double locking cannot be made, the connector is incor rectly or incompletely inserted; re-check to insert the con nectar correctly and securely.
I d I ~
CONTINUED ON 52B-45 (TEST 6)
~ I I I I
I ;I
1TSB Revision
WHEN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE No. 11, No. 12 OR No. 13 IS DISPLAYED (From 1994 models)
52B-37
TEST 5
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT
10 -__-----_--_. ---- 9 ii . 51 t 2 . sz tl
it
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR IL. H. 1
FRONT INPACT SENSOR CR. H. 1
SRS diagnosis unit
View A Front impact sensor resistance check

Digital multi-meter Unused terminals \
1370704
Passengers air bag module
To c;ock spring
To bodywiring harness (14-pin)
Zl9N0303 00002608
19FO102
NOTE If combined front impact sensor and air bag module (squib) failure modes simultaneously occur in two places, the preconditions for the respective detection circuits will go out of order. For this reason, both diagnostic trouble codes may not be stored but only one of them may be indicated. Their relationships are shown in the following table.
1 TSB Revision
SRS - Troubleshootinn
1
Battery
219FO107
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) (3) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever (Type 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the lock lever
d ,
(Type 29
Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. (4) Disconnect red 14-pin connector from the SRS diagnosis unit. (Refer to P.52B-11.) (5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (1Cpin) to the connector (3) of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart on the next page, using the digital multi-meter.
I ~ 1 I 1
connector (red)
I
\ View A
SRS Check Harness connector (5) Left I,
lQFO266
1 I I
- Right
19LO567 00002566
[ TSB Revision
Is the resistance between the terminals of the left front impact sensor normal? nectar (5) and the No. 17 terminal nor-
52B-39
Replace the left front impact sensor.
Front wiring harness is grounded or open. ~ Yes Is there continuity between left front imsact sensor terminal and sensor brack?1?
* Replace the sensor cables. (Refer to P.52B-20.)
w Replace the left front impact sensor. (Refer to P.52B-68.)
there continuity between each of them No
19FO282
Short-circuitof the harness between left - Replace harness. front impact sensor and SRS diagnosis unit.
No
Replace the right front impact sensor. terminal of SRS Check Harness conof the right front impact sensor normal?
* Replace the sensor cables. (Refer to P.528-20.)
t Yes Yes Is there continuity between right front - Replace the right front impact sensor. For terminals No. 15 and No. 18 of the (Refer to P.238-68.) impact sensor terminal and sensor SRS check harness connector (5). is there continuity between each of them -t- bracket? and the body ground? I
No
19FO282
Yes Short-circuit of the harness between - Replace harness. right front impact sensor and SRS diagnosis unit.
No
t
1 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE /
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnostic trouble code memory from the scan tool and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions / properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit L 1 TSB Revision
52B-40
CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE 1

Resistor (3Q
(1) Connect the red 2-pin connector (1) of the SRS Check Harness to the SDU in place of the clock spring-SDU connector passengers air bag module-SDU. NOTE A 3-ohm resistor that corresponds to the resistance oi the air bag module (squib) and the wiring resistance is connected between the terminals of the connector (1) of the SRS Check Harness.
L&j I I I I I
A. -
I>
I I I
u\ / Resistor (3Q) 7-Y
Connector I1 1 of SRS Check harness Z19FO236
I I
(2) Reconnect 16pin red connectors, for the wiring leading to the front impact sensors, to the SDU and double lock them. (Refer to P.52B-11.) NOTE If double locking cannot be made, the connector is incor rectly or incompletely inserted; recheck to insert the con nectar correctly and securely.
<Passengers air bag module> ,,.z,
I d,
Z19FO231
00002595
Clock spring + CONTINUED ON 52B-45 (TEST 6)
Passengers air bag module i CONTINUED ON 528-51 (TEST 7)
TSB Revision
TEST 6 L Caution WHEN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE No. 21 OR No. 22 IS DISPLAYED
528-41
Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the drivers air bag module (squib) even if you are using the specified tester. If the circuit resistance is measured with a tester, accidental drivers air bag ,deployment will result in serious personal injury.
FUSIBLE LINK C$ IGNITION SWITCH(IG1)
SRS DIAGNOSIS
L
NOIE Xl FROM 1844 YODELS r2 VP m lS93 MODeLS
isi
UNIT
22
SRS diagnosis unit
z d c
El r d G
To front impact sensor (L.H.)*l or unused tenGnaW To front impact sensor (R.H.)* or to passengers airbag module2 \
84FPG
i? rd Gl
I% Ic d
To dlock spring NOTE *l Up to 1993 models *2 From 1994 models
$2
1 TSB Revision
52B-42
test(s) been finished? I(es
Perform the other diagnostic trouble code test(s) prior to this test.
NOTE If combined front impact sensor and drivers air bag module (squib) failure modes simultaneously occur in two places, the preconditions for the respective detection circuits will go out of order. For this reason, both diagnostic trouble codes may not be stored but only one of them may be indicatpd. Their relationships are shown in the following table. Perform TEST 5 if it does not become proper even through TEST 6 is executed. Failure modes Front impact sensor shortcircuited 11 or21 11 or22 Front impact sensor opencircuited (one side) 12 or 21 12or22 Front impact sensor opencircuited (both side) 13or21 13or22
i/, 1 1 I I I I 1 I I I I : \Lj I I I 1
Drivers air bag module (Squib)
Short-circuited Open-circuited
$
1 I I I I 1
L./l TSB Revision
/ CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE 1
528-43
Insulating tape
Battery
219FO107
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) (3) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever Crwe 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the lock lever (Type 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever.
1 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE 1
1 TSB Revision
52B-44
1
Resistor(3Ql
(1) Disconnect the red 2-pin connector from the SDU while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-11.) (2) Connect the red connector (1) of the SRS Check Harness to the SDU instead of the now-disconnected harness-side connector of the SDU, which were connected to the drivers air bag module (squib) through the clock spring. NOTE A 3-ohm resistor that corresponds to the resistance of the drivers air bag module (squib) and the wiring resistance is connected between the terminals of the connector (1) of the SRS Check Harness. (3) Make the double locking. NOTE If double locking cannot be made, the connector is incorrectly or incompletely inserted; recheck to insert the connector correctly and securely.
ij; I I I I I
I ( , I
L)
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE /
I I I ~ I I 1 I I I I
I #d ~
1 TSB Revision
528-45
CONTINUED FROM p.528-36, 40 I
i/
i
I
(1) Reconnect negative terminal of battery. (2) Use the scan tool (when connecting the scan tool (MUT-II to a vehicle up to 1993 model, use the adapter harries: supplied together). Caution Before connecting or disconnecting the scan tool make sure that the ignition switch is placed at tht OFF position. (3) Turn the ignition key to the ON position, erase the diag nostic trouble code memory (Refer to TEST 1.) (4) Return the ignition key from the ON to the LOCK position and then back to the ON position.
, LJ
TSB Revision
52B-46
1 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE j
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect
Connector (1) of SRS Check Harness
the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Apply a flat tip screwdriver to the lock spring (metallic portion) of the SDU connector lock lever as illustrated and push it horizontally toward the back of the unit. Caution 1. Do not push up the lock lever (green) by force. 2. Never insert a screwdriver between the lock lever (green) and the lock spring (metallic portion). (3) Disconnect the red 2-pin connector of the SRS Check Harness from the SDU.
I I I I
I I 1 I I 1 I
/ \ i
Resistor (3Q)
Xl 9FOO93 00002572
CONTINUED Oh NEXT PAGE
1 Id I I 1 i
1 TSB Revision
CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE 1
52B-47
/ L
MB991349 (Up to 1993 models) MB991530 (From 1994 models) SRS Check Harness No. 7 connector
Remove the drivers air bag module. (Refer to P.528-74.1 Join the No. 2 and No. 7 connectors of the clock sprint to SRS Check Harness connector (4) and SRS Check Harness connector (3) respectively. NOTE When joining SRS Check Harness connector (4), aligr its white paint with the hollow portion of the No. 2 connector of the clock spring. Is the resistance between terminal 1 and terminal 21 of SRS Check Harness connector (5), and between terminal 2 and terminal 22 of SRS Check Harness connector (5) normal? Standard value: less than 0.4 12
Clock spring
View A
No. 2 connector w of clock spring
SRS Check Harness Connector (5)
To co of spring
White- paint
To No.; connector of clock spring
g%2fi
00002573
IYO
Replace the clock spring. - (Refer to PS2B-74.)
Malfunction of the clock spring.
* Replace the air bag module. (Refer to i?52B-74.)
Caution Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the air bag module (squib) even if you are using the specified tester. If the circuit resistance is measured with a tester, accidental air bag deployment will result in serious personal injury. NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnostic trouble code memory from the scan tool and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) i (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit , TSB Revision
52B-48
TEST 7
WHEN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE No. 24 OR No. 25 IS DISPLAYED (From 1994 models)
Caution Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the passengers air bag module (squib) even if you are using the specified tester. If the circuit resistance is measured with a tester, accidental passengers air bag deployment will result in serious personal injury.
FUSIBLE LINK Q IGNITION SYITCH(IGI)
1-7 p;; -PURPOSE

Q 1**
7
m,i,2 1--=2 8
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT T ?ls: I R Hi&r MO\
gggqg~&jT WE3
T 1 1
SRS diagnosis unit
SENSOR
View A
13R0704
gj - m moz m
4 5 z &%I
I4 L.--6---_ 5 g 6 2I
2 i 5 E 1
Unused terminals Passengers airbag module \
To clock spring
I To body wiring harness (14-pin)
ZlSN0303 00002609
1 TSB Revision
No test(s) been finished?
Perform the other diagnostic trouble code test(s) prior to this test.
les N O T E If combined front impact sensor and passengers air bag module (squib) failure modes simultaneously occur in two places, the preconditions for the respective detection circuits will go out of order. For this reason, both diagnostic trouble codes may not be stored but only one of them may be indicated. Their relationships are shown in the following table. Perform TEST 5 if it does not become proper even through TEST 7 is executed.
Failure modes Front impact sensor shortcircuited Front impact sensor opencircuited (one side) 12or24 12or25 Front impact sensor opencircuited (both side) 13or24 13or25
Passe%Ws Short-circuited 11 or 24 air bag Open-circuited 11 or 25 module (Squib)
The numbers in the boxes are diagnostic trouble codes numbers. (Refer to P.52B-25.)
1 TSB Revision
52B-50
1CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE 1
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconneci
d,
Battev
ZlSFO107
Resistor
MB991 530 SW check harness
the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Disconnect the passengers air bag module connector from the body wiring harness connector. (3) Connect the SRS check harness connector (1) to the body wiring harness connector. NOTE A 3-ohm resistor that corresponds to the resistance oi the passengers air bag module (squib) and the wiring resistance is connected between the terminals of the connector (1) of the SRS Check Harness.
I ~ I
~ I I I I 1
Body wiring harnes
d ~ I
$
LJ
TSB Revision
CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE I
52B-51
CONTINUED FROM P.52B-40 I
I,
Reconnect negative terminal of battery. Use the scan tool (when connecting the scan tool (MUT-II: to a vehicle up to 1993 model, use the adapter harries: supplied together). Caution Before connecting or disconnecting the scan tool make sure that the ignition switch is placed at the OFF position. (3) Turn the ignition key to the ON position, erase the diag. nostic trouble code memory. (Refer to TEST 1.) (4) Return the ignition key from the ON to the LOCK position and then back to the ON position.
1 Defective passengers air bag module /
+
Replace passengers air bag module (Refer to P.52575.)
Caution Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the air bag module (squib) even if you are using the specified tester. If the circuit resistance is measured with a tester, accidental air bag deployment will result in serious personal injury.
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnostic trouble code memory from the scan tool and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit LJ TSB Revision
52B-52
1 TEST 8
WHEN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE No. 33 IS DISPLAYED I
EF
? 3
IGNITION svImtm) a. N ;2jj&&@
v,~ I I I
ml SWTCH
3------____ sEam
? 8 ii I II IllI 1*7!OJl zz- ZEz-
1
View A SRS diagno&s unit
1 I
To front imoact sensor lL.H.)* o r unusedterminals*2 To front impact sensor (R.H.)*l or to passengers airbag module*2 \
L--------------- --__ 20 19 $ g d a d 4
I
To clock spring Z10N0303 To body wiring harness (14-pin) oooo2*10
na ru ----
I d I I I
NOTE *I Up to 1993 models *2 From 1994 models
Battery
ZlSFO107
1 I \\ d
TSB Revision
528-53
piver
219N0269
<Type 2s L o c k
(3) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever Cryi= 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the lock lever (Type 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever.
WLod sp;g
213NO312
(4) Disconnect the red 14-pin connector from the SDU. (5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (14-pin) to the connector (3) of the SRS Check Harness. . (6) Check according to the flow chart on the next page, using the specified digital multi-meter.
14-pin SDU connector
View A
Zl9N0231
SRS Check Harness connector (5)
Ground
19L0567 00002575
TSB Revision
52B-54
No vGround circuit op Repair or replace harness. (Refer to P.52B-16, 20.)
and turn the ignition key to the ON
Malfunction of the SDU terminal (of SRS Check Harness connectar (5)) and the No. 19 or 20 terminal (ground) indicate system voltage? (Refer to P.52B-71.)
Short-circuit of cranking-signal detection circuit wiring harness and power source
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2)After waiting at least 60 seconds, repair or replace the body wiring harness. (Refer to P52B-16, 20.)
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) If more than 45 seconds of cranking is required to start up the engine, the diagnostic trouble code will be stored in memory, but if there is no problem, the diagnostic trouble code will be cleared and the SRS will return to normal. (2) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnostic trouble code memory from the scan tool (1992 model) and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) (3) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit
TSB Revision
TEST 9 i; WHEN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE No. 34 IS DISPLAYED
52B-55
FUSIBLE LINK Q
SNS DIAGNCSIS U?ilT
SRS diag&sis unit

II FRON 1904 uDDEl.6 12 UP ID 1883 YODEL6
View A
zl3R0704
Insulating\ tape I,
Bat&y (-1 cable
To front impact sensor (L.H.) or unused terminals** To front impact sensor (R.H.)* or to passengers airbag module** \
To clock spring NOTE
To bodywiring harness (14-pin) s%
l l Up to 1993 models l 2 From 1994 models
LJ
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal.
Caution
Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even
Is the SDU lock lever securely locked? Yes No
after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Remove the floor console. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.)
rectly and securely to lock the lock lever.
------+ Malfunction of the SDU
Replace the SDU. (Refer to P.528-71.)
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnostic trouble code memory from the scan tool (1992 model) and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to Test 1.) (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit
TSB Revision
1 TEST 10 WHEN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE No. 41 IS DISPLAYED I
TEST 11
WHEN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE No. 42 IS DISPLAYED
:a
I
FUSIBLE LINK@
IGNITION SWIfCH(IG1) I
1 I
lJ/B (MULTI -PURPOSE FUSES)
I
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT
I I
View A
SRS diagnosis unit
I I 1 1
To front impact sensor (L.H.)* or unused terminals2 To front impact sensor (R.H.)* or to passengers airbag module*2 \
To c;ock spring
is =lmal ~~&p~ol~!$J,u#&~s axm-Ax-RlwT-m
NOTE
*l
To body wiring harness (14-pin) o%%%
l 2 From 1994 models
Up to 1993 models
I 1
1 I 1
insulating tape - Battery (-) cable
I I I
Battery
TSB Revision
52B-57
Z19N0289
<Type 2s L o c k
(3) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever (Type 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the lock lever (Type 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. (4) Disconnect the red 14-pin connector from the SDU.
MB991349 (Up to 1993 models) MB991 530 (From 1994 models) SRS Check Harness
(5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (14-pin) to the connector (3) of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart on the next page, using the specified digital multi-meter.
View A
Zl9N0231
SRS Check Harness Connector (5) Fuse No. 1 1
19LO567 00002564
1 TSB Revision
529-58
* Repair or replace harness. (Refer to P.528-18, 20.)
19 or No. 20 terminal of SRS Check Harness connector (5) and ground?
ij
Reconnect negative terminal of battery, and turn the ignition key to the ON position. I TEsT lo JTEST 9
7 N o c
tween the No. 19 or 20 terminal (ground) and the No. 12 terminal of the SRS Check Harness connector
Damagedordisconnectedwiringoffuse No. 18, or damaged or disconnected body wiring harness.
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. repair or replace the body wiring har-
I 1 I I
Replace the SDU. (Refer to P.52B-64.)
I
Damagedordisconnectedwiringoffuse No. 11, or damaged or disconnected (ground) and the No. 11 terminal of (1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK battery cable and tape the terminal. (2)After waiting at least 30 seconds,
I 1 I I ~ d , I I
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnostic trouble code memory from the scan tool (1992 model) and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit
~ 1 I 1 I I \
TSB Revision
1 TEST 12 WHEN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE No. 43 IS DISPLAYED
52B-59
I
FUSIBLE LINK8
IGNITION GyITCIi(IGI)
CON8INAlION c3RswmiIffiLGlm T
1.4w x 2
View A
SRS diagn/osis unit

213R0704
Tofront impactsensor(L.H.)* or unused terminals*2 To front impact sensor (R.H.)* 0: to passengers airbag module*2 \
7 1811 9 ~10~~11~12 /13~14~~15[16~17~18(119)20 4
To /clock spring
To body &ing harness (14-pin) OC%%~
NOTE *l Up to 1993 models 2 From 1994 models
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect
Bakery
ZlQFO107
the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. (2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.)
1 TSB Revision
52B-60
(3) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever (Type 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the lock lever (Type 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. (4) Disconnect the red 14-pin connector from the SDU.
i I I 1 I I I I 1 I
219N0289
<Type 2s
Lock lever
(5) Reconnect negative terminal of battery, and turn the ignition key to the ON position. (6) Check according to the flow chart below.
~ I !Lj I I
No Does the SRS warning light remain illu- - Malfunction minated when the red ICpin connector of the SDU is disconnected? ) IYes warning light and SDU is grounded.
Replace the SDU. (Refer to P52B-71.)
I 1 I ~
* (1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2)After waiting at least 30 seconds, repair or replace the body wiring har11 ness. (Refer to P.52B-18, 20.)
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, erase the diagnostic trouble code memory from the scan tool (1992 model) and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit
I \ d I
TSB Revision
WHEN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE No. 43 IS DISPLAYED
TEST l3 (SRS warning light does not illuminate)
52B-61
I
FUSIELE,L.INKQ
IGNITIW GWITCN(lGl)
la
WNBIN4TION N3ER ms WARNING LIGm 1.41 x 2
View A
SRS diagnoiis unit

Zw70704
~k&bETECTlCar
6 61
CIRCUIT
Tofront impactsensor(L.H.)* or unused terminals*2 To front impact sensor (R.H.) qrto passengers airbag module2 \
To&ock spring
To body &ring harness (1Cpin) OC%:I?
NOTE *l Up to 1993 models *2 From 1994 models
Bakery
219FO107
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. I (2) Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.)
TSB Revision
52B-62
SRS - Troubleshooting (3) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever (Type 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the lock lever (Type 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. (4) Disconnect the red 14-pin connector from the SDU.
driver
_\ LJ
219N0289
I 1 I I I I
(5) Connect the now disconnected red harness-side SDU connector (14-pin) to the connector (3) of the SRS Check Harness. (6) Check according to the flow chart on the next page, using the specified digital multi-meter.
1 I i/J
Zl9N0231
View A
SRS Check Harness connector (5)
I
21amaa
~ I
19LO567 00002578
1 d:
TSB Revision
Is there continuity between the No. 19 or No. 20 terminal of SRS Check HarL/ LiL- Ground circuit Open
52B-63
Reconnect negativi terminal of battery, and turn the ignition key to the ON position. LNo Is there system voltage between the No. 19 or 20 terminal (ground) and the No. 14 terminal and No. 13 terminal of the SRS Check Harness connector (5)? Yes w Bum-out SRS warning light bulbs, or damaged or disconnected body wiring harness.
(1) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. (2)After waiting at least 30 seconds, rsolace the bulbs. reoair or reolace the body wiring hamess.(Refer to R.52B-18, 20.)
L] Malfunction of the SDU
Replace the SDU. (Refer to R52B-71.)
NOTE - IMPORTANT (1) After repairing the SRS, reconnect the battery cable, and check the SRS warning light operation to verify the system functions properly. (Refer to TEST 1.) (2) SDU = SRS Diagnosis Unit
1 TSB Revision
52B-64
SRS - Maintenance / Post-collision Diagnosis
MAINTENANCE
The SRS must be inspected by an authorized dealer 10 years after the car manufacture date. (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.) \ 1 d,
When using the MUT
POST-COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
To inspect and service the SRS after a collision (whether or not the air bags has deployed), perform the following steps. 1. SRS Diagnosis Unit Memory Check (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. When connecting the scan tool to a vehicle up to 1993 model, use the adapter harness supplied together. Caution Make certain that the ignition switch is at OFF when the scan tool is connected or disconnected. (2) Read (and write down) all displayed diagnostic trouble codes. (Refer to P.528-25.) NOTE If the battery power supply has been disconnected or disrupted by the collision, the scan tool cannot communicate with the SRS diagnosis unit. Inspect and, if necessary, repair the body wiring harness before proceeding further. (3) Read the service data (fault duration and how many times memories are erased) using the scan tool. NOTE l Maximum stored period: 9999 minutes (approximately 7 days) l Maximum number of times to be stored: 250 (4) Erase the diagnostic trouble codes and.after waiting 45 seconds or more read (and write down) all displayed diagnostic trouble codes. (Refer to P.52B-25.) 2. Repair Procedure 2-1 .When air bag deploys from collision (1) Replace the following parts with new ones. l Front impact sensors (Refer to P.528-68.) l SRS diagnosis unit (Refer to P.52B-71.) l Air bag module (Refer to P.52B-74.) (2) Check the following parts and replace if there are any malfunctions. l Clock spring (Refer to P.52B-74.) l Steering wheel, steering column and intermediate joint 1) Check wiring harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
When usina the MUT-II
Adapter harness
00002561
Y2OFO164
TSB Revision
SRS - Post-collision Diagnosis
528-65
, b
2) Install air bag module to check fit or alignment with steering wheel. 3) Check steering wheel for noise, binding or difficult operation, or excessive free play. (3) Check harnesses for binding, connectors for damage, poor connections, and terminals for deformities. (Refer to PS2B-18.)
Z19FOO6 7
2-2.When air bag does not deploy in low-speed collision Check the SRS components. If the SRS components are showing any visible damage such as dents, cracks, or deformation, replace them with new ones. Concerning parts removed for inspection, replacement with new parts and cautionary points for working, refer to appropriate COMPONENT SERVICE, P.528-68. Front Impact Sensors (1) Check front upper frame lower for deformities or rust. (2) Check front impact sensor for dents, cracks, deformities or rust. (3) Check sensor harnesses for binds, connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
cl4
SDU
SRS Diagnosis Unit (SDU) (1) Check SDU case and brackets for dents, cracks or deformities.
I
L
(2) Check connectors and lock lever for damage, and terminals for deformities.
TSB Revision
52B-66
SRS - Post-collision Diaanosis

Air Bag Module <Drivers side> (1) Check pad cover for dents, cracks or deformities.
/ ~ L.J I I
219FO119
1
(2) Check for hooks and connectors damage, deformed terminal, and binding harness. (3) Check air bag inflator case for dents, cracks or deformities. (4) Install air bag module to steering wheel to check fit or alignment with the wheel.
<Up to 1993 models>

Hook
I I I
<From 1994 models>
I I \ d, I
00002579
<Passengers side> (1) Check module cover for dents, cracks or deformities. (2) Check connectors for damage, terminals deformities and for binds. (3) Check air bag inflator case for dents, cracks or deformities.
I
ZlBFO240 J
To air bag module
Clock Spring (I) Check clock spring connectors and protective tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.
I I
J
To SRS diagnosis unit
Y19FO118
TSB Revision
SRS - Post-collision Diagnosis
52B-67
(2) Visually check the case and the gears for damage.
Gear
L Yl9FOO8
Steering Wheel, Steering Column and Intermediate Joint (1) Check wiring harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. (2) Install air bag module to check fit or alignment with steering wheel. (3) Check steering wheel for noise, binding or difficult operation, or excessive free play. Harness Connector (Body and Front wiring harness) Check for binding harnesses, connectors for damage, poor connections, and deformed terminals. (Refer to P.52B-18.)
, L
.I TSB Revision
52B-68
SRS - Component Service / Front Impact Sensors
COMPONENT SERVICE
If the SRS components are to be removed or replaced as a result of maintenance, troubleshooting, etc., follow each procedure (P.528-68-P.52B-81). Caution 1. SRS components should not be subjected to heat over 93C (2OOF), so remove the front impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, air bag modules and clock spring before drying or baking the vehicle after painting. Recheck SRS system operability after re-installing them. 2. If the SRS components are removed for the purpose of inspection, sheet metal repair, painting, etc., they should be stored in a clean, dry place until they are reinstalled. L
FRONT IMPACT SENSORS

Caution 1. Never repair or disassemble a front impact sensor. If faulty, replace it. 2. Handle the front impact sensors very carefully, taking care not to drop them or otherwise subject them to impact. If a sensor is seen to be dented, cracked, deformed or rusted, replace it with a new one. 3. Replace sensors with new ones after the air bag has deployed.

l
Pre-removal Operation Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position
Removal steps
,Cq 0 Post-installation inspection 1. Negative (-) battery cable connection +A, 2. Front splash shield extension .B+ 3. Front impact sensor ,A+ l Pre-installation inspection
TSB Revision
SRS - Front Impact Sensors

Insulating Battery
52B-69

+A, NEGATIVE (-) BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected.
Battery
219FO107

.A+ PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION (1) Before any front impact sensor is installed in the vehicle, it must be visually inspected. If a dent, crack or other deformation, or rust, is detected, discard the sensor and replace it with a new one that passes the visual inspection. (2) Before any front impact sensor is installed in the vehicle, the resistance between its terminals must be confirmed to be within the standard value. Standard value: 2,000 f 40 Sz Use the digital multi meter. If the resistance is not within that standard value range, discard it and replace it with a new one that has the standard value.
FORWARD
Wiring harness Connector

Y19FOO6'
.B+ FRONT IMPACT SENSOR INSTALLATION (1) Bend the wiring harness slightly (to the extent that there is no slack), and clip securely by using the clip of the front impact sensor. (2) Install the front impact sensor so that there is close adherence of the upper surface of the front impact sensor and the installation surface of the upper frame (lower). Caution The SRS may not activate properly if a front impact sensor is not installed properly, which could result in the SRS system not operating properly during a collision. I
TSB Revision
52B-70
SRS warning light
SRS - Front Impact Sensors
~~~
.Cd POST-INSTALLATION INSPECTION Reconnect the negative battery terminal. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Does the SRS warning light illuminate for about 7 seconds, turn OFF and then remain OFF for at least 45 seconds? If yes, SRS system is functioning properly. If no, consult page 528-23.
~ L) I
INSPECTION
Digital multi-meter
219FO102
(1) Check upper frame and sensor brackets for deformities or rust. (2) Check sensor harness for binds, connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. (3) Check for dents, cracks or deformation of the front impact sensor. Caution If a dent, crack, deformation or rust is detected, replace with a new sensor. (4) Remove the front impact sensor. (5) Measure the resistance between terminals and check whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: 2,000 + 40 Q Caution Always replace the sensor with a new one if the resistance is not within the standard value.
( L.J
./mti0b-0-itI :,I Tq*.-;\=7<!:-3I.-f.[ !l-L

Digital multi-meter
(6) Check the continuity between the terminal and the bracket. If there is continuity, the insulation of the sensor is faulty. Replace the sensor with a new one.
--E-i
\ - - -_
A19FO282
1 TSB Revision
SRS - SRS Diagnosis Unit (SDU)
52B-71
SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT (SDU) L

Caution 1. Never attempt to disassemble or repair the SRS diagnosis unit. If faulty, replace it. 2. Do not drop or subject the SRS diagnosis unit to impact or vibration. If dents, cracking, deformation, or rust are discovered on the SRS diagnosis unit, replace it with a new SRS diagnosis unit. Discard the old one. 3. After deployment of the air bags, replace the SRS diagnosis unit with a new one. 4. Never use an ohmmeter on or near the SRS diagnosis unit, and use only the special test equipment described on P.528-23.

l
Pre-removal Operation Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position
2-pin yellow connector to left front impact sensor* or unused terminal*2 Y19FO130
Xl 9FO104 2-pin blue connector to right 00002551 front impact sensorl or \ 2-pin green connector to passengers air bag module*2. NOTE \ *l Up to 1993 models 14-pin red connector to body wiring harness *2 From 1994 models I
.D+
+A, / i
Removal steps Post-installation inspection 1. Negative (-) battery cable connection 2. Cup holder 3. Console plug 4. Rear console assembly
4BF .C+ 5. SRS diagnosis unit and harness

connector connection FBI 6. SRS diagnosis unit (SDU) ,A+ l Pre-installation inspection
TSB Revision
52B-72
SRS - SRS Diagnosis Unit (SDU) REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

+A, NEGATIVE (-) BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. AB,SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT AND HARNESS CONNECTOR DISCONNECTION Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever (Type 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the lock lever (Type 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. !ij ,
I
d,
I I I I I I I I I I
Battery
219FO107
driver
219N0289
<Type 2>
L o c k lever
Z19N0312

.A( PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION Before SRS diagnosis unit is installed in the vehicle, it must be visually inspected. If a dent, crack or other deformation is detected, discard the SRS diagnosis unit and replace it with a new one that passes the visual inspection.
I I I
.B( SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT (SDU) INSTALLATION With the projection part of the SRS diagnosis unit placed against the bracket as shown in the figure, securely install the SRS diagnosis unit. Caution The SRS may not activate properly if SRS diagnosis unit is not installed properly, which could result in serious injury or death to the vehicles driver.
J
-----i. 219F0105
I 1
1 TSB Revision
SRS - SRS Diagnosis Unit (SDU)
52B-73
.C(SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT AND HARNESS CONNECTOR CONNECTION After connecting each harness connector securely and correctly to the SRS diagnosis unit, be sure to press down the lock lever of the, SRS diagnosis unit.
UNLOCKED n&e,
LOCKED ,,$$~~
SRS warning liqht
.D( POST-INSTALLATION INSPECTION Reconnect the negative battery terminal. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Does the SRS warning light illuminate for about 7 seconds, turn OFF and then remain OFF for at least 45 seconds? If yes, SRS system is functioning properly. If no, consult page 528-23.
INSPECTION
l l
/ i
View A
SRS diagnosis unit

13R0704
To front impact sensor (L.H.)* or unusedterminals*2 To front impact sensor (R.H.)* or to passengers airbag module*2 \
Check the SRS diagnosis unit case and brackets for dents, cracks or deformities. Check connectors and lock lever for damage, and terminals for deformities. Caution If a dent, cracks, deformation or rust is discovered, replace the SRS diagnosis unit with a new one. NOTE For checking of the SRS diagnosis unit other than described above, refer to the section concerning troubleshooting. (Refer to PS2B-23.)
To clock spring To body wiring harness (1 a-pin) NOTE 1 Up to 1993 models 2 From 1994 models
o%%%
1 TSB Revision
528-74
SRS - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring
AIR BAG MODULE AND CLOCK SPRING

Caution 1. Never attempt to disassemble or repair the air bag module or clock spring. If faulty, replace it. 2. Do not drop the air bag module or clock spring or allow contact with water, grease or oil. Replace it if a dent, crack, deformation or rust are detected. 3. The air bag modules should be stored on a flat surface and placed so that the pad surface is facing upward. Do not place anything on top of the air bag modules. Do not expose the air bag module to temperature over 93C (200F). After an air bag has deployed, replace the clock spring with a new one. Wear gloves and safety glasses when handling an air bag that has deployed. An undeployed air bag module should only be disposed of in accordance with the procedures on P.52B-82-P.52B-87.
4. 5. 6. 7.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION <Air bag module (drivers side), clock spring>
l
After setting the steering wheel and the front wheels to the straightahead position, remove the ignition key.
(Up to 1993 models)
,6
models]
4 ft.lbs.
2k--ld-2
2.5 Nm 1.8 ft.lbs. q 5Nm 4 ft.lbs.
Air bag module removal steps Post-installation inspection 1. Negative (-) battery cable connection 1% .E+ 2. Air bag module (Drivers side) 3. Radio remote control assembly 4. Horn contact plate 5. Horn contact plate and wire 6. Horn button 7. Spring .A+ l Pre-installation inspection ,F+
l
Clock spring removal steps

4Ab .F( o Post-installation inspection 1. Negative (-) battery cable connection
+B, ,El 2. Air bag module (Drivers side) +C, .Dd 8. Steering wheel l Knee protector (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) l Column cover (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) l Floor console (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) dD, .Cd 9. Clock spring and SRS diagnosis unit connection 10. Clock spring and body wiring harness connection .Bd 11. Clock spring .A+ l Pre-installation inspection
\ d
TSB Revision
SRS - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring <Air bag module (passengers side)>
52B-75
i Air bag module removal steps (Passengers side) ,F+ l Post-installation inspection 1. Negative (-) battery cable connection 4Ab 12. Glove box assembly 13. Cross pipe cover 14. Air bag module (passengers side) ,A+ l Pre-installation inspection
00002584
219FO250
cdTSB Revision
.~..
52B-76
SRS - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS
+A, NEGATIVE (-) BATTERY CABLE DISCONNECTION Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected. +B, AIR BAG MODULE (DRIVERS SIDE) REMOVAL (1) Remove the air bag module mounting nut using a socket wrench from the back side. (2) When disconnecting the connector of the clock spring from the air bag module, press the air bags lock toward the outer side to spread it open. Use a screwdriver, as shown in the figure at the left, to pry so as to remove the connector gently. Caution 1. When disconnecting the air bag module-clock spring connector, take care not to apply excessive force to it. 2. The removed air bag module should be stored in a clean, dry place with the pad cover face up.
L) ~
Battery
219FO107
I I I I I I LJ I I I
Pad cover
+C, STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL Remove the steering wheel by using the special tool. Caution Do not hammer on the steering wheel. Doing so may damage the collapsible column mechanism.
I I I I I
driver
219N0289
+D,SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT AND CLOCK SPRING DISCONNECTION (1) Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever Crwe 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit.
I 1 I
L&l
TSB Revision
SRS - Air Bag Module and Clock Spring <Type 2>

L o c k lever
52B-77
Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap between the lock lever and the lock spring. In case that there is a notch on the lock lever (Type 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. (2) Remove the 2-pin red connector of the clock spring from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of the clock springs connector. (Refer to P.52B-11.)
When using the MUT

.A+ PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION (1) When installing the new air bag module and clock spring, refer to INSPECTION. Caution Dispose of an air bag module only according to the specified procedure. (Refer to P.528-82 to P.528-87.) (2) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector. When connecting the scan tool (MUT-II) to a vehicle up to 1993 model, use the adapter harness supplied together. Caution Make certain that the ignition switch is at OFF when the scan tool is connected or disconnected. (3) Reconnect negative terminal of battery, and turn the ignition key to the ON position. (4) Conduct on-board diagnostic using scan tool to ensure entire SRS operates properly, except open circuit of air bag module (Diagnostic trouble code No. 22). (Refer to P.52B-25.) (5) Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, disconnect the negative battery cable and tape the terminal. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cable before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cable is disconnected.
\ To data link / connector FBY 12;;1057
Adapter harness
22OFO159
< F r o m 1 9 9 4 models> \ j I
Y2OFO164 00002561
TSB Revision
52B-78

.B+ CLOCK SPRING INSTALLATION Align the mating mark and NEUTRAL position indicator of the clock spring, and, after turning the front wheels to the straight-ahead position, install the clock spring to the column switch. Caution If the clock springs mating mark is not properly aligned, the steering wheel may not be completely rotational during a turn, or the flat cable within the clock spring may be severed, obstructing normal operation of the SRS and possibly leading to serious injury to the vehicles driver. ,C+CLOCK SPRING AND SRS DIAGNOSIS UNIT CONNECTION After securely and correctly installing the clock springs connector to the SRS diagnosis unit, be absolutely sure to press down the lock lever of the SRS diagnosis unit.
d; I
1 I
I I I
UNLOCKED Z&0121
LOCKED ,,$$?j$
I
,D+ STEERING WHEEL INSTALLATION (1) Before installing the steering wheel, be sure to first turn the vehicles front wheels to the straight-ahead position and align the mating mark and NEUTRAL position indicator of the clock spring. Caution Be sure when installing the steering wheel, that the harness of the clock spring does not become caught or tangled. (2) After clamping, turn the steering wheel all the way in both directions to confirm that steering is normal. bElAIR BAG MODULE (DRIVERS SIDE) INSTALLATION <Up to 1993 models> (1) Arrange the wiring of the horn switch as shown in the figure at the left, and hook up in place. (2) Install the air bag module, being careful not to pinch the wiring.
I I \ L/ ; I 1 1 I I I I I
.Fd POST-INSTALLATION INSPECTION (1) After installing the clock spring, the steering wheel, the column covers and the air bag module, check steering wheel for noise, binds or difficult operation.
I 1 I
\ LA
TSB Revision

SRS warning light
52B-79
(2) Reconnect the negative battery terminal. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Does the SRS warning light illuminate for about 7 seconds, turn OFF and then remain OFF for at least 45 seconds? If yes, SRS system is functioning properly. If no, consult page 528-23.
Drivers side <Up to 1993 models>
INSPECTION
AIR BAG MODULE CHECK If any improper part is found during the following inspection, replace the air bag module with a new one. Dispose of the old one according to the specified procedure. (Refer to P.52B-82-P.52B-87.) Caution Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the air bag module (squib) even if you are using the specified tester. If the circuit resistance is measured with a tester, accidental air bag deployment will result in serious personal injury. (1) Check pad cover for dents, cracks or deformities. (2) Check the air bag module for dents, cracking or deformation. (3) Check hooks and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binds. (4) Check air bag inflator case for dents, cracks or deformities.
or case I i 5
<From 1994 models>

Con
Inflator se
Passengers side
Connector
00002585
(5) Install the air bag module on the steering wheel to check alignment with the wheel. Caution If a dent, crack or other deformation is discovered, replace the air bag module with a new one. Dispose of the old one according to the specified procedure. (Refer to PS2B-82 to P.!52B-87.)
1 TSB Revision
52B-80

To air bag module
CLOCK SPRING CHECK If, as result of the following checks, even one abnormal point is discovered, replace the clock spring with a new one. (1) Check connectors and protective tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.
1 d
e SRS diagnosis unit

Z19FO109
(2) Visually check the case and the gears for damage.
(3) Make following checks for continuity of the clock spring. l (Up to 1993 and 1996 models) Check for continuity between the No. 1 connector of the clock spring and connectors No. 3, 4, 5 and 6.
MLI
Y19FO109
View B
IIesigna- T o To To To To tion horn radio horn cruise ACC control power relay switch unit i l
ITo steering To cruise remote control control switch switch
(1994 and 1995 models) Check for continuity between the No. 1 connector of the clock spring and connectors No. 3, 4 and 5.
Connector No. Terminal No. ContinuW / 1 I2 1 3 13 I4 4 141611 5 121 I I
I
0
0 0 0 0
To steering To cruise control remote switch control switch
Designa- T o To To To To tion cruise horn radio horn ACC control power relay switch unit
TSB Revision
SRS - Air Baa Module and Clock Spring

52B-81
(4) Check for the resistance between the terminals. a. Join the No. 2 connector (air bag module side) and No. 7 connector of clock spring to connector (4) and connector (3), respectively, of the SRS Check Harness. NOTE When joining SRS Check Harness connector (4), align its white paint with the hollow portion of the No. 2 connector of the clock spring. b. Check for continuity between terminal 1 and terminal 21, and terminal 2 and terminal 22, of SRS Check Harness connector (5) using a digital multi-meter. Standard value: less than 0.4 Q
View A
zmm203
SRS Check Harness connector
(5)
/ L
To No.7 connector of clock
White paint
I To No.; connector of clock spring

19LO567 216R2190 woo2586
(3)
(4)
TSB Revision
52B-82
SRS - Air Bag Module Disposal Procedures
AIR BAG MODULE DISPOSAL PROCEDURES

Before either disposing of a vehicle equipped with an air bag, or prior to disposing of the air bag module, be sure to first follow the procedures described below to and deploy the air bag.
~ d , 1
UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG MODULE DISPOSAL

Caution 1. If the vehicle is to be scrapped, junked, or otherwise disposed of, deploy the air bag inside the vehicle. If the vehicle will continue to be operated and only the air bag module is to be disposed of, deploy the air bag outside the vehicle. 2. Since a large amount of smoke is produced when the air bag is deployed, select a well-ventilated site. Moreover, never attempt the test near a smoke sensor. 3. Since there is a loud noise when the air bag is deployed, avoid residental areas whenever possible. If anyone is nearby, give warning of the impending noise. 4. Suitable ear protection should be worn by personnel performing these procedures or by people in the immediate area. DEPLOYMENT INSIDE THE VEHICLE (when disposing a vehicle) (1) Open all windows and doors of the vehicle. Move the vehicle to an isolated spot. (2) Disconnect the negative (-) and positive (+) battery cables from the battery terminals, and then remove the battery from the vehicle. Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cables before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cables are disconnected. <Drivers side> 1. Remove the rear console assembly. (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) 2. Release the lock of SDU connector in accordance with the following procedure: In case that there is no notch on the lock lever (Type 1) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) of the connector lock lever as shown in the illustration, and push the spring horizontally toward the inside of the unit. Caution 1. Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever. 2. Do not insert the screwdriver into the gap be-
I I
I I
d I I I
I I 1 ~ I 1
tween the lock lever and the lock spring.

TSB Revision
L)
SRS - Air Bag Module Disposal Procedures CTYPe 2>

Lock lever
528-83
In case that there is a notch on the lock lever CrYpe 2) Place a flat tip screwdriver against the lock spring (metal section) at the lock lever notch as shown in the illustration, and push the spring toward the unit. Caution Do not use excessive force to raise the lock lever.
3.
Disconnect the clock spring connector from the SRS diagnosis unit while pressing down the lock of the connector. (Refer to P.52B-11.)
Insulation
4. Connect two wires each six meters (20 feet) long or more, to the two leads of SRS AIR BAG ADAPTER HARNESS A and cover the connections with insulation tape. The other ends of the two wires should be connected to each other (short-circuited), to prevent sudden unexpected deployment of the air bag.
5. Connect the SRS AIR BAG ADAPTER HARNESS A to the clock spring connector (which has been disconnected from the SRS diagnosis unit), and then lead the two connected wires outside the vehicle.
Air bag module connector 2-pin (red)
<Deployment of passengers side> 1. Remove the glove box and glove box outer case. 2. Disconnect the passengers air bag module 2 pin connector (red) from the body wiring harness connector. NOTE If the passengers air bag module connector is disconnected from the body wiring harness, both electrodes of the passengers air bag module connector will be automatically shorted to prevent unintended deployment of the air bag due to static electricity, etc. TSB Revision
52B-84
Insulation

3. Connect two wires each six meters (20 feet) long or more, to the two leads of SRS AIR BAG ADAPTER HARNESS A and cover the connections with insulation tape. The other ends of the two wires should be connected to each other (short-circuited), to prevent sudden unexpected deployment of the air,bag.
\d
1 I
4. Connect the passengers air bag module 2-pin connector (red) to the SRS air bag adapter harness A and take the deployment harness out of the vehicle.
Air bag module connector
I I I
(3) At a location as far away from the vehicle as possible, disconnect the two connected wires from each other, and connect them to the two terminals of the battery (removed from the vehicle) to deploy the air bag. Caution 1. Before deploying the air bag in this manner, first check to be sure that there is no one in or near the vehicle. Wear safety glasses, suitable ear protection. 2. The inflator will be quite hot immediately following the deployment, so wait at least 30 minutes to allow it to cool before attempting to handle it. Although not poisonous, do not inhale gas from air bag deployment. See Deployed Air Bag Module Disposal Procedures (PS2B-87) for post-deployment handling instructions. 3. If the air bag module fails to deploy when the procedures above are followed, do not go near the module. Contact your local distributor. DEPLOYMENT OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE Caution 1. This operation should be done at a spacious and flat place where there is no people and obstacle around within a radius of more than 8 m (20 feet). 2. Do not perform deployment outside, if a strong wind is blowing, and if there is even a slight breeze, the air bag module should be placed and deployed downwind from the battery. (1) Disconnect the negative (-) and positive (+) battery cables from the battery terminals, and then remove the battery from the vehicle.
I I \ d 1 I I I
I I I I
iji
1 TSB Revision
52B-85
Caution Wait at least 60 seconds after disconnecting the battery cables before doing any further work. The SRS system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air bag even after the battery has been disconnected. Serious injury may result from unintended air bag deployment if work is done on the SRS system immediately after the battery cables are disconnected.
<Drivers side> 1. Remove the air bag module from the vehicle. (Refer to P.52B-74.) Caution The air bag module should be stored on a flat surface and placed so that the pad cover face up. Do not place anything on top of it.
ZlQFO119
Two wires
Connection
MR203491 or
2. Connect two wires each six meters (20 feet) long or more, to the two leads of SRS AIR BAG ADAPTER HARNESS B, and cover the connections with insulation tape. The other ends of the two wires should be connected to each other (short-circuited), to prevent sudden unexpected deployment of the air bag.
1 r
Insulation tape
213R075 2
Nuts
Install a disused nut to each of the four bolts at the back of air bag module and connect thick wires to these bolts to secure the module to the wheel. 4. Pass SRS air bag adapter harness B, connected with wires, under the used tire wheel assembly and connect the harness to the air bag module. 3.
5. Put the air bag module in the used wheel. Using the wires or the like connected to the modules bolts, secure the air bag module to the wheel. Then place the wheel with the module facing upward. Caution Slacken the adapter harness under the wheel to allow for the reaction produced in deployment of the module. If not, the adapter harness may be damaged by the reaction created in deployment. TSB Revision J
528-86

6. Stuck three used tires without wheel, on the tire to which the air bag module has been secured.
Lj
I I
Wires
A19LO519
I
<Passengers side> 1. Remove the passengers air bag module. (Refer to P.52B-75.) Caution The air bag module should be stored on a flat surface and placed so that the pad cover face up. Do not place anything on top of it.
I 1 I I
Insulation tape SRS AIR BAG ADAPTER HARNES? n
Connection 3 a
2. Connect two wires each six meters (20 feet) long or more, to the two leads of SRS AIR BAG ADAPTER HARNESS A and cover the connections with insulation tape. The other ends of the two wires should be connected to each other (short-circuited), to prevent sudden unexpected deployment of the air bag.
:j;
Two wires
1 1 I I
Air bag module
L19L0514
Used tires without wheel
3. Connect, the deployment wires to the SRS air bag adaptor harness A, pass it beneath the tire and wheel assembly, and connect it to the air bag module. 4. Pass the thick wires into the hole of the air bag module bracket, and secure it to the wheel of the old tire with wheel (4 locations), with the air bag facing upwards. Caution 1. Leave some space below the wheel for the deployment wires. If there is no space, the reaction of the air bag deployment could result in damage of the adaptor harness. 2. While deployment takes place, do not have the connector of the SRS air bag adaptor harness A inserted between the tires. 5. Place three old tires without wheels on top of the tire secured to the air bag module, and secure all tires with ropes (4 locations).
I I 1
\ ii1
Wires
219L0518
1 TSB Revision
SRS - Air Baa Module Disposal Procedures
52B-87
6,
(2) At a location as far away from the air bag module as possible, and from a shielded position, if possible, disconnect the two connected wires from each other and connect them to the two terminals of the battery (removed from the vehicle) to deploy the air bag. Caution 1. Before deployment, check carefully .to be sure that no one is nearby, because deployment will cause the air bag module to jump upward about 1.5 to 3 meters (about 5 to 10 feet) into the air. 2. The inflator will be quite hot immediately following deployment, so wait at least 30 minutes to allow it to cool before attempting to handle it. Although not poisonous, do not inhale gas from air bag deployment. See Deployed Air Bag Module Disposal Procedures (as shown below) for postdeployment handling instructions. 3. If the air bag module fails to deploy when the procedures above are followed, do not near the module. Contact your local distributor.
DEPLOYED AIR BAG MODULE DISPOSAL

After deployment, the air bag module should be disposed of in the same manner as any other scrap parts, except that the following points should be carefully noted during disposal. (1) The inflator will be quite hot immediately following deployment, so wait at least 30 minutes to allow it to cool before attempting to handle it. (2) Do not put water or oil on the air bag after deployment. (3) There may be, adhered to the deployed air bag module, material that could irritate the eyes and/or skin, so wear gloves and safety glasses when handling a deployed air bag module. IF DESPITE THESE PRECAUTIONS, THE MATERIAL DOES, GET INTO THE EYES OR ON THE SKIN, IMMEDIATELY RINSE THE AFFECTED AREA WITH A LARGE AMOUNT OF CLEAN WATER. IF ANY IRRITATION DEVELOPS, SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Strong vinyl b
(4) Tightly seal the air bag module in a strong vinyl bag for disposal. (5) After deployment, be sure to wash hands in water.
ZlQN0197
TSB Revision
NOTES dl
55-1
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION

CONTENTS
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . 54
AIR-CONDITIONING CONTROL PANEL*, AIR-CONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 79
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

. . . SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . .. . . . .. . . ....... . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . Lubricants . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . ........ . . . . . . . . Sealant . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . ........ . . . . . . Service Specifications . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . *.. SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . .. . ....... . . . . . 3 3 4 4 4 5
CONDENSER AND CONDENSER FAN MOTOR . . . . . . 79 DAMPER CONTROL MOTOR ASSEMBLY* . . . . . . . . . . . 75 OTHER PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 POWER TRANSISTOR, AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR LOCK CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 REFRIGERANT LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 77 73 54
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR LOCK CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLOWER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 33 . . . 53 . . . 32
. . . 35 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 CONDENSER AND CONDENSER FAN MOTOR . . . . . . 46 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE
WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES WARNING! (1) Improper service or maintenance of any component of the SRS, or any SRS-related component, can lead to personal injuryordeathtoservicepersonnel(frominadvertentfiringoftheairbag)ortothedriverandpassenger(fromrendering the SRS inoperative). (2) Service or maintenance of any SRS component or SRS-related component must be performed only at an authorized MITSUBISHI dealer. (3) MITSUBISHI dealer personnel must thoroughly review this manual, and especially its GROUP 52B - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and GROUP 00 -Maintenance Service, before beginning any service or maintenance of any component of the SRS or any SRS-related component. NOTE The SRS includes the following components: impact sensors, SRS diagnosis unit, SRS warning light, air bag module, clock spring and interconnecting wiring. Other SRS-related components (that may have to be removed/installed in connection with SRS service or maintenance) are indicated in the table of contents by an asterisk (*).
55-2
EVAPORATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 HEATER CONTROL ASSEMBLY* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 HEATER UNIT* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON-VEHICLE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charging.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charging Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charging the Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Drive Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Tubing and Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Idle-up Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 16 22 18 19 18 28 28 29
Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Power Relay Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Refrigerant Leak Repair Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 REFRIGERANT LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 RESISTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 VENTILATORS (AIR INLET AND AIR OUTLET) . . . . . . 52 VENTILATORS (INSTRUMENT PANEL)*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
dl 1
I I I I 1 I I I I 1 \\ d I I ~ 1 I ~ I I
I I LJ
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION - Specifications
55-3
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION

(/ SPECIFICATIONS
items Heater unit Heater control assembly Compressor Model Refrigerant unit lubricant cc (cu.in.) Drive belt size mm (in.) Dual pressure switch High pressure switch kPa (psi) Low pressure switch kPa (psi) Freezer prevention C (F) Vehicles using R-12 refrigerant Three-way-flow full-air-mix system Dial type FX-105 VS Vehicles using R-l 34a refrigerant Three-way-flow full-air-mix system Dial type MSC 105
FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS SUN PAG 56 160+20 (9.8f1.2) 160+20 (9.851.2) 1,150 (45.3) OFF: 2,700 (384) ON: 2,100 (299) OFF: 210 (30) ON: 235 (33) Air temperature thermostat OFF: -2 (28.4) ON: 2 (35.6) R-12 Approx. 960 (34)* or Approx. 800 (29)*2 1 ,150 (45.3) OFF: 3,200 (455) ON: 2,600 (370) OFF: 200 (28) ON: 225 (32) Air temperature thermostat OFF: -2 (28.4) ON: 2 (35.6) R-l 34a (HFC-134a) 740-790 (26-28)
Refrigerant and quantity g (oz.)
NOTE *l: Up to Sept. 1992 models *2: From Oct. 1992 models
TSB Revision
I 55-d HEATER, AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION - Specifications
Items Idle speed when air conditioning on rpm Resister resistance value Sz Standard value 900 + 100 <A/T at P range> 1.76-2.06 (Across terminals No. 2 and No. 1) 1.1 O-l .26 (Across terminals No. 2 and No. 3) 0.38-0.44 (Across terminals No. 2 and No. 4) Thermostat ON temperature C (F) OFF temperature C (OF) Revolution pick up sensor standard resistance Sz Approx. 110 (230) or less Approx. 155 (311) or more when ambient temperature is 20C
\ ,d
i (
1 I I I I I
ter motor assembly resistance*
I
tiometer assembly r
~
Engine coolant temperature Sensor-ON temperature sensor* C (F) NOTE . <Fully automatic air conditioning> 26.5 f 4 (79.7 f 7)
L)
l .
LUBRICANTS
Item Each connection of refrigerant line Specified lubricants FREOL S-830r SUNISO 5GS <Vehicles using R-12 refrigerant> SUN PAG 56 <Vehicles using R-l 34a refrigerant> Quantity As required
SEALANT
Item AK engine coolant temperature switch threaded part <Up to 1993 models> Specified sealant 3M Nut Locking Part No. 4171 or equivalent
TSB Revision
HEATER. AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION - Seecial Tools
55-5
SPECIAL TOOLS
1-001
Tool number and Supersession name MB991 367 MB991 367-01
Application Removal and installation of armature mounting nut of compressor
S p e c i a l
s p a n n e r
MB991 386 Pin
MIT217213
MB991 341 Scan tool (Multi-use tester <MUT>) ROM pack [For the number, refer to GROUP 00 Precautions Before Service.]
MB991 341 C
<Up to 1993 models> Inspection of full auto air conditioning
MB991 502 Scan tool (MUT-II)
MB991 502
<All models> Inspection of full auto air conditioning
ROM pack
MB991 529 Diagnostic trouble code check harness
MB991 529
<From 1994 models> Inspection of full auto air conditioning using a voltmeter
1 TSB Revision
55-6
HEATERS AND MANUAL - Troubleshooting AIR CONDITIONING
HEATERS AND--MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING

TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Heater insufficient heat Probable cause Obstructed heater outlets Blend air dampers improperly adjusted or binding Thermostat malfunction Obstructed heater hoses Improperly adjusted control cables Plugged or partially plugged heater core Incorrect adjustment of mode selection dampers No ventilation even when mode selection knob is operated Incorrect installation of mode selection control wire Ducts are incorrectly/incompletely connected, crushed, bent or clogged Blower motor inoperative Burn-out fuse Poor grounding Malfunction blower switch Malfunction resistor Malfunction blower motor Malfunction heater relay Malfunction blower motor relay Air conditioning does not operate when the ignition switch in the ON position Open-circuited power circuit harness Defective magnet clutch Defective thermostat Defective A/C engine coolant temperature switch for air conditioning cut off <Up to 1993 models> Defective dual pressure switch Refrigerant leak I Excessive refrigerant Defective air conditioning switch Defective A/C compressor lock controller <DOHC> I Remedy Correct Correct Replace Replace Adjust Clean or replace Adjust Adjust Repair or replace Correct Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Correct harness Replace Replace Replace 55-41,42 55-41,42 55-53
I I ~
L~ I
Ref. page
I ~
GROUP 14
I I 1 1 I 1 I I d ~ 1 ~ I
I
55-30 55-32 55-35 55-29 55-29
Replace Charge refrigerant, correct leak Discharge refrigerant Replace air conditioning switch Replace A/C compressor lock controller I I
55-45 55-18,22 I 55-21,25 55-33 55-32

LL
I
~
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - Troubleshooting
55-7
Condenser fan does not operate when the air conditioning is activated
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR LOCK CONTROLLER

Operation
(1) The A/C compressor lock controller compares compressor rpm with engine rpm to determine if the drive belt is slipping or the compressor has seized. If the rpm difference between the engine and compressor exceed 92 % for more than three seconds, the A/C compressor lock controller turns off the magnetic clutch relay which opens the magnetic clutch circuit. (2) when a signal is received from the ECU requesting compressor operation, the A/C compressor lock controller will energize the magnetic clutch relay to determine if the compressor drive belt is slipping. If the speed difference between the engine and compressor indicates the belt is slipping, the A/C compressor lock controller will de-energize the magnetic clutch relay.
TSB Revision
55-8
(3) If the A/C compressor lock controller senses the compressor drive belt is slipping, it will de-activate the magnetic clutch relay. Also, it will send a signal to the A/C ECU to activate the compressor warning indicator. The indicator will blink.
(4) The NC compressor lock controller does not contain a memory circuit. It will operate the compressor and check for belt slippage each time the ignition is turned on and a signal is sent from the ECU indicating the need for compressor operation.
compressor lock
(5) The controller is mounted top of the passenger side under cover.
TSB Revision
5 5 - 9
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
b AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT
cup to 1995 models>
cl
Fuse ( Generator t Fuse Fuse
Resistor
Heatercontrol panel
g switch
1
Ignition coil
I
Air inlet sensor
1 I
n I
A
Fin therm0 sensor
/ 1
Engine tprn calculation , calculation Circuit I
L-
NC compressor lock controller
Y Revolution pick up sensor
1993 models>
Compressor c
/ @ 1J u * n
j i
Ettrol t
22oFOO43
TSB Revision
55-10
<From 1996 models>
Fuse Fuse
G2 Fuse
f ---HI I ---MH
r- : : :J
A. 4.4 *
*
b Resistor
Heatercontrol panel
J
I :::Pk
,OFF
@ I II
Air conditioning switch

1
WI conditioning control unit 1. T
--pi--]
1 1 Fin therm0 sensor I A-
Air inlet C-n*-*
Compressor rpm calculation circuit
NC compressor lock controller
Dual pressure switch
Revolution pick up sensor
Compressor c3~ocl r
IF
7
MFI control unit
20F0179
dl
TSB Revision
55-11
<Up to 1995 models>
Air Conditioning Control Unit Inspection Disconnect the amplifier and inspect the connector on the wire harness side as shown in the chart below. Test Conditions: (1) Ignition switch: ON (2) Air conditioning switch: ON (3) Temperature control lever: MAX. COOL (4) Blower switch: HI
1 <From 1996 models>
2OFO180
<Up to 1995 models>

Terminal No. 8, 9 1 6 7 2 21 22 23 Signal Auto compressor control unit ground At all times When ignition switch is ON When all conditions for switch-ON of the compressor are satisfied When air conditioning switch pressed in to second step When air conditioning switch pressed in to first step Conditions Terminal voltage ov Battery positive voltage Battery positive voltage Battery positive voltage Battery positive voltage
Auto compressor control unit power supPlY Air conditioning compressor relay Air conditioning switch: A/C Air conditioning switch: ECONO Fin-therm0 sensor (+) Air-inlet sensor (+) Fin-therm0 sensor (-)
Ignition switch, blower switch and air Approx. 2.5 V conditioning switch: ON Ignition switch, blower switch and air Approx. 1 V conditioning switch: ON Ignition switch, blower switch and air 0 V conditioning switch: ON Ambient temperature: 4C (39F) Ignition switch, blower switch and air 0 V conditioning switch: ON Ambient temperature: 4C (39F)
26
Air-inlet sensor (-)
TSB Revision
55-12
<From 1996 models>
HEATERS AND MANUAL - Troubleshooting AIR CONDITIONING
L/l
Air Conditioning Compressor Lock Controller Inspection Disconnect the amplifier and inspect the connector on the wire harness side as shown in the chart below.
I I
I I I
Terminal No. Signal Revolution pick-up sensor Conditions I Compressor: ON 0.2 VAC or more ov System voltage 0.7 VDC-0.9 VDC 5 VDC 1 VDC or more 0.2 VAC ov System voltage 6 V or more 0.5 V or less 9Vor more , Terminal voltage
2OFO176
A/C compressor lock controller Normal ground A/C compressor lock controller power source A/C switch indicator Ignition switch: ON Compressor: ON (Normally) Compressor drive belt: Slipping (slip ratio 92 % or more) Engine revolution (input) Revolution pick-up sensor When engine is running Compressor: ON
iJ , I
A/C compressor lock controller Normal ground A/C compressor lock controller power source Compressor Ignition switch: ON Compressor: ON Compressor: OFF A/C control unit output Compressor: ON Compressor: OFF Compressor relay output Compressor: ON Compressor: OFF NOTE: *: The voltage shown is the pulse signal voltage.
9.5 V or more ov
TSB Revision
5543
TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK-REFERENCE TABLE

Compressor LI
lterr no.
doesnt operate.
Inspection point Magnetic clutch
Method Apply battery voltage to magnetic clutch terminal (1) to check if sound is developed during operation. Check for continuity between switch terminals. (Refer to P 55-29.) Check for continuity between switch terminals. (Refer to P 55-31.) Check for continuity between terminals (2) and (4) With battery voltage applied between terminals (2) and (4) check for continuity between terminals (1) and (3)
Normal condition Sound is noted
Probable cause Faulty magnetic clutch
Remedy Replace magnetic clutch.
Blower switch
Continuity
Faulty blower switch
3 Q
Air conditioning switch Magnetic clutch relay
Continuity
Faulty air conditioning switch Faulty air magnetic clutch relay
Replace air conditioning switch. Replace magnetic clutch relay.
I4
Continuity
Liquid pipe
Connect adapter valve and gauge manifold to service plug to measure high pressure side refrigerant pressure. Check for continuity between switch terminals. Check for continuity between thermostat terminals. (Refer to P.5541.) Measure resistance across terminals at a sensing temperature of 25C (77F) Measure resistance across terminals at a sensing temperature of 25C (77F)
Within range of 2,100 to 2,700 kPa (299 to 384 psi)
Gas leakage
Correct places where gas leaks.
6 7
Dual-pressure switch Thermostat
Continuity Continuity
Faulty dual-pressure switch Faulty thermostat
Replace dual-pressure switch. Replace thermostat.
Fin-therm0 sensor Air inlet sensor
3 -
Within range of 3.9 to 4.1 kC
Faulty fin-therm0 sensor
Replace fin-therm0 sensor. Replace air inlet sensor.
Within range of 0.9 to 1 .l kQ
Faulty air inlet sensor
If no abnormality is noted at each inspection point after inspection conducted in the sequence shown in this quick-reference table it is suspected that the compressor is inoperative because of faulty air conditioning control unit. Therefore, replace the air conditioning controi unit.
Interior temperature does not lower (No cold air coming out)
Probable cause Excessive refrigerant Clogged receiver Clogged expansion valve Defective compressor i Remedy Discharge refrigerant. Replace receiver. Replace expansion valve. Replace compressor. 55-48 55-38 55-39 Ref. page
TSB Revision
55-l 4
HEATERS AND MANUAL - Safety Precautions AIR CONDITIONING
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
<Vehicles using R-l 2 refrigerant> R-12 refrigerant is a chlorofluoro-carbon (CFC) that can contribute to the depletion of the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere. Ozone filters out harmful radiation from the sun. To assist in protecting the ozone layer, Mitsubishi Motor Sales of America recommends that an R-12 refrigerant recycling device that meets SAE Standard J1991 be used. Contact an automotive service equipment supplier for refrigerant recycling equipment that is available in your area. The refrigerant used in all air conditioning systems is R-12. It is transparent and colorless in both the liquid and vapor state. Since it has a boiling point of -29.8C (-21.7F), at atmospheric pressure, it will be a vapor at all normal temperatures and pressures. The vapor is heavier than air, non-flammable, and nonexplosive. It is nonpoisonous except when It is in direct contact with open flame. It is noncorrosive except when combined with water. The following precautions must be observed when handling R-l 2. Caution Wear safety goggles when servicing the refrigeration system. R-12 evaporates so rapidly at normal atmospheric pressures and temperatures that it tends to freeze anything it contacts. For this reason, extreme care must be taken to prevent any liquid refrigerant from contacting the skin and especially the eyes. Always wear safety goggles when servicing the refrigeration part of the air conditioning system. Keep a bottle of sterile mineral oil handy when working on the refrigeration system. Should any liquid refrigerant get into the eyes, use a few drops of mineral oil to wash them out. R-12 is rapidly absorbed by the oil. Next splash the eyes with plenty of cool water. Call your doctor immediately even though irritation has ceased after treatment. Caution Do not heat R-12 above 52C (125.6F). In most instances, moderate heat is required to bring the pressure of the refrigerant in its container above the pressure of the system when charging or adding refrigerant. A bucket or large pan of hot water not over 52C (1256F) is all the heat required for this purpose. Do not heat the refrigerant container with a blow torch or any other means that would raise temperature and pressure above this temperature. Do not weld or steam clean on or near the system components or refrigerant lines. Caution Keep R-12 containers upright when charging the system. When adding R-12 into the refrigeration system, keep the supply tank or cans in an upright position. If the refrigerant container is on its side or upside down, liquid refrigerant will enter the system and damage the compressor. Caution Always work in a well-ventilated room. Good ventilation is vital in the working area. Although R-12 vapor is normally nonpoisonous, contact with an open flame can cause the vapor to become very poisonous. A poisonous gas is produced when using the flame-type leak detector. Avoid inhaling the fumes from the leak detector. Caution Do not allow liquid refrigerant to touch bright metal. Refrigerant will tarnish bright metal and chrome surfaces, and in combination with moisture can severely corrode all metal surfaces.
\ Ql
I I 1 I I
I I I d , I 1 I I
I I \ I
l-1
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL - Safety Precautions AIR CONDITIONING
55-15
<Vehicles using R-l 34a refrigerant>

Because R-l 34a refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon t.& ( HFC1 which contains hydrogen atoms in place of chlorine atoms, it will not cause damage to the ozone layer. Ozone filters out harmful radiation from the sun, To assist in protecting the ozone layer, Mitsubishi Motor Sales of America recommends an R-134a refrigerant recycling device. Refrigerant R-l 34a is transparent and colorless in both the liquid and vapor state. Since it has a boiling point of -29.8% (-21.7F), at atmospheric pressure, it will be a vapor at all normal temperatures and pressures. The vapor is heavier than air, non-flammable, and nonexplosive. The following precautions must be observed when handling R-l 34a. Caution Wear safety goggles when servicing the refrigeration system. R-l 34a evaporates so rapidly at normal atmospheric pressures and temperatures that it tends to freeze anything it contacts. For this reason, extreme care must be taken to prevent any liquid refrigerant from contacting the skin and especially the eyes. Always wear safety goggles when servicing the refrigeration part of the air conditioning system. Keep a bottle of sterile mineral oil handy i when working on the refrigeration system. Should id any liquid refrigerant get into the eyes, use a few drops of mineral oil to wash them out. R-134a is rapidly absorbed by the oil. Next splash the eyes with plenty of cool water. Call your doctor immediately even though irritation has ceased after treatment. Caution Do not heat R-134a above 40C (104F).
In most instances, moderate heat is required to bring the pressure of the refrigerant in its container above the pressure of the system when charging or adding refrigerant. A bucket or large pan of hot water not over 40C (104F) is all the heat required for this purpose. Do not heat the refrigerant container with a blow torch or any other means that would raise temperature and pressure above this temperature. Do not weld or steam clean on or near the system components or refrigerant lines. Caution Keep R-134a containers upright when charging the system. When adding R-134a into the refrigeration system, keep the supply tank or cans in an upright position. If the refrigerant container is on its side or upside down, liquid refrigerant will enter the system and damage the compressor. Caution 1. A leak detector designed for R-134a should be used to check for refrigerant gas leaks. 2. Do not allow liquid refrigerant to touch bright metal. Refrigerant will tarnish bright metal and chrome surfaces, and in combination with moisture can severely corrode all metal surfaces.
1 TSB Revision
55-16
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - On-vehicle Service
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
TEST PROCEDURES
SIGHT GLASS REFRIGERANT LEVEL TEST The sight glass is a refrigerant level indicator. To check the refrigerant level, clean the sight glass and start the vehicle engine. Push the air conditioning button to operate the compressor, place the blower switch to high and move the temperature control lever to MAX. COOL. After operating for a few minutes in this manner, check the sight glass. (1) If the sight glass is clear, the magnetic clutch is engaged, the compressor discharge line is warm and the compressor inlet line is cool; the system has a full charge. (2) If the sight glass is clear, the magnetic clutch is engaged and there is no significant temperature difference between compressor inlet and discharge lines; the system has lost most of its refrigerant charge. (3) If the sight glass shows foam or bubbles, the system could be low on refrigerant or the receiver drier is restricted. The system has to be tested, leak checked then recharged with refrigerant.
I I I 1
I I 1 I
MAGNETIC CLUTCH (1). Disconnect the wiring to the magnetic clutch. (2) Connect battery (-) to compressor body. (3) Connect battery (+) voltage directly to the wiring for the magnetic clutch. (4) If the magnetic clutch is normal, there will be a click. If the pulley and armature do not make contact (click), there is a malfunction.
I I yi I I
RECEIVER DRIER To Test the Receiver Drier (1) Operate the unit and check the piping temperature by J touching the receiver drier outlet and inlet. (2) If there is a difference in the temperatures, the receiver drier is restricted. Replace the receiver drier.
I 1 1 I I
OFF
V
210 (30)
---------235 (33) 225 (32) 2,100
I
2700 (384) 3,200 (455)
22OPOO14
,znF R-Q>
(299)
<Vehicles 200 using &,rn> (28)
2,600 (370)
Pressure kPa
(Psi)
DUAL PRESSURE SWITCH (LOW PRESSURE SWITCH) (1) Turn back the adaptor valve handle all the way and install it to the low pressure side service valve. (2) With the gauge manifold low pressure service valves closed, connect the gauge manifold high pressure side charging hose to the adaptor valve. (3) Tighten the adaptor valve handle and open the service valve. (4) If there is continuity between the dual pressure switch terminals when the low pressure side pressure is at the level of dual pressure switch ON condition shown to the left, the switch is functioning normally. If not, replace the switch.
I I
I 4:
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL - On-vehicle Service AIR CONDITIONING
55-17
COMPRESSOR CHECK i
After running the compressor for five minutes, check whether the following items are proper or not. Case Case 1 Case 2 ;OO-500 kPa 28.4-71.1 psi Pressure on the highpressure side Saturated pressure of open air Pressure on the lowpressure side 150-200 kPa 21.3-28.4 psi 100 kPa or less 14.2 psi or less Performance test Acceptable Acceptable Criteria Proper Abnormal The magnet clutch is frequently turned on and off. The difference between the high and low pressures is not observed. Abnormal Blow-out temperature is high. Faulty compressor* Replace compressor. Probable cause Remedy
Case 3
Nearly saturated pressure of open air
Rejected
Faulty compressor*
Case 4
Rejected
Clogged expansion valve
Replace expansion valve.
NOTE (1) Saturated pressure of open air Temperature C (F) Saturated pressure open of air kPa (Psi.) 15 (59) 400 (56.9) 20 (68) 470 (66.8) 25 (77) 560 (79.7) 30 (86) 650 (92.5) 35 (95) 760 (108.1) 40 (104) 870 (123.7)
(2) For the performance testing procedure, refer to P.5525. (3) *l means that the compressor is locked in the full load state (100% delivery). (4) *2 means that the compressor is locked in the full capacity control (delivery rate: 0) state.
TSB Revision
55-18
FIN-THERM0 SENSOR AND AIR-INLET SENSOR (l), Disconnect the sensors connector at the evaporator case, and by using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance. If the resistance is within f 10% of value of the characteristic curve, the sensor is functioning normally. (2) If the sensor is normal, there is a malfunction of the air conditioning control unit, and it should be replaced.
Resistance rn1 Mw 4503 40x SC0 m 2503 2ax) lxa IOM MO ii :, 10 15 TCnpera;Burs 2 E$i 77flAO43
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT ADJUSTMENT

Refer to GROUP 11 - On-vehicle Service.
I I
Service
CHARGING PROCEDURES <Vehicles using R-l 2 refrigerant>

CHARGE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION (1) Turn the adaptor valves (1) and (2) handles back fully (valves shut) and attach adaptor valves (1) and (2) to the high and low pressure service valves respectively. (2) Fully tighten the handles of adaptor valves (1) and (2) (valves open) and open the high and low pressure service valves. (3) Connect the charging hoses to adaptor valves (1) and (4) Attach the fully tightened adaptor valve (3) (valve open) handle to the low pressure charging hose. (5) Attach the vacuum gauge to adaptor valve (3). (6) t;t;h the vacuum pump to the high pressure charging NOTE (1) Do not connect the high and low pressure sides adversely. (Connect high pressure side to the condenser and low pressure side to the evaporator.) (2) The indications DIS and SW on the compressor indicate high and low pressure sides respectively.
(2).
I I I I
or compressor
~ I
Map& valve (3)
Vacuum pump cl
Z2oNOl64
1 TSB Revision
55-19
CHARGING SYSTEM
Hold this condition
If leak is evident
Gas leak check If leak is evident ! Refrigerant charge
The refrigerant system must have been evacuated using the previous procedure before charging. Charge using only R-12 refrigerant. R-12 is available in bulk tanks or small cans. Follow the safety precautions for handling R-12 as listed in this group.
Adaptor valve (1) (Low pressure)
Adaptor valve (2) (High pressure)
CHARGING THE REFRIGERANT <Vehicles using R-l 2 refrigerant>

CHARGING WITH SMALL CANS When using disposable cans of this type, follow carefully the can manufacturers instructions. (1) Start up the vacuum pump. (2) Evacuate to a vacuum reading of 100 kPa (14.5 psi) or higher (approx. 10 minutes). Caution To prevent the indication from going wrong, vertically stand the vacuum gauge and read the scale.
/ !!i?
i
Vacuum gauge
(3) Turn the high pressure adaptor valve (2) handle all the way counterclockwise (valve shut). (4) Stop the vacuum pump and allow to stand for 5 minutes. (5) Check for leaks. (Good if the vacuum is held.)
Vacuum I pump I
TSB Revision
55-20

Adaptorvalve (2) (High pressure)
(6) Turn the charge valve (4) handle back (valve open), and attach it to the service can. (7) Turn the adaptor valve (3) handle back fully (valve shut), remove the vacuum meter and attach the service can. (8) Tighten the charge valve (4) handle to puncture the service (9) Eyn the charge valve (4) handle back (valve open), tighten the handle of adaptor valve (3) fully (valve open), and charge with refrigerant. (lO)lf the refrigerant is not drawn in, turn the adaptor valve (1) handle all the way counterclockwise (valve shut). (11)Check for gas leaks using a leak detector. (12)Star-t the engine. (13)Operate the air conditioning and set at the lowest temperature (MAX. COOL). (14)Fix the engine speed at 1,500 rpm. (15)Turn the adaptor valve (1) handle fully clockwise (valve open). Caution If the service can is inverted, liquid refrigerant may be drawn into the compressor damaging it by liquid compression. Keep the service can upright to ensure that refrigerant is charged in gas state. (16)After charging with refrigerant, turn the adaptor valve (1) handle fully counterclockwise (valve shut). CHARGING WITH REFRIGERANT RECOVERY AND RECYCLING UNIT When using refrigerant recovery and recycling unit, follow carefully the instruction manual for the unit.
L./l I I I 1 I I
UP H/P Service valve Refrigerant line or compressor Charging hose
Chargevalve (4) /
($$~~~~) 1 I,, j $;m
I I I 1 I ;i~ I I 1 ~
11
ZzoN0165
Service can
Adaptor valve (2) (High pressure)
CHARGE EQUIPMENT REMOVAL (1) Close the charge valve (4) (valve shut). (2) Remove the adaptor valve (1) and (2) from each service valve. (3) Remove the vacuum pump. Caution If some refrigerant is remaining, keep the charge valve (4) and adaptor valves (1) and (3) connected to the service can until after the next operation. Remove the charge valve (4). Remove the adaptor valve (3). Remove the adaptor valve (1). Remove the adaptor valve (2). Remove the vacuum pump.
I I I I I
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
LJ
TSB Revision
55-21
/ L
Charge valve Adaptor valve (1)
Charging hose Adaptor valve (2) /
CORRECTING LOW REFRIGERANT LEVEL (1) Install the charge valve to the service can with its handle turned back all the way (valve open). (2) Attach the adaptor valve (1) with the handle tightened to the charge valve (valve open). (3) Attach the charge hose to adaptor valve (1). (4) Turn the handle of adaptor valve (2) back fully (valve shut) and attach the charging hose. (5) Tighten the charge valve handle to puncture the service (6) E:n the charge valve handle back fully (valve open) and operate the handle of adaptor valve (2) to bleed the air. (7) Install the adaptor valve (2) to the low pressure side service valve. Caution Never attempt to use the high pressure side, or refrigerant will flow reversely and break the service can and charging hose. (8) Start the engine. (9) Operate the air conditioning and set at the lowest temperature (MAX. COOL). (lO)Fix the engine speed at 1,500 rpm. (11)Tighten the adaptor valve (2) handle (valve open) and charge refrigerant checking level with the sight glass. (12)Upon completion of charging, turn back the adaptor valve (2) handle all the way (valve shut). (13)Remove the adaptor valve (2) from the service valve. NOTE If the service can is not emptied completely, keep the charge valve and adaptor valves (1) and (2) closed until after the next operation. DISCHARGING SYSTEM Use the refrigerant recovery unit to discharge refrigerant gas from the system. NOTE Refer to that Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling Unit Instruction Manual for operation of the unit. OIL IN THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFILLING Too little oil will provide inadequate compressor lubrication and cause a compressor failure. Too much oil will increase discharge air temperature. When an FX-105VS compressor is installed at the factory, it contains 160 cm3 (5.4 fl.oz.) of refrigerant oil. While the air conditioning system is in operation, the oil is carried through the entire system by the refrigerant. Some of this oil will be trapped and retained in various parts of the system. When the following system components are charged, it is necessary to add oil to the system to replace the oil being removed with the component. Compressor oil: FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS Quantity Evaporator: 60 cm3 (2.0 fl.oz.) Condenser: 15 cm3 (S fl.oz.) Suction hose: 10 cm3 (.3 fl.oz.) Receiver: 10 cm3 (-3 fl.oz.)
ZI
Service can Low pressure service valve Refrigerant line or compressor
22060331
LJ
TSB Revision
55-22
CHARGING <Vehicles using R-134a refrigerant>

Low pressure valve High pressure side
(1) With the handles turned back all the way (valve closed), install the adaptor valve to the low-pressure side of the gauge manifold. (2) Connect the charging hose (blue) to the adaptor valve. (3) Connect the quick joint (for low pressure) to the charging hose (blue). (4) Connect the quick joint (for low pressure) to the low pressure service valve. NOTE The low-pressure service valve should be connected to the low pressure hose. Caution 1. Use tools that are designed for R-134a. 2. To install the quick joint, press section A firmly against the service valve until a click is heard. When connecting, run your hand along the hose while pressing to ensure that there are no bends in the hose. (5) Close the high and low pressure valves of the gauge manifold. (6) Install the vacuum pump adaptor to the vacuum pump. (7) z;;;gt the vacuum pump plug to the vacuum pump (8) Connect the charging hose (yellow) to the R-l 34a connection port of the vacuum pump adaptor. (9) Tighten the adaptor valve handle (valve open). (10)Open the low pressure valve of the gauge manifold. (ll)Turn the power switch of the vacuum pump to the ON position. NOTE Even if the vacuum pump power switch is turned ON, the vacuum pump will not operate because of the power supply connection in step (7). (12)Turn the vacuum pump adaptor switch to the R-134a side to start the vacuum pump. Caution Do not operate the compressor during evacuation. (13)Evacuate to a vacuum reading of 100 kPa (29.5 inHg) or higher (takes approx. 10 minutes). (14)Turn the vacuum pump adaptor switch OFF and allow to stand it for 5 minutes. Caution Do not operate the compressor in the vacuum condition; damage may occur. (15)Carry out a leak test. (Good if the negative pressure does not drop.) Caution If the negative pressure (vacuum) is lost, check for loose connections. Then, repeat the evacuation procedure from step (12). If negative pressure (vacuum) is still lost, add 1 lb of refrigerant and check system using an R-134a compatible leak detector.
di
I I I I I I I I 1 I I Id , I 1 I I 1 I
z2oxo11
1,):
TSB Revision
55-23
Adaptor ialve Service can s

220x0118
(16)With the handle turned out all the way (valve open), install the charging valve to the service can. (17)Turn the handle of the adaptor valve back all the way (valve closed), remove it from the gauge manifold and install the service can. (18)Tighten the handle of the charging valve (valve closed) to puncture the service can.
(19)Turn the handle of the charging valve back (valve open) and tighten the handle of the adaptor valve (valve open) to charge the system with refrigerant. Caution If the service can is inverted, liquid refrigerant may be drawn into the compressor damaging it by liquid compression. Keep the service can upright to ensure that refrigerant is charged in gas state. (20)If the refrigerant is not drawn in, turn the handle of the adaptor valve back all the way (valve closed). (21)Check for gas leaks using a leak detector. If a gas leak is detected, re-tighten the connections, and then repeat the charging procedure from evacuation in step (12). Caution A leak detector designed for R-134a should be used. (22)Stat-t the engine. (23)Operate the A/C and set to the lowest temperature (MAX. COOL). (24)Fix the engine speed at 1,500 rpm. (25)Tighten the handle of the adaptor valve (valve open) to charge the required volume of refrigerant. Caution If the service can is inverted, liquid refrigerant may be drawn into the compressor damaging it by liquid compression. Keep the service can upright to ensure that refrigerant is charged in gas state. (26)After charging with refrigerant, turn the handle of the adaptor valve back all the way (valve closed). (27)lighten the charging valve handle (valve closed). Remove the quick joint (for low pressure) from the lowpressure service valve. NOTE If the service can is not emptied completely, keep the handles of the charging valve and adaptor valve closed for the next charging.
Service can (Refrigerantcontainer)
u
Low pressure service valve
220x0108
TSB Revision
55-24
Valve open
HEATERS AND MANUAL - On-vehicle Service AIR CONDITIONING CORRECTING LOW REFRIGERANT LEVEL IN CASE THE SERVICE CAN IS USED (1) Install the charge valve with the handle turned all the way out (valve open) of the service can. (2) Install the adaptor valve with the handle turned all the way back (valve close) to the charging valve. (3) Connect the charging hose (blue) to the adaptor valve. (4) Connect the charging hose (blue) to the quick joint (for low pressure). (5) Tighten the handle of the charge valve (valve close), and pierce the service can. (6) Turn the handle of the adaptor valve to bleed the air.
Charge valve Adaptor valve
Service can
A-l IL
Charging hose (blue)
low pressure)
(7) Install the quick joint (for low pressure) to the low pressure service valve. NOTE The low-pressure service valve should be connected to the low-pressure hose.
Low pressure service valve
(8) Start the engine. (9) Operate, the air conditioner and set at the lowest temperature (MAX. COOL). (1O)Fix the engine speed at 1,500 rpm. (ll)Tighten the handle of the adaptor valve (valve open), and replenish refrigerant checking the quantity through the sight glass. Caution If the service can is inverted, liquid refrigerant may be draw into the compressor damaging it by liquid compression. Keep the service can upright to ensure that refrigerant is charged in gas state. (12)After replenishing is completed, turn the handle of the adaptor valve all the way back (valve close), and remove the quick joint. NOTE If any refrigerant is remaining in the service can, close the adaptor valve and save the refrigerant for another vehicle. Do not release into the atmosphere.
220x0108
1 TSB Revision
55-25
LJ
METHOD BY USING REFRIGERANT RECOVERY AND RE-CYCLING UNIT Using the refrigerant recovery and recycling unit, refill the refrigerant. NOTE Refer to that Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling Unit Instruction Manual for operation of the unit. DISCHARGING SYSTEM Use the refrigerant recovery unit to discharge refrigerant gas from the system. NOTE Refer to that Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling Unit Instruction Manual for operation of the unit. OIL REFILLING IN THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Too little oil will provide inadequate compressor lubrication and cause a compressor failure. Too much oil will increase discharge air temperature. When a compressor is installed at the factory, it contains 160 cm3 (5.4 fl.oz.) of refrigerant oil. While the air conditioning system is in operation, the oil is carried through the entire system by the refrigerant. Some of this oil will be trapped and retained in various parts of the system. When the following system components are charged, it is necessary to add oil to the system to replace the oil being removed with the component. Compressor oil: SUN PAG 56 Quantity Evaporator: 60 cm3 (2.0 fl.oz.) Condenser: 15 cm3 (S fl.oz.) Suction hose: 10 cm3 (.3 fl.oz.) Receiver: 10 cm3 (.3 fl.oz.)
TSB Revision
55-26
PERFORMANCE TEST
<Vehicles using R-12 refrigerant> (1) Park the tested vehicle at the area which is not exposed to direct sunlight. (2) Connect a tachometer. (3) Turn back the adaptor valve handle all the way and install the adaptor valves to the high pressure and low pressure service valves. (4) Connect the gauge manifold to the adaptor valves. (5) Tighten the adaptor valve handle and open the service valves. (6) Start the engine. (7) Set the controls to the air conditioning as follows: Air conditioning switch: Air conditioning - ON position Mode selection: Face position Temperature control: MAX. COOL position Air selection: Recirculation position Blower switch: HI (Fast) position (8) Adjust engine speed to 1,000 rpm with air conditioning clutch engaged. (9) Engine should be warmed up with doors, windows close, and hood open. (lO)lnsert a thermometer in the center air conditioning outlet and operate the engine for 20 minutes. (ll)Note the discharge air temperature. NOTE If the clutch cycles, take the reading before the clutch disengages. Performance Temperature Chart Garage ambient temperature C (F) Discharge air temperature C (OF) Compressor discharge pressure kPa (psi) Compressor suction pressure kPa (psi)
> 21 (70) 26.7 (80) 32.2 (90) 1.0-4.0 (33.8-39.2) 870-920 (123.7-130.9) 37.8 (100) 43.3 (110)
I I
1 1 1
I 1 I
I
130-190 (18.5-27.5) 130-190 (18.5-27.5) 130-190 (18.5-27.5) 130-190 (18.5-27.5) 130-190 (18.5-27.5)
I I
1 I d, ( TSB Revision
55-27
Low pressure valve
High pressure valve
Adaptor valve - (for high Hiohl pressure) pressure p&sure service service valve valve
<Vehicles using R-134a refrigerant> (1) The vehicles to be tested should be in a place that is not in direct sunlight. (2) Close the high and low pressure valve of the gauge manifold. (3) Connect the charging hose (blue) to the low pressure valve and connect the charging hose (red) to the high pressure valve of the gauge manifold. (4) Install the quick joint (for low pressure) to the charging hose (blue), and connect the quick joint (for high pressure) to the charging hose (red). (5) Connect the quick joint (for low pressure) to the low-pressure service valve and connect the quick joint (for high pressure) to the high-pressure service valve. NOTE The high-pressure service valve is on high-pressure pipe B, and the low-pressure service valve is on the low-pressure hose. Caution To connect the quick joint, press section A firmly against the service valve until a click is heard. When connecting, run your hand along the hose while pressing to ensure that there are no bends in the hose. (6) Start the engine. (7) Set the A/C controls as follows: A/C switch: A/C - ON position Mode selection: Face position Temperature control: Max. cooling position Air selection: Recirculation position Blower switch: HI (Fast) position (8) Adjust engine speed to 1,000 rpm with A/C clutch engaged. (9) Engine should be warmed up with doors and windows closed. (10)lnser-t a thermometer in the left center A/C outlet and operate the engine for 20 minutes. (11) Note the discharge air temperature. NOTE If the clutch cycles, take the reading before the clutch disengages.
Performance Temperature Chart Garage ambient temperature C (F) Discharge air temperature C (F) Compressor discharge pressure kPa (psi) I Compressor suction pressure kPa (psi) 21 (70)
0.0-3.0 (32.0-37.4) 26.7(80) 32.2 (90) 37.8 (100) 43.3 (110) 2.0-5.0 (35.6-41.0)
1 .o-4.0
(33.8-39.2)
1 .o-4.0
(33.8-39.2)
1 .o-4.0
(33.8-39.2)
690-740 (98.1-105.3) 130-190 (18.5-27.5)
780-830 870-920 1,080-1,130 1,210-l ,260 (110.9-118.1) (123.7-130.9) (153.6-160.7) (172.1-179.2)
130-190 (18.5-27.5)
130-190 (18.5-27.5)
130-190 (18.5-27.5)
130-190 (18.5-27.5)
TSB Revision
55-28
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING
- On-vehicle Service
REFRIGERANT LEAK REPAIR PROCEDURE

LOST CHARGE If the system has lost all charge due to a leak: (1) Evacuate the system. (See procedure.) (2) Charge the system with approximately one pound of refrigerant. (3) Check for leaks. (4) Discharge the system. (5) Repair leaks. (6) Replace receiver drier. Caution Replacement filter-drier units must be sealed while in storage. The drier used in these units will absorb water/water vapor quickly upon exposure to the atmosphere. When installing a drier, have all tools and supplies ready for quick reassembly to avoid keeping the system open any longer than necessary. (7) Evacuate and charge the system. LOW CHARGE If the system has not lost all of its refrigerant charge, locate and repair all leaks. If it is necessary to increase the system pressure to find the leak (because of an especially low charge) add refrigerant. If it is possible to repair the leak without discharging the refrigerant system, use the procedure for correcting low refrigerant level.
It is good practice to inspect all flexible hose lines at least once a year to make sure they are in good condition and properly routed. O-ring used on connections are not reusable.
di I
COMPRESSOR NOISE
When investigating an air conditioning related noise, you must first know the conditions when the noise occurs. These conditions are: weather, vehicle speed, gear in neutral, engine temperature or any other special conditions. Noises that develop during air conditioning operation can often be misleading. For example: what sounds like a failed front bearing or connecting rod, may be caused by loose bolts, nuts, mounting brackets, or a loose clutch assembly. Verify accessory drive belt tension (power steering or generator). Improper accessory drive belt tension can cause a misleading noise when the compressor is engaged and little or no noise when the compressor is disengaged. Drive belts are speed sensitive. That is, at different engine speeds, and depending upon belt tension, belts can develop unusual noises that are often mistaken for mechanical problems within the compressor.
I ~ I I I I d I
HANDLING TUBING AND FITTINGS

Kinks in the refrigerant tubing or sharp bends in the refrigerant hose lines will greatly reduce the capacity of the entire system. High pressures are produced in the system when it is operating. Extreme care must be exercised to make sure that all connections are pressure tight. Dirt and moisture can enter the system when it is opened for repair or replacement of lines or components. The following precautions must be observed. The system must be completely discharged before opening any fitting of connection in the refrigeration system. Open fittings with caution even after the system has been discharged. If any pressure is noticed as a fitting is loosened, allow trapped pressure to bleed off very slowly. Never attempt to rebend formed lines to fit. Use the correct line for the installation you are servicing. A good rule for the flexible hose lines is keep the radius of all bends at least 10 times the diameter of the hose. Sharper bends will reduce the flow of refrigerant. The flexible hose lines should be routed so that they are at least 80 mm (3 in.) from the exhaust manifold. TSB Revision
I I
Ijl
HEATERS AND MANUAL - On-vehicle Service AIR CONDITIONING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES
55-29
(1) Select a quiet area for testing. Duplicate conditions as much as possible. Switch compressor on and off several times to clearly identify compressor noise. To duplicate high ambient conditions (high head pressure), restrict air flow through condenser. Install manifold gauge set to make sure discharge pressure doesnt exceed 2,070 kPa (300 psi). (2) Tighten all compressor mounting bolts, clutch mounting bolt, and compressor drive belt. Check to assure clutch coil is tight (no rotation or wobble). (3) Check refrigerant hoses for rubbing or interference that can cause unusual noises. (4) Check refrigerant charge. (See Charging System.) (5) Recheck compressor noise as in Step 1. (6) If noise still exists, loosen compressor mounting bolts and retorque. Repeat Step 1. (7) If noise continues, replace compressor and repeat Step 1.
POWER RELAY CHECK

(1) Remove the radiator fan motor relays (HI) and (LO) from the relay box on the right of the engine compartment. (2) Remove the radiator fan motor relay (air conditioning) <Up to 1993 models>, condenser fan motor relays (HI) and (LO), and air-conditioning compressor relay from the relay box on the left of the engine compartment. (3) Remove the blower motor relay from the junction box. (4) Remove the blower motor HI relay cup to 1995 models> from the blower case assembly. (5) Check the continuity between terminals using a circuit tester.
Blower motor HI relay <Up to 1995 models> ZXIFOO~~
IDLE-UP OPERATION CHECK

(1) Before inspection and adjustment set vehicle in the following condition: l Engine coolant temperature: 80-95C (176-203F) l Lights, electric cooling fan and accessories: Set to OFF l Transaxle: Neutral (N or P for vehicles with A/T) l Steering wheel: Straightforward (2) Check to be sure that the idling speed becomes the standard value when the air conditioning switch is switched ON and the air conditioning is activated. Standard value: 900 + 100 rpm NOTE Idle speed is controlled by the ISC system and is not adjustable. If, idle speed is not within specifications, check the ISC system. (Refer to GROUP 13A - On-vehicle Service.)
TSB Revision
55-30
HEATERS AND MANUAL - Heater Control Assembly AIR CONDITIONING
HEATER CONTROL ASSEMBLY

l
\ d,i
CAUTION: SRS When installing or iemoving the floor console, dont allow any impact or shock to the SRS diagnosis unit.
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Floor Console Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.)
I I I I ~ d ,
Z2OFOO78
Removal steps 1. Stopper 2. Glove box outer case assembly .Cd 3. Air-selection control wire connection 4. Hood lock release handle 5. Rheostat assembly 6. Rear wiper and washer switch
7. Knee protector 8. Shower duct .B+ 9. Mode control wire connection ,A4 10. Temperature control wire connection 11. Center air outlet assembly 4A, 12. Heater control assembly

stick
+A, CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Disengaging the clips (2 positions) of the center air outlet assembly with a flat tip screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with the trim stick.
LJ
Y2OFOO32
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING -Heater Control Assembly
55-31

.A+ TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION Connect the temperature control wire to the blend air damper lever by following the steps below. (1) Move the temperature control lever to the rightmost position. (HOT position) (2) With the blend air damper lever pressed completely downward in the direction indicated by the arrow, connect the inner cable of the temperature control wire to the end of the blend air damper lever, and then secure the outer cable: by using a clip. ,B( MODE SELECTION CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION Connect the mode selection control wire to the mode selection damper lever by following the steps below. (1) Move the mode selection lever to the defroster position. (2) With the mode selection damper lever pressed inward in the direction indicated by the arrow, connect the inner cable of the mode selection control wire to the end of the mode selection lever, and then secure the outer cable by using a clip. .Cd AIR SELECTION CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION Connect the air selection control wire to the air selection damper lever by following the steps below. (1) Move the air selection control lever to the recirculation position. (2) Set the air selection damper lever as it contacts stopper. (3) Connect the inner cable of the air selection control wire to the end of the air selection lever, and then secure the outer cable by using a clip.
INSPECTION
BLOWER SWITCH CHECK Operate the switch, and check the continuity between the terminals. Switch position
5 OFF 3 6
Terminal No.
2 7 8 1 4
00002623
z2OAO408
I
1 TSB Revision
55-32
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING
Resistor, Air Conditioning Compressor - Lock Controller
RESISTOR, AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR LOCK CONTROLLER

Removal steps 1. Stopper 2. Glove box outer case assembly 3. Resistor
4. Under cover 5. AI;oor;pressor lock controller
INSPECTION ,
RESISTOR CHECK Using a circuit tester, measure the resistance between the terminals indicated below. The condition can be considered satisfactory if the value measured at this time is equivalent to the standard value.
Standard value Terminals measured Between terminals (2)-(l) Between terminals (2)-(4) Between terminals (2)-(3) Standard value Q Approx. 1.76-2.06 Approx. 1 .lO-1.26 Approx. 0.38-0.44
00002624
zmPo011
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL, - Air Conditioning Switch AIR CONDITIONING
55-33
AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH L

1
Removal steps
1. Center air outlet assembly 2. Air conditioning switch

+A, CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Disengaging the clips (2 positions) of the center air outlet assembly with a flat tip screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with the trim stick. +B, AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH REMOVAL Remove the center air outlet assembly, and insert hand to the back of the cluster panel assembly through the produced opening. Push it toward you for removal.
INSPECTION
AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH CHECK <Up to 1995 models>
Switch position Terminal No. l/2 14 15 1 3 16
Z2OFOOO9
<From 1996 models>

Switch position OFF ON Terminal No. 114151316 iv
p$xGx
tZOA0189
NOTE *: <Indication light>
TSB Revision
55-34
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - Heater Unit
HEATER UNIT
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation 0 Coolant Draining and Supplying (Refer to GROUP
g
l
Floor Console and Instrument Panel Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console
I I
I \
22OFO104
L.&J I I
Removal steps
1. Water hoses connection 2. Center reinforcement 3. Under cover 4. Distribution duct (foot) 5. Foot shower duct 6. Lap cooler duct
4,
7. Evaporator mounting bolt and nut <Vehicles with air conditioning> 8. Center duct 9. Heater unit 10. Plate 11. Heater core
I I 1 ~

dA, EVAPORATOR MOUNTING BOLT REMOVAL <Vehicles with manual air conditioning>
NOTE In order to prevent bolts from falling into the blower assembly, set the air-selection damper to the position that permits outside air introduction.
i L)!
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL. - Heater Unit / Blower Assemblv Assembly AIR CONDITIONING
55-35
INSPECTION
L
BLOWER ASSEMBLY
l l
Chbck the operation of dampers and link mechanism. Check the heater core for clogging and water leakage.
m-- 5 ,&---J 7
Li <(yyJ dT
w 66
4
6. /
6% 7 --..__
--Y
Pa q&
&
ZZOFOO79
Blower case assembly removal steps 2. Glove box 3. Glove box outer case assembly 4. Under cover 5. Lower frame 6. Evaporator mounting bolt and nut <Vehicles with air conditioning> ,Bd 7. Air-selection wire connection 8. Side frame 9. Blower, assembly .A+ 10. Blower motor assembly 11. Blower case assembly
1. Stopper
Blower motor assembly removal steps 4. Under cover ,A( 10. Blower motor assembly
/ L
1 TSB Revision
55-36
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - Blower Assemblv INSTALLATION SERVICE POINTS
.A+ BLOWER MOTOR ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Before installing the blower motor assembly, carefully clean away any dust, dirt, etc. adhering to the inner surface of the blower case.
/ ~ d:
,Bq AIR SELECTION CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION Connect the air selection control wire to the air selection damper lever by following the steps below. (1) Move the air selection control lever to the recirculation position. (2) Set the air selection damper lever as it contacts stopper. (3) Connect the inner cable of the air selection control wire to the end of the air selection lever, and then secure the outer cable by using a clip.
I 1 ~
INSPECTION
l l l l l
Check for bending or abnormal deflection of the rotating shaft of the blower motor assembly. Check for cracking or deterioration of the packing. Check for damage to the fan. Check for damage to the blower case. Check the operation of the inside/outside air selection damper, and for damage.
I \ d ~
I
BLOWER MOTOR ASSEMBLY CHECK When battery voltage is applied between the terminals, check to be sure that the motor operates. Also, check to be sure that there is no abnormal noise.
+
Battery A
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - EvaDorator
55-37
EVAPORATOR
l
Battery Removal and Installation
ii
O:ring 220N0089 Compressor oil: FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS <Vehicles using R-l 2 refrigerant> SUN PAG 56 <Vehicles using R-134a refriaerants
.i~:i-_-~c=,~-7 - . - _- - - -. - -. BaB >i a?/
9-11 Nm
-.\;;Q..~!, ,
, s \. I\,j \-
1v
. $-, i .iL..l j
\ie 1
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs.
w-.
00002625
22OFOO71
Removal steps 1. Discharge pipe C and suction hose B connection 2. O-ring 3. Drain hose 4. Stopper 5. Glove box
6. Glove box outer case assembly 7. Under cover 8. Lower frame 9. A/C control unit <Up to 1995 models> .A( 10. Evaporator

(A,DlSCHARGE PIPE C AND SUCTION HOSE B DISCONNECTION If the hoses or pipes are disconnected, cap the hoses or pipes with a blank plug to prevent entry of dust, dirt, and water.

,A( EVAPORATOR INSTALLATION If a new evaporator is used, fill it with the specified amount of compressor oil before installing on the vehicle. Compressor oil: FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS <Vehicles R-12 refrigerant> SUN PAG 56 <Vehicles using R-134a refrigerant> Quantity: 60 cm3 (2.0 fl.oz.)
INSPECTION l Check for damage of the evaporator fin part. l Check for damage or collapse of the drain hose.
l
Check for peeling or cracking of the insulator.
TSB Revision
55-38
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - Evaporator
Compressor oil: FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS <Vehicles using R-12 refrigerant> SUN PAG 56 <Vehicles using R-l 34a refrigerank
10
6
Disassembly steps 1. Clips 2. Auto compressor controller <From 1996 models> 3. Evaporater case (upper) 4. Fin therm0 sensor <Up to 1995 models> 5. Air inlet sensor <Up to 1995 models with manual air conditioning>
00004224
4B,
6. Evaporator case (lower) 7. Evaporator assembly 8. Grommet 9. Insulator 10. Rubber insulator 11. Clip 12. Expansion valve
iJ

+A, CLIPS REMOVAL
Remove the clips with a screwdriver covered with a shop
towel to prevent damage to case surfaces.
+B,EXPANSION VALVE REMOVAL Loosen the flare nut by using two wrenches (for both the inlet and outlet).
INSPECTION
FIN-THERM0 SENSOR AND AIR-INLET SENSOR CHECK j For information concerning the checking procedures, refer i/ to P.5518. TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - Compressor
55-39
COMPRESSOR
l
Refrigerant Discharge (Refer to P.5518, 22.)

l
Compressor Drive Belt Adjustment (Refer to GROUP Refrigerant Charging (Refer to P.5521, 25.)
21 Nm 15 ft.lbs.
9 Nm 7 ft.lbs.
2 \
<Up to 1993 models>
O-ring
3 Cf. I t /
<From 1994 models>
w 70N0089
Compressor oil: F R E O L S - 8 3 o r SUNISO 5GS dehicles using R-12 refrigeranb SUN PAG 56 <Vehicles using R-134a refrigerant> Removal steps 1. Compressor drive belt 2. Condenser fan motor assembly 3. Discharge hose and suction hose A connection 4. Generator (Refer to GROUP 16 - Generator.) i +C, .A+ 5. Compressor 6. Idler pulley
00002627
7. Compressor bracket ;. zor;ion pulley assembly ;;I Foytsion pulley 12: Adjustment plate 13. Tension pulley bracket
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - Compressor REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS

(A, COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT REMOVAL (1) Loosen bolt A for holding the tension pulley. (2) Loosen bolt B for adjustment, and remove the compressor drive belt. +B,DlSCHARGE HOSE AND SUCTION HOSE A REMOVAL If the hoses are disconnected, cap the hoses with a blank plug to prevent entry of dust, dirt, and water. (C, COMPRESSOR REMOVAL Caution Lay the towel on the brake tube to protect them. When installing the compressor, do not damage the brake tubes. This work must be done carefully so as not to spill the compressor oil. : d I
1 I
YOlN0077

.A+ COMPRESSOR INSTALLATION If a new compressor is installed, first adjust the amount of oil according to the procedures described below, and then install the compressor. (1) Measure the amount [X cm3 (X fl.oz.)] of oil within the removed compressor. (2) Wipe away (from the new compressor) the amount of oil calculated according to the following formula, and then install the new compressor. New compressor oil amount 160 cm3 - X cm3 = Y cm3 (5.4 fl.oz. - x fl.oz. = Y fl.oz.) NOTE (1) Y cm3 (Y fl.oz.) indicates the amount of oil in the refrigerant line, the condenser, the cooling unit, etc. (2) If any other air conditioning part is replaced simultaneously with the compressor, remove the oil from the new compressor, taking the specified amount of oil for the part into consideration. Quantity Evaporator: 60 cm3 (2.0 fl.ot.) Condenser: 15 cm3 (5 fl.oz.) Suction hose: 10 cm3 (.3 fl.oz.) Receiver: 10 cm3 (.3 fl.oz.)
~ I I d
INSPECTION
l l l l l
Checking for heat damage of the tension pulley. Check for excessive play or deflection of the tension pulley. Check for unusual wear of the tension pulley. Check for hardening of the air conditioning belt. Check for unusual wear or abrasion of the air conditioning belt.
TSB Revision
55-41
pressor
COMPRESSORS MAGNETIC CLUTCH OPERATION CHECK (1) Connect terminal (1) at the compressor side to the positive (+) terminal of the battery, and ground the negative (-) terminal of the battery to the compressor. (2) The condition of the compressors magnetic clutch can be considered satisfactory if the operation sound (a click sound) of the magnetic clutch can be heard when this check is made.
22OFOO67
xz0F0097
Magnetic clutch disassembly steps 1. Bolts 2. Pulley +A, .D+ 3. N u t .C( 4. Armature plate ;. gztr rw c .B( 7: Snap ring. ,A+ ;. ;zlu; co11 High pressure relief valve disassembly steps 10. Cover 11. Dust cover 12. High pressure relief valve
Control valve disassembly 13. Snap ring 14. Control valve Thermostat and revolution pick up sensor disassembly steps 15. Plate 16. Thermostat and revolution pick up sensor
TSB Revision
55-42
<From 1994 models>
zzOLO358
Magnetic clutch disassembly steps 1. Bolts 2. Pulley +A, ,D+ 3. N u t .C( 4. Armature plate ;. S,ztr ring .A4 $ CJ&.,h coil
4B,
High pressure relief valve disassembly 12. High pressure relief valve Thermostat and revolution pick up sensor disassembly 16. Thermostat and revolution pick up sensor
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - Compressor DISASSEMBLY SERVICE POINTS

+A, NUT REMOVAL Use the special tool to loosen the nut.
55-43
(BFTHERMOSTAT AND REVOLUTION PICK UP SENSOR REMOVAL (1) Remove the fitting block from the compressor. (2) Remove the snap ring from inside the fitting block and remove the refrigerant temperature switch. (3) Remove the revolution pick-up sensor from the fitting block.
\ Fitting block 22ONo269

.A4 CLUTCH COIL INSTALLATION Align the pin of the clutch coil with the pin hole in the front housing, and then fit it into the hole.
ront housing t20Noo3( Snap-ring Clutch coil Clutch coil
.B+ SNAP RING INSTALLATION Install the snap ring so that the tapered surface is at the outer side.
F
Crankshaft
-4
.7part Tapered
z20&0157
.C( ARMATURE PLATE INSTALLATION Align the mating mark of the crankshaft spline and the mating mark of the armature plate, and then fit them together.
TSB Revision
55-44

.DA NUT INSTALLATION (1) Use the special tool to tighten the nut. \ d i
(2) Check whether or not the air gap of the clutch is within the standard value. Standard value: 0.4-0.6 mm (.Ol-.02 in.) NOTE If there is a deviation of the air gap from the standard value, make the necessary adjustment by adjusting the number of shims.
INSPECTION
l l l l l
Check the surface of the armature for scoring or bluing. Check the surface of the rotor for scoring or bluing. Check the sealing surfaces for cracks, scratches and deformation. Check the front housing for cracks or scoring on the sealing surfaces. Check the compressor shaft for scoring.
\ d
<Vehicles usina R-12 <Vehicles usina R-134al
Z2OPO286
00002628
HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CHECK The high pressure relief valve is a safety feature which releases part of the refrigerant inside the system into the atmosphere when the high pressure level exceeds 3,550 kPa (505 psi): R-12, 3,740 kPa (532 psi): R-134a during air conditioning operation. Once the pressure inside the system has been reduced to 2,400 kPa (341 psi) or lower: R-12, 2,940 kPa (418 psi) or lower: R-134a, the high pressure relief valve .closes, thus allowing continued operation. (1) If a leak is detected at section A, replace the high pressure relief valve. The valve can be used unless there is a leak from that section. (2) If a leak is detected at section B, retighten the valve. If the leak still persists after retightening the valve, replace the packing.
TSB Revision
55-45
A,
00002629
Y16Y1190
THERMOSTAT CHECK (1) Dip the thermostat in engine oil. (2) Check for continuity across terminals (3) and (6) when the engine oil is heated. Standard value: Continuity at approx. 110C (230F) or less at A point No continuity at approx. 155C (311F) or more at B point REVOLUTION PICK UP SENSOR CHECK Measure the resistance between terminals (2) and (5) of the connector. Normal resistance: 405 + 35 Sz when ambient temperature is 20C (68F) If the measurement deviates greatly from the above resistance, replace the revolution pick up sensor assembly.
Y20N003 4
Low pressure kPa (psi) )
Engine speed rpm
ZZOFOl6f
A: Vehicles using R-12 refrigerant 180 kPa (25 psi) Vehicles using R-l 34a refrigerant 150-200 kPa (20-30 psi)
CONTROL VALVE CHECK The control valve detects a low pressure level during the operation of the air conditioning, and adjusts the amount of refrigerant to be bypassed. (1) Operate the air conditioning under a high temperature load condition (when vehicle interior temperature is high). (2) Connect a low pressure gauge to the air compressor. (3) Operate the air conditioning with the engine running at idle. (4) Gradually increase the engine speed while observing the low pressure gauge. If the valve is normal, the low pressure drops slowly as the engine speed increases until a pressure of 180 kPa (25 psi): R-12, 150-200 kPa (20-30 psi): R-134a is reached, at which point the pressure temporarily ceases to drop. Then, the pressure again starts dropping as the engine speed further increases. If the valve is abnormal, the low pressure drops in direct proportion to the increase in engine speed without a temporary leveling off at the 180 kPa (25 psi): R-12, 150-200 kPa (20-30 psi): FL134a pressure level. If the low pressure drops like this, replace the control valve.
TSB Revision
55-46
HEATERS AND MANUAL, - Condenser and Condenser Fan Motor AIR CONDITIONING
CONDENSER AND CONDENSER FAN MOTOR

Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation Refrigerant Discharge and Charging 1i (Refer to P.55-21, 18, 25, 22.) l Generator Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 16 - Generator.)
l
6
9-11 Nm 7-8 ft.lbs. 12 Nm / 8 ft.lbs.
8 23Nm 17 ft.lbs.
10
I Y/
: Piping connection I\; I 7 1 9 Nm 7 ft.lbs.
d
00002630
I f$jj O-ring
t * O-ring X20N0089
Z2OFOO28
Compressor oil: FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS <Vehicles using R-12 refrigerant> SUN PAG 56 <Vehicles using R-134a refrigerant> Removal steps 1. Condenser fan motor assembly 2. Fan 3. Motor assembly 4. Shroud 5. Radiator fan motor assembly (Refer to GROUP 14 - Radiator.) 6. 7. 8. (6, .A+ 9. 10. :i: Insulator installation bolts Discharge pipe A Discharge pipe Condenser Bushings

4Ab DISCHARGE PIPE A / DISCHARGE PIPE REMOVAL
(1) Loosen the flare nut by using two wrenches. (2) Plug the disconnected hose and pipes and the openings of the condenser in order to prevent dust, dirt and other foreign material from entering.
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - Condenser and Condenser Fan Motor
55-47
Rndintnr
+B, CONDENSER REMOVAL Move the radiator toward the engine, and then remove the condenser upward.

.A+ CONDENSER INSTALLATION If a new condenser is used, fill it with the specified amount of compressor oil before installing on the vehicle. Compressor oil: FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS <Vehicles using R-12 refrigerants SUN PAG 56 <Vehicles using R-134a refrigerant> Quantity: 15 cm3 (S fl.02.)
INSPECTION
l l
L
II
Check the condenser fan for crushing or other damage. Check the condensers discharge hose and pipe installation parts for damage or deformation. Check the condenser fan shroud for damage.
CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CHECK (1) Apply battery voltage (+) to terminal (3) and ground (-) terminal (4); at this time, check that the condenser fan motor turns. (2) Apply battery voltage (+) to terminal (1) and ground (-) terminal (2); at this time, check that the condenser fan motor turns.
(4)
t3) t2)
t1 )
220N0068
c
%SB Revision
55-48
HEATERS AND MANUAL - Refrigerant Line AIR CONDITIONING
REFRIGERANT LINE
l
Refrigerant Discharge and Charging (Refer to P55-22, 18, 25, 22.)
f : Piping connection
O-ring
O-ring
X20N0089
Compressor oil: FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS <Vehicles using R-l 2 refrigerant> SUN PAG 56 <Vehicles using R-l 34a refrigerant>
n
9-11 Nm 7-8 ft.lbs:
6
13 Nm 9 ft.lbs
2 13 Nm
23 Nm 17 ft.lb
12-15 Nm 9-11 ft.lbs.
f3-@i (From Oct. 1992 models) Removal steps 1. Discharge hose 2. Discharge pipe :i: 3. Discharge pipe A .B+ 4. Discharge pipe B 5. Discharge pipe C
. _ -
IL
-
00002631
22OFO161
n .A+ 6. Suctionhose B hose ,A+ 7. Suction hose pnq 1. aur;uun hose A n Receiver bracket 8.n---:/er bracket FAN Y i-im;elver .A( 9.. Receiver 4n h..^l Tressure switch 10. Dual-pressure switch
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL - Refrigerant Line AIR CONDITIONING
55-49

dA, DISCHARGE HOSE / DISCHARGE PIPE REMOVAL Loosen the flare nut by using two wrenches.

.A+ RECEIVER / SUCTION HOSE INSTALLATION If suction hose is replaced with new ones, or if a new receiver is installed, pour the specified amount of oil in the compressor before installing these parts in the vehicle. Compressor oil: FREOL S-83 or SUNISO 5GS <Vehicles using R-12 refrigerant> SUN PAG 56 <Vehicles using R-134a refrigerant> Quantity Suction hose: 10 cm3 (.3 fl.oz.) Receiver: 10 cm3 (.3 fl.oz.) .Bd DISCHARGE PIPE B INSTALLATION Connect discharge pipe B first on the receiver side.
INSPECTION
CHECKING DUAL PRESSURE SWITCH For information concerning the checking procedures of the dual pressure switch, refer to On-vehicle Service on P.55-16.
TSB Revision
55-50
HEATERS AND MANUAL, - Ventilators (Instrument Panel) AIR CONDITIONING
VENTILATORS (INSTRUMENT PANEL)

CAUTION: SRS When installing or removing the instrument panel, dont allow any impact or shock to the SRSdiagnosis unit.
15
1-e
6 \\
&Qii 7 .Q, i_.:- ,

/
1
17
37=> f@gv
/ 19 Removal steps 1. Knee protector (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.) 2. Foot shower duct Lap cooler duct 43: Under cover A/C compressor lock controller 65: Side defroster hoses A Duct (Vehicles without air conditioning) i: Instrument panel (Refer to GROUP 52A - Instrument Panel.)
A20F0178
:;:
9. Center duct 10. Air duct (right side) 11: Air duct (left side) 12. Distribution duct (center) 13. Defroster duct 14. Side defroster hoses B 15. Defroster garnishes 16. Photo sensor 17. Center air outlet assembly 18. Side air outlet assembly 19. Distribution duct (foot)
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING - Ventilators (Instrument Panel)
55-51

+A, PHOTO SENSOR REMOVAL Using the trim stick, remove the photo sensor from the defroster garnish.
+B, CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Disengaging the clips (2 positions) of the center air-outlet assembly with a flat. tip screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with the trim stick.
II
Y2OFOo32
TSB Revision
55-52
HEATERS AND MANUAL - Ventilators (Air Inlet and Air Outlet) AIR CONDITIONING
VENTILATORS (AIR INLET AND AIR OUTLET)

13 Nm 9.4 ft.lbs.
00002632
ZZOFOO98
Inlet garnishes removal steps 1. Windshield wiper arm 2. Front deck garnish 3. Inlet garnish (RH) 4. Inlet garnish (LH)
Rear ventilation duct removal steps 5. Rear ventilation duct A 6. Side air dam (side sill) (Refer to GROUP 51 - Aero Parts.) 7. Rear ventilation duct B
TSB Revision
HEATERS AND MANUAL _ Air Conditioning Engine Coolant AIR CONDITIONING Temperature Switch
55-53
L REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

l
AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH cup to 1993 models>

Engine Coolant Draining and Refilling (Refer to GROUP 00 - Maintenance Service.)
Z2OFOO80
/ iJ
1. Air conditioning engine coolant temperature switch
INSPECTION
AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH (ALWAYS-CLOSED TYPE CHECK) (1) immerse the A/C engine coolant temperature switch in oil and heat by a gas stove or similar method so as to increase the oil temperature. (2) Check to be sure that the A/C engine coolant temperature switch is switched OFF when the oil temperature reaches the standard value. Standard value: 112-118C (233-244F) Caution Use engine oil for this test; stir it well while heating, and do not heat more than necessary.
%xTk
22OAO199
TSB Revision
55-54
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING - Troubleshooting
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING

TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
(1) Check that the air ducts and rods are not off. (2) Check that connectors are properly connected and fuses are not blown. (3) Using an analog voltmeter or scan tool, check on-board diagnostic outputs. If failure code is being output, check the failing system and repair as necessary. (Refer to Diagnosis Display Patterns and Codes on P.5571.) (4) If the on-board diagnostic outputs are normal, check for terminal voltage or continuity with a circuit tester according to the troubleshooting chart by symptom. (Refer to control unit terminal voltages on P.55-60-67.) (5) In carrying out the troubleshooting procedure, first look up the Troubleshooting Quick-Reference Chart to know the inspection items and then start the inspection procedure detailed in the following pages. (6) When checking components, be sure to disconnect the connectors first.
L&i 1 I I
~ I
TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK-REFERENCE CHART

Inspection item 1
Air conditioning does not operate when the ignition switch in the ON position.
2
Interior temperature does not raise even the air conditioning is operating (No warm air coming out).
3
Interior temperature does not lower even the air conditioning is operating (No cold air coming out).
4
Blower motor does not rotate.
5
Blower motor does not stop rotating.
6
Air selection damper does not operate.
I 1 I
Fuse Harness (incl. connectors) Magnetic clutch relay
1 2 3
1 4 5
1 4
di I I
I 1 I I I I I I
Condenser fan relay I Resister Condensor fan motor NOTE
(1)
Numbers indicate the order of inspection.
(2)
Use an analog voltmeter or multi-use tester to check the control
\ ii
unit.
TSB Revision

Inspection item 7
Mode selection damper does not operate.
55-55
11
Set temperature returns to 25C (122F) when the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF. 1
8
Condenser fan does not operate when the air conditioning is activated.
9
Air-conditioning graphic display does not function correctly.
10
Air conditioning control panel blinks.
Fuse Harness (incl. connectors) Magnetic clutch relay Magnetic clutch Sensors A/C engine coolant temperature switch <Up to 1993 models> Pressure switch Air conditionia control panel Refrigerant amount Receiver Expansion valve Compressor Thermostat A/C compressor lock controller Air conditioning control unit MFI control unit On-board diagnostic outputs Blend air damper motor and potentiometer Heater link Heater relav Power transistor 310wer motor 310wer motor relay Air selection damper motor Lode selection damper notorlpotentiometer Condenser fan relay Besister Condenser fan motor
NOTE Numbers (1)
I 3
1 2
----I
2 3 T -1
1 I 5 1 I I 4 I ~ 4 5 6
1 ~ -~--~I
2 2 3 4
(2)
indicate the order of inspection. Use an analog voltmeter or multi-use tester to check the control unit.
1 TSB Revision
55-56
No.
Symptom
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING - Troubleshootina

Probable cause Open-circuited power circuit harness Defective control panel Defective air conditioning control unit Defective magnetic clutch relay in relay box Defective magnet clutch Defective thermostat Defective A/C engine coolant temperature switch for air conditioning cut off <Up to 1993 models> Defective dual pressure switch Refrigerant leak Excessive refrigerant Defective A/C compressor lock controller <DOHC> Defective MFI control unit Interior temperature does not raise (N; warm air coming Defective interior temperature sensor input circuit Defective blend air damper potentiometer input circuit Defective blend air damper drive motor Incorrect engagement of blend air damper drive motor lever and blend air damper Sticking blend air damper Open-circuited harness between blend air damper drive motor and air conditioning control unit Defective control panel Defective air conditioning control unit Interior temperature joes not lower zj cold air coming Defective interior temperature sensor input circuit Defective air inlet sensor input circuit Defective air therm0 sensor input circuit Defective blend air damper potentiometer input circuit I ( Remedy / Correct harness. / Replace control panel. Check on-board diagnostic output. Replace. Replace. Replace. Replace.
Air conditioning does not operate when the ignition switch in the ON position.
1
55-73 55-69 55-29
Ref. page
-----I
Replace. Charge refrigerant, correct leak. Discharge refrigerant. Replace A/C compressor lock controller. Replace MFI control unit. Check on-board diagnostic output. Replace defective parts.
I
Replace blend air damper drive motor. Engage correctly.
1 1 I
Correct blend air damper. Correct harness.
~ I
1 Replace control panel. Replace air conditioning control unit. Check on-board diagnostic output. Replace defective parts.
55-73 55-73 :
I I I
55-69
TSB Revision

No. 3 Symptom Interior temperature does not lower (No cold air coming out). Probable cause Defective blend air damper drive motor Incorrect engagement of blend air damper drive motor lever and blend air damper Sticking blend air damper Open-circuited harness between blend air damper drive motor and air conditioning control unit Open-circuited harness between photo sensor and air conditioning control unit Defective air-conditioning compressor relay in the relay box Defective thermostat Defective revolution pick up sensor <DOHC> Refrigerant leak Excessive refrigerant Clogged receiver Clogged expansion valve Defective compressor Defective air inlet sensor Defective magnetic clutch Defective A/C compressor lock controller Defective control panel Defective air conditioning control unit 4 Blower motor does not rotate. Defective blower motor Blown thermal fuse inside air conditioning power transistor Defective blower motor relay Open-circuited harness between fuse and blower motor relay Open-circuited harness between blower motor relay and blower motor Open-circuited harness between air conditioning power transistor and air conditioning control unit Defective control panel Defective air conditioning control unit Remedy Replace blend air damper drive motor. Engage correctly.
55-57
Ref. page 55-75
Correct blend air damper. Correct harness.
Correct harness.
Replace. Replace thermostat. Replace revolution pick up sensor. Charge refrigerant, carrect leak. 5541,42 55-41,42 -
Discharge refrigerant. Replace receiver. Replace expansion valve. Replace compressor. Replace air inlet sensor. Replace. Replace A/C compressor lock controller. Replace control panel. Replace air conditioning control unit. Replace blower motor. Replace air conditioning power transistor. Replace blower motor relay. Correct harness. Correct harness. Correct harness. 55-48 55-38 55-39 55-77 55-41,42 55-74 55-73 55-73 55-35 55-74 55-29
Replace control panel. Replace air conditioning control unit.
55-73 55-73
1 TSB Revision
55-58
Lj
1 1 I 1 I
I I I I
~ 1
d I
1 1 I I I
mode selection motor and control
I I I I I I I
Condenser fan does not operate when the air conditioning is activated.
Defective condenser fan motor relay Defective condenser fan motor
Replace power relay. Replace condenser fan motor.
55-29 55-46
d 1 TSB Revision

No. Symptom Air-conditioning graphic display does not function correctly Probable cause Open-circuited harness between control panel and air conditioning control unit Defective control panel Defective air conditioning control unit 10 Air conditioning control panel blinks. Wet compressor drive belt Insufficient compressor drive belt tension Defective compressor drive belt Defective compressor Defective revolution pick-up sensor Defective air conditioning switch Defective A/C compressor lock controller 1 Defective air conditioning control unit Defective MFI control unit Set temperature returns to 25C (112F) when the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF. Open-circuited power circuit harness Defective air conditioning control unit Remedy Correct harness.
55-59
Ref. page -
i,
Replace control panel. Replace air conditioning control unit. Dry. Check and adjust. Replace. Check and replace. Check and replace. Replace air conditioning control panel. Replace A/C compressor lock controller. Replace air conditioning control unit. Replace MFI control unit. Correct harness. Replace air conditioning control unit.
55-73 55-73
GROUP 11
55-17, 39
55-41,42,45 55-73 55-74 55-73
55-73
1 TSB Revision
55-60
READING THE CIRCUIT AND UNIT CHECK
3.lnsp3Ction
of interior temperature sensor, air inlet sensor, and air therm0 sensor circuits
Air conditioning compressor relay
.-
_ Connectors are keyed by terminal numbers.
t~f73pC?,~t,~ sensor
menno SF2SOr
sensor
z*oFo~s1
Troubleshooting Hints l Diagnosis No. 11. 12 [Fix intenor temperature sensor input signal at 25C (77"FLl No. 13. 14 [FIX air Inlet sensor input signal at 15C (59Fj.l No. 21. 22 [Fix air therm0 sensor input signal at -2C (-35.6"Fj.l * Av conditioning control unit terminal voltages Termtnal No. Slgnal name 1 Air inlet sensor sensor power source Intenor temperature sensor AU then-no sensor Condmon 1 Temperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 kW Normally
ITerminal voltage I2.2-2.8V I
Indicates the on-board diagnostic output code number and system condition when the code is output.
55 60 86
\4.8-5.2V 2.3 - 2.9 V / 2.3 - 2.9 V 1
Temperature at sensor 25C 177oF) (4 kfU

I
67 1
Temperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 ti) when air condttioning IS OFF /
Indicatesthe terminal number to be checked.
indicates the condition at terminal check.
Indicates the specification criteEhere no condition is given in theConditioncolumn,thenormal specification value 1s given.
TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING - Troubleshootina CIRCUIT AND BENCH CHECK

1. Inspection of air conditioning control unit power source circuit
i
Ignition switch (IG2) Fusible link (6) I
i=2
/\
1 /\
1
Junction block (Multi-purpose fuse)
I r
,1\ /r\
/I\ m
Air-conditioning control unit
Troubleshooting Hints
l
Air conditioning control unit terminal voltage Terminal No. 53

108,116 107,115
Signal name Backup power source Air conditioning control unit power source Normally
Condition
Terminal voltage Battery positive voltage Battery positive voltage ov
ignition switch ON
Air conditioning control unit Normally ground
TSB Revision
55-62
2. Inspection of potentiometer circuit
L, 1 ~
Blend air control damper
I ~ I ~ I ~
Damper opfnin,g
Comparator
A/D conversion circuit V
L I \/ \C * \/ ND conversm circuit v
58
;3
i
Air selection damper potentiometer
I I
\ d
ZZOFO157
l
Diagnosis No. 31 (Fix blend air damper at MAX. HOT position, or at MAX. COOL position when it is at MAX. COOL position.) No. 32 (Fix air selection damper at FACE position, or at FACE position when it is at FACE position.) Air conditioning control unit terminal voltages Signal name Blend air damper potentiometer (input)
Mode selection damper potentiometer (input)
Terminal No. 56
Condition Blend air damper at MAX. COOL position Blend air damper at MAX. HOT position
Air selection damper at FACE positidn Air selection damper at DEF. position
Terminal voltage 0.1-0.3 v

4.7-5.0 v 0.1-0.3 v 4.7-5.0 v ov
57
58
r-
Blend air damper and mode Normally selection damper potentiometer t-1 Sensor power source
60
Normally
4.8-5.2 V
TSB Revision
55-63
( I
3. Inspection of compartment-temperature sensor, outside-air-temperature sensor, and air therm0 sensor circuits i.
Air conditioning compressor relay Air conditioning control unit
Sensor power source
Controlled vanable withma circuit
Walled vartable hmetic circuit
A/D conversion
w
f 1 I
60
J;66 s t.
4 2
v
l
Interior temperature sensor
Air .. met-r-no sensor
inlet sensor
YZOFO155
Diagnosis No, 11, 12 [Fix interior temperature sensor input signal at 25C (77F).] No. 13, 14 [Fix air inlet sensor input signal at 15C (59F).] No. 21, 22 [Fix air therm0 sensor input signal at -2C (-35.6F).] Air conditioning control unit terminal voltages Signal name Air inlet sensor Sensor power source Interior temperature sensor Air therm0 sensor I . Condition / Terminal voltage 1 I I
) Terminal No. (
I 55 1 60
66 67
1 Temperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 Wz) / 2.2-2.8 V Normally Temperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 kQ) Temperature at sensor 25C (77F) (4 Wz) when air conditioning is OFF 4.8-5.2 V 2.3-2.9 V 2.3-2.9 V
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING - Troubleshootinn

4. Inspection of engine coolant temperature sensor and photo sensor circuits
<Engine coolant temperature sensor>

Airconditioning control panel A
Mcde command circuit water temperature Damper Clpelg
<Photo sensor
Solar radiation ccmpensatina circuit # ND conversion
Each sensor XL
Fin speed arithmetic circuit t ND conversion i tar drive wcuit
Air control panel .L y
Potentiometer 4 1 Comparator I+* dD;~~~tor
Air conditioning + power transistor
69 +
22OFOl50
Z2OFO149
00002634
l
Air conditioning control unit terminal voltages Terminal No. Signal name Photo sensor (-) Condition llluminance 100,000 lux or more llluminance less than 0 lux 70 59 Photo sensor (+) Engine coolant temperature sensor (+) Normally Switch OFF [Engine coolant temperature less than 50C (122F)] Switch ON [Engine coolant temperature 50C (122F) or higher] Terminal voltage -0.1 to -0.2 v OV ov Battery positive voltage 0V
69
TSB Revision

5. Inspection of air conditioning compressor lock controller circuit I
Air conditioning control unit Revolution pickup sensor
55-65
j68
j61
j116-
IG2
!-$$;(eecontrol
Condenser fan motor relay (LO) I
2OFO177
NC color monitor
Operation
Refer to P.55-12 except the warning indicator shown in the illustration.
Blinking
22OFOO26
Refer to P.5512.
TSB Revision
55-66
6. Inspection of blend air damper, mode selection damper, air selection damper control motor circuits
<Blend air damper control motor>

Air conditioning
I I I 1
Air inlet sensor
I 1 I I
Blend air damper control motor Z2OFO152
I I
<Mode selection damper control motor>
Air conditioning control panel
Mode selection dampercontrol motor

00002635
22OFO151
TSB Revision

<Air selection damper control motor>
Airconditioning control unit
55-67
Air selection damper control motor
l
Air conditioning control unit terminal voltages

Terminal No. 102 Signal name Airselection damper control motor (-) Condition Inside-air switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to inside air position.) Outside-air switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to outside air position.) Terminal voltage 0.5 v
1ov
i L
103
Mode selection damper control motor l-1
FACE switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to FACE position.) DEF. switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to DEE position.)
0.5 v
tov
104
Air selector damper control motor (+)
Inside-air switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after inside air has been activated.) Outside-air switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after outside air has been activated.)
1ov
0.5 v
105
Blend air damper control motor (+)
Temperature is set at 17C (62.6F). (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to MAXCOOL position.) Temperature is set at 32.5C (90.5F). (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to MAX. HOT position.)
0.5 v
1ov
111
Blend air damper control motor (-)
Temperature is set at 17C (62.6F). (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to MAX. COOL position.) Temperature is set at 32.5% (90.5F). (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to MAX. HOT position.)
iov
0.5 v
112
Mode selection damper control motor (+I
/ LJ
FACE switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to FACE position.) DEF. switch ON (Output turns OFF 40 seconds after the damper moved to DEE position.)
1ov
0.5 v
TSB Revision
55-68
7. Inspection of air conditioning power transistor and blower motor relay circuits
Ignition switch IG;!
Blower motor relay Air conditioning control unit IA/D conversion m Solar >, + radiation sensor
1
JB~I motor UY &I :::;;:~:g .t Z1 -7 1 Blowe;x IHI _ _ _ _ -K LV v I!3 I ix 0

t%LL 6 1 I 8 9 1: r---1 1 ) cmsatinafllCUit 1
r, TA 3B-W Blower motor HI relay cup to 1995 models>
f $ingdi7 power . . lizil

l-l Power transistor drive circuit I I
4-I
ZZOFO158
l
Air conditioning control unit terminal voltages Signal name Air conditioning power transistor collector Condition Switch is turned OFF. Switch is placed in LO. Switch is placed in HI. Terminal voltage Battery positive voltage Approx. 7 V OV ov Approx. 1.3 V Approx. 1.2 V 1.5 V or less Battery positive voltage
Terminal No. 51
52
Air conditioning power transistor base
Blower switch is turned OFF. Blower switch is placed in LO. Blower switch is placed in HI.
101
Blower motor HI relay <Up to 1995 models>
Fan switch HI is ON. Fan switch in ME, LO, or OFF.
TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING - Ttwblhooting

When using the MUT
55-69
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC CHECKING

The following method can be used for checking the diagnosis. When using the scan tool [Multi-use tester (MUT) <Up to 1993 models> or MUT-II <All models>] (1) Connect the scan tool to the data link connector to read out the diagnostic trouble codes. On vehicles up to 1993 model, connect the scan tool using the attached adaptor harnessCaution Turn off the ignition switch beforehand whenever the scan tool is connected or disconnected. (2) Repair the faulty spots by referring to diagnostic chart. (3) Erase the failure code. (4) Check the system again.
When using the MUT-II <lJo to 1993 models>
<From 1994 models>
00002636
Y2OFO164
With voltmeter
meter _---.
Y2OFO107 I-Ground tya
When using the voltmeter <Up to 1993 models> (1) Connect an analog voltmeter across the diagnostic output terminal (7) and ground terminal (6) of the data link connector. (2) Turn ON the ignition switch. (3) According to the voltmeter pointer deflection, read the on-board diagnostic pattern. (4) Referring to the diagnostic chart, repair the faulty spot. (5) Erase the failure code by the following procedure. 1) Turn OFF the ignition switch. 2) Disconnect the battery cable from a battery terminal and leave it disconnected for 10 seconds or more; then, reconnect the cable. 3) Turn ON the ignition switch and read the diagnostic trouble code to check that the correct code is being output.
Diagnostic output ,$$!l$!?
TSB Revision

<From 1994 models> Connect a voltmeter to the diagnostic output terminal and the ground terminal of the data link connector using the special tool. Read out the diagnostic trouble code by observing the voltmeter pointer deflection. I I d
MBgY-
VPOFOl63
TSB Revision

SERVICE DATA
Item no. 11 Inspection point Interior temperature sensor Method Measure resistance of sensor when interior temperature is 25C (77F). Measure voltage across terminal 16 of air conditioning control unit and ground wheninteriortemperatureis 25C (77F). Normal condition Approx. 4 k.Q Probable cause Detective interior temperature sensor Open-circuited harness between interior temperature sensor and air conditioning control unit Poor connection of air conditioning control unit connector or defective air conditioning control unit 13 Air inlet sensor Measure resistance of sensor when ambient temperature is 25C (77F). Measurevoltageacrossterminal (5) of air conditioning control unit and around when ambient temperature is 25C (77F) Approx. 4 kS2 Defective air inlet sensor
55-71
Remedy Replaceinteriortemperature sensor. Correct harness.
In approx. 2.3-2.9 V range
Correct connector connection or replace air conditioning control unit. Replace air inlet sensor.
Open-circuited harness betweenairinletsensorandair conditioning control unit Poor connection of airconditioning control unit connector or defective air conditioning control unit
Correct harness.
Correct connector connection or replace air conditioning control unit. Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
15
Measure resistance of sensor when engine coolant temperature is 22.5 to 30.5% (57.6 to 86.9F) Measurevoltageacrossterminal (5) of air conditioning control unit and ground when engine coolant temperature is 22.5 to 30.5% (57.6 to 86.9F).
Conductive
Defective engine coolant temperature sensor
Approx. 12 V
Open-circuited harness between engine coolant temperature sensor and air conditioning control unit Poor connection of air conditioning control unit connector or defective air conditioning control unit
Correct harness.
Correct connector connection or replace air conditioning control unit Replace air therm0 sensor Correct harness.
7-
21
Air therm0 sensor
Measure resistance of sensor when sensors sensing temperatureis25%(77F). Measurevoltageacrossterminal 17 of air conditioning control unit and ground whensensorssensingtemIperature is 25C (77F).
Approx. 4 w2
Defective air therm0 sensor
Open-circuited harness between air therm0 sensor and air conditioning control unit Poor connection of air conditioning control unit connector or defective air conditioning control unit Defective blend air damper potentiometer
Correct connector connection or replace air conditioning control unit. Replace blend airdamper potentiometer. Correct harness.
31
air Blend damper potentiometer
Refer to P.55-75.
IMeasure voltage across 1terminal (5)of air conditionIing control unit and ground 1when potentiometer is in IMAX.
Open-circuited harness between blend air damper potentiometer and air conditioning control unit Poor connection of air conditioning control unit connector or defective air conditioning control unit
COOL position. Correct connector connection or replace air conditioning control unit. Replace mode selection damper potentiometer. Correct harness.
33
Mode selection damper potentiometer
IRefer
to P.55-75. In approx. 0.1-0.3 V range
Defective mode selection damper potentiometer Open-circuited harness between mode selection damper potentiometer and air conditioning control Poor connection of air conditioning control unit connector or defective air conditioning control unit
IMeasure voltage across terIminal (5) of air conditioning ,control unit and ground ,when potentiometer is in IFACE
position. Correct connector connection or replace air conditioning control unit.
TSB Revision

DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY PATTERNS AND CODES
Short-circuited interior temperature sen-
(68F) is detected
s12Ao104
Open-circuited air therm0 sensor 21 nn Short-circuited air therm0 sensor 22 -rlrLMShort-circuited and open-circuited blend air damper potentiometer 31 -J-vlnL Short-circuited and open-circuited mode selection damper potentiometer 32 n17n
u12A0107
Condition in which -2C (-35.6 F) is detected
MAX. HOT (or MAX. COOL when it is at MAX. COOL) DEF. (or FACE when it is at FACE)
Defective blend air damper motor 41 42 UUI nn

012Ao105
nnnn Defective mode selection damper motor
NOTE: (1) If two or more abnormal conditions occur at the same time, the code numbers are alternately displayed, in order, repeatedly. (2) The nature of the malfunction is entered and stored in the memory from the time the malfunction occurs until the ignition switch is next turned to OFF.
1 TSf3 Revision
FULL AUTO AIR Safety Precautions / On-vehicle Service / A/C Control CONDITIONING - Panel, A/C Contorl Unit
55-73
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Same as those given in HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING. (Refer to P.5514.)
I, ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Same as those given in HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING. (Refer to P.5516.)
AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL PANEL, AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT

I 1 r
Pre-removal and Post-installation Operation l Floor Console Removal and Installation (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.)
CAUTION: SRS When installing or removing the floor console, dont allow any impact or shock to the SRS diagnosis unit.
22OFOO69
Removal steps
1. Center air outlet assembly 2. Air conditioning control panel 3. Air conditioning control unit
\ \

AA, CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Disengaging the clips (2 positions) of the center air outlet assembly with a flat tip screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with a plastic trim stick.
Clip
:/
Y2OFOO32 1
1 TSB Revision
55-74
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING
Power Transistor, Air Conditioning - Compressor Lock Controller
POWER TRANSISTOR, AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR LOCK CONTROLLER

t20F0073
Power transistor removal steps 1. Stopper 2. Glove box outer case assembly 3. Power transistor
A/C compressor lock controller removal steps 4. Under cover 5. A/C compressor lock controller
TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING - Damper Control Motor Assembly
55-75
DAMPER CONTROL MOTOR ASSEMBLY
allow any impact or shock to the SRS diagnosis
zPOFOO77
Air selection damper motor assembly removal steps 1. Stopper 2. Glove box outer case 3. Air selection damper motor assembly Blend air damper motor assembly removal steps 4. Floor console (Refer to GROUP 52A - Floor Console.) 5. Air conditioning control unit 6. Center outlet assembly
7. Air conditioning control panel 8. Air conditioning control unit 9. Blend air damper motor assembly Mode selection damper motor assembly removal steps 10. Knee protector 11. Side console cover 12. Shower duct and lap cooler duct 13. Mode selection damper motor assembly

+A, CENTER AIR OUTLET ASSEMBLY REMOVAL Disengaging the clips (2 positions) of the center air outlet assembly with a fiat tip screwdriver, remove the center air outlet assembly with a plastic trim tool.
TSB Revision
55-76
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING - Damper Control Motor Assembly
INSPECTION
AIR SELECTION DAMPER MOTOR ASSEMBLY CHECK Check that the motor rotates when battery voltage is applied to the connector on the motor assembly side. Check also that the motor rotates in the backward direction when polarity is changed. Caution 1. Cut off the voltage when the damper is in the RECIRCULATION or FRESH position. 2. Cut off the voltage if the motor does not turn when battery voltage is applied. BLEND AIR DAMPER MOTOR CHECK Check that the motor rotates when battery voltage is applied across terminals (1) and (3) of motor assembly side connector. Check also that the motor turns in the backward direction when polarity is changed. Caution 1. Cut off the voltage when the damper is in the MAX. HOT or MAX. COOL position. 2. Cut off the voltage if the motor does not turn when battery voltage is applied. BLEND AIR DAMPER POTENTIOMETER CHECK Connect a circuit tester across terminals (5) and (6) of the motor assembly connector and check that resistance gradually changes as the damper is moved from MAX. HOT to MAX. COOL position. Standard value MAX. HOT: Approx. 0.2. m MAX. COOL: Approx. 4.8 kQ
MODE SELECTION DAMPER MOTOR CHECK Check that the motor turns when battery voltage is applied across terminals (1) and (3) of the motor assembly connector. Check also that the motor turns in the backward direction when polarity is changed. Caution 1. Cut off the voltage when the damper is in the DEF. or FACE position. 2. Cut off the voltage if the motor does not turn when battery voltage is applied. MODE SELECTION DAMPER POTENTIOMETER CHECK Connect a circuit tester across terminals (5) and (6) of the motor assembly connector and check that resistance gradualty changes as the damper is moved from DEF. to FACE position. Standard value DEF. position: Approx. 0.2 ksz FACE position: Approx. 4.8 k0
TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING - Sensors
55-77
t I
SENSORS
I
I I I
22OFOO53
I
8
1. Interior temperature sensor Photo sensor removal steps 2. Stopper 3. Glove box outer case 4. Photo sensor connector connection 5. Photo sensor
00002638
ZZOFOO15
Engine coolant temperature sensor removal steps 2. Stopper ;. ;;;;e box outer case assembly
I
7: Engine coolant temperature sensor Air inlet sensor removal steps 2. Stopper 3. Glove box outer case assembly 8. Air inlet sensor

ture sensor
(A, INTERIOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL Using the trim stick, remove the interior temperature sensor from the headlining.
ZZOPO164
TSB Revision
55-78
FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING - Sensors

+B, PHOTO SENSOR REMOVAL Using a trim stick, remove the photo sensor from the defroster garnishes.
Photo sensor
INSPECTION
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK (1) Dip the engine coolant temperature sensor in hot water and, using a stove, etc., raise the engine coolant temperature. (2) Check that the engine coolant temperature sensor is conductive when the engine coolant temperature reaches the specified temperature. Standard value: 26.5 + 4C (79.7 f 7.2F) AIR INLET SENSOR CHECK The condition can be considered normal if the resistances are measured within the ranges of 3.98-4.12 kilohms and 2.21-2.35 kilohms, respectively, when the air inlet sensor is submerged in warm water of 25C (77F) and 40C (104F) for one minute or longer each. NOTE The relationship between the air inlet and the resistance values is as shown below.
Ambient temperature C (F) Resistancevalue (reference) kQ -10 (14) 19.06 11.71 7.45 4.89 (Z, 4.00 3.30 2.28
1 TSB Revision
FULL AUTO AIR Compressor, Condenser, Condenser Fan Motor, Refrigerant CONDITIONING - Line and A/C Engine Coolant Temperature Switch
55-79
COMPRESSOR, CONDENSER, CONDENSER FAN MOTOR, REFRIGERANT LINE AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE COOLANT L/ TEMPERATURE SWITCH <Up to 1993 models>
The service procedures are the same as those for manual air conditioning except for those parts described below on turbocharged vehicles. 4
Compressor, condenser and condenser fan motor, refrigerant line removal steps
.Bd 1. Air hose B .B+ 2. Air pipe A/C engine coolant temperature switch removal steps <Up to 1993 models>
3. Air hose A .A+ 4. Air intake hose A ,A+ 5. Air intake hose B
NOTE Torque hose clamps to 4 Nm (2.9 klbs.).
TSB Revision
55-80
Compressor, Condenser, Condenser Fan Motor, Refrigerant FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING - Line and A/C Engine Coolant Temperature Switch / Other Parts
-B--4
Air intake hose C

.A+ AIR INTAKE HOSE B / AIR INTAKE HOSE A INSTALLATION Align the cutouts in air intake hose A indicated by arrows with the A markings on air intake hoses B and C and insert hoses B and C all the way into hose A. Insert the other end of air intake hose B all the way into turbocharger side.
Air intake hose A
- Air intake hose B

ZOSFOOZ:
.B+AIR PIPE / AIR HOSE B INSTALLATION When installing the air hoses, make sure that the alignment marks at places indicated by arrows are properly aligned. Insert each air hose until it hits the root of step or it bottoms.
Air hose 6 ?fl
I
air
Caution Be careful not to allow any foreign matter to get into
the hoses, pipes, or the charge air cooler itself.
Ugnment marks Hose end: Paint mark

Pipe end: Protrusion
VOSFOO28
OTHER PARTS
Service procedures for other parts are the same as those in HEATERS AND MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING. Part name Heater Unit Blower Motor Assembly
Evaporator-Removal and Installation
Ref. page P.5534 P.55-35

P.55-37
Part name Evaporator - Disassembly and Reassembly Compressor- Disassembly and Reassembly Ventilators
Ref. page
P.5538
P.55-41, 42 P.55-50
1 TSB Revision
f
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A
b ABS POWER RELAY, Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _. . . . 35-82-l RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-110-t SIGNAL, On-vehicle inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-176,277-l ACCELERATOR CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4-l SWITCH <Automatic Transaxle> ............................... 23-51 -I <Engine and Emission Control> ........................ 17-4-l ACTIVE AERO SYSTEM, Check ......................... 51-7-l ACTIVE EXHAUST CONTROL UNIT, On-vehicle Inspection .......... 13A-173,274-l SYSTEM ............................................ 15-40-I AERO PARTS ........................................ 51-19-l AIR BAG ............ .............................. 528-74-I MODULE ...................................... 52&82,87-l AIR CLEANER ......................................... 15-9-l ELEMENT, Maintenance .............................. 00-45-I AIR CONDITIONING ................................... 55-3-l <Full Auto A/C> ..................................... 55-54-l <Manual A/C> ....................................... 55-6-l COMPRESSOR <Full Auto A/C> ..................................... 55-79-l <Manual A/C> ...................................... 55-39-i COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT, Adjustment ............... 55-18-l CONTROL PANEL ................................... 55-73-i CONTROL UNIT ..................................... 55-73-l ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH Engine Cooling ..................................... 14-l 3-l <Full Auto A/C> ..................................... 55-79-l <Manual A/C> ...................................... 55-53-l POWER RELAY ..................................... 55-29-l POWER TRANSISTOR ............................... 55-74-l SWITCH ............................................ 55-33-l Emission Control .................................... 17-65-l On-vehicle tnspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-123,236-l ANTENNA Motor ............................................ 54-l 88-11 FEEDER CABLE ................................... 54-188-11 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM .................... Refer to ABS ASSIST LINK <AWD> .................................. 34-35-l AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ............................. 23-64-l Maintenance ......................................... 00-49-l AXLE Rear cAWD> ............................................ 27-6-l <FWD> ............................................ 27-2-l HUB, Rear <MID> .................................... 27-4-l SHAFT <AWD> ...................................... 27-l 6-l
DISC ................. ......................... 35-93.103-I Front, Check .................................... ...35-70-l Rear, Check ........................................ 35-73-l FLUID LEVEL SENSOR, Check ........................ 35-64-t HOSES, Maintenance ................................. 00-52-I LINE ................................................ 35-91-t LINING .............................................. 35-74-l PAD Disc, Front ......................................... 35-66-l Disc, Rear .......................................... 35-71-l PEDAL ............................................. 35-84-l Check and Adjustment ............................... 35-63-l BUMPER Front ....... ........................................ 51-8-l Rear ............................................... 51-13-l
C
CAMSHAFT OIL SEALS .......................................... 11-21-l POSITION SENSOR, On-vehicle Inspection ...... 13A-103,225-l CATALYTIC CONVERTER .............................. 17-71 -I <Non Turbo> ....................................... 15-30-l <Turbo> ........................................... 15-33-l CD AUTO CHANGER ................................ 54-191-11 CENTER PILLAR GLASS .............................. 42-33-l CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM ................... 42-49-l CHARGE AIR COOLER ................................ 15-11-l CHARGING SYSTEM .................................. 16-2-11 CIGARETTE LIGHTER .............................. 54-123-11 CLOCK SPRING, SRS .............................. 528-74-I CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Adjustment ....................................... 13A-57-l On-vehicle Inspection ......................... 13A-101,223-l CLUTCH BOOSTER OPERATING, Check cAWD> ................. 21-6-l CONTROL .......................................... 21-10-l COVER ............................................. 21-20-l DISC ..... .......................................... 21-20-l MASTER CYLINDER ................................. 21-14-l PEDAL .............................................. 21-8-l Check and Adjustment ................................ 21-5-l RELEASE CYLINDER ................................ 21-16-l VACUUM LINE <AWD> ............................... 21-18-l COLUMN SWITCH .................................. 54-112-11 COMBINATION GAUGES ............................. 54-33-11 COMBINATION LIGHT ............................... 54-106-11 COMBINATION METERS ............................. 54-31-11 COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY, On-vehicle lnsoection ........................... 13A-123,236-l CONDENSER <Full Auto A/C> ....... .......... 55-79-l <Manual Al& ........ .......... 55-46-l FAN MOTOR <Full Auto A/C> ....... ................ 55-79-l <Manual A/C> ........ ................ 55-46-l CONTROL CABLE, AI-T .......... ................ 23-55-l CONTROLLER, Belt Lock .......... ................ 55-32-l CONTROL UNIT Active Exhaust, On-vehicle Inspection ........... 13A-173,274-l ECS ..................... ........................ 338-20-I Electronic CABS> .................................. 35-119-l CONTROL VALVE .................................... ,378-g-l Fuel Tank Pressure .................................. 13F-6-I Inspection .......................................... 17-65-l CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL .... ................................ 11-25-l POSITION SENSOR, On-vehicle Inspection ...... 13A-107,227-l REAR OIL SEAL ..................................... 11-26-l
, L
B
BALL JOINT SEALS, Maintenance ...................... 00-52-I BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR On-vehicle Inspection .......................... 13A-91,217-l BASIC IDLE SPEED, Adjustment ...................... 13A-55-l BATTERY ........................ .................... 54-3-11 Discharged, Remedy ................................ 35-82-l BELT LOCK CONTROLLER ........................ 55-32,74-l BLOWER ............................................ 55-35-l BOOSTER, Clutch <AWD> .............................. 21-6-l BOOST METER, On-vehicle Inspection ........... 13A-171,273-l BRAKE Parking ............................................. 36-8-l BOOSTER .......................................... 35-87-l Operating Check .................................... 35-64-l
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
COOLANT Maintenance ....................................... 00-51 -I Replacement ........................................ 14-4-l COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE UNIT .............. 14-13-l COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Engine and Emission Control ......................... 17-65-l Engine Cooling ..................................... 14-l 3-l On-vehicle Inspection .......................... 13A-93,219-l HOOD .............................................. 42-18-l MOUNTING .......................................... 32-3-l OIL, Maintenance .................................... 00-47-l OIL COOLER ........................................ 11-36-l OIL FILTER, Maintenance ............................. 00-48-I ROLL STOPPER ...................................... 32-6-l SPEED ADJUSTING SCREW, Adjustment ............. 13A-59-l EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER .......................................... 17-65-l CONTROL SYSTEM ................................. 17-57-l Check for Leaks and Clogging ........................ 00-46-I PURGE SOLENOID .................................. 17-64-l On-vehicle Inspection ......................... 13A-162,268-l EVAPORATOR ........................................ 55-37-l EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM ................ 17-66-l MANIFOLD <Non Turbo> ....................................... 15-26-l <Turbo> ........................................ ...15-28-l PIPE <Non Turbo> ....................................... 15-30-I <Turbo> ........................................ ...15-33-l SYSTEM Active .......................................... ...15-40-l Maintenance ....................................... 00-60-I
CROSSMEMBER ...................................... 32-8-l CRUISE CONTROL ...................................... 17-l CABLE, Check and Adjustment ........................ 17-31-l SYSTEM ............................................ 17-38-l Check .......................................... ...17-32-l CURB IDLE SPEED, Check ............................ 11-11-l CYLINDER HEAD GASKET ............................ 11-28-l
D
DAMPER CONTROL MOTOR .......................... 55-75-l DAMPING FORCE CHANGEOVER ACTUATOR ........ 338-19-I DASHPOT, Check And Adjustment ...................... 11-13-l DEFOGGER Rear Window ..................................... 54-192-11 RELAY ............................................ 54-204-11 SWITCH, Rear Window ............................. 54-203-11 DIFFERENTIAL Case, Limited Slip eAWD> ........................... 27-40-l Limited Slip, Check cAWD> .......................... 27-15-l CARRIER <AWD> .................................... 27-25-l DISC BRAKE Front ........................................... ...35-93-l Rear..............................................35-103- I PADS, Maintenance .................................. 00-52-I DOOR ............................................... 42-41-l Adjustment ......................................... 42-12-l GLASS ............................................. 42-43-l HANDLE ............................................. 42-47-l INSIDE HANDLE, Play Check .......................... 42-16-l LATCH .............................................. 42-47-l MIRROR ............................................ 51-31-l REGULATOR.. ................................... ...42-43-l TRIM ............................................ ...42-42-l WATERPROOF FILM ................................. 42-42-l WINDGW GLASS, Adjustment ......................... 42-12-l DRIP LINE WEATHERSTRIP ........................... 42-63-l DRIVE BELT Compressor, Adjustment ............................. 55-18-l Maintenance ....................................... 00-47-I Tension, Adjustment .................................. 11-7-l TensionCheck .................................. ...37A-9-l DRIVE SHAFT Front .............................................. 26-12-l Rear...............................................27-19-I BOOTS, Maintenance ................................. 00-52-I OIL SEALS, Replacement&T> ....................... 23-53-l <M/T AWD> ........................................ 22-15-l <M/T FWD> ......................................... 22-5-l
F
FAN MOTOR Condenser <Full Auto A/C> ..................................... 55-79-l <Manual A/C> ...................................... 55-46-l RELAY, On-vehicle Inspection ................... 13A-129,240-l FEEDER CABLE, Antenna ........................... 54-188-11 FENDER ............................................. 42-24-l FILLER TUBE CAP, Fuel Tank, Check .................... 17-65-l FLOOR CONSOLE .................................. 52A-10-I FLOOR PAN, Check ................................... 42-16-l FOG LIGHT ........................................ 54-105-11 SWITCH .......................................... 54-109-11 FRONT IMPACT SENSORS .......................... 528-68-I FUEL FILLER DOOR, Adjustment ............................ 42-12-l FILTER .. :. ....................................... .13F-10-I GAUGE UNIT ........................................ 13F-6-I HOSES, Maintenance ................................. 00-45-I LINE ................................................ 13F-8-I PRESSURE SOLENOID, On-vehicle Inspection . _ . 13A-166,270-l PRESSURE TEST, On-vehicle Inspection ........ 13A-180,279-l PUMP .............................................. 13F-6-I On-vehicle Inspection .......................... 13A-72,200-l PUMP CIRCUIT RESISTOR, On-vehicle Inspection . 13A-84,211-l PUMP OPERATION CHECK, On-vehicle Inspection 13A-179,279-l PUMP RELAY N0.2, On-vehicle Inspection ........ 13A-84,211-l SYSTEM, Maintenance ............................... 00-45-I FUEL TANK .......................................... 13F-3-I FILLER DOOR ... .................................... 42-23-l FILLER TUBE CAP, Check ............................ 17-65-l PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE ........................ 13F-6-I Inspection .......................................... 17-65-l FULL AUTO AIR CONDITIONING ....................... 55-54-f
E
ECS On-vehicle Inspection .............................. .338-11-l CONTROL UNIT ................................... 338-20-I INDICATOR LIGHT ................................. 338-19-I SWITCH .......................................... 338-18-I EGR SOLENOID ......................................... :17-70-l On-vehicle Inspection . , ....................... 13A-164,269-l SYSTEM, Inspection .................................. 17-67-l TEMPERATURE SENSOR ............................ 17-68-l On-vehicle Inspection ......................... 13A-135,246-l VALVE .............................................. 17-68-l VALVE CONTROL VACUUM, Check .................... 17-67-l ELECTRICAL LOAD SWITCH, On-vehicle Inspection 13A-127,238-l ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT <ABS> ................. 35-119-l ENGINE .............................................. 11-18-l CONTROL ........................................... 17-5-l
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
FUNCTION, Check (4WS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378-5-l <Turbo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
15-15-l
K
GARNISHES . . . . . . . . . . . GENERATOR . . . . . . . GLASS Center Pillar . . . . . . . . . . . . Door........................ Door Window, Adjustment . . . . Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . Quarter Window . . . . . . Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSENSOR.................... <AWD-ABS> . . . . . . , . . .................... ...51-15-l ..................... 16-12-11 ...................... 42-33-l ...................... 42-43-l ...................... 42-12-l ...................... 42-38-l ...................... 42-34-l ...................... 42-26-l .................... 338-18-I ..................... 35-117-l KEY INTERLOCK MECHANISM ........................ 23-51-l KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ............................ 42-52-l KICKDOWN SERVO ................................... 23-47-l KNOCK SENSOR .................................. 13A-289-I On-vehicle Inspection ......................... 13A-125,237-l KNUCKLE ............................................. 26-6-l
L
LASH ADJUSTERS Check ............................................. 11-15-l Replacement ....................................... 11-17-l LATCH, Door ......................................... 42-47-l LEFT MEMBER ........................................ 32-8-l LEVER, Shift cAWD> ............................................ 22-16-l <FWD> ............................................. 22-8-l LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ............................. 54-106-11 LIFTGATE ............................................ 42-20-I Adjustment ......................................... 42-11-l GLASS ....... ...................................... 42-38-l LIGHT Indicator, ECS .................................... 33B-19-l Fog ............................................. 54-105-11 Front Combination ................................. 54-106-11 High Mounted Stop ................................ 54-107-11 License Plate ..................................... 54-106-k Rear Combination ................................. 54-106-11 Switch, Stop ...................................... 338-19-I LIGHTING SYSTEM .................................. 54-35-11 LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL Check cAWD> ...................................... 27-15-l Rear Axle, Oil Change, Maintenance ................... 00-52-l CASE <AWD> ... .................................... 27-40-l LOOSE PANEL ....................................... 42-25-l LOWER ARM Front Suspension ................................. 33A-10-I Rear Suspension <AWD> ........................................... 34-29-l <FWD> ............................................ 34-9-l
H
HAZARD SWITCH .................................. 54-110-11 HEADLIGHT ........................................ 54-103-11 HEADLINING ....................................... 52A-16-l HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR On-vehicle Inspection ......................... 13A-137,247-l HEATER .............................................. 55-3-l HEATER CONTROL ................................... 55-30-I HEATERUNIT.. .................................... ..55-34- 1 HIGH MOUNTED STOP LIGHT ....................... 54-107-11 HOOD ............................................... 42-18-l Adjustment ......................................... 42-11 -I HORN ............................................. 54-115-11 RELAY ............................................ 54-118-11 SWITCH .......................................... 54-118-11 HYDRAULIC UNIT CABS>. ............................ 35-110-I Check ............................................. 35-76-l
IDLE AIR CONTROL MOTOR (Stepper Motor Type) On-vehicle Inspection ......................... 13A-153,263-l IDLE MIXTURE, Check ................................ 11-12-l IDLE SPEED Basic, Adjustment ................................. 13A-55-l Curb, Check ........................................ 11-11-l IGNITION CABLES, Maintenance ................................ 00-46-l COIL, On-vehicle Inspection .................... 13A-158,264-l POWER TRANSISTOR, On-vehicle Inspection .... 13A-158,264-l SWITCH ............................................ 54-6-11 SWITCH-IG, On-vehicle Inspection ............... 13A-65,193-l SWITCH-ST, On-vehicle Inspection <AIT> ...................................... 13A-113,230-l <MIT> ...................................... 13A-112,229-l SYSTEM .......... ................................. 16-45-11 TIMING, Check ....................................... 199-I IMPACT SENSORS, Front ............................ 528-68-I INDUCTION CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR On-vehicle Inspection ......................... 13A-133,242-l INJECTOR ..................... ................... 13A-286-l On-vehicle Inspection ......................... 13A-144,257-l INSTRUMENT PANEL ...... ........................... 52A-5-l INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR ........................ 17-65-l On-vehicle Inspection .......................... 13A-88,215-l CHARGE PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM, Check ....... 15-7-l INTAKE MANIFOLD ................................... 15-17-l PLENUM <Non Turbo> .......... ............................. 15-13-l
M
MAIN MUFFLER <Non Turbo> ....................................... 15-30-l <Turbo> . ......................................... 15-33-l MANUAL AIRCONDITIONING ........................... 55-6-l MANUAL TRANSAXLE <AWD> . ........................................... 22-13-l <FWD> ............................................. 22-2-l Maintenance ....................................... 00-48-I MASTER CYLINDER .................................. 35-87-l Clutch .......................................... ...21-14-l MIRROR, Door ........................................ 51-31-l MIXTURE CONTROL (MFI) System ..................... 17-70-l MOTOR ANTENNA .................................. 54-188-11 MOTOR RELAY CABS>, Check ......................... 35-83-l MOULDINGS ......................................... 51-15-l MUFFLER, Main <Non Turbo> ............................... .:. ..... 15-30-l <Turbo> ........................................ ...15-33-l MUFFLER MODE CHANGEOVER SWITCH On-vehicle Inspection ......................... 13A-131,241-l
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
0
OIL Transmission, Replacement <AWD>. ....................................... <FWD>. ....................................... COOLER Engine .......................................... Transaxle ....................................... COOLER HOSES, Transaxle ....................... COOLER TUBES, Transaxle ........................ FILTER, Engine, Maintenance ....................... LEVEL, Gear, Check cAWD> ....................... LEVEL, Transmission, Check <AWD> ......................................... <FWD> ......................................... PAN ............................................. PRESSURE SWITCH, Power Steering, Check ........ SCREEN ......................................... OPTICAL HORN LENS .............................
. 22-l 5-l
. 22-4-l
. 11-36-l
. . . .. . 23-62-l 23-62-l 23-62-l 00-48-l 27-l 4-l
Leak Repair Procedure .............................. 55-28-l LINE <Full Auto A/C> ..................................... 55-79-l <ManualAJC> ................................... ...55-48-l REGULATOR, Door ................................... 42-43-l RELEASE CYLINDER, Clutch ........................... 21-16-l RESISTOR ........................................... 55-32-l RHEOSTAT ........................................ 54-110-11 RlGHTMEMBER.......................................32-8I
\ L)
S
SEAT Front ............................................ 52A-17-l Rear .............................................. 52A-25-l SEAT BELT ......................................... 52A-26-l SELECTOR LEVER ................................... 23-59-l Operation Check .................................... 23-51 -I SENSOR Barometric Pressure .............................. Refer to B Brake Fluid Level, Check ............................. 35-64-l Camshaft Position ................................ Refer to C Crankshaft Position ............................... Refer to C EGR Temperature ................................ Refer to E Engine Coolant Temperature ....................... Refer to E Frontlmpact ...................................... 528-68-I G <ACTIVE ECS> .................................. 338-l 8-l <AWD-ABS> ..................................... 35-117-l Heated Oxygen .................................. Refer to H Induction Control Valve Position ..................... Refer to I Intake Air Temperature ............................. Refer to I Knock .......................................... Refer to K Steering Angular Velocity ........................... 338-18-I Throttle Position .................................. Refer to T Vehicle Speed ................................... Refer to V Volume Air Flow. ................................. Refer to V WheelSpeed.. ................................ ..Referto W SHIFT LEVER <AWD> ......................................... ...22-16-l <FWD> .......................................... ...22-8-l SHIFT LOCK MECHANISM, Check ...................... 23-52-l SHOCK ABSORBER <AWD> ............................................ 34-36-l <FWD> ............................................ 34-13-l SOLENOID EGR <California-Non Turbo, Turbo> ................... 17-70-I EGR, On-vehicle Inspection ................... 13A-164,269-l Evaporative Emission Purge ....................... Refer to E Fuel Pressure ................................... Refer to F Turbocharger Waste Gate ......................... Refer to T SPARK PLUG Maintenance ....................................... 00-46-I CABLE ............................................ 16-36-11 SPEAKER .......................................... 54-187-11 SPEEDOMETER CABLE Replacement <ATT> ............................................ 23-54-l <M/T FWD> ........................................ 22-4-i SPEED SENSOR, Wheel CABS> ....................... 35-113-l SPEED SENSOR, Wheel, Output Voltage Measurement . _ _ _ 35-75-l SRS Maintenance ....................................... 00-53-I DIAGNOSIS UNIT (SDU) ............................ 528-71-I STABILIZER BAR Front Suspension ................................. 33A-12-l Rear Suspension <AWD> ........................................... 34-38-l <FWD> ........................................... 34-16-l
. . 22-15-l
. . . 22-4-l . 11-23-l 37A-13-l . . 11-23-l 54-106-11
P
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Adjustment ........................ On-vehicle Inspection ............... PARKING BRAKE .................... CABLE ............................ LEVER ............................ StrokeCheck.. .................... SWITCH, Check .................... POP-UP SWITCH .................... POSITION DETECTION SWITCH ...... POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION SY:STEM, Inspection ................. VALVE ............................. POWER STEERING Stationary Steering Effort Check ...... FLlJlD ............................. GEAR BOX ......................... HOSES.. .......................... OIL. PRESSURE SWITCH, Check ..... OIL. PUMP ......................... Pressure Test ...................... PRIESSURE SWITCH On-vehicle Inspection ............... POWER WINDOW ................... PROPELLER SHAFT ................. PROPORTIONING VALVE, Function Test PURGE CONTROL SY!STEM, Check <Non Turbo> ...................... <Turbo> .......................... VALVE <Turbo> ..................... PURGE PORT VACUUM, Check .......
............... 23-53-l
........ 13A-113,230-l ................ 36-8-l ................ 36-5-l ................ 36-5-l ................ 36-4-l ................ 36-4-l ............. 54-109-11 ............. 338-19-I
................ 17-56-l
................ 17-56-l
......... ......... ......... ......... .........
. . .37A-9-l . 37A-10-I . 37A-18-l . 37A-33-l . 37A-13-l 37A-29-l . 37A-12-l
......... 13A-121,235-l
................ 42-44-l ................. 25-3-l ................ 35-65-l
................ 17-58-l
................ 17-60-I ................ 17-64-l ................ 17-63-l
R
RADIATOR ............................... CAI? Pressure Test ....................... RADIO ................................... ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM .................... RADIO REMOTE-CONTROL ............... REAR OIL PUMP, 4WS .................... DISCHARGE FLOW VOLUME, Check ...... REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER .............. SWITCH ................................ REFRIGERANT
......... 14-5-l ......... 14-4-l ...... 54-186-11 ...... 54-156-11 ...... 54-188-11 .... ...37&11-I ....... .378-5-l ...... 54-192-11 ...... 54-203-11
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
STARTER MOTOR ................................... 16-23-11 STARTING SYSTEM ................................. 16-19-11 STEERING Angle Check ....................................... .37A-6-l ANGULAR VELOCITY SENSOR ..................... 33B-18-l GEAR BOX, Power ................................. 37A-18-l LINKAGE SEALS, Maintenance ........................ 00-52-I SHAFT ........................................... 37A-14-l STEERING WHEEL ................................. 37A-14-l Centering ......................................... .37A-7-l Free Play Check ................................... .37A-6-l Return to Center Check ............................. .37A-9-l STOP LIGHT High Mounted .................................... 54-107-11 SWITCH .......................................... 33B-19-l STRUT ............................................. .33A-7-l SUN ROOF ........................................... 42-56-l SUSPENSION Rear <AWD> ........................................... 34-26-l <FWD> ............................................ 34-7-l SWITCH Accelerator ...................................... Refer to A Air Conditioning Engine Coolant Temperature ........ Refer to A Closed Throttle Position ........................... Refer to C Column .......................................... 54-112-11 ECS ............................................. 338-18-I Electrical Load ............................... 13A-127,238-l Fog Light ......................................... 54-l 09-11 Hazard .......................................... 54-110-11 Horn ............................................. 54-118-11 Ignition ............................................ 54-6-11 Ignition-IG ........................................ Refer to I Ignition-ST ....................................... Refer to I Muffler Mode Changeover ......................... Refer to M Parking Brake, Check ................................. 36-4-l Park/Neutral Position cm> ....................... Refer to P Pop-up .......................................... 54-l 09-11 Position Detection ................................. 33B-19-l Power Steering .................................. Refer to P Rear Window Defogger ............................ 54-203-11 Stop Light ........................................ 338-19-I
<Mm AWD> ........................................ 22-17-l <M/T FWD> ......................................... 22-6-l MOUNTING .......................................... 32-5-l OIL COOLER ... ..................................... 23-62-l OIL COOLER HOSES ................................ 23-62-l OIL COOLER TUBES ................................. 23-62-l OIL SEAL cAWD> .................................... 22-16-l TRANSFER <AWD> ................................... 22-22-l TRANSMISSION FLUID .............................................. 23-47-l OIL Replacement <AWD> .... ....................................... 22-l 5-l cFWD> ............................................ 22-4-l TRIM ............................................. ..5~-ll- I Door ........................................... ,.,.42-42-l TURBOCHARGER <FRONT> .......................................... 15-20-I <REAR> ........ ................................... 15-23-l BYPASS VALVE, Check ................................ 15-8-l SUPERCHARGING PRESSURE ........................ 15-6-l WASTE GATE SOLENOID Check .............................................. 15-8-l On-vehicle Inspection ......................... 13A-169,271-l
U
UPPER ARM cAWD> ............................................ 34-29-l <FWD> .......................................... ...34-9-l
V
VACUUM TANK <AWD> ............................... 21-18-l VALVE RELAY uIBS>, Check .......................... 35-83-l VAPOR LINE ....................................... ..13F-8- I VARIABLE INDUCTION CONTROL MOTOR (DC Motor) ........................... 13A-174,276-l SYSTEM, Check ...................................... 15-5-l VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ECS ............................................. 338-l 8-l On-vehicle Inspection ................ 13A-117,119,231,233-l VENTILATION ........................................ 55-3-l SYSTEM, Positive Crankcase .......................... 17-56-l VALVE, Positive Crankcase ............................ 17-56-l VENTILATORS (Air Inlet and Air Outlet) .................. 55-52-l (Instrument Panel) ................................... 55-50-I VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR Engine and Emission Control ......................... 17-65-l On-vehicle Inspection .......................... 13A-85,212-l
T
TAPE PLAYER ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM .............................. 54-156-11 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM ............................. 54-205-11 THERMOSTAT ......................................... 14-9-l THROTTLE BODY ................................. 13A-288-l THROTTLE BODY (Throttle Valve Area), Cleaning ....... 13A-57-I THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...................... 338-19-I Adjustment ....................................... 13A-57-l On-vehicle Inspection .......................... 13A-98,221-I TIE ROD END BALL JOINT ............................ .37A-611 TIMINGBELT ......................................... 11-31-i Maintenance .................................... ...00-46-I TIRE ................................................. 31-4-l TRAILING ARM <AWD> ............................................ 34-32-l <FWD> ............................................ 34-11-l TRANSAXLE &T> ............................................. 23-64-l <M/T AWD> .................................... 22-19,23-l <M/T FWD> ......................................... 22-9-l Automatic, Maintenance .............................. 00-49-l Manual, Maintenance ................................ 00-48-I CONTROL cAm> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-55-l
W
WASHER Rear ............................................... 51-28-l Windshield ...................................... ...51-25-l WATERPROOF FILM, Door ............................. 42-42-l WATER PUMP ........................................ 14-11-l WEATHERSTRIP, Drip Line ............................. 42-63-l WHEEL ............................................... 31-4-l ALIGNMENT Front ............................................. .33A-6-l Rear cAWD> ........................................... 34-25-l <FWD> ............................................ 34-5-l BEARING Adjustment ........................................ .33A-6-l End Play Check eFWD> ....................... .27-3-l, 34-6-l WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CABS> ...................... 35-113-l
\Is
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Output Voltage Measurement ......................... 35-75-l WINDOW GLASS ..................................... 42-26-l ~4. / Door, Adjustment .................................... 42-12-l .;a. Quarter ......................................... ...42-34-l : WINDSHIELD ......................................... 42-29-l WASHER ........................................... 51-26-l WIPER ............................................. 51-25-l
RJHY506014-1294
1 1
I / >; I / I 1 I / 1 1/ * ! I , I I j I / i i i I \ / i
I j j

1992-1999 3000GT Service Volume 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1992-1999 3000GT Service Volume 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1992-1999 3000GT Service Volume 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

d

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intake and Exhaust

Engine and Emission Control

Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transaxle .............. ...........

Service Brakes Parking Brakes

AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE

MOTOR SALES OF AMERICA Inc

0 1995 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

WARNINGS REGARDING SERVICING OF SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) EQUIPPED VEHICLES

GENERAL - How to Use This Manual

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

GENERAL - How to Use This Manual EXPLANATION OF CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS I b

The broken( ----)line inc cates the same connector.

GENERAL - How to Use This Manual EXPLANATION OF MANUAL CONTENTS

Indicates (by symbols) where lubrication is necessary.

GENERAL - How to Use This Manual

STEERING - Power Steering Gear Box

POWER STEERtNG GEAR BOX

~Rnnovalstspr l.&iiassemblyandgfWboXcwnsctingbog 2. s&mid v&e OLxIlieEmr <VeNc!es wiU~ EPS>

FOG lJGl+l RELAY coNnNulTY CHECX

GENERAL - How to Use This Manual

EXPLANATION OF THE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

TzmiW w&age m-l.sv f 2.45-2 55v 0 1511 Iv-tsv

Indicates the check to be made. t I8

crt 6% _ _. smxmtampcrmrre2 5~7~ ~~ --. I whmarc.mdlt?amrroF :F 8161.

GENERAL - How to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Point

HOW TO USE TROUBLESHOOTING/INSPECTION SERVICE POINT

GENERAL - How to Use Troubleshooting/Inspection Service Point

GENERAL - How to Use Troubleshooting/inspection HOW TO USE THE INSPECTION PROCEDURES

Indicates the OK judgement conditions.

ground OI<: Approx. 5V

Check trouble symptom. _ ) Replace the ECS-ECU.

GENERAL - How to Use Troubleshooting/inspection

HOW TO COPE WITH INTERMITTENT MALFUNCTIONS

GENERAL - Vehicle Identification

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION CODE CHART PLATE

<Up to 1993 models>

A: Mitsubishi 3: Passenger Car

1234567891011 12 0020009 <From 1994 modek5 Line

Check digits* N: 1992 Year Model year P: 1993 Year

Plant Serial number

Y: Nagoya-l Plant 000001 to 999999

GENERAL - Vehicle Identification

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LIST

JA3BN74KOPY (1993 model) JA3XE74CONY (1992 model)

VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA

NOTE AWD marked with can also be sold in Federal States.

cl 994 MODELS> VEHICLES FOR FEDERAL

3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZllAMNXML2M 1 ZllAMRXML2M [DOHC-MFI] ZllAMNPML2M Zl lAMRPML2M

Mitsubishi ,300OGT <AWD> I

3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZlGAMJGFL2M [DOHC-MFI-Turbo]

VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA

3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZltAMNXML7M j ZllAMRXML7M [DOHC-MFI] ZliAMNPML7M ZllAMRPML-IM

Mitsubishi 3000GT <AWD>

3.0 dm3 (181.4 cu.in.) ZlGAMJGFL7M [DOHC-MFI-Turbo]

GENERAL - Vehicle Identification

VEHICLES FOR CALIFORNIA

V.I.N. (except sequence number) JA3AM54JOSY JA3AM84JOSY JA3AV65JOSY JA3AN74KOSY JA3AW75KOSY

Brand Mitsubishi 3000GT <FWD>